Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
C2022-072 - 3/29/2022 - Approved
DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF CATYWID"' E LIFTS"TATIO" N Rw" E PAI R40S Lo"018-201 (WILL,IAMS L, S") PROJECT NUMBER 21143 18 5 126591 ENG NEERINC 2725 Swantner Drive r Carpus Christi • Texas 78404 (361) 854-3101 Record Drawing N:urmber STL-222 OCTOBER 2 h21 UE Job No. 2617 .B7, 10 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 000100 TABLE OF CONTENTS Division/ Title Section Division 00 Preface Documents 00 00 00 Cover Sheet 00 01 00 Table of Contents 00 01 01 Seals Page 00 01 02 List of Drawings Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements 00 52 23 Agreement (Rev7-2020) 00 72 00 General Conditions(Rev 12-2020) 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions (Rev 2-2020) Division 01 General Requirements 01 11 00 Summary of Work(Rev 10-2018) 01 23 10 Alternates and Allocation (Revs-2020) 01 29 01 Measurement and Basis for Payment(Rev 5-2020) 0133 01 Submittal Register(Rev 10-2018) 0135 00 Special Procedures(Rev 10-2018) 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls(Rev8-2019) 01 57 00 Temporary Controls(Rev8-2019) Part S Standard Specifications 022020 Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 022022 Trench Safety for Excavations 022100 Select Material 025620 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement 026202 Hydrostatic Testing of Pressure Systems 026206 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings 026210 Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe (AWWA C900 and C905 Pressure Pipe for Municipal Water Mains and Wastewater FM) 026402 Waterlines 026409 Tapping Sleeves and Tapping Valves 026411 Gate Valves for Waterlines Table of Contents 000100- 1 Citywide Lift Station Repairs 2018—2019 (Williams L.S.) Project No. 21143 Rev 5/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 Division/ Title Section 026602 Wastewater Force Main 027604 Disposal of Waste from Wastewater Cleaning Operations 030020 Portland Cement Concrete 032020 Reinforcing Steel 038000 Concrete Structures Part T Technical Specifications Technical Special Provisions 01011 Equipment Documentation Requirements 1E24 Pre-Selected Equipment(with the following specs) 11B5[6]-Dry Pit Submersible Pumps (wastewater) 2A2[1] Deviations Occasioned By Existing Obstructions 2A3[i] Clearing, Grubbing and Stripping 2B1[1] Site Grading 2B3[1] Pipe Trench Excavation and Backfill 2H2[4] Soil-Cement Base Couse (Sande, Crushed Concrete or Limestone and Portland Cement) 2H16[i] Concrete Sidewalk and Concrete Driveways 2H17[i] Removing and Replacing Pavements, Curb and Gutter, Driveways and Sidewalk 211[4] Chain-Link Fence(Heavy Duty-vinyl Coated) 5A1[i] Structural Steel and Other Metals 5E2[1] Stairs and Walkways 5E3[3] Handrails 5E5[2] Floor Grating (Galvanized steel) 6A1[i] Framing and Sheathing 6B4[1] Dry Wall 7C1[2] Blanket Insulation 7F5[3] Modified Bitumen Roofing 8F1[i] Door Hardware 9J1[5] Coating of Concrete Walls 9K1[i] Painting Yard Piping 11B5[6] I Dry Pit Submersible Pumps (Wastewater) 11G1[3] Biological Odor Control System Table of Contents 000100-2 Citywide Lift Station Repairs 2018-2019 (Williams L.S.) Project No. 21143 Rev 5/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 Division/ Title Section 11G3[4] Lift Station Identification Signs 13C1[i] General Requirements 15C2[5] Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings 15C14[1] Pipe Hangers and Supports 15D3[i] Plug Valves 15D4[i] Check Valves (Swing Check) 15D11[3] Surge Relief Valves 15D30[i] Miscellaneous Gauges, Couplings and Valves PART E ELECTRICAL 23 00 00 Basic HVAC Requirements 23 05 29 Hangers and Supports 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing 23 07 00 HVAC Insulation 23 1113 Diesel Fueling System 23 31 00 Ductwork 23 33 00 Air Duct Accessories 23 37 13 Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles 23 62 00 DX Air-Cooled Condensing Unit 23 73 00 Indoor Air Handling Units 26 01 26 Electrical Testing 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical 2605 13.00 Medium Voltage Cables 2605 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 2605 19.01 Wire Connections and Devices 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical System 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical System 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 43 Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 73 Electrical Power System Studies 26 12 19 Pad-Mounted Liquid-Filled Medium-Voltage Transformers 26 13 26.13 Medium Voltage Switchgear Table of Contents 000100-3 Citywide Lift Station Repairs 2018—2019 (Williams L.S.) Project No. 21143 Rev 5/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 Division/ Title Section 26 18 39 Medium Voltage Drive Eaton 26 22 00 Low Voltage Transformers 26 24 16 Panel boards 26 29 23 Variable Frequency Drives 26 32 13.13 Diesel Engine Driven Generator Set 26 64 19 Motor Control Centers 40 39 80 Pump Control Panel 40 69 80 Level Transmitter 40 94 30 SCADA Panel 40 94 43 Programmable Logic Controllers Appendix All Testing Reports as Applicable 1 Traffic Control Details END OF SECTION Table of Contents 000100-4 Citywide Lift Station Repairs 2018—2019 (Williams L.S.) Project No. 21143 Rev 5/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 00 01 02 LIST OF DRAWINGS Sheet No. DRAWING TITLE 1 Title Sheet and Plan Index 2 Location Map 3 General Notes,Testing Schedule, and Quantities 4 Existing Site Layout and Control of Flow 5 Proposed Emergency Pumping Connection 6 Proposed Site Improvements 7 Existing Mechanical and Demolition 8 Proposed Mechanical Improvements 9 Proposed Mechanical Improvements Sections 10 Proposed Odor Control Site Plan and Layout 11 Proposed Odor Control Blower Sections and Details 12 Proposed Odor Control Biofilter Layout and Details 13 Upper Level Crane Demolition 14 Lower Level Crane Demolition 15 Structural Notes 16 Upper Level Hoist System 17 Hoist System Elevations 18 Hoist System Details and Concrete Pump Base 19 Lower Level Hoist System 20 ECR Building Modifications 21 Generator Foundation Plan and Section 22 Fuel Tank Foundation Plan and Section 23 Temporary Traffic Control Plan (1) 24 Temporary Traffic Control Plan (2) 25 Concrete Pump Base 26 Proposed Roof Details 26A Building Improvements List of Drawings Citywide Lift Station Repairs 2018—2019 (Williams L. S.) Project No. 21143 00 01 02 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 26B Building Roof Plan 26C Existing Roof Details 27 Electrical Legend and Notes 28 Electrical Demolition Upper Level 29 Electrical Demolition Lower Level 30 Electrical Demolition Photos 31 Electrical Demolition Elevations 32 Electrical Site Plan 33 Lighting and Mechanical Power Plan 34 Enlarged Electrical Plan 35 Grounding Plan 36 Lower Level Electrical Plan 37 Electrical Elevations 38 Electrical Section 39 One Line Diagram Demolition 40 One Line Diagram New 41 Schematic Diagrams Sheet 1 of 5 42 Schematic Diagrams Sheet 2 of 5 43 Schematic Diagrams Sheet 3 of 5 44 Schematic Diagrams Sheet 4 of 5 45 Schematic Diagrams Sheet 5 of 5 46 Switchgear PLC Layout 47 System Block Diagram 48 SCADA Details 49 Electrical Details Sheet 1 of 2 50 Electrical Details Sheet 2 of 2 51 Panel and 1/0 Schedules 52 Conduit Schedule 53 Mechanical Plan List of Drawings Citywide Lift Station Repairs 2018—2019 (Williams L. S.) Project No. 21143 00 01 02 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 54 Mechanical Details List of Drawings Citywide Lift Station Repairs 2018—2019 (Williams L. S.) Project No. 21143 00 01 02 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 006116 PAYMENT BOND BOND NO. 2322948 Contractor as Principal Surety North American Specialty Name: Associated Construction Partners Ltd Name: Insurance Company Mailing address(principal place of business): Mailing address(principal place of business): 21S W.Bandera Rd. 1200 Main Street#800 Ste.114-461 Kansas City MO 64105 Boerne,TX 78006 Physical address(principal place of business): Owner 1200 Main Street#800 Name: City of Corpus Christi,Texas Kansas City MO 64105 Mailing address(principal place of business): Contracts and Procurement Surety is a corporation organized and existing 1201 Leopard Street Corpus Christi,Texas 78401 under the laws of the state of: New Hampshire By submitting this Bond,Surety affirms its authority to do business in the State of Texas and Contract its license to execute bonds in the State of Texas. Project name and number: Telephone(main number): Citywide Lift Station Repairs(Williams Lift 816.235.3700 Station Telephone(for notice of claim): Prolect 21143 800.338.0753 Local Agent for Surety Name: Acrisure, LLC dba IBTX-Andrew Addisc n Award Date of the Contract: Address: 32335 US Highway N, Suite 1201 Contract Price: S11,61S 000 Bulverde,TX 78163 Telephone: 210.697.2230 Band Email Address: breeh ib-broom Date of Bond: March 29,2022 The address of the surety company to which any (Date of Bond cannot be earlier than Award Date notice of claim should be sent may be obtained of Contract) from the Texas Dept.of Insurance by calling the following toll-free number.-1-800-252-3439 Payment Bond Form 00 61 16-1 Citywide Lift Station Repairs(Williams Lift Station) Project No.21143 6/11/2021 000uSignEnvelope ID:c7F00000 E7o3-49oo+Ao8o'o4029c332o38 Surety and Contractor,intending to be legally bound and obligated to Owner do each cause thisPayment Bond to be duly executed on its behalf by its outhorized officer, agent or representative. The Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs,administrators, executors,successors and assigns,jointly and severally to this bond The condition of this obligation is such that if the Contractor as Principal pays all claimants providing labor or materials to him or to a Subcontractor in the prosecution of the Work required by the Contract then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise the obligation is to,remain in fullforce and effect. Provisions of the bond shall be pursuant to the terms and provisions of Chapter 2253 and Chapter 2269 of the Texas Government Code as amended and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Chapter to the some extent as if it were copied at length herein. Venue shall lie exclusively in Nueces County, Texasfor a legal ac n. Contractor as yPri,,,c�iipall Surety Signature: Signature: Betty J. R Name: J Name: Title: Re, V Title: Attorney-in-Fact EmailAddress: Email Address- breeh@ib-tx.com (Attach Power of Attorney and place surety seal below) END OF SECTION Payment Bond Form 006116-2 C�itywideLift Station Repairs(Williams Lift Station) Project No.21143 6/11/202I DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 006113 PERFORMANCE BOND BOND No.2322948 Contractor as Principal Surety North American Specialty Name: Associated Construction Partners Ltd. Name: Insurance Company Mailing address(principal place of business): Mailing address(principal place of business): 215 W.Bandera Rd. 1200 Main Street#800 Ste.114-461 Kansas City MO 64105 Boerne,TX 78006 Physical address(principal place of business): Owner 1200 Main Street#800 Name: City of Corpus Christi,Texas Kansas City MO 64105 Mailing address(principal place of business): Contracts and Procurement Surety is a corporation organized and existing 1201 Leopard Street under the laws of the state of: New Hampshire Corpus Christi,Texas 78401 By submitting this Bond,Surety affirms its authority to do business in the State of Texas and Contract its license to execute bonds in the State of Texas. Project name and number: Telephone(main number): Citywide Lift Station Repairs(Williams Lift 816.235.3700 Station Telephone(for notice of claim): Prosect 21143 800.338.0753 Local Agent for Surety Name: Acrisure,LLC dba IBTX-Andrew Addison Award Date of the Contract: Address: 32335 US Highway N,Suite 1201, Bulverde,TX 78163 Contract Price: $11.615.000 Bond Telephone: 210.697.2230 Email Address: breeh@ib-tx.com Date of Bond: March 29,2022 The address of the surety company to which any notice of claim should be sent may be obtained (©ate of Band cannot be earlier than Award Date from the Texas Dept.of Insurance by calling the of the Contract) following toll-free number.1-800-252-3439 Performance Bond 00 6113-1 Citywide Lift Station Repairs(Williams Lift Station) Project No.21143 6/11/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 Surety and Contractor,intending to be legally bound and obligated to Owner do each cause this Performance,Bond to be duly executed on its behalf by its authorized officer, agent or representative. The Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors,successors and assigns,jointly and severally to this bond. The condition of this obligation is such that if the Contractor as Principal faithfully performs the Work required by the Contract then this obligation shall be null and void;otherwise the obligation is to remain in full force and effect. Provisions of the bond shall be, pursuant to the terms and provisions of Chapter 2253 and Chapter 2269 of the Texas Government Code as amended and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Chapter to the some extent as if it were copied at length herein. Venue shall lie exclusively in Nueces County, Texas for any legal action. Contractor as Principal Surety Signature: Signature: Name: Is Name: Betty J. R Title: C C Sa d'ey%t Title: Aftorney-in-Fact Email Address: ra Email Address: breeh@ib-tx.com lAttoch Power of Attorney and place surety seat below+✓) END OF SECTION Performance Bond 006113-2 Citywide Lift Station Repairs(Williams Lift Station) Project No. 21143 6/11/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 SWISS RE CORPORATE SOLUTIONS NORTH AMERICAN SPECIALTY INSURANCE COMPANY WASHINGTON INTERNATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY GENERAL POWER OF ATTORNEY KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS,THAT North American Specialty Insurance Company,a corporation duly organized and existing under laws of the State of New Hampshire,and having its principal office in the City of Kansas City,Missouri,and Washington International Insurance Company, a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of New Hampshire and having its principal office in the City of Kansas City,Missouri,each does hereby make,constitute and appoint GARY W. WI-IEATL,EY, BETTY J. 12i Frf1, CLARK D. FRESHER,BRYAN K. MOORE,ANDREW ADDISON, ELIZABETH ORTIZ, ANA TOMES, PATRICK COYLE,PATRICIA ANN LYTTLE AND MICHAEL D. I-TENDRICKSON JOINTLYOR SEVERALLY Its true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-Fact,to make, execute,seal and deliver,for and on its behalf and as its act and deed, bonds or other writings obligatory in the nature of a bond on behalf of each of said Companies,as surety,on contracts of suretyship as are or may be required or permitted by law, regulation,contract or otherwise,provided that no bond or undertaking or contract or suretyship executed under this authority shall exceed the arnciunt of., FIFTY MILLION($50,0100,000.00)DOLLARS -------------------------------- ---------------------I------------—-—---------——------------------------------------------------------- This Power of Attorney is granted and is signed by facsimile under and by the authority of the following Resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors of both North A merican Specialty Insurance Company and Washington International Insurance Comparry at meetings duly called and held on the 91h of May,2012: `R ESOLV ED,that any two of the Presidents, any Managing Director, any Senior V ice President any V ice President, arty A ssistant V ice President, the Secretary or any Assistant Secretary be, and each or any of them hereby is authorized to execute a Power of Attorney qual'ifyi ng the attorney named in the given Power of Attorney to,execute on behalf of the Company bonds, undertakings and all contracts of surety,and that each or any of them hereby is authorized to attest to the execution of any such Power of Attorney and to attach therein the sea] of the Company; and it is FU RTHE R R ESOLV E D,that the signature of such officers and the seal of the Company may be affixed to any such Power of Attorney or to any certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any such Power of Attorney or certificate bears ng such facsimile signatures or facsimile seal shall be binding upon the Company when so affixed and in the future with regard to any bond, undertaking or contract of surety to which it is attached, ON Po 4 Y" B y Sleven 11,Ander%on,Senior Vice T residcmt rrr Wasialreglarn Inrvrnativaral Insurance Company L &Senior Vice President of Norili American Specially Insurance Company qJ 1973 -mmese'.. By------------------------- --------------------------------- Erik JhjissvicN,Senhir Nice Presicluit of Washington Internarionall Insurance C ornpany Seniur V 1CO Presiders of North Anichcan Speciafty Insurance Company IN WITNESS WHEREOF, North American Specialty Insurance Company and Washington International Insurance Company have caused thei r official seals to be hereunto affixed,and these presents to be signed by their authorized officers this 30th-day of-----NOVEMBER . 12021 North American Specialty Insurance Company Washington International Insurance Company State of Illinois County of Cook ss: On this 30th day of_NOVI MBER , 2021, before ra Notary Public personally appeared Steven P.Anderson ,Senior Vice President of Washington International Insurance Company and SeniorV ice Presmclent of North American Specialty Insurance Company and ExikJanssens, Senior Vice President of Washington International Insurance Company and Senior Vice President of North American Specialty Insurance Comparry, personally known to me�who being by me duly sworn,acknowledged that they signed the above Power of Attorney as officers of and acknowledged said i ristrument to be the voluntary act and deed of their respective companies. VASW A,PATEL, OMOAL SEA4 rsnxt _e' Yasrnin A. Patel,Notary 1, J effrey(J�oldber, the,duly elected Senior Vice President and Assistant Secretary of North A merican Specialty Insurance Company and Washington International Insurance Company,do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of a Power of Attorney given by said North American Specialty Insurance Company and Washington International Insurance Corriparry,which is still in full force and effect. IN WITNESS W H E REOF,I have set rrry hand and affixed the seals of the Companies thi4tday of 20-Z2 j effney Gaidberg,SeniorV ice President&Assistant secretary of DocuSign Envelope ID: C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 IMPORTANT NOTICE AVISO IMPORTANTE In order to,obtain information or make a complaint: Para obtener informacion o para someter un queja: You may contact Jeffrey Goldberg, Vice President- Puede comunicarse con.jeffrey Goldberg, Vice Claims, at 1-800-338-0753. President -Claims, a] 1-800-338-0753. You may call Washington International Insurance Usted puede 11amr a] nunicro de telefono gratis de Company and/or North American Specialty Washington International Insurance Company Insurance Company's toll-free number for and/or North American Specialty Insurance information or to make as complaint at: Company's para iriformacion o para,someter una queja a]: 1-800-338-0753 1-800-338-0753 You may also write to Washington International Usted tarnbien puede escribir a Washington Insurance Company and/or North American International Insurance Company and/or North Specialty Insurance Company at the following American Specialty Insurance Company al: address: 1450 American Lane, Suite 1.100 1450 American Lane, Suite 1100 Schaumburg, IL 60173 Schaumburg, 11, 60173 You may contact the Texas Department of Insurance Puede escribir al Departmento de Seguros de Texas to obtain information on companies, coverages, rights para obtener information acerca de cornpanias, or complaints, at: coberturas, dcrechos o quqjas a]: 1-800-252-3439 1-8,00-252-3439 You may write the Texas Department of Insurance: Puedc escribir al Departmento de Se eros de Texas: P.O. Box 149104 P.O. Box 149104 Austin, TX 78714-9104 Austin, TX 78714-9104 Fax: (512) 475-1771 Fax: (512) 475-1771 Web: 11 UtL�r`rvNjw.tdi.state.tx.us Web: lit 11K./www v.tdi.s1qLe.tN. �s E-mai.l:("onswityier-Pi-oLL-i-t Lon L&t(lLjs ggtyys E-niail:CoxisiiiiierPt-otectio [I u S q_ PREMIUM OR CLAIM DISPUTES: DISPUTAS SOBRE PRIMAS 01 RECLAMOS: Should you have as dispute concerning your prernium,or Si tiene una disputa concerniente a su prima o a un about a claim you should first contact the Washington reclamo, dobe comunicarse con el Washington International Insurance Company and/or North International Insurance Company and/or N r orth American Specialty Insurance Company. If the American Specialty Insurance Company primero, Si dispute is not resolved, you may contact the Texas 110 Se I-CRIelVC ]a disputa, puede entonces,comunicarse Department of Insurance, con el Departmento dc Scguros, dc Texas. ATTACH THIS NOTICE TO YOUR POLICY: UNA ESTE AVISO A SU POLIZA: Thn's notice is for information only and does not become Este aviso es solo para proposito de infrornacion y no se a part or condition of the attached document, converte en parte o condiclon del documento adjunto. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 DATE(MM/DD/YYYY) '`'Ill CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE Acct#: 1179840 3/24/2022 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER,AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED,the policy(ies)must have ADDITIONAL INSURED provisions or be endorsed.If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED,subject to the terms and conditions of the policy,certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER CONTACT 888-828-8365 Lockton Companies, LLC PHONE FAX 3657 Briarpark Dr., Suite 700 A/c No Ext): 'C' /C No)7 E-MAIL Houston,TX 77042 ADDRESS: INSURER(S)AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC# INSURERA: Indemnity Insurance Co.of North America 43575 INSURED INSURER B ASSOCIATED CONSTRUCTION PARTNERS,LTD 29250 OLD FREDERICKSBURG RD STE 101 INSURER C FAIR OAKS RANCH,TX 78015-5012 INSURER D INSURER E INSURER F: COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER: REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES.LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR TYPE OF INSURANCE ADDL SUBR POLICY EFF POLICY EXP LIMITS LTR INSD WVD POLICY NUMBER MM/DD MM/DD COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $ CLAIMS-MADE 1:1PREMISES OCCUR DAMAGE TOEa RENTED occurrence $ MED EXP(Any one person) $ PERSONAL&ADV INJURY $ GEN'LAGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: GENERAL AGGREGATE $ POLICY❑ PRO- ❑ JECT LOC PRODUCTS-COMP/OP AGG $ OTHER: $ AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT $ Ea accident ANY AUTO BODILY INJURY(Per person) $ ALL OWNED SCHEDULED BODILY INJURY(Per accident) $ AUTOS AUTOS NON-OWNED PROPERTY DAMAGE $ HIRED AUTOS AUTOS Per accident UMBRELLA LAB OCCUR EACH OCCURRENCE $ EXCESS LIAB CLAIMS-MADE AGGREGATE $ DED RETENTION$ $ WORKERS COMPENSATION X PER OTH- AND EMPLOYERS'LIABILITY STATUTE ER ANY Y/N 1,000,000 A OFFICEP/MEMBEER EXCLUDED?ECUTIVE F--1N/A X 070042903 10/1/2021 10/1/2022 E.L.EACH ACCIDENT $ (Mandatory in NH) E.L.DISEASE-EA EMPLOYEE $ 1,000,000 If yes,describe under DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below E.L.DISEASE-POLICY LIMIT $ 1,000,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONS/VEHICLES (ACORD 101,Additional Remarks Schedule,may be attached if more space is required) Notice of Material Change Endorsement Included RE:Project:Citywide Lift Station Repairs(Williams Lift Station),Project 21143,RFB 3897 WAIVER OF SUBROGATION IN FAVOR OF City of Corpus Christi—Engineering Services WHEN REQUIRED BY WRITTEN CONTRACT. CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI—ENGINEERING SERVICES 1201 LEOPARD STREET CORPUS CHRISTI,TX 78401 ©1988-2014 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. ACORD 25(2016/03) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 Workers' Compensation and Employers' Liability Policy Named Insured Endorsement Number Insperity Inc.ASSOCIATED CONSTRUCTION PARTNERS, LTD Policy Number Symbol: RWC Number:C70042903 Policy Period Effective Date of Endorsement 10/1/2021 TO 10/1/2022 10/1/2021 Issued By(Name of Insurance Company) Indemnity Insurance Co.of North America Insert the policy number.The remainder of the information is to be completed only when this endorsement is issued subsequent to the preparation of the policy. TEXAS WAIVER OF OUR RIGHT TO RECOVER FROM OTHERS ENDORSEMENT This endorsement applies only to the insurance provided by the policy because Texas is shown in item 3.A. of the Information Page. We have the right to recover our payments from anyone liable for an injury covered by this policy. We will not enforce our right against the person or organization named in the Schedule, but this waiver applies only with respect to bodily injury arising out of the operations described in the Schedule, where you are required by a written contract to obtain this waiver from us. This endorsement shall not operate directly or indirectly to benefit anyone not named in the Schedule. The premium for this endorsement is shown in the Schedule. Schedule 1. (X) Specific Waiver Name of person or organization: City of Corpus Christi—Engineering Services 1201 Leopard Street Corpus Christi, TX 78401 ( ) Blanket Waiver Any person or organization for whom the Named Insured has agreed by written contract to furnish this waiver. 2. Operations: RE: Project: Citywide Lift Station Repairs (Williams Lift Station), Project 21143, RFB 3897 3. Premium: The premium charge for this endorsement shall be INCLUDED percent of the premium developed on payroll in connection with work performed for the above person(s) or organization(s) arising out of the operations described. 4. Advance Premium: INCLUDED .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... Authorized Representative .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. WC 42 03 048(06/14) C Copyright 2014 National Council on Compensation Insurance,Inc. All Rights Reserved. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 DATE(MM/DD/YYYY) ACCOR" CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE 3/23/2022 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER,AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must have ADDITIONAL INSURED provisions or be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER CONTACT NAME: Jayme York IBTX Risk Services PHONE FAX 32335 US Hwy 281 N. A/C No Ext): 12149897100 A/C,No):210-696-8414 Suite 1201 ADDRESS: SerVlce@Ib-tX.com Bulverde TX 78163 INSURER(S)AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC# INSURERA:Transportation Insurance Company 20494 INSURED INSURER B:The Continental Insurance Company Of New Jersey 42625 Associated Construction Partners, Ltd. 215 W. Bandera Rd. Ste. 114-461 INSURERC: Boerne TX 78006 INSURERD: INSURER E: INSURER F: COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER:58811126 REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES.LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR TYPE OF INSURANCE ADDL SUBR POLICY EFF POLICY EXP LIMITS LTR INSD WVD POLICY NUMBER MM/DD MM/DD A X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY 6020651005 10/4/2021 10/4/2022 EACH OCCURRENCE $1,000,000 CLAIMS-MADE OCCUR DAMAGE TO RENTED PREMISES Ea occurrence $100,000 MED EXP(Any one person) $15,000 X XCU PERSONAL&ADV INJURY $1,000,000 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: GENERAL AGGREGATE $2,000,000 � PRO- POLICY 1:1 LOC PRODUCTS-COMP/OP AGG $2,000,000 OTHER: $ B AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY 6020650985 10/4/2021 10/4/2022 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT $1,000,000 Ea accident X ANY AUTO BODILY INJURY(Per person) $ OWNED X SCHEDULED BODILY INJURY(Per accident) $ AUTOS ONLY AUTOS X HIREDX NON-OWNED PROPERTY DAMAGE $ AUTOS ONLY AUTOS ONLY Per accident B X UMBRELLA LIAB X OCCUR 6020650999 10/4/2021 10/4/2022 EACH OCCURRENCE $10,000,000 EXCESS LAB CLAIMS-MADE AGGREGATE $10,000,000 DED X RETENTION$1 n nnn $ WORKERS COMPENSATION PEROTH- AND EMPLOYERS'LIABILITY Y/N STATUTE ER ANYPROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVEF—] E.L.EACH ACCIDENT $ OFFICE R/M EMBER EXCLUDED? N/A (Mandatory in NH) E.L.DISEASE-EA EMPLOYEE $ If yes,describe under DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below E.L.DISEASE-POLICY LIMIT $ A GL-Ltd Pollution Liab Worksites 6020651005 10/4/2021 10/4/2022 Per Occurrence 1,000,000 General Aggregate 2,000,000 Deductible $2,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONS/VEHICLES (ACORD 101,Additional Remarks Schedule,maybe attached if more space is required) The General Liability and Auto policies include blanket additional insured endorsements(CNA750791016, CA20481013)as required in a written contract with the Named Insured.The General Liability&Auto policies include a blanket waiver of subrogation endorsement(CNA747050115, CA04441013)as required in a written contract with the Named Insured. Primary Non-Contributory per attached(CNA750791016).Auto Liability includes Broadened Pollution-Transportation Endorsement(G-140378-B 05-08).Additional Coverage Pollution Endorsement(CNA74844xx 4-15). Cancellation provisions-see attached(CA747021-15, CNA7231502-13). Umbrella is follow form of the General Liability,Auto and Work Compensation policies subject to policy terms and conditions. No exclusion for boom and overload coverage. Project:Citywide Lift Station Repairs(Williams Lift Station), Project 21143, RFB 3897 CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. City of Corpus Christi-Engineering Services 1201 Leopold Street AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE Corpus Christi TX 78401 ©1988-2015 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. ACORD 25(2016103) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Blanket Additional Insured - Owners, Lessees or Contractors - with Products-Completed Operations Coverage Endorsement This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART It is understood and agreed as follows: I. WHO IS AN INSURED is amended to include as an Insured any person or organization whom you are required by written contract to add as an additional insured on this coverage part, but only with respect to liability for bodily injury, property damage or personal and advertising injury caused in whole or in part by your acts or omissions, or the acts or omissions of those acting on your behalf: A. in the performance of your ongoing operations subject to such written contract; or B. in the performance of your work subject to such written contract, but only with respect to bodily injury or property damage included in the products-completed operations hazard, and only if: 1. the written contract requires you to provide the additional insured such coverage; and 2. this coverage part provides such coverage. II. But if the written contract requires: A. additional insured coverage under the 11-85 edition, 10-93 edition, or 10-01 edition of CG2010, or under the 10- 01 edition of CG2037;or B. additional insured coverage with "arising out of" language; or C. additional insured coverage to the greatest extent permissible by law; then paragraph I.above is deleted in its entirety and replaced by the following: WHO IS AN INSURED is amended to include as an Insured any person or organization whom you are required by written contract to add as an additional insured on this coverage part, but only with respect to liability for bodily injury, property damage or personal and advertising injury arising out of your work that is subject to such written contract. III. Subject always to the terms and conditions of this policy, including the limits of insurance, the Insurer will not provide N 0 such additional insured with: 0 A. coverage broader than required by the written contract;or 0 B. a higher limit of insurance than required by the written contract. N IV. The insurance granted by this endorsement to the additional insured does not apply to bodily injury, property damage, or personal and advertising injury arising out of: A. the rendering of, or the failure to render, any professional architectural, engineering, or surveying services, including: 1. the preparing, approving, or failing to prepare or approve maps, shop drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, field orders, change orders or drawings and specifications; and 2. supervisory, inspection, architectural or engineering activities;or B. any premises or work for which the additional insured is specifically listed as an additional insured on another endorsement attached to this coverage part. V. Under COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CONDITIONS,the Condition entitled Other Insurance is amended to add the following,which supersedes any provision to the contrary in this Condition or elsewhere in this coverage part: CNA75079XX(10-16) Policy No: 6020651005 Page 1 of 2 Endorsement No: Effective Date: 10/04/2021 Insured Name: ASSOCIATED CONSTRUCTION PARTNERS, LTD. Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Blanket Additional Insured - Owners, Lessees or Contractors - with Products-Completed Operations Coverage Endorsement Primary and Noncontributory Insurance With respect to other insurance available to the additional insured under which the additional insured is a named insured, this insurance is primary to and will not seek contribution from such other insurance, provided that a written contract requires the insurance provided by this policy to be: 1. primary and non-contributing with other insurance available to the additional insured; or 2. primary and to not seek contribution from any other insurance available to the additional insured. But except as specified above, this insurance will be excess of all other insurance available to the additional insured. VI. Solely with respect to the insurance granted by this endorsement, the section entitled COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CONDITIONS is amended as follows: The Condition entitled Duties In The Event of Occurrence, Offense,Claim or Suit is amended with the addition of the following: Any additional insured pursuant to this endorsement will as soon as practicable: 1. give the Insurer written notice of any claim, or any occurrence or offense which may result in a claim; 2. send the Insurer copies of all legal papers received, and otherwise cooperate with the Insurer in the investigation, defense, or settlement of the claim; and 3. make available any other insurance, and tender the defense and indemnity of any claim to any other insurer or self-insurer, whose policy or program applies to a loss that the Insurer covers under this coverage part. However, if the written contract requires this insurance to be primary and non-contributory, this paragraph 3.does not apply to insurance on which the additional insured is a named insured. The Insurer has no duty to defend or indemnify an additional insured under this endorsement until the Insurer receives written notice of a claim from the additional insured. VII. Solely with respect to the insurance granted by this endorsement, the section entitled DEFINITIONS is amended to add the following definition: Written contract means a written contract or written agreement that requires you to make a person or organization an additional insured on this coverage part, provided the contract or agreement: A. is currently in effect or becomes effective during the term of this policy; and B. was executed prior to: 1. the bodily injury or property damage; or 2. the offense that caused the personal and advertising injury; for which the additional insured seeks coverage. Any coverage granted by this endorsement shall apply solely to the extent permissible by law. All other terms and conditions of the Policy remain unchanged. This endorsement, which forms a part of and is for attachment to the Policy issued by the designated Insurers, takes effect on the effective date of said Policy at the hour stated in said Policy, unless another effective date is shown below, and expires concurrently with said Policy. CNA75079XX(10-16) Policy No: 6020651005 Page 2 of 2 Endorsement No: Effective Date: 10/04/2021 Insured Name: ASSOCIATED CONSTRUCTION PARTNERS, LTD. Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. NnmArl Inti irArl- Accnrinbnrl ('nnctri irtinn PnrtnArc I.td. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 POIICy NUMDer: ouzoo-I W) CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Contractors' General Liability Extension Endorsement It is understood and agreed that this endorsement amends the COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART as follows. If any other endorsement attached to this policy amends any provision also amended by this endorsement, then that other endorsement controls with respect to such provision, and the changes made by this endorsement with respect to such provision do not apply. TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. Additional Insureds 2. Additional Insured - Primary And Non-Contributory To Additional Insured's Insurance 3. Bodily Injury—Expanded Definition 4. Broad Knowledge of Occurrence/Notice of Occurrence 5. Broad Named Insured 6. Broadened Liability Coverage For Damage To Your Product And Your Work 7. Contractual Liability- Railroads 8. Electronic Data Liability 9. Estates, Legal Representatives and Spouses 10. Expected Or Intended Injury—Exception for Reasonable Force 11. General Aggregate Limits of Insurance—Per Project 12. In Rem Actions 13. Incidental Health Care Malpractice Coverage 14. Joint Ventures/Partnership/Limited Liability Companies 15. Legal Liability — Damage To Premises / Alienated Premises / Property In The Named Insured's Care, Custody or Control 16. Liquor Liability 17. Medical Payments 18. Non-owned Aircraft Coverage 19. Non-owned Watercraft 0 0 20. Personal And Advertising Injury—Discrimination or Humiliation 0 21. Personal And Advertising Injury-Contractual Liability 22. Property Damage- Elevators 23. Supplementary Payments 24. Unintentional Failure To Disclose Hazards 25. Waiver of Subrogation—Blanket 26. Wrap-Up Extension: OCIP CCIP,or Consolidated (Wrap-Up) Insurance Programs CNA74705XX (1-15) Page 1 of 17 Continental Casualty Company Effective Date: 10/04/2021 Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Contractors' General Liability Extension Endorsement 1. ADDITIONAL INSUREDS a. WHO IS AN INSURED is amended to include as an Insured any person or organization described in paragraphs A. through H. below whom a Named Insured is required to add as an additional insured on this Coverage Part under a written contract or written agreement, provided such contract or agreement: (1) is currently in effect or becomes effective during the term of this Coverage Part; and (2) was executed prior to: (a) the bodily injury or property damage; or (b) the offense that caused the personal and advertising injury, for which such additional insured seeks coverage. b. However, subject always to the terms and conditions of this policy, including the limits of insurance, the Insurer will not provide such additional insured with: (1) a higher limit of insurance than required by such contract or agreement; or (2) coverage broader than required by such contract or agreement, and in no event broader than that described by the applicable paragraph A.through H.below. Any coverage granted by this endorsement shall apply only to the extent permissible by law. A. Controlling Interest Any person or organization with a controlling interest in a Named Insured, but only with respect to such person or organization's liability for bodily injury, property damage or personal and advertising injury arising out of: 1. such person or organization's financial control of a Named Insured; or 2. premises such person or organization owns, maintains or controls while a Named Insured leases or occupies such premises; provided that the coverage granted by this paragraph does not apply to structural alterations, new construction or demolition operations performed by, on behalf of, or for such additional insured. B. Co-owner of Insured Premises A co-owner of a premises co-owned by a Named Insured and covered under this insurance but only with respect to such co-owner's liability for bodily injury, property damage or personal and advertising injury as co-owner of such premises. C. Lessor of Equipment Any person or organization from whom a Named Insured leases equipment, but only with respect to liability for bodily injury, property damage or personal and advertising injury caused, in whole or in part, by the Named Insured's maintenance, operation or use of such equipment, provided that the occurrence giving rise to such bodily injury, property damage or the offense giving rise to such personal and advertising injury takes place prior to the termination of such lease. D. Lessor of Land Any person or organization from whom a Named Insured leases land but only with respect to liability for bodily injury, property damage or personal and advertising injury arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of such land, provided that the occurrence giving rise to such bodily injury, property damage or the offense giving rise to such personal and advertising injury takes place prior to the termination of such lease. The CNA74705XX (1-15) Page 2 of 17 Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Contractors' General Liability Extension Endorsement coverage granted by this paragraph does not apply to structural alterations, new construction or demolition operations performed by, on behalf of, or for such additional insured. E. Lessor of Premises An owner or lessor of premises leased to the Named Insured, or such owner or lessor's real estate manager, but only with respect to liability for bodily injury, property damage or personal and advertising injury arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of such part of the premises leased to the Named Insured, and provided that the occurrence giving rise to such bodily injury or property damage, or the offense giving rise to such personal and advertising injury, takes place prior to the termination of such lease. The coverage granted by this paragraph does not apply to structural alterations, new construction or demolition operations performed by, on behalf of, or for such additional insured. F. Mortgagee,Assignee or Receiver A mortgagee, assignee or receiver of premises but only with respect to such mortgagee, assignee or receiver's liability for bodily injury, property damage or personal and advertising injury arising out of the Named Insured's ownership, maintenance, or use of a premises by a Named Insured. The coverage granted by this paragraph does not apply to structural alterations, new construction or demolition operations performed by, on behalf of, or for such additional insured. G. State or Governmental Agency or Subdivision or Political Subdivisions—Permits A state or governmental agency or subdivision or political subdivision that has issued a permit or authorization but only with respect to such state or governmental agency or subdivision or political subdivision's liability for bodily injury, property damage or personal and advertising injury arising out of: 1. the following hazards in connection with premises a Named Insured owns, rents, or controls and to which this insurance applies: a. the existence, maintenance, repair, construction, erection, or removal of advertising signs, awnings, canopies, cellar entrances, coal holes, driveways, manholes, marquees, hoistaway openings, sidewalk vaults, street banners, or decorations and similar exposures; or b. the construction, erection, or removal of elevators; or 0 c. the ownership, maintenance or use of any elevators covered by this insurance; or n N 2. the permitted or authorized operations performed by a Named Insured or on a Named Insured's behalf. 0 0 The coverage granted by this paragraph does not apply to: 0 N O a. Bodily injury, property damage or personal and advertising injury arising out of operations performed for the state or governmental agency or subdivision or political subdivision; or b. Bodily injury or property damage included within the products-completed operations hazard. With respect to this provision's requirement that additional insured status must be requested under a written contract or agreement, the Insurer will treat as a written contract any governmental permit that requires the Named Insured to add the governmental entity as an additional insured. H. Trade Show Event Lessor 1. With respect to a Named Insured's participation in a trade show event as an exhibitor, presenter or displayer, any person or organization whom the Named Insured is required to include as an additional insured, but only with respect to such person or organization's liability for bodily injury, property damage or personal and advertising injury caused by: CNA74705XX (1-15) Page 3 of 17 Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Contractors' General Liability Extension Endorsement a. the Named Insured's acts or omissions; or b. the acts or omissions of those acting on the Named Insured's behalf, in the performance of the Named Insured's ongoing operations at the trade show event premises during the trade show event. 2. The coverage granted by this paragraph does not apply to bodily injury or property damage included within the products-completed operations hazard. 2. ADDITIONAL INSURED- PRIMARY AND NON-CONTRIBUTORY TO ADDITIONAL INSURED'S INSURANCE The Other Insurance Condition in the COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CONDITIONS Section is amended to add the following paragraph: If the Named Insured has agreed in writing in a contract or agreement that this insurance is primary and non- contributory relative to an additional insured's own insurance, then this insurance is primary, and the Insurer will not seek contribution from that other insurance. For the purpose of this Provision 2., the additional insured's own insurance means insurance on which the additional insured is a named insured. Otherwise, and notwithstanding anything to the contrary elsewhere in this Condition, the insurance provided to such person or organization is excess of any other insurance available to such person or organization. 3. BODILY INJURY—EXPANDED DEFINITION Under DEFINITIONS, the definition of bodily injury is deleted and replaced by the following: Bodily injury means physical injury, sickness or disease sustained by a person, including death, humiliation, shock, mental anguish or mental injury sustained by that person at any time which results as a consequence of the physical injury, sickness or disease. 4. BROAD KNOWLEDGE OF OCCURRENCE/ NOTICE OF OCCURRENCE Under CONDITIONS, the condition entitled Duties in The Event of Occurrence, Offense, Claim or Suit is amended to add the following provisions: A. BROAD KNOWLEDGE OF OCCURRENCE The Named Insured must give the Insurer or the Insurer's authorized representative notice of an occurrence, offense or claim only when the occurrence, offense or claim is known to a natural person Named Insured, to a partner, executive officer, manager or member of a Named Insured, or an employee designated by any of the above to give such notice. B. NOTICE OF OCCURRENCE The Named Insured's rights under this Coverage Part will not be prejudiced if the Named Insured fails to give the Insurer notice of an occurrence, offense or claim and that failure is solely due to the Named Insured's reasonable belief that the bodily injury or property damage is not covered under this Coverage Part. However, the Named Insured shall give written notice of such occurrence, offense or claim to the Insurer as soon as the Named Insured is aware that this insurance may apply to such occurrence, offense or claim. 5. BROAD NAMED INSURED WHO IS AN INSURED is amended to delete its Paragraph 3. in its entirety and replace it with the following: 3. Pursuant to the limitations described in Paragraph 4. below, any organization in which a Named Insured has management control: a. on the effective date of this Coverage Part; or CNA74705XX (1-15) Paqe 4 of 17 Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Contractors' General Liability Extension Endorsement b. by reason of a Named Insured creating or acquiring the organization during the policy period, qualifies as a Named Insured, provided that there is no other similar liability insurance, whether primary, contributory, excess, contingent or otherwise, which provides coverage to such organization, or which would have provided coverage but for the exhaustion of its limit, and without regard to whether its coverage is broader or narrower than that provided by this insurance. But this BROAD NAMED INSURED provision does not apply to: (a) any partnership, limited liability company or joint venture; or (b) any organization for which coverage is excluded by another endorsement attached to this Coverage Part. For the purpose of this provision, management control means: A. owning interests representing more than 50% of the voting, appointment or designation power for the selection of a majority of the Board of Directors of a corporation; or B. having the right, pursuant to a written trust agreement, to protect, control the use of, encumber or transfer or sell property held by a trust. 4. With respect to organizations which qualify as Named Insureds by virtue of Paragraph 3. above, this insurance does not apply to: a. bodily injury or property damage that first occurred prior to the date of management control, or that first occurs after management control ceases; nor b. personal or advertising injury caused by an offense that first occurred prior to the date of management control or that first occurs after management control ceases. 5. The insurance provided by this Coverage Part applies to Named Insureds when trading under their own names or under such other trading names or doing-business-as names (dba) as any Named Insured should choose to employ. 6. BROADENED LIABILITY COVERAGE FOR DAMAGE TO YOUR PRODUCT AND YOUR WORK A. Under COVERAGES, Coverage A — Bodily Injury and Property Damage Liability, the paragraph entitled Exclusions is amended to delete exclusions k.and I.and replace them with the following: This insurance does not apply to: k. Damage to Your Product 0 0 Property damage to your product arising out of it, or any part of it except when caused by or resulting from: 0 (1) fire; (2) smoke; (3) collapse; or (4) explosion. I. Damage to Your Work Property damage to your work arising out of it, or any part of it and included in the products-completed operations hazard. This exclusion does not apply: (1) If the damaged work, or the work out of which the damage arises, was performed on the Named Insured's behalf by a subcontractor; or CNA74705XX (1-15) Page 5 of 17 Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Contractors' General Liability Extension Endorsement (2) If the cause of loss to the damaged work arises as a result of: (a) fire; (b) smoke; (c) collapse; or (d) explosion. B. The following paragraph is added to LIMITS OF INSURANCE: Subject to 5. above, $100,000 is the most the Insurer will pay under Coverage A for the sum of damages arising out of any one occurrence because of property damage to your product and your work that is caused by fire, smoke, collapse or explosion and is included within the product-completed operations hazard. This sublimit does not apply to property damage to your work if the damaged work, or the work out of which the damage arises,was performed on the Named Insured's behalf by a subcontractor. C. This Broadened Liability Coverage For Damage To Your Product And Your Work Provision does not apply if an endorsement of the same name is attached to this policy. 7. CONTRACTUAL LIABILITY—RAILROADS With respect to operations performed within 50 feet of railroad property, the definition of insured contract is replaced by the following: Insured Contract means: a. A contract for a lease of premises. However, that portion of the contract for a lease of premises that indemnifies any person or organization for damage by fire to premises while rented to a Named Insured or temporarily occupied by a Named Insured with permission of the owner is not an insured contract; b. A sidetrack agreement; c. Any easement or license agreement; d. An obligation, as required by ordinance, to indemnify a municipality, except in connection with work for a municipality; e. An elevator maintenance agreement; f. That part of any other contract or agreement pertaining to the Named Insured's business (including an indemnification of a municipality in connection with work performed for a municipality) under which the Named Insured assumes the tort liability of another party to pay for bodily injury or property damage to a third person or organization. Tort liability means a liability that would be imposed by law in the absence of any contract or agreement. Paragraph f.does not include that part of any contract or agreement: (1) That indemnifies an architect, engineer or surveyor for injury or damage arising out of: (a) Preparing, approving or failing to prepare or approve maps, shop drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, field orders, change orders or drawings and specifications; or (b) Giving directions or instructions, or failing to give them, if that is the primary cause of the injury or damage; (2) Under which the Insured, if an architect, engineer or surveyor, assumes liability for an injury or damage arising out of the insured's rendering or failure to render professional services, including those listed in (1) above and supervisory, inspection, architectural or engineering activities. 8. ELECTRONIC DATA LIABILITY CNA74705XX (1-15) Page 6 of 17 Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Contractors' General Liability Extension Endorsement A. Under COVERAGES, Coverage A — Bodily Injury and Property Damage Liability, the paragraph entitled Exclusions is amended to delete exclusion p. Electronic Data and replace it with the following: This insurance does not apply to: p. Access Or Disclosure Of Confidential Or Personal Information And Data-related Liability Damages arising out of: (1) any access to or disclosure of any person's or organization's confidential or personal information, including patents, trade secrets, processing methods, customer lists, financial information, credit card information, health information or any other type of nonpublic information; or (2) the loss of, loss of use of, damage to, corruption of, inability to access, or inability to manipulate electronic data that does not result from physical injury to tangible property. However, unless Paragraph (1) above applies, this exclusion does not apply to damages because of bodily injury. This exclusion applies even if damages are claimed for notification costs, credit monitoring expenses, forensic expenses, public relation expenses or any other loss, cost or expense incurred by the Named Insured or others arising out of that which is described in Paragraph (1) or(2) above. B. The following paragraph is added to LIMITS OF INSURANCE: Subject to 5. above, $100,000 is the most the Insurer will pay under Coverage A for all damages arising out of any one occurrence because of property damage that results from physical injury to tangible property and arises out of electronic data. C. The following definition is added to DEFINITIONS: Electronic data means information, facts or programs stored as or on, created or used on, or transmitted to or from computer software (including systems and applications software), hard or floppy disks, CD-ROMS, tapes, drives, cells,data processing devices or any other media which are used with electronically controlled equipment. D. For the purpose of the coverage provided by this ELECTRONIC DATA LIABILITY Provision, the definition of property damage in DEFINITIONS is replaced by the following: N Property damage means: n a. Physical injury to tangible property, including all resulting loss of use of that property. All such loss of use shall be deemed to occur at the time of the physical injury that caused it; 0 0 b. Loss of use of tangible property that is not physically injured. All such loss of use shall be deemed to occur at the time of the occurrence that caused it; or c. Loss of, loss of use of, damage to, corruption of, inability to access, or inability to properly manipulate electronic data, resulting from physical injury to tangible property. All such loss of electronic data shall be deemed to occur at the time of the occurrence that caused it. For the purposes of this insurance, electronic data is not tangible property. E. If Electronic Data Liability is provided at a higher limit by another endorsement attached to this policy, then the _ $100,000 limit provided by this ELECTRONIC DATA LIABILITY Provision is part of, and not in addition to, that higher limit. 9. ESTATES, LEGAL REPRESENTATIVES,AND SPOUSES The estates, heirs, legal representatives and spouses of any natural person Insured shall also be insured under this policy; provided, however, coverage is afforded to such estates, heirs, legal representatives, and spouses only for CNA74705XX (1-15) Page 7 of 17 Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Contractors' General Liability Extension Endorsement claims arising solely out of their capacity or status as such and, in the case of a spouse, where such claim seeks damages from marital community property, jointly held property or property transferred from such natural person Insured to such spouse. No coverage is provided for any act, error or omission of an estate, heir, legal representative, or spouse outside the scope of such person's capacity or status as such, provided however that the spouse of a natural person Named Insured and the spouses of members or partners of joint venture or partnership Named Insureds are Insureds with respect to such spouses' acts, errors or omissions in the conduct of the Named Insured's business. 10. EXPECTED OR INTENDED INJURY—EXCEPTION FOR REASONABLE FORCE Under COVERAGES, Coverage A — Bodily Injury and Property Damage Liability, the paragraph entitled Exclusions is amended to delete the exclusion entitled Expected or Intended Injury and replace it with the following: This insurance does not apply to: Expected or Intended Injury Bodily injury or property damage expected or intended from the standpoint of the Insured. This exclusion does not apply to bodily injury or property damage resulting from the use of reasonable force to protect persons or property. 11. GENERAL AGGREGATE LIMITS OF INSURANCE- PER PROJECT A. For each construction project away from premises the Named Insured owns or rents, a separate Construction Project General Aggregate Limit, equal to the amount of the General Aggregate Limit shown in the Declarations, is the most the Insurer will pay for the sum of: 1. All damages under Coverage A, except damages because of bodily injury or property damage included in the products-completed operations hazard; and 2. All medical expenses under Coverage C, that arise from occurrences or accidents which can be attributed solely to ongoing operations at that construction project. Such payments shall not reduce the General Aggregate Limit shown in the Declarations, nor the Construction Project General Aggregate Limit of any other construction project. B. All: 1. Damages under Coverage B, regardless of the number of locations or construction projects involved; 2. Damages under Coverage A, caused by occurrences which cannot be attributed solely to ongoing operations at a single construction project, except damages because of bodily injury or property damage included in the products-completed operations hazard; and 3. Medical expenses under Coverage C caused by accidents which cannot be attributed solely to ongoing operations at a single construction project, will reduce the General Aggregate Limit shown in the Declarations. C. The limits shown in the Declarations for Each Occurrence, for Damage To Premises Rented To You and for Medical Expense continue to apply, but will be subject to either the Construction Project General Aggregate Limit or the General Aggregate Limit shown in the Declarations, depending on whether the occurrence can be attributed solely to ongoing operations at a particular construction project. D. When coverage for liability arising out of the products-completed operations hazard is provided, any payments for damages because of bodily injury or property damage included in the products-completed operations hazard will reduce the Products-Completed Operations Aggregate Limit shown in the Declarations, regardless of the number of projects involved. CNA74705XX (1-15) Paqe 8 of 17 Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Contractors' General Liability Extension Endorsement E. If a single construction project away from premises owned by or rented to the Insured has been abandoned and then restarted, or if the authorized contracting parties deviate from plans, blueprints, designs, specifications or timetables, the project will still be deemed to be the same construction project. F. The provisions of LIMITS OF INSURANCE not otherwise modified by this endorsement shall continue to apply as stipulated. 12. IN REM ACTIONS A quasi in rem action against any vessel owned or operated by or for the Named Insured, or chartered by or for the Named Insured, will be treated in the same manner as though the action were in personam against the Named Insured. 13. INCIDENTAL HEALTH CARE MALPRACTICE COVERAGE Solely with respect to bodily injury that arises out of a health care incident: A. Under COVERAGES, Coverage A — Bodily Injury and Property Damage Liability, the paragraph entitled Insuring Agreement is amended to replace Paragraphs 1.b.(1) and 1.b.(2)with the following: b. This insurance applies to bodily injury provided that the professional health care services are incidental to the Named Insured's primary business purpose, and only if: (1) such bodily injury is caused by an occurrence that takes place in the coverage territory. (2) the bodily injury first occurs during the policy period. All bodily injury arising from an occurrence will be deemed to have occurred at the time of the first act, error, or omission that is part of the occurrence; and B. Under COVERAGES, Coverage A — Bodily Injury and Property Damage Liability, the paragraph entitled Exclusions is amended to: I. add the following to the Employers Liability exclusion: This exclusion applies only if the bodily injury arising from a health care incident is covered by other liability insurance available to the Insured (or which would have been available but for exhaustion of its limits). ii. delete the exclusion entitled Contractual Liability and replace it with the following: This insurance does not apply to: N O Contractual Liability 0 0 0 the Insured's actual or alleged liability under any oral or written contract or agreement, including but not limited to express warranties or guarantees. iii. add the following additional exclusions: This insurance does not apply to: Discrimination any actual or alleged discrimination, humiliation or harassment, including but not limited to claims based on an individual's race, creed, color, age, gender, national origin, religion, disability, marital status or sexual orientation. Dishonesty or Crime Any actual or alleged dishonest, criminal or malicious act, error or omission. Medicare/Medicaid Fraud CNA74705XX (1-15) Page 9 of 17 Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Contractors' General Liability Extension Endorsement any actual or alleged violation of law with respect to Medicare, Medicaid, Tricare or any similar federal, state or local governmental program. Services Excluded by Endorsement Any health care incident for which coverage is excluded by endorsement. C. DEFINITIONS is amended to: I. add the following definitions: Health care incident means an act, error or omission by the Named Insured's employees or volunteer workers in the rendering of: a. professional health care services on behalf of the Named Insured or b. Good Samaritan services rendered in an emergency and for which no payment is demanded or received. Professional health care services means any health care services or the related furnishing of food, beverages, medical supplies or appliances by the following providers in their capacity as such but solely to the extent they are duly licensed as required: a. Physician; b. Nurse; c. Nurse practitioner; d. Emergency medical technician; e. Paramedic; f. Dentist; g. Physical therapist; h. Psychologist; I. Speech therapist; j. Other allied health professional; or Professional health care services does not include any services rendered in connection with human clinical trials or product testing. ii. delete the definition of occurrence and replace it with the following: Occurrence means a health care incident. All acts, errors or omissions that are logically connected by any common fact, circumstance, situation, transaction, event, advice or decision will be considered to constitute a single occurrence; iii. amend the definition of Insured to: a. add the following: the Named Insured's employees are Insureds with respect to: (1) bodily injury to a co-employee while in the course of the co-employee's employment by the Named Insured or while performing duties related to the conduct of the Named Insured's business; and CNA74705XX (1-15) Paae 10 of 17 Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Contractors' General Liability Extension Endorsement (2) bodily injury to a volunteer worker while performing duties related to the conduct of the Named Insured's business; when such bodily injury arises out of a health care incident. the Named Insured's volunteer workers are Insureds with respect to: (1) bodily injury to a co-volunteer worker while performing duties related to the conduct of the Named Insured's business; and (2) bodily injury to an employee while in the course of the employee's employment by the Named Insured or while performing duties related to the conduct of the Named Insured's business; when such bodily injury arises out of a health care incident. b. delete Subparagraphs (a), (b), (c)and(d) of Paragraph 2.a.(1) of WHO IS AN INSURED. D. The Other Insurance condition is amended to delete Paragraph b.(1) in its entirety and replace it with the following: Other Insurance b. Excess Insurance (1) To the extent this insurance applies, it is excess over any other insurance, self insurance or risk transfer instrument, whether primary, excess, contingent or on any other basis, except for insurance purchased specifically by the Named Insured to be excess of this coverage. 14. JOINT VENTURES/PARTNERSHIP/LIMITED LIABILITY COMPANIES WHO IS AN INSURED is amended to delete its last paragraph and replace it with the following: No person or organization is an Insured with respect to the conduct of any current or past partnership,joint venture or limited liability company that is not shown as a Named Insured in the Declarations, except that if the Named Insured was a joint venturer, partner, or member of a limited liability company and such joint venture, partnership or limited liability company terminated prior to or during the policy period, such Named Insured is an Insured with respect to its interest in such joint venture, partnership or limited liability company but only to the extent that: a. any offense giving rise to personal and advertising injury occurred prior to such termination date, and the personal and advertising injury arising out of such offense first occurred after such termination date; b. the bodily injury or property damage first occurred after such termination date; and c. there is no other valid and collectible insurance purchased specifically to insure the partnership, joint venture or N limited liability company; and If the joint venture, partnership or limited liability company is or was insured under a consolidated (wrap-up) insurance program, then such insurance will always be considered valid and collectible for the purpose of paragraph c. above. But this provision will not serve to exclude bodily injury, property damage or personal and advertising injury that would otherwise be covered under the Contractors General Liability Extension Endorsement provision entitled WRAP-UP EXTENSION: OCIP, CCIP, OR CONSOLIDATED (WRAP-UP) INSURANCE PROGRAMS. Please see that provision for the definition of consolidated (wrap-up) insurance program. 15. LEGAL LIABILITY — DAMAGE TO PREMISES / ALIENATED PREMISES / PROPERTY IN THE NAMED INSURED'S CARE, CUSTODY OR CONTROL A. Under COVERAGES, Coverage A — Bodily Injury and Property Damage Liability, the paragraph entitled Exclusions is amended to delete exclusion j. Damage to Property in its entirety and replace it with the following: This insurance does not apply to: CNA74705XX (1-15) Page 11 of 17 Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Contractors' General Liability Extension Endorsement j. Damage to Property Property damage to: (1) Property the Named Insured owns, rents, or occupies, including any costs or expenses incurred by you, or any other person, organization or entity, for repair, replacement, enhancement, restoration or maintenance of such property for any reason, including prevention of injury to a person or damage to another's property; (2) Premises the Named Insured sells, gives away or abandons, if the property damage arises out of any part of those premises; (3) Property loaned to the Named Insured; (4) Personal property in the care,custody or control of the Insured; (5) That particular part of real property on which the Named Insured or any contractors or subcontractors working directly or indirectly on the Named Insured's behalf are performing operations, if the property damage arises out of those operations; or (6) That particular part of any property that must be restored, repaired or replaced because your work was incorrectly performed on it. Paragraphs (1), (3) and (4) of this exclusion do not apply to property damage (other than damage by fire) to premises rented to the Named Insured or temporarily occupied by the Named Insured with the permission of the owner, nor to the contents of premises rented to the Named Insured for a period of 7 or fewer consecutive days. A separate limit of insurance applies to Damage To Premises Rented To You as described in LIMITS OF INSURANCE. Paragraph (2) of this exclusion does not apply if the premises are your work. Paragraphs (3), (4), (5) and (6) of this exclusion do not apply to liability assumed under a sidetrack agreement. Paragraph (6) of this exclusion does not apply to property damage included in the products-completed operations hazard. Paragraphs (3) and(4) of this exclusion do not apply to property damage to: i. tools, or equipment the Named Insured borrows from others, nor ii. other personal property of others in the Named Insured's care,custody or control while being used in the Named Insured's operations away from any Named Insured's premises. However, the coverage granted by this exception to Paragraphs (3)and (4)does not apply to: a. property at a job site awaiting or during such property's installation, fabrication, or erection; b. property that is mobile equipment leased by an Insured; c. property that is an auto, aircraft or watercraft; d. property in transit; or e. any portion of property damage for which the Insured has available other valid and collectible insurance, or would have such insurance but for exhaustion of its limits, or but for application of one of its exclusions. A separate limit of insurance and deductible apply to such property of others. See LIMITS OF INSURANCE as amended below. CNA74705XX (1-15) Page 12 of 17 Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Contractors' General Liability Extension Endorsement B. Under COVERAGES, Coverage A — Bodily Injury and Property Damage Liability, the paragraph entitled Exclusions is amended to delete its last paragraph and replace it with the following: Exclusions c. through n. do not apply to damage by fire to premises while rented to a Named Insured or temporarily occupied by a Named Insured with permission of the owner, nor to damage to the contents of premises rented to a Named Insured for a period of 7 or fewer consecutive days. A separate limit of insurance applies to this coverage as described in LIMITS OF INSURANCE. C. The following paragraph is added to LIMITS OF INSURANCE: Subject to 5. above, $25,000 is the most the Insurer will pay under Coverage A for damages arising out of any one occurrence because of the sum of all property damage to borrowed tools or equipment, and to other personal property of others in the Named Insured's care, custody or control, while being used in the Named Insured's operations away from any Named Insured's premises. The Insurer's obligation to pay such property damage does not apply until the amount of such property damage exceeds $1,000. The Insurer has the right but not the duty to pay any portion of this $1,000 in order to effect settlement. If the Insurer exercises that right, the Named Insured will promptly reimburse the Insurer for any such amount. D. Paragraph 6., Damage To Premises Rented To You Limit, of LIMITS OF INSURANCE is deleted and replaced by the following: 6. Subject to Paragraph 5. above, (the Each Occurrence Limit), the Damage To Premises Rented To You Limit is the most the Insurer will pay under Coverage A for damages because of property damage to any one premises while rented to the Named Insured or temporarily occupied by the Named Insured with the permission of the owner, including contents of such premises rented to the Named Insured for a period of 7 or fewer consecutive days. The Damage To Premises Rented To You Limit is the greater of: a. $500,000; or b. The Damage To Premises Rented To You Limit shown in the Declarations. E. Paragraph 4.b.(1)(a)(ii)of the Other Insurance Condition is deleted and replaced by the following: (ii) That is property insurance for premises rented to the Named Insured, for premises temporarily occupied by the Named Insured with the permission of the owner; or for personal property of others in the Named Insured's care, custody or control; n 16. LIQUOR LIABILITY rn N Under COVERAGES, Coverage A — Bodily Injury and Property Damage Liability, the paragraph entitled 0 0 Exclusions is amended to delete the exclusion entitled Liquor Liability. 0 0 0 This LIQUOR LIABILITY provision does not apply to any person or organization who otherwise qualifies as an additional insured on this Coverage Part. 17. MEDICAL PAYMENTS A. LIMITS OF INSURANCE is amended to delete Paragraph 7. (the Medical Expense Limit) and replace it with the following: 7. Subject to Paragraph 5. above (the Each Occurrence Limit), the Medical Expense Limit is the most the Insurer will pay under Coverage C — Medical Payments for all medical expenses because of bodily injury sustained by any one person. The Medical Expense Limit is the greater of: (1) $15,000 unless a different amount is shown here: $N,NNN,NNN,NNN; or (2) the amount shown in the Declarations for Medical Expense Limit. CNA74705XX (1-15) Page 13 of 17 Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Contractors' General Liability Extension Endorsement B. Under COVERAGES, the Insuring Agreement of Coverage C — Medical Payments is amended to replace Paragraph 1.a.(3)(b)with the following: (b) The expenses are incurred and reported to the Insurer within three years of the date of the accident; and 18. NON-OWNED AIRCRAFT Under COVERAGES, Coverage A — Bodily Injury and Property Damage Liability, the paragraph entitled Exclusions is amended as follows: The exclusion entitled Aircraft,Auto or Watercraft is amended to add the following: This exclusion does not apply to an aircraft not owned by any Named Insured, provided that: 1. the pilot in command holds a currently effective certificate issued by the duly constituted authority of the United States of America or Canada, designating that person as a commercial or airline transport pilot; 2. the aircraft is rented with a trained, paid crew to the Named Insured; and 3. the aircraft is not being used to carry persons or property for a charge. 19. NON-OWNED WATERCRAFT Under COVERAGES, Coverage A — Bodily Injury and Property Damage Liability, the paragraph entitled Exclusions is amended to delete subparagraph (2) of the exclusion entitled Aircraft, Auto or Watercraft, and replace it with the following. This exclusion does not apply to: (2) a watercraft that is not owned by any Named Insured, provided the watercraft is: (a) less than 75 feet long;and (b) not being used to carry persons or property for a charge. 20. PERSONAL AND ADVERTISING INJURY—DISCRIMINATION OR HUMILIATION A. Under DEFINITIONS, the definition of personal and advertising injury is amended to add the following tort: Discrimination or humiliation that results in injury to the feelings or reputation of a natural person. B. Under COVERAGES, Coverage B — Personal and Advertising Injury Liability, the paragraph entitled Exclusions is amended to: 1. delete the Exclusion entitled Knowing Violation Of Rights Of Another and replace it with the following: This insurance does not apply to: Knowing Violation of Rights of Another Personal and advertising injury caused by or at the direction of the Insured with the knowledge that the act would violate the rights of another and would inflict personal and advertising injury. This exclusion shall not apply to discrimination or humiliation that results in injury to the feelings or reputation of a natural person, but only if such discrimination or humiliation is not done intentionally by or at the direction of: (a) the Named Insured; or (b) any executive officer, director, stockholder, partner, member or manager (if the Named Insured is a limited liability company) of the Named Insured. 2. add the following exclusions: CNA74705XX (1-15) Page 14 of 17 Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Contractors' General Liability Extension Endorsement This insurance does not apply to: Employment Related Discrimination Discrimination or humiliation directly or indirectly related to the employment, prospective employment, past employment or termination of employment of any person by any Insured. Premises Related Discrimination discrimination or humiliation arising out of the sale, rental, lease or sub-lease or prospective sale, rental, lease or sub-lease of any room,dwelling or premises by or at the direction of any Insured. Notwithstanding the above, there is no coverage for fines or penalties levied or imposed by a governmental entity because of discrimination. The coverage provided by this PERSONAL AND ADVERTISING INJURY —DISCRIMINATION OR HUMILIATION Provision does not apply to any person or organization whose status as an Insured derives solely from Provision 1.ADDITIONAL INSURED of this endorsement; or attachment of an additional insured endorsement to this Coverage Part. This PERSONAL AND ADVERTISING INJURY —DISCRIMINATION OR HUMILIATION Provision does not apply to any person or organization who otherwise qualifies as an additional insured on this Coverage Part. 21. PERSONAL AND ADVERTISING INJURY-CONTRACTUAL LIABILITY A. Under COVERAGES, Coverage B —Personal and Advertising Injury Liability, the paragraph entitled Exclusions is amended to delete the exclusion entitled Contractual Liability. B. Solely for the purpose of the coverage provided by this PERSONAL AND ADVERTISING INJURY - CONTRACTUAL LIABILITY provision, the following changes are made to the section entitled SUPPLEMENTARY PAYMENTS—COVERAGES A AND B: 1. Paragraph 2.d. is replaced by the following: d. The allegations in the suit and the information the Insurer knows about the offense alleged in such suit are such that no conflict appears to exist between the interests of the Insured and the interests of the indemnitee; n 2. The first unnumbered paragraph beneath Paragraph 2.f.(2)(b) is deleted and replaced by the following: N O 0 So long as the above conditions are met, attorneys fees incurred by the Insurer in the defense of that indemnitee, necessary litigation expenses incurred by the Insurer, and necessary litigation expenses incurred by the indemnitee at the Insurer's request will be paid as defense costs. Such payments will not be deemed to be damages for personal and advertising injury and will not reduce the limits of insurance. C. This PERSONAL AND ADVERTISING INJURY - CONTRACTUAL LIABILITY Provision does not apply if Coverage B —Personal and Advertising Injury Liability is excluded by another endorsement attached to this Coverage Part. This PERSONAL AND ADVERTISING INJURY - CONTRACTUAL LIABILITY Provision does not apply to any person or organization who otherwise qualifies as an additional insured on this Coverage Part. 22. PROPERTY DAMAGE—ELEVATORS A. Under COVERAGES, Coverage A — Bodily Injury and Property Damage Liability, the paragraph entitled Exclusions is amended such that the Damage to Your Product Exclusion and subparagraphs (3), (4) and (6) of the Damage to Property Exclusion do not apply to property damage that results from the use of elevators. CNA74705XX (1-15) Page 15 of 17 Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Contractors' General Liability Extension Endorsement B. Solely for the purpose of the coverage provided by this PROPERTY DAMAGE — ELEVATORS Provision, the Other Insurance conditions is amended to add the following paragraph: This insurance is excess over any of the other insurance, whether primary, excess, contingent or on any other basis that is Property insurance covering property of others damaged from the use of elevators. 23. SUPPLEMENTARY PAYMENTS The section entitled SUPPLEMENTARY PAYMENTS—COVERAGES A AND B is amended as follows: A. Paragraph 1.b. is amended to delete the $250 limit shown for the cost of bail bonds and replace it with a $5,000. limit;and B. Paragraph 1.d. is amended to delete the limit of $250 shown for daily loss of earnings and replace it with a $1,000. limit. 24. UNINTENTIONAL FAILURE TO DISCLOSE HAZARDS If the Named Insured unintentionally fails to disclose all existing hazards at the inception date of the Named Insured's Coverage Part, the Insurer will not deny coverage under this Coverage Part because of such failure. 25. WAIVER OF SUBROGATION- BLANKET Under CONDITIONS, the condition entitled Transfer Of Rights Of Recovery Against Others To Us is amended to add the following: The Insurer waives any right of recovery the Insurer may have against any person or organization because of payments the Insurer makes for injury or damage arising out of: 1. the Named Insured's ongoing operations; or 2. your work included in the products-completed operations hazard. However, this waiver applies only when the Named Insured has agreed in writing to waive such rights of recovery in a written contract or written agreement, and only if such contract or agreement: 1. is in effect or becomes effective during the term of this Coverage Part; and 2. was executed prior to the bodily injury, property damage or personal and advertising injury giving rise to the claim. 26. WRAP-UP EXTENSION: OCIP, CCIP, OR CONSOLIDATED (WRAP-UP) INSURANCE PROGRAMS Note: The following provision does not apply to any public construction project in the state of Oklahoma, nor to any construction project in the state of Alaska, that is not permitted to be insured under a consolidated (wrap-up) insurance program by applicable state statute or regulation. If the endorsement EXCLUSION — CONSTRUCTION WRAP-UP is attached to this policy, or another exclusionary endorsement pertaining to Owner Controlled Insurance Programs (O.C.I.P.) or Contractor Controlled Insurance Programs (C.C.I.P.) is attached, then the following changes apply: A. The following wording is added to the above-referenced endorsement: With respect to a consolidated (wrap-up) insurance program project in which the Named Insured is or was involved, this exclusion does not apply to those sums the Named Insured become legally obligated to pay as damages because of: 1. Bodily injury, property damage, or personal or advertising injury that occurs during the Named Insured's ongoing operations at the project, or during such operations of anyone acting on the Named Insured's behalf; nor CNA74705XX (1-15) Page 16 of 17 Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Contractors' General Liability Extension Endorsement 2. Bodily injury or property damage included within the products-completed operations hazard that arises out of those portions of the project that are not residential structures. B. Condition 4.Other Insurance is amended to add the following subparagraph 4.b.(1)(c): This insurance is excess over: (c) Any of the other insurance whether primary, excess, contingent or any other basis that is insurance available to the Named Insured as a result of the Named Insured being a participant in a consolidated (wrap-up) insurance program, but only as respects the Named Insured's involvement in that consolidated (wrap-up) insurance program. C. DEFINITIONS is amended to add the following definitions: Consolidated (wrap-up) insurance program means a construction, erection or demolition project for which the prime contractor/project manager or owner of the construction project has secured general liability insurance covering some or all of the contractors or subcontractors involved in the project, such as an Owner Controlled Insurance Program (O.C.I.P.) or Contractor Controlled Insurance Program (C.C.I.P.). Residential structure means any structure where 30% or more of the square foot area is used or is intended to be used for human residency, including but not limited to: 1. single or multifamily housing, apartments, condominiums, townhouses, co-operatives or planned unit developments; and 2. the common areas and structures appurtenant to the structures in paragraph 1. (including pools, hot tubs, detached garages, guest houses or any similar structures). However, when there is no individual ownership of units, residential structure does not include military housing, college/university housing or dormitories, long term care facilities, hotels or motels. Residential structure also does not include hospitals or prisons. This WRAP-UP EXTENSION: OCIP, CCIP, OR CONSOLIDATED (WRAP-UP) INSURANCE PROGRAMS Provision does not apply to any person or organization who otherwise qualifies as an additional insured on this Coverage Part. All other terms and conditions of the Policy remain unchanged. n This endorsement,which forms a part of and is for attachment to the Policy issued by the designated Insurers, takes effect N on the effective date of said Policy at the hour stated in said Policy, unless another effective date is shown below, and expires concurrently with said Policy. N O O O CNA74705XX (1-15) Page 17 of 17 Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 POLICY NUMBER INSURED NAME AND ADDRESS C 6020650985 ASSOCIATED CONSTRUCTION PARTNERS, LTD. 215 W BANDERA RD STE 114-461 BOERNE, TX 78006-2820 POLICY CHANGES CA 2048 DESIGNATED INSURED BLANKET This Change Endorsement changes the Policy. Please read it carefully. This Change Endorsement is a part of your Policy and takes effect on the effective date of your Policy, unless another effective date is shown. THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. DESIGNATED INSURED BLANKET ANY PERSON OR ORGANIZATION THAT THE NAMED INSURED IS OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE INSURANCE WHERE REQUIRED BY A WRITTEN CONTRACT OR AGREEMENT IS AN INSURED, BUT ONLY WITH RESPECT TO LEGAL RESPONSIBILITY FOR ACTS OR OMISSIONS OF A PERSON OR ORGANIZATION FOR WHOM LIABILITY COVERAGE IS AFFORDED UNDER THIS POLICY. C V Secretary Chairman of the Board G-56015-B (ED. 11/91) DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 Named Insured: Associated Construction Partners, Ltd. Policy Number: 6020650985 COMMERCIAL AUTO CA 04 44 10 13 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. WAIVER OF TRANSFER OF RIGHTS OF RECOVERY AGAINST OTHERS TO US (WAIVER OF SUBROGATION) This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: AUTO DEALERS COVERAGE FORM BUSINESS AUTO COVERAGE FORM MOTOR CARRIER COVERAGE FORM With respect to coverage provided by this endorsement, the provisions of the Coverage Form apply unless modified by the endorsement. This endorsement changes the policy effective on the inception date of the policy unless another date is indicated below. Named Insured: ASSOCIATED CONSTRUCTION PARTNERS, LTD. Endorsement Effective Date: SCHEDULE Name(s) Of Person(s) Or Organization(s): ANY PERSON OR ORGANIZATION FOR WHOM OR WHICH YOU ARE REQUIRED BY WRITTEN CONTRACT OR AGREEMENT TO OBTAIN THIS WAIVER FROM US. YOU MUST AGREE TO THAT REQUIREMENT PRIOR TO LOSS. Information required to complete this Schedule, if not shown above,will be shown in the Declarations. 0 The Transfer Of Rights Of Recovery Against Others To Us condition does not apply to the person(s) or organization(s) shown in the Schedule, but only to the extent that subrogation is waived prior to the "accident" or the "loss" under a contract with that person or " organization. CA 04 44 10 13 Copyright, Insurance Services Office, Inc., 2011 Page 1 of 1 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Changes - Notice of Cancellation or Material Restriction Endorsement This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART EMPLOYEE BENEFITS LIABILITY COVERAGE PART LIQUOR LIABILITY COVERAGE PART OWNERS AND CONTRACTORS PROTECTIVE LIABILITY COVERAGE PART PRODUCTS/COMPLETED OPERATIONS LIABILITY COVERAGE PART RAILROAD PROTECTIVE LIABILITY COVERAGE PART STOP GAP LIABILITY COVERAGE PART TECHNOLOGY ERRORS AND OMISSIONS LIABILITY COVERAGE PART SPECIAL PROTECTIVE AND HIGHWAY LIABILITY POLICY—NEW YORK DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION SCHEDULE Number of days notice(other than for nonpayment of premium): 030 Number of days notice for nonpayment of premium: N/A Name of person or organization to whom notice will be sent: PER SCHEDULE ON FILE. CANCELLATION NOTICE WILL NOT BE SENT WHEN THE REASON IS FOR NONPAYMENT OF PREMIUM. Address: PER SCHEDULE ON FILE If no entry appears above, the number of days notice for nonpayment of premium will be 10 days. N It is understood and agreed that in the event of cancellation or any material restrictions in coverage during the policy period, the Insurer also agrees to mail prior written notice of cancellation or material restriction to the person or organization listed in the above Schedule. Such notice will be sent prior to such cancellation in the manner prescribed in the above Schedule. 0 0 0 0 N O O V All other terms and conditions of the Policy remain unchanged. This endorsement,which forms a part of and is for attachment to the Policy issued by the designated Insurers, takes effect on the effective date of said Policy at the hour stated in said Policy, unless another effective date is shown below, and expires concurrently with said Policy. CNA74702XX (1-15) Policy No: 6020651005 Page 1 of 1 Endorsement No: 28 CONTINENTAL CASUALTY COMPANY Effective Date: 10/04/2021 Insured Name:Associated Construction Partners, Ltd. Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 Business Auto Policy CNA !r !� MCC= !r !rp ryry (� ( �„ ry, !�������������� ����������'�������� �������������������� ��������������� III IIIIIIII IIII��IIII�II�IIIIIIII II��IIIIIIII�I�IIIII IIIIIII ��������������� It is understood and agreed that this endorsement amends the BUSINESS AUTO COVERAGE FORM as follows: In the event of cancellation or material change that reduces or restricts the insurance provided by this Coverage Form, we agree to send prior notice of cancellation or material change to the person or organization scheduled below at the address scheduled below. This endorsement does not amend our obligation to notify the Named Insured of cancellation as described in the Common Policy Conditions or in another endorsement attached to this policy. SCHEDULE 1. Number of days advance notice: 10 Days if we cancel for non-payment of premium. 30 Days if the policy is cancelled for any other reason, or if coverage is restricted or reduced by endorsement. 2. Person or Organization's Name and Address Name: Per List on file Attention: Street Address: City, State, ZIP: E-mail address: All other terms and conditions of the policy remain unchanged This endorsement, which forms a part of and is for attachment to the policy issued by the designated Insurers, takes effect on the Policy Effective date of said policy at the hour stated in said policy, unless another effective date (the Endorsement Effective Date) is shown below, and expires concurrently with said policy. ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ Form No: CNA72315XX (02-2013) Policy No.: 6020650985 Endorsement Effective Date: Endorsement Expiration Date: Policy Effective Date: 10/04/2021 Endorsement No: 17; Page: 1 of 1 _ Underwriting Company: The Continental Insurance Company, 151 N Franklin St, Chicago, IL 60606 Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 Business Auto Policy CNA ��s II iI�:� Ili ii-i d r� l u1,�w e iI:'ir ii e iu,il(P THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: BUSINESS AUTO COVERAGE FORM With respect to coverage provided by this endorsement, the provisions of the Coverage Form apply unless modified by the endorsement. A. Liability Coverage is changed as follows: 1. Paragraph a. of the Pollution Exclusion applies only to liability assumed under a contract or agreement. 2. With respect to the coverage afforded by Paragraph A.1 above, Exclusion 13.6 Care, Custody Or Control does not apply. B. Changes In Definitions For the purpose of this endorsement, Paragraph D. of the Definitions Section is replaced by the following: D. "Covered pollution cost or expense" means any cost or expense arising out of: 1. Any request, demand, order or statutory or regulatory requirement; or 2. Any claim or "suit" by or on behalf of a governmental authority demanding that the "insured" or others test for, monitor, clean up, remove, contain, treat, detoxify or neutralize, or in any way respond to, or assess the effects of "pollutants." "Covered pollution cost or expense" does not include any cost or expense arising out of the actual, alleged or threatened discharge, dispersal, seepage, migration, release or escape of "pollutants": a. Before the "pollutants" or any property in which the "pollutants" are contained are moved from the place where they are accepted by the "insured" for movement into or onto the covered "auto"; or b. After the "pollutants" or any property in which the "pollutants" are contained are moved from the covered "auto" to the place where they are finally delivered, disposed of or abandoned by the " insured." Paragraphs a. and b. above do not apply to "accidents" that occur away from premises owned by or rented to an "insured" with respect to "pollutants" not in or upon a covered "auto" if: (1) The "pollutants" or any property in which the "pollutants" are contained are upset, overturned or damaged as a result of the maintenance or use of a covered "auto"; and (2) The discharge, dispersal, seepage, migration, release or escape of the "pollutants" is caused directly by such upset, overturn or damage. C. Property Damage Liability Coverage Deductible The damages that would otherwise be payable under Liability Coverage for "property damage" and " covered pollution cost or expense" caused in any one "accident" will be reduced by the "Property Damage" and "Covered Pollution Cost or Expense" Per "Accident" Deductible shown in the Broadened Pollution Liability Coverage Schedule prior to the application of the Limit Of Insurance provision. ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Form No: G-140378-B (05-2008) Policy No.: 6020650985 Endorsement Effective Date: Endorsement Expiration Date: Policy Effective Date: 10/04/2021 Endorsement No: 19; Page: 1 of 2 Underwriting Company: The Continental Insurance Company, 151 N Franklin St, Chicago, IL 60606 Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 Business Auto Policy CMA ��s II iI�:� Ili ii-i d r� l u1,�w e iI:'ir ii e iu,il(P D. Our Right To Reimbursement To settle any claim or "suit" we may pay all or any part of the deductible shown in the Broadened Pollution Liability Coverage Schedule. If this happens, you must reimburse us for the deductible or the part of the deductible we paid. E. Limit Of Insurance The following is added to Section II, Paragraph C., Limit Of Insurance: Regardless of the number of covered "autos," "insureds," premiums paid, claims made or "suits" brought or persons or organizations making claims or bringing "suits," the most we will pay for the sum of all damages and "covered pollution cost or expense" involving the additional insurance provided by this endorsement is the Aggregate Limit shown in the Broadened Pollution Liability Coverage Schedule. The Aggregate Limit shown in the Broadened Pollution Liability Coverage Schedule applies separately to each consecutive annual period and to any remaining period of less than 12 months, starting with the beginning of the policy period shown in the Declarations, unless the policy period is extended after issuance for an additional period of less than 12 months. In that case, the additional period will be deemed part of the last preceding period for purposes of determining the Aggregate Limit. F. EXCESS COVERAGE The additional insurance provided by this endorsement is in excess of any automobile pollution coverage required by your state and provided for in the Insurance Services Office, Inc. state Changes endorsement attached to this Coverage Form. However, the additional insurance provided by this endorsement does not increase the each "accident" limit of this Coverage Form. Any claim paid for automobile pollution coverage as provided by the Insurance Services Office, Inc. state Changes endorsement attached to this Coverage Form will not be charged against the annual Aggregate Limit shown in the Broadened Pollution Liability Coverage Schedule. All other terms and conditions of the policy remain unchanged This endorsement, which forms a part of and is for attachment to the policy issued by the designated Insurers, takes effect on the Policy Effective date of said policy at the hour stated in said policy, unless another effective date (the Endorsement Effective Date) is shown below, and expires concurrently with said policy. Form No: G-140378-B (05-2008 ormNoG-140378-B05-..2008..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... I Policy No.. 6020650985 Endorsement Effective Date: Endorsement Expiration Date: Endorsement No: 19; Page: 2 of 2 Policy Effective Date: 10/04/2021 Underwriting Company: The Continental Insurance Company, 151 N Franklin St, Chicago, IL 60606 Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Additional Coverage Limited Pollution Liability Coverage - Worksites Endorsement This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART SCHEDULE Limited Pollution Liability Aggregate Limit $2, 000, 000 Each Limited Pollution Incident Limit $1, 000, 000 Pollution Deductible Amount $2, 000 Each Limited Pollution Incident Information required to complete this Schedule, if not shown above,will be shown in the Declarations. It is understood and agreed as follows: I. Under COVERAGES,the following additional coverage is added: LIMITED POLLUTION INCIDENT COVERAGE 1. Insuring Agreement Subject to the Limited Pollution Liability Limits and the Pollution Deductible Amount, the Insurer will pay those sums the Insured becomes legally obligated to pay as damages because of bodily injury or property damage that directly results from a limited pollution incident within the coverage territory, provided that: a. the first emission, discharge, release or escape of the pollutants from which such bodily injury or property damage arises is demonstrable as having occurred during the policy period; and b. such bodily injury or property damage does not qualify for coverage under Coverage A—Bodily Injury and Property Damage Liability,whether or not any Coverage A limits remain; and c. such limited pollution incident happens on or from a worksite. The Insurer will have the right and duty to defend any suit seeking those damages, even if the allegations of the suit are groundless, false or fraudulent. The Insurer may at its discretion investigate any limited pollution incident and settle any claim that may result. But: (1) The Insurer's right and duty to defend end when the Insurer has used up the applicable limit of insurance in the payment of judgments or settlements; and 0 0 (2) The Insurer has no duty to defend suits seeking damages not covered by this insurance. 0 0 No other obligation or liability to pay sums or perform acts or services is covered unless explicitly provided for under SUPPLEMENTARY PAYMENTS—COVERAGES A AND B,which hereby also apply to LIMITED POLLUTION INCIDENT COVERAGE. 2. Exclusions A. Under Coverage A—Bodily Injury And Property Damage Liability,the paragraph entitled Exclusions hereby also applies to LIMITED POLLUTION INCIDENT COVERAGE subject to the following changes, which apply only with respect to the coverage provided by this endorsement: 1. the following exclusions are deleted: a. the exclusions entitled Pollution, Electronic Data and War; b. exclusions attached by endorsement to exclude fungi, microbes, or silica; and C. the endorsement entitled Respirable dust Exclusion Endorsement, if attached to this policy. CNA74844XX(4-15) Policy No: 6020651005 Page 1 of 6 Endorsement No: '7 CONTINENTAL CASUALTY COMPANY Effective Date 10/04/2021 Insured Name:Associated Construction Partners, Ltd. Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Additional Coverage Limited Pollution Liability Coverage - Worksites Endorsement 2. the following entitled exclusions: • Damage To Property • Damage to Your Product; • Damage to Your Work; • Damage to Impaired Property or Property Not Physically Injured; • Recall of Products,Work Or Impaired Property, are deleted and replaced by the following: This insurance does not apply to: • Damage To Property Property Damage to: (1) property at any time owned, rented, or occupied by the Named Insured, including any costs or expenses incurred by the Named Insured, or by any other person, organization or entity,for repair, replacement, enhancement, restoration or maintenance of such property for any reason, including prevention of injury to a person or damage to another's property; (2) premises the Named Insured sells, gives away or abandons if the property damage arises out of any part of those premises; (3) property loaned to an Insured; (4) personal property in the care,custody or control of an Insured; or • Products or Completed Operations bodily injury or property damage included within the products-completed operations hazard. B. With respect only to the coverage provided by this endorsement, the following additional exclusions apply: This insurance does not apply to: • Acid Rain bodily injury or property damage arising out of acid rain. • Cleanup or Monitoring Costs any loss,cost or expense arising out of any: (1) request, demand, order or statutory or regulatory requirement that any Insured or others test for, monitor, clean up, remove, contain, treat, detoxify or neutralize, or in any way respond to or assess the effects of, pollutants: or (2) claim by or on behalf of a governmental authority for damages because of testing for, monitoring, cleaning up, removing, containing, treating, detoxifying or neutralizing, or in any way responding to or assessing the effects of, pollutants. But this exclusion does not apply to liability for damages for property damage that is otherwise covered by this LIMITED POLLUTION INCIDENT COVERAGE. • Failure to Comply With Environmental Statutes bodily injury or property damage arising out of a limited pollution incident which results from, or is directly or indirectly attributable to, failure to comply with any applicable statute, regulation, ordinance, CNA74844XX(4-15) Policy No: 6020651005 Page 2 of 6 Endorsement No: V CONTINENTAL CASUALTY COMPANY Effective Date: 10/04/2021 Insured Name:Associated Construction Partners, Ltd. Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Additional Coverage Limited Pollution Liability Coverage - Worksites Endorsement directive or order relating to the protection of the environment and promulgated by any governmental body, provided that failure to comply is a willful or deliberate act or omission of: (1) the Insured; or (2) the Named Insured or any of the Named Insured's executive officers (if a corporation), members or managers (if a limited liability corporation), or members or partners (if a joint venture or partnership). • Natural Resources any loss,cost or expense arising out of any request, demand, order or suit by a designated natural resource trustee or other person vested with the authority under any federal or state statute to make such claims, that any Insured or others assess, replace, restore or rehabilitate natural resources, or in any way provide compensation for property damage to natural resources due to the effects of pollutants. • Offshore Facilities And Deepwater Ports bodily injury or property damage arising out of the ownership or operation of any offshore facility as defined in the Outer Continental Shelf Lands Act Amendment of 1978 or the Clean Water Act of 1977 as amended 1978 or any deepwater port as defined in the Deepwater Port Act of 1974 as amended or as may be amended. • Priority Clean-up Sites any loss,cost or expense arising out of any request, demand or order by a governmental authority that any Insured or others test for, monitor, clean-up, remove, contain, treat, detoxify or neutralize, or in any way respond to, or assess the effects of pollutants at any site which is included on an EPA or state environmental agency priority clean-up list prior to the limited pollution incident. • Punitive Damages any punitive or exemplary damages nor the multiplied portion of multiplied damages. This exclusion does not apply if such exclusions are not permitted in the state where the Named Insured is domiciled. • Rolling Stock bodily injury or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance, use or entrustment to others of any rolling stock owned or operated by, or rented or loaned to, or loaded or unloaded by any 0 Insured. N 0 • Waste Facilities 0 (1) bodily injury or property damage arising out of a limited pollution incident at or from a waste facility which is a worksite. (2) bodily injury at or from, or property damage to, a waste facility to which waste from the operations of an Insured are consigned. • Wells bodily injury or property damage arising out of the emission, discharge, release or escape of drilling fluid, oil, gas or other fluids from any oil,gas, mineral,water or geothermal well. This exclusion applies without regard to whether vehicle-mounted well servicing equipment contributed to causing the limited pollution incident. II. Under WHO IS AN INSURED, and solely with respect to the coverages provided by this endorsement, the following changes apply: A. paragraph 3. is amended to add the following paragraph d.: CNA74844XX(4-15) Policy No: 6020651005 Page 3 of 6 Endorsement No: '7 CONTINENTAL CASUALTY COMPANY Effective Date: 10/04/2021 Insured Name:Associated Construction Partners, Ltd. Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Additional Coverage Limited Pollution Liability Coverage - Worksites Endorsement d. LIMITED POLLUTION INCIDENT COVERAGE does not apply to: (1) bodily injury or property damage that first occurred; nor (2) limited pollution incidents that first commenced, before the Named Insured acquired or formed the organization. B. the following paragraph is added: No person or organization qualifying as an Insured on any endorsement attached to this Coverage Part is an Insured with respect to bodily injury or property damage arising out of limited pollution incidents other than the Named Insured and the Named Insured's employees. However, with respect to such bodily injury or property damage, if the Named Insured is required under a written contract or written agreement to add a person or organization as an additional insured, then such person or organization is an Insured with respect to the coverage provided by the LIMITED POLLUTION LIABILITY COVERAGE endorsement, but: a. only with respect to such person or organization's liability for acts or omissions of the Named Insured; and b. only if such contract or agreement is currently in effect and was executed prior to the limited pollution incident that caused the bodily injury or property damage. Furthermore, and subject always to the terms and conditions of this Coverage Part, including the limits of insurance, the Insurer will not provide such person or organization with (1) coverage broader than required by such contract or agreement; or (2) a higher limit of insurance than required by such contract or agreement. Any coverage granted by this provision shall apply only to the extent permissible by law. III. LIMITS OF INSURANCE is amended as follows: A. the following paragraphs are added: The Limited Pollution Liability Aggregate Limit shown in the Schedule of the LIMITED POLLUTION LIABILITY COVERAGE endorsement is the most the Insurer will pay under LIMITED POLLUTION LIABILITY COVERAGE for the total of all damages because of bodily injury and property damage resulting from limited pollution incidents. Subject to the Limited Pollution Liability Aggregate Limit described above, the Each Limited Pollution Incident Limit is the most the Insurer will pay under LIMITED POLLUTION LIABILITY COVERAGE for the total of all damages because of bodily injury and property damage resulting from any one limited pollution incident. B. with respect only to property damage arising out of a limited pollution incident the following Deductible provision is added: 1. The Insurer's obligation under LIMITED POLLUTION LIABILITY COVERAGE to pay damages for property damage on the Insured's behalf applies only to the amount of damages in excess of any Pollution Deductible amount stated in the LIMITED POLLUTION LIABILITY COVERAGE endorsement as applicable to Each Limited Pollution Incident. Neither the Each Limited Pollution Incident Limit nor the Limited Pollution Liability Aggregate Limit will be reduced by the application of such deductible amount. 2. The terms of this insurance, including those with respect to: a. the Insurer's right and duty to defend any suits seeking those damages; and b. the Named Insured's duties in the event of an occurrence or claim, apply irrespective of the application of the deductible amount. CNA74844XX(4-15) Policy No: 6020651005 Page 4 of 6 Endorsement No: V CONTINENTAL CASUALTY COMPANY Effective Date: 10/04/2020 Insured Name:Associated Construction Partners, Ltd. Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Additional Coverage Limited Pollution Liability Coverage - Worksites Endorsement 3. The Insurer may pay any part or all of the deductible amount to effect settlement of any claim, and, upon notification of the action taken,the Named Insured shall promptly reimburse the Insurer for such part of the deductible amount as the Insurer has paid. IV. Under CONDITIONS, and with respect only to the coverage provided by this endorsement, paragraph a. of the condition entitled Duties In The Event of Pollution Incident, Claim or Suit is deleted and replaced by the following: Duties In The Event of Pollution Incident, Claim or Suit. a. The Named Insured must see to it that the Insurer is notified as soon as practicable of an occurrence or offense which may result in a claim. To the extent possible, notice should include: (1) how,when, and where the occurrence or offense took place; (2) the names and addresses of any injured persons and witnesses; and (3) the nature and location of: i. any injury or damage arising out of the occurrence or offense; and ii. any limited pollution incident, and of the pollutants that escaped or were emitted, discharged or released in the limited pollution incident. V. Solely with respect to the coverage granted by this Endorsement, and notwithstanding anything to the contrary in any endorsement attached to this Coverage Part, the section entitled Definitions is amended as follows,: A. the following definitions are added: Above-ground means on or above: a. the surface of the land; b. the basement floor of any building; or c. any navigable or surface body of water. Limited pollution incident means an accidental emission, discharge, release, or escape of pollutants that results in the injurious presence of pollutants in or upon land,the atmosphere, interior of a building or any water 0 course, body of water or ground water. A series of emissions, discharges, releases or escapes of pollutants that are logically or causally connected by any common fact, circumstance, situation, transaction, event, advice or decision will be deemed to be one limited pollution incident. All bodily injury and property damage resulting from one limited pollution incident shall be deemed to have occurred only at the commencement date of the 0 limited pollution incident. Waste facility means any site to which waste is delivered for storage, disposal, processing or treatment,whether or not such site is licensed by a governmental authority to perform such storage, disposal, processing or treatment. Worksite means any site or location on which any Insured or any contractors or subcontractors working directly or indirectly on any Insured's behalf are performing operations, including sites temporarily borrowed or rented in support of a single worksite for storage of construction equipment. Worksite does not include any premises, site or location: (1) which is or was at any time owned by, rented or loaned to any Insured; nor (2) occupied by any Insured for any purpose other than performing construction operations for others. B. the following definitions are amended: 1. The definition of damages is amended to add the following: CNA74844XX(4-15) Policy No: 6020651005 Page 5 of 6 Endorsement No: '7 CONTINENTAL CASUALTY COMPANY Effective Date: 10/04/2021 Insured Name:Associated Construction Partners, Ltd. Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Additional Coverage Limited Pollution Liability Coverage - Worksites Endorsement Damages also do not include fines or penalties. 2. the first sentence of paragraph f. of the definition of insured contract is deleted and replaced by the following: f. That part of any other written contract or written agreement pertaining to the Named Insured's business (including an indemnification of a municipality in connection with work performed for a municipality) under which the Named Insured assumes the tort liability of another party to pay for bodily injury or property damage to a third person or organization, provided the bodily injury or property damage is entirely caused by the Named Insured or by those acting on the Named Insured's behalf. However, such part of a contract or agreement shall only be considered an insured contract to the extent the Named Insured's assumption of the tort liability is permitted by law. This amendment does not apply if paragraph f. has been deleted without replacement by another endorsement attached to this Coverage Part. All other terms and conditions of the Policy remain unchanged. This endorsement,which forms a part of and is for attachment to the Policy issued by the designated Insurers, takes effect on the effective date of said Policy at the hour stated in said Policy, unless another effective date is shown below, and expires concurrently with said Policy. CNA74844XX(4-15) Policy No: 6020651005 Page 6 of 6 Endorsement No: V CONTINENTAL CASUALTY COMPANY Effective Date: 10/04/2021 Insured Name:Associated Construction Partners, Ltd. Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 DATE(MM/DD/YYYY) ACCOR" CERTIFICATE OF PROPERTY INSURANCE 3/23/2022 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER,AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. PRODUCER CONTACT NAME: Jayme York IBTX Risk Services PHONE FAX 32335 US Hwy 281 N. A C No Ext):2149897100 A/C,No:210-696-8414 E-MASuite#1201 ADDRESS: service@Ib-tX.com Bulverde TX 78163 PRODUCER CUSTOMER ID: INSURER(S)AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC# INSURED INSURERA: The Hanover Insurance Company 22292 Associated Construction Partners, Ltd. 215 W. Bandera Rd. Ste 114-461 INSURER B: Boerne Tx 78006 INSURERC: INSURER D INSURER E INSURER F: COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER: 1267876683 REVISION NUMBER: LOCATION OF PREMISES/DESCRIPTION OF PROPERTY (Attach ACORD 101,Additional Remarks Schedule,if more space is required) THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT,TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN,THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTIVE POLICY EXPIRATION COVERED PROPERTY LIMITS LTR DATE(MM/DD/YYYY) DATE(MM/DD/YYYY) PROPERTY BUILDING $ CAUSES OF LOSS DEDUCTIBLES PERSONAL PROPERTY $ BASIC BUILDING BUSINESS INCOME $ BROAD CONTENTS EXTRAEXPENSE $ SPECIAL RENTAL VALUE $ EARTHQUAKE BLANKET BUILDING $ WIND BLANKET PERS PROP $ FLOOD BLANKET BLDG&PP $ X INLAND MARINE TYPE OF POLICY X Lmt Single Loc. $6,000,000 CAUSES OF LOSS Install/Builders Risk X In Transit $500,000 NAMED PERILS POLICY NUMBER X Temp.Loc. $500,000 A X Special/Includes Theft IHD D298273 05 10/4/2021 10/4/2022 $ CRIME TYPE OF POLICY $ BOILER&MACHINERY/ $ EQUIPMENT BREAKDOWN SPECIAL CONDITIONS/OTHER COVERAGES(ACORD 101,Additional Remarks Schedule,may be attached if more space is required) Certificate Holder is listed as Loss Payee as their interest may appear when required by written contract. Builders Risk/Installation Floater Policy- all risk including theft Annual Reporting form. Project:Citywide Lift Station Repairs(Williams Lift Station), Project 21143, RFB 3897 CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF,NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. City of Corpus Christi-Engineering Services 1201 Leopold Street AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE Corpus Christi TX 78401 ©1995-2015 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. ACORD 24(2016/03) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD DnGn"Ah.—K—Wrl rl3OG074n4 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 AAIS This endorsement changes IM 7851 04 04 the Inland Marine Coverage Page 1 of 1 --PLEASE READ THIS CAREFULLY-- ADDITIONAL INSURED SCHEDULE (The entries required to complete this endorsement will be shown below or on the"schedule of coverages".) San Antonio Water System PO Box1000085-XD Duluth,GA 30096 IM 7851 04 04 Copyright,American Association of Insurance Services,Inc.,2004 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 DATE(MM/DD/YYYY) ACCOR" CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE 3/23/2022 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER,AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must have ADDITIONAL INSURED provisions or be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER CONTACT NAME: Jayme York IBTX Risk Services PHONE FAX 32335 US Hwy 281 N. A/C No Ext): 12149897100 A/C,No):210-696-8414 Suite 1201 ADDRESS: SerVlce@Ib-tX.com Bulverde TX 78163 INSURER(S)AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC# INSURERA:Transportation Insurance Company 20494 INSURED INSURER B:The Continental Insurance Company Of New Jersey 42625 Associated Construction Partners, Ltd. 215 W. Bandera Rd. Ste. 114-461 INSURERC: Boerne TX 78006 INSURERD: INSURER E: INSURER F: COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER:1844157310 REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES.LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR TYPE OF INSURANCE ADDL SUBR POLICY EFF POLICY EXP LIMITS LTR INSD WVD POLICY NUMBER MM/DD MM/DD A X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY 6020651005 10/4/2021 10/4/2022 EACH OCCURRENCE $1,000,000 CLAIMS-MADE OCCUR DAMAGE TO RENTED PREMISES Ea occurrence $100,000 MED EXP(Any one person) $15,000 X XCU PERSONAL&ADV INJURY $1,000,000 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: GENERAL AGGREGATE $2,000,000 � PRO- POLICY 1:1 LOC PRODUCTS-COMP/OP AGG $2,000,000 OTHER: $ B AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY 6020650985 10/4/2021 10/4/2022 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT $1,000,000 Ea accident X ANY AUTO BODILY INJURY(Per person) $ OWNED X SCHEDULED BODILY INJURY(Per accident) $ AUTOS ONLY AUTOS X HIREDX NON-OWNED PROPERTY DAMAGE $ AUTOS ONLY AUTOS ONLY Per accident B X UMBRELLA LIAB X OCCUR 6020650999 10/4/2021 10/4/2022 EACH OCCURRENCE $10,000,000 EXCESS LAB CLAIMS-MADE AGGREGATE $10,000,000 DED X RETENTION$1 n nnn $ WORKERS COMPENSATION PEROTH- AND EMPLOYERS'LIABILITY Y/N STATUTE ER ANYPROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVEF—] E.L.EACH ACCIDENT $ OFFICE R/M EMBER EXCLUDED? N/A (Mandatory in NH) E.L.DISEASE-EA EMPLOYEE $ If yes,describe under DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below E.L.DISEASE-POLICY LIMIT $ A GL-Ltd Pollution Liab Worksites 6020651005 10/4/2021 10/4/2022 Per Occurrence 1,000,000 General Aggregate 2,000,000 Deductible $2,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONS/VEHICLES (ACORD 101,Additional Remarks Schedule,maybe attached if more space is required) The General Liability and Auto policies include blanket additional insured endorsements(CNA750791016, CA20481013)as required in a written contract with the Named Insured.The General Liability&Auto policies include a blanket waiver of subrogation endorsement(CNA747050115, CA04441013)as required in a written contract with the Named Insured. Primary Non-Contributory per attached(CNA750791016).Auto Liability includes Broadened Pollution-Transportation Endorsement(G-140378-B 05-08).Additional Coverage Pollution Endorsement(CNA74844xx 4-15). Cancellation provisions-see attached(CA747021-15, CNA7231502-13). Umbrella is follow form of the General Liability,Auto and Work Compensation policies subject to policy terms and conditions. No exclusion for boom and overload coverage. Project:Citywide Lift Station Repairs(Williams Lift Station), Project 21143, RFB 3897 CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. Urban Engineering 2725 Swantener Dr AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE Corpus Christi TX 78404 ©1988-2015 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. ACORD 25(2016103) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Blanket Additional Insured - Owners, Lessees or Contractors - with Products-Completed Operations Coverage Endorsement This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART It is understood and agreed as follows: I. WHO IS AN INSURED is amended to include as an Insured any person or organization whom you are required by written contract to add as an additional insured on this coverage part, but only with respect to liability for bodily injury, property damage or personal and advertising injury caused in whole or in part by your acts or omissions, or the acts or omissions of those acting on your behalf: A. in the performance of your ongoing operations subject to such written contract; or B. in the performance of your work subject to such written contract, but only with respect to bodily injury or property damage included in the products-completed operations hazard, and only if: 1. the written contract requires you to provide the additional insured such coverage; and 2. this coverage part provides such coverage. II. But if the written contract requires: A. additional insured coverage under the 11-85 edition, 10-93 edition, or 10-01 edition of CG2010, or under the 10- 01 edition of CG2037;or B. additional insured coverage with "arising out of" language; or C. additional insured coverage to the greatest extent permissible by law; then paragraph I.above is deleted in its entirety and replaced by the following: WHO IS AN INSURED is amended to include as an Insured any person or organization whom you are required by written contract to add as an additional insured on this coverage part, but only with respect to liability for bodily injury, property damage or personal and advertising injury arising out of your work that is subject to such written contract. III. Subject always to the terms and conditions of this policy, including the limits of insurance, the Insurer will not provide N 0 such additional insured with: 0 A. coverage broader than required by the written contract;or 0 B. a higher limit of insurance than required by the written contract. N IV. The insurance granted by this endorsement to the additional insured does not apply to bodily injury, property damage, or personal and advertising injury arising out of: A. the rendering of, or the failure to render, any professional architectural, engineering, or surveying services, including: 1. the preparing, approving, or failing to prepare or approve maps, shop drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, field orders, change orders or drawings and specifications; and 2. supervisory, inspection, architectural or engineering activities;or B. any premises or work for which the additional insured is specifically listed as an additional insured on another endorsement attached to this coverage part. V. Under COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CONDITIONS,the Condition entitled Other Insurance is amended to add the following,which supersedes any provision to the contrary in this Condition or elsewhere in this coverage part: CNA75079XX(10-16) Policy No: 6020651005 Page 1 of 2 Endorsement No: Effective Date: 10/04/2021 Insured Name: ASSOCIATED CONSTRUCTION PARTNERS, LTD. Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Blanket Additional Insured - Owners, Lessees or Contractors - with Products-Completed Operations Coverage Endorsement Primary and Noncontributory Insurance With respect to other insurance available to the additional insured under which the additional insured is a named insured, this insurance is primary to and will not seek contribution from such other insurance, provided that a written contract requires the insurance provided by this policy to be: 1. primary and non-contributing with other insurance available to the additional insured; or 2. primary and to not seek contribution from any other insurance available to the additional insured. But except as specified above, this insurance will be excess of all other insurance available to the additional insured. VI. Solely with respect to the insurance granted by this endorsement, the section entitled COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CONDITIONS is amended as follows: The Condition entitled Duties In The Event of Occurrence, Offense,Claim or Suit is amended with the addition of the following: Any additional insured pursuant to this endorsement will as soon as practicable: 1. give the Insurer written notice of any claim, or any occurrence or offense which may result in a claim; 2. send the Insurer copies of all legal papers received, and otherwise cooperate with the Insurer in the investigation, defense, or settlement of the claim; and 3. make available any other insurance, and tender the defense and indemnity of any claim to any other insurer or self-insurer, whose policy or program applies to a loss that the Insurer covers under this coverage part. However, if the written contract requires this insurance to be primary and non-contributory, this paragraph 3.does not apply to insurance on which the additional insured is a named insured. The Insurer has no duty to defend or indemnify an additional insured under this endorsement until the Insurer receives written notice of a claim from the additional insured. VII. Solely with respect to the insurance granted by this endorsement, the section entitled DEFINITIONS is amended to add the following definition: Written contract means a written contract or written agreement that requires you to make a person or organization an additional insured on this coverage part, provided the contract or agreement: A. is currently in effect or becomes effective during the term of this policy; and B. was executed prior to: 1. the bodily injury or property damage; or 2. the offense that caused the personal and advertising injury; for which the additional insured seeks coverage. Any coverage granted by this endorsement shall apply solely to the extent permissible by law. All other terms and conditions of the Policy remain unchanged. This endorsement, which forms a part of and is for attachment to the Policy issued by the designated Insurers, takes effect on the effective date of said Policy at the hour stated in said Policy, unless another effective date is shown below, and expires concurrently with said Policy. CNA75079XX(10-16) Policy No: 6020651005 Page 2 of 2 Endorsement No: Effective Date: 10/04/2021 Insured Name: ASSOCIATED CONSTRUCTION PARTNERS, LTD. Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. NnmArl Inti irArl- Accnrinbnrl ('nnctri irtinn PnrtnArc I.td. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 POIICy NUMDer: ouzoo-I W) CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Contractors' General Liability Extension Endorsement It is understood and agreed that this endorsement amends the COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART as follows. If any other endorsement attached to this policy amends any provision also amended by this endorsement, then that other endorsement controls with respect to such provision, and the changes made by this endorsement with respect to such provision do not apply. TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. Additional Insureds 2. Additional Insured - Primary And Non-Contributory To Additional Insured's Insurance 3. Bodily Injury—Expanded Definition 4. Broad Knowledge of Occurrence/Notice of Occurrence 5. Broad Named Insured 6. Broadened Liability Coverage For Damage To Your Product And Your Work 7. Contractual Liability- Railroads 8. Electronic Data Liability 9. Estates, Legal Representatives and Spouses 10. Expected Or Intended Injury—Exception for Reasonable Force 11. General Aggregate Limits of Insurance—Per Project 12. In Rem Actions 13. Incidental Health Care Malpractice Coverage 14. Joint Ventures/Partnership/Limited Liability Companies 15. Legal Liability — Damage To Premises / Alienated Premises / Property In The Named Insured's Care, Custody or Control 16. Liquor Liability 17. Medical Payments 18. Non-owned Aircraft Coverage 19. Non-owned Watercraft 0 0 20. Personal And Advertising Injury—Discrimination or Humiliation 0 21. Personal And Advertising Injury-Contractual Liability 22. Property Damage- Elevators 23. Supplementary Payments 24. Unintentional Failure To Disclose Hazards 25. Waiver of Subrogation—Blanket 26. Wrap-Up Extension: OCIP CCIP,or Consolidated (Wrap-Up) Insurance Programs CNA74705XX (1-15) Page 1 of 17 Continental Casualty Company Effective Date: 10/04/2021 Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Contractors' General Liability Extension Endorsement 1. ADDITIONAL INSUREDS a. WHO IS AN INSURED is amended to include as an Insured any person or organization described in paragraphs A. through H. below whom a Named Insured is required to add as an additional insured on this Coverage Part under a written contract or written agreement, provided such contract or agreement: (1) is currently in effect or becomes effective during the term of this Coverage Part; and (2) was executed prior to: (a) the bodily injury or property damage; or (b) the offense that caused the personal and advertising injury, for which such additional insured seeks coverage. b. However, subject always to the terms and conditions of this policy, including the limits of insurance, the Insurer will not provide such additional insured with: (1) a higher limit of insurance than required by such contract or agreement; or (2) coverage broader than required by such contract or agreement, and in no event broader than that described by the applicable paragraph A.through H.below. Any coverage granted by this endorsement shall apply only to the extent permissible by law. A. Controlling Interest Any person or organization with a controlling interest in a Named Insured, but only with respect to such person or organization's liability for bodily injury, property damage or personal and advertising injury arising out of: 1. such person or organization's financial control of a Named Insured; or 2. premises such person or organization owns, maintains or controls while a Named Insured leases or occupies such premises; provided that the coverage granted by this paragraph does not apply to structural alterations, new construction or demolition operations performed by, on behalf of, or for such additional insured. B. Co-owner of Insured Premises A co-owner of a premises co-owned by a Named Insured and covered under this insurance but only with respect to such co-owner's liability for bodily injury, property damage or personal and advertising injury as co-owner of such premises. C. Lessor of Equipment Any person or organization from whom a Named Insured leases equipment, but only with respect to liability for bodily injury, property damage or personal and advertising injury caused, in whole or in part, by the Named Insured's maintenance, operation or use of such equipment, provided that the occurrence giving rise to such bodily injury, property damage or the offense giving rise to such personal and advertising injury takes place prior to the termination of such lease. D. Lessor of Land Any person or organization from whom a Named Insured leases land but only with respect to liability for bodily injury, property damage or personal and advertising injury arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of such land, provided that the occurrence giving rise to such bodily injury, property damage or the offense giving rise to such personal and advertising injury takes place prior to the termination of such lease. The CNA74705XX (1-15) Page 2 of 17 Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Contractors' General Liability Extension Endorsement coverage granted by this paragraph does not apply to structural alterations, new construction or demolition operations performed by, on behalf of, or for such additional insured. E. Lessor of Premises An owner or lessor of premises leased to the Named Insured, or such owner or lessor's real estate manager, but only with respect to liability for bodily injury, property damage or personal and advertising injury arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of such part of the premises leased to the Named Insured, and provided that the occurrence giving rise to such bodily injury or property damage, or the offense giving rise to such personal and advertising injury, takes place prior to the termination of such lease. The coverage granted by this paragraph does not apply to structural alterations, new construction or demolition operations performed by, on behalf of, or for such additional insured. F. Mortgagee,Assignee or Receiver A mortgagee, assignee or receiver of premises but only with respect to such mortgagee, assignee or receiver's liability for bodily injury, property damage or personal and advertising injury arising out of the Named Insured's ownership, maintenance, or use of a premises by a Named Insured. The coverage granted by this paragraph does not apply to structural alterations, new construction or demolition operations performed by, on behalf of, or for such additional insured. G. State or Governmental Agency or Subdivision or Political Subdivisions—Permits A state or governmental agency or subdivision or political subdivision that has issued a permit or authorization but only with respect to such state or governmental agency or subdivision or political subdivision's liability for bodily injury, property damage or personal and advertising injury arising out of: 1. the following hazards in connection with premises a Named Insured owns, rents, or controls and to which this insurance applies: a. the existence, maintenance, repair, construction, erection, or removal of advertising signs, awnings, canopies, cellar entrances, coal holes, driveways, manholes, marquees, hoistaway openings, sidewalk vaults, street banners, or decorations and similar exposures; or b. the construction, erection, or removal of elevators; or 0 c. the ownership, maintenance or use of any elevators covered by this insurance; or n N 2. the permitted or authorized operations performed by a Named Insured or on a Named Insured's behalf. 0 0 The coverage granted by this paragraph does not apply to: 0 N O a. Bodily injury, property damage or personal and advertising injury arising out of operations performed for the state or governmental agency or subdivision or political subdivision; or b. Bodily injury or property damage included within the products-completed operations hazard. With respect to this provision's requirement that additional insured status must be requested under a written contract or agreement, the Insurer will treat as a written contract any governmental permit that requires the Named Insured to add the governmental entity as an additional insured. H. Trade Show Event Lessor 1. With respect to a Named Insured's participation in a trade show event as an exhibitor, presenter or displayer, any person or organization whom the Named Insured is required to include as an additional insured, but only with respect to such person or organization's liability for bodily injury, property damage or personal and advertising injury caused by: CNA74705XX (1-15) Page 3 of 17 Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Contractors' General Liability Extension Endorsement a. the Named Insured's acts or omissions; or b. the acts or omissions of those acting on the Named Insured's behalf, in the performance of the Named Insured's ongoing operations at the trade show event premises during the trade show event. 2. The coverage granted by this paragraph does not apply to bodily injury or property damage included within the products-completed operations hazard. 2. ADDITIONAL INSURED- PRIMARY AND NON-CONTRIBUTORY TO ADDITIONAL INSURED'S INSURANCE The Other Insurance Condition in the COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CONDITIONS Section is amended to add the following paragraph: If the Named Insured has agreed in writing in a contract or agreement that this insurance is primary and non- contributory relative to an additional insured's own insurance, then this insurance is primary, and the Insurer will not seek contribution from that other insurance. For the purpose of this Provision 2., the additional insured's own insurance means insurance on which the additional insured is a named insured. Otherwise, and notwithstanding anything to the contrary elsewhere in this Condition, the insurance provided to such person or organization is excess of any other insurance available to such person or organization. 3. BODILY INJURY—EXPANDED DEFINITION Under DEFINITIONS, the definition of bodily injury is deleted and replaced by the following: Bodily injury means physical injury, sickness or disease sustained by a person, including death, humiliation, shock, mental anguish or mental injury sustained by that person at any time which results as a consequence of the physical injury, sickness or disease. 4. BROAD KNOWLEDGE OF OCCURRENCE/ NOTICE OF OCCURRENCE Under CONDITIONS, the condition entitled Duties in The Event of Occurrence, Offense, Claim or Suit is amended to add the following provisions: A. BROAD KNOWLEDGE OF OCCURRENCE The Named Insured must give the Insurer or the Insurer's authorized representative notice of an occurrence, offense or claim only when the occurrence, offense or claim is known to a natural person Named Insured, to a partner, executive officer, manager or member of a Named Insured, or an employee designated by any of the above to give such notice. B. NOTICE OF OCCURRENCE The Named Insured's rights under this Coverage Part will not be prejudiced if the Named Insured fails to give the Insurer notice of an occurrence, offense or claim and that failure is solely due to the Named Insured's reasonable belief that the bodily injury or property damage is not covered under this Coverage Part. However, the Named Insured shall give written notice of such occurrence, offense or claim to the Insurer as soon as the Named Insured is aware that this insurance may apply to such occurrence, offense or claim. 5. BROAD NAMED INSURED WHO IS AN INSURED is amended to delete its Paragraph 3. in its entirety and replace it with the following: 3. Pursuant to the limitations described in Paragraph 4. below, any organization in which a Named Insured has management control: a. on the effective date of this Coverage Part; or CNA74705XX (1-15) Paqe 4 of 17 Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Contractors' General Liability Extension Endorsement b. by reason of a Named Insured creating or acquiring the organization during the policy period, qualifies as a Named Insured, provided that there is no other similar liability insurance, whether primary, contributory, excess, contingent or otherwise, which provides coverage to such organization, or which would have provided coverage but for the exhaustion of its limit, and without regard to whether its coverage is broader or narrower than that provided by this insurance. But this BROAD NAMED INSURED provision does not apply to: (a) any partnership, limited liability company or joint venture; or (b) any organization for which coverage is excluded by another endorsement attached to this Coverage Part. For the purpose of this provision, management control means: A. owning interests representing more than 50% of the voting, appointment or designation power for the selection of a majority of the Board of Directors of a corporation; or B. having the right, pursuant to a written trust agreement, to protect, control the use of, encumber or transfer or sell property held by a trust. 4. With respect to organizations which qualify as Named Insureds by virtue of Paragraph 3. above, this insurance does not apply to: a. bodily injury or property damage that first occurred prior to the date of management control, or that first occurs after management control ceases; nor b. personal or advertising injury caused by an offense that first occurred prior to the date of management control or that first occurs after management control ceases. 5. The insurance provided by this Coverage Part applies to Named Insureds when trading under their own names or under such other trading names or doing-business-as names (dba) as any Named Insured should choose to employ. 6. BROADENED LIABILITY COVERAGE FOR DAMAGE TO YOUR PRODUCT AND YOUR WORK A. Under COVERAGES, Coverage A — Bodily Injury and Property Damage Liability, the paragraph entitled Exclusions is amended to delete exclusions k.and I.and replace them with the following: This insurance does not apply to: k. Damage to Your Product 0 0 Property damage to your product arising out of it, or any part of it except when caused by or resulting from: 0 (1) fire; (2) smoke; (3) collapse; or (4) explosion. I. Damage to Your Work Property damage to your work arising out of it, or any part of it and included in the products-completed operations hazard. This exclusion does not apply: (1) If the damaged work, or the work out of which the damage arises, was performed on the Named Insured's behalf by a subcontractor; or CNA74705XX (1-15) Page 5 of 17 Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Contractors' General Liability Extension Endorsement (2) If the cause of loss to the damaged work arises as a result of: (a) fire; (b) smoke; (c) collapse; or (d) explosion. B. The following paragraph is added to LIMITS OF INSURANCE: Subject to 5. above, $100,000 is the most the Insurer will pay under Coverage A for the sum of damages arising out of any one occurrence because of property damage to your product and your work that is caused by fire, smoke, collapse or explosion and is included within the product-completed operations hazard. This sublimit does not apply to property damage to your work if the damaged work, or the work out of which the damage arises,was performed on the Named Insured's behalf by a subcontractor. C. This Broadened Liability Coverage For Damage To Your Product And Your Work Provision does not apply if an endorsement of the same name is attached to this policy. 7. CONTRACTUAL LIABILITY—RAILROADS With respect to operations performed within 50 feet of railroad property, the definition of insured contract is replaced by the following: Insured Contract means: a. A contract for a lease of premises. However, that portion of the contract for a lease of premises that indemnifies any person or organization for damage by fire to premises while rented to a Named Insured or temporarily occupied by a Named Insured with permission of the owner is not an insured contract; b. A sidetrack agreement; c. Any easement or license agreement; d. An obligation, as required by ordinance, to indemnify a municipality, except in connection with work for a municipality; e. An elevator maintenance agreement; f. That part of any other contract or agreement pertaining to the Named Insured's business (including an indemnification of a municipality in connection with work performed for a municipality) under which the Named Insured assumes the tort liability of another party to pay for bodily injury or property damage to a third person or organization. Tort liability means a liability that would be imposed by law in the absence of any contract or agreement. Paragraph f.does not include that part of any contract or agreement: (1) That indemnifies an architect, engineer or surveyor for injury or damage arising out of: (a) Preparing, approving or failing to prepare or approve maps, shop drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, field orders, change orders or drawings and specifications; or (b) Giving directions or instructions, or failing to give them, if that is the primary cause of the injury or damage; (2) Under which the Insured, if an architect, engineer or surveyor, assumes liability for an injury or damage arising out of the insured's rendering or failure to render professional services, including those listed in (1) above and supervisory, inspection, architectural or engineering activities. 8. ELECTRONIC DATA LIABILITY CNA74705XX (1-15) Page 6 of 17 Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Contractors' General Liability Extension Endorsement A. Under COVERAGES, Coverage A — Bodily Injury and Property Damage Liability, the paragraph entitled Exclusions is amended to delete exclusion p. Electronic Data and replace it with the following: This insurance does not apply to: p. Access Or Disclosure Of Confidential Or Personal Information And Data-related Liability Damages arising out of: (1) any access to or disclosure of any person's or organization's confidential or personal information, including patents, trade secrets, processing methods, customer lists, financial information, credit card information, health information or any other type of nonpublic information; or (2) the loss of, loss of use of, damage to, corruption of, inability to access, or inability to manipulate electronic data that does not result from physical injury to tangible property. However, unless Paragraph (1) above applies, this exclusion does not apply to damages because of bodily injury. This exclusion applies even if damages are claimed for notification costs, credit monitoring expenses, forensic expenses, public relation expenses or any other loss, cost or expense incurred by the Named Insured or others arising out of that which is described in Paragraph (1) or(2) above. B. The following paragraph is added to LIMITS OF INSURANCE: Subject to 5. above, $100,000 is the most the Insurer will pay under Coverage A for all damages arising out of any one occurrence because of property damage that results from physical injury to tangible property and arises out of electronic data. C. The following definition is added to DEFINITIONS: Electronic data means information, facts or programs stored as or on, created or used on, or transmitted to or from computer software (including systems and applications software), hard or floppy disks, CD-ROMS, tapes, drives, cells,data processing devices or any other media which are used with electronically controlled equipment. D. For the purpose of the coverage provided by this ELECTRONIC DATA LIABILITY Provision, the definition of property damage in DEFINITIONS is replaced by the following: N Property damage means: n a. Physical injury to tangible property, including all resulting loss of use of that property. All such loss of use shall be deemed to occur at the time of the physical injury that caused it; 0 0 b. Loss of use of tangible property that is not physically injured. All such loss of use shall be deemed to occur at the time of the occurrence that caused it; or c. Loss of, loss of use of, damage to, corruption of, inability to access, or inability to properly manipulate electronic data, resulting from physical injury to tangible property. All such loss of electronic data shall be deemed to occur at the time of the occurrence that caused it. For the purposes of this insurance, electronic data is not tangible property. E. If Electronic Data Liability is provided at a higher limit by another endorsement attached to this policy, then the _ $100,000 limit provided by this ELECTRONIC DATA LIABILITY Provision is part of, and not in addition to, that higher limit. 9. ESTATES, LEGAL REPRESENTATIVES,AND SPOUSES The estates, heirs, legal representatives and spouses of any natural person Insured shall also be insured under this policy; provided, however, coverage is afforded to such estates, heirs, legal representatives, and spouses only for CNA74705XX (1-15) Page 7 of 17 Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Contractors' General Liability Extension Endorsement claims arising solely out of their capacity or status as such and, in the case of a spouse, where such claim seeks damages from marital community property, jointly held property or property transferred from such natural person Insured to such spouse. No coverage is provided for any act, error or omission of an estate, heir, legal representative, or spouse outside the scope of such person's capacity or status as such, provided however that the spouse of a natural person Named Insured and the spouses of members or partners of joint venture or partnership Named Insureds are Insureds with respect to such spouses' acts, errors or omissions in the conduct of the Named Insured's business. 10. EXPECTED OR INTENDED INJURY—EXCEPTION FOR REASONABLE FORCE Under COVERAGES, Coverage A — Bodily Injury and Property Damage Liability, the paragraph entitled Exclusions is amended to delete the exclusion entitled Expected or Intended Injury and replace it with the following: This insurance does not apply to: Expected or Intended Injury Bodily injury or property damage expected or intended from the standpoint of the Insured. This exclusion does not apply to bodily injury or property damage resulting from the use of reasonable force to protect persons or property. 11. GENERAL AGGREGATE LIMITS OF INSURANCE- PER PROJECT A. For each construction project away from premises the Named Insured owns or rents, a separate Construction Project General Aggregate Limit, equal to the amount of the General Aggregate Limit shown in the Declarations, is the most the Insurer will pay for the sum of: 1. All damages under Coverage A, except damages because of bodily injury or property damage included in the products-completed operations hazard; and 2. All medical expenses under Coverage C, that arise from occurrences or accidents which can be attributed solely to ongoing operations at that construction project. Such payments shall not reduce the General Aggregate Limit shown in the Declarations, nor the Construction Project General Aggregate Limit of any other construction project. B. All: 1. Damages under Coverage B, regardless of the number of locations or construction projects involved; 2. Damages under Coverage A, caused by occurrences which cannot be attributed solely to ongoing operations at a single construction project, except damages because of bodily injury or property damage included in the products-completed operations hazard; and 3. Medical expenses under Coverage C caused by accidents which cannot be attributed solely to ongoing operations at a single construction project, will reduce the General Aggregate Limit shown in the Declarations. C. The limits shown in the Declarations for Each Occurrence, for Damage To Premises Rented To You and for Medical Expense continue to apply, but will be subject to either the Construction Project General Aggregate Limit or the General Aggregate Limit shown in the Declarations, depending on whether the occurrence can be attributed solely to ongoing operations at a particular construction project. D. When coverage for liability arising out of the products-completed operations hazard is provided, any payments for damages because of bodily injury or property damage included in the products-completed operations hazard will reduce the Products-Completed Operations Aggregate Limit shown in the Declarations, regardless of the number of projects involved. CNA74705XX (1-15) Paqe 8 of 17 Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Contractors' General Liability Extension Endorsement E. If a single construction project away from premises owned by or rented to the Insured has been abandoned and then restarted, or if the authorized contracting parties deviate from plans, blueprints, designs, specifications or timetables, the project will still be deemed to be the same construction project. F. The provisions of LIMITS OF INSURANCE not otherwise modified by this endorsement shall continue to apply as stipulated. 12. IN REM ACTIONS A quasi in rem action against any vessel owned or operated by or for the Named Insured, or chartered by or for the Named Insured, will be treated in the same manner as though the action were in personam against the Named Insured. 13. INCIDENTAL HEALTH CARE MALPRACTICE COVERAGE Solely with respect to bodily injury that arises out of a health care incident: A. Under COVERAGES, Coverage A — Bodily Injury and Property Damage Liability, the paragraph entitled Insuring Agreement is amended to replace Paragraphs 1.b.(1) and 1.b.(2)with the following: b. This insurance applies to bodily injury provided that the professional health care services are incidental to the Named Insured's primary business purpose, and only if: (1) such bodily injury is caused by an occurrence that takes place in the coverage territory. (2) the bodily injury first occurs during the policy period. All bodily injury arising from an occurrence will be deemed to have occurred at the time of the first act, error, or omission that is part of the occurrence; and B. Under COVERAGES, Coverage A — Bodily Injury and Property Damage Liability, the paragraph entitled Exclusions is amended to: I. add the following to the Employers Liability exclusion: This exclusion applies only if the bodily injury arising from a health care incident is covered by other liability insurance available to the Insured (or which would have been available but for exhaustion of its limits). ii. delete the exclusion entitled Contractual Liability and replace it with the following: This insurance does not apply to: N O Contractual Liability 0 0 0 the Insured's actual or alleged liability under any oral or written contract or agreement, including but not limited to express warranties or guarantees. iii. add the following additional exclusions: This insurance does not apply to: Discrimination any actual or alleged discrimination, humiliation or harassment, including but not limited to claims based on an individual's race, creed, color, age, gender, national origin, religion, disability, marital status or sexual orientation. Dishonesty or Crime Any actual or alleged dishonest, criminal or malicious act, error or omission. Medicare/Medicaid Fraud CNA74705XX (1-15) Page 9 of 17 Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Contractors' General Liability Extension Endorsement any actual or alleged violation of law with respect to Medicare, Medicaid, Tricare or any similar federal, state or local governmental program. Services Excluded by Endorsement Any health care incident for which coverage is excluded by endorsement. C. DEFINITIONS is amended to: I. add the following definitions: Health care incident means an act, error or omission by the Named Insured's employees or volunteer workers in the rendering of: a. professional health care services on behalf of the Named Insured or b. Good Samaritan services rendered in an emergency and for which no payment is demanded or received. Professional health care services means any health care services or the related furnishing of food, beverages, medical supplies or appliances by the following providers in their capacity as such but solely to the extent they are duly licensed as required: a. Physician; b. Nurse; c. Nurse practitioner; d. Emergency medical technician; e. Paramedic; f. Dentist; g. Physical therapist; h. Psychologist; I. Speech therapist; j. Other allied health professional; or Professional health care services does not include any services rendered in connection with human clinical trials or product testing. ii. delete the definition of occurrence and replace it with the following: Occurrence means a health care incident. All acts, errors or omissions that are logically connected by any common fact, circumstance, situation, transaction, event, advice or decision will be considered to constitute a single occurrence; iii. amend the definition of Insured to: a. add the following: the Named Insured's employees are Insureds with respect to: (1) bodily injury to a co-employee while in the course of the co-employee's employment by the Named Insured or while performing duties related to the conduct of the Named Insured's business; and CNA74705XX (1-15) Paae 10 of 17 Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Contractors' General Liability Extension Endorsement (2) bodily injury to a volunteer worker while performing duties related to the conduct of the Named Insured's business; when such bodily injury arises out of a health care incident. the Named Insured's volunteer workers are Insureds with respect to: (1) bodily injury to a co-volunteer worker while performing duties related to the conduct of the Named Insured's business; and (2) bodily injury to an employee while in the course of the employee's employment by the Named Insured or while performing duties related to the conduct of the Named Insured's business; when such bodily injury arises out of a health care incident. b. delete Subparagraphs (a), (b), (c)and(d) of Paragraph 2.a.(1) of WHO IS AN INSURED. D. The Other Insurance condition is amended to delete Paragraph b.(1) in its entirety and replace it with the following: Other Insurance b. Excess Insurance (1) To the extent this insurance applies, it is excess over any other insurance, self insurance or risk transfer instrument, whether primary, excess, contingent or on any other basis, except for insurance purchased specifically by the Named Insured to be excess of this coverage. 14. JOINT VENTURES/PARTNERSHIP/LIMITED LIABILITY COMPANIES WHO IS AN INSURED is amended to delete its last paragraph and replace it with the following: No person or organization is an Insured with respect to the conduct of any current or past partnership,joint venture or limited liability company that is not shown as a Named Insured in the Declarations, except that if the Named Insured was a joint venturer, partner, or member of a limited liability company and such joint venture, partnership or limited liability company terminated prior to or during the policy period, such Named Insured is an Insured with respect to its interest in such joint venture, partnership or limited liability company but only to the extent that: a. any offense giving rise to personal and advertising injury occurred prior to such termination date, and the personal and advertising injury arising out of such offense first occurred after such termination date; b. the bodily injury or property damage first occurred after such termination date; and c. there is no other valid and collectible insurance purchased specifically to insure the partnership, joint venture or N limited liability company; and If the joint venture, partnership or limited liability company is or was insured under a consolidated (wrap-up) insurance program, then such insurance will always be considered valid and collectible for the purpose of paragraph c. above. But this provision will not serve to exclude bodily injury, property damage or personal and advertising injury that would otherwise be covered under the Contractors General Liability Extension Endorsement provision entitled WRAP-UP EXTENSION: OCIP, CCIP, OR CONSOLIDATED (WRAP-UP) INSURANCE PROGRAMS. Please see that provision for the definition of consolidated (wrap-up) insurance program. 15. LEGAL LIABILITY — DAMAGE TO PREMISES / ALIENATED PREMISES / PROPERTY IN THE NAMED INSURED'S CARE, CUSTODY OR CONTROL A. Under COVERAGES, Coverage A — Bodily Injury and Property Damage Liability, the paragraph entitled Exclusions is amended to delete exclusion j. Damage to Property in its entirety and replace it with the following: This insurance does not apply to: CNA74705XX (1-15) Page 11 of 17 Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Contractors' General Liability Extension Endorsement j. Damage to Property Property damage to: (1) Property the Named Insured owns, rents, or occupies, including any costs or expenses incurred by you, or any other person, organization or entity, for repair, replacement, enhancement, restoration or maintenance of such property for any reason, including prevention of injury to a person or damage to another's property; (2) Premises the Named Insured sells, gives away or abandons, if the property damage arises out of any part of those premises; (3) Property loaned to the Named Insured; (4) Personal property in the care,custody or control of the Insured; (5) That particular part of real property on which the Named Insured or any contractors or subcontractors working directly or indirectly on the Named Insured's behalf are performing operations, if the property damage arises out of those operations; or (6) That particular part of any property that must be restored, repaired or replaced because your work was incorrectly performed on it. Paragraphs (1), (3) and (4) of this exclusion do not apply to property damage (other than damage by fire) to premises rented to the Named Insured or temporarily occupied by the Named Insured with the permission of the owner, nor to the contents of premises rented to the Named Insured for a period of 7 or fewer consecutive days. A separate limit of insurance applies to Damage To Premises Rented To You as described in LIMITS OF INSURANCE. Paragraph (2) of this exclusion does not apply if the premises are your work. Paragraphs (3), (4), (5) and (6) of this exclusion do not apply to liability assumed under a sidetrack agreement. Paragraph (6) of this exclusion does not apply to property damage included in the products-completed operations hazard. Paragraphs (3) and(4) of this exclusion do not apply to property damage to: i. tools, or equipment the Named Insured borrows from others, nor ii. other personal property of others in the Named Insured's care,custody or control while being used in the Named Insured's operations away from any Named Insured's premises. However, the coverage granted by this exception to Paragraphs (3)and (4)does not apply to: a. property at a job site awaiting or during such property's installation, fabrication, or erection; b. property that is mobile equipment leased by an Insured; c. property that is an auto, aircraft or watercraft; d. property in transit; or e. any portion of property damage for which the Insured has available other valid and collectible insurance, or would have such insurance but for exhaustion of its limits, or but for application of one of its exclusions. A separate limit of insurance and deductible apply to such property of others. See LIMITS OF INSURANCE as amended below. CNA74705XX (1-15) Page 12 of 17 Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Contractors' General Liability Extension Endorsement B. Under COVERAGES, Coverage A — Bodily Injury and Property Damage Liability, the paragraph entitled Exclusions is amended to delete its last paragraph and replace it with the following: Exclusions c. through n. do not apply to damage by fire to premises while rented to a Named Insured or temporarily occupied by a Named Insured with permission of the owner, nor to damage to the contents of premises rented to a Named Insured for a period of 7 or fewer consecutive days. A separate limit of insurance applies to this coverage as described in LIMITS OF INSURANCE. C. The following paragraph is added to LIMITS OF INSURANCE: Subject to 5. above, $25,000 is the most the Insurer will pay under Coverage A for damages arising out of any one occurrence because of the sum of all property damage to borrowed tools or equipment, and to other personal property of others in the Named Insured's care, custody or control, while being used in the Named Insured's operations away from any Named Insured's premises. The Insurer's obligation to pay such property damage does not apply until the amount of such property damage exceeds $1,000. The Insurer has the right but not the duty to pay any portion of this $1,000 in order to effect settlement. If the Insurer exercises that right, the Named Insured will promptly reimburse the Insurer for any such amount. D. Paragraph 6., Damage To Premises Rented To You Limit, of LIMITS OF INSURANCE is deleted and replaced by the following: 6. Subject to Paragraph 5. above, (the Each Occurrence Limit), the Damage To Premises Rented To You Limit is the most the Insurer will pay under Coverage A for damages because of property damage to any one premises while rented to the Named Insured or temporarily occupied by the Named Insured with the permission of the owner, including contents of such premises rented to the Named Insured for a period of 7 or fewer consecutive days. The Damage To Premises Rented To You Limit is the greater of: a. $500,000; or b. The Damage To Premises Rented To You Limit shown in the Declarations. E. Paragraph 4.b.(1)(a)(ii)of the Other Insurance Condition is deleted and replaced by the following: (ii) That is property insurance for premises rented to the Named Insured, for premises temporarily occupied by the Named Insured with the permission of the owner; or for personal property of others in the Named Insured's care, custody or control; n 16. LIQUOR LIABILITY rn N Under COVERAGES, Coverage A — Bodily Injury and Property Damage Liability, the paragraph entitled 0 0 Exclusions is amended to delete the exclusion entitled Liquor Liability. 0 0 0 This LIQUOR LIABILITY provision does not apply to any person or organization who otherwise qualifies as an additional insured on this Coverage Part. 17. MEDICAL PAYMENTS A. LIMITS OF INSURANCE is amended to delete Paragraph 7. (the Medical Expense Limit) and replace it with the following: 7. Subject to Paragraph 5. above (the Each Occurrence Limit), the Medical Expense Limit is the most the Insurer will pay under Coverage C — Medical Payments for all medical expenses because of bodily injury sustained by any one person. The Medical Expense Limit is the greater of: (1) $15,000 unless a different amount is shown here: $N,NNN,NNN,NNN; or (2) the amount shown in the Declarations for Medical Expense Limit. CNA74705XX (1-15) Page 13 of 17 Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Contractors' General Liability Extension Endorsement B. Under COVERAGES, the Insuring Agreement of Coverage C — Medical Payments is amended to replace Paragraph 1.a.(3)(b)with the following: (b) The expenses are incurred and reported to the Insurer within three years of the date of the accident; and 18. NON-OWNED AIRCRAFT Under COVERAGES, Coverage A — Bodily Injury and Property Damage Liability, the paragraph entitled Exclusions is amended as follows: The exclusion entitled Aircraft,Auto or Watercraft is amended to add the following: This exclusion does not apply to an aircraft not owned by any Named Insured, provided that: 1. the pilot in command holds a currently effective certificate issued by the duly constituted authority of the United States of America or Canada, designating that person as a commercial or airline transport pilot; 2. the aircraft is rented with a trained, paid crew to the Named Insured; and 3. the aircraft is not being used to carry persons or property for a charge. 19. NON-OWNED WATERCRAFT Under COVERAGES, Coverage A — Bodily Injury and Property Damage Liability, the paragraph entitled Exclusions is amended to delete subparagraph (2) of the exclusion entitled Aircraft, Auto or Watercraft, and replace it with the following. This exclusion does not apply to: (2) a watercraft that is not owned by any Named Insured, provided the watercraft is: (a) less than 75 feet long;and (b) not being used to carry persons or property for a charge. 20. PERSONAL AND ADVERTISING INJURY—DISCRIMINATION OR HUMILIATION A. Under DEFINITIONS, the definition of personal and advertising injury is amended to add the following tort: Discrimination or humiliation that results in injury to the feelings or reputation of a natural person. B. Under COVERAGES, Coverage B — Personal and Advertising Injury Liability, the paragraph entitled Exclusions is amended to: 1. delete the Exclusion entitled Knowing Violation Of Rights Of Another and replace it with the following: This insurance does not apply to: Knowing Violation of Rights of Another Personal and advertising injury caused by or at the direction of the Insured with the knowledge that the act would violate the rights of another and would inflict personal and advertising injury. This exclusion shall not apply to discrimination or humiliation that results in injury to the feelings or reputation of a natural person, but only if such discrimination or humiliation is not done intentionally by or at the direction of: (a) the Named Insured; or (b) any executive officer, director, stockholder, partner, member or manager (if the Named Insured is a limited liability company) of the Named Insured. 2. add the following exclusions: CNA74705XX (1-15) Page 14 of 17 Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Contractors' General Liability Extension Endorsement This insurance does not apply to: Employment Related Discrimination Discrimination or humiliation directly or indirectly related to the employment, prospective employment, past employment or termination of employment of any person by any Insured. Premises Related Discrimination discrimination or humiliation arising out of the sale, rental, lease or sub-lease or prospective sale, rental, lease or sub-lease of any room,dwelling or premises by or at the direction of any Insured. Notwithstanding the above, there is no coverage for fines or penalties levied or imposed by a governmental entity because of discrimination. The coverage provided by this PERSONAL AND ADVERTISING INJURY —DISCRIMINATION OR HUMILIATION Provision does not apply to any person or organization whose status as an Insured derives solely from Provision 1.ADDITIONAL INSURED of this endorsement; or attachment of an additional insured endorsement to this Coverage Part. This PERSONAL AND ADVERTISING INJURY —DISCRIMINATION OR HUMILIATION Provision does not apply to any person or organization who otherwise qualifies as an additional insured on this Coverage Part. 21. PERSONAL AND ADVERTISING INJURY-CONTRACTUAL LIABILITY A. Under COVERAGES, Coverage B —Personal and Advertising Injury Liability, the paragraph entitled Exclusions is amended to delete the exclusion entitled Contractual Liability. B. Solely for the purpose of the coverage provided by this PERSONAL AND ADVERTISING INJURY - CONTRACTUAL LIABILITY provision, the following changes are made to the section entitled SUPPLEMENTARY PAYMENTS—COVERAGES A AND B: 1. Paragraph 2.d. is replaced by the following: d. The allegations in the suit and the information the Insurer knows about the offense alleged in such suit are such that no conflict appears to exist between the interests of the Insured and the interests of the indemnitee; n 2. The first unnumbered paragraph beneath Paragraph 2.f.(2)(b) is deleted and replaced by the following: N O 0 So long as the above conditions are met, attorneys fees incurred by the Insurer in the defense of that indemnitee, necessary litigation expenses incurred by the Insurer, and necessary litigation expenses incurred by the indemnitee at the Insurer's request will be paid as defense costs. Such payments will not be deemed to be damages for personal and advertising injury and will not reduce the limits of insurance. C. This PERSONAL AND ADVERTISING INJURY - CONTRACTUAL LIABILITY Provision does not apply if Coverage B —Personal and Advertising Injury Liability is excluded by another endorsement attached to this Coverage Part. This PERSONAL AND ADVERTISING INJURY - CONTRACTUAL LIABILITY Provision does not apply to any person or organization who otherwise qualifies as an additional insured on this Coverage Part. 22. PROPERTY DAMAGE—ELEVATORS A. Under COVERAGES, Coverage A — Bodily Injury and Property Damage Liability, the paragraph entitled Exclusions is amended such that the Damage to Your Product Exclusion and subparagraphs (3), (4) and (6) of the Damage to Property Exclusion do not apply to property damage that results from the use of elevators. CNA74705XX (1-15) Page 15 of 17 Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Contractors' General Liability Extension Endorsement B. Solely for the purpose of the coverage provided by this PROPERTY DAMAGE — ELEVATORS Provision, the Other Insurance conditions is amended to add the following paragraph: This insurance is excess over any of the other insurance, whether primary, excess, contingent or on any other basis that is Property insurance covering property of others damaged from the use of elevators. 23. SUPPLEMENTARY PAYMENTS The section entitled SUPPLEMENTARY PAYMENTS—COVERAGES A AND B is amended as follows: A. Paragraph 1.b. is amended to delete the $250 limit shown for the cost of bail bonds and replace it with a $5,000. limit;and B. Paragraph 1.d. is amended to delete the limit of $250 shown for daily loss of earnings and replace it with a $1,000. limit. 24. UNINTENTIONAL FAILURE TO DISCLOSE HAZARDS If the Named Insured unintentionally fails to disclose all existing hazards at the inception date of the Named Insured's Coverage Part, the Insurer will not deny coverage under this Coverage Part because of such failure. 25. WAIVER OF SUBROGATION- BLANKET Under CONDITIONS, the condition entitled Transfer Of Rights Of Recovery Against Others To Us is amended to add the following: The Insurer waives any right of recovery the Insurer may have against any person or organization because of payments the Insurer makes for injury or damage arising out of: 1. the Named Insured's ongoing operations; or 2. your work included in the products-completed operations hazard. However, this waiver applies only when the Named Insured has agreed in writing to waive such rights of recovery in a written contract or written agreement, and only if such contract or agreement: 1. is in effect or becomes effective during the term of this Coverage Part; and 2. was executed prior to the bodily injury, property damage or personal and advertising injury giving rise to the claim. 26. WRAP-UP EXTENSION: OCIP, CCIP, OR CONSOLIDATED (WRAP-UP) INSURANCE PROGRAMS Note: The following provision does not apply to any public construction project in the state of Oklahoma, nor to any construction project in the state of Alaska, that is not permitted to be insured under a consolidated (wrap-up) insurance program by applicable state statute or regulation. If the endorsement EXCLUSION — CONSTRUCTION WRAP-UP is attached to this policy, or another exclusionary endorsement pertaining to Owner Controlled Insurance Programs (O.C.I.P.) or Contractor Controlled Insurance Programs (C.C.I.P.) is attached, then the following changes apply: A. The following wording is added to the above-referenced endorsement: With respect to a consolidated (wrap-up) insurance program project in which the Named Insured is or was involved, this exclusion does not apply to those sums the Named Insured become legally obligated to pay as damages because of: 1. Bodily injury, property damage, or personal or advertising injury that occurs during the Named Insured's ongoing operations at the project, or during such operations of anyone acting on the Named Insured's behalf; nor CNA74705XX (1-15) Page 16 of 17 Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Contractors' General Liability Extension Endorsement 2. Bodily injury or property damage included within the products-completed operations hazard that arises out of those portions of the project that are not residential structures. B. Condition 4.Other Insurance is amended to add the following subparagraph 4.b.(1)(c): This insurance is excess over: (c) Any of the other insurance whether primary, excess, contingent or any other basis that is insurance available to the Named Insured as a result of the Named Insured being a participant in a consolidated (wrap-up) insurance program, but only as respects the Named Insured's involvement in that consolidated (wrap-up) insurance program. C. DEFINITIONS is amended to add the following definitions: Consolidated (wrap-up) insurance program means a construction, erection or demolition project for which the prime contractor/project manager or owner of the construction project has secured general liability insurance covering some or all of the contractors or subcontractors involved in the project, such as an Owner Controlled Insurance Program (O.C.I.P.) or Contractor Controlled Insurance Program (C.C.I.P.). Residential structure means any structure where 30% or more of the square foot area is used or is intended to be used for human residency, including but not limited to: 1. single or multifamily housing, apartments, condominiums, townhouses, co-operatives or planned unit developments; and 2. the common areas and structures appurtenant to the structures in paragraph 1. (including pools, hot tubs, detached garages, guest houses or any similar structures). However, when there is no individual ownership of units, residential structure does not include military housing, college/university housing or dormitories, long term care facilities, hotels or motels. Residential structure also does not include hospitals or prisons. This WRAP-UP EXTENSION: OCIP, CCIP, OR CONSOLIDATED (WRAP-UP) INSURANCE PROGRAMS Provision does not apply to any person or organization who otherwise qualifies as an additional insured on this Coverage Part. All other terms and conditions of the Policy remain unchanged. n This endorsement,which forms a part of and is for attachment to the Policy issued by the designated Insurers, takes effect N on the effective date of said Policy at the hour stated in said Policy, unless another effective date is shown below, and expires concurrently with said Policy. N O O O CNA74705XX (1-15) Page 17 of 17 Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 POLICY NUMBER INSURED NAME AND ADDRESS C 6020650985 ASSOCIATED CONSTRUCTION PARTNERS, LTD. 215 W BANDERA RD STE 114-461 BOERNE, TX 78006-2820 POLICY CHANGES CA 2048 DESIGNATED INSURED BLANKET This Change Endorsement changes the Policy. Please read it carefully. This Change Endorsement is a part of your Policy and takes effect on the effective date of your Policy, unless another effective date is shown. THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. DESIGNATED INSURED BLANKET ANY PERSON OR ORGANIZATION THAT THE NAMED INSURED IS OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE INSURANCE WHERE REQUIRED BY A WRITTEN CONTRACT OR AGREEMENT IS AN INSURED, BUT ONLY WITH RESPECT TO LEGAL RESPONSIBILITY FOR ACTS OR OMISSIONS OF A PERSON OR ORGANIZATION FOR WHOM LIABILITY COVERAGE IS AFFORDED UNDER THIS POLICY. C V Secretary Chairman of the Board G-56015-B (ED. 11/91) DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 Named Insured: Associated Construction Partners, Ltd. Policy Number: 6020650985 COMMERCIAL AUTO CA 04 44 10 13 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. WAIVER OF TRANSFER OF RIGHTS OF RECOVERY AGAINST OTHERS TO US (WAIVER OF SUBROGATION) This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: AUTO DEALERS COVERAGE FORM BUSINESS AUTO COVERAGE FORM MOTOR CARRIER COVERAGE FORM With respect to coverage provided by this endorsement, the provisions of the Coverage Form apply unless modified by the endorsement. This endorsement changes the policy effective on the inception date of the policy unless another date is indicated below. Named Insured: ASSOCIATED CONSTRUCTION PARTNERS, LTD. Endorsement Effective Date: SCHEDULE Name(s) Of Person(s) Or Organization(s): ANY PERSON OR ORGANIZATION FOR WHOM OR WHICH YOU ARE REQUIRED BY WRITTEN CONTRACT OR AGREEMENT TO OBTAIN THIS WAIVER FROM US. YOU MUST AGREE TO THAT REQUIREMENT PRIOR TO LOSS. Information required to complete this Schedule, if not shown above,will be shown in the Declarations. 0 The Transfer Of Rights Of Recovery Against Others To Us condition does not apply to the person(s) or organization(s) shown in the Schedule, but only to the extent that subrogation is waived prior to the "accident" or the "loss" under a contract with that person or " organization. CA 04 44 10 13 Copyright, Insurance Services Office, Inc., 2011 Page 1 of 1 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Changes - Notice of Cancellation or Material Restriction Endorsement This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART EMPLOYEE BENEFITS LIABILITY COVERAGE PART LIQUOR LIABILITY COVERAGE PART OWNERS AND CONTRACTORS PROTECTIVE LIABILITY COVERAGE PART PRODUCTS/COMPLETED OPERATIONS LIABILITY COVERAGE PART RAILROAD PROTECTIVE LIABILITY COVERAGE PART STOP GAP LIABILITY COVERAGE PART TECHNOLOGY ERRORS AND OMISSIONS LIABILITY COVERAGE PART SPECIAL PROTECTIVE AND HIGHWAY LIABILITY POLICY—NEW YORK DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION SCHEDULE Number of days notice(other than for nonpayment of premium): 030 Number of days notice for nonpayment of premium: N/A Name of person or organization to whom notice will be sent: PER SCHEDULE ON FILE. CANCELLATION NOTICE WILL NOT BE SENT WHEN THE REASON IS FOR NONPAYMENT OF PREMIUM. Address: PER SCHEDULE ON FILE If no entry appears above, the number of days notice for nonpayment of premium will be 10 days. N It is understood and agreed that in the event of cancellation or any material restrictions in coverage during the policy period, the Insurer also agrees to mail prior written notice of cancellation or material restriction to the person or organization listed in the above Schedule. Such notice will be sent prior to such cancellation in the manner prescribed in the above Schedule. 0 0 0 0 N O O V All other terms and conditions of the Policy remain unchanged. This endorsement,which forms a part of and is for attachment to the Policy issued by the designated Insurers, takes effect on the effective date of said Policy at the hour stated in said Policy, unless another effective date is shown below, and expires concurrently with said Policy. CNA74702XX (1-15) Policy No: 6020651005 Page 1 of 1 Endorsement No: 28 CONTINENTAL CASUALTY COMPANY Effective Date: 10/04/2021 Insured Name:Associated Construction Partners, Ltd. Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 Business Auto Policy CNA !r !� MCC= !r !rp ryry (� ( �„ ry, !�������������� ����������'�������� �������������������� ��������������� III IIIIIIII IIII��IIII�II�IIIIIIII II��IIIIIIII�I�IIIII IIIIIII ��������������� It is understood and agreed that this endorsement amends the BUSINESS AUTO COVERAGE FORM as follows: In the event of cancellation or material change that reduces or restricts the insurance provided by this Coverage Form, we agree to send prior notice of cancellation or material change to the person or organization scheduled below at the address scheduled below. This endorsement does not amend our obligation to notify the Named Insured of cancellation as described in the Common Policy Conditions or in another endorsement attached to this policy. SCHEDULE 1. Number of days advance notice: 10 Days if we cancel for non-payment of premium. 30 Days if the policy is cancelled for any other reason, or if coverage is restricted or reduced by endorsement. 2. Person or Organization's Name and Address Name: Per List on file Attention: Street Address: City, State, ZIP: E-mail address: All other terms and conditions of the policy remain unchanged This endorsement, which forms a part of and is for attachment to the policy issued by the designated Insurers, takes effect on the Policy Effective date of said policy at the hour stated in said policy, unless another effective date (the Endorsement Effective Date) is shown below, and expires concurrently with said policy. ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ Form No: CNA72315XX (02-2013) Policy No.: 6020650985 Endorsement Effective Date: Endorsement Expiration Date: Policy Effective Date: 10/04/2021 Endorsement No: 17; Page: 1 of 1 _ Underwriting Company: The Continental Insurance Company, 151 N Franklin St, Chicago, IL 60606 Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 Business Auto Policy CNA ��s II iI�:� Ili ii-i d r� l u1,�w e iI:'ir ii e iu,il(P THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: BUSINESS AUTO COVERAGE FORM With respect to coverage provided by this endorsement, the provisions of the Coverage Form apply unless modified by the endorsement. A. Liability Coverage is changed as follows: 1. Paragraph a. of the Pollution Exclusion applies only to liability assumed under a contract or agreement. 2. With respect to the coverage afforded by Paragraph A.1 above, Exclusion 13.6 Care, Custody Or Control does not apply. B. Changes In Definitions For the purpose of this endorsement, Paragraph D. of the Definitions Section is replaced by the following: D. "Covered pollution cost or expense" means any cost or expense arising out of: 1. Any request, demand, order or statutory or regulatory requirement; or 2. Any claim or "suit" by or on behalf of a governmental authority demanding that the "insured" or others test for, monitor, clean up, remove, contain, treat, detoxify or neutralize, or in any way respond to, or assess the effects of "pollutants." "Covered pollution cost or expense" does not include any cost or expense arising out of the actual, alleged or threatened discharge, dispersal, seepage, migration, release or escape of "pollutants": a. Before the "pollutants" or any property in which the "pollutants" are contained are moved from the place where they are accepted by the "insured" for movement into or onto the covered "auto"; or b. After the "pollutants" or any property in which the "pollutants" are contained are moved from the covered "auto" to the place where they are finally delivered, disposed of or abandoned by the " insured." Paragraphs a. and b. above do not apply to "accidents" that occur away from premises owned by or rented to an "insured" with respect to "pollutants" not in or upon a covered "auto" if: (1) The "pollutants" or any property in which the "pollutants" are contained are upset, overturned or damaged as a result of the maintenance or use of a covered "auto"; and (2) The discharge, dispersal, seepage, migration, release or escape of the "pollutants" is caused directly by such upset, overturn or damage. C. Property Damage Liability Coverage Deductible The damages that would otherwise be payable under Liability Coverage for "property damage" and " covered pollution cost or expense" caused in any one "accident" will be reduced by the "Property Damage" and "Covered Pollution Cost or Expense" Per "Accident" Deductible shown in the Broadened Pollution Liability Coverage Schedule prior to the application of the Limit Of Insurance provision. ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Form No: G-140378-B (05-2008) Policy No.: 6020650985 Endorsement Effective Date: Endorsement Expiration Date: Policy Effective Date: 10/04/2021 Endorsement No: 19; Page: 1 of 2 Underwriting Company: The Continental Insurance Company, 151 N Franklin St, Chicago, IL 60606 Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 Business Auto Policy CMA ��s II iI�:� Ili ii-i d r� l u1,�w e iI:'ir ii e iu,il(P D. Our Right To Reimbursement To settle any claim or "suit" we may pay all or any part of the deductible shown in the Broadened Pollution Liability Coverage Schedule. If this happens, you must reimburse us for the deductible or the part of the deductible we paid. E. Limit Of Insurance The following is added to Section II, Paragraph C., Limit Of Insurance: Regardless of the number of covered "autos," "insureds," premiums paid, claims made or "suits" brought or persons or organizations making claims or bringing "suits," the most we will pay for the sum of all damages and "covered pollution cost or expense" involving the additional insurance provided by this endorsement is the Aggregate Limit shown in the Broadened Pollution Liability Coverage Schedule. The Aggregate Limit shown in the Broadened Pollution Liability Coverage Schedule applies separately to each consecutive annual period and to any remaining period of less than 12 months, starting with the beginning of the policy period shown in the Declarations, unless the policy period is extended after issuance for an additional period of less than 12 months. In that case, the additional period will be deemed part of the last preceding period for purposes of determining the Aggregate Limit. F. EXCESS COVERAGE The additional insurance provided by this endorsement is in excess of any automobile pollution coverage required by your state and provided for in the Insurance Services Office, Inc. state Changes endorsement attached to this Coverage Form. However, the additional insurance provided by this endorsement does not increase the each "accident" limit of this Coverage Form. Any claim paid for automobile pollution coverage as provided by the Insurance Services Office, Inc. state Changes endorsement attached to this Coverage Form will not be charged against the annual Aggregate Limit shown in the Broadened Pollution Liability Coverage Schedule. All other terms and conditions of the policy remain unchanged This endorsement, which forms a part of and is for attachment to the policy issued by the designated Insurers, takes effect on the Policy Effective date of said policy at the hour stated in said policy, unless another effective date (the Endorsement Effective Date) is shown below, and expires concurrently with said policy. Form No: G-140378-B (05-2008 ormNoG-140378-B05-..2008..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... I Policy No.. 6020650985 Endorsement Effective Date: Endorsement Expiration Date: Endorsement No: 19; Page: 2 of 2 Policy Effective Date: 10/04/2021 Underwriting Company: The Continental Insurance Company, 151 N Franklin St, Chicago, IL 60606 Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Additional Coverage Limited Pollution Liability Coverage - Worksites Endorsement This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART SCHEDULE Limited Pollution Liability Aggregate Limit $2, 000, 000 Each Limited Pollution Incident Limit $1, 000, 000 Pollution Deductible Amount $2, 000 Each Limited Pollution Incident Information required to complete this Schedule, if not shown above,will be shown in the Declarations. It is understood and agreed as follows: I. Under COVERAGES,the following additional coverage is added: LIMITED POLLUTION INCIDENT COVERAGE 1. Insuring Agreement Subject to the Limited Pollution Liability Limits and the Pollution Deductible Amount, the Insurer will pay those sums the Insured becomes legally obligated to pay as damages because of bodily injury or property damage that directly results from a limited pollution incident within the coverage territory, provided that: a. the first emission, discharge, release or escape of the pollutants from which such bodily injury or property damage arises is demonstrable as having occurred during the policy period; and b. such bodily injury or property damage does not qualify for coverage under Coverage A—Bodily Injury and Property Damage Liability,whether or not any Coverage A limits remain; and c. such limited pollution incident happens on or from a worksite. The Insurer will have the right and duty to defend any suit seeking those damages, even if the allegations of the suit are groundless, false or fraudulent. The Insurer may at its discretion investigate any limited pollution incident and settle any claim that may result. But: (1) The Insurer's right and duty to defend end when the Insurer has used up the applicable limit of insurance in the payment of judgments or settlements; and 0 0 (2) The Insurer has no duty to defend suits seeking damages not covered by this insurance. 0 0 No other obligation or liability to pay sums or perform acts or services is covered unless explicitly provided for under SUPPLEMENTARY PAYMENTS—COVERAGES A AND B,which hereby also apply to LIMITED POLLUTION INCIDENT COVERAGE. 2. Exclusions A. Under Coverage A—Bodily Injury And Property Damage Liability,the paragraph entitled Exclusions hereby also applies to LIMITED POLLUTION INCIDENT COVERAGE subject to the following changes, which apply only with respect to the coverage provided by this endorsement: 1. the following exclusions are deleted: a. the exclusions entitled Pollution, Electronic Data and War; b. exclusions attached by endorsement to exclude fungi, microbes, or silica; and C. the endorsement entitled Respirable dust Exclusion Endorsement, if attached to this policy. CNA74844XX(4-15) Policy No: 6020651005 Page 1 of 6 Endorsement No: '7 CONTINENTAL CASUALTY COMPANY Effective Date 10/04/2021 Insured Name:Associated Construction Partners, Ltd. Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Additional Coverage Limited Pollution Liability Coverage - Worksites Endorsement 2. the following entitled exclusions: • Damage To Property • Damage to Your Product; • Damage to Your Work; • Damage to Impaired Property or Property Not Physically Injured; • Recall of Products,Work Or Impaired Property, are deleted and replaced by the following: This insurance does not apply to: • Damage To Property Property Damage to: (1) property at any time owned, rented, or occupied by the Named Insured, including any costs or expenses incurred by the Named Insured, or by any other person, organization or entity,for repair, replacement, enhancement, restoration or maintenance of such property for any reason, including prevention of injury to a person or damage to another's property; (2) premises the Named Insured sells, gives away or abandons if the property damage arises out of any part of those premises; (3) property loaned to an Insured; (4) personal property in the care,custody or control of an Insured; or • Products or Completed Operations bodily injury or property damage included within the products-completed operations hazard. B. With respect only to the coverage provided by this endorsement, the following additional exclusions apply: This insurance does not apply to: • Acid Rain bodily injury or property damage arising out of acid rain. • Cleanup or Monitoring Costs any loss,cost or expense arising out of any: (1) request, demand, order or statutory or regulatory requirement that any Insured or others test for, monitor, clean up, remove, contain, treat, detoxify or neutralize, or in any way respond to or assess the effects of, pollutants: or (2) claim by or on behalf of a governmental authority for damages because of testing for, monitoring, cleaning up, removing, containing, treating, detoxifying or neutralizing, or in any way responding to or assessing the effects of, pollutants. But this exclusion does not apply to liability for damages for property damage that is otherwise covered by this LIMITED POLLUTION INCIDENT COVERAGE. • Failure to Comply With Environmental Statutes bodily injury or property damage arising out of a limited pollution incident which results from, or is directly or indirectly attributable to, failure to comply with any applicable statute, regulation, ordinance, CNA74844XX(4-15) Policy No: 6020651005 Page 2 of 6 Endorsement No: V CONTINENTAL CASUALTY COMPANY Effective Date: 10/04/2021 Insured Name:Associated Construction Partners, Ltd. Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Additional Coverage Limited Pollution Liability Coverage - Worksites Endorsement directive or order relating to the protection of the environment and promulgated by any governmental body, provided that failure to comply is a willful or deliberate act or omission of: (1) the Insured; or (2) the Named Insured or any of the Named Insured's executive officers (if a corporation), members or managers (if a limited liability corporation), or members or partners (if a joint venture or partnership). • Natural Resources any loss,cost or expense arising out of any request, demand, order or suit by a designated natural resource trustee or other person vested with the authority under any federal or state statute to make such claims, that any Insured or others assess, replace, restore or rehabilitate natural resources, or in any way provide compensation for property damage to natural resources due to the effects of pollutants. • Offshore Facilities And Deepwater Ports bodily injury or property damage arising out of the ownership or operation of any offshore facility as defined in the Outer Continental Shelf Lands Act Amendment of 1978 or the Clean Water Act of 1977 as amended 1978 or any deepwater port as defined in the Deepwater Port Act of 1974 as amended or as may be amended. • Priority Clean-up Sites any loss,cost or expense arising out of any request, demand or order by a governmental authority that any Insured or others test for, monitor, clean-up, remove, contain, treat, detoxify or neutralize, or in any way respond to, or assess the effects of pollutants at any site which is included on an EPA or state environmental agency priority clean-up list prior to the limited pollution incident. • Punitive Damages any punitive or exemplary damages nor the multiplied portion of multiplied damages. This exclusion does not apply if such exclusions are not permitted in the state where the Named Insured is domiciled. • Rolling Stock bodily injury or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance, use or entrustment to others of any rolling stock owned or operated by, or rented or loaned to, or loaded or unloaded by any 0 Insured. N 0 • Waste Facilities 0 (1) bodily injury or property damage arising out of a limited pollution incident at or from a waste facility which is a worksite. (2) bodily injury at or from, or property damage to, a waste facility to which waste from the operations of an Insured are consigned. • Wells bodily injury or property damage arising out of the emission, discharge, release or escape of drilling fluid, oil, gas or other fluids from any oil,gas, mineral,water or geothermal well. This exclusion applies without regard to whether vehicle-mounted well servicing equipment contributed to causing the limited pollution incident. II. Under WHO IS AN INSURED, and solely with respect to the coverages provided by this endorsement, the following changes apply: A. paragraph 3. is amended to add the following paragraph d.: CNA74844XX(4-15) Policy No: 6020651005 Page 3 of 6 Endorsement No: '7 CONTINENTAL CASUALTY COMPANY Effective Date: 10/04/2021 Insured Name:Associated Construction Partners, Ltd. Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Additional Coverage Limited Pollution Liability Coverage - Worksites Endorsement d. LIMITED POLLUTION INCIDENT COVERAGE does not apply to: (1) bodily injury or property damage that first occurred; nor (2) limited pollution incidents that first commenced, before the Named Insured acquired or formed the organization. B. the following paragraph is added: No person or organization qualifying as an Insured on any endorsement attached to this Coverage Part is an Insured with respect to bodily injury or property damage arising out of limited pollution incidents other than the Named Insured and the Named Insured's employees. However, with respect to such bodily injury or property damage, if the Named Insured is required under a written contract or written agreement to add a person or organization as an additional insured, then such person or organization is an Insured with respect to the coverage provided by the LIMITED POLLUTION LIABILITY COVERAGE endorsement, but: a. only with respect to such person or organization's liability for acts or omissions of the Named Insured; and b. only if such contract or agreement is currently in effect and was executed prior to the limited pollution incident that caused the bodily injury or property damage. Furthermore, and subject always to the terms and conditions of this Coverage Part, including the limits of insurance, the Insurer will not provide such person or organization with (1) coverage broader than required by such contract or agreement; or (2) a higher limit of insurance than required by such contract or agreement. Any coverage granted by this provision shall apply only to the extent permissible by law. III. LIMITS OF INSURANCE is amended as follows: A. the following paragraphs are added: The Limited Pollution Liability Aggregate Limit shown in the Schedule of the LIMITED POLLUTION LIABILITY COVERAGE endorsement is the most the Insurer will pay under LIMITED POLLUTION LIABILITY COVERAGE for the total of all damages because of bodily injury and property damage resulting from limited pollution incidents. Subject to the Limited Pollution Liability Aggregate Limit described above, the Each Limited Pollution Incident Limit is the most the Insurer will pay under LIMITED POLLUTION LIABILITY COVERAGE for the total of all damages because of bodily injury and property damage resulting from any one limited pollution incident. B. with respect only to property damage arising out of a limited pollution incident the following Deductible provision is added: 1. The Insurer's obligation under LIMITED POLLUTION LIABILITY COVERAGE to pay damages for property damage on the Insured's behalf applies only to the amount of damages in excess of any Pollution Deductible amount stated in the LIMITED POLLUTION LIABILITY COVERAGE endorsement as applicable to Each Limited Pollution Incident. Neither the Each Limited Pollution Incident Limit nor the Limited Pollution Liability Aggregate Limit will be reduced by the application of such deductible amount. 2. The terms of this insurance, including those with respect to: a. the Insurer's right and duty to defend any suits seeking those damages; and b. the Named Insured's duties in the event of an occurrence or claim, apply irrespective of the application of the deductible amount. CNA74844XX(4-15) Policy No: 6020651005 Page 4 of 6 Endorsement No: V CONTINENTAL CASUALTY COMPANY Effective Date: 10/04/2020 Insured Name:Associated Construction Partners, Ltd. Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Additional Coverage Limited Pollution Liability Coverage - Worksites Endorsement 3. The Insurer may pay any part or all of the deductible amount to effect settlement of any claim, and, upon notification of the action taken,the Named Insured shall promptly reimburse the Insurer for such part of the deductible amount as the Insurer has paid. IV. Under CONDITIONS, and with respect only to the coverage provided by this endorsement, paragraph a. of the condition entitled Duties In The Event of Pollution Incident, Claim or Suit is deleted and replaced by the following: Duties In The Event of Pollution Incident, Claim or Suit. a. The Named Insured must see to it that the Insurer is notified as soon as practicable of an occurrence or offense which may result in a claim. To the extent possible, notice should include: (1) how,when, and where the occurrence or offense took place; (2) the names and addresses of any injured persons and witnesses; and (3) the nature and location of: i. any injury or damage arising out of the occurrence or offense; and ii. any limited pollution incident, and of the pollutants that escaped or were emitted, discharged or released in the limited pollution incident. V. Solely with respect to the coverage granted by this Endorsement, and notwithstanding anything to the contrary in any endorsement attached to this Coverage Part, the section entitled Definitions is amended as follows,: A. the following definitions are added: Above-ground means on or above: a. the surface of the land; b. the basement floor of any building; or c. any navigable or surface body of water. Limited pollution incident means an accidental emission, discharge, release, or escape of pollutants that results in the injurious presence of pollutants in or upon land,the atmosphere, interior of a building or any water 0 course, body of water or ground water. A series of emissions, discharges, releases or escapes of pollutants that are logically or causally connected by any common fact, circumstance, situation, transaction, event, advice or decision will be deemed to be one limited pollution incident. All bodily injury and property damage resulting from one limited pollution incident shall be deemed to have occurred only at the commencement date of the 0 limited pollution incident. Waste facility means any site to which waste is delivered for storage, disposal, processing or treatment,whether or not such site is licensed by a governmental authority to perform such storage, disposal, processing or treatment. Worksite means any site or location on which any Insured or any contractors or subcontractors working directly or indirectly on any Insured's behalf are performing operations, including sites temporarily borrowed or rented in support of a single worksite for storage of construction equipment. Worksite does not include any premises, site or location: (1) which is or was at any time owned by, rented or loaned to any Insured; nor (2) occupied by any Insured for any purpose other than performing construction operations for others. B. the following definitions are amended: 1. The definition of damages is amended to add the following: CNA74844XX(4-15) Policy No: 6020651005 Page 5 of 6 Endorsement No: '7 CONTINENTAL CASUALTY COMPANY Effective Date: 10/04/2021 Insured Name:Associated Construction Partners, Ltd. Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Additional Coverage Limited Pollution Liability Coverage - Worksites Endorsement Damages also do not include fines or penalties. 2. the first sentence of paragraph f. of the definition of insured contract is deleted and replaced by the following: f. That part of any other written contract or written agreement pertaining to the Named Insured's business (including an indemnification of a municipality in connection with work performed for a municipality) under which the Named Insured assumes the tort liability of another party to pay for bodily injury or property damage to a third person or organization, provided the bodily injury or property damage is entirely caused by the Named Insured or by those acting on the Named Insured's behalf. However, such part of a contract or agreement shall only be considered an insured contract to the extent the Named Insured's assumption of the tort liability is permitted by law. This amendment does not apply if paragraph f. has been deleted without replacement by another endorsement attached to this Coverage Part. All other terms and conditions of the Policy remain unchanged. This endorsement,which forms a part of and is for attachment to the Policy issued by the designated Insurers, takes effect on the effective date of said Policy at the hour stated in said Policy, unless another effective date is shown below, and expires concurrently with said Policy. CNA74844XX(4-15) Policy No: 6020651005 Page 6 of 6 Endorsement No: V CONTINENTAL CASUALTY COMPANY Effective Date: 10/04/2021 Insured Name:Associated Construction Partners, Ltd. Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 DATE(MM/DD/YYYY) ACCOR" CERTIFICATE OF PROPERTY INSURANCE 3/23/2022 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER,AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. PRODUCER CONTACT NAME: Jayme York IBTX Risk Services PHONE FAX 32335 US Hwy 281 N. A C No Ext):2149897100 A/C,No:210-696-8414 E-MASuite#1201 ADDRESS: service@Ib-tX.com Bulverde TX 78163 PRODUCER CUSTOMER ID: INSURER(S)AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC# INSURED INSURERA: The Hanover Insurance Company 22292 Associated Construction Partners, Ltd. 215 W. Bandera Rd. Ste 114-461 INSURER B: Boerne Tx 78006 INSURERC: INSURER D INSURER E INSURER F: COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER: 1284109096 REVISION NUMBER: LOCATION OF PREMISES/DESCRIPTION OF PROPERTY (Attach ACORD 101,Additional Remarks Schedule,if more space is required) THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT,TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN,THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTIVE POLICY EXPIRATION COVERED PROPERTY LIMITS LTR DATE(MM/DD/YYYY) DATE(MM/DD/YYYY) PROPERTY BUILDING $ CAUSES OF LOSS DEDUCTIBLES PERSONAL PROPERTY $ BASIC BUILDING BUSINESS INCOME $ BROAD CONTENTS EXTRAEXPENSE $ SPECIAL RENTAL VALUE $ EARTHQUAKE BLANKET BUILDING $ WIND BLANKET PERS PROP $ FLOOD BLANKET BLDG&PP $ X INLAND MARINE TYPE OF POLICY X Lmt Single Loc. $6,000,000 CAUSES OF LOSS Install/Builders Risk X In Transit $500,000 NAMED PERILS POLICY NUMBER X Temp.Loc. $500,000 A X Special/Includes Theft IHD D298273 05 10/4/2021 10/4/2022 $ CRIME TYPE OF POLICY $ BOILER&MACHINERY/ $ EQUIPMENT BREAKDOWN SPECIAL CONDITIONS/OTHER COVERAGES(ACORD 101,Additional Remarks Schedule,may be attached if more space is required) Certificate Holder is listed as Loss Payee as their interest may appear when required by written contract. Builders Risk/Installation Floater Policy- all risk including theft Annual Reporting form. Project:Citywide Lift Station Repairs(Williams Lift Station), Project 21143, RFB 3897 CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF,NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. Urban Engineering 2725 Swantener Dr AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE Corpus Christi TX 78404 ©1995-2015 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. ACORD 24(2016/03) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD DnGn"Ah.—K—Wrl rl3OG074n4 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 AAIS This endorsement changes IM 7851 04 04 the Inland Marine Coverage Page 1 of 1 --PLEASE READ THIS CAREFULLY-- ADDITIONAL INSURED SCHEDULE (The entries required to complete this endorsement will be shown below or on the"schedule of coverages".) San Antonio Water System PO Box1000085-XD Duluth,GA 30096 IM 7851 04 04 Copyright,American Association of Insurance Services,Inc.,2004 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 0 °b�nnwo�Ay"v 1852 00 52 23 AGREEMENT This Agreement is between the City of Corpus Christi (Owner) and Associated Construction Partners, Ltd. (Contractor). Owner and Contractor agree as follows: ARTICLE 1—WORK 1.01 Contractor shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Work is generally described as: Citywide Lift Station Repairs 2018-2019(Williams L. S.) Project No.21143 ARTICLE 2—DESIGNER AND OWNER'S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE 2.01 The Project has been designed by: Urban Engineering TBPE Firm No. 145 2725 Swantner Drive Corpus Christi,TX 78404 Brian Wik, P. E. brianw@urbaneng.com 2.02 The Owner's Authorized Representative for this Project is: Brett Van Hazel, PMP City of Corpus Christi—Engineering Services 4917 Holly Road, Bldg. No.5 Corpus Christi,TX 78411 brettvh@cctexas.com ARTICLE 3—CONTRACT TIMES 3.01 Contract Times A. The Work is required to be substantially completed within 240 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in the Notice to Proceed and is to be completed Agreement 005223- 1 Citywide Lift Station Repairs 2018-2019(Williams L.S.)—Project No: 21143 Rev 7/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions within 270 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run. B. Performance of the Work is required as shown in Paragraph 7.02 of the General Conditions. C. Milestones, and the dates for completion of each, are as defined in Section 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES. 3.02 Liquidated Damages A. Owner and Contractor recognize that time limits for specified Milestones, Substantial Completion, and completion and readiness for Final Payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. Owner and Contractor recognize that the Owner will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in Paragraph 3.01 and as adjusted in accordance with Paragraph 11.05 of the General Conditions. Owner and Contractor also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration proceeding the actual loss suffered by Owner if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof,Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty): 1. Substantial Completion: Contractor shall pay Owner$500 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete. 2. Completion of the Remaining Work: Contractor agrees to pay Owner$500 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for completion and readiness for final payment until the Work is completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions. 3. Liquidated damages for failing to timely attain Substantial Completion and Final Completion are not additive and will not be imposed concurrently. 4. Milestones: Contractor agrees to pay Owner liquidated damages as stipulated in SECTION 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES for failure to meet Milestone completions. 5. The Owner will determine whether the Work has been completed within the Contract Times. B. Owner is not required to only assess liquidated damages, and Owner may elect to pursue its actual damages resulting from the failure of Contractor to complete the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 4—CONTRACT PRICE 4.01 Owner will pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents at the unit prices shown in the attached BID FORM. Unit prices have been computed in accordance with Paragraph 15.03 of the General Conditions. Contractor acknowledges that estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and were solely for the purpose of comparing Bids, and final payment for all unit price items will be based on actual quantities, determined as provided in the Contract Documents. Total Base Bid Price $ 11,615,000 Agreement 005223-2 Citywide Lift Station Repairs 2018-2019(Williams L.S.)—Project No: 21143 Rev 7/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 ARTICLE 5—PAYMENT PROCEDURES 5.01 Submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 17 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by the OAR as provided in the General Conditions. 5.02 Progress Payments; Retainage: A. The Owner will make progress payments on or about the 25th day of each month during performance of the Work. Payment is based on Work completed in accordance with the Schedule of Values established as provided in the General Conditions. B. Progress payments equal to the full amount of the total earned value to date for completed Work minus the retainage listed below and properly stored materials will be made prior to Substantial Completion. 1. The standard retainage is 5 percent. C. Payment will be made for the amount determined per Paragraph 5.02.13, less the total of payments previously made and less set-offs determined in accordance with Paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions. D. At the Owner's option, retainage may be increased to a higher percentage rate, not to exceed ten percent, if progress on the Project is considered to be unsatisfactory. If retainage in excess of the amount described above is held prior to Substantial Completion,the Owner will place the additional amount in an interest bearing account. Interest will be paid in accordance with Paragraph 6.01. E. At the Owner's option, Owner may pay Contractor 100 percent of the Work completed, less amounts withheld in accordance with Paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions and less 200 percent of OAR's estimate of the value of Work to be completed or corrected to reach Substantial Completion. Owner may, at its sole discretion, elect to hold retainage in the amounts set forth above for progress payments prior to Substantial Completion if Owner has concerns with the ability of the Contractor to complete the remaining Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or within the time frame established by this Agreement. Release or reduction in retainage is contingent upon and consent of surety to the reduction in retainage. 5.03 Owner will pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by OAR in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions upon Final Completion and acceptance of the Work. ARTICLE 6—INTEREST ON OVERDUE PAYMENTS AND RETAINAGE 6.01 The Owner is not obligated to pay interest on overdue payments except as required by Texas Government Code Chapter 2251. Invoices must comply with Article 17 of the General Conditions. 6.02 Except as specified in Article 5, the Owner is not obligated to pay interest on moneys not paid except as provided in Texas Government Code Chapter 2252. Agreement 005223-3 Citywide Lift Station Repairs 2018-2019(Williams L.S.)—Project No: 21143 Rev 7/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIONS 7.01 The Contractor makes the following representations: A. The Contractor has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents and the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents. B. The Contractor has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. C. The Contractor is familiar with Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. D. The Contractor has carefully studied the following Site-related reports and drawings as identified in the Supplementary Conditions: 1. Geotechnical Data Reports regarding subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; 2. Drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site; 3. Underground Facilities referenced in reports and drawings; 4. Reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent to the Site; and 5. Technical Data related to each of these reports and drawings. E. The Contractor has considered the: 1. Information known to Contractor; 2. Information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; 3. Information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; and 4. The Contract Documents. F. The Contractor has considered the items identified in Paragraphs 7.01.D and 7.01.E with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and documents on: 1. The cost, progress, and performance of the Work; 2. The means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor; and 3. Contractor's safety precautions and programs. G. Based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraphs, Contractor agrees that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. H. The Contractor is aware of the general nature of Work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents. I. The Contractor has correlated the information known to the Contractor, information and observations obtained from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Contract Agreement 005223-4 Citywide Lift Station Repairs 2018-2019(Williams L.S.)—Project No: 21143 Rev 7/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 Documents, and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Contract Documents. J. The Contractor has given the OAR written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that the Contractor has discovered in the Contract Documents,and the written resolution provided by the OAR is acceptable to the Contractor. K. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. L. Contractor's entry into this Contract constitutes an incontrovertible representation by Contractor that without exception all prices in the Agreement are premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents. M. CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY, DEFEND AND HOLD HARMLESS THE OWNER'S INDEMNITEES IN ACCORDANCE WITH PARAGRAPH 7.14 OF THE GENERAL CONDITIONS AND THE SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. ARTICLE 8—ACCOUNTING RECORDS 8.01 Accounting Record Availability: The Contractor shall keep such full and detailed accounts of materials incorporated and labor and equipment utilized for the Work consistent with the requirements of Paragraph 15.01 of the General Conditions and as may be necessary for proper financial management under this Agreement. Subject to prior written notice,the Owner shall be afforded reasonable access during normal business hours to all of the Contractor's records, books, correspondence, instructions,drawings, receipts,vouchers, memoranda, and similar data relating to the Cost of the Work and the Contractor's fee. The Contractor shall preserve all such documents for a period of 3 years after the final payment by the Owner. ARTICLE 9—CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 9.01 Contents: A. The Contract Documents consist of the following: 1. Exhibits to this Agreement: a. Contractor's Bid Form. b. Wastewater Consent Decree Special Conditions. 2. Specifications, forms, and documents listed in SECTION 00 0100 TABLE OF CONTENTS. 3. Drawings listed in the Sheet Index. 4. Solicitation documents and Contractor's response,which are incorporated by reference. 5. Addenda, which are incorporated by reference. 6. Documentation required by the Contract Documents and submitted by Contractor prior to Notice of Award,which is incorporated by reference. B. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article. C. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in Article 11 of the General Conditions. Agreement 005223-5 Citywide Lift Station Repairs 2018-2019(Williams L.S.)—Project No: 21143 Rev 7/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 ARTICLE 10—CONTRACT DOCUMENT SIGNATURES ATTE§,T CITY(aFORUS CHRISTI ocuSigned by. ocu igne by: � + .. 4/20/2022 4/20/2022 �787.7B2nnF124Zn ,, €aE-58�F�36E-G�Ru^... Rebecca Huerta Jeff Edmonds, P.E. City Secretary Director of Engineering Services M2022-044 AUTHORIZED 3-29-2022 APPROVED AS TO LEGAL FORM: BY COUNCIL DacuSigned by: E �*`X Heay" 4/19/2022 RH/SB 5E9295F£COEB4EC._. Assistant City Attorney ATTEST(IF CORPORATION) CONTRACTOR Associa � ',,I!TVMion Partners, Ltd. (Mrs6vu 4/11/2022 (Seal Below) By: MAMMZF4cM£ Note: Attach copy of authorization to sign if Title: President person signing for CONTRACTOR is not President, Vice President, Chief Executive Officer, or Chief 215 W. Bandera Rd., Ste. 114-461 Financial Officer Address Boerne TX 78006 City State Zip (210) 698-8714 Phone Fax jill@acpartners.org EMail END OF SECTION Agreement 005223-6 Citywide Lift Station Repairs 2018-2019(Williams L.S.)—Project No: 21143 Rev 7/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 WASTEWATER CONSENT DECREE Special Conditions Special Project procedures are required from the CONTRACTOR as specified herein. The CONTRACTOR shall implement and maintain these procedures at the appropriate time, prior to and during performance of the work. The following special conditions and requirements shall apply to the Project: I. Consent Decree Notice Provision — The City of Corpus Christi ("City"), the United States of America and the State of Texas have entered into a Consent Decree in Civil Action No. 2:20-cv-00235, United States of America and State of Texas v. City of Corpus Christi in the United States District Court for the Southern District of Texas, Corpus Christi Division (the "Consent Decree"). A copy of the Consent Decree is available at ht ps://www-c n.cctexas.co /sites/default/files/CC-Consent® ecree.p f By signature of the Contract, CONTRACTOR acknowledges receipt of the Consent Decree. II. Performance of work. CONTRACTOR agrees that any work under this Contract is conditioned upon CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work in conformity with the terms of the Consent Decree. All Work shall be performed in accordance with the Design Criteria for Wastewater Systems under Title 30 Chapter 217 of the Texas Administrative Code, 30 Tex. Admin. Code Ch. 217, and using sound engineering practices to ensure that construction, management, operation and maintenance of the Sewer Collection System complies with the Clean Water Act. Work performed pursuant to this contract is work that the City is required to perform pursuant to the terms of the Consent Decree. In the event of any conflict between the terms and provisions of this Consent Decree and any other terms and provisions of this Contract or the Contract Documents, the terms and provisions of this Consent Decree shall prevail. III. Retention of documents — CONTRACTOR shall retain and preserve all non- identical copies of all documents, reports, research, analytical or other data, records or other information of any kind or character (including documents, records, or other information in electronic form) in its or its sub-contractors' or agents' possession or control, or that come into its or its sub-contractors' or agents' possession or control, and that relate in any manner to this contract, or the performance of any work described in this contract (the "Information"). This retention requirement shall apply regardless of AGREEMENT EXHIBIT - WASTEWATER CONSENT DECREE DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 any contrary city, corporate or institutional policy or procedure. CONTRACTOR, CONTRACTOR's sub-contractors and agents shall retain and shall not destroy any of the Information until five years after the termination of the Consent Decree and with prior written authorization from the City Attorney. CONTRACTOR shall provide the City with copies of any documents, reports, analytical data, or other information required to be maintained at any time upon request from the City. IV. Liability for stipulated penalties — Article IX of the Consent Decree provides that the United States of America, the United States Environmental Protection Agency and the State of Texas may assess stipulated penalties including interest against the City upon the occurrence of certain events. To the extent that CONTRACTOR or CONTRACTOR's agents or sub-contractors cause or contribute to, in whole or in part, the assessment of any stipulated penalty against the City, CONTRACTOR agrees that it shall pay to City the full amount of any stipulated penalty assessed against and paid by City that is caused or contributed to in whole or in part by any action, failure to act, or failure to act within the time required by any provision of this contract. CONTRACTOR shall also pay to City all costs, attorney fees, expert witness fees and all other fees and expenses incurred by City in connection with the assessment or payment of any such stipulated penalties, or in contesting the assessment or payment of any such stipulated penalties. In addition to any and all other remedies to which City may be entitled at law or in equity, CONTRACTOR expressly authorizes City to withhold all amounts assessed and paid as stipulated penalties, and all associated costs, fees, or expenses from any amount unpaid to CONTRACTOR under the terms of this contract, or from any retainage provided in the contract. AGREEMENT EXHIBIT -WASTEWATER CONSENT DECREE DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 ition) Report Created On:2/9/22 9:07:51 PM BID TOTALS BASE BID Total Mobilization/Bonds/Insurance $631,469.00 Lift Station Improvements $10,836,531.00 Mandatory Allocation $147,000.00 Total $11,615,000.00 Mobilization/Bonds/Insurance No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price Al Mobilization(Maximum 5%) LS 1 $499,469.00 $499,469.00 A2 Bonds and Insurance AL 1 $132,000.00 $132,000.00 Subtotal:$631,469.00 Lift Station Improvements No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price B1 Dry Pit Submersible Pumps(Four Main LS 1 $1,896,531.00 $1,896,531.00 &One Jockey)(Pre-Selected and as described in Specification 1 E24) B2 Lift Station Improvements(All work for LS 1 $3,800,000.00 $3,800,000.00 the improvements included in the Contract Documents that are not specifcally described in another bid item.) B3 Electrical Improvements(All work for the LS 1 $3,600,000.00 $3,600,000.00 improvements included in the Contract Documents that are not specifically described in another bid item.) B4 HVAC System LS 1 $190,000.00 $190,000.00 B5 Control of Flow LS 1 $750,000.00 $750,000.00 B6 Wet Well Cleaning LS 1 $150,000.00 $150,000.00 B7 Odor Control System LS 1 $300,000.00 $300,000.00 B8 Temporary Traffic Control LS 1 $150,000.00 $150,000.00 Subtotal:$10,836,531.00 Mandatory Allocation DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 ition) Report Created On:2/9/22 9:07:51 PM No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price C1 Utility Unforeseen Allocation AL 1 $60,000.00 $60,000.00 C2 Force Main Dewatering Allocation AL 1 $10,000.00 $10,000.00 C3 Building Permits Allocation AL 1 $12,000.00 $12,000.00 C4 AEP Allocation AL 1 $35,000.00 $35,000.00 C5 Building Improvements Allocation AL 1 $30,000.00 $30,000.00 Subtotal:$147,000.00 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 ition) Report Created On:2/9/22 9:07:51 PM ACKNOWLEDGE ADDENDA NAME ACKNOWLEDGEMENT DATE RFB 3987 Addendum 1 01/24/2022 14:49:15 PM RFB 3987Addendum No. 2 01/31/2022 16:41:23 PM RFB 3987 02/01/2022 18:07:33 PM DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 ition) Report Created On:2/9/22 9:07:51 PM REQUIRED DOWNLOADS TYPE NAME DOWNLOAD DATE Plans RFB 3987 Drawings 12/14/21 4:39:17 PM Invitation To Bid RFB 3987 Specifications 12/14/21 4:39:16 PM Addenda RFB 3987 Addendum 1 1/12/22 10:37:11 AM Addenda RFB 3987Addendum No. 2 1/27/22 12:18:05 PM Addenda RFB 3987 2/1/22 11:51:33 AM Other Statement of Experience in Word 1/18/22 1:44:29 PM DocuSign Envelope ID: C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 00 30 01 BID FORl`wEq Project Name: Citywide Lift Station Repairs 018-2019 (Williams L. S.) Project Number 21143 Owner: City of Corpus Christi OAR: Designer: !Urban Engineering By its signature below, Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Bid Acknowledgement,acknowledges receipt of all Addenda to the Bid and agrees, if this Bid is accepted,to enter into a Contract with the Owner and complete the Work in accordancewnrith the Contract Documents for the Bid price. Bidder: Associated Construction Partners Ltd. (full legal norne of Bidder) Signature (signature of person with authority to bind the Bidder) Name: .Gill Simpson (printed name of,person signing Bid,Forma) I itle: President (title of person signing Bid Form) Attest: (signature) State of Residency Texas Federal Tx ICD No. 76-7197773 Address for Notices: 215 'whP' Bandera Rd.. Ste. 114-461 Boerne,TX 78006 -„ Phone: 210-698-8714 Email: ill@acpa ft rs.cDr�; mm + Mt ow tf aid Form 00 30 01 -Page 1 ref 2 'iltuwirio I'ift(;tatinn Rannirc 7r4"E"'...Ar6'44 hAinn1dri0r9cmn 1� -ind Unru in I 4 w.. Prnipr•t MCI ')I 1A,'A Rt-,%i '10/2071. DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Table of Contents Page Article 1—Definitions and Terminology.....................................................................................................10 1.01 Defined Terms.............................................................................................................................10 1.02 Terminology................................................................................................................................15 Article 2—Preliminary Matters...................................................................................................................16 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance.............................................................................16 2.02 Copies of Documents..................................................................................................................16 2.03 Project Management System......................................................................................................16 2.04 Before Starting Construction ......................................................................................................17 2.05 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives................................17 Article 3—Contract Documents: Intent, Requirements, Reuse.................................................................17 3.01 Intent...........................................................................................................................................17 3.02 Reference Standards...................................................................................................................18 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies......................................................................................19 3.04 Interpretation of the Contract Documents.................................................................................20 3.05 Reuse of Documents...................................................................................................................20 Article 4—Commencement and Progress of the Work..............................................................................20 4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed.............................................................20 4.02 Starting the Work........................................................................................................................20 4.03 Progress Schedule.......................................................................................................................21 4.04 Delays in Contractor's Progress..................................................................................................21 Article 5—Availability of Lands; Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental Conditions...................................................................................................................................................22 5.01 Availability of Lands....................................................................................................................22 5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas........................................................................................................22 5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions............................................................................................23 5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions...............................................................................24 5.05 Underground Facilities................................................................................................................25 5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site.............................................................................26 Article 6—Bonds and Insurance .................................................................................................................28 6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds..................................................................................28 General Conditions 007200- 1 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 6.02 Licensed Sureties ........................................................................................................................29 6.03 Required Minimum Insurance Coverage....................................................................................29 6.04 General Insurance Provisions......................................................................................................29 6.05 Contractor's Insurance................................................................................................................30 6.06 Property Insurance......................................................................................................................33 6.07 Waiver of Rights..........................................................................................................................34 6.08 Owner's Insurance for Project....................................................................................................34 6.09 Acceptable Evidence of Insurance..............................................................................................35 6.10 Certificate of Insurance...............................................................................................................35 6.11 Insurance Policies........................................................................................................................35 6.12 Continuing Evidence of Coverage...............................................................................................35 6.13 Notices Regarding Insurance ......................................................................................................35 6.14 Texas Workers' Compensation Insurance Required Notice .......................................................36 Article 7-Contractor's Responsibilities.....................................................................................................38 7.01 Supervision and Superintendence..............................................................................................38 7.02 Labor; Working Hours.................................................................................................................38 7.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment ...........................................................................................39 7.04 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others....................................................................39 7.05 Patent Fees and Royalties...........................................................................................................40 7.06 Permits........................................................................................................................................41 7.07 Taxes...........................................................................................................................................41 7.08 Laws and Regulations..................................................................................................................41 7.09 Safety and Protection .................................................................................................................42 7.10 Safety Representative.................................................................................................................43 7.11 Hazard Communication Programs..............................................................................................43 7.12 Emergencies................................................................................................................................43 7.13 Contractor's General Warranty and Guarantee .........................................................................43 7.14 INDEMNIFICATION......................................................................................................................44 7.15 Delegation of Professional Design Services................................................................................45 Article 8-Other Work at the Site...............................................................................................................46 8.01 Other Work.................................................................................................................................46 8.02 Coordination ...............................................................................................................................47 8.03 Legal Relationships......................................................................................................................47 General Conditions 007200-2 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 Article 9—Owner's and OPT's Responsibilities...........................................................................................48 9.01 Communications to Contractor ..................................................................................................48 9.02 Replacement of Owner's Project Team Members......................................................................48 9.03 Furnish Data................................................................................................................................48 9.04 Pay When Due.............................................................................................................................48 9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests...................................................................................48 9.06 Insurance.....................................................................................................................................48 9.07 Modifications..............................................................................................................................48 9.08 Inspections,Tests, and Approvals...............................................................................................48 9.09 Limitations on OPT's Responsibilities .........................................................................................48 9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition......................................................................49 9.11 Compliance with Safety Program................................................................................................49 Article 10—OAR's and Designer's Status During Construction ..................................................................49 10.01 Owner's Representative..........................................................................................................49 10.02 Visits to Site.............................................................................................................................49 10.03 Resident Project Representatives...........................................................................................49 10.04 Rejecting Defective Work........................................................................................................49 10.05 Shop Drawings, Modifications and Payments.........................................................................50 10.06 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work...................50 10.07 Limitations on OAR's and Designer's Authority and Responsibilities.....................................50 Article 11—Amending the Contract Documents; Changes in the Work ....................................................50 11.01 Amending and Supplementing the Contract Documents.......................................................50 11.02 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work................................................................................51 11.03 Unauthorized Changes in the Work........................................................................................51 11.04 Change of Contract Price........................................................................................................52 11.05 Change of Contract Times.......................................................................................................52 11.06 Change Proposals....................................................................................................................52 11.07 Execution of Change Orders ...................................................................................................53 11.08 Notice to Surety......................................................................................................................54 Article 12—Change Management..............................................................................................................54 12.01 Requests for Change Proposal................................................................................................54 12.02 Change Proposals....................................................................................................................54 12.03 Designer Will Evaluate Request for Modification...................................................................55 General Conditions 007200-3 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 12.04 Substitutions...........................................................................................................................55 Article13—Claims.......................................................................................................................................56 13.01 Claims......................................................................................................................................56 13.02 Claims Process.........................................................................................................................57 Article 14—Prevailing Wage Rate Requirements.......................................................................................58 14.01 Payment of Prevailing Wage Rates.........................................................................................58 14.02 Records....................................................................................................................................58 14.03 Liability; Penalty; Criminal Offense.........................................................................................59 14.04 Prevailing Wage Rates.............................................................................................................59 Article 15—Cost of the Work; Allowances; Unit Price Work......................................................................59 15.01 Cost of the Work.....................................................................................................................59 15.02 Allowances..............................................................................................................................63 15.03 Unit Price Work.......................................................................................................................63 15.04 Contingencies..........................................................................................................................64 Article 16—Tests and Inspections; Correction, Removal, or Acceptance of Defective Work....................65 16.01 Access to Work........................................................................................................................65 16.02 Tests, Inspections and Approvals............................................................................................65 16.03 Defective Work.......................................................................................................................65 16.04 Acceptance of Defective Work................................................................................................66 16.05 Uncovering Work....................................................................................................................66 16.06 Owner May Stop the Work.....................................................................................................67 16.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work.......................................................................................67 Article 17—Payments to Contractor; Set-Offs; Completion; Correction Period........................................67 17.01 Progress Payments..................................................................................................................67 17.02 Application for Payment.........................................................................................................69 17.03 Schedule of Values..................................................................................................................71 17.04 Schedule of Anticipated Payments and Earned Value............................................................72 17.05 Basis for Payments..................................................................................................................73 17.06 Payment for Stored Materials and Equipment.......................................................................73 17.07 Retainage and Set-Offs ...........................................................................................................74 17.08 Procedures for Submitting an Application for Payment.........................................................74 17.09 Responsibility of Owner's Authorized Representative...........................................................75 17.10 Contractor's Warranty of Title................................................................................................76 General Conditions 007200-4 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 17.11 Substantial Completion...........................................................................................................76 17.12 Partial Utilization.....................................................................................................................77 17.13 Final Inspection.......................................................................................................................77 17.14 Final Application for Payment.................................................................................................77 17.15 Final Payment..........................................................................................................................78 17.16 Waiver of Claims.....................................................................................................................78 17.17 Correction Period....................................................................................................................78 Article 18-Suspension of Work and Termination.....................................................................................79 18.01 Owner May Suspend Work.....................................................................................................79 18.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause............................................................................................79 18.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience................................................................................80 Article 19-Project Management...............................................................................................................81 19.01 Work Included.........................................................................................................................81 19.02 Quality Assurance ...................................................................................................................81 19.03 Document Submittal...............................................................................................................81 19.04 Required Permits ....................................................................................................................81 19.05 Safety Requirements...............................................................................................................82 19.06 Access to the Site....................................................................................................................82 19.07 Contractor's Use of Site..........................................................................................................82 19.08 Protection of Existing Structures and Utilities........................................................................83 19.09 Pre-Construction Exploratory Excavations..............................................................................83 19.10 Disruption of Services/Continued Operations........................................................................84 19.11 Field Measurements ...............................................................................................................84 19.12 Reference Data and Control Points.........................................................................................84 19.13 Delivery and Storage...............................................................................................................85 19.14 Cleaning During Construction.................................................................................................86 19.15 Maintenance of Roads, Driveways, and Access......................................................................86 19.16 Area Access and Traffic Control..............................................................................................87 19.17 Overhead Electrical Wires.......................................................................................................87 19.18 Blasting....................................................................................................................................87 19.19 Archeological Requirements...................................................................................................87 19.20 Endangered Species Resources...............................................................................................88 19.21 Cooperation with Public Agencies..........................................................................................88 General Conditions 007200-5 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 Article 20—Project Coordination................................................................................................................88 20.01 Work Included.........................................................................................................................88 20.02 Document Submittal...............................................................................................................88 20.03 Communication During Project...............................................................................................89 20.04 Project Meetings.....................................................................................................................89 20.05 Requests for Information........................................................................................................91 20.06 Decision and Action Item Log..................................................................................................91 20.07 Notification By Contractor......................................................................................................92 20.08 Record Documents..................................................................................................................92 Article 21—Quality Management...............................................................................................................94 21.01 Contractor's Responsibilities ..................................................................................................94 21.02 Quality Management Activities by OPT..................................................................................95 21.03 Contractor's Use of OPT's Test Reports..................................................................................96 21.04 Documentation .......................................................................................................................96 21.05 Standards................................................................................................................................97 21.06 Delivery and Storage...............................................................................................................97 21.07 Verification Testing for Corrected Defects..............................................................................97 21.08 Test Reports............................................................................................................................97 21.09 Defective Work.......................................................................................................................98 21.10 Limitation of Authority of Testing Laboratory........................................................................98 21.11 Quality Control Plan................................................................................................................98 21.12 Implement Contractor's Quality Control Plan ......................................................................100 Article 22— Final Resolution of Disputes..................................................................................................101 22.01 Senior Level Negotiations.....................................................................................................101 22.02 Mediation..............................................................................................................................101 Article 23—Minority/MBE/DBE Participation Policy................................................................................102 23.01 Policy.....................................................................................................................................102 23.02 Definitions.............................................................................................................................102 23.03 Goals......................................................................................................................................103 23.04 Compliance............................................................................................................................104 Article 24—Document Management........................................................................................................104 24.01 Work Included.......................................................................................................................104 24.02 Quality Assurance .................................................................................................................104 General Conditions 007200-6 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 24.03 Contractor's Responsibilities ................................................................................................104 24.04 Document Submittal.............................................................................................................105 24.05 Document Numbering ..........................................................................................................105 24.06 Document Requirements......................................................................................................106 Article25—Shop Drawings.......................................................................................................................107 25.01 Work Included.......................................................................................................................107 25.02 Quality Assurance .................................................................................................................107 25.03 Contractor's Responsibilities ................................................................................................107 25.04 Shop Drawing Requirements................................................................................................109 25.05 Special Certifications and Reports........................................................................................109 25.06 Warranties and Guarantees..................................................................................................110 25.07 Shop Drawing Submittal Procedures....................................................................................110 25.08 Sample and Mockup Submittal Procedures..........................................................................112 25.09 Equal Non Specified Products...............................................................................................113 25.10 Requests for Deviation..........................................................................................................113 25.11 Designer Responsibilities......................................................................................................114 25.12 Resubmission Requirements.................................................................................................116 Article26—Record Data...........................................................................................................................117 26.01 Work Included.......................................................................................................................117 26.02 Quality Assurance .................................................................................................................117 26.03 Contractor's Responsibilities ................................................................................................117 26.04 Record Data Requirements...................................................................................................118 26.05 Special Certifications and Reports........................................................................................118 26.06 Warranties and Guarantees..................................................................................................119 26.07 Record Data Submittal Procedures.......................................................................................119 26.08 Designer's Responsibilities....................................................................................................120 Article 27—Construction Progress Schedule............................................................................................121 27.01 Requirements........................................................................................................................121 27.02 Document Submittal.............................................................................................................121 27.03 Schedule Requirements........................................................................................................121 27.04 Schedule Revisions................................................................................................................123 27.05 Float Time..............................................................................................................................123 Article 28—Video and Photographic documentation ..............................................................................124 General Conditions 007200-7 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 28.01 Work Included.......................................................................................................................124 28.02 Quality Assurance .................................................................................................................124 28.03 Document Submittal.............................................................................................................124 28.04 Photographs..........................................................................................................................125 28.05 Video Recording....................................................................................................................125 Article 29- Execution and Closeout.........................................................................................................125 29.01 Substantial Completion.........................................................................................................125 29.02 Final Inspections....................................................................................................................126 29.03 Reinspection Fees .................................................................................................................126 29.04 Closeout Documents Submittal ............................................................................................127 29.05 Transfer of Utilities ...............................................................................................................127 29.06 Warranties, Bonds and Service Agreements.........................................................................127 Article30-Miscellaneous........................................................................................................................128 30.01 Computation of Times...........................................................................................................128 30.02 Owner's Right to Audit Contractor's Records.......................................................................128 30.03 Independent Contractor.......................................................................................................129 30.04 Cumulative Remedies ...........................................................................................................129 30.05 Limitation of Damages..........................................................................................................129 30.06 No Waiver.............................................................................................................................129 30.07 Severability............................................................................................................................129 30.08 Survival of Obligations ..........................................................................................................130 30.09 No Third Party Beneficiaries .................................................................................................130 30.10 Assignment of Contract.........................................................................................................130 30.11 No Waiver of Sovereign Immunity........................................................................................130 30.12 Controlling Law.....................................................................................................................130 30.13 Conditions Precedent to Right to Sue...................................................................................130 30.14 Waiver of Trial by Jury...........................................................................................................130 30.15 Attorney Fees........................................................................................................................130 30.16 Compliance with Laws...........................................................................................................131 30.17 Enforcement..........................................................................................................................131 30.18 Subject to Appropriation.......................................................................................................131 30.19 Contract Sum.........................................................................................................................131 30.20 Contractor's Guarantee as Additional Remedy....................................................................131 General Conditions 007200-8 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 30.21 Notices. .................................................................................................................................131 General Conditions 007200-9 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 ARTICLE 1—DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY 1.01 Defined Terms A. Terms with initial capital letters, including the term's singular and plural forms, have the meanings indicated in this paragraph wherever used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents. In addition to the terms specifically defined, terms with initial capital letters in the Contract Documents may include references to identified articles and paragraphs, and the titles of other documents or forms. 1. Addenda - Documents issued prior to the receipt of Bids which clarify or modify the Bidding Requirements or the proposed Contract Documents. 2. Agreement - The document executed between Owner and Contractor covering the Work. 3. Alternative Dispute Resolution -The process by which a disputed Claim may be settled as an alternative to litigation, if Owner and Contractor cannot reach an agreement between themselves. 4. Application for Payment - The forms used by Contractor to request payments from Owner and the supporting documentation required by the Contract Documents. 5. Award Date—The date the City Council of the City of Corpus Christi(City)authorizes the City Manager or designee to execute the Contract on behalf of the City. 6. Bid —The documents submitted by a Bidder to establish the proposed Contract Price and Contract Times and provide other information and certifications as required by the Bidding Documents. 7. Bidding Documents — The solicitation documents, the proposed Contract Documents and Addenda. 8. Bidder—An individual or entity that submits a Bid to Owner. 9. Bonds - Performance Bond, Payment Bond, Maintenance Bond, and other Surety instruments executed by Surety. When in singular form, refers to individual instrument. 10. Change Order-A document issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract,which modifies the Work, Contract Price, Contract Times, or terms and conditions of the Contract. 11. Change Proposal - A document submitted by Contractor in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents: a. Requesting an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times; b. Contesting an initial decision concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents; C. Challenging a set-off against payment due; or d. Seeking a Modification with respect to the terms of the Contract. 12. City Engineer - The Corpus Christi City Engineer and/or designee as identified at the preconstruction conference or in the Notice to Proceed. General Conditions 007200- 10 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 13. Claim - A demand or assertion by Owner or Contractor submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. A demand for money or services by an entity other than the Owner or Contractor is not a Claim. Claims must be initiated by written notice, signed and sworn to be an authorized corporate officer, verifying the truth and accuracy of the Claim. 14. Constituent of Concern - Asbestos, petroleum, radioactive materials, polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs), hazardous wastes, and substances, products, wastes, or other materials that are or become listed, regulated, or addressed pursuant to: a. The Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and Liability Act, 42 U.S.C. §§9601 et seq. ("CERCLA"); b. The Hazardous Materials Transportation Act, 49 U.S.C. §§5101 et seq.; C. The Resource Conservation and Recovery Act, 42 U.S.C. §§6901 et seq. ("RCRA"); d. The Toxic Substances Control Act, 15 U.S.C. §§2601 et seq.; e. The Clean Water Act, 33 U.S.C. §§1251 et seq.; f. The Clean Air Act, 42 U.S.C. §§7401 et seq.; or g. Any other Laws or Regulations regulating, relating to, or imposing liability or standards of conduct concerning hazardous,toxic, or dangerous waste, substance, or material. 15. Contract -The entire integrated set of documents concerning the Work and describing the relationship between the Owner and Contractor. 16. Contract Amendment-A document issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract and signed by Owner and Contractor which: a. Authorizes new phases of the Work and establishes the Contract Price, Contract Times, or terms and conditions of the Contract for the new phase of Work; or b. Modifies the terms and conditions of the Contract but does not make changes in the Work. 17. Contract Documents - Those items designated as Contract Documents in the Agreement. 18. Contract Price - The monetary amount stated in the Agreement and as adjusted by Modifications,and increases or decreases in unit price quantities, if any,that Owner has agreed to pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 19. Contract Times-The number of days or the dates by which Contractor must: a. Achieve specified Milestones; b. Achieve Substantial Completion; and C. Complete the Work. 20. Contractor-The individual or entity with which Owner has contracted for performance of the Work. General Conditions 007200- 11 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 21. Contractor's Team - Contractor and Subcontractors, Suppliers, individuals, or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by them to perform part of the Work or anyone for whose acts they may be liable. 22. Cost of the Work -The sum of costs incurred for the proper performance of the Work as allowed by Article 15. 23. Defective - When applied to Work, refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient in that it: a. Does not conform to the Contract Documents; b. Does not meet the requirements of applicable inspections, reference standards, tests, or approvals referred to in the Contract Documents; or C. Has been damaged or stolen prior to CAR's recommendation of final payment unless responsibility for the protection of the Work has been assumed by Owner at Substantial Completion 24. Designer - The individuals or entity named as Designer in the Agreement and the subconsultants, individuals, or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by Designer to provide design or other technical services to the Owner. Designer has responsibility for engineering or architectural design and technical issues related to the Contract Documents. Designers are Licensed Professional Engineers, Registered Architects or Registered Landscape Architects qualified to practice their profession in the State of Texas. 25. Drawings - The part of the Contract that graphically shows the scope, extent, and character of the Work. Shop Drawings and other Contractor documents are not Drawings. 26. Effective Date of the Contract -The date indicated in the Agreement on which the City Manager or designee has signed the Contract. 27. Field Order-A document issued by OAR or Designer requiring changes in the Work that do not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times. 28. Hazardous Environmental Condition -The presence of Constituents of Concern at the Site in quantities or circumstances that may present a danger to persons or property exposed to Constituents of Concern. The presence of Constituents of Concern at the Site necessary for the execution of the Work or to be incorporated in the Work is not a Hazardous Environmental Condition provided these Constituents of Concern are controlled and contained pursuant to industry practices, Laws and Regulations, and the requirements of the Contract. 29. Indemnified Costs-All costs, losses,damages,and legal or other dispute resolution costs resulting from claims or demands against Owner. These costs include fees for engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals. 30. Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations-Applicable laws,statutes,rules,regulations, ordinances,codes,and orders of governmental bodies,agencies,authorities,and courts having jurisdiction over the Project. 31. Liens - Charges, security interests, or encumbrances upon Contract related funds, real property, or personal property. General Conditions 007200- 12 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 32. Milestone-A principal event in the performance of the Workthat Contractor is required by Contract to complete by a specified date or within a specified period of time. 33. Modification - Change made to the Contract Documents by one of the following methods: a. Contract Amendment; b. Change Order; C. Field Order; or d. Work Change Directive. 34. Notice of Award-The notice of Owner's intent to enter into a contract with the Selected Bidder. 35. Notice to Proceed -A notice to Contractor of the Contract Times and the date Work is to begin. 36. Owner -The City of Corpus Christi (City), a Texas home-rule municipal corporation and political subdivision organized under the laws of the State of Texas, acting by and through its duly authorized City Manager and designee,the City Engineer (the Director of Engineering Services), and the City's officers, employees, agents, or representatives, authorized to administer design and construction of the Project. 37. Owner's Authorized Representative or OAR -The individual or entity named as OAR in the Agreement and the consultants, subconsultants, individuals, or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by them to provide construction management services to the Owner. The OAR may be an employee of the Owner. 38. Owner's Project Team or OPT - The Owner, Owner's Authorized Representative, Resident Project Representative, Designer, and the consultants, subconsultants, individuals or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by them to provide services to the Owner. 39. Partial Occupancy or Use - Use by Owner of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which it is intended (or a related purpose) prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. 40. Progress Schedule -A schedule prepared and maintained by Contractor, describing the sequence and duration of the activities comprising the Contractor's plan to accomplish the Work within the Contract Times. The Progress Schedule must be a Critical Path Method (CPM) Schedule. 41. Project - The total undertaking to be accomplished for Owner under the Contract Documents. 42. Project Manual — That portion of the Contract Documents that may include the following: introductory information,solicitation requirements and responses, proposal, Contract forms and General and Supplementary Conditions, General Requirements, Specification, Drawings, Project Safety Manual and Addenda. 43. Resident Project Representative or RPR-The authorized representative of OPT assigned to assist OAR at the Site. As used herein, the term Resident Project Representative includes assistants and field staff of the OAR. General Conditions 007200- 13 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 44. Samples - Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship representing some portion of the Work that are used to establish the standards for that portion of the Work. 45. Schedule of Documents -A schedule of required documents, prepared and maintained by Contractor. 46. Schedule of Values - A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, allocating portions of the Contract Price to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for Contractor's Applications for Payment. 47. Shop Drawings - All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or information that are specifically prepared or assembled and submitted by Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work. Shop Drawings, whether approved or not, are not Drawings and are not Contract Documents. 48. Site - Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by Owner upon which the Work is to be performed. The Site includes rights-of-way, easements, and other lands furnished by Owner which are designated for use by the Contractor. 49. Specifications -The part of the Contract that describes the requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards, and workmanship as applied to the Work, and certain administrative requirements and procedural matters applicable to the Work. 50. Subcontractor-An individual or entity having a direct contract with Contractor or with other Subcontractors or Suppliers for the performance of a part of the Work. 51. Substantial Completion -The point where the Work or a specified part of the Work is sufficiently complete to be used for its intended purpose in accordance with the Contract Documents. 52. Supplementary Conditions -The part of the Contract that amends or supplements the General Conditions. 53. Supplier - A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman, or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with Subcontractors or other Suppliers to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work. 54. Technical Data-Those items expressly identified as Technical Data in the Supplementary Conditions with respect to either: a. Subsurface conditions at the Site; b. Physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site, except Underground Facilities; or C. Hazardous Environmental Conditions at the Site. 55. Underground Facilities - All underground pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, other similar facilities or appurtenances, and encasements containing these facilities which are used to convey electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, fiber optic transmissions, cable television, water, wastewater, storm water, other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control systems. 56. Unit Price Work-Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. General Conditions 007200- 14 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 57. Work - The construction of the Project or its component parts as required by the Contract Documents. 58. Work Change Directive -A directive issued to Contractor on or after the Effective Date of the Contract ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work. The Work Change Directive serves as a memorandum of understanding regarding the directive until a Change Order can be issued. 1.02 Terminology A. The words and terms discussed in this Paragraph 1.02 are not defined, but when used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, have the indicated meaning. B. It is understood that the cost for performing Work is included in the Contract Price and no additional compensation is to be paid by Owner unless specifically stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. Expressions including or similar to "at no additional cost to Owner," "at Contractor's expense,"or similar words mean that the Contractor is to perform or provide specified operation of Work without an increase in the Contract Price. C. The terms"day"or"calendar day"mean a calendar day of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. D. The meaning and intent of certain terms or adjectives are described as follows: 1. The terms "as allowed," "as approved," "as ordered," "as directed," or similar terms in the Contract Documents indicate an exercise of professional judgment by the OPT. 2. Adjectives including or similar to "reasonable," "suitable," "acceptable," "proper," "satisfactory," or similar adjectives are used to describe a determination of OPT regarding the Work. 3. Any exercise of professional judgment by the OPT will be made solely to evaluate the Work for general compliance with the Contract Documents unless there is a specific statement in the Contract Documents indicating otherwise. 4. The use of these or similar terms or adjectives does not assign a duty or give OPT authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work, or assign a duty or give authority to the OPT to undertake responsibilities contrary to the provisions of Articles 9 or 10 or other provisions of the Contract Documents. E. The use of the words "furnish," "install," "perform," and "provide" have the following meanings when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment: 1. Furnish means to supply and deliver the specified services, materials, or equipment to the Site or other specified location ready for use or installation. 2. Install means to complete construction or assembly of the specified services, materials, or equipment so they are ready for their intended use. 3. Perform or provide means to furnish and install specified services, materials, or equipment, complete and ready for their intended use. 4. Perform or provide the specified services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use if the Contract Documents require specific services, materials, or General Conditions 007200- 15 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 equipment, but do not expressly use the words "furnish," "install," "perform," or "provide." F. Contract Documents are written in modified brief style: 1. Requirements apply to all Work of the same kind, class, and type even though the word "all" is not stated. 2. Simple imperative sentence structure is used which places a verb as the first word in the sentence. It is understood that the words "furnish," "install," "perform," "provide," or similar words include the meaning of the phrase "The Contractor shall..." before these words. 3. Unless specifically stated that action is to be taken by the OPT or others, it is understood that the action described is a requirement of the Contractor. G. Words or phrases that have a well-known technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with this recognized meaning unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. H. Written documents are required where reference is made to notices, reports, approvals, consents, documents, statements, instructions, opinions or other types of communications required by the Contract Documents. Approval and consent documents must be received by Contractor prior to the action or decision for which approval or consent is given. These may be made in printed or electronic format through the OPT's project management information system or other electronic media as required by the Contract Documents or approved by the OAR. I. Giving notice as required by the Contract Documents may be by printed or electronic media using a method that requires acknowledgment of the receipt of that notice. ARTICLE 2—PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance A. Provide required Bonds with the executed Agreement. B. Provide evidence of insurance required by the Contract Documents with the executed Agreement. 2.02 Copies of Documents A. OPT is to furnish one fully executed Agreement (either electronic or printed) and one copy of the executed Contract Documents in electronic portable document format (PDF). This document is the Project Record Copy of the Contract Documents. 2.03 Project Management System A. Owner shall administer its design and construction management through an internet-based project management system known as e-Builder. B. Contractor shall conduct all communication through and perform all project-related functions utilizing this project management system. This includes all correspondence, General Conditions 007200- 16 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 submittals, requests for information, payment requests and processing, contract amendments, change orders, delivery orders and other administrative activities. C. Owner shall administer the software and provide training to Contractor's Team. 2.04 Before Starting Construction A. Provide the following preliminary documents in accordance with the Contract Documents within 10 days after the Effective Date of the Contract: 1. Progress Schedule, which must be a Critical Path Method (CPM)Schedule; 2. Schedule of Documents; and 3. Schedule of Values and projected cash flow information. 2.05 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives A. Attend the preconstruction conference as required by the Contract Documents. B. Designate the specific individuals authorized to act as representatives of the Contractor. These individuals must have the authority to transmit and receive information, render decisions relative to the Contract, and otherwise act on behalf of the Contractor. C. Owner is to designate the specific individuals authorized to act as representatives of the Owner and the limits of their authority with regard to acting on behalf of the Owner. ARTICLE 3—CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, REQUIREMENTS, REUSE 3.01 Intent A. Requirements of components of the Contract Documents are as binding as if required by all Contract Documents. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete Project. The Contract Documents do not indicate or describe all of the Work required to complete the Project. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the OPT. 1. The Contract requirements described in the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to Work regardless of where it is described in the Contract Documents, unless specifically noted otherwise. 2. In offering a Bid for this Project and in entering into this Contract,Contractor represents: a. Contractor has studied the Contract Documents, the Work, the Site, local conditions, Laws and Regulations, and other conditions that may affect the Work; b. Contractor has studied the Technical Data and other information referred to in the Contract Documents and has or will make additional surveys and investigations as deemed necessary for the performance of the Work; C. Contractor has correlated these studies and observations with the requirements of the Contract Documents; and d. Contractor has taken all of this information into consideration in developing the Contract Price offered and that the Contract Price offered provides full compensation for providing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. General Conditions 007200- 17 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 3. Organization of the Contract Documents is not intended to control or lessen the responsibility of the Contractor when dividing Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers, or to establish the extent of Work to be performed by trades, Subcontractors, or Suppliers. Specifications or details do not need to be indicated or specified in each Specification or Drawing. Items shown in the Contract Documents are applicable regardless of their location in the Contract Documents. 4. Standard paragraph titles and other identifications of subject matter in the Specifications are intended to aid in locating and recognizing various requirements of the Specifications. Titles do not define, limit, or otherwise restrict Specification text. 5. Provide the labor, documentation, services, materials, or equipment that may be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or trade usage as being required to produce the indicated result, whether specifically called for in the Contract Documents or not. Include these related costs in the offered Contract Price. B. Provide equipment that is functionally complete as described in the Contract Documents. The Drawings and Specifications do not indicate or describe all of the Work required to complete the installation of products purchased by the Owner or Contractor. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the Designer through the OAR. C. Comply with the most stringent requirements where compliance with two or more standards is specified and they establish different or conflicting requirements for the Work, unless the Contract Documents indicate otherwise. D. Provide materials and equipment comparable in quality to similar materials and equipment incorporated in the Project or as required to meet the minimum requirements of the application if the materials and equipment are shown in the Drawings but are not included in the Specifications. E. The Project Record Copy of the Contract Documents governs if there is a discrepancy between the Project Record Copy of the Contract Documents and subsequent electronic or digital versions of the Contract Documents, including printed copies derived from these electronic or digital versions. F. The Contract supersedes all prior written or oral negotiations, representations, and agreements. The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The Contract Documents may be modified only by a Modification. G. Request clarification from OAR for a decision before proceeding if Contractor is not clear on the meaning of the Contract Documents. OAR is to issue clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3.02 Reference Standards A. Standard Specifications, Codes, Laws and Regulations: 1. Reference in the Contract Documents to standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, or codes of technical societies, organizations, or associations, or to Laws or Regulations,whether specific or implied, are those in effect at the time Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price unless specifically stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. General Conditions 007200- 18 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 2. No provision of referenced standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, codes, or instructions of a Supplier changes the duties or responsibilities of OPT or Contractor from those described in the Contract Documents or assigns a duty to or gives authority to the OPT to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or undertake responsibilities inconsistent with the Contract Documents. 3. The provisions of the Contract Documents take precedence over standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, codes, or instructions of a Supplier unless specifically stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. B. Comply with applicable construction industry standards, whether referenced or not. 1. Standards referenced in the Contract Documents govern over standards not referenced but recognized as applicable in the construction industry. 2. Comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents if they produce a higher quality of Work than the applicable construction industry standards. 3. Designer determines whether a code or standard is applicable, which of several are applicable, or if the Contract Documents produce a higher quality of Work. C. Make copies of reference standards available if requested by OAR. 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies A. Reporting Discrepancies: 1. Carefully study the Drawings and verify pertinent figures and dimensions with respect to actual field measurements before undertaking the Work. Immediately report conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that Contractor discovers or has actual knowledge of to the OAR. Do not proceed with affected Work until the conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved by a clarification or interpretation from the OAR or by a Modification to the Contract Documents issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01. 2. The exactness of existing grades, elevations, dimensions or locations given on any Drawings issued by Designer, or the work installed by other contractors, is not guaranteed by Owner. Contractor shall,therefore, satisfy itself as to the accuracy of all grades, elevations, dimensions and locations. Any errors due to Contractor's failure to verify at the site all such grades, elevations, dimensions or locations relating to such existing or other work shall be rectified by Contractor without any additional cost to Owner. 3. Immediately notify the OAR of conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies in the Contract Documents or discrepancies between the Contract Documents and: a. Applicable Laws or Regulations; b. Actual field conditions; C. Standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, or codes; or d. Instructions of Suppliers. 4. Do not proceed with affected Work until the conflict,error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved by a clarification or interpretation from the OAR or by a Modification to the General Conditions 007200- 19 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 Contract Documents issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01, except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12. 5. Contractor is liable to the OPT for failure to report conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies in the Contract Documents of which Contractor has actual knowledge. 6. Contractor is deemed to have included the most expensive item, system, procedure, etc. in the Contract Price if a conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy in components of the Contract Documents was known, but not reported prior to submitting the Bid or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price. 3.04 Interpretation of the Contract Documents A. Submit questions concerning the non-technical or contractual/administrative requirements of the Contract Documents to the OAR immediately after those questions arise. OAR is to provide an interpretation of the Contract Documents regarding these questions and will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. B. Submit questions regarding the design of the Project described in the Contract Documents to the OAR immediately after those questions arise. OAR is to request an interpretation of the Contract Documents from the Designer. Designer is to respond to these questions by providing an interpretation of the Contract Documents. OAR will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. C. OPT may initiate a Modification to the Contract Documents through the OAR if a response to the question indicates that a change in the Contract Documents is required. Contractor may appeal Designer's or OAR's interpretation by submitting a Change Proposal. 3.05 Reuse of Documents A. Contractor's Team has no rights to the Contract Documents and may not use the Contract Documents, or copies or electronic media editions of the Contract Documents, other than for the construction of this Project. This provision survives final payment or termination of the Contract. B. Contractor is allowed to retain a copy of the Contract Documents for record purposes, unless specifically prohibited by the Owner for security reasons. Surrender paper and digital copies of the Contract Documents and other related documents and remove these documents from computer equipment or storage devices as a condition of final payment if the Owner so directs. ARTICLE 4—COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK 4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed A. The Contract Times commence to run on the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. 4.02 Starting the Work A. Begin performing the Work on the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. Do not begin Work prior to having the insurance required in Article 6 in force or before the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. General Conditions 007200-20 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 4.03 Progress Schedule A. Construct the Work in accordance with the Progress Schedule established in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1. Adjust the Progress Schedule as required to accurately reflect actual progress on the Work. 2. Submit proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that change the Contract Times in accordance with the requirements of Article 11. B. Continue performing Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule during disputes or disagreements with Owner. Do not delay or postpone Work pending resolution of disputes or disagreements, or during an appeal process. 4.04 Delays in Contractor's Progress A. No Damages for Delay: Contractor shall receive no compensation for delays or hindrances to the Work,except in the case of direct interference with means and methods by the Owner. In no event shall the Contractor be entitled to any compensation or recovery of any special damages in connection with any delays, including without limitation: consequential damages, lost opportunity costs, impact damages, or other similar damages. Owner's exercise of any of its rights or remedies under the Contract Documents (including without limitation ordering changes in the Work, or directing suspension, rescheduling, or correction of the Work), regardless of the extent or frequency of Owner's exercise of such rights or remedies, shall not be construed as active interference in the Contractor's performance of the Work. An extension of Contract Time, to the extent permitted, shall be the sole remedy of the Contractor for any acknowledged delays.Contractor agrees that the extension of time provides an equitable adjustment. B. Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delays, disruptions, or interference caused by or within the control of Contractor's Team. C. No time extensions are allowed for weather conditions, other than those listed in Paragraph 4.04.D, for Projects using calendar days or a fixed date to establish the Contract Time. Contractor is to include the cost associated with weather related delays in the Contract Price and assumes the risks associated with delays related to weather conditions. D. Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Times if Contractor's performance or progress is delayed,disrupted or interfered with by unanticipated causes not the fault of and beyond the control of OPT or Contractor. These adjustments in Contract Times are the Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for the delays, disruption, and interference described in this paragraph.These unanticipated causes may include: 1. Severe and unavoidable natural catastrophes e.g. fires, floods, hurricanes, epidemics, and earthquakes; 2. Acts or failures to act of utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site; 3. Acts of war or terrorism; and 4. Rain days in excess of the number specified in a calendar year. General Conditions 007200-21 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 E. Delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting from the following are governed by Article 5: 1. The existence of a differing subsurface or physical condition; 2. An Underground Facility not shown or not indicated with reasonable accuracy by the Contract Documents; and 3. Hazardous Environmental Conditions. F. Article 8 governs delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting from the performance of certain other work at or adjacent to the Site. G. Notify the OAR immediately of a potential delaying, disrupting, or interfering event. Submit a Change Proposal seeking an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times within 30 days of the commencement of the delaying, disrupting, or interfering event. Claims for adjustment to the Contract Price or Contract Times that do not comply with Article 13 are waived. H. Contractor is only entitled to an adjustment of the Contract Times for specific delays, disruptions, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work that can be demonstrated to directly impact the ability of the Contractor to complete the Work within the Contract Times. No adjustments in Contract Times are allowed for delays on components of the Work which were or could have been completed without impacting the Contract Times. I. Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delay, disruption, or interference caused by or within the control of the Owner if this delay is concurrent with a delay, disruption, or interference attributable to or within the control of the Contractor's Team. ARTICLES—AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 5.01 Availability of Lands A. Owner is to furnish the Site and inform the Contractor of encumbrances or restrictions known to Owner related to use of the Site with which Contractor must comply in performing the Work. B. Provide for additional lands and access Contractor requires for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment, other than those identified in the Contract Documents. Provide documentation of authority to use these additional lands to OAR before using them. 5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas: 1. Confine construction equipment, temporary construction facilities, the storage of materials and equipment, and the operations of workers to the Site,adjacent areas that Owner or Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or agreements, and other adjacent areas as permitted by Laws and Regulations. Assume General Conditions 007200-22 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 full responsibility for damage or injuries which result from the performance of the Work or from other actions or conduct of the Contractor's Team, including: a. Damage to the Site; b. Damage to adjacent areas used for Contractor's Team's operations; C. Damage to other adjacent land or areas; and d. Injuries and losses sustained by the owners or occupants of these lands or areas. 2. Take the following action if a damage or injury claim is made by the owner or occupant of adjacent land or area because of the performance of the Work, or because of other actions or conduct of the Contractor's Team: a. Take immediate corrective or remedial action as required by Paragraph 7.09; and b. Attempt to settle the claim through negotiations with the owner or occupant, or otherwise resolve the claim by mediation or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law. 5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions A. The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. Those reports known to OPT of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; 2. Those drawings known to OPT of physical conditions related to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site, except Underground Facilities; and 3. Technical Data contained in these reports and drawings. B. Data contained in boring logs, recorded measurements of subsurface water levels, and the results of tests performed on materials described in geotechnical data reports specifically prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor are defined as Technical Data, unless Technical Data has been defined more specifically in the Supplementary Conditions. C. Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data contained in these reports and drawings, but these reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Except for this reliance on Technical Data,Contractor may not rely upon or make claims against Owner with respect to: 1. The completeness of reports and drawings for Contractor's purposes, including aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor, or Contractor's safety precautions and programs; 2. Other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in these reports or shown or indicated in the drawings; or 3. Contractor's interpretation of or conclusions drawn from Technical Data or other data, interpretations, opinions, or information. General Conditions 007200-23 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions A. Notify OAR immediately, but in no event later than 3 days, after becoming aware of a subsurface or physical condition that is uncovered or revealed at the Site, and before further disturbing the subsurface or physical conditions or performing any related Work that: 1. Establishes that the Technical Data on which Contractor is entitled to rely as provided in Paragraph 5.03 is materially inaccurate; 2. Requires a change in the Drawings or Specifications; 3. Differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; or 4. Is of an unusual nature and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents. Do not further disturb or perform Work related to this subsurface or physical condition, except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12, until permission to do so is issued by OAR. B. OAR is to notify the OPT after receiving notice of a differing subsurface or physical condition from the Contractor. Designer is to: 1. Promptly review the subsurface or physical condition; 2. Determine the necessity of OPT's obtaining additional exploration or tests with respect to the subsurface or physical condition; 3. Determine if the subsurface or physical condition falls within one or more of the differing Site condition categories in Paragraph 5.04.A; 4. Prepare recommendations to OPT regarding the Contractor's resumption of Work in connection with the subsurface or physical condition in question; 5. Determine the need for changes in the Drawings or Specifications; and 6. Advise OPT of Designer's findings, conclusions, and recommendations. C. OAR is to issue a statement to Contractor regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question and recommend action as appropriate after review of Designer's findings, conclusions, and recommendations. D. Possible Contract Price and Contract Times Adjustments: 1. Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times to the extent that a differing subsurface or physical condition causes a change in Contractor's cost or time to perform the Work provided the condition falls within one or more of the categories described in Paragraph 5.04.A. Any adjustment in Contract Price for Work that is paid for on a unit price basis is subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03. General Conditions 007200-24 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 2. Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to a subsurface or physical condition if: a. Contractor knew of the existence of the subsurface or physical condition at the time Contractor made an offer to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times; b. The existence of the subsurface or physical condition could have been discovered or revealed as a result of examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, or studies of the Site and contiguous areas expressly required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents prior to when Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price; or C. Contractor failed to give notice as required by Paragraph 5.04.A. 3. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal no later than 30 days after CAR's issuance of the OPT's statement to Contractor regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question. 4. A Change Order is to be issued by the OAR if Owner and Contractor agree that Contractor is entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times and agree to the amount or extent of adjustments in the Contract Price or Contract Times. 5.05 Underground Facilities A. The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or adjacent to the Site is based on information and data furnished to OPT by the owners of these Underground Facilities or by others. OPT is not responsible for the accuracy or completeness of information or data provided by others that OPT makes available to Contractor. The Contractor is responsible for: 1. Investigating and field-verifying the location of underground facilities before beginning Work; 2. Reviewing and checking available information and data regarding existing Underground Facilities at the Site; 3. Complying with Laws and Regulations related to locating Underground Facilities before beginning Work; 4. Locating Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; 5. Coordinating the Work with the owners, including Owner, of Underground Facilities during construction; and 6. The safety and protection of existing Underground Facilities at or adjacent to the Site and repairing damage resulting from the Work. B. Notify the OAR and the owner of the Underground Facility immediately, but in no event later than 3 days, if an Underground Facility is uncovered or revealed at the Site that was not shown in the Contract Documents or was not shown with reasonable accuracy in the Contract Documents. Do not further disturb conditions or perform Work affected by this discovery, except in the event of an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12. General Conditions 007200-25 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 C. The Designer is to take the following action after receiving notice from the OAR: 1. Promptly review the Underground Facility and conclude whether the Underground Facility was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy; 2. Prepare recommendations to OPT regarding the Contractor's resumption of Work in connection with this Underground Facility; 3. Determine the extent to which a change is required in the Drawings or Specifications to document the consequences of the existence or location of the Underground Facility; and 4. Advise OAR of Designer's findings, conclusions, and recommendations and provide revised Drawings and Specifications if required. D. OAR is to issue a statement to Contractor regarding the Underground Facility in question and recommend action as appropriate after review of Designer's findings, conclusions, and recommendations. E. Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times as provided in Paragraphs 11.04 and 11.05 to the extent that the existing Underground Facility at the Site that was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy. Any adjustment in Contract Price for Work that is paid for on a unit price basis is subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03. F. Contractor is not entitled an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to an existing Underground Facility at the Site if: 1. Contractor knew of the existence of the existing Underground Facility at the Site at the time Contractor made an offer to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times; 2. The existence of the existing Underground Facility at the Site could have been discovered or revealed as a result of examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, or studies of the Site and contiguous areas expressly required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents prior to when Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price; or 3. Contractor failed to give notice as required by Paragraph 5.05.8. G. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal regarding its entitlement to or the amount or extent of adjustments in the Contract Price or Contract Times no later than 30 days after OAR's issuance of OPT's statement to Contractor regarding the Underground Facility. 5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site A. The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. Those reports and drawings known to OPT relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site; and 2. Technical Data contained in these reports and drawings. B. Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data contained in reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions identified in the Supplementary General Conditions 007200-26 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 Conditions, but these reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Except for the reliance on expressly identified Technical Data,Contractor may not rely upon or make claims against Owner's Indemnitees with respect to: 1. The completeness of these reports and drawings for Contractor's purposes, including aspects of the means, methods,techniques, sequences and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor or Contractor's safety precautions and programs related to Hazardous Environmental Conditions; 2. Other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in these reports or shown or indicated in the drawings; or 3. Any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from Technical Data or other data, interpretations, opinions or information. C. The results of tests performed on materials described in environmental reports specifically prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor are defined as Technical Data unless Technical Data has been defined more specifically in the Supplementary Conditions. D. Contractor is not responsible for removing or remediating Hazardous Environmental Conditions encountered, uncovered or revealed at the Site unless this removal or remediation is expressly identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work. E. Contractor is responsible for controlling, containing, and duly removing and remediating Constituents of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor's Team and paying associated costs. 1. Owner may remove and remediate the Hazardous Environmental Condition and impose a set-off against payments to Contractor for associated costs if Contractor's Team creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition, and Contractor does not take acceptable action to remove and remediate the Hazardous Environmental Condition. 2. Contractor's obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to Hazardous Environmental Conditions are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. F. Immediately notify the OAR and take the following action if Contractor uncovers or reveals a Hazardous Environmental Condition at the Site or adjacent areas used by the Contractor's Team that was not created by the Contractor's Team: 1. Secure or otherwise isolate this condition; 2. Stop Work in affected areas or connected with the condition, except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12; and 3. Do not resume Work in connection with the Hazardous Environmental Condition or in affected areas until after OPT has obtained required permits and OAR sends notice to the Contractor: a. Specifying that this condition and affected areas are or have been rendered safe for the resumption of Work; or b. Specifying special conditions under which Work may be resumed safely. General Conditions 007200-27 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 4. Owner may order the portion of the Work that is in the area affected by the Hazardous Environmental Condition to be deleted from the Work following the procedures in Article 11 if Contractor does not agree to: a. Resume the Work based on a reasonable belief it is unsafe; or b. Resume the Work under the special conditions provided by the OAR. 5. Owner may have this deleted portion of the Work performed by Owner's own forces or others in accordance with Article 8. G. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal or Owner may impose a set-off if an agreement is not reached within 10 days of OAR's notice regarding the resumption of Work as to whether Contractor is entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times or on the amount or extent of adjustments resulting from this Work stoppage or special conditions under which Contractor agrees to resume Work. H. The provisions of Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.05 do not apply to the presence of Constituents of Concern or a Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site. ARTICLE 6—BONDS AND INSURANCE 6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds A. Furnish Performance and Payment Bonds, each in an amount equal to the Contract Price, as security for the faithful performance and payment of Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. These Bonds are to remain in effect until 1 year after the date of final payment. Furnish other Bonds as required by the Contract Documents. B. Bonds furnished by the Contractor must meet the requirements of Texas Insurance Code Chapter 3503, Texas Government Code Chapter 2253, and all other applicable Laws and Regulations. C. Notify OAR immediately if the surety on Bonds furnished by Contractor: 1. Is declared bankrupt, or becomes insolvent; 2. Has its right to do business in Texas terminated; or 3. Ceases to meet the requirements of Paragraph 6.02. Provide a Bond and surety which comply with the requirements of Paragraph 6.02 within 20 days after the event giving rise to this notification. D. Contractor is to use amounts paid by Owner to Contractor under the Contract for the performance of the Contract and to satisfy claims against the Payment Bond. E. Notify the OAR of claims filed against the Payment Bond. Notify the claimant and OAR of undisputed amounts and the basis for challenging disputed amounts when a claimant has satisfied the conditions prescribed by Texas Government Code Chapter 2253. Promptly pay undisputed amount. F. Owner is not liable for payment of costs or expenses of claimants under the Payment Bond. Owner has no obligations to pay, give notice or take other action to claimants under the Payment Bond. General Conditions 007200-28 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 G. Owner may exclude the Contractor from the Site and exercise Owner's termination rights under Article 18 if Contractor fails to obtain or maintain required Bonds. H. OPT will provide a copy of the Payment Bond to Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other persons or entities claiming to have furnished labor or materials used in the performance of the Work that request this information in accordance with Texas Government Code Chapter 2253. 6.02 Licensed Sureties A. Provide Bonds in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents from sureties named in the list of"Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Financial Management Service, Surety Bond Branch, U.S. Department of the Treasury. B. Provide Bonds required by the Contract Documents from surety companies that are duly licensed or authorized to provide bonds in the State of Texas. 6.03 Required Minimum Insurance Coverage A. Obtain and maintain insurance as required in this Article and in the Supplementary Conditions. B. Deliver evidence of insurance in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions to the Owner to demonstrate that Contractor has obtained and is maintaining the policies, coverages, and endorsements required by the Contract. Provide copies of these certificates to each named insured and additional insured as identified in the Supplementary Conditions or otherwise. 6.04 General Insurance Provisions A. Provide insurance coverages and limits meeting the requirements for insurance in accordance with this Article 6 and the Supplementary Conditions. B. Provide endorsements to the policies as outlined in this Article. C. Obtain insurance from companies that are duly licensed or authorized in the State of Texas to issue insurance policies for the required limits and coverages. Provide insurance from companies that have an A.M. Best rating of A-VIII or better. D. Furnish copies of endorsements and documentation of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles upon request by OPT or any named insured or additional insured. Contractor may block out (redact) any confidential premium or pricing information contained in any endorsement furnished under this Contract. E. The name and number of the Project must be referenced on the certificate of insurance. F. OPT's failure to demand such certificates or other evidence of the Contractor's full compliance with the insurance requirements or failure to identify a deficiency in compliance from the evidence provided is not a waiver of the Contractor's obligation to obtain and maintain the insurance required by the Contract Documents. G. Notify the Owner if the Contractor fails to purchase or maintain the insurance required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall not be allowed to perform any Work on the General Conditions 007200-29 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 Project until the required insurance policies are in effect. A Certificate of Liability Insurance shall be submitted to the OPT. H. Owner may exclude the Contractor from the Site and exercise Owner's termination rights under Article 18 if Contractor fails to obtain or maintain the required insurance. I. Owner does not represent that the insurance coverage and limits established in this Contract are adequate to protect Contractor or Contractor's interests. J. The required insurance and insurance limits do not limit the Contractor's liability under the indemnities granted to Owner in the Contract Documents. K. Provide for an endorsement that the "other insurance" clause shall not apply to the OPT where the OPT is an additional insured shown on the policy. Contractor's insurance is primary and non-contributory with respect to any insurance or self-insurance carried by the OPT for liability arising out of operations under this Contract. L. Include the Owner and list the other members of the OPT and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds on all policies with the exception of the workers' compensation policy and Contractor's professional liability policy. 6.05 Contractor's Insurance A. Purchase and maintain workers' compensation and employer's liability insurance for: 1. Claims under workers' compensation, disability benefits, and other similar employee benefit acts. Obtain workers' compensation coverage through a licensed insurance company in accordance with Texas law and written on a policy and endorsements approved by the Texas Department of Insurance. Provide insurance in amounts to meet all workers' compensation obligations. Provide an "All Other States" endorsement if Contractor is not domiciled in Texas and policy is not written in accordance with Texas Department of Insurance rules. 2. Claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor's employees. 3. United States Longshoreman and Harbor Workers' Compensation Act and Jones Act coverage (if applicable). 4. Foreign voluntary worker compensation (if applicable). B. Purchase and maintain commercial general liability insurance covering all operations by or on behalf of Contractor. The expected coverage is that which would be included in a commercially available ISO Commercial General Liability policy and should provide coverage on an occurrence basis, against: 1. Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease,or death of any person other than Contractor's employees; 2. Claims for damages insured by reasonably available personal injury liability coverage which are sustained; 3. By any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by Contractor; and General Conditions 007200-30 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 4. Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including any resulting loss of use. C. Provide Contractor's commercial general liability policy that is written on a 1996 (or later) ISO commercial general liability form (occurrence form) and include the following coverages and endorsements: 1. Products and completed operations coverage as required in this Article and the Supplementary Conditions. Insurance is to remain in effect for 3 years after final payment. Furnish evidence of the continuation of this insurance at final payment and again each year for 3 years after final payment to Owner and each named insured or additional insured. a. If required by the Supplementary Conditions, provide and maintain Installation Floater insurance for property under the care, custody, or control of Contractor. Provide Installation Floater insurance that is a broad form or "All Peril" policy providing coverage for all materials, supplies, machinery, fixtures, and equipment which will be incorporated into the Work. 1) Provide coverage under the Contractor's Installation Floater that includes: a) Faulty or Defective workmanship, materials, maintenance, or construction; b) Cost to remove Defective or damaged Work from the Site or to protect it from loss or damage; c) Cost to cleanup and remove pollutants; d) Coverage for testing and startup; e) Any loss to property while in transit; f) Any loss at the Site; g) Any loss while in storage, both on and off the Site; and h) Any loss to temporary Project Works if their value is included in the Contract Price. 2) Coverage cannot be contingent on an external cause or risk or limited to property for which the Contractor is legally liable. Provide limits of insurance adequate to cover the value of the installation. Pay any deductible carried under this coverage and assume responsibility for claims on materials, supplies, machinery, fixtures, and equipment which will be incorporated into the Work while in transit or in storage. 2. Blanket contractual liability coverage for Contractor's contractual indemnity obligations in Paragraph 7.14, and all other contractual indemnity obligations of Contractor in the Contract Documents. Industry standard ISO Contractual Liability coverage will meet this obligation. 3. Broad form property damage coverage. 4. Severability of interest. 5. Underground explosion and collapse coverage. General Conditions 007200-31 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 6. Personal injury coverage. 7. Endorsement CG 2032, "Additional Insured - Engineers, Architects or Surveyors Not Engaged by the Named Insured" or its equivalent. D. Purchase and maintain automobile liability insurance against claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. E. For Projects with a Contract Value that exceeds$5,000,000, purchase and maintain umbrella or excess liability insurance written over the underlying employer's liability, commercial general liability, and automobile liability insurance described in the paragraphs above. Provide coverage that is at least as broad as all underlying policies. Provide a policy that provides first-dollar liability coverage as needed. F. Provide Contractor's commercial general liability and automobile liability policies that: 1. Are written on an occurrence basis; 2. Include the individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds; 3. Include coverage for Owner as defined in Article 1; and 4. Provide primary coverage for all claims covered by the policies, including those arising from both ongoing and completed operations. G. Purchase and maintain insurance coverage for third-party injury and property damage claims, including clean-up costs that result from Hazardous Environmental Conditions which result from Contractor's operations and completed operations. Provide Contractor's pollution liability insurance that includes long-term environmental impacts for the disposal of pollutants/contaminants and is not limited to sudden and accidental discharge. The completed operations coverage is to remain in effect for 3 years after final payment. The policy must name OPT and any other individuals and entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds. H. Purchase and maintain applicable professional liability insurance, or have Subcontractors and Suppliers do so, if Contractor or any Subcontractor or Supplier will provide or furnish professional services under this Contract. I. The policies of insurance required by this Article must: 1. Include at least the specific coverages and be written for not less than the limits of liability provided in this Article or the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws or Regulations,whichever is greater. 2. Contain a provision that coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to Contractor, Owner, and all named insureds and additional insureds. 3. Remain in effect at all times when Contractor is performing Work or is at the Site to conduct tasks arising from the Contract Documents. 4. Be appropriate for the Work being performed and provide protection from claims resulting from the Contractor's performance of the Work and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether performed by Contractor, General Conditions 007200-32 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 Subcontractor, Supplier, anyone directly or indirectly employed or retained by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable. J. The coverage requirements for specific policies of insurance must be met directly by those policies and may not rely on excess or umbrella insurance provided in other policies to meet the coverage requirement. 6.06 Property Insurance A. Purchase and maintain builder's risk insurance in the amount of the full replacement cost of the Project. This policy is subject to the deductible amounts requirements in this Article and the Supplementary Conditions or those required by Laws and Regulations and must comply with the requirements of Paragraph 6.09. This insurance shall: 1. Include the OPT,Contractor,and all Subcontractors,and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, as named insureds. 2. Be written on a builder's risk "all risk" policy form that includes insurance for physical loss or damage to the Work, temporary buildings, falsework, and materials and equipment in transit, and insures against at least the following perils or causes of loss: fire; lightning; windstorm; riot; civil commotion; terrorism; vehicle impact; aircraft; smoke; theft; vandalism and malicious mischief; mechanical breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; earthquake; volcanic activity, and other earth movement; flood; collapse; explosion; debris removal; demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations; water damage (other than that caused by flood); and such other perils or causes of loss as may be specifically required by this Section. If insurance against mechanical breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; earthquake; volcanic activity, and other earth movement; or flood, are not commercially available under builder's risk, by endorsement or otherwise, this insurance may be provided through other insurance policies acceptable to Owner and Contractor. 3. Cover expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property. 4. Cover materials and equipment in transit or stored prior to being incorporated in the Work. 5. Cover Owner-furnished or assigned property. 6. Allow for partial utilization of the Work by Owner. 7. Allow for the waiver of the insurer's subrogation rights as set forth below. 8. Provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils or causes of loss covered. 9. Not include a co-insurance clause. 10. Include a broad exception for ensuing losses from physical damage or loss with respect to any Defective workmanship, design, or materials exclusions. 11. Include testing and startup. 12. Be maintained in effect until the Work as a whole is complete, unless otherwise agreed to in writing by Owner and Contractor. General Conditions 007200-33 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 B. Evidence of insurance provided must contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to Owner and Contractor and to each named insured. C. Pay for costs not covered by the policy deductible. D. Notify builder's risk insurance provider if Owner will occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. Maintain the builder's risk insurance in effect during this Partial Occupancy or Use. E. Contractor may purchase other special insurance to be included in or to supplement the builder's risk or property insurance policies provided under this Article and the Supplementary Conditions. F. Contractor, Subcontractors, or employees of the Contractor or a Subcontractor owning property items, such as tools, construction equipment, or other personal property not expressly covered in the insurance required by the Contract Documents are responsible for providing their own insurance. 6.07 Waiver of Rights A. Insurance shall include a waiver of subrogation in favor of the additional insureds identified in the Supplementary Conditions. B. All policies purchased in accordance with this Article are to contain provisions to the effect that the insurers have no rights of recovery against OPT, named insureds or additional insureds in the event of a payment for loss or damage. Contractor and insurers waive all rights against the Owner's Indemnities for losses and damages created by or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by these policies and any other applicable property insurance. None of these waivers extend to the rights Contractor has to the proceeds of insurance as trustee. C. Contractor is responsible for assuring that agreements with Subcontractors contain provisions that the Subcontractor waive all rights against Owner,Contractor,named insureds and additional insureds, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them,for all losses and damages created by or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by builder's risk insurance and other property insurance. 6.08 Owner's Insurance for Project A. Owner is not responsible for purchasing and maintaining any insurance to protect the interest of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or others in the Work. The stated limits of insurance required are minimum only. Determine the limits that are adequate. These limits may be basic policy limits or any combination of basic limits and umbrella limits. In any event, Contractor is fully responsible for all losses arising out of, resulting from, or connected with operations under this Contract whether or not these losses are covered by insurance. The acceptance of evidence of insurance by the OPT, named insureds,or additional insureds does not release the Contractor from compliance with the insurance requirements of the Contract Documents. General Conditions 007200-34 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 6.09 Acceptable Evidence of Insurance A. Provide evidence of insurance acceptable to the Owner with the executed Contract Documents. Provide the following as evidence of insurance: 1. Certificates of Insurance on an acceptable form; 2. Riders or endorsements to policies; and 3. Policy limits and deductibles. B. Provide a list of"Additional Insureds"for each policy. C. Provide evidence that waivers of subrogation are provided on all applicable policies. D. Provide evidence of requirements for 30 days' notice before cancellation or any material change in the policy's terms and conditions, limits of coverage, or change in deductible amount. 6.10 Certificate of Insurance A. Submit Certificates of Insurance meeting the following requirements: 1. Form has been filed with and approved by the Texas Department of Insurance under Texas Insurance Code §1811.101; or 2. Form is a standard form deemed approved by the Department under Texas Insurance Code §1811.101. 3. No requirements of this Contract may be interpreted as requiring the issuance of a certificate of insurance on a certificate of insurance form that has not first been filed with and approved by the Texas Department of Insurance. B. Include the name of the Project in the description of operations box on the certificate of insurance. 6.11 Insurance Policies A. If requested by the Owner, make available for viewing a copy of insurance policies, declaration pages and endorsements, and documentation of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles. B. Contractor may block out (redact) any proprietary information or confidential premium pricing information contained in any policy or endorsement furnished under this Contract. 6.12 Continuing Evidence of Coverage A. Provide updated, revised, or new evidence of insurance in accordance this Article and the Supplementary Conditions prior to the expiration of existing policies. B. Provide evidence of continuation of insurance coverage at final payment and for the following 3 years. 6.13 Notices Regarding Insurance A. Notices regarding insurance are to be sent to the Owner at the following address: General Conditions 007200-35 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 City of Corpus Christi— Engineering Attn: Construction Contract Admin. P.O. Box 9277 Corpus Christi,TX 78469-9277 B. Submit questions regarding insurance requirements to the Construction Contract Administrator by calling 361-826-3530. 6.14 Texas Workers' Compensation Insurance Required Notice A. Definitions: 1. Certificate of coverage ("certificate") -A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self-insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC- 81, TWCC-82, TWCC-83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project,for the duration of the Project. 2. Duration of the Project-includes the time from the beginning of the Work onthe Project until the Contractor's/person's Work on the Project has been completed and accepted by the governmental entity. 3. Persons providing services on the Project ("Subcontractor" in §406.096) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has undertaken to perform on the Project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner-operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the Project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the Project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. B. The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44)for all employees of the Contractor providing services on the Project,for the duration of the Project. C. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the Contract. D. If the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project,the Contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period,file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. E. The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: 1. A certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning Work on the Project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the Project; and General Conditions 007200-36 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 2. No later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project. F. The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the Project and for one year thereafter. G. The Contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery,within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known,of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project. H. The Contractor shall post on each Project Site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the Project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. I. The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project,to: 1. Provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements,which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the Project,for the duration of the Project; 2. Provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning Work on the Project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the Project,for the duration of the Project; 3. Provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; 4. Obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: a. A certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning Work on the Project; and b. A new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; 5. Retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the Project and for one year thereafter; 6. Notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project; and 7. Contractually require each person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by this section, with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. J. By signing this Contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage,the Contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the Contractor who will provide services on the Project will be covered by workers' compensation coverage for the duration of the Project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of General Conditions 007200-37 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self-insured, with the commission's Division of Self-Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. K. The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the Contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the Contract void if the Contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity. ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES 7.01 Supervision and Superintendence A. Supervise, inspect, and direct the performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor is solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction. B. Provide a competent resident superintendent acceptable to the OPT. The resident superintendent or acceptable qualified assistant is to be present at all times when Work is being done. Do not replace this resident superintendent except under extraordinary circumstances. Provide a replacement resident superintendent equally competent to the previous resident superintendent if replacement is required. Notify the Owner prior to replacing the resident superintendent and obtain Owner's consent to the change in superintendent. 7.02 Labor; Working Hours A. Provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay out the Work and perform Work to complete the Project. Maintain good discipline and order at the Site. B. Perform Work at the Site during regular working hours except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent to the Site and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents. Regular working hours are between sunrise and sundown Monday through Saturday unless other times are specifically authorized in writing by OAR. C. Do not perform Work on a Sunday or legal holiday without OAR's consent. The following legal holidays are observed by the Owner: Holiday Date Observed New Year's Day January 1 Martin Luther King Jr Day Third Monday in January Memorial Day Last Monday in May Independence Day July 4 Labor Day First Monday in September Thanksgiving Day Fourth Thursday in November General Conditions 007200-38 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 Holiday Date Observed Friday after Thanksgiving Friday after Thanksgiving Christmas Day December 25 D. If a legal holiday falls on a Saturday, it will be observed the preceding Friday. If a legal holiday falls on a Sunday, it will be observed the following Monday. E. Pay additional cost incurred by Owner for services of the OAR or RPR to observe Work constructed outside of regular working hours. OAR will issue a Set-off in the Application for Payment for this cost per Paragraph 17.01.13 7.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment A. Provide services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and other facilities and incidentals necessary for the performance, testing, start-up, and completion of the Work, whether or not these items are specifically called for in the Contract Documents. B. Provide new materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work. Provide special warranties and guarantees required by the Contract Documents. Provide satisfactory evidence, including reports of required tests, as to the source, kind, and quality of materials and equipment as required by the Contract Documents or as requested by the OAR. C. Store, apply, install, connect, erect, protect, use, clean, and condition materials and equipment in accordance with instructions of the applicable Supplier, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents. 7.04 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others A. Contractor may retain Subcontractors and Suppliers for the performance of parts of the Work. All Subcontractors and Suppliers must be acceptable to Owner. B. Contractor must retain specific Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities for the performance of designated parts of the Work if required to do so by the Contract Documents. C. Submit a list of proposed Subcontractors and Suppliers to OAR prior to entering into binding subcontracts or purchase orders. These proposed Subcontractors or Suppliers are deemed acceptable to Owner unless Owner raises a substantive, reasonable objection within 30 days after receiving this list. Under no circumstances shall any Subcontractor debarred under Chapter 41 of The Code of Ordinances, City of Corpus Christi, be deemed acceptable to Owner. D. Contractor is not required to retain Subcontractors, Suppliers,or other individuals or entities to furnish or perform part of the Work after the Effective Date of the Contract if Contractor has reasonable objection. E. Owner may require the replacement of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities retained by the Contractor. Provide an acceptable replacement for the rejected Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity. Owner also may require Contractor to retain specific replacements, subject to Contractor's reasonable objections. General Conditions 007200-39 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 F. Contractor may be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to a replacement of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other entities required by Owner. The Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Time with respect to replacement of any individual deemed unsuitable by the OPT. Notify OAR immediately if a replacement of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other entity increases the Contract Price or Contract Times. Initiate a Change Proposal for the adjustment within 10 days of Owner's notice to replace a Subcontractor,Supplier,or other entity retained by Contractor to perform part of the Work. Do not make the replacement until the change in Contract Price or Contract Times has been accepted by the Owner if Change Proposal is to be submitted. G. Owner's initial acceptance of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities, or their replacements, does not constitute a waiver of the obligation of the Contractor to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. H. Maintain a current and complete list of Subcontractors and Suppliers that are to perform or furnish part of the Work. I. Contractor is fully responsible for the acts and omissions of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing Work. J. Contractor is solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing Work. K. Require Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing Work to communicate with OPT through Contractor. L. Contracts between the Contractor and their Subcontractors or Suppliers may specifically bind the Subcontractors or Suppliers to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. Contractor is responsible for meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents if they choose to not bind the Subcontractors or Suppliers to applicable terms or conditions of the Contract Documents. 1. All Subcontractors employed on this Project must be required to obtain Workers' Compensation Insurance. 2. Proof of this insurance will be required prior to the start of any Work. M. OPT may furnish information about amounts paid to Contractor for Work provided by Subcontractors or Suppliers to the entity providing the Work. N. Nothing in the Contract Documents: 1. Creates a contractual relationship between members of the OPT and members of the Contractor's Team. 2. Creates an obligation on the part of the Owner to pay or to see to the payment of money due members of the Contractor's Team, except as may be required by Laws and Regulations. 7.05 Patent Fees and Royalties A. Pay license fees, royalties, and costs incident to the use of inventions, designs, processes, products, or devices which are patented or copyrighted by others in the performance of the Work, or to incorporate these inventions, designs, processes, products, or devices which are patented or copyrighted by others in the Work. The Contract Documents identify inventions, General Conditions 007200-40 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 designs, processes, products, or devices OPT knows are patented or copyrighted by others or that its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of a license fee or royalty to others. Contractor is to include the cost associated with the use of patented or copyrighted products or processes, whether specified or selected by the Contractor, in the Contract Price. B. Contractor's obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to infringement of patent rights and copyrights are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. 7.06 Permits A. Obtain and pay for construction permits and licenses. OPT is to assist Contractor in obtaining permits and licenses when required to do so by applicable Laws and Regulations. Pay governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work which are applicable at the time the Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price. This Project is not exempt from City permits and fees unless expressly stated otherwise. 7.07 Taxes A. Contractor is responsible for all taxes and duties arising out of the Work. The Owner generally qualifies as a tax exempt agency as defined by the statutes of the State of Texas and is usually not subject to any city or state sales or use taxes, however certain items such as rented equipment may be taxable even though Owner is a tax-exempt agency. Contractor is responsible for including in the Contract Price any applicable sales and use taxes and is responsible for complying with all applicable statutes and rulings of the State Comptroller. Pay sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations. B. The Owner is exempt from the Federal Transportation and Excise Tax. Contractor must comply with all federal regulations governing the exemptions. C. Products incorporated into the Work are exempt from state sales tax according to the provisions of Subchapter H, Chapter 151, of the Texas Tax Code. D. Contractor may not include any amounts for sales, use, or similar taxes for which the Owner is exempt in the Contract Price or any proposed Change Order or Application for Payment. E. Obtain tax exemption certificates or other documentation necessary to establish Owner's exemption from such taxes. 7.08 Laws and Regulations A. Give required notices and comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. OPT is not responsible for monitoring Contractor's compliance with Laws or Regulations except where expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations. B. Pay costs resultingfrom actions taken by Contractorthat are contraryto Laws or Regulations. Contractor is not responsible for determining that the design aspects of the Work described in the Contract Documents is in accordance with Laws and Regulations. This does not relieve Contractor of its obligations under Paragraph 3.03. General Conditions 007200-41 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 C. Owner or Contractor may give notice to the other party of changes in Laws or Regulations that may affect the cost or time of performance of the Work, including: 1. Changes in Laws or Regulations affecting procurement of permits; and 2. Sales, use, value-added, consumption, and other similar taxes which come into effect after Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price. D. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal or Owner may initiate a Claim within 30 days of this notice if Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent of adjustments in Contract Price or Contract Times resulting from these changes. 7.09 Safety and Protection A. Contractor is solely responsible for initiating,maintaining,and supervising safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. This responsibility does not relieve Subcontractors of their responsibility for the safety of persons or property in the performance of their work, nor for compliance with applicable safety Laws and Regulations. B. Take necessary precautions for the safety of persons on the Site or who may be affected by the Work, and provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury, or loss to: 1. Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated in the Work, whether stored on or off Site; and 2. Other property at or adjacent to the Site, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, other work in progress, utilities, and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction. C. Comply with applicable Laws and Regulations relating to the safety and protection of persons or property. Erect and maintain necessary safeguards for safety and protection. Notify Owner; the owners of adjacent property, Underground Facilities, and other utilities; and other contractors and utility owners performing work at or adjacent to the Site when prosecution of the Work may affect them. Cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation, and replacement of their property or work in progress. 1. Comply with requirements of Underground Facility Damage Prevention and Safety Act, Texas Utilities Code Chapter 251. 2. Comply with all applicable safety rules and regulations of the Federal Occupational Health and Safety Act of 1970 and subsequent amendments(OSHA). D. Remedy damage, injury, or loss to property referred to in Paragraph 7.09.B caused by Contractor's Team. Pay remediation costs unless the damage or loss is: 1. Attributable to the fault of the Contract Documents; 2. Attributable to acts or omissions of OPT; or 3. Not attributable to the actions or failure to act of the Contractor's Team. E. Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and protection of persons or the Work or property at or adjacent to the Site continues until Work is completed and resumes whenever Contractor's Team returns to the Site to fulfill warranty or correction obligations or to conduct other tasks. General Conditions 007200-42 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 F. Comply with the applicable requirements of the Owner's safety program if required to do so in the Supplementary Conditions. A copy of the Owner's safety program will be provided in the Bidding Documents. 7.10 Safety Representative A. Provide a qualified and experienced safety representative at the Site whose duties and responsibilities are the prevention of accidents and maintaining and supervising safety programs. 7.11 Hazard Communication Programs A. Coordinate the exchange of material safety data sheets or other hazard communication information required to be made available or exchanged between or among employers at the Site in accordance with Laws or Regulations. 7.12 Emergencies A. Act to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss in emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at or adjacent to the Site. Notify OAR immediately if Contractor believes that significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused or are required as a result of this need to act. A Modification is to be issued by OAR if OPT determines that the incident giving rise to the emergency action was not the responsibility of the Contractor and that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to this emergency. 7.13 Contractor's General Warranty and Guarantee A. Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner that Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents and is not Defective. Owner is entitled to rely on Contractor's warranty and guarantee. Assume and bear responsibility for costs and time delays associated with variations from the requirements of the Contract Documents. B. This Contractor's warranty and guarantee excludes defects or damage caused by improper maintenance or operation, abuse, or modification by OPT; or normal wear and tear under normal usage. C. Contractor's obligation to perform and complete Work in accordance with the Contract Documents is absolute. None of the following constitute an acceptance of Defective Work or a release of Contractor's obligation to perform Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: 1. Observations by OPT; 2. Recommendation by OAR to pay or payment by Owner of progress or final payments; 3. The issuance of a Certificate of Substantial Completion; 4. Use or occupancy of part of the Work by Owner; 5. Review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample; 6. Inspections,tests, or approvals by others; or General Conditions 007200-43 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 7. Correction of Defective Work by Owner. D. The Contract Documents may require the Contractor to accept the assignment of a contract between the Owner and a contractor or supplier. The specific warranties, guarantees, and correction obligations contained in an assigned contract govern with respect to Contractor's performance obligations to Owner for the Work described in an assigned contract. 7.14 INDEMNIFICATION A. To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the Owner from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorney's fees or dispute resolution costs, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work and/or failure to comply with the terms and conditions of the contract, violations of Laws or Regulations, or bodily injury, death or destruction of tangible property caused by the acts, omissions or negligence of the Contractor's Team, regardless of whether such claim, damage, loss or expense is alleged to be caused in part by an Owner hereunder, subject to the Owner's defenses and liability limits under the Texas Tort Claims Act. However, nothing herein shall be construed to require Contractor to indemnify an Owner against a claim, loss, damage or expense caused by the sole negligence of an Owner. B. To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the Owner from and against Indemnified Costs, arising out of or relating to: (i) the failure to control, contain, or remove a Constituent of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor's Team or a Hazardous Environmental Condition created by Contractor's Team, (ii) Contractor's Team's action or inaction related to damages, delays, disruptions or interference with the work of Owner's employees, other contractors, or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site, or (iii) the correction of Defective Work. Nothing in this paragraph obligates the Contractor to indemnify the Owner from the consequences of the Owner's sole negligence. c. To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the Owner from and against Indemnified Costs resulting from infringement on patent rights or copyrights by Contractor's Team. General Conditions 007200-44 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 D. The indemnification obligations of this Paragraph 7.14 are not limited by the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for members of the Contractor's Team or other individuals or entities under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts in claims against Owner by an employee or the survivor or personal representative of employee of Contractor's Team. The indemnification obligations of this Paragraph 7.14 shall not be deemed to be released,waived or modified in any respect by reason of any surety or insurance provided by Contractor. E. The indemnification obligations of this Paragraph 7.14 do not extend to the liability of Designer arising out of the preparation of the Contract Documents or giving directions or instructions, or failing to give them, to the extent they are obligated to do so if that is the primary cause of the injury or damage. F. Notify the other party within 10 days if Owner or Contractor receives notice of any claim or circumstances that could give rise to an indemnified loss. The notice must include the following: 1. A description of the indemnification event in reasonable detail; 2. The basis on which indemnification may be due; and 3. The anticipated amount of the indemnified loss. This notice does not stop or prevent Owner from later asserting a different basis for indemnification or a different amount of indemnified loss than that indicated in the initial notice. Owner does not waive any rights to indemnification except to the extent that Contractor is prejudiced, suffers loss, or incurs expense because of the delay if Owner does not provide this notice within the 10-day period. G. Defense of Indemnification Claims: 1. Assume the defense of the claim with counsel chosen by the Contractor and pay related costs, unless Owner decides otherwise. Contractor's counsel must be acceptable to Owner. Control the defense and any negotiations to settle the claim. Advise Owner as to its defense of the claim within 10 days after being notified of the indemnification request. Owner may assume and control the defense if Contractor does not assume the defense. Pay all defense expenses of the Owner as an indemnified loss. 2. Owner may retain separate counsel to participate in, but not control, the defense and any settlement negotiations if Contractor defends the claim. Contractor may not settle the claim without the consent or agreement of Owner. Contractor may settle the claim with Owner's consent and agreement unless it: a. Would result in injunctive relief or other equitable remedies or otherwise require Owner to comply with restrictions or limitations that adversely affect Owner; b. Would require Owner to pay amounts that Contractor does not fund in full; or C. Would not result in Owner's full and complete release from all liability to the plaintiffs or claimants who are parties to or otherwise bound by the settlement. 7.15 Delegation of Professional Design Services A. Contractor is not required to provide professional design services unless these services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless these General Conditions 007200-45 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 services are required to carry out Contractor's responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures. Contractor is not required to provide professional services in violation of applicable Laws and Regulations. B. The Contract Documents specify performance and design criteria related to systems, materials or equipment if professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials, or equipment are specifically required of Contractor. These services or certifications must be provided by the licensed Texas Professional Engineer or Registered Architect who prepares, signs, and seals drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings, and other documents. C. OPT is entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy, and completeness of the services, certifications, or approvals performed by Contractor's design professionals, provided OPT has specified to Contractor the performance and design criteria that these services must satisfy. D. Pursuant to this Paragraph 7.15, Designer's review and approval of design calculations and design drawings is only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with the performance and design criteria given and the design concepts expressed in the Contract Documents. Designer's review and approval of Shop Drawings and other documents is only for the purpose stated in the Contract Documents. E. Contractor is not responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria specified by OPT. Advise OPT if the performance or design criteria are known or considered likely to be inadequate or otherwise deficient. ARTICLE 8—OTHER WORK AT THE SITE 8.01 Other Work A. Owner may arrange for other work at or adjacent to the Site which is not part of the Contractor's Work. This other work may be performed by Owner's employees or through other contractors. Utility owners may perform work on their utilities and facilities at or adjacent to the Site. Include costs associated with coordinating with entities performing other work or associated with connecting to this other work in the Contract Price if this other work is shown in the Contract Documents. B. OPT is to notify Contractor of other work prior to starting the work and provide any knowledge they have regarding the start of utility work at or adjacent to the Site to Contractor. C. Provide other contractors: 1. Proper and safe access to the Site; 2. Reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment; and 3. Reasonable opportunity to execute their work. D. Provide cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work required to properly connect or integrate with other work. Do not endanger the work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering the work of others without the consent of OAR and the others whose work will be affected. General Conditions 007200-46 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 E. Inspect the work of others and immediately notify OAR if the proper execution of part of Contractor's Work depends upon work performed by others and this work has not been performed or is unsuitable for the proper execution of Contractor's Work. Contractor's failure to notify the OAR constitutes an acceptance of this other work as acceptable for integration with Contractor's Work. This acceptance does not apply to latent defects or deficiencies in the work of others. F. Take adequate measures to prevent damages, delays, disruptions, or interference with the work of Owner, other contractors, or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site. 8.02 Coordination A. Owner has sole authority and responsibility for coordination of this other work unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. The Owner is to identify the entity with authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities of the various contractors, the limitations of their authority, and the work to be coordinated prior to the start of other work at or adjacent to the Site. 8.03 Legal Relationships A. Contractor may be entitled to a change in Contract Price or Contract Times if, while performing other work at or adjacent to the Site for Owner, the OPT or other contractor retained by the City: 1. Damages the Work or property of Contractor's Team; 2. Delays, disrupts, or interferes with the execution of the Work; or 3. Increases the scope or cost of performing the Work through their actions or inaction. B. Notify the OAR immediately of the event leading to a potential Change Proposal so corrective action can be taken. Submit the Change Proposal within 30 days of the event if corrective action has not adequately mitigated the impact of the actions or inactions of others. Information regarding this other work in the Contract Documents is used to determine if the Contractor is entitled to a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. Changes in Contract Price require that Contractor assign rights against the other contractor to Owner with respect to the damage, delay, disruption, or interference that is the subject of the adjustment. Changes in Contract Times require that the time extension is essential to Contractor's ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times. C. Take prompt corrective action if Contractor's Team damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of Owner's employees, other contractors, or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site or agree to compensate other contractors or utility owners for correcting the damage. Promptly attempt to settle claims with other contractors or utility owners if Contractor damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of other contractors or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site. D. Owner may impose a set-off against payments due to Contractor and assign the Owner's contractual rights against Contractor with respect to the breach of the obligations described in this Paragraph 8.03 to other contractors if damages, delays, disruptions, or interference occu r. General Conditions 007200-47 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 E. Contractor's obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to damages, delays,disruptions, and interference with other work at the Site are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. ARTICLE 9—OWNER'S AND OPT'S RESPONSIBILITIES 9.01 Communications to Contractor A. OPT issues communications to Contractor through OAR except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 9.02 Replacement of Owner's Project Team Members A. Owner may replace members of the OPT at its discretion. 9.03 Furnish Data A. OPT is to furnish the data required of OPT under the Contract Documents. 9.04 Pay When Due A. Owner is to make payments to Contractor when due as described in Article 17. 9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests A. Owner's duties with respect to providing lands and easements are described in Paragraph 5.01. OPT will make copies of reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site available to Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 5.03. 9.06 Insurance A. Owner's responsibilities with respect to purchasing and maintaining insurance are described in Article 6. 9.07 Modifications A. Owner's responsibilities with respect to Modifications are described in Article 11. 9.08 Inspections,Tests, and Approvals A. OPT's responsibility with respect to certain inspections,tests, and approvals are described in Paragraph 16.02. 9.09 Limitations on OPT's Responsibilities A. The OPT does not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, and is not responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or related safety precautions and programs, or for failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. OPT is not responsible for Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. General Conditions 007200-48 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition A. OPT's responsibility for undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Conditions is described in Paragraph 5.06. 9.11 Compliance with Safety Program A. Contractor is to inform the OPT of its safety programs and OPT is to comply with the specific applicable requirements of this program. 9.12 Plans and Specifications A. Owner does not warrant the plans and specification. ARTICLE 10—OAR'S AND DESIGNER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 10.01 Owner's Representative A. OAR is Owner's representative. The duties and responsibilities and the limitations of authority of OAR as Owner's representative are described in the Contract Documents. 10.02 Visits to Site A. Designer is to make periodic visits to the Site to observe the progress and quality of the Work. Designer is to determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents based on observations made during these visits. Designer is not required to make exhaustive or continuous inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. Designer is to inform the OPT of issues or concerns and OAR is to work with Contractor to address these issues or concerns. Designer's visits and observations are subject to the limitations on Designer's authority and responsibility described in Paragraphs 9.09 and 10.07. B. OAR is to observe the Work to check the quality and quantity of Work, implement Owner's quality assurance program, and administer the Contract as Owner's representative as described in the Contract Documents. OAR's visits and observations are subject to the limitations on OAR's authority and responsibility described in Paragraphs 9.09 and 10.07. 10.03 Resident Project Representatives A. Resident Project Representatives assist OAR in observing the progress and quality of the Work at the Site. The limitations on Resident Project Representatives' authority and responsibility are described in Paragraphs 9.09 and 10.07. 10.04 Rejecting Defective Work A. OPT has the authority to reject Work in accordance with Article 16. OAR is to issue a Defective Work Notice to Contractor and document when Defective Work has been corrected or accepted in accordance with Article 16. General Conditions 007200-49 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 10.05 Shop Drawings, Modifications and Payments A. Designer's authority related to Shop Drawings and Samples are described in the Contract Documents. B. Designer's authority related to design calculations and design drawings submitted in response to a delegation of professional design services are described in Paragraph 7.15. C. OAR and Designer's authority related to Modifications is described in Article 11. D. OAR's authority related to Applications for Payment is described in Articles 15 and 17. 10.06 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work A. OAR is to render decisions regarding non-technical or contractual / administrative requirements of the Contract Documents and will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. B. Designer is to render decisions regarding the conformance of the Work to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Designer will render a decision to either correct the Defective Work or accept the Work under the provisions of Paragraph 16.04 if Work does not conform to the Contract Documents. OAR will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. C. Contractor may appeal Designer's decision by submitting a Change Proposal if Contractor does not agree with the Designer's decision. 10.07 Limitations on OAR's and Designer's Authority and Responsibilities A. OPT is not responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor's Team. No actions or failure to act, or decisions made in good faith to exercise or not exercise the authority or responsibility available under the Contract Documents creates a duty in contract, tort, or otherwise of the OPT to the Contractor or members of the Contractor's Team. ARTICLE 11—AMENDING THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS; CHANGES IN THE WORK 11.01 Amending and Supplementing the Contract Documents A. The Contract Documents maybe modified by a Contract Amendment, Change Order, Work Change Directive, or Field Order. 1. Contract Amendment: Owner and Contractor may modify the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents without the recommendation of the Designer using a Contract Amendment. A Contract Amendment may be used for: a. Changes that do not involve: 1) The performance or acceptability of the Work; 2) The design as described in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise; or 3) Other engineering, architectural or technical matters. b. Authorizing new phases of the Work and establishing the Contract Price, Contract Times, or terms and conditions of the Contract for the new phase of Work when using phased construction or purchasing Goods and Special Services to be incorporated into the Project. General Conditions 007200-50 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 2. Change Order: All changes to the Contract Documents that include a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times for previously authorized Work, or changes to the Work requiring Designer's approval must be made by a Change Order. A Change Order may also be used to establish modifications of the Contract Documents that do not affect the Contract Price or Contract Times. 3. Work Change Directive: A Work Change Directive does not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times, but is evidence that the parties expect that the modifications ordered or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations on the Contract Price and Contract Times. If negotiations under the terms of the Contract Documents governing adjustments, expressly including Paragraphs 11.04 and 11.05 are unsuccessful, Contractor must submit a Change Proposal seeking an adjustment of the Contract Price or the Contract Times no later than 30 days after the completion of the Work set out in the Work Change Directive. 4. Field Order: Designer may require minor changes in the Work that do not change the Contract Price or Contract Times using a Field Order. OAR may issue a Field Order for non-technical, administrative issues. Submit a Change Proposal if Contractor believes that a Field Order justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times before proceeding with the Work described in the Field Order. B. Perform added or revised Work under the applicable provisions of the Contract Documents for the same or similar Work unless different Drawings, Specifications or directions are provided in the Modification. 11.02 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work A. Owner may order additions, deletions,or revisions in the Work at anytime as recommended by the Designer to the extent the change: 1. Involves the design as described in the Contract Documents; 2. Involves acceptance of the Work; or 3. Involves other engineering, architectural or technical matters. B. These changes may be authorized by a Modification. Proceed with the Work involved or, in the case of a deletion in the Work, immediately cease construction activities with respect to the deleted Work upon receipt of the Modification. Nothing in this paragraph obligates the Contractor to undertake Work that Contractor reasonably concludes cannot be performed in a manner consistent with Contractor's safety obligations under the Contract Documents or Laws and Regulations. 11.03 Unauthorized Changes in the Work A. Contractor is not entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times with respect to Work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents, except in the case of an emergency as provided in Paragraph 7.12, or in the case of uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph 16.05. General Conditions 007200-51 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 B. Contractor is responsible for costs and time delays associated with variations from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless the variations are specifically approved by Change Order. 11.04 Change of Contract Price A. The Contract Price for authorized Work can only be changed by a Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an adjustment in the Contract Price must comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.06. Any Claim for an adjustment of Contract Price must comply with the provisions of Article 13. B. An adjustment in the Contract Price is to be determined as follows: 1. By applying unit prices to the quantities of the items involved, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03, where the Work involved is covered by unit prices in the Contract Documents; 2. By a mutually agreed lump sum where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices in the Contract Documents; or 3. Payment on the basis of the Cost of the Work determined as provided in Paragraph 15.01 plus a Contractor's fee for overhead and profit determined as provided in Paragraph 15.05 when the Work involved is not covered by unit prices in the Contract Documents and the parties do not reach a mutual agreement to a lump sum. C. The original Contract Price may not be increased by more than 25 percent or the limit set out in Texas Local Government Code 252.048 or its successor statute, whichever is greater. Owner may decrease the Work by up to 25 percent of the Contract Price. 11.05 Change of Contract Times A. The Contract Times for authorized Work can only be changed by Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an adjustment in the Contract Times must comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.06. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times must comply with the provisions of Article 13. B. An adjustment of the Contract Times is subject to the limitations described in Paragraph 4.04. 11.06 Change Proposals A. Submit a Change Proposal in accordance with Article 12 to the OAR to: 1. Request an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times; 2. Appeal an initial decision by OPT concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or relating to the acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents; 3. Contest a set-off against payment due; or 4. Seek other relief under the Contract Documents. General Conditions 007200-52 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 B. Notify the OAR within 3 days if a Change Proposal is to be submitted. Submit each Change Proposal to OAR no later than 30 days after the event initiating the Change Proposal. 11.07 Execution of Change Orders A. Owner and Contractor are to execute Change Orders covering: 1. Changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times, which are agreed to by Owner and Contractor, including undisputed sums or amount of time for Work actually performed in accordance with a Work Change Directive; 2. Changes in Contract Price resulting from Owner set-offs unless the set-off has been successfully challenged by Contractor; 3. Changes in the Work which are: a. Ordered by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 11.02.A, b. Required because Defective Work was accepted under Paragraph 16.04 or Owner's correction of Defective Work under Paragraph 16.07, or C. Agreed to by the Owner and Contractor; and 4. Changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or other changes under Paragraph 11.06 or Article 13. B. Acceptance of a Change Order by Contractor constitutes a full accord and satisfaction for any and all claims and costs of any kind, whether direct or indirect, including but not limited to impact, delay or acceleration damages arising from the subject matter of the Change Order. Each Change Order must be specific and final as to prices and extensions of time, with no reservations or other provisions allowing for future additional money or time as a result of the particular changes identified and fully compensated in the Change Order. The execution of a Change Order by Contractor constitutes conclusive evidence of Contractor's agreement to the ordered changes in the Work. This Contract, as amended, forever releases any claim against Owner for additional time or compensation for matters relating to or arising out of or resulting from the Work included within or affected by the executed Change Order. This release applies to claims related to the cumulative impact of all Change Orders and to any claim related to the effect of a change on unchanged Work. C. All Change Orders require approval by either the City Council or Owner by administrative action. The approval process requires a minimum of 45 days after submission in final form with all supporting data. Receipt of Contractor's submission by Owner constitutes neither acceptance nor approval of a Change Order, nor a warranty that the Change Order will be authorized by City Council or administrative action. The time required for the approval process may not be considered a delay and no extensions to the Contract Times or increase in the Contract Price will be considered or granted as a result of the process. Contractor may proceed with Work if a Work Change Directive is issued. D. If the Contractor refuses to execute a Change Order that is required to be executed under the terms of this Paragraph 11.07, the Change Order is deemed to be in full force as if executed by Contractor. Contractor may file a Claim for payment and/or time, pursuant to Article 13. General Conditions 007200-53 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 11.08 Notice to Surety A. Notify the surety of Modifications affecting the general scope of the Work, changes in the provisions of the Contract Documents,or changes in Contract Price or Contract Times. Adjust the amount of each Bond when Modifications change the Contract Price. ARTICLE 12—CHANGE MANAGEMENT 12.01 Requests for Change Proposal A. Designer will initiate Modifications by issuing a Request for a Change Proposal (RCP). 1. Designer will prepare a description of proposed Modifications. 2. Designer will issue the Request for a Change Proposal form to Contractor. A number will be assigned to the Request for a Change Proposal when issued. 3. Return a Change Proposal in accordance with Paragraph 12.02 to the Designer for evaluation by the OPT. 12.02 Change Proposals A. Submit a Change Proposal (CP) to the Designer for Contractor initiated changes in the Contract Documents or in response to a Request for Change Proposal. A Change Proposal must be submitted to the OAR no later than 30 days after the event initiating the Change Proposal. 1. Use the Change Proposal form provided. 2. Assign a number to the Change Proposal when issued. 3. Include with the Change Proposal: a. A complete description of the proposed Modification if Contractor initiated or proposed changes to the OPT's description of the proposed Modification. b. The reason the Modification is requested, if not in response to a Request for a Change Proposal. C. A detailed breakdown of the cost of the change if the Modification requires a change in Contract Price. The itemized breakdown is to include: 1) List of materials and equipment to be installed; 2) Man hours for classification; 3) Equipment used in construction; 4) Consumable supplies,fuels, and materials; 5) Royalties and patent fees; 6) Bonds and insurance; 7) Overhead and profit; 8) Field office costs; and 9) Other items of cost. General Conditions 007200-54 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 d. Provide the level of detail outlined in the paragraph above for each Subcontractor or Supplier actually performing the Work if Work is to be provided by a Subcontractor or Supplier. Indicate appropriate Contractor mark-ups for Work provided through Subcontractors and Suppliers. Provide the level of detail outline in the paragraph above for self-performed Work. e. Submit Change Proposals that comply with Article 15 for Cost of Work. f. Provide a revised schedule. Show the effect of the change on the Project Schedule and the Contract Times. B. Submit a Change Proposal to the OAR to request a Field Order. C. A Change Proposal is required for all substitutions or deviations from the Contract Documents. D. Request changes to products in accordance with Article 25. 12.03 Designer Will Evaluate Request for Modification A. OAR is to advise OPT regarding the Change Proposal. OPT is to review each Change Proposal and Contractor's supporting data, and within 30 days after receipt of the documents, direct the OAR to either approve or deny the Change Proposal in whole or in part. OAR is to issue a Change Order for an approved Change Proposal. The Contractor may deem the Change Proposal to be denied if OAR does not take action on the Change Proposal within 30 days and start the time for appeal of the denial under Article 13. 1. Change Orders and Contract Amendments will be sent to the Contractor for execution with a copy to the Owner recommending approval. A Work Change Directive may be issued if Work needs to progress before the Change Order or Contract Amendment can be authorized by the Owner. 2. Work Change Directives, Change Orders, and Contract Amendments can only be approved by the Owner. a. Work performed on the Change Proposal prior to receiving a Work Change Directive or approval of the Change Order or Contract Amendment is performed at the Contractor's risk. b. No payment will be made for Work on Change Orders or Contract Amendments until approved by the Owner. B. The Contractor may be informed that the Request for a Change Proposal is not approved and construction is to proceed in accordance with the Contract Documents. 12.04 Substitutions A. The products of the listed Suppliers are to be furnished where Specifications list several manufacturers but do not specifically list "or equal" or "or approved equal" products. Use of any products other than those specifically listed is a substitution. Follow these procedures for a substitution. B. Substitutions are defined as any product that the Contractor proposes to provide for the Project in lieu of the specified product. Submit a Change Proposal per Paragraph 12.02 along with a Shop Drawing as required by Article 25 to request approval of a substitution. General Conditions 007200-55 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 C. Prove that the product is acceptable as a substitute. It is not the Designer's responsibility to prove the product is not acceptable as a substitute. 1. Indicate on a point by point basis for each specified feature that the product is acceptable to meet the intent of the Contract Documents requirements. 2. Make a direct comparison with the specified Suppliers published data sheets and available information. Provide this printed material with the documents submitted. 3. The decision of the Designer regarding the acceptability of the proposed substitute product is final. D. Provide a written certification that, in making the substitution request,the Contractor: 1. Has determined that the substituted product will perform in substantially the same manner and result in the same ability to meet the specified performance as the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranties and/or bonds for the substituted product as specified or as would be provided by the manufacturer of the specified product. 3. Will assume all responsibility to coordinate any modifications that may be necessary to incorporate the substituted product into the Project and will waive all claims for additional Work which may be necessary to incorporate the substituted product into the Project which may subsequently become apparent. 4. Will maintain the same time schedule as for the specified product. E. Pay for review of substitutions in accordance with Article 25. ARTICLE 13—CLAIMS 13.01 Claims A. Follow the Claims process described in this Article for the following disputes between Owner and Contractor: 1. Seeking an adjustment of Contract Price or Contract Times; 2. Contesting an initial decision by OAR concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents; 3. Appealing OAR's decision regarding a Change Proposal; 4. Seeking resolution of a contractual issue that OAR has declined to address; or 5. Seeking other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. B. Contractor shall be entitled to an extension of Contract Time for delays or disruptions due to unusually severe weather in excess of weather normally experienced at the job site, as determined from climatological data set forth by the National Weather Service and which affects the Project's critical path. Contractor shall bear the entire economic risk of all weather delays and disruptions. Contractor shall not be entitled to any increase in the Contract Price by reason of such delays or disruptions. Upon Contractor reaching Substantial Completion, Owner and Contractor shall look back at the entire duration of the calendar day Project and review the totality of what Contractor claims were unusually severe weather disruptions. If the Project was delayed or disrupted due to unusually severe weather in General Conditions 007200-56 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 excess of weather normally experienced over the entire duration of the Project, Contractor may make a Claim for an extension of the Contract Time for delays or disruptions due to unusually severe weather in excess of weather normally experienced at the job site, as determined from climatological data set forth by the National Weather Service and which affects the Project's critical path. Any time extension granted shall be non-compensatory. 13.02 Claims Process A. Claims must be initiated by written notice. Notice must conspicuously state that it is a notice of a Claim in the subject line or first sentence. Notice must also list the date of first occurrence of the claimed event. B. Except for Claims resulting from unusually severe weather, notice of a Claim by Contractor must be in writing and delivered to the Owner, Designer and the OAR within 14 days after the start of the event giving rise to the Claim. Failure by Contractor to submit written notice of a Claim within 14 days shall constitute a waiver of such Claim. C. Submit the complete Claim with supporting documentation to Owner no later than 60 days after the start of the event giving rise to the Claim (unless Designer allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of such Claim). The Claim must be signed and sworn to by Contractor, certifying that the Claim is made in good faith, that the supporting data is accurate and complete, and that to the best of Contractor's knowledge and belief,the relief requested accurately reflects the full compensation to which Contractor is entitled. Failure by Contractor to submit the Claim within 60 days shall constitute a waiver of such Claim. D. Any Claims by Contractor that are not brought within 90 days following the termination of the Contract are waived and shall be automatically deemed denied. E. Claims by Owner must be submitted by written notice to Contractor. F. The responsibility to substantiate a Claim rests with the entity making the Claim. Claims must contain sufficient detail to allow the other party to fully review the Claim. 1. Claims seeking an adjustment of Contract Price must include the Contractor's job cost report. Provide additional documentation as requested by OAR or Designer. 2. Claims seeking an adjustment of Contract Time must include a Time Impact Analysis and native schedule files in Primavera or MS Project digital format. Provide additional documentation as requested by OAR or Designer. G. Claims by Contractor against Owner and Claims by Owner against Contractor, including those alleging an error or omission by Designer but excluding those arising under Section 7.12,shall be referred initially to Designer for consideration and recommendation. H. Designer will review a Claim by Contractor within 30 days of receipt of the Claim and take one or more of the following actions: 1. Request additional supporting data from the party who made the Claim; 2. Issue a recommendation; 3. Suggest a compromise; or General Conditions 007200-57 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 4. Advise the parties that Designer is not able to make a recommendation due to insufficient information or a conflict of interest. I. If the Designer does not take any action, the Claim shall be deemed denied 30 days after receipt of the Claim. J. Following receipt of Designer's initial recommendation regarding a Claim,the Contractor and the Owner shall seek to resolve the Claim through the exchange of information and direct negotiations. If no agreement is reached within 90 days, the Claim shall be deemed denied. The Owner and Contractor may extend the time for resolving the Claim by mutual agreement. Notify OAR of any actions taken on a Claim. K. If the entity receiving a Claim approves the Claim in whole or in part or denies it in whole or in part, this action is final and binding unless the other entity invokes the procedure described in Article 22 for final resolution of disputes by filing a notice of appeal within 30 days after this action. L. If the Owner and Contractor reach a mutual agreement regarding a Claim,the results of the agreement or action on the Claim will be incorporated in a Change Order by the OAR to the extent they affect the Contract Documents,the Contract Price, or the Contract Times. M. Both parties shall continue to perform all obligations under the Agreement during the pendency of any dispute or disagreement relating to this Agreement, unless performance would be impracticable or impossible under the circumstances. N. Any failure of Contractor to comply with any of the foregoing conditions precedent with regard to any such Claim shall constitute a waiver of any entitlement to submit or pursue such Claim. O. Receipt and review of a Claim by City shall not be construed as a waiver of any defenses to the Claim available to the City under the Contract Documents or at law. ARTICLE 14—PREVAILING WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS 14.01 Payment of Prevailing Wage Rates A. Contractor and any Subcontractors employed on this Project shall pay not less than the rates established by the Owner as required by Texas Government Code Chapter 2258. B. Contractor and its Subcontractors are required to pay Davis-Bacon Wage Rates. C. Contractor and its Subcontractors are required to pay laborers and mechanics an overtime rate of not less than one and one-half times the basic rate for all hours worked in excess of forty hours in a given workweek. 14.02 Records A. In accordance with Tex. Gov't Code §2258.024,the Contractor and its Subcontractors, if any, shall keep a record showing: 1. The name and occupation of each worker employed by the Contractor or Subcontractor in the construction of the Work; and 2. The actual per diem wages paid to each worker. General Conditions 007200-58 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 B. The record shall be open at all reasonable hours to inspection by the officers and agents of the Owner. 14.03 Liability; Penalty; Criminal Offense A. Tex. Gov't Code §2258.003 — Liability: An officer, agent, or employee of the Owner is not liable in a civil action for any act or omission implementing or enforcing Chapter 2258 unless the action was made in bad faith. B. Tex. Gov't Code §2258.023(b) — Penalty: Any Contractor or Subcontractor who violates the requirements of Chapter 2258,shall pay to the Owner,on whose behalf the Contract is made, $60 for each worker employed on each calendar day or part of the day that the worker is paid less than the wage rates stipulated in the Contract. C. Tex. Gov't Code §2258.058—Criminal Offense: 1. An officer, agent, or representative of the Owner commits an offense if the person willfully violates or does not comply with a provision of Chapter 2258. 2. Any Contractor or Subcontractor, or an agent or representative of the Contractor or Subcontractor, commits an offense if the person violates Tex. Gov't Code §2258.024. 3. An offense is punishable by: a. A fine not to exceed $500; b. Confinement in jail for a term not to exceed 6 months; or C. Both a fine and confinement. 14.04 Prevailing Wage Rates A. Use the Prevailing Wage Rates specified in the Supplementary Conditions. ARTICLE 15—COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK 15.01 Cost of the Work A. The Cost of the Work is the sum of costs described in this Paragraph 15.01, except those excluded in Paragraph 15.01.D, necessary for the proper performance of the Work. The provisions of this Paragraph 15.01 are used for two distinct purposes: 1. To determine Cost of the Work when Cost of the Work is a component of the Contract Price under cost-plus,time-and-materials, or other cost-based terms; or 2. To determine the value of a Change Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set-off, or other adjustment in Contract Price. B. Contractor is entitled only to those additional or incremental costs required because of the change in the Work or because of the event giving rise to the adjustment when the value of the adjustment is determined on the basis of the Cost of the Work. General Conditions 007200-59 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 C. Costs included in the Cost of the Work may not exceed the prevailing costs in the proximate area of the Site for similar work unless agreed to by the Owner. Cost of the Work includes only the following items: 1. Payroll costs for Contractor's employees performing the Work, including one foreman per crew, and other required and agreed upon personnel for the time they are employed on the Work. Employees are to be paid according to wage rates for job classifications as agreed to by Owner. Where the Cost of the Work is being used under provisions of Paragraph 15.01.A.2, rates paid for this Work are to be the same as paid for Contract Work as established by certified payroll. Payroll costs may include: a. Actual costs paid for salaries and wages; b. Actual cost paid for fringe benefits,which may include: 1) Social security contributions, 2) Unemployment, 3) Excise and payroll taxes, 4) Workers' compensation, 5) Health and retirement benefits, 6) Bonuses, and 7) Paid time off for sick leave,vacations, and holidays; and C. Actual cost of additional compensation paid for performing Work outside of regular working hours, on Sunday or legal holidays,to the extent authorized by Owner. 2. Cost of materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in the Work, including transportation and storage costs and required Suppliers'field services. Contractor may retain cash discounts unless Owner provided funds to the Contractor for early payment of these materials and equipment. Cash discounts are to be credited to Owner if the Owner provides funds for early payment. Make provisions for trade discounts, rebates, refunds, and returns from sale of surplus materials and equipment and reduce the Cost of the Work by these amounts. 3. Payments made by Contractor to Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors. Obtain competitive bids from Subcontractors acceptable to Owner unless Owner agrees to use Subcontractors proposed by the Contractor. Bids are to be opened in the presence of the OAR and other designated members for the OPT. Provide copies of bids to the OAR to use in determining,with the OPT,which bids are acceptable. The Subcontractor's Cost of the Work and fee are determined in the same manner as Contractor's Cost of the Work and fee as provided in this Paragraph 15.01 if the subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee. 4. Supplemental costs including the following: a. The proportion of necessary transportation, travel, and subsistence expenses of Contractor's employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work; b. Costs of materials, supplies, equipment, machinery, appliances, office, and temporary facilities at the Site including transportation and maintenance costs; General Conditions 007200-60 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 C. Costs of hand tools not owned by the workers consumed in the performance of the Work. Costs of hand tools not owned by the workers which are used but not consumed in the performance of the Work and which remain the property of Contractor, less their market value when Work is completed; d. For Contractor-and Subcontractor-owned machinery,trucks, power tools or other equipment, use the FHWA rental rates found in the Rental Rate Blue Book ("Blue Book") multiplied by the regional adjustment factor and the rate adjustment factor to establish hourly rates. Use the rates in effect for each section of the Blue Book at the time of use. Payment will be made for the actual hours used in the Work. 1) Standby costs will be paid at 50% of the FHWA rental rates found in the Blue Book if Contractor is directed by Owner in writing to standby. Standby costs will not be allowed during periods when the equipment would otherwise have been idle. For a six-day work week, no more than eight hours per a 24-hour day, no more than 48 hours per week and no more than 208 hours per month shall be paid of standby time. Operating costs shall not be charged by Contractor. e. Rental of construction equipment, including the costs of transporting, loading, unloading, assembling, dismantling, and removing construction equipment, whether rented from Contractor or others, in accordance with rental agreements approved by Owner. Costs for rental of equipment will not be paid when the equipment is no longer necessary for the Work. Justify idle time for equipment by demonstrating that it was necessary to keep equipment on Site for related future Work; 1) The hourly rate shall be determined by dividing the actual invoice cost by the actual number of hours the equipment is involved in the Work. Owner reserves the right to limit the hourly rate to comparable Blue Book rates. 2) If Contractor is directed to standby in writing by Owner, standby costs will be paid at the invoice daily rate excluding operating costs, which includes fuel, lubricants, repairs and servicing. f. Applicable sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes related to the Work for which the Owner is not exempt, and which Contractor pays consistent with Laws and Regulations; g. Deposits lost for causes other than negligence of Contractor's Team; h. Royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses; i. Cost of additional utilities,fuel, and sanitary facilities at the Site; j. Minor expense items directly required by the Work; and k. Premiums for Bonds and insurance required by the Contract Documents. D. The Cost of the Work does not include the following items: 1. Payroll costs and other compensation of Contractor's officers, executives, principals of partnerships and sole proprietorships, general managers, safety managers, superintendents, engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, clerks, and other personnel employed General Conditions 007200-61 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 by Contractor, whether at the Site or in Contractor's principal or branch office, for general administration of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred to in Paragraph 15.01.C.1 or specifically covered by Paragraph 15.01.C.4. These administrative costs are covered by the Contractor's fee. 2. Office expenses other than Contractor's office at the Site. 3. Any part of Contractor's capital expenses, including interest on Contractor's capital employed for the Work and charges against Contractor for delinquent payments. 4. Costs due to the actions of Contractor's Team for the correction of Defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment that do not comply with Specifications, and correcting damage to property. 5. Losses, damages, and related expenses caused by damage to the Work or sustained by Contractor in connection with the performance of the Work. Contractor is entitled to recover costs if covered by insurance provided in accordance with Article 6. Such losses may include settlements made with the approval of Owner. Do not include these losses, damages, and expenses in the Cost of the Work when determining Contractor's fee. 6. Any Indemnified Cost paid with regard to Contractor's indemnification of Owner. 7. Other overhead or general expense costs and the costs of items not described in Paragraphs 15.01.C. E. The Contractor's fee for profit and overhead is determined as follows: 1. In accordance with the Agreement when the Work is performed on a cost-plus basis; 2. A mutually acceptable fixed fee; or 3. A fee based on the following percentages of the various portions of the Cost of the Work: a. The Contractor's fee is 15 percent for costs incurred under Paragraphs 15.01.C.1, 15.01.C.2 and 15.01.C.4; b. The Contractor's fee is 5 percent for costs incurred under Paragraph 15.01.C.3; C. Fees are to be determined as follows where one or more tiers of subcontracts are used: 1) The Subcontractor's fee is 15 percent for costs incurred under Paragraphs 15.01.C.1 and 15.01.C.2 for the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work at whatever tier; 2) The Subcontractor's fee is 5 percent for costs incurred under Paragraph 15.01.C.4 for the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work at whatever tier; and 3) The Contractor and Subcontractors of a tier higher than that of the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work are to be allowed a fee of 5 percent of the fee plus underlying costs incurred by the next lower tier Subcontractor. d. No fee is payable on the basis of costs itemized under Paragraph 15.01.D; General Conditions 007200-62 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 e. Five percent of the net decrease in the cost is to be deducted for changes which result in a net decrease in Contract Price; and 4. The adjustment in Contractor's fee is based on the net change in accordance with Paragraphs 15.05.13.1 through 15.05.13.5, inclusive when both additions and credits are involved in any one change. F. Establish and maintain records in accordance with generally accepted accounting practices and submit these records, including an itemized cost breakdown together with supporting data, in a form and at intervals acceptable to OAR whenever the Cost of the Work is to be determined pursuant to this Paragraph 15.01. 15.02 Allowances A. Include allowances specified in the Contract Documents in the Contract Price and provide Work covered by the allowance as authorized by the Owner through the OAR. B. Contractor agrees that: 1. The cash allowance is used to compensate the Contractor for the cost of furnishing materials and equipment for the Work covered by the allowance item in the Contract Documents. Cost may include applicable taxes. Make provisions for trade discounts, rebates, and refunds and reduce the allowance costs by these amounts. 2. Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation, overhead, profit,and other expenses contemplated for the cash allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances; and 3. Costs for cash allowances and installation costs as described in Paragraphs 15.02.13.1 and 15.02.13.2 above are included in the Contract Price. C. OAR will issue a Change Order to adjust the Contract Price by the difference between the allowance amount and the actual amount paid by Contractor for Work covered by the allowance. The Change Order will be issued at the time costs are incurred by Contractor for Work covered by the allowance and this Work is included on the Application for Payment. 15.03 Unit Price Work A. The initial Contract Price for Unit Price Work is equal to the sum of the unit price line items in the Agreement. Each unit price line item amount is equal to the product of the unit price for each line item times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Contract. B. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparing Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Payments to Contractor for Unit Price Work are to be based on actual quantities measured for Work in place. C. Each unit price is deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. D. OAR is to determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor to be incorporated into each Application for Payment. OAR's decision on actual quantities is final and binding, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03.E. General Conditions 007200-63 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 E. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal,or Owner may file a Claim, seeking an adjustment in the Contract Price within 30 days of CAR's decision under Paragraph 15.03.D, if: 1. The total cost of a particular item of Unit Price Work amounts to 20 percent or more of the total Contract Price and the variation in the quantity of that particular item of Unit Price Work performed by the Contractor differs by more than 20 percent from the estimated quantity of an item indicated in the Contract; 2. There is no corresponding adjustment with respect to other items of Work; and 3. Contractor believes it has incurred additional expense as a result of this condition or Owner believes that the quantity variation entitles Owner to an adjustment in the Contract Price. 15.04 Contingencies A. Contingency funds may be included in the Contract Price to pay for Work not defined specifically by the Contract Documents that is essential to the completion of the Project. Contingency funds will be as described in the Contract. B. The contingency funds may be used for costs incurred by the Contractor provided these costs are approved by the Owner. Costs are to be determined and documented in accordance with Paragraph 15.01. The contingency funds are not to be used for the following items: 1. Cost overruns due to changes in material costs after the Contract Price is established, unless specific price escalation provisions are made in the Contract. 2. Rework required to correct Defective Work. 3. Inefficiencies in completing the Work due to the Contractor's selected means, methods, sequences, or procedures of construction. 4. Work Contractor failed to include in the Contract Price. 5. Changes required by changes in Laws and Regulations enacted after the Contract Price is established. 6. Any Work that does not constitute a change in Scope in the Work included in the Contract Price. C. OAR is to issue a Change Order for approved expenditures from contingency funds. When the Change Order is issued, the costs are to be added to the Application for Payment. Contractor is to maintain a tabulation showing the contingency amount, adjustments to the contingency amount, and amounts remaining as the Project progresses. D. Any contingency amounts that are not included in a Change Order are retained bythe Owner. A Change Order will be issued to deduct unused contingency amounts from the Contract Price prior to Final Payment. General Conditions 007200-64 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 ARTICLE 16—TESTS AND INSPECTIONS;CORRECTION, REMOVAL,OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 16.01 Access to Work A. Provide safe access to the Site and the Work for the observation, inspection, and testing of the Work in progress. Contractor can require compliance with Contractor's safety procedures and programs as part of providing safe access. 16.02 Tests, Inspections and Approvals A. OPT may retain and pay for the services of an independent inspector, testing laboratory, or other qualified individual or entity to perform inspections. Notify OAR when the Work is ready for required inspections and tests. Provide adequate notice to allow for coordination with entities providing inspection or testing as determined by the OAR. Cooperate with inspection and testing personnel and assist with providing access for required inspections, tests, and handling test specimens or Samples. B. Arrange for and facilitate inspections, tests, and approvals required by Laws or Regulations of governmental entities having jurisdiction that require Work to be inspected, tested, or approved by an employee or other representative of that entity. Pay associated costs and furnish OAR with the required certificates of inspection or approval. C. Arrange, obtain, and pay for inspections and tests required: 1. By the Contract Documents, unless the Contract Documents expressly allocate responsibility for a specific inspection or test to OPT; 2. To attain OPT's acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work; 3. By manufacturers of equipment furnished under the Contract Documents; 4. For testing, adjusting, and balancing of mechanical, electrical, and other equipment to be incorporated into the Work; 5. For acceptance of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work, 6. For re-inspecting or retesting Defective Work, including any associated costs incurred by the testing laboratory for cancelled tests or standby time; and 7. For retesting due to failed tests. D. Provide independent inspectors, testing laboratories, or other qualified individuals or entities acceptable to OPT to provide these inspections and tests. 16.03 Defective Work A. It is Contractor's obligation to ensure that the Work is not Defective. B. OPT has the authority to determine whether Work is Defective and to reject Defective Work. C. OAR is to notify Contractor of Defective Work of which OPT has actual knowledge. D. Promptly correct Defective Work. E. Take no action that would void or otherwise impair Owner's special warranties or guarantees when correcting Defective Work. General Conditions 007200-65 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 F. Pay claims, costs, losses, and damages arising out of or relating to Defective Work, including: 1. Costs for correction, removal, and replacement of Defective Work; 2. Cost of the inspection and testing related to correction of Defective Work; 3. Fines levied against Owner by governmental authorities because of Defective Work;and 4. Costs of repair or replacement of work of others resulting from Defective Work. 16.04 Acceptance of Defective Work A. Owner may elect to accept Defective Work instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of Defective Work provided: 1. This acceptance occurs prior to final payment; 2. Designer confirms that the Defective Work is in general accordance with the design intent and applicable engineering or architectural principles; and 3. Designer confirms that acceptance of the Defective Work does not endanger public health or safety. B. Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 17 for costs associated with OPT's evaluation of Defective Work to determine if it can be accepted and to determine the diminished value of the Work. Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 17 if the parties are unable to agree as to the decrease in the Contract Price to compensate Owner for the diminished value of Defective Work accepted. OAR is to issue a Modification for acceptance of the Defective Work prior to final payment. Pay an appropriate amount to Owner if the acceptance of Defective Work occurs after final payment. 16.05 Uncovering Work A. OPT has the authority to require inspection or testing of the Work, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed. B. Work that is covered prior to approval of the OAR must be uncovered for OPT's observation if requested by OAR. Pay for uncovering Work and its subsequent restoration unless Contractor has given OAR timely notice of Contractor's intention to cover the Work and OAR fails to act with reasonable promptness in response to this notice. C. Provide necessary labor, material, and equipment and uncover, expose, or otherwise make available the portion of the Work suspected of being Defective for observation, inspection, or testing if OPT considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Designer or inspected or tested by others as directed by the OAR. 1. Pay for claims, costs, losses, and damages associated with uncovering, exposing, observing, inspecting, and testing if it is found that the uncovered Work is Defective. Pay costs for correction of Defective Work. Pay for reconstruction, repair, or replacement of work of others resulting from the Defective Work if it is found that the uncovered Work is Defective. General Conditions 007200-66 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 16.06 Owner May Stop the Work A. Owner may order Contractor to stop the Work if: 1. The Work is Defective; 2. Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment; or 3. Contractor performs Work that may fail to conform to the Contract Documents when completed. This stop work order is to remain in effect until the reason for the stop work order has been eliminated. Owner's right to stop the Work does not create a duty to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor's Team or surety. 16.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work A. Owner may remedy deficiencies in the Work after 7 days' notice to Contractor if: 1. Contractor fails to correct Defective Work, or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by OPT; 2. Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents; or 3. Contractor fails to comply with other provisions of the Contract Documents. B. Owner may: 1. Exclude Contractor from the Site; 2. Take possession of the Work and suspend Contractor's services related to the Work; and 3. Incorporate stored materials and equipment in the Work. C. Allow OPT access to the Site and off-Site storage areas to enable Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 16.07. D. All claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 16.07 are to be charged against Contractor as a set-off against payments due under Article 17. These claims, costs, losses, and damages include costs of repair and the cost of replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of Contractor's Defective Work. E. Contractor is not allowed an extension of the Contract Times because of delays in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise of the Owner's rights and remedies under this Paragraph 16.07. ARTICLE 17—PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR;SET-OFFS; COMPLETION; CORRECTION PERIOD 17.01 Progress Payments A. Progress payment requests are to be submitted to the OAR on the Application for Payment form provided by the OAR following procedures in this Article 17. General Conditions 007200-67 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 1. Progress payments for lump sum Work are to be paid on the basis of the earned value to date at the amounts shown in the Schedule of Values submitted as required by Paragraph 17.03. Final payment will be for the total lump sum amount. 2. Progress payments for Unit Price Work are based on the number of units completed as determined under the provisions of Paragraph 15.03. 3. Progress payments for Work to be paid on the basis of the Cost of the Work per Paragraphs 15.01, 15.02 and 15.04 are to be paid for Work completed by Contractor during the pay period. B. Reduction in Payment by Owner: 1. Owner is entitled to impose a set-off against payment based on the following: a. Claims made against Owner or costs, losses,or damages incurred by Owner related to: 1) Contractor's conduct in the performance of the Work, including, but not limited to, workplace injuries, non-compliance with Laws and Regulations, or patent infringement; or 2) Contractor's failure to take reasonable and customary measures to avoid damage, delay, disruption, and interference with other work at or adjacent to the Site, including but not limited to, workplace injuries, property damage, and non-compliance with Laws and Regulations. b. Owner has been required to remove or remediate a Hazardous Environmental Condition for which Contractor is responsible; C. Work is Defective, or completed Work has been damaged by Contractor's Team, requiring correction or replacement; d. Owner has been required to correct Defective Work or complete Work in accordance with Paragraph 16.07; e. The Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders; f. Events have occurred that would constitute a default by Contractor justifying a termination for cause; g. Liquidated damages have accrued as a result of Contractor's failure to achieve Milestones, Substantial Completion, or completion of the Work; h. Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of these Liens; i. Failure to submit up-to-date record documents as required by the Contract Documents; j. Failure to submit monthly Progress Schedule updates or revised schedules as requested by the OAR; k. Failure to provide Project photographs required by the Contract Documents; I. Failure to provide Certified Payroll required by the Contract Documents; General Conditions 007200-68 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 m. Compensation for OPT for overtime charges of OAR or RPR, third review of documents, review of substitutions, re-inspection fees, inspections or designs related to correction of Defective Work, or other services identified as requiring payment by the Contractor; n. Costs for tests performed by the Owner to verify that Work previously tested and found to be Defective has been corrected; o. OPT has actual knowledge of the occurrence of events that would constitute a default by Contractor and therefore justify termination for cause under the Contract Documents with associated cost impacts; p. Other items entitling Owner to a set-off against the amount recommended; or q. Payment would result in an over-payment of the Contract Price. 2. Compensation for services of OPT staff is to be at the rates established by negotiations between OPT and Contractor. 3. OAR is to notify Contractor stating the amount and the reasons for an imposed set-off. The Owner is to pay the Contractor amounts remaining after deduction of the set-off. Owner is to pay the set-off amount agreed to by Owner and Contractor if Contractor remedies the reasons for the set-off. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal contesting the set-off. C. Delayed Payments: 1. No money shall be paid by Owner upon any claim, debt, demand, or account whatsoever, to any person, firm, or corporation who is in arrears to Owner for taxes; and Owner shall be entitled to counterclaim and automatically offset against any such debt, claim, demand,or account in the amount of taxes so in arrears and no assignment or transfer of such debt, claim, demand, or account after said taxes are due, shall affect the right of Owner to offset said taxes, and associated penalties and interest if applicable, against the same. 2. No payment will be made for Work authorized by a Work Change Directive until the Work Change Directive is incorporated into a Change Order. Payment can be included in an Application for payment when the Change Order is approved. D. The Owner is to pay the amount of payment recommended by the OAR within 30 days after receipt of the Application for Payment and accompanying documentation from the OAR. 17.02 Application for Payment A. Submit Applications for Payment for completed Work and for materials and equipment in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions, the Agreement, and this Article 17. The Contract Price is to include costs for: 1. Providing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents; 2. Installing Owner furnished equipment and materials; 3. Providing Work for Alternates and Allowances; 4. Commissioning, start-up,training and initial maintenance and operation; 5. Acceptance testing in manufacturer's facilities or on Site; General Conditions 007200-69 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 6. All home office overhead costs and expenses, including profit made directly or indirectly for the Project; 7. Project management, Contract administration, field office, and field operations staff, including supervision, clerical support, and technology system support; 8. Professional services including design fees, legal fees, and other professional services; 9. Bonds and insurance; 10. Permits, licenses, patent fees, and royalties; 11. Taxes; 12. Providing all documents and Samples required by the Contract Documents; 13. Facilities and equipment at the Site including: a. Field offices, office furnishings, and all related office supplies, software, and equipment, b. Storage facilities for Contractor's use, storage facilities for stored materials and equipment, including spare parts storage, C. Shops, physical plant, construction equipment, small tools, vehicles, technology and telecommunications equipment, d. Safety equipment and facilities to provide safe access and working conditions for workers and for others working at the Site, e. Temporary facilities for power and communications, f. Potable water and sanitation facilities, and g. Mobilization and demobilization for all of these facilities and equipment; 14. Products, materials, and equipment stored at the Site or other suitable location; 15. Products, materials, and equipment permanently incorporated into the Project; 16. Temporary facilities for managing water, including facilities for pumping, storage, and treatment as required for construction and protection of the environment; 17. Temporary facilities for managing environment conditions and Constituents of Concern; 18. Temporary facilities such as sheeting, shoring, bracing, formwork, embankments, storage facilities, working areas, and other facilities required for construction of the Project; 19. Temporary and permanent facilities for protection of all overhead, surface, or underground structures or features; 20. Temporary and permanent facilities for removal, relocation, or replacement of any overhead, surface, or underground structures or features; 21. Products, materials, and equipment consumed during the construction of the Project; 22. Contractor labor and supervision to complete the Project, including that provided through Subcontractors or Suppliers; General Conditions 007200-70 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 23. Correcting Defective Work during the Contract Times, during the Correction Period, or as required to meet any warranty provision of the Contract Documents; 24. Risk associated with weather and environmental conditions, start-up, and initial operation of facilities including equipment, processes, and systems; 25. Contractor's safety programs, including management, administration, and training; 26. Maintenance of facilities, including equipment, processes, and systems until operation is transferred to Owner; 27. Providing warranties, extended or special warranties, or extended service agreements; 28. Cleanup and disposal of any and all surplus materials; and 29. Demobilization of all physical,temporary facilities not incorporated into the Project. B. Include the cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the Contract Price. C. Provide written approval of the surety company providing Bonds for the Schedule of Values, Application for Payment form, and method of payment prior to submitting the first Application for Payment. Payment will not be made without this approval. D. OAR may withhold processing Applications for Payment if any of the following processes or documentation are not up to date: 1. Record Documents per Article 20. 2. Progress Schedule per Article 27. 3. Project photographs per Article 28. 4. Documentation required to comply with Owner's Minority / MBE / DBE Participation Policy. 5. Documentation required to substantiate any approved Project deviation, including overruns of Designer's estimated quantity. 6. Documentation required by funding agency, if applicable. 17.03 Schedule of Values A. Submit a detailed Schedule of Values for the Work at least 10 days prior to submitting the first Application for Payment. B. Submit the Schedule of Values in the form attached to the Application for Payment - Tabulation of Earned Value of Original Contract Performed. C. Do not submit an Application for Payment until the Schedule of Values has been approved by the OAR. D. If unit prices are included in the Contract, use each unit price line item in the Contract as a unit price line item in the Schedule of Values. E. Divide lump sum line items, including Subcontractor and Supplier amounts in the Schedule of Values into smaller components to allow more accurate determination of the earned value for each item. General Conditions 007200-71 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 1. Provide adequate detail to allow a more accurate determination of the earned value expressed as a percentage of Work completed for each item. 2. Line items may not exceed $50,000.00, unless they are for products, materials or equipment permanently incorporated into the Project that cannot be subdivided into units or subassemblies. 3. Lump sum items may be divided into an estimated number of units to determine earned value. a. The estimated number of units times the cost per unit must equal the lump sum amount for that line item. b. Contractor will receive payment for the lump sum for the line item, regardless of the number of units installed, unless an adjustment is made by Change Order. 4. Include Contractor's overhead and profit in each line item in proportion to the value of the line item to the Contract Price. 5. Include the cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the Contract Price for each item. 6. These line items may be used to establish the value of Work to be added or deleted from the Project. 7. The sum of all values listed in the schedule must equal the total Contract Price. F. Subdivide each line item in the Schedule of Values into two payment components. The first component is the direct cost for products, materials, and equipment permanently incorporated into the Project. The second component is all other costs associated with the item in the Contract. The sum of the two components must equal the value of the line item in the Schedule of Values. G. Where a percentage of the line value is allowed for a specified stage of completion, show the value for each stage of completion as a component of that line item cost. 17.04 Schedule of Anticipated Payments and Earned Value A. Submit a schedule of the anticipated Application for Payments showing the application numbers, submission dates, and the anticipated amount to be requested. Incorporate retainage into the development of this schedule of anticipated payments. B. Submit a tabulation of the anticipated Total Earned Value of Fees, Work, and Materials to create a graphic (curve) representation of the anticipated progress on the Project each month. Adjust this table and curve to incorporate Modifications. Use this curve to compare actual progress on the Project each month by comparing the anticipated cumulative Total Earned Value of Fees, Work, and Materials to the actual Total Earned Value of Fees, Work, and Materials each month. Use the comparison of values to determine performance on budget and schedule. C. Update the Schedule of Payments as necessary to provide a reasonably accurate indication of the funds required to make payments each month to the Contractor for Work performed. General Conditions 007200-72 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 17.05 Basis for Payments A. Lump Sum Contracts: 1. Payment will be made for the earned value of Work completed during the payment period expressed as a percentage of Work completed for each line item during the payment period per the Contract Documents. 2. Payment amount is the value of Work completed per the Contract Documents multiplied by the percentage of Work completed. 3. Payment for lump sum items divided into an estimated number of units to determine earned value per Paragraph 17.03 will be made for the measured number of units. 4. Payment for stored materials and equipment will be made per Paragraph 17.06. B. Unit Price Contracts: 1. Payment will be made for the actual quantity of Work completed during the payment period and for materials and equipment stored during the payment period per the Contract Documents. a. Payment amount is the Work quantity measured per the Contract Documents multiplied by the unit prices for that line item in the Contract. b. Payment for stored materials and equipment will be made per Paragraph 17.06. 2. Measure the Work described in the Contract for payment. Payment will be made only for the actual measured and/or computed length, area, solid contents, number, and weight, unless other provisions are made in the Contract Documents. Payment on a unit price basis will not be made for Work outside finished dimensions shown in the Contract Documents. Include cost for waste, overages, and tolerances in the unit price for that line item. 17.06 Payment for Stored Materials and Equipment A. Store materials and equipment properly at the Site. 1. Payment will be made for the invoice amount less the specified retainage. 2. Payment for materials and equipment shown in the Application for Payment and attachments will be made for the invoice amount,up to the value shown in the Schedule of Values for that line item. Costs for material and equipment in excess of the value shown in the Schedule of Values may not be added to other line items. 3. Payment will be made in full for the value shown in the line item for products and materials if invoices for materials and equipment are less than the amount shown in the line item and it can be demonstrated that no additional materials or equipment are required to complete Work described in that item. 4. Provide invoices at the time materials are included on the Application for Payment and attachments. Include invoice numbers so that a comparison can be made between invoices and amounts included on the Application for Payment and attachments. B. Provide a bill of sale, invoice, or other documentation warranting that Owner has received the materials and equipment free and clear of Liens. Provide documentation of payment for General Conditions 007200-73 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 materials and equipment with the next Application for Payment. Adjust payment to the amount actually paid if this differs from the invoice amount. Remove items from the tabulation of materials and equipment if this documentation is not provided. Payment will not be made for material and equipment without documentation of payment. C. Contractors can be paid for non-perishable materials on hand stored at the site, provided that invoices are furnished to the City for verification of the material value, and that Contractor provides documents, satisfactory to the City,that show that the material supplier has been paid for the materials delivered to the work site. D. Provide evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance or other arrangements to protect Owner's interest. E. The Work covered by progress payments becomes the property of the Owner at the time of payment. The Contractor's obligations with regard to proper care and maintenance, insurance, and other requirements are not changed by this transfer of ownership until accepted in accordance with the General Conditions. F. Payment for materials and equipment does not constitute acceptance of the product. 17.07 Retainage and Set-Offs A. Retainage will be withheld from each Application for Payment per the Agreement. Retainage will be released per the General Conditions. B. Reduce payments for set-offs per the General Conditions. Include the appropriate attachment to the Application for Payment. 17.08 Procedures for Submitting an Application for Payment A. Submit a draft Application for Payment to the OAR each month at least 20 days before the date established in the Contract for Owner to make progress payments. Do not submit Applications for Payment more often than monthly. Review the draft Application for Payment with the OAR to determine concurrence with: 1. The earned value for each lump sum item including the value of properly stored and documented materials and equipment for each item in the original Contract. 2. The quantity of Work completed for each unit price item. 3. Set-offs included in the Application for Payment. 4. Values requested for materials and equipment consistent with invoices for materials and equipment. B. Submit Applications for Payment monthly through the OAR after agreement has been reached on the draft Application for Payment. 1. Number each application sequentially and include the dates for the application period. 2. Show the total amounts for earned value of original Contract performed, earned value for Work on approved Contract Amendments and Change Orders, retainage, and set- offs. Show total amounts that correspond to totals indicated on the attached tabulation for each. General Conditions 007200-74 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 3. Include Attachment A to show the earned value on each line item in the Schedule of Values for Work shown in the original Contract. 4. Include Attachment B to show the earned value on line items for approved Change Orders. Add items to Attachment B as Change Orders are approved. Change Orders must be approved before payment can be made on Change Order items. 5. Include Attachment Cto document set-offs required per the Contract Documents. Show each set-off as it is applied. Show a corresponding line item to reduce the set-off amount if a payment held by a set-off is released for payment. 6. Include Attachment D to allow tracking of invoices used to support amounts requested as materials in Attachments A and B. Enter materials to show the amount of the invoice assigned to each item in Attachment A or B if an invoice includes materials used on several line items. 7. Complete the certification stating that all Work, including materials and equipment, covered by this Application for Payment have been completed or delivered and stored in accordance with the Contract Documents,that all amounts have been paid for Work, materials, and equipment for which previous payments have been made by the Owner, and that the current payment amount shown in this Application for Payment is now due. C. Submit attachments in Portable Document Format(PDF): 1. Generate attachments to the Application for Payment using the Excel spreadsheet provided. 2. Submit PDF documents with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. 17.09 Responsibility of Owner's Authorized Representative A. OAR will review draft Application for Payment with Contractor to reach an agreement on the values that will be recommended for payment by the OAR. B. OAR will review Application for Payment submitted by Contractor to determine that the Application for Payment has been properly submitted and is in accordance with the agreed to draft Application for Payment. C. OAR is to either recommend payment of the Application for Payment to Owner or notify the Contractor of the OPT's reasons for not recommending payment. Contractor may make necessary corrections and resubmit the Application for Payment if it is not recommended within 10 days after receipt of the notice. OAR will review resubmitted Application for Payment and reject or recommend payment of the Application for Payment to Owner as appropriate. D. OAR's recommendation of the Application for Payment constitutes a representation by OPT that based on their experience and the information available: 1. The Work has progressed to the point indicated; 2. The quality of the Work is generally in accordance with the Contract Documents; and 3. Requirements prerequisite to payment have been met. General Conditions 007200-75 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 E. This representation is subject to: 1. Further evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole; 2. The results of subsequent tests called for in the Contract Documents; or 3. Any other qualifications stated in the recommendation. F. OPT does not represent by recommending payment: 1. Inspections made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it has been performed have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect of the Work in progress, or involved detailed inspections of the Work; or 2. Other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle Contractor to additional compensation or entitle Owner to withhold payment to Contractor may or may not exist. G. Neither OPT's review of Contractor's Work for the purposes of recommending payments nor CAR's recommendation of payment imposes responsibility on OPT: 1. To supervise, direct, or control the Work; 2. For the means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or safety precautions and programs; 3. For Contractor's failure to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to Contractor's performance of the Work; 4. To make examinations to ascertain how or for what purposes Contractor has used the monies paid on account of the Contract Price; or 5. To determine that title to the Work, materials, or equipment has passed to Owner free and clear of Liens. 17.10 Contractor's Warranty of Title A. Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to the Work, materials, and equipment furnished under the Contract is to pass to Owner free and clear of Liens, title defects, and patent, licensing, copyright, or royalty obligations no later than 7 days after the time of payment by Owner of the Application for Payment which includes these items. 17.11 Substantial Completion A. Notify OAR when Contractor considers the entire Work substantially complete and request a Certificate of Substantial Completion. B. OPT is to inspect the Work within 30 days after Contractor's notification to determine if the Work is substantially complete. OAR, within 120 days after receipt of Contractor's notification, is to either issue the Certificate of Substantial Completion which sets the date of Substantial Completion or notify Contractor of the reasons the Project is not considered to be substantially complete. General Conditions 007200-76 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 C. The OPT and Contractor are to meet to discuss Owner's use or occupancy of the Work following Substantial Completion. Items to be discussed at this meeting include: 1. Review of insurance policies with respect to the end of the Contractor's coverage, and confirm the transition to coverage of the Work under a permanent property insurance policy held by Owner; 2. Owner's assumption of responsibility for security, operation, protection of the Work, maintenance, and utilities upon Owner's use or occupancy of the Work; 3. Contractor's obligations for operations and maintenance during performance and acceptance testing; 4. Contractor's access to the Site to complete punch list items; and 5. Procedures for correction of Defective Work during the 1-year correction period. 17.12 Partial Utilization A. Owner may use or occupy substantially completed parts of the Work which are specifically identified in the Contract Documents, or which OPT and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of the Work. Owner must be able to use that part of the Work for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor's performance of the remainder of the Work. Contractor and OPT are to follow the procedures of Paragraph 17.11 forthis part ofthe Work. B. No use or occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work may occur prior to compliance with the requirements of Article 6. 17.13 Final Inspection A. OPT is to make a final inspection upon notice from Contractor that the entire Work or portion to be accepted is complete. OAR is to notify Contractor of Work determined to be incomplete or Defective. Immediately take corrective measures to complete the Work and correct Defective Work. 17.14 Final Application for Payment A. Include adjustments to the Contract Price in the final Application for Payment for: 1. Approved Change Orders and Contract Amendments, 2. Allowances not previously adjusted by Change Order, 3. Deductions for Defective Work that has been accepted by the Owner, 4. Penalties and bonuses, 5. Deductions for liquidated damages, 6. Deduction for all final set-offs, and 7. Other adjustments if needed. B. OAR will prepare a final Change Order reflecting the approved adjustments to the Contract Price which have not been covered by previously approved Change Orders and if necessary reconcile estimate unit price quantities with actual quantities. General Conditions 007200-77 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 17.15 Final Payment A. Make final Application for Payment after completing required corrections identified during the final inspection and delivering items and documents required by the Contract Documents. Provide the following with the final Application for Payment: 1. Consent of Surety to Final Payment acknowledging unsettled disputes; and 2. Certification of Payment of Debts and Claims or Certification of Release of Liens or furnish receipts or releases in full from Subcontractors and Suppliers. B. OAR is to either recommend payment of the final Application for Payment to Owner if OPT is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled or notify the Contractor of the OPT's reasons for not recommending final payment. C. The Work is complete, subject to surviving obligations, when it is ready for final payment as established by the OAR's recommendation of payment of the final Application for Payment to Owner and the issuance of a Certificate of Final Completion. D. The Owner is to pay the amount of final payment recommended by the OAR within 30 days after receipt of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation from the OAR. 17.16 Waiver of Claims A. The making of final payment does not constitute a waiver by Owner of claims or rights against Contractor. Owner expressly reserves claims and rights arising from: 1. Unsettled Liens or claims for non-payment; 2. Defective Work appearing after final inspection; 3. Contractor's failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of specified special guarantees; or 4. Contractor's continuing obligations under the Contract Documents. B. Contractor waives claims and rights against Owner by accepting final payment with the exception of those Claims made in accordance with the provisions of Article 22 and specifically noted in the Certificate of Final Completion. 17.17 Correction Period A. Promptly correct Defective Work without cost to Owner for 1 year after the date of Substantial Completion or, in the event of a latent defect, within 1 year after discovery thereof by City. B. Promptly correct damages to the Site or adjacent areas that Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or other agreements. Promptly correct damages to Work or the work of others. Make corrections without cost to Owner. C. Owner may have the Defective Work and damages described in Paragraphs 17.17.A and 17.17.13 corrected if Contractor does not comply with the terms of OAR's instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage. General Conditions 007200-78 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 D. Contractor's obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to the correction of Defective Work are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. E. The correction period starts to run from the date when a specific item of equipment or system is placed in continuous beneficial use by Owner before Substantial Completion of Work if so provided in the Specifications or if accepted for beneficial use by the Owner. F. Contractor's obligations under this Paragraph 17.17 are in addition to other obligations or warranties. The provisions of this Paragraph 17.17 are not a substitute for, or a waiver of, the provisions of applicable statutes of limitation or repose. ARTICLE 18—SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 18.01 Owner May Suspend Work A. Owner may suspend the Work or a portion of the Work for a period of not more than 90 consecutive days, at any time and without cause, by notice to Contractor. This notice fixes the date on which Contractor is to resume Work. Contractor is entitled to adjustments in the Contract Price and Contract Times directly attributable to this suspension only if efforts are made to mitigate the cost impacts of the suspension. Meet with the Owner within 10 days of the notice of suspension to discuss specific strategies to reduce or eliminate the cost of delays. Submit a Change Proposal seeking an adjustment no later than 30 days after the date fixed for resumption of Work. 18.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause A. The occurrence of one or more of the following events constitutes a default by Contractor and justifies termination for cause: 1. Contractor's persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, including failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment; 2. Failure to adhere to the Progress Schedule; 3. Failure of the Contractor to provide a satisfactory replacement Bond or insurance in the event either is lost or canceled; 4. Failure of Contractor to maintain financial solvency to adequately complete the Project as indicated by one or more of the following: a. A petition of bankruptcy is filed by or against Contractor, b. Contractor is adjudged as bankrupt or insolvent, C. Contractor or surety makes a general assignment for the benefit of creditors, d. A receiver is appointed for the benefit of Contractor's creditors, or e. A receiver is appointed on account of Contractor's insolvency; 5. Contractor's disregard of Laws or Regulations of public bodies having jurisdiction; 6. Contractor's repeated disregard of the authority of OPT; 7. Contractor's failure to prosecute the work with diligence; or General Conditions 007200-79 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 8. Contractor's other material breach of the contract. B. Contractor and surety must provide adequate assurance of future performance in accordance with the Contract Documents that is satisfactory to Owner if Contractor is believed to be in financial distress due to the existence of one or more of the indicators listed in Paragraph 18.02.A.4. Owner mayterminate Contractor's performance underthis Contract if Contractor and surety fail to provide adequate documentation satisfactory to Owner within 10 days of OAR's request for this information. C. Owner may declare Contractor to be in default, give notice to Contractor and surety that Contractor's performance under the Contract is terminated, and enforce the rights available to Owner under the Performance Bond after giving Contractor and surety 10 days' notice that one or more of the events identified in Paragraph 18.02.A has occurred. D. Owner may exclude Contractor from the Site, take possession of the Work, incorporate the materials and equipment stored and complete the Work as Owner may deem expedient if Owner has terminated Contractor's performance under the Contract for cause. E. Owner may elect not to proceed with termination of Contractor's performance under the Contract under this Paragraph 18.02 if Contractor begins to cure the cause for termination within 7 days of receipt of notice of intent to terminate. F. Contractor is not entitled to receive further payments until the Work is completed if Owner proceeds as provided in this Paragraph 18.02. The amount of the Contract Price remaining is to be paid to the Contractor if the unpaid balance exceeds the cost to complete the Work. The cost to complete the Work may include related claims, costs, losses, damages, and the fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals retained by Owner. Pay the difference to Owner if the cost to complete the Work including related claims, costs, losses, and damages exceeds the unpaid balance of the Contract Price. Owner is not required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed when exercising its rights or remedies under this paragraph. G. Termination of Contractor's performance does not affect the rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor or against surety under the Payment Bond or Performance Bond. Owner does not release Contractor from liability by paying or retaining money due Contractor. H. In the event the Owner terminates the contract for cause, and it is later determined that cause for termination was lacking, the termination will be deemed a termination without cause under Paragraph 18.03. 18.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience A. Owner may terminate the Contract without cause after giving 7 days' notice to Contractor of the effective date of termination. Contractor is to be paid for the following if Owner terminates for convenience: 1. Work completed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination; 2. Actual costs sustained prior to the effective date of termination for Work in progress, plus a fee calculated in accordance with Paragraph 15.05; and 3. Reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination, including costs incurred to prepare a termination for convenience cost proposal. General Conditions 007200-80 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 B. No payment is payable to Contractor for loss of anticipated overhead, profits or revenue, or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from this termination. ARTICLE 19— PROJECT MANAGEMENT 19.01 Work Included A. Furnish resources required to complete the Project with an acceptable standard of quality within the Contract Times. B. Construct Project in accordance with current safety practices. C. Manage Site to allow access to Site and control construction operations. D. Construct temporary facilities to provide and maintain control over environmental conditions at the Site. Remove temporary facilities when no longer needed. E. Provide temporary controls for pollutions, management of water and management of excess earth. 19.02 Quality Assurance A. Employ competent workmen,skilled in the occupation for which they are employed. Provide Work meeting quality requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Remove Defective Work from the Site immediately unless provisions have been made and approved by the OPT to allow repair of the product at the Site. Clearly mark Work as Defective until it is removed or allowable repairs have been completed. 19.03 Document Submittal A. Provide documents in accordance with Article 24. 1. Provide copies of Supplier's printed storage instructions prior to furnishing materials or products and installation instructions prior to beginning the installation. 2. Incorporate field notes,sketches,recordings,and computations made bythe Contractor in Record Data. 19.04 Required Permits A. Obtain building permits for the Project from the local authorities having jurisdiction. Pay building permit fees and include this cost in the Contract Price. B. Obtain environmental permits required for construction at the Site. C. Provide required permits for transporting heavy or oversized loads. D. Provide other permits required to conduct any part of the Work. E. Arrange for inspections and certification by agencies having jurisdiction over the Work. F. Make arrangements with private utility companies and pay for fees associated with obtaining services, or for inspection fees. G. Retain copies of permits and licenses at the Site and observe and comply with all regulations and conditions of the permit or license. General Conditions 007200-81 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 19.05 Safety Requirements A. Manage safety to protect the safety and welfare of persons at the Site. B. Provide safe access to move through the Site. Provide protective devices to warn and protect from hazards at the Site. C. Provide safe access for those performing tests and inspections. D. Comply with latest provisions of the Occupational Health and Safety Administration and other Laws and Regulation. E. Cooperate with accident investigations. Provide two copies of all reports,including insurance company reports, prepared concerning accidents, injury, or death related to the Project to the OAR as Record Data per Article 26. 19.06 Access to the Site A. Maintain access to the facilities at all times. Do not obstruct roads, pedestrian walks, or access to the various buildings, structures, stairways, or entrances. Provide safe access for normal operations during construction. B. Provide adequate and safe access for inspections. Leave ladders, bridges, scaffolding, and protective equipment in place until inspections have been completed. Construct additional safe access if required for inspections. C. Use roadways for construction traffic only with written approval of the appropriate representatives of each entity. Obtain written approval to use roads to deliver heavy or oversized loads to the Site. Furnish copies of the written approvals to the Owner as Record Data per Article 26. 19.07 Contractor's Use of Site A. Limit the use of Site for Work and storage to those areas designated on the Drawings or approved by the OAR. Coordinate the use of the premises with the OAR. B. Provide security at the Site as necessary to protect against vandalism and loss by theft. C. Do not permit alcoholic beverages or illegal substances on the Site. Do not allow persons under the influence of alcoholic beverages or illegal substances to enter or remain on the Site at any time. Persons on Site under the influence of alcoholic beverages or illegal substances will be permanently prohibited from returning to the Site. Criminal or civil penalties may also apply. D. Park construction equipment in designated areas only and provide spill control measures. E. Park employees' vehicles in designated areas only. F. Obtain written permission of the Owner before entering privately-owned land outside of the Owner's property, rights-of-way, or easements. G. Do not allow the use of audio devices, obnoxious, vulgar or abusive language, or sexual harassment in any form. These actions will cause immediate and permanent removal of the offender from the premises. Criminal or civil penalties may apply. General Conditions 007200-82 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 H. Require Workers to wear clothing that is inoffensive and meets safety requirements. Do not allow sleeveless shirts, shorts, exceedingly torn, ripped, or soiled clothing to be worn on the Project. I. Do not allow firearms or weapons of any sort to be brought on to the Site under any conditions. No exception is to be made for persons with concealed handgun permits. Remove any firearms or weapons and the person possessing these firearms or weapons immediately from the Site. 19.08 Protection of Existing Structures and Utilities A. Examine the Site and review the available information concerning the Site. Locate utilities, streets, driveways, fences, drainage structures, sidewalks, curbs, and gutters. Verify the elevations of the structures adjacent to excavations. Report any discrepancies from information in the Contract Documents to the OAR before beginning construction. B. Determine if existing structures, poles, piping, or other utilities at excavations will require relocation or replacement. Prepare a Plan of Action and coordinate Work with local utility companies and others for the relocation or replacement. C. Protect buildings, utilities, street surfaces, driveways, sidewalks, curb and gutter, fences, wells, drainage structures, piping, valves, manholes, electrical conduits, and other systems or structures unless they are shown to be replaced or relocated on the Drawings. Restore damaged items to the satisfaction of the OPT and utility owner. D. Carefully support and protect all structures and/or utilities so that there will be no failure or settlement where excavation or demolition endangers adjacent structures and utilities. Do not take existing utilities out of service unless required by the Contract Documents or approved by the OAR. Notify and cooperate with the utility owner if it is necessary to move services, poles,guy wires, pipelines, or other obstructions. E. Protect existing trees and landscaping at the Site. 1. Identify trees that may be removed during construction with OPT. 2. Mark trees to be removed with paint. 3. Protect trees to remain from damage by wrapping trunks with 2 x 4 timbers around the perimeter, securely wired in place, where machinery must operate around existing trees. Protect branches and limbs from damage by equipment. 4. Protect root zone from compaction. 19.09 Pre-Construction Exploratory Excavations A. Excavate and expose existing pipelines that cross within 20 feet of Project pipelines prior to any Work. Survey the line to determine its exact vertical and horizontal location at each point the existing pipeline may potentially conflict with the Work. B. Excavate and expose existing parallel pipelines at 300 feet intervals (maximum) for existing pipelines which are within 10 feet of Project pipelines. Survey the line to determine its exact vertical and horizontal location at each point where the line is excavated and exposed. General Conditions 007200-83 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 C. Prepare a Plan of Action indicating the owner of pipelines excavated and surveyed and all pertinent survey data, including the station where lines cross or conflicts may exist and the distance to the pavement centerline and elevations of the top of existing pipelines. D. Do not perform Work on the Project until all exploratory excavations have been completed and the Plan of Action has been approved by the OAR. E. Unless specifically indicated otherwise in the Bid Form, no separate payment will be made for pre-construction exploratory excavations. Include the cost for pre-construction exploratory excavations in the unit price for the pipe construction or other applicable feature. When necessary, pavement repairs associated with exploratory excavations that are beyond the limits of the new pavement will be paid for at the unit prices for pavement repair when an item is included in the Bid Form. When an item for pavement repair is not included in the Bid Form, the cost should be included in the unit price for the pipe construction or other applicable feature. 19.10 Disruption of Services/Continued Operations A. Existing facilities are to continue in service as usual during the construction unless noted otherwise. Owner of utilities must be able to operate and maintain the facilities. Keep disruptions to existing utilities, piping, process piping, or electrical services to a minimum. 1. Do not restrict access to critical valves or operators. 2. Limit operations to the minimum amount of space needed to complete the specified Work. 3. Maintain storm sewers and sanitary sewers in service at all times. Provide temporary service around the construction or otherwise construct the structure in a manner that the flow is not restricted. B. Provide a Plan of Action if facilities must be taken out of operation. 19.11 Field Measurements A. Perform complete field measurements prior to purchasing products or beginning construction for products required to fit existing conditions. B. Verify property lines, control lines, grades, and levels indicated on the Drawings. C. Check Shop Drawings and indicate the actual dimensions available where products are to be installed. D. Include field measurements in Record Data as required in Article 26. 19.12 Reference Data and Control Points A. The OPT will provide the following control points: 1. Base line or grid reference points for horizontal control. 2. Benchmarks for vertical control. B. Locate and protect control points prior to starting the Work and preserve permanent reference points during construction. Designated control points may be on an existing structure or monument. Do not change or relocate points without prior approval of the OAR. General Conditions 007200-84 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 Notify OAR when the reference point is lost, destroyed, or requires relocation. Replace Project control points on the basis of the original survey. C. Provide complete engineering layout of the Work needed for construction. 1. Provide competent personnel. Provide equipment including accurate surveying instruments, stakes, platforms,tools, and materials. 2. Provide surveying with accuracy meeting the requirements established for Category 5 Construction Surveying as established in the Manual of Practice of Land Surveying in Texas published by the Texas Society of Professional Surveyors, latest revision. 3. Record Data and measurements per standards. 19.13 Delivery and Storage A. Deliver products and materials to the Site in time to prevent delays in construction. B. Deliver packaged products to Site in original undamaged containers with identifying labels attached. Open cartons as necessary to check for damage and to verify invoices. Reseal cartons and store properly until used. Leave products in packages or other containers until installed. C. Assume full responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of products stored at the Site. D. Store products at locations acceptable to the OAR and to allow Owner access to maintain and operate existing facilities. E. Store products in accordance with the Supplier's storage instructions immediately upon delivery. Leave seals and labels intact. F. Provide additional storage areas as needed for construction. Store products subject to damage by elements in substantial weather-tight enclosures or storage sheds. Provide and maintain storage sheds as required for the protection of products. Provide temperature, humidity control, and ventilation within the ranges stated in the Supplier's instructions. Remove storage facilities at the completion of the Project. G. Protect the pipe interior. Keep all foreign materials such as dirt, debris, animals, or other objects out of the pipe during the Work. Cap or plug ends of installed pipe in an approved manner when pipe is not being installed. Clean or wash out pipe sections that become contaminated before continuing with installation. Take precautions to prevent the pipe from floating or moving out of the proper position during or after laying operations. Immediately correct any pipe that moves from its correct position. H. Provide adequate exterior storage for products that may be stored out-of-doors. 1. Provide substantial platforms, blocking, or skids to support materials and products above ground which has been sloped to provide drainage. Protect products from soiling or staining. 2. Cover products subject to discoloration or deterioration from exposure to the elements, with impervious sheet materials. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation below covering. 3. Store loose, granular materials on clean, solid surfaces, or on rigid sheet materials, to prevent mixing with foreign matter. General Conditions 007200-85 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 4. Provide surface drainage to prevent erosion and ponding of water. 5. Prevent mixing of refuse or chemically injurious materials or liquids with stored materials. 6. Pipes and conduits stored outdoors are to have open ends sealed to prevent the entrance of dirt, moisture, and other injurious materials. Protect PVC pipe from ultraviolet light exposure. 7. Store light weight products to prevent wind damage. I. Maintain storage facilities. Inspect stored products on a weekly basis and after periods of severe weather to verify that: 1. Storage facilities continue to meet specified requirements; 2. Supplier's required environmental conditions are continually maintained; and 3. Products that can be damaged by exposure to the elements are not adversely affected. J. Replace any stored item damaged by inadequate protection or environmental controls. K. Payment may be withheld for any products not properly stored. 19.14 Cleaning During Construction A. Provide positive methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations and provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from disbursing into the atmosphere. Control dust and dirt from demolition, cutting, and patching operations. B. Clean the Project as Work progresses and dispose of waste materials, keeping the Site free from accumulations of waste or rubbish. Provide containers on Site for waste collection. Do not allow waste materials or debris to blow around or off of the Site. Control dust from waste materials. Transport waste materials with as few handlings as possible. C. Comply with Laws and Regulations. Do not burn or bury waste materials. Remove waste materials, rubbish and debris from the Site and legally dispose of these at public or private disposal facilities. D. Provide a final cleaning to thoroughly clean the entire Site and make ready for acceptance. 1. Remove construction debris, boxes, and trash from the Site. 2. Remove construction storage sheds and field offices. 3. Restore grade to match surrounding condition and remove excess dirt. 4. Sweep all drives and parking lots clean of dirt and debris. Use water trucks or hose down paved site to like new appearance. 19.15 Maintenance of Roads, Driveways, and Access A. Maintain roads and streets in a manner that is suitable for safe operations of public vehicles during all phases of construction unless the Owner approves a street closing. Do not close public roads overnight. B. Submit a Notification by Contractor for Owner's approval of a street closing. The request shall state: General Conditions 007200-86 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 1. The reason for closing the street. 2. How long the street will remain closed. 3. Procedures to be taken to maintain the flow of traffic. C. Construct temporary detours, including by-pass roads around construction,with adequately clear width to maintain the free flow of traffic at all times. Maintain barricades, signs, and safety features around the detour and excavations. Maintain barricades, signs, and safety features around the Work in accordance with all provisions of the latest edition of the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD). D. Assume responsibility for any damage resulting from construction along roads or drives. 19.16 Area Access and Traffic Control A. Provide traffic control measures to assure a safe condition and to provide a minimum of inconvenience to motorists and the public. Provide all-weather access to all residents and businesses at all times during construction. Provide temporary driveways and/or roads of approved material during wet weather. Maintain a stockpile of suitable material on the Site to meet the demands of inclement weather. B. Schedule operations to minimize adverse impact on the accessibility of adjoining properties. Sequence construction to build driveways in half widths, construct temporary ramps, or any other measure required to maintain access to adjoining properties. C. Comply with the Owner's Uniform Barricading Standards and Practices. Copies of this document are available through the Owner's Traffic Engineering Department. Secure required permits from the Owner's Traffic Engineering Department. 19.17 Overhead Electrical Wires A. Comply with OSHA safety requirements regarding construction equipment working beneath overhead electrical wires. Prevent and pay for repairs for damage to existing overhead electrical wires or facilities. B. Provide for adequate safety with regard to overhead lines whether overhead lines are or are not shown in the Contract Documents. 19.18 Blasting A. Blasting is not allowed for any purpose. 19.19 Archeological Requirements A. Cease operations immediately and contact the Owner for instructions if historical or archaeological artifacts are found during construction. B. Conduct all construction activities to avoid adverse impact on the Sites where significant historical or archaeological artifacts are found or identified as an area where other artifacts could be found. 1. Obtain details for Working in these areas. 2. Maintain confidentiality regarding the Site. General Conditions 007200-87 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 3. Adhere to the requirements of the Texas Historical Commission. 4. Notify the OAR and the Texas Historical Commission. C. Do not disturb archaeological sites. 1. Obtain the services of a qualified archaeological specialist to instruct construction personnel on how to identify and protect archaeological finds on an emergency basis. 2. Coordinate activities to permit archaeological work to take place within the area. a. Attempt to archaeologically clear areas needed for construction as soon as possible. b. Provide a determination of priority for such areas. D. Assume responsibility for any unauthorized destruction that might result to such Sites by construction personnel, and pay all penalties assessed by the State or Federal agencies for non-compliance with these requirements. E. Contract Times will be modified to compensate for delays caused by such archaeological finds. No additional compensation will be paid for delays. 19.20 Endangered Species Resources A. Do not perform any activity that is likely to jeopardize the continued existence of a threatened or endangered species as listed or proposed for listing under the Federal Endangered Species Act (ESA), and/or the State of Texas Parks and Wildlife Code on Endangered Species, or to destroy or adversely modify the habitat of such species. B. Cease Work immediately in the area of the encounter and notify the OAR if a threatened or endangered species is encountered during construction. OPT will implement actions in accordance with the ESA and applicable State statutes. Resume construction in the area of the encounter when authorized to do so by the OAR. 19.21 Cooperation with Public Agencies A. Cooperate with all public and private agencies with facilities operating within the limits of the Project. B. Provide a 48-hour notice to any applicable agency when work is anticipated to proceed in the vicinity of any facility by using Texas 811 at 811 and the Lone Star Notification Company at 1-800-669-8344. ARTICLE 20—PROJECT COORDINATION 20.01 Work Included A. Administer Contract requirements to construct the Project. Provide documentation per the requirements of this Section. Provide information as requested by the OPT. 20.02 Document Submittal A. Provide documents in accordance with Article 24. General Conditions 007200-88 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 B. Use the forms provided for Contract administration, applications for payment, document submittals, documentation of test results, equipment installation and documentation, and Project closeout. A digital copy of the required forms will be provided to the Contractor before or at the pre-construction conference. 20.03 Communication During Project A. The OAR is to be the first point of contact for all parties on matters concerning this Project. B. The OAR will coordinate correspondence concerning: 1. Documents, including Applications for Payment. 2. Clarification and interpretation of the Contract Documents. 3. Contract Modifications. 4. Observation of Work and testing. 5. Claims. C. The OAR will normally communicate only with the Contractor. Any required communication with Subcontractors or Suppliers will only be with the direct involvement of the Contractor. D. Direct written communications to the OAR at the address indicated at the pre-construction conference. Include the following with communications as a minimum: 1. Name of the Owner. 2. Project name. 3. Contract title. 4. Project number. 5. Date. 6. A reference statement. 20.04 Project Meetings A. Pre-Construction Conference: 1. Attend a pre-construction conference. 2. The location of the conference will be determined by the OAR. 3. The time of the meeting will be determined by the OAR but will be after the Notice of Award is issued and not later than 15 days after the Notice to Proceed is issued. 4. The OPT, Contractor's project manager and superintendent, representatives of utility companies, and representatives from major Subcontractors and Suppliers may attend the conference. 5. Provide and be prepared to discuss: a. Preliminary construction schedule per Article 27. b. Schedule of Values and anticipated Schedule of Payments per Article 17. C. List of Subcontractors and Suppliers. General Conditions 007200-89 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 d. Contractor's organizational chart as it relates to this Project. e. Letter indicating the agents of authority for the Contractor and the limit of that authority with respect to the execution of legal documents,Contract Modifications, and payment requests. B. Progress Meetings: 1. Attend meetings with the OAR and Owner. a. Meet on a monthly basis or as requested by the OAR to discuss the Project. b. Meet at the Site or other location as designated by the OAR. C. Contractor's superintendent and other key personnel are to attend the meeting. Other individuals may be requested to attend to discuss specific matters. d. Notify the OAR of any specific items to be discussed a minimum of 1 week prior to the meeting. 2. Provide information as requested by the OAR or Owner concerning this Project. Prepare to discuss: a. Status of overall Project schedule. b. Contractor's detailed schedule for the next month. C. Anticipated delivery dates for equipment. d. Coordination with the Owner. e. Status of documents. f. Information or clarification of the Contract Documents. g. Claims and proposed Modifications to the Contract. h. Field observations, problems, or conflicts. i. Maintenance of quality standards. 3. OAR will prepare minutes of meetings. Review the minutes of the meeting and notify the OAR of any discrepancies within 10 days of the date of the meeting memorandum. The minutes will not be corrected after the 10 days have expired. Corrections will be reflected in the minutes of the following meeting or as an attachment to the minutes. C. Pre-Submittal and Pre-Installation Meetings: 1. Conduct pre-submittal and pre-installation meetings as required in the individual technical Specifications or as determined necessary by the OAR (for example, instrumentation, roofing, concrete mix design, etc.). 2. Set the time and location of the meetings when ready to proceed with the associated Work. Submit a Notification by Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 20.07 for the meeting 2 weeks before the meeting. OPT must approve of the proposed time and location. 3. Attend the meeting and require the participation of appropriate Subcontractors and Suppliers in the meeting. General Conditions 007200-90 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 4. Prepare minutes of the meeting and submit to the OPT for review. OPT will review the minutes of the meeting and notify the Contractor of any discrepancies within 10 days of the date of the meeting memorandum. The minutes will not be corrected after the 10 days have expired. Corrections will be reflected in a revised set of meeting minutes. 20.05 Requests for Information A. Submit Request for Information (RFI) to the OAR to obtain additional information or clarification of the Contract Documents. 1. Submit a separate RFI for each item on the form provided. 2. Attach adequate information to permit a written response without further clarification. OAR will return requests that do not have adequate information to the Contractor for additional information. Contractor is responsible for all delays resulting from multiple document submittals due to inadequate information. 3. A response will be made when adequate information is provided. Response will be made on the RFI form or in attached information. B. Response to an RFI is given to provide additional information, interpretation, or clarification of the requirements of the Contract Documents, and does not modify the Contract Documents. C. Designer will initiate a Request for a Change Proposal (RCP) per Article 12 if the RFI indicates that a Contract Modification is required. D. Use the Project Issues Log to document decisions made at meetings and actions to be taken in accordance with Paragraph 20.06. E. Use the Action Item Log to document assignments for actions to be taken in accordance with Paragraph 20.06. 20.06 Decision and Action Item Log A. OAR will maintain a Project Decision Log to document key decisions made at meetings, telephone conversation or Site visits using the format provided: 1. Review the log prior to each regular meeting. 2. Report any discrepancies to the OAR for correction or discussion at the next monthly meeting. B. OAR will maintain an Action Item log in conjunction with the Project Decision Log to track assignments made at meetings, telephone conversation, or Site visits using the format provided: 1. Review the Action Item Log prior to each regular meeting. 2. Report actions taken subsequent to the previous progress meeting on items in the log assigned to the Contractor or through the Contractor to a Subcontractor or Supplier to the OAR. Report on status of progress 1 week prior to each progress meeting established in Paragraph 20.04 to allow OAR to update the log prior to the Progress meetings. 3. Be prepared to discuss the status at each meeting. General Conditions 007200-91 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 C. Decisions or action items in the log that require a change in the Contract Documents will have the preparation of a Modification as an action item if appropriate. The Contract Documents can only be changed by a Modification. 20.07 Notification By Contractor A. Notify the OAR of: 1. Need for testing. 2. Intent to work outside regular working hours. 3. Request to shut down facilities or utilities. 4. Proposed utility connections. 5. Required observation by OAR, Designer, or inspection agencies prior to covering Work. 6. Training. B. Provide notification a minimum of 2 weeks in advance in order to allow OPT time to respond appropriately to the notification. C. Use "Notification by Contractor"form provided. 20.08 Record Documents A. Maintain at the Site one complete set of printed Record Documents including: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Modifications. 5. Record Data and approved Shop Drawings. 6. Construction photographs. 7. Test Reports. 8. Clarifications and other information provided in Request for Information responses. 9. Reference standards. B. Store printed Record Documents and Samples in the Contractor's field office. 1. Record Documents are to remain separate from documents used for construction. 2. Provide files and racks for the storage of Record Documents. 3. Provide a secure storage space for the storage of Samples. 4. Maintain Record Documents in clean, dry, legible conditions, and in good order. 5. Make Record Documents and Samples available at all times for inspection by the OPT. C. Maintain a digital record of Specifications and Addenda to identify products provided in PDF format. General Conditions 007200-92 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 1. Reference the Record Data number, Shop Drawings number, and O&M manual number for each product and item of equipment furnished or installed. 2. Reference Modifications by type and number for all changes. D. Maintain a digital record of Drawings in PDF format. 1. Reference the Record Data number, Shop Drawings number, and O&M manual number for each product and item of equipment furnished or installed. 2. Reference Modifications by type and number for all changes. 3. Record information as construction is being performed. Do not conceal any Work until the required information is recorded. 4. Mark Drawings to record actual construction, including the following: a. Depths of various elements of the foundation in relation to finished first floor datum or the top of walls. b. Horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances constructed and existing utilities encountered during construction. C. Location of utilities and appurtenances concealed in the Work. Refer measurements to permanent structures on the surface. Include the following equipment: 1) Piping. 2) Ductwork. 3) Equipment and control devices requiring periodic maintenance or repair. 4) Valves, unions,traps, and tanks. 5) Services entrance. 6) Feeders. 7) Outlets. d. Changes of dimension and detail. e. Changes by Modifications. f. Information in Request for Information or included in the Project Issues Log. g. Details not on the original Drawings. Include field verified dimensions and clarifications, interpretations, and additional information issued in response to RFIs. 5. Mark Drawings with the following colors: a. Highlight references to other documents, including Modifications in blue; b. Highlight mark ups for new or revised Work(lines added) in yellow; C. Highlight items deleted or not installed (lines to be removed) in red; and d. Highlight items constructed per the Contract Documents in green. General Conditions 007200-93 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 6. Submit Record Documents to Designer for review and acceptance 30 days prior to Final Completion of the Project. E. Applications for Payment will not be recommended for payment if Record Documents are found to be incomplete or not in order. Final payment will not be recommended without complete Record Documents. ARTICLE 21—QUALITY MANAGEMENT 21.01 Contractor's Responsibilities A. Review the OPT's Quality Management Program and prepare and submit the Contractor's Quality Control Plan. B. Implement the Contractor's Quality Control Plan to control the quality of the Work and verify that the Work meets the standards of quality established in the Contract Documents. 1. Inspect products to be incorporated into the Project. Ensure that Suppliers have adequate quality control systems to ensure that products that comply with the Contract Documents are provided. 2. Integrate quality control measures into construction activities to produce Work which meets quality expectations of the Contract Documents. Inspect the Work of the Contractor, Subcontractors, and Suppliers. Correct Defective Work. 3. Provide and pay for the services of an approved professional materials testing laboratory acceptable to the OPT to provide testing that demonstrates that products proposed in Shop Drawings and Record Data for the Project fully comply with the Contract Documents. 4. Provide facilities, equipment, and Samples required for quality control inspections and tests: a. Give the OAR adequate notice before proceeding with Work that would interfere with inspections or testing; b. Notify the OAR and testing laboratories prior to the time that testing is required, providing adequate lead time to allow arrangements for inspections or testing to be made; C. Do not proceed with any Work that would impact the ability to correct defects or Work that would require subsequent removal to correct defects until testing services have been performed and results of tests indicate that the Work is acceptable; d. Cooperate fully with the performance of sampling, inspection, and testing; e. Provide personnel to assist with sampling or to assist in making inspections and field tests; f. Obtain and handle Samples for testing at the Site or at the production source of the product to be tested; g. Provide adequate quantities of representative products to be tested to the laboratory at the designated locations; General Conditions 007200-94 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 h. Provide facilities required to store and cure test Samples; i. Provide calibrated scales and measuring devices for the OPT's use in performing inspections and testing; j. Provide adequate lighting to allow OPT observations; and k. Make Contract Documents available to testing agencies when requested. 5. Provide safe access for all inspection and testing activities, including those to be conducted as part of the OPT's Quality Management Program. 6. Document Defective Work through Certified Test Reports and Defective Work Notices. Document that corrective actions have been taken to correct any defects and that corrected Work is in compliance with the Contract Documents. 7. Apply quality control measures to documentation provided for the Project. 8. Implement countermeasures to prevent future Defective Work. C. Perform tests as indicated in this and other Sections of the Specifications. Technical Specifications govern if any testing and inspection requirements of this Section conflict with the testing and inspection requirements of the technical Specifications. D. All verification testing is to be observed by the OAR or designated representative. E. Send test reports to the OAR and the Designer. F. Provide an update on quality control activities at monthly progress meetings. G. Owner will withhold payment for Defective Work, or Work that has not been tested or inspected in accordance with the Contractor's Quality Control Plan,the OPT's Quality Control Program, or the Contract Documents. H. Owner will withhold payment for additional testing fees incurred due to Contractor noncompliance with OPT's Quality Control Program, including retesting fees, standby time, cancellation charges, and trip fees for retesting or cancellations. I. Work performed that is connected or adjacent to Defective Work or Work that would have to be removed to correct Defective Work is also considered to be Defective. Contractor is responsible for all cost with replacing any acceptable Work that must be removed or might be damaged by corrective actions. 21.02 Quality Management Activities by OPT A. OPT will perform its own quality assurance tests independent of the Contractor's Quality Control Program. Assist the OPT and testing organizations in performing quality assurance activities per Paragraph 21.01. B. Quality assurance testing performed by the OPT will be paid for by the Owner, except for verification testing required per Paragraph 21.07. C. Quality assurance activities of the OPT, through their own forces or through contracts with consultants and materials testing laboratories are for the purpose of monitoring the results of the Contractor's Work to see that it is in compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Quality assurance activities or non-performance of quality assurance activities by the OPT do not: General Conditions 007200-95 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 1. Relieve the Contractor of its responsibility to provide Work or furnish products that conform with the requirements of the Contract Documents; 2. Relieve the Contractor of its responsibility for providing adequate quality control measures; 3. Relieve the Contractor of its responsibility for damage to or loss of Work or products before OPT's acceptance; 4. Constitute or imply OPT's acceptance; and 5. Affect the continuing rights of the Owner after OPT's acceptance of the completed Work. D. Work is subject to OPT's quality assurance observations or testing at any time. Products which have been tested or inspected and approved by OPT at a supply source or staging area may be inspected or tested again by the OPT before, during or after incorporation into the Work and rejected if products do not comply with the Contract Documents. 21.03 Contractor's Use of OPT's Test Reports A. OPT has prepared a Quality Management Plan that describes, in general, the OPT's anticipated quality assurance testing program for this Project. This testing program will be made available to Bidders during the bidding phase. This plan outlines only the testing in general terms and may not reflect actual testing. Actual testing will depend on the Contractors means, methods and procedures of construction which will not be known until the Contractor begins Work and submits their own Quality Control Plan for review. There is no guarantee that all testing will be performed. B. Contractor will receive copies of all test reports documenting OPT's quality assurance activities. Contractor is entitled to rely on the accuracy of these test results and use these as part of their quality control efforts. C. Contractor is to determine additional testing or inspections that may be required to implement the Contractor's Quality Control Plan. Include cost for additional testing and inspections required to meet Contractors quality control obligations, including the cost for correcting Defective Work in the Contract Price. D. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal if OPT's quality assurance testing program deviates significantly from the OPT's Quality Management Plan, and Contractor can demonstrate that additional cost was incurred to implement the Contractor's Quality Control Plan resulting from these deviations. 21.04 Documentation A. Provide documentation which includes: 1. Contractor's Quality Management Plan that establishes the methods of assuring compliance with the Contract Documents. Submit this plan as a Shop Drawings per Article 25. 2. A Statement of Qualification for any proposed testing laboratories that includes a list of the engineers and technical staff that will provide testing services on the Project, descriptions of the qualifications of these individuals, list of tests that can be performed, General Conditions 007200-96 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 equipment used with date of last certification, and a list of recent projects for which testing has been performed with references for those projects. 3. Provide Certified Test Reports for products to be incorporated into the Project. Provide reports to indicate that proposed products comply with the Contract Documents or indicate that proposed products do not comply with the Contract Documents and why it does not comply. Submit these test reports as part of a Shop Drawings submitted per Article 25. 4. Provide Certified Test Reports for inspection and testing required in this Section and in other Specification Sections. Provide reports to indicate that Work complies with the Contract Documents or indicate that Work does not comply with the Contract Documents and why it does not comply. Submit these test reports on forms provided per Article 24. 21.05 Standards A. Provide testing laboratories that comply with the American Council of Independent Laboratories (ACIL) "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualifications." B. Perform testing per recognized test procedures as listed in the various Sections of the Specifications, standards of the State Department of Highways and Public Transportation, American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM), or other testing associations. Perform tests in accordance with published procedures for testing issued by these organizations. 21.06 Delivery and Storage A. Handle and protect test specimens of products and construction materials at the Site in accordance with recognized test procedures. Provide facilities for storing, curing, and processing test specimens as required by test standard to maintain the integrity of Samples. 21.07 Verification Testing for Corrected Defects A. Provide verification testing on Work performed to correct Defective Work to demonstrate that the Work is now in compliance with the Contract Documents. Document that Defective Work has been corrected and verify that the OAR closes the item in the Defective Work Register. B. Pay for verification testing. OPT may perform verification testing as part of their Quality Management Program and impose a Set-off to recover the cost for this testing. C. Conduct the same tests or inspections used to determine that the original Work was Defective. Different tests or methods may be used if approved by the OPT. 21.08 Test Reports A. Certified Test Reports are to be prepared for all tests. 1. Tests performed by testing laboratories may be submitted on their standard test report forms if acceptable to the OPT. These reports must include the following: a. Name of the Owner, Project title and number and Contractor; General Conditions 007200-97 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 b. Name of the laboratory, address, and telephone number; C. Name and signature of the laboratory personnel performing the test; d. Description of the product being sampled or tested; e. Date and time of sampling, inspection, and testing; f. Date the report was issued; g. Description of the test performed; h. Weather conditions and temperature at time of test or sampling; i. Location at the Site or structure where the sample was taken; j. Standard or test procedure used in making the test; k. A description of the results of the test; I. Statement of compliance or non-compliance with the Contract Documents; and m. Interpretations of test results, if appropriate. 2. Submit reports on tests performed by Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers on the forms provided by the OAR. 3. OPT will prepare test reports on test performed by the OPT. B. Send test report to Designer within 24 hours of completing the test. Flag tests reports with results that do not comply with Contract Documents for immediate attention. C. Payment for Work may be withheld until test reports indicate that the Work is not Defective. 21.09 Defective Work A. Immediately correct any Defective Work or notify the OAR why the Work is not to be corrected immediately and when corrective action will be completed. B. No payment will be made for Defective Work. Remove Work from the Application for Payment if Work paid for on a previous Application for Payment is found to be Defective. 21.10 Limitation of Authority of Testing Laboratory A. The testing laboratory representatives are limited to providing testing services and interpreting the results of the test performed. B. The testing laboratory is not authorized to: 1. Alter the requirements of the Contract Documents; 2. Accept or reject any portion of the Work; 3. Perform any of the duties of the Contractor; or 4. Direct or stop the Work. 21.11 Quality Control Plan A. Submit the Contractor's Quality Control Plan for approval as a Shop Drawing per Article 25. Use Contractor's Quality Control Plan Checklist provided to review the document before General Conditions 007200-98 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 submitting and include a copy of the completed checklist with the Contractor's Quality Control Plan. Do not begin Work until the Contractor's Quality Control Plan is approved. Submit an interim plan covering only the portion of Work to be performed if the Contractor plans to begin Work prior to submitting the Contractor's Quality Control Plan for the Project. Do not begin Work on other parts of the Project until the Contractor's Quality Control Plan is approved or another interim plan covering the additional Work to be started is approved. B. Provide a Contractor's Quality Control Plan that incorporates construction operations at both the Site and production Work at remote locations and includes Work by Subcontractors and Suppliers. The Contractor's Quality Control Plan is to include: 1. A description of the quality control organization, including an organization chart showing lines of authority to control the quality of Work; 2. Documentation describing name, qualifications (in resume format), duties, responsibilities, and level of authority of the Quality Control Manager; 3. The name, qualifications (in resume format), duties, responsibilities, and authorities of other persons assigned a quality control function; 4. Procedures for scheduling, reviewing, certifying, and managing documentation, including documentation provided by Subcontractors and Suppliers; 5. Control, verification, and acceptance testing procedures for each specific test. Include: a. Name of tests to be performed, b. Specification paragraph requiring test, C. Parameters of Work to be tested, d. Test frequency, e. Persons responsible for each test, and f. Applicable industry testing standards and laboratory facilities to be used for the test; 6. Integrate the OPT quality assurance testing into the Contractor's Quality Control Plan, specifically identifying the tests or inspections in Paragraph 21.11.13.5 that will be provided by the OPT as part of their Quality Management Program; 7. Procedures for tracking and documenting quality management efforts. 8. Procedures for tracking Defective Work from initial identification through acceptable corrective action. Indicate how documentation of the verification process for deficiencies will be made. 9. Reporting procedures which incorporate the use of forms provided by the OAR. 10. The name of the proposed testing laboratories along with documentation of qualifications per Paragraph 21.04. C. The Quality Control Manager must have authority to reject Defective Work and redirect the efforts of the Contractor's Team to prevent or correct Defective Work. D. Notify the Designer of any changes to the Contractor's Quality Control Plan or quality control personnel. General Conditions 007200-99 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 E. Meet with the OPT 7 days after Contractor's Quality Control Plan is submitted and before start of construction to discuss the Contractor's Quality Control Plan and expedite its approval. 21.12 Implement Contractor's Quality Control Plan A. Perform quality control observations and testing as required in each Section of the Specifications and where indicated on the Drawings. B. Include the following phases for each definable Work task. A definable Work task is one which is separate and distinct from other tasks, has separate control requirements, may be provided by different trades or disciplines, or may be Work by the same trade in a different environment. 1. Planning Phase: Perform the following before beginning each definable Work task: a. Review the Contract Drawings. b. Review documents and determine that they are complete in accordance with the Contract Documents. C. Check to assure that all materials and/or equipment have been tested, submitted, and approved. d. Examine the work area to assure that all required preliminary Work has been completed and complies with the Contract Documents. e. Examine required materials, equipment, and Sample Work to assure that they are on hand, conform to Shop Drawings and Record Data, and are properly stored. f. Review requirements for quality control inspection and testing. g. Discuss procedures for controlling quality of the Work. Document construction tolerances and workmanship standards for the Work task. h. Check that the portion of the plan for the Work to be performed incorporates document review comments. i. Discuss results of planning phase with the OAR. Conduct a meeting attended by the Quality Control Manager, the OAR, superintendent, other quality control personnel as applicable, and the foreman responsible for the Work task. Instruct applicable workers as to the acceptable level of workmanship required in order to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. Document the results of the preparatory phase actions by separate meeting minutes prepared by the Quality Control Manager and attached to the quality control report. j. Do not move to the next phase unless results of investigations required for the planning phase indicate that requirements have been met. 2. Work Phase: Complete this phase after the Planning Phase: a. Notify the OAR at least 24 hours in advance of beginning the Work and discuss the review of the planning effort to indicate that requirements have been met. b. Check the Work to ensure that it is in full compliance with the Contract Documents. General Conditions 007200- 100 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 C. Verify adequacy of controls to ensure full compliance with Contract Documents. Verify required control inspection and testing is performed. d. Verify that established levels of workmanship meet acceptable workmanship standards. Compare with required Sample panels as appropriate. e. Repeat the Work phase for each new crew to work on-site, or any time acceptable specified quality standards are not being met. 3. Follow-up Phase: Perform daily checks to assure control activities, including control testing, are providing continued compliance with contract requirements: a. Make checks daily and record observations in the quality control documentation. b. Conduct follow-up checks and correct all deficiencies prior to the start of additional Work tasks that may be affected by the Defective Work. Do not build upon nor conceal Defective Work. C. Conduct a review of the Work with the OPT one month prior to the expiration of the correction period. Correct defects as noted during the review. C. Conduct additional planning and Work phases if: 1. The quality of on-going Work is unacceptable; 2. Changes are made in applicable quality control staff, on-site production supervision or crews; 3. Work on a task is resumed after a substantial period of inactivity; or 4. Other quality problems develop. ARTICLE 22—FINAL RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES 22.01 Senior Level Negotiations A. Each party is required to continue to perform its obligations under the Contract pending the final resolution of any dispute arising out of or relating to the Contract, unless it would be impossible or impracticable under the circumstances then present. B. All negotiations pursuant to Article 22 are confidential and shall be treated as compromise and settlement negotiations for purposes of applicable rules of evidence. C. Before invoking mediation, Owner and Contractor agree that they first shall try to resolve any dispute arising out of or related to this Contract through discussions directly between those senior management representatives within their respective organizations who have overall managerial responsibility for similar projects. Both Owner and Contractor agree that this step shall be a condition precedent to use of any other alternative dispute resolution process. If the parties' senior management representatives cannot resolve the dispute within 45 calendar days after a party delivers a written notice of such dispute to the other, then the parties shall proceed with mediation. 22.02 Mediation A. In the event that Owner and/or Contractor contend that the other has committed a material breach of the Contract or the parties cannot reach a resolution of a claim or dispute pursuant General Conditions 007200- 101 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 to Article 13, as a condition precedent to filing a lawsuit, either party shall request mediation of the dispute with the following requirements: 1. The request for mediation shall be in writing and shall request that the mediation commence not less than 30 calendar days or more than 90 calendar days following the date of the request, except upon agreement of the parties. 2. In the event Owner and Contractor are unable to agree to a date for the mediation or to the identity of the mediator within 30 calendar days following the date of the request for mediation, all conditions precedent shall be deemed to have occurred. 3. Owner and Contractor are to each pay one-half of the mediator's fees and costs.Venue for any mediation or lawsuit filed under this Contract shall be in Nueces County,Texas. Any agreement reached in mediation shall be enforceable as a settlement in any court having jurisdiction thereof. 4. Nothing in this Contract shall be construed as consent to a lawsuit. No provision of the Contract shall waive any immunity or defense. ARTICLE 23—MINORITY/MBE/DBE PARTICIPATION POLICY 23.01 Policy A. It is the policy of the City of Corpus Christi that maximum opportunity is afforded minorities, women, low income persons and Minority/Disadvantaged Business Enterprises (M/DBE) to participate in the performance of contracts awarded by the City of Corpus Christi in support of Equal Employment Opportunity goals and objectives. In accordance with such policy,the City has established goals, as stated herein, both for minority and female participation by trade and for Minority Business Enterprise. 23.02 Definitions A. Prime Contractor: Any person, firm, partnership, corporation, association, or joint venture as herein provided which has been awarded a City contract. B. Subcontractor: Any named person, firm, partnership, corporation, association, or joint venture herein identified as providing work, labor, services, supplies, equipment, materials, or any combination of the foregoing under contract with a prime contractor on a City contract. C. Minority/Disadvantaged Business Enterprise: A business enterprise that is owned and controlled by one or more minority person(s) or socially and economically disadvantaged individual(s). Minority/Disadvantaged person(s) must collectively own, operate and/or actively manage, and share in payments from such an enterprise in the manner hereinafter set forth: 1. Owned: a. For a sole proprietorship to be deemed a minority business enterprise, it must be owned by a minority person. b. For an enterprise doing business as a partnership, at least 51 percent of the assets or interest in the partnership property must be owned by one or more minority person(s). General Conditions 007200- 102 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 C. For an enterprise doing business as a corporation, at least 51 percent of the assets or interest in the corporate shares must be owned by one or more minority person(s). 2. Controlled: a. The primary power, direct or indirect,to manage a business enterprise rests with a minority person(s). 3. Share in Payments: a. Minority partners, proprietors, or stockholders of the business enterprise must be entitled to receive 51 percent or more of the total profits, bonuses, dividends, interest payments, commissions, consulting fees, rents, procurement, and subcontract payments, and any other monetary distribution paid by the business enterprise. D. Minority: Minority persons include Blacks, Mexican-Americans and other persons of Hispanic origin, American Indians, Alaskan Natives, and Asians or Pacific Islanders. For the purposes of this policy, women are also considered as minorities. E. Socially and economically disadvantaged individual:Any individual who is a citizen (or lawfully admitted permanent resident) of the United States and who has been subjected to racial or ethnic prejudice or cultural bias within American society because of his or her identity as a member of a group and without regard to his or her individual qualities.The social disadvantage must stem from circumstances beyond the individual's control. F. Female Owned Business Enterprise: A sole proprietorship that is owned and controlled by a woman,a partnership at least 51 percent of whose assets or partnership interests are owned by one or more women, or a corporation at least 51 percent of whose assets or interests in the corporate shares are owned by one or more women. G. Joint Venture: A joint venture means an association of two or more persons, partnerships, corporations, or any combination thereof, founded to carry on a single business activity which is limited in scope and direction. The degree to which a joint venture may satisfy the stated MBE goal cannot exceed the proportionate interest of the MBE as a member of the joint venture in the Work to be performed by the joint venture. For example, a joint venture which is to perform 50 percent of the Work itself and in which a minority joint venture partner has a 50 percent interest, shall be deemed equivalent to having minority participation in 25 percent of the Work. Minority members of the joint venture must have financial, managerial, or technical skills in the Work to be performed by the joint venture. 23.03 Goals A. The goals for participation by minorities and Minority Business Enterprises expressed in percentage terms for the Contractor's aggregate work force on all construction Work for the Contract award shall be 1. Minority participation goal is 45%. 2. Minority Business Enterprise participation goal is 15%. B. These goals are applicable to all the construction work (regardless of federal participation) performed in the Contract, including approved Change Orders. The hours of minority General Conditions 007200- 103 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 employment must be substantially uniform throughout the length of the Contract and in each trade. The transfer of minority employees from Contractor to Contractor or from project to project for the sole purpose of meeting the Contractor's percentage is prohibited. 23.04 Compliance A. Upon completion of the Project, a final breakdown of MBE participation, substantiated by copies of paid invoices, shall be submitted by the Contractor to the City Engineer. B. Make bi-weekly payroll submittals to the City Engineer. The Contractor is to indicate the percent of minority and female participation, by trade, which has been utilized on the Project. Along with the request for final payment on the Project,the Contractor will indicate, in writing, the overall participation in these areas which have been achieved. The City Engineer may withhold monthly or final payments to the Contractor for failure to submit bi- weekly payrolls in a timely fashion or to submit overall participation information as required. ARTICLE 24—DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT 24.01 Work Included A. Submit documentation as required by the Contract Documents and as reasonably requested by the OPT. 24.02 Quality Assurance A. Submit legible, accurate, complete documents presented in a clear, easily understood manner. Documents not meeting these criteria will be returned without review. 24.03 Contractor's Responsibilities A. Review documents prior to submitting. Make certifications as required by the Contract Documents and as indicated on forms provided. B. Provide a Schedule of Documents to list the documents that are to be submitted, the dates on which documents are to be sent to the Designer for review, and proposed dates that documents must be returned to comply with the Project schedule. Use the form provided for this list. C. Incorporate the dates for processing documents into the Progress Schedule required by Article 27. 1. Provide documents in accordance with the schedule so construction of the Project is not delayed. 2. Allow a reasonable time for the review of documents when preparing the Progress Schedule. Assume a 14 day review cycle for each document unless a longer period of time is indicated in the Contract Documents or agreed to by Designer and Contractor. 3. Schedule submittal of documents to provide all information for interrelated Work at one time. 4. Allow adequate time for processing documents so construction of the Project is not delayed. General Conditions 007200- 104 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 24.04 Document Submittal A. Submit documents through the Designer. Send all documents in digital format for processing. 1. Provide all information requested with a completed Document Transmittal form. Do not leave any blanks incomplete. If information is not applicable, enter NA in the space provided. 2. The Document Transmittal form is to be the first page in the document submitted. 3. Submit all documents in Portable Document Format(PDF). a. Create PDF documents from native format files unless files are only available from scanned documents. b. Rotate pages so that the top of each document appears at the top of the monitor screen when opened in PDF viewing software. C. Submit PDF document with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. d. Submit color PDF documents where color is required to interpret the document. e. Create or convert documents to allow text to be selected for comments or searched using text search features. Run scanned documents through Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software if necessary. f. Flatten markups in documents to prevent markups made by Contractor from being moved or deleted. Flatten documents to allow markup recovery. g. Use software to reduce file size using default settings except the option for "Drop Metadata." Uncheck the "Drop Metadata" box when reducing file size. h. Add footers to each document with the Project name. 24.05 Document Numbering A. Assign a number to the documents originated to allow tracking of the documents during the review process. 1. Assign the number consisting of a prefix, a sequence number, and a letter suffix. Prefixes shall be as follows: Prefix Description Originator AP Application for Payment Contractor CO Change Order OAR CP Change Proposal Contractor CTR Certified Test Report Contractor FO Field Order OAR NBC Notification by Contractor Contractor PD Photographic Documentation Contractor General Conditions 007200- 105 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 Prefix Description Originator RCP Request for a Change Proposal OAR RD Record Data Contractor RFI Request for Information Contractor SD Shop Drawing Contractor SCH Schedule of Progress Contractor 2. Issue sequence numbers in chronological order for each type of document. 3. Issue numbers for resubmittals that have the same number as the original document followed by an alphabetical suffix indicating the number of times the same document has been sent to the Designer for processing. For example: SD 025 A represents Shop Drawing number 25 and the letter "A" designates that this is the second time this document has been sent for review. 4. Clearly note the document number on each page or sheet of the document. 5. Correct assignment of numbers is essential since different document types are processed in different ways. B. Include reference to the Drawing number and/or Specification Section, detail designation, schedule, or location that corresponds with the data on the document transmittal forms. Other identification may also be required, such as layout drawings or schedules to allow the reviewer to determine where a particular product is to be used. 24.06 Document Requirements A. Furnish documents as indicated below or in individual Specification Sections. Submit documents per the procedures described in the Contract Documents. B. Submit documents per the Specification Section shown in the following table: Document Type Section Application for Payment Article 17 Change Proposal Article 12 Article 25 for approval of product Certified Test Report Article 21 to demonstrate compliance Notification by Contractor Article 20 Photographic Documentation Article 28 Progress Schedules Article 27 Record Data Article 26 Request for Information Article 20 Shop Drawing Article 25 Schedule of Values Article 17 Substitutions Article 12 General Conditions 007200- 106 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 Document Type Section Suppliers and Subcontractors Articles 20 and 26 ARTICLE 25—SHOP DRAWINGS 25.01 Work Included A. Shop Drawings are required for those products that cannot adequately be described in the Contract Documents to allow fabrication, erection, or installation of the product without additional detailed information from the Supplier. B. Submit Shop Drawings as required by the Contract Documents and as reasonably requested by the OPT to: 1. Record the products incorporated into the Project for the Owner; 2. Provide detailed information for the products proposed for the Project regarding their fabrication, installation, commissioning, and testing; and 3. Allow the Designer to advise the Owner if products proposed for the Project by the Contractor conform, in general,to the design concepts of the Contract Documents. C. Contractor's responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents is not relieved by the review of Shop Drawings, Samples, or mockups. Contract modifications can only be approved by Change Order or Field Order. 25.02 Quality Assurance A. Submit legible, accurate, and complete documents presented in a clear, easily understood manner. Shop Drawings not meeting these criteria will be rejected. B. Demonstrate that the proposed products are in full and complete compliance with the design criteria and requirements of the Contract Documents or will be if deviations requested per Paragraph 25.10 are approved. C. Furnish and install products that fully comply with the information included in the document submittal. 25.03 Contractor's Responsibilities A. Provide Shop Drawings as required by Paragraph 25.03 of the Supplementary Conditions. B. Include Shop Drawings in the Schedule of Documents required by Article 24 to indicate the Shop Drawings to be submitted,the dates on which documents are to be sent to the Designer for review and proposed dates that the product will be incorporated into the Project. C. Incorporate the dates for processing Shop Drawings into the Progress Schedule required by Article 27. 1. Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with the schedule so construction of the Project is not delayed. 2. Allow a reasonable time for the review of Shop Drawings when preparing the Progress Schedule. Include time for making revisions to the Shop Drawings and resubmitting the Shop Drawing for a least a second review. Assume a 14-day review cycle for each time General Conditions 007200- 107 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 a Shop Drawing is submitted for review unless a longer period of time is indicated in the Contract Documents. 3. Schedule document submittals to provide all information for interrelated Work at one time. 4. Allow adequate time for ordering, fabricating, delivering, and installing product so construction of the Project is not delayed. D. Complete the following before submitting a Shop Drawing or Sample: 1. Prepare Shop Drawing Review and coordinate the Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents; 2. Determine and verify specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials,catalog numbers,and similar information with respect to Shop Drawings and Samples; 3. Determine and verify the suitability of materials and equipment offered with respect to the indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and 4. Determine and verify information relative to Contractor's responsibilities for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. E. Determine and verify: 1. Accurate field measurements, quantities, and dimensions are shown on the Shop Drawings; 2. Location of existing structures, utilities, and equipment related to the Shop Drawing have been shown and conflicts between the products existing structures, utilities, and equipment have been identified; 3. Conflicts that impact the installation of the products have been brought to the attention of the OPT through the Designer; 4. Shop Drawings are complete for their intended purpose; and 5. Conflicts between the Shop Drawings related to the various Subcontractors and Suppliers have been resolved. F. Review Shop Drawings prior to submitting to the Designer. Certify that all Shop Drawings have been reviewed by the Contractor and are in strict conformance with the Contract Documents as modified by Addenda, Change Order, Field Order, or Contract Amendment when submitting Shop Drawings except for deviations specifically brought to the Designer's attention on an attached Shop Drawing Deviation Request form in accordance with Paragraph 25.09. G. Fabrication or installation of any products prior to the approval of Shop Drawings is done at the Contractor's risk. Defective products may be rejected at the Owner's option. H. Payment will not be made for products for which Shop Drawings or Samples are required until these are approved by the Designer. General Conditions 007200- 108 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 25.04 Shop Drawing Requirements A. Provide adequate information in Shop Drawings and Samples so Designer can: 1. Assist the Owner in selecting colors,textures, or other aesthetic features. 2. Compare the proposed features of the product with the specified features and advise Owner that the product does, in general, conform to the Contract Documents. 3. Compare the performance features of the proposed product with those specified and advise the Owner that the product does, in general,conform to the performance criteria specified in the Contract Documents. 4. Review required certifications, guarantees, warranties, and service agreements for compliance with the Contract Documents. B. Include a complete description of the product to be furnished, including: 1. Type, dimensions, size, arrangement, and operational characteristics of the product; 2. Weights,gauges,materials of construction,external connections,anchors,and supports required; 3. All applicable standards such as ASTM or Federal specification numbers; 4. Fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, manufacturing instructions, templates, patterns, and coordination drawings; 5. Mix designs for concrete, asphalt, or other materials proportioned for the Project; and 6. Complete and accurate field measurements for products which must fit existing conditions. Indicate on the document submittal that the measurements represent actual dimensions obtained at the Site. C. Submit Shop Drawings that require coordination with other Shop Drawings at the same time. Shop Drawings requiring coordination with other Shop Drawings will be rejected until a complete package is submitted. 25.05 Special Certifications and Reports A. Provide all required certifications with the Shop Drawings as specified in the individual Specification Sections: 1. Certified Test Reports (CTR): A report prepared by an approved testing agency giving results of tests performed on products to indicate their compliance with the Specifications. This report is to demonstrate that the product when installed will meet the requirements and is part of the Shop Drawing. Field tests may be performed by the Owner to determine that in place materials or products meet the same quality as indicated in the CTR submitted as part of the Shop Drawing. 2. Certification of Local Field Service (CLS): A certified letter stating that field service is available from a factory or supplier approved service organization located within a 300 mile radius of the Site. List names, addresses, and telephone numbers of approved service organizations on or attach it to the certificate. 3. Certification of Adequacy of Design (CAD): A certified letter from the manufacturer of the equipment stating that they have designed the equipment to be structurally stable General Conditions 007200- 109 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 and to withstand all imposed loads without deformation, failure, or adverse effects to the performance and operational requirements of the unit. The letter shall state that mechanical and electrical equipment is adequately sized to be fully operational for the conditions specified or normally encountered by the product's intended use. 25.06 Warranties and Guarantees A. Provide all required warranties, guarantees, and related documents with the Shop Drawing. The effective date of warranties and guarantees will be the date of acceptance of the Work by the Owner. B. Identify all Extended Warranties, defined as any guarantee of performance for the product or system beyond the 1-year correction period described in the General Conditions. Issue the warranty certificate in the name of the Owner. Provide a Warranty Bond for Extended Warranties if required by Specification Sections. C. Provide a copy of all warranties in a separate document in accordance with Article 29. 25.07 Shop Drawing Submittal Procedures A. Submit Shop Drawings through the Designer. Send all documents in digital format for processing. 1. Provide all information requested in the Shop Drawing submittal form. Do not leave any blanks incomplete. If information is not applicable,enter NA in the space provided. The Shop Drawing submittal form is to be the first document in the file submitted. 2. Submit all documents in Portable Document Format (PDF). a. Create PDF documents from native format files unless files are only available from scanned documents. b. Rotate pages so that the top of each document appears at the top of the monitor screen when opened in PDF viewing software. C. Submit PDF document with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. d. Submit color PDF documents where color is required to interpret the Shop Drawing. Submit Samples and color charts per Paragraph 25.08.A. e. Create or convert documents to allow text to be selected for comments or searched using text search features. Run scanned documents through Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software if necessary. f. Flatten markups in documents to prevent markups made by Contractor from being moved or deleted. Flatten documents to allow markup recovery. g. Use software to reduce file size using default settings except the option for "Drop Metadata." Uncheck the "Drop Metadata" box when reducing file size. h. Add footers to each document with the Project name. General Conditions 007200- 110 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 3. Submit each specific product or class of material separately so these can be tracked and processed independently. Do not submit Shop Drawings for more than one product in the same Shop Drawing. 4. Submit items specified in different Specification Sections separately unless they are part of an integrated system. 5. Define abbreviations and symbols used in Shop Drawings. a. Use terms and symbols in Shop Drawings consistent with the Contract Drawings. b. Provide a list of abbreviations and their meaning as used in the Shop Drawings. C. Provide a legend for symbols used on Shop Drawings. 6. Mark Shop Drawings to reference: a. Related Specification Sections, b. Drawing number and detail designation, C. Product designation or name, d. Schedule references, e. System into which the product is incorporated, and f. Location where the product is incorporated into the Project. B. Use the following conventions to markup Shop Drawings for review: 1. Make comments and corrections in the color blue. Add explanatory comments to the markup. 2. Highlight items in black that are not being furnished when the Supplier's standard drawings or information sheets are provided so that only the products to be provided are in their original color. 3. Make comments in the color yellow where selections or decisions by the Designer are required, but such selections do not constitute a deviation from the Contract Documents. Add explanatory comments to the markup to indicate the action to be taken by the Designer. 4. Make comments in the color orange that are deviation requests. Include the deviation request number on the Shop Drawing that corresponds to the deviation request on the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. Include explanatory comments in the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. 5. Mark dimensions with the prefix FD to indicate field verified dimensions on the Shop Drawings. C. Submit a Change Proposal per Article 12 to request modifications to the Contract Documents, including those for approval of"or equal" products when specifically allowed by the Contract Documents or as a substitution for specified products or procedures. D. Designate a Shop Drawing as requiring priority treatment in the comment section of the Shop Drawing submittal form to place the review of the Shop Drawing ahead of other Shop Drawings previously delivered. Shop Drawings are typically reviewed in the order received, unless Contractor requests that a different priority be assigned. Priority Shop Drawings will General Conditions 007200- 111 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 be reviewed before other Shop Drawings for this Project already received but not yet reviewed. Use of this priority designation for Shop Drawings may delay the review of Shop Drawings previously submitted, pushing the processing of Shop Drawings beyond the 14-day target. Contractor is responsible for delays resulting from the use of the priority designation status on Shop Drawings. E. Complete the certification required by Paragraph 25.03. 25.08 Sample and Mockup Submittal Procedures A. Submit color charts and Samples for every product requiring color, texture, or finish selection. 1. Submit color charts and Samples only after Shop Drawings for the products have been approved. 2. Deliver all color charts and Samples at one time. 3. Provide Samples of adequate size to clearly illustrate the functional characteristics of the product, with integrally related parts and attachment devices. 4. Indicate the full range of color,texture, and patterns. 5. Deliver color charts and Samples to the field office and store for the duration of the Project 6. Notify the Designer that color charts and Samples have been delivered for approval using the Notification by Contractor form. 7. Submit color charts and Samples not less than 30 days prior to when these products are to be ordered or released for fabrication to comply with the Project schedule. 8. Remove Samples that have been rejected. Submit new Samples following the same process as for the initial Sample until Samples are approved. 9. Dispose of Samples when related Work has been completed and approved and disposal is approved by the Designer. At Owner's option, Samples will become the property of the Owner. B. Construct mockups for comparison with the Work being performed. 1. Construct mockups from the actual products to be used in construction per detailed Specification Sections. 2. Construct mockups of the size and in the area indicated in the Contract Documents. 3. Construct mockups complete with texture and finish to represent the finished product. 4. Notify the Designer that mockups have been constructed and are ready for approval using the Notification by Contractor form. Allow 2 weeks for OPT to approve of the mockup before beginning the Work represented by the mockup. 5. Remove mockups that have been rejected. Construct new mockups following the same process as for the initial mockup until mockup is approved. 6. Protect mockups until Work has been completed and accepted by the OPT. General Conditions 007200- 112 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 7. Dispose of mockups when related Work has been completed and disposal is approved by the Designer. 25.09 Equal Non Specified Products A. Contractor may submit other manufacturers' products that are in full compliance with the Specification where Specifications list one or more manufacturers followed by the phase"or equal" or"or approved equal." 1. Submit a Shop Drawing as required by this article to document that the proposed product is equal or superior to the specified product. 2. Prove that the product is equal. It is not the OPT's responsibility to prove the product is not equal. a. Indicate on a point by point basis for each specified feature that the product is equal to the Contract Document requirements. b. Make a direct comparison with the specified manufacturer's published data sheets and available information. Provide this printed material with the Shop Drawing. C. The decision of the Designer regarding the acceptability of the proposed product is final. 3. Provide a typewritten certification that, in furnishing the proposed product as an equal, the Contractor: a. Has thoroughly examined the proposed product and has determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to the product specified. b. Has determined that the product will perform in the same manner and result in the same process as the specified product. C. Will provide the same warranties and/or bonds as for the product specified. d. Will assume all responsibility to coordinate any modifications that may be necessary to incorporate the product into the construction and will waive all claims for additional Work which may be necessary to incorporate the product into the Project which may subsequently become apparent. e. Will maintain the same time schedule as for the specified product. 25.10 Requests for Deviation A. Submit requests for deviation from the Contract Documents for any product that does not fully comply with the Contract Documents. B. Submit requests for deviation using the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form provided. Identify each deviation request as a separate item. Include all requested deviations that must be approved as a group together and identify them as a single item. C. Include a description of why the deviation is required and the impact on Contract Price or Contract Times. Include the amount of any cost savings to the Owner for deviations that result in a reduction in cost. D. Submit as a Change Proposal prior to submitting the Shop Drawing if the deviation will result in a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. General Conditions 007200- 113 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 E. A Modification must be issued by the Designer for approval of a deviation. Approval of a requested Shop Drawing deviation by the Designer on the Shop Drawings Deviation Request form indicates approval of the requested deviation only on its technical merits as generally conforming to the Contract Documents. Deviations from the Contract Documents can only be approved by a Modification. 25.11 Designer Responsibilities A. Shop Drawings will be received by the Designer. Designer will log the documents and review per this Article for general conformance with the Contract Documents. 1. Designer's review and approval will be only to determine if the products described in the Shop Drawing or Sample will, after installation or incorporation into the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. 2. Designer's review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. 3. Designer's review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. B. Comments will be made on items called to the attention of the Designer for review and comment. Any marks made by the Designer do not constitute a blanket review of the document submittal or relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors or deviations from the Contract requirements. 1. Designer will respond to Contractor's markups by either making markups directly in the Shop Drawings file using the color green or by attaching a Document Review Comments form with review comments. 2. Shop Drawings that are reviewed will be returned with one or more of the following status designations: a. Approved: Shop Drawing is found to be acceptable as submitted. b. Approved as Noted: Shop Drawing is Approved so long as corrections or notations made by Designer are incorporated into the Show Drawing. C. Not Approved: Shop Drawing or products described are not acceptable. 3. Shop Drawing will also be designated for one of the following actions: a. Final distribution: Shop Drawing is acceptable without further action and has been filed as a record document. b. Shop Drawing not required: A Shop Drawing was not required by the Contract Documents. Resubmit the document per Article 26. C. Cancelled: This action indicates that for some reason, the Shop Drawing is to be removed from consideration and all efforts regarding the processing of that document are to cease. General Conditions 007200- 114 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 d. Revise and resubmit: Shop Drawing has deviations from the Contract Documents, significant errors, or is inadequate and must be revised and resubmitted for subsequent review. e. Resubmit with corrections made: Shop Drawing is "Approved as Noted," but has significant markups. Make correction and notations to provide a revised document with markup incorporated into the original document so that no markups are required. f. Returned without review due to excessive deficiencies: Document does not meet the requirement of the Specifications for presentation or content to the point where continuing to review the document would be counterproductive to the review process or clearly does not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. Revise the Shop Drawing to comply with the requirements of this Section and resubmit. g. Actions a through c will close out the Shop Drawing review process and no further action is required as a Shop Drawing. Actions d through f require follow up action to close out the review process. 4. Drawings with a significant or substantial number of markings by the Contractor may be marked "Approved as Noted" and "Resubmit with corrections made." These drawings are to be revised to provide a clean record of the Shop Drawing. Proceed with ordering products as the documents are revised. 5. Dimensions or other data that does not appear to conform to the Contract Documents will be marked as "At Variance With" (AVW) the Contract Documents or other information provided. The Contractor is to make revisions as appropriate to comply with the Contract Documents. C. Bring deviations to the Shop Drawings to the attention of the Designer for approval by using the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. Use a single line for each requested deviation so the Status and Action for each deviation can be determined for that requested deviation. If approval or rejection of a requested deviation will impact other requested deviations, then all related deviations should be included in that requested deviation line so the status and action can be determined on the requested deviation as a whole. D. Requested deviations will be reviewed as possible Modification to the Contract Documents. 1. A Requested deviation will be rejected as "Not Approved" if the requested deviation is unacceptable. Contractor is to revise and resubmit the Shop Drawing with corrections for approval. 2. A Field Order will be issued by the Designer for deviations approved by the Designer if the requested deviation is acceptable and if the requested deviation will not result in a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. Requested deviations from the Contract Documents may only be approved by Field Order. 3. A requested deviation will be rejected if the requested deviation is acceptable but the requested deviation will or should result in a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. Submit any requested deviation that requires a change in Contract Price or Contract Times as a Change Proposal for approval prior to resubmitting the Shop Drawing. General Conditions 007200- 115 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 E. Contractor is to resubmit the Shop Drawing until it is acceptable and marked Approved or Approved as Noted and is assigned an action per Paragraph 25.11 that indicates that the Shop Drawing process is closed. F. Information that is submitted as a Shop Drawings that should be submitted as Record Data or other type of document, or is not required may be returned without review, or may be deleted. No further action is required and the Shop Drawing process for this document will be closed. 25.12 Resubmission Requirements A. Make all corrections or changes in the documents required by the Designer and resubmit to the Designer until approved. 1. Revise initial drawings or data and resubmit as specified for the original document. 2. Highlight or cloud in green those revisions which have been made in response to the previous reviews by the Designer. This will include changes previously highlighted or clouded in yellow to direct attention to Designer to items requiring selections or decisions by the Designer or highlighted or clouded in orange for a requested deviation from the Contract Documents. 3. Highlight and cloud new items in yellow where selections or decisions by the Designer are required, but such selections do not constitute a deviation from the Contract Documents. Add explanatory comments to the markup to indicate the action to be taken by the Designer. 4. Highlight and cloud new items in orange that are deviation requests. Include the deviation request number on the Shop Drawing that corresponds to the deviation request on the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. Numbering for these new items is to start with the next number following the last Shop Drawing deviation requested. Include explanatory comments in the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. B. Pay for excessive review of Shop Drawings. 1. Excessive review of Shop Drawings is defined as any review required after the original review has been made and the first resubmittal has been checked to see that corrections have been made. 2. Review of Shop Drawings or Samples will be an additional service requiring payment by the Contractor if the Contractor submits a substitution for a product for which a Shop Drawing or Sample has previously been approved, unless the need for such change is beyond the control of Contractor. 3. Cost for additional review time will be billed to the Owner by the Designer for the actual hours required for the review of Shop Drawings by Designer and in accordance with the rates listed in SECTION 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. 4. A Set-off will be included in each Application for Payment to pay costs for the additional review to the Owner on a monthly basis. The Set-off will be based on invoices submitted to Owner for these services. General Conditions 007200- 116 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 5. Need for more than one resubmission or any other delay of obtaining Designer's review of Shop Drawings will not entitle the Contractor to an adjustment in Contract Price or an extension of Contract Times. ARTICLE 26—RECORD DATA 26.01 Work Included A. Submit Record Data as required by the Contract Documents and as reasonably requested by the OPT. Provide Record Data for all products unless a Shop Drawing is required for the same item. B. Submit Record Data to provide documents that allow the Owner to: 1. Record the products incorporated into the Project for the Owner; 2. Review detailed information about the products regarding their fabrication, installation, commissioning, and testing; and 3. Provide replacement or repair of the products at some future date. C. Contractor's responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents is not relieved by the receipt or cursory review of Record Data. Contract modifications can only be approved by Change Order or Field Order. D. Provide various reports or other documents that Contract Documents require for record purposes. 26.02 Quality Assurance A. Submit legible, accurate, and complete documents presented in a clear, easily understood manner. Record Data not meeting these criteria will be rejected. 26.03 Contractor's Responsibilities A. Submit Record Data in accordance with SECTION 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. B. Include Record Data in the Schedule of Documents required by Article 24 to indicate the Record Data to be submitted, the dates on which documents are to be sent to the Designer for review, and proposed dates that the product will be incorporated into the Project. C. Complete the following before submitting Record Data: 1. Prepare Record Data and coordinate with Shop Drawings or Samples, other Record Data, and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents; 2. Determine and verify specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and similar information; 3. Determine and verify the suitability of materials and equipment offered with respect to the indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and 4. Determine and verify information relative to Contractor's responsibilities for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. General Conditions 007200- 117 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 D. Determine and verify: 1. Accurate field measurements, quantities, and dimensions are shown on the Record Data; 2. Location of existing structures, utilities, and equipment related to the Record Data have been shown and conflicts between the products existing structures, utilities, and equipment have been identified; 3. Conflicts that impact the installation of the products have been brought to the attention of the OPT through the Designer; 4. Record Data are complete for their intended purpose; and 5. Conflicts between the Record Data related to the various Subcontractors and Suppliers have been resolved. E. Review Record Data prior to submitting to the Designer. Certify that all Record Data has been reviewed by the Contractor and is in strict conformance with the Contract Documents as modified by Addenda, Change Order, Field Order, or Contract Amendment when submitting Record Data. 26.04 Record Data Requirements A. Include a complete description of the material or equipment to be furnished, including: 1. Type,dimensions,size,arrangement,model number,and operational parameters of the components; 2. Weights,gauges,materials of construction,external connections,anchors,and supports required; 3. All applicable standards such as ASTM or Federal specification numbers; 4. Fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, manufacturing instructions, templates, patterns, and coordination drawings; 5. Mix designs for concrete, asphalt or other materials proportioned for the Project; and 6. Complete and accurate field measurements for products which must fit existing conditions. Indicate on the document submittal that the measurements represent actual dimensions obtained at the Site. 26.05 Special Certifications and Reports A. Provide all required certifications with the Record Data as specified in the individual Specification Sections: 1. Certified Test Reports (CTR): A report prepared by an approved testing agency giving results of tests performed on products to indicate their compliance with the Specifications. This report is to demonstrate that the product when installed will meet the requirements and is part of the Record Data. Field tests may be performed by the Owner to determine that in place materials or products meet the same quality as indicated in the CTR submitted as part of the Record Data. General Conditions 007200- 118 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 26.06 Warranties and Guarantees A. Provide all required warranties, guarantees, and related documents with the Record Data. The effective date of warranties and guarantees will be the date of acceptance of the Work by the Owner. B. Identify all Extended Warranties, defined as any guarantee of performance for the product or system beyond the 1 year correction period described in the General Conditions. Issue the warranty certificate in the name of the Owner. Provide a Warranty Bond for Extended Warranties if required. C. Provide a copy of all warranties in a separate document in accordance with Article 29. 26.07 Record Data Submittal Procedures A. Submit Record Data through the Designer. Send all documents in digital format for processing. 1. Provide all information requested in the Record Data submittal form. Do not leave any blanks incomplete. If information is not applicable,enter NA in the space provided. The Record Data submittal form is to be the first document in the file. 2. Submit all documents in Portable Document Format(PDF). a. Create PDF documents from native format files unless files are only available from scanned documents. b. Rotate pages so that the top of each document appears at the top of the monitor screen when opened in PDF viewing software. C. Submit PDF document with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. d. Submit color PDF documents where color is required to interpret the Record Data. e. Create or convert documents to allow text to be selected for comments or searched using text search features. Run scanned documents through Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software if necessary. f. Flatten markups in documents to prevent markups made by Contractor from being moved or deleted. Flatten documents to allow markup recovery. g. Use software to reduce file size using default settings except the option for "Drop Metadata." Uncheck the "Drop Metadata" box when reducing file size. h. Add footers to each document with the Project name. 3. Submit each specific product, class of material, or product separately so these can be tracked and processed independently. Do not submit Record Data for more than one system in the same Record Data. 4. Submit items specified in different Specification Sections separately unless they are part of an integrated system. 5. Define abbreviations and symbols used in Record Data. General Conditions 007200- 119 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 a. Use terms and symbols in Record Data consistent with the Contract Drawings. b. Provide a list of abbreviations and their meaning as used in the Record Data. C. Provide a legend for symbols used on Record Data. 6. Mark Record Data to reference: a. Related Specification Sections, b. Drawing number and detail designation, C. Product designation or name, d. Schedule references, e. System into which the product is incorporated, and f. Location where the product is incorporated into the Project. B. Submit a Change Proposal per Article 12 to request modifications to the Contract Documents, including those for approval of"or equal" products when specifically allowed by the Contract Documents or as a substitution for specified products or procedures. Deviations from the Contract Documents can only be approved by a Modification. C. Complete the certification required by Paragraph 26.03. 26.08 Designer's Responsibilities A. Record Data will be received by the Designer, logged, and provided to Owner as the Project record. 1. Record Data may be reviewed to see that the information provided is adequate for the purpose intended. Record Data not meeting the requirements of Paragraph 26.02 may be rejected as unacceptable. 2. Record Data is not reviewed for compliance with the Contract Documents. Comments may be returned if deviations from the Contract Documents are noted during the cursory review performed to see that the information is adequate. 3. Contractor's responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents is not relieved by the review of Record Data. Contract modifications can only be approved by a Modification. B. Designer may take the following action in processing Record Data: 1. File Record Data as received if the cursory review indicates that the document meets the requirements of Paragraph 26.02. Document will be given the status of "Filed as Received" and no further action is required on that Record Data. 2. Reject the Record Data for one of the following reasons: a. The document submittal requirements of the Contract Documents indicatethatthe document submitted as Record Data should have been submitted as a Shop Drawing. The Record Data will be marked "Rejected" and "Submit Shop Drawing." No further action is required on this document as Record Data and the Record Data process will be closed. Resubmit the document as a Shop Drawing per Article 25. General Conditions 007200- 120 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 b. The cursory review indicates that the document does not meet the requirements of Paragraph 26.02. The Record Data will be marked "Rejected" and "Revise and Resubmit." Contractor is to resubmit the Record Data until it is acceptable and marked "Filed as Received." When Record Data is filed, no further action is required, and the Record Data process will be closed. C. The Record Data is not required by the Contract Documents nor is the Record Data applicable to the Project. The Record Data will be marked "Rejected" and "Cancel - Not Required." No further action is required,and the Record Data process will be closed. C. Contractor is to resubmit the Record Data until it is acceptable and marked "Filed as Received." ARTICLE 27—CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 27.01 Requirements A. Prepare and submit a Progress Schedule for the Work and update the schedule on a monthly basis for the duration of the Project. B. Provide schedule in adequate detail to allow Owner to monitor progress and to relate document processing to sequential activities of the Work. C. Incorporate and specifically designate the dates of anticipated submission of documents and the dates when documents must be returned to the Contractor into the schedule. D. Assume complete responsibility for maintaining the progress of the Work per the schedule submitted. E. Schedule Work based upon a six day work week. 27.02 Document Submittal A. Submit Progress Schedules in accordance with Article 24. B. Submit a preliminary schedule within 10 days after the Notice of Award. The schedule is to be available at the pre-construction conference. C. Submit a detailed schedule at least 10 days prior to the first payment request. D. Submit Progress Schedule updates monthly with Applications for Payment to indicate the progress made on the Project to that date. Failure to submit the schedule may cause delay in the review and approval of Applications for Payment. 27.03 Schedule Requirements A. Schedule is to be in adequate detail to: 1. Assure adequate planning, scheduling, and reporting during the execution of the Work; 2. Assure the coordination of the Work of the Contractor and the various Subcontractors and Suppliers; 3. Assist in monitoring the progress of the Work; and General Conditions 007200- 121 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 4. Assist in evaluating proposed changes to the Contract Times and Project schedule. B. Provide personnel with 5 years' minimum experience in scheduling construction work comparable to this Project. Prepare the schedule using acceptable scheduling software. C. Provide the schedule in the form of a computer generated critical path schedule which includes Work to be performed on the Project. It is intended that the schedule accomplish the following: 1. Give early warning of delays in time for correction. 2. Provide detailed plans for the execution of the Work in the form of future activities and events in sequential relationships. 3. Establish relationships of significant planned Work activities and provide a logical sequence for planned Work activities. 4. Provide continuous current status information. 5. Allow analysis of the Contractor's program for the completion of the Project. 6. Permit schedules to be revised when the existing schedule is not achievable. 7. Log the progress of the Work as it actually occurs. D. Prepare a time scaled CPM arrow or precedence diagram to indicate each activity and its start and stop dates. 1. Develop Milestone dates and Project completion dates to conform to time constraints, sequencing requirements and Contract completion date. 2. Use calendar day durations while accounting for holidays and weather conditions in the projection of the duration of each activity. 3. Clearly indicate the critical path for Work to complete the Project. E. Provide a time scaled horizontal bar chart which indicates graphically the Work scheduled at any time during the Project. The chart is to indicate: 1. Complete sequence of construction by activity; 2. Identification of the activity by structure, location, and type of Work; 3. Chronological order of the start of each item of Work; 4. The activity start and stop dates; 5. The activity duration; 6. Successor and predecessor relationships for each activity; 7. A clearly indicated single critical path; and 8. Projected percentage of completion, based on dollar value of the Work included in each activity as of the first day of each month. F. Provide a schedule incorporating the Schedule of Documents provided in accordance with Article 24 indicating: 1. Specific date each document is to be delivered to the Designer. 2. Specific date each document must be received in order to meet the proposed schedule. General Conditions 007200- 122 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 3. Allow a reasonable time to review documents, taking into consideration the size and complexity of the document, other documents being processed, and other factors that may affect review time. 4. Allow time for re-submission of each document. Contractor is responsible for delays associated with additional time required to review incomplete or erroneous documents and for time lost when documents are submitted for products that do not meet Specification requirements. 27.04 Schedule Revisions A. Revise the schedule if it appears that the schedule no longer represents the actual progress of the Work. 1. Submit a written report if the schedule indicates that the Project is more than 30 days behind schedule. The report is to include: a. Number of days behind schedule; b. Narrative description of the steps to be taken to bring the Project back on schedule; and C. Anticipated time required to bring the Project back on schedule. 2. Submit a revised schedule indicating the action that the Contractor proposes to take to bring the Project back on schedule. B. Revise the schedule to indicate any adjustments in Contract Times approved by Modification. 1. Include a revised schedule with Change Proposals if a change in Contract Times is requested. 2. OPT will deem any Change Proposal that does not have a revised schedule and request for a change in Contract Times as having no impact on the ability of the Contractor to complete the Project within the Contract Times. C. Updating the Project schedule to reflect actual progress is not considered a revision to the Project schedule. D. Applications for Payment may not be recommended for payment without a revised schedule and if required, the report indicating the Contractor's plan for bringing the Project back on schedule. 27.05 Float Time A. Define float time as the amount of time between the earliest start date and the latest start date of a chain of activities on the construction schedule. B. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either the Contractor or Owner. C. Where several subsystems each have a critical path,the subsystem with the longest time of completion is the critical path and float time is to be assigned to other subsystems. D. Contract Times cannot be changed by the submission of a schedule. Contract Times can only be modified by a Change Order or Contract Amendment. General Conditions 007200- 123 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 E. Schedule completion date must be the same as the Contract completion date. Time between the end of construction and the Contract completion date is float time. ARTICLE 28—VIDEO AND PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 28.01 Work Included A. Provide a video recording of the Site prior to the beginning of construction. 1. Record the condition of all existing facilities in or abutting the construction area (right- of-way)including but not limited to streets,curb and gutter, utilities,driveways,fencing, landscaping, etc. 2. Record after construction staking is complete but prior to any clearing. 3. Provide one copy of the recording, dated and labeled to the OAR before the start of construction. Provide additional recording as directed by the OAR if the recording provided is not considered suitable for the purpose of recording pre-existing conditions. B. Furnish an adequate number of photographs of the Site to clearly depict the completed Project. 1. Provide a minimum of ten different views. 2. Photograph a panoramic view of the entire Site. 3. Photograph all significant areas of completed construction. 4. Completion photographs are not to be taken until all construction trailers, excess materials,trash, and debris have been removed. 5. Employ a professional photographer approved by the OAR to photograph the Project. 6. Provide one aerial photograph of the Site from an angle and height to include the entire Site while providing adequate detail. C. All photographs, video recordings, and a digital copy of this media are to become the property of the Owner. Photographs or recordings may not be used for publication, or public or private display without the written consent of the Owner. 28.02 Quality Assurance A. Provide clear photographs and recordings taken with proper exposure. View photographs and recordings in the field and take new photographs or recordings immediately if photos of an adequate print quality cannot be produced or video quality is not adequate. Provide photographs with adequate quality and resolution to permit enlargements. 28.03 Document Submittal A. Submit photographic documentation as Record Data in accordance with Article 24. B. Submit two DVDs of the video recording as Record Data in accordance with Article 24. General Conditions 007200- 124 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 28.04 Photographs A. Provide photographs in digital format with a minimum resolution of 1280 x 960, accomplished without a digital zoom. B. Take photographs at locations acceptable to the OAR. C. Provide two color prints of each photograph and a digital copy on a DVD of each photograph taken. D. Identify each print on back with: 1. Project name. 2. Date,time, location, and orientation of the exposure. 3. Description of the subject of photograph. E. Submit photographs in clear plastic sheets designed for photographs. Place only one photograph in each sheet to allow the description on the back to be read without removing the photograph. F. Final photographs are to include two 8-by-10-inch glossy color prints for each of ten photographs selected by the OAR. These photographs are in addition to normal prints. 28.05 Video Recording A. Provide digital format on DVD that can be played with Windows Media Player in common format in full screen mode. B. Identify Project on video by audio or visual means. C. Video file size should not exceed 400 MB. D. Video resolution shall be 1080p. E. The quality of the video must be sufficient to determine the existing conditions of the construction area. Camera panning must be performed while at rest, do not pan the camera while walking or driving. Camera pans should be performed at intervals sufficient to clearly view the entire construction area. F. DVD shall be labeled with construction stationing and stationing should be called out, voice recorded, in the video. G. The entire construction area recording shall be submitted at once. Sections submitted separately will not be accepted. H. Pipeline projects should be recorded linearly from beginning to end. ARTICLE 29—EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT 29.01 Substantial Completion A. Notify the OAR that the Work or a designated portion of the Work is substantially complete per the General Conditions. Include a list of the items remaining to be completed or corrected before the Project will be considered to be complete. General Conditions 007200- 125 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 B. OPT will visit the Site to observe the Work within 30 days after notification is received to determine the status of the Project. C. OAR will notify the Contractor, within 120 days after notification, that the Work is either substantially complete or that additional Work must be performed before the Project will be considered substantially complete. 1. OAR will notify the Contractor of items that must be completed before the Project will be considered substantially complete. 2. Correct the noted deficiencies in the Work. 3. Notify the OAR when the items of Work in the OAR's notice have been completed. 4. OPT will revisit the Site and repeat the process. 5. OAR will issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion to the Contractor when the OPT considers the Project to be substantially complete. The Certificate will include a tentative list of items to be corrected before Final Payment will be recommended. 6. Review the list and notify the OAR of any objections to items on the list within 10 days after receiving the Certificate of Substantial Completion. 29.02 Final Inspections A. Notify the OAR when: 1. Work has been completed in compliance with the Contract Documents; 2. Equipment and systems have been tested per Contract Documents and are fully operational; 3. Final Operations and Maintenance Manuals have been provided to the Owner and all operator training has been completed; 4. Specified spare parts and special tools have been provided; and 5. Work is complete and ready for final inspection. B. OPT will visit the Site to determine if the Project is complete and ready for Final Payment within 30 days after the notice is received. C. Designer will notify the Contractor that the Project is complete or will notify the Contractor that Work is Defective. D. Take immediate steps to correct Defective Work. Notify the Designer when Defective Work has been corrected. OPT will visit the Site to determine if the Project is complete and the Work is acceptable. OAR will notify the Contractor that the Project is complete or will notify the Contractor that Work is Defective. E. Submit the Request for Final Payment with the closeout documents described in Paragraph 29.04 if notified that the Project is complete, and the Work is acceptable. 29.03 Reinspection Fees A. Owner may impose a Set-off against the Application for Payment in accordance with the General Conditions to compensate the OPT for additional visits to the Project if additional Work is required. General Conditions 007200- 126 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 29.04 Closeout Documents Submittal A. Record Documents per Article 20. B. Warranties and bonds. C. Equipment installation reports on equipment. D. Shop Drawings, Record Data, and other documents as required by the Contract Documents. E. Evidence of continuing insurance and bond coverage as required bythe Contract Documents. F. Final Photographs per Article 28. 29.05 Transfer of Utilities A. If applicable to the Project,transfer utilities to the Owner when the Certificate of Substantial Completion has been issued and the Work has been occupied by the Owner. B. Submit final meter readings for utilities and similar data as of the date the Owner occupied the Work. 29.06 Warranties, Bonds and Service Agreements A. Provide warranties, bonds, and service agreements required by the Contract Documents. B. The date for the start of warranties, bonds, and service agreements is established per the Contract Documents. C. Compile warranties, bonds, and service agreements and review these documents for compliance with the Contract Documents. 1. Provide a log of all equipment covered under the 1-year correction period specified in the Contract Documents and all products for which special or extended warranties or guarantees are provided. Index the log by Specification Section number on forms provided. Include items 2.e through 2.g below in the tabulation. 2. Provide a copy of specific warranties or guarantees under a tab indexed to the log. Each document is to include: a. A description of the product or Work item; b. The firm name with the name of the principal, address, and telephone number; C. Signature of the respective Supplier or Subcontractor to acknowledge existence of the warranty obligation for extended warranties and service agreements; d. Scope of warranty, bond, or service agreement; e. Indicate the start date for the correction period specified in the Contract Documents for each product and the date on which the specified correction period expires. f. Indicate the start date for extended warranties for each product and the date on which the specified extended warranties period expires. g. Start date, warranty or guarantee period, and expiration date for each warranty, bond, and service agreement; General Conditions 007200- 127 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 h. Procedures to be followed in the event of a failure; and i. Specific instances that might invalidate the warranty or bond. D. Submit digital copies of the documents to the Designer for review. E. Submit warranties, bonds, and service agreements within 10 days after equipment or components are placed in service. ARTICLE 30—MISCELLANEOUS 30.01 Computation of Times A. Exclude the first day and include the last day when determining dates for a period of time referred to in the Contract Documents by days. The last day of this period is to be omitted from the determination if it falls on a Sunday or a legal holiday. B. All references and conditions for a Calendar Day Contract in the Contract Documents apply for a Fixed Date Contract. A Fixed Date Contract is one in which the calendar dates for reaching Substantial Completion and/or final completion are specified in lieu of identifying the number of days involved. 30.02 Owner's Right to Audit Contractor's Records A. By execution of the Contract, Contractor grants Owner the right to audit, examine, inspect and/or copy, at Owner's election at all reasonable times during the term of this Contract and for a period of four (4) years following the completion or termination of the Work, all of Contractor's written and electronically stored records and billings relating to the performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. The audit, examination or inspection may be performed by an Owner designee,which may include its internal auditors or an outside representative engaged by Owner. Contractor agrees to retain its records for a minimum of four(4)years following termination of the Contract, unless there is an ongoing dispute under the Contract,then, such retention period must extend until final resolution of the dispute. As used in these General Conditions, "Contractor written and electronically stored records" include any and all information, materials and data of every kind and character generated as a result of the work under this Contract. Examples of Contractor written and electronically stored records include, but are not limited to: accounting data and reports, billings, books, general ledgers, cost ledgers, invoices, production sheets, documents, correspondence, meeting notes, subscriptions, agreements, purchase orders, leases, contracts, commitments, arrangements, notes, daily diaries, reports, drawings, receipts, vouchers, memoranda, time sheets, payroll records, policies, procedures, Subcontractor agreements, Supplier agreements, rental equipment proposals, federal and state tax filings for any issue in question, along with any and all other agreements, sources of information and matters that may, in Owner's sole judgment, have any bearing on or pertain to any matters, rights, duties or obligations under or covered by any Contract Documents. B. Owner agrees to exercise the right to audit, examine or inspect Contractor's records only during regular business hours. Contractor agrees to allow Owner and/or Owner's designee access to all of the Contractor's Records, Contractor's facilities, and current or former employees of Contractor, deemed necessary by Owner or its designee(s), to perform such audit, inspection or examination. Contractor also agrees to provide adequate and General Conditions 007200- 128 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 appropriate work space necessary for Owner or its designees to conduct such audits, inspections or examinations. C. Contractor must include this Paragraph 30.02 in any Subcontractor, supplier or vendor contract. 30.03 Independent Contractor A. Contractor is to perform its duties under this Contract as an independent contractor. The Contractor's Team and their personnel are not considered to be employees or agents of the Owner. Nothing in this Contract is to be interpreted as granting Contractor's Team the right or authority to make commitments for the Owner. This Contract does not constitute or create a joint venture, partnership or formal business organization of any kind. 30.04 Cumulative Remedies A. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies available to the Owner or Contractor by these General Conditions are in addition to, and are not a limitation of,the rights and remedies which are otherwise imposed or available by: 1. Laws or Regulations; 2. Special warranties or guarantees; or 3. Other provisions of the Contract Documents. B. The provisions of this Paragraph 30.04 are as effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty,obligation, right and remedy to which they apply. 30.05 Limitation of Damages A. Owner is not liable to Contractor for claims, costs, losses or damages sustained by Contractor's Team associated with other projects or anticipated projects. B. Contractor waives claims for consequential damages, incidental or special damages arising out of or relating to this Contract, whether the damages are claimed in contract, tort or on any other basis. 30.06 No Waiver A. The failure of Owner or Contractor to enforce any provision of this Contract does not constitute a waiver of that provision or affect the enforceability of that provision or the remainder of this Contract. 30.07 Severability A. If a court of competent jurisdiction renders a part of this Contract invalid or unenforceable, that part is to be severed and the remainder of this Contract continues in full force. General Conditions 007200- 129 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 30.08 Survival of Obligations A. Representations, indemnifications, warranties, guarantees and continuing obligations required by the Contract Documents survive completion and acceptance of the Work or termination of the Contract. 30.09 No Third Party Beneficiaries A. Nothing in this Contract can be construed to create rights in any entity other than the Owner and Contractor. Neither the Owner nor Contractor intends to create third party beneficiaries by entering into this Contract. 30.10 Assignment of Contract A. This Contract may not be assigned in whole or in part by the Contractor without the prior written consent of the Owner. 30.11 No Waiver of Sovereign Immunity A. The Owner has not waived its sovereign immunity by entering into and performing its obligations under this Contract. B. This Contract is to perform a governmental function solely for the public benefit. 30.12 Controlling Law A. This Contract is governed by the laws of the State of Texas without regard to its conflicts of laws. Venue for legal proceedings lies exclusively in Nueces County, Texas. Cases must be filed and tried in Nueces County and cannot be removed from Nueces County,Texas. 30.13 Conditions Precedent to Right to Sue A. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary,Contractor will have at least 90 days to give notice of a claim for damages as a condition precedent to the right to sue on the Contract, subject to the contractual Claims and Alternative Dispute Resolution processes set forth herein. 30.14 Waiver of Trial by Jury A. Owner and Contractor agree that they have knowingly waived and do hereby waive the right to trial by jury and have instead agreed, in the event of any litigation arising out of or connected to this Contract, to proceed with a trial before the court, unless both parties subsequently agree otherwise in writing. 30.15 Attorney Fees A. The Parties expressly agree that, in the event of litigation, all parties waive rights to payment of attorneys'fees that otherwise might be recoverable, pursuant to the Texas Civil Practice and Remedies Code Chapter 38, Texas Local Government Code §271.153, the Prompt Payment Act, common law or any other provision for payment of attorney's fees. General Conditions 007200- 130 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 30.16 Compliance with Laws A. Comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 as amended (ADA) and Texas Architectural Barriers Act and all regulations relating to either statute. B. No qualified person shall on the basis of race, color, religion, national origin, gender, age or disability be excluded from participation in, be denied the benefits of, or be subjected to discrimination under any program or activity which receives or benefits from federal financial assistance. C. Comply with all applicable federal, state and city laws, rules and regulations. D. Each applicable provision and clause required by law to be inserted into the Contract shall be deemed to be enacted herein,and the Contract shall be read and enforced as though each were physically included herein. 30.17 Enforcement A. The City Manager or designee and the City Attorney or designee are fully authorized and will have the right to enforce all legal rights and obligations under the Contract without further authorization from City Council. 30.18 Subject to Appropriation A. Funds are appropriated by the Owner on a yearly basis. If for any reason, funds are not appropriated in any given year, the Owner may direct immediate suspension or termination of the Contract with no additional liability to the Owner. If the Contractor is terminated or suspended and the Owner requests remobilization at a later date, the Contractor may request payment for reasonable demobilization/remobilization costs. Such costs shall be addressed through a Change Order to the Contract. Under no circumstances may a provision or obligation under this Contract be interpreted as contrary to this paragraph. 30.19 Contract Sum A. The Contract Sum is stated in the Contract and, including authorized adjustments, is the total maximum not-to-exceed amount payable by Owner to Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. Contractor accepts and agrees that all payments pursuant to this Contract are subject to the availability and appropriation of funds by the Corpus Christi City Council. If funds are not available and/or appropriated,this Contract shall immediately be terminated with no liability to any party to this Contract. 30.20 Contractor's Guarantee as Additional Remedy A. The Contractor's guarantee is a separate and additional remedy available to benefit the Owner. Neither the guarantee nor the expiration of the guarantee period will operate to reduce, release or relinquish any rights or remedies available to the Owner for any claims or causes of action against the Contractor or any other individual or entity. 30.21 Notices. A. Any notice required to be given to Owner under any provision in this Contract must include a copy to OAR by mail or e-mail. General Conditions 007200- 131 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 30.22 Public Information A. The requirements of Subchapter J, Chapter 552, Government Code, may apply to this contract, and Contractor agrees that the contract can be terminated if Contractor knowingly or intentionally fails to comply with a requirement of that subchapter. END OF SECTION General Conditions 007200- 132 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS and other provisions of the Contract Documents. All provisions not amended or supplemented in these Supplementary Conditions remain in effect. The terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated in the General Conditions. Additional terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated below. ARTICLE 1—DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY SC-1.01 DEFINED TERMS A. The members of the OPT as defined in Paragraph 1.01.A.41 consists of the following organizations: City of Corpus Christi,Texas Urban Engineering Bath Engineering Corporation Wilkerson & Sanders, Inc. ARTICLE 4—COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK SC-4.04 DELAYS IN CONTRACTOR'S PROGRESS A. The allocation for delays in the Contractor's progress for rain days as set forth in General Conditions Paragraph 4.04.D are to be determined as follows: 1. Include rain days in developing the schedule for construction. Schedule construction so that the Work will be completed within the Contract Times assuming that these rain days will occur. Incorporate residual impacts following rain days such as limited access to and within the Site, inability to work due to wet or muddy Site conditions, delays in delivery of equipment and materials, and other impacts related to rain days when developing the schedule for construction. Include all costs associated with these rain days and residual impacts in the Contract Price. 2. A rain day is defined as any day in which the amount of rain measured by the National Weather Services at the Power Street Stormwater Pump Station is 0.50 inch or greater. Records indicate the following average number of rain days for each month: Month Day Month Days January 3 July 3 February 3 August 4 March 2 September 7 April 3 October 4 May 4 November 3 June 4 December 3 Supplementary Conditions 007300- 1 Citywide Lift Station Repairs 2018—2019 (Williams L.S.) Project No. 21143 Rev 12/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 3. A total of 43 rain days have been set for this Project. An extension of time due to rain days will be considered only after 43 rain days have been exceeded in a calendar year and the OAR has determined that a detrimental impact to the construction schedule resulted from the excessive rainfall. Rain days are to be incorporated into the schedule and unused rain days will be considered float time which may be consumed by the Owner or Contractor in delay claims. ARTICLE 5 — AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS SC-5.03 SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS A. This Supplementary Condition identifies documents referenced in General Conditions Paragraph 5.03.A which describe subsurface and physical conditions. 1. Geotechnical Reports include the following: - None B. Delete Paragraph 5.03 entirely and insert the following: "5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions A. No reports of explorations or tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the Site, or drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site, are known to Owner." SC-5.06 HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS AT SITE A. This Supplementary Condition identifies documents referenced in General Conditions Paragraph 5.06 which describe Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site. 1. Environmental Reports include the following: - None ARTICLE 6—BONDS AND INSURANCE SC-6.03 REQUIRED MINIMUM INSURANCE COVERAGE INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE AMOUNTS Provide the insurance coverage for at least the following amounts unless greater amounts are required by Laws and Regulations: Type of Insurance Minimum Insurance Coverage Commercial General Liability including 1. Commercial Form 2. Premises—Completed Operations 3. Explosions and Collapse Hazard $1,000,000 Per Occurrence 4. Underground Hazard $2,000,000 Aggregate 5. Products/Completed Operations Hazard 6. Contractual Liability 7. Broad Form Property Damage Supplementary Conditions 007300-2 Citywide Lift Station Repairs 2018—2019 (Williams L.S.) Project No. 21143 Rev 12/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 8. Independent Contractors 9. Personal &Advertising Injury Business Automobile Liability-Owned, Non- $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit Owned, Rented and Leased Workers' Compensation Statutory Employer's Liability $500,000/500,000/500,000 Excess Liability/Umbrella Liability $1,000,000 Per Occurrence Required if Contract Price>$5,000,000 Contractor's Pollution Liability / $1,000,000 Per Claim Environmental Impairment Coverage Not limited to sudden and accidental ❑ Required ® ❑ Not Required discharge. To include long-term environmental impact for the disposal of pollutants/contaminants. Required if excavation>3 ft. Builder's Risk(All Perils including Collapse) Equal to Full Replacement Cost of Structure and Contents Required for vertical structures and bridges ❑ Required Not Required Installation Floater Equal to Contract Price Required if installing city-owned equipment ❑ Required Not Required ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES SC-7.02 LABOR; WORKING HOURS B. Perform Work at the Site during regular working hours except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of person or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent to the Site and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents. Regular working hours are between 6:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m. Monday through Saturday unless other times are specifically authorized in writing by OAR. SC-7.04 CONCERNING SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS,AND OTHERS A. Add the following sentence to the end of Paragraph 7.04.A: "The Contractor must perform at least 50 percent of the Work, measured as a percentage of the Contract Price, using its own employees." Supplementary Conditions 007300-3 Citywide Lift Station Repairs 2018—2019 (Williams L.S.) Project No. 21143 Rev 12/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 ARTICLE 14—PREVAILING WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS SC-14.04 PREVAILING WAGE RATES A. The minimum rates for various labor classifications as established by the Owner are shown below: Wage Determination Construction Type Project Type (WD) No TX21 Heavy Heavy Construction Projects (including Sewer and Water Line Construction and Drainage Projects) TX288 Building Building Construction Projects (does not include single family homes or apartments up to and including 4 stories) Supplementary Conditions 007300-4 Citywide Lift Station Repairs 2018—2019 (Williams L.S.) Project No. 21143 Rev 12/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 "General Decision Number: TX20210021 01/01/2021 Superseded General Decision Number: TX20200021 State: Texas Construction Type: Heavy Counties: Nueces and San Patricio Counties in Texas. HEAVY CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (including Sewer and Water Line Construction and Drainage Projects) Note: Under Executive Order(EO) 13658, an hourly minimum wage of$10.95 for calendar year 2021 applies to all contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and any solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2015. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must pay all workers in any classification listed on this wage determination at least $10.95 per hour(or the applicable wage rate listed on this wage determination, if it is higher) for all hours spent performing on the contract in calendar year 2021. If this contract is covered by the EO and a classification considered necessary for performance of work on the contract does not appear on this wage determination, the contractor must pay workers in that classification at least the wage rate determined through the conformance process set forth in 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(ii) (or the EO minimum wage rate, if it is higher than the conformed wage rate). The EO minimum wage rate will be adjusted annually. Please note that this EO applies to the above-mentioned types of contracts entered into by the federal government that are subject to the Davis-Bacon Act itself, but it does not apply to contracts subject only to the Davis-Bacon Related Acts, including those set forth at 29 CFR 5.1(a)(2)-(60). Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. Modification Number Publication Date 0 01/01/2021 * SUTX1987-001 12/01/1987 Rates Fringes file:///C/Users/elsak/Desktop/tx21.txt[9/23/2021 8:14:21 PM] DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 CARPENTER(Excluding Form Setting).........................$ 9.05 Concrete Finisher................$ 7.56 ELECTRICIAN......................$ 13.37 2.58 Laborers: Common......................$ 7.25 Utility.....................$ 7.68 Power equipment operators: Backhoe.....................$ 9.21 Motor Grader................$ 8.72 ---------------------------------------------------------------- WELDERS -Receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental. ------------------------------------------------------------ Note: Executive Order(EO) 13706, Establishing Paid Sick Leave for Federal Contractors applies to all contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and any solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2017. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must provide employees with 1 hour of paid sick leave for every 30 hours they work, up to 56 hours of paid sick leave each year. Employees must be permitted to use paid sick leave for their own illness, injury or other health-related needs, including preventive care; to assist a family member(or person who is like family to the employee)who is ill, injured, or has other health-related needs, including preventive care; or for reasons resulting from, or to assist a family member(or person who is like family to the employee)who is a victim of, domestic violence, sexual assault, or stalking. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii)). ---------------------------------------------------------------- The body of each wage determination lists the classification and wage rates that have been found to be prevailing for the cited type(s) of construction in the area covered by the wage determination. The classifications are listed in alphabetical order of""identifiers"" that indicate whether the particular rate is a union rate (current union negotiated rate for local), file:///C/Users/elsak/Desktop/tx21.txt[9/23/2021 8:14:21 PM] DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 a survey rate (weighted average rate) or a union average rate (weighted union average rate). Union Rate Identifiers A four letter classification abbreviation identifier enclosed in dotted lines beginning with characters other than ""SU"' or ""UAVG"" denotes that the union classification and rate were prevailing for that classification in the survey. Example: PLUM0198-005 07/01/2014. PLUM is an abbreviation identifier of the union which prevailed in the survey for this classification, which in this example would be Plumbers. 0198 indicates the local union number or district council number where applicable, i.e., Plumbers Local 0198. The next number, 005 in the example, is an internal number used in processing the wage determination. 07/01/2014 is the effective date of the most current negotiated rate, which in this example is July 1, 2014. Union prevailing wage rates are updated to reflect all rate changes in the collective bargaining agreement(CBA) governing this classification and rate. Survey Rate Identifiers Classifications listed under the ""SU"' identifier indicate that no one rate prevailed for this classification in the survey and the published rate is derived by computing a weighted average rate based on all the rates reported in the survey for that classification. As this weighted average rate includes all rates reported in the survey, it may include both union and non-union rates. Example: SLTLA2012-007 5/13/2014. SU indicates the rates are survey rates based on a weighted average calculation of rates and are not majority rates. LA indicates the State of Louisiana. 2012 is the year of survey on which these classifications and rates are based. The next number, 007 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 5/13/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. Survey wage rates are not updated and remain in effect until a new survey is conducted. Union Average Rate Identifiers Classification(s)listed under the UAVG identifier indicate that no single majority rate prevailed for those classifications; however, 100% of the data reported for the classifications was union data. EXAMPLE: UAVG-OH-0010 08/29/2014. UAVG indicates that the rate is a weighted union average rate. OH indicates the state. The next number, 0010 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 08/29/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. file:///C/Users/elsak/Desktop/tx21.txt[9/23/2021 8:14:21 PM] DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 A UAVG rate will be updated once a year, usually in January of each year, to reflect a weighted average of the current negotiated/CBA rate of the union locals from which the rate is based. ---------------------------------------------------------------- WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 1.)Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can be: * an existing published wage determination * a survey underlying a wage determination * a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter * a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour Regional Office for the area in which the survey was conducted because those Regional Offices have responsibility for the Davis-Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2.) and 3.) should be followed. With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal process described here, initial contact should be with the Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to: Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 2.)If the answer to the question in 1.)is yes, then an interested party (those affected by the action) can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to: Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party's position and by any information (wage payment data, project description, area practice material, etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue. file:///C/Users/elsak/Desktop/tx21.txt[9/23/2021 8:14:21 PM] DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 3.)If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to: Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 4.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final. ------------------------------------------------------------ END OF GENERAL DECISION if file:///C/Users/elsak/Desktop/tx21.txt[9/23/2021 8:14:21 PM] DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 "General Decision Number: TX20210288 01/01/2021 Superseded General Decision Number: TX20200288 State: Texas Construction Type: Building Counties: Aransas, Nueces and San Patricio Counties in Texas. BUILDING CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (does not include single family homes or apartments up to and including 4 stories). Note: Under Executive Order(EO) 13658, an hourly minimum wage of$10.95 for calendar year 2021 applies to all contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and any solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2015. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must pay all workers in any classification listed on this wage determination at least $10.95 per hour(or the applicable wage rate listed on this wage determination, if it is higher) for all hours spent performing on the contract in calendar year 2021. If this contract is covered by the EO and a classification considered necessary for performance of work on the contract does not appear on this wage determination, the contractor must pay workers in that classification at least the wage rate determined through the conformance process set forth in 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(ii) (or the EO minimum wage rate, if it is higher than the conformed wage rate). The EO minimum wage rate will be adjusted annually. Please note that this EO applies to the above-mentioned types of contracts entered into by the federal government that are subject to the Davis-Bacon Act itself, but it does not apply to contracts subject only to the Davis-Bacon Related Acts, including those set forth at 29 CFR 5.1(a)(2)-(60). Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. Modification Number Publication Date 0 01/01/2021 BOIL0074-003 01/01/2017 Rates Fringes BOILERMAKER......................$ 28.00 22.35 ---------------------------------------------------------------- * ELECO278-002 03/20/2020 tile:///C/Users/elsak/Desktop/tx288.txt[9/23/2021 8:15:50 PM] DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 Rates Fringes ELECTRICIAN......................$ 26.25 8.24 ---------------------------------------------------------------- * ENGI0178-005 06/01/2020 Rates Fringes POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR (1) Tower Crane.............$ 32.85 13.10 (2) Cranes with Pile Driving or Caisson Attachment and Hydraulic Crane 60 tons and above.....$ 28.75 10.60 (3)Hydraulic cranes 59 Tons and under..............$ 32.35 13.10 ---------------------------------------------------------------- * IRON0084-011 06/01/2020 Rates Fringes IRONWORKER, ORNAMENTAL...........$ 25.26 7.13 ---------------------------------------------------------------- SUTX2014-068 07/21/2014 Rates Fringes BRICKLAYER.......................$ 20.04 0.00 CARPENTER........................$ 15.21 0.00 CEMENT MASON/CONCRETE FINISHER...$ 15.33 0.00 INSULATOR- MECHANICAL (Duct, Pipe & Mechanical System Insulation)...............$ 19.77 7.13 IRONWORKER, REINFORCING..........$ 12.27 0.00 IRONWORKER, STRUCTURAL...........$ 22.16 5.26 LABORER: Common or General......$ 9.68 0.00 LABORER: Mason Tender -Brick...$ 11.36 0.00 LABORER: Mason Tender - Cement/Concrete..................$ 10.58 0.00 LABORER: Pipelayer..............$ 12.49 2.13 LABORER: Roof Tearoff..........$ 11.28 0.00 OPERATOR: Backhoe/Excavator/Trackhoe.......$ 14.25 0.00 tile:///C/Users/elsak/Desktop/tx288.txt[9/23/2021 8:15:50 PM] DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 OPERATOR: Bobcat/Skid Steer/Skid Loader................$ 13.93 0.00 OPERATOR: Bulldozer.............$ 18.29 1.31 OPERATOR: Drill.................$ 16.22 0.34 OPERATOR: Forklift..............$ 14.83 0.00 OPERATOR: Grader/Blade..........$ 13.37 0.00 OPERATOR: Loader................$ 13.55 0.94 OPERATOR: Mechanic..............$ 17.52 3.33 OPERATOR: Paver (Asphalt, Aggregate, and Concrete).........$ 16.03 0.00 OPERATOR: Roller................$ 12.70 0.00 PAINTER(Brush, Roller, and Spray)...........................$ 14.45 0.00 PIPEFITTER.......................$ 25.80 8.55 PLUMBER..........................$ 25.64 8.16 ROOFER...........................$ 13.75 0.00 SHEET METAL WORKER(HVAC Duct Installation Only)...............$ 22.73 7.52 SHEET METAL WORKER, Excludes HVAC Duct Installation...........$ 21.13 6.53 TILE FINISHER....................$ 11.22 0.00 TILE SETTER......................$ 14.74 0.00 TRUCK DRIVER: Dump Truck........$ 12.39 1.18 TRUCK DRIVER: Flatbed Truck.....$ 19.65 8.57 TRUCK DRIVER: Semi-Trailer Truck............................$ 12.50 0.00 TRUCK DRIVER: Water Truck.......$ 12.00 4.11 ---------------------------------------------------------------- WELDERS -Receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental. ------------------------------------------------------------ tile:///C/Users/elsak/Desktop/tx288.txt[9/23/2021 8:15:50 PM] DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 Note: Executive Order(EO) 13706, Establishing Paid Sick Leave for Federal Contractors applies to all contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and any solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2017. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must provide employees with 1 hour of paid sick leave for every 30 hours they work, up to 56 hours of paid sick leave each year. Employees must be permitted to use paid sick leave for their own illness, injury or other health-related needs, including preventive care; to assist a family member(or person who is like family to the employee)who is ill, injured, or has other health-related needs, including preventive care; or for reasons resulting from, or to assist a family member(or person who is like family to the employee)who is a victim of, domestic violence, sexual assault, or stalking. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii)). ---------------------------------------------------------------- The body of each wage determination lists the classification and wage rates that have been found to be prevailing for the cited type(s) of construction in the area covered by the wage determination. The classifications are listed in alphabetical order of""identifiers"" that indicate whether the particular rate is a union rate (current union negotiated rate for local), a survey rate (weighted average rate) or a union average rate (weighted union average rate). Union Rate Identifiers A four letter classification abbreviation identifier enclosed in dotted lines beginning with characters other than ""SU"' or ""UAVG"" denotes that the union classification and rate were prevailing for that classification in the survey. Example: PLUM0198-005 07/01/2014. PLUM is an abbreviation identifier of the union which prevailed in the survey for this classification, which in this example would be Plumbers. 0198 indicates the local union number or district council number where applicable, i.e., Plumbers Local 0198. The next number, 005 in the example, is an internal number used in processing the wage determination. 07/01/2014 is the effective date of the most current negotiated rate, which in this example is July 1, 2014. Union prevailing wage rates are updated to reflect all rate file:///C/Users/elsak/Desktop/tx288.txt[9/23/2021 8:15:50 PM] DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 changes in the collective bargaining agreement(CBA) governing this classification and rate. Survey Rate Identifiers Classifications listed under the ""SU"' identifier indicate that no one rate prevailed for this classification in the survey and the published rate is derived by computing a weighted average rate based on all the rates reported in the survey for that classification. As this weighted average rate includes all rates reported in the survey, it may include both union and non-union rates. Example: SLTLA2012-007 5/13/2014. SU indicates the rates are survey rates based on a weighted average calculation of rates and are not majority rates. LA indicates the State of Louisiana. 2012 is the year of survey on which these classifications and rates are based. The next number, 007 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 5/13/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. Survey wage rates are not updated and remain in effect until a new survey is conducted. Union Average Rate Identifiers Classification(s)listed under the UAVG identifier indicate that no single majority rate prevailed for those classifications; however, 100% of the data reported for the classifications was union data. EXAMPLE: UAVG-OH-0010 08/29/2014. UAVG indicates that the rate is a weighted union average rate. OH indicates the state. The next number, 0010 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 08/29/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. A UAVG rate will be updated once a year, usually in January of each year, to reflect a weighted average of the current negotiated/CBA rate of the union locals from which the rate is based. ---------------------------------------------------------------- WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 1.)Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can be: * an existing published wage determination * a survey underlying a wage determination * a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter * a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling file:///C/Users/elsak/Desktop/tx288.txt[9/23/2021 8:15:50 PM] DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour Regional Office for the area in which the survey was conducted because those Regional Offices have responsibility for the Davis-Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2.) and 3.) should be followed. With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal process described here, initial contact should be with the Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to: Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 2.)If the answer to the question in 1.)is yes, then an interested party (those affected by the action) can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to: Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party's position and by any information (wage payment data, project description, area practice material, etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue. 3.)If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to: Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 4.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final. ------------------------------------------------------------ END OF GENERAL DECISION if file:///C/Users/elsak/Desktop/tx288.txt[9/23/2021 8:15:50 PM] DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 ARTICLE 19—PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION SC-19.21 COOPERATION WITH PUBLIC AGENCIES A. For the Contractor's convenience,the following telephone numbers are listed: Public Agencies/Contacts Phone Number City Engineer 361-826-3500 Urban Engineering 361-854-3101 Brian D. Wik, P. E. Traffic Engineering 361-826-3547 Police Department 361-882-2600 Water/Wastewater/Stormwater 361-826-1800 (361-826-1818 after hours) Gas Department 361-885-6900 (361-885-6942 after hours) Parks& Recreation Department 361-826-3461 Street Department 361-826-1875 City Street Div.for Traffic Signals 361-826-1610 Solid Waste& Brush 361-826-1973 IT Department(City Fiber) 361-826-1956 AEP 1-877-373-4858 AT&T 361-881-2511 (1-800-824-4424 after hours) Grande Communications 1-866-247-2633 Spectrum Communications 1-800-892-4357 Crown Castle Communications 1-888-632-0931 (Network Operations Center) Centuryl-ink 361-208-0730 Windstream 1-800-600-5050 Regional Transportation Authority 361-289-2712 Port of Corpus Christi Authority Engr. 361-882-5633 TxDOT Area Office 361-808-2500 Corpus Christi ISD 361-695-7200 Supplementary Conditions 007300-5 Citywide Lift Station Repairs 2018—2019 (Williams L.S.) Project No. 21143 Rev 12/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 ARTICLE 25—SHOP DRAWINGS SC-25.03 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Provide Shop Drawings for the following items: Specification Section Shop Drawing Description SEE SECTION 0133 01—SUBMITTAL REGISTER SC-25.12 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS B. Pay for excessive review of Shop Drawings. 1. Cost for additional review time will be billed to the Owner by the Designer for the actual hours required for the review of Shop Drawings by Designer and in accordance with the rates listed below: ARTICLE 26—RECORD DATA SC-26.03 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Submit Record Data for the following items: Specification Section Record Data Description 00 72 00—ART 26 Record Drawing for Entire Project Various See Section 0133 01—Submittal Register END OF SECTION Supplementary Conditions 007300-6 Citywide Lift Station Repairs 2018—2019 (Williams L.S.) Project No. 21143 Rev 12/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 011100 SUMMARY OF WORK 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Construct Work as described in the Contract Documents. 1. Provide the materials, equipment, and incidentals required to make the Project completely and fully useable. 2. Provide the labor, equipment, tools, and consumable supplies required for a complete Project. 3. The Contract Documents do not indicate or describe all of the Work required to complete the Project. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the OAR. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Work is described in general, non-inclusive terms as: 1. This project consists of the rehabilitation of one lift stations which requires temporary control of flow pumping,the replacements of suction and discharge piping, plug valves, check valves, pumps,concrete pump bases,pump controls,automatic transfer switches, main electrical disconnects, HVAC, new chainlink fencing, concrete driveway, pipe painting, temporary traffic control, hoists, bridge cranes, odor control, and miscellaneous items of work to complete the project in accordance with the plans and specifications. WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS B. The following items of work are not included in this Contract, but may impact construction scheduling and completion: 1. NONE. C. In the case of a disagreement between the above list and those specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents,the Contractor is to base his Proposal on the most expensive listing. D. Completion of the Work described in this Contract may impact the construction and testing of the items listed above. 1. Coordinate construction activities through the OAR. 2. Pay claims for damages which result from the late completion of the Project or any specified Milestones. 1.03 WORK BY OWNER A. The Owner plans to perform the following items of work which are not included in this Contract, but may impact the construction scheduling and completion: 1. NONE. Summary of Work 011100- 1 Citywide Lift Station Repairs 2018-2019 (Williams L.S.)- Project No. 21143 Rev 10/2018 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 B. Completion of the Work described in this Contract may impact the construction of the items listed above. 1. Coordinate construction activities through the OAR. 2. Pay claims for damages which result from the late completion of the Project or any specified Milestones. C. Owner will provide normal operation and maintenance of the existing facilities during construction, unless otherwise stated. 1.04 CONSTRUCTION OF UTILITIES A. Pay for temporary power, including but not limited to construction cost, meter connection fees, and permits. 1.05 USE PRIOR TO FINAL COMPLETION A. Owner has the right to use or operate any portion of the Project that is ready for use after notifying the Contractor of its intent to do so. B. The execution of Bonds is understood to indicate the consent of the surety to these provisions for use of the Project. C. Provide an endorsement from the insurance carrier permitting use of Project during the remaining period of construction. D. Conduct operations to insure the least inconvenience to the Owner and general public. 2.00 PRODUCTS(NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Summary of Work 011100-2 Citywide Lift Station Repairs 2018-2019 (Williams L.S.)- Project No. 21143 Rev 10/2018 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 01 23 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS A. Alternates: 1. This Section describes each alternate by number and describes the basic changes to be incorporated into the Work when this alternate is made a part of the Work in the Agreement. 2. Drawings and Specifications will outline the extent of Work to be included in the alternate Contract Price. 3. Coordinate related Work and modify surrounding Work as required to properly integrate the Work under each alternate,and provide a complete and functional Project as required by the Contract Documents. 4. Bids for alternates may be accepted or rejected at the option of the Owner. 5. Owner may incorporate these alternates in the Contract when executed, or may issue a Change Order to incorporate these alternates within 120 days at the prices offered in the Bid, unless noted otherwise. A Request for a Change Proposal may be issued after 120 days or other designated time period to negotiate a new price for incorporating the Work into the Project. B. The Bid Items described as "Allocation" have been set as noted in Section 00 30 01 Bid Form and shall be included in the Total Base Bid of the Bid Form for each Bidder. These Allocation may be used at the Owner's discretion in the event that unforeseen conditions or conflicts are encountered during construction that warrants the use of the Allocation funds. If the use of Allocation funds becomes necessary,the OAR will provide written authorization at a cost negotiated between Owner and Contractor, using unit prices in the Bid Form when applicable. No work is to be performed under the Allocation items without written authorization from the OAR. There is no guarantee that any of these funds will need to be used during the course of the Work. 1.02 DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS A. Provide documents for materials furnished as part of the alternate in accordance with Article 24 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. 1.03 DESCRIPTION OF ALTERNATES- NONE 1.04 DESCRIPTION OF ALLOCATION A. Allocation A2—Bonds and Insurance: 1. A maximum of 2%of the bid price to be used for the purchase of bonds and insurance required for the Project. Alternates and Allowances 012310- 1 Citywide Lift Station Repairs 2018-2019 (Williams L.S.)- Project No.21143 Rev 5/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 B. Allocation C1—Utility Unforeseen Allocation: 1. The AL bid item described as "Utility Unforeseen Allocation" has been set as noted and shall be included in the Total Base Bid for each Bidder. This allocation may be used at the CAR's discretion should an unanticipated adjustment of a utility, unknown structure or similar situation warrant the use of the allocation funds. Sound the use of funds from the "Utility Unforeseen Allocation" become necessary, the OAR will provide written authorization at a cost negotiated between the City and the Contractor. Payment shall be negotiated for each circumstance.There is no guarantee that any of these funds will need to be used throughout the course of the work. C. Allocation C2—Force Main Dewatering Allocation: 1. The AL bid item described as"Force Main Dewatering Allocation" has been set as noted and shall be included in the Total Base Bid for each Bidder.This item shall be measured for payment by the allocation and shall include but is not limited to all materials, labor and equipment required to provide the Force Main Dewatering Allocation as identified in the plans and specifications. D. Allocation C3—Building Permits Allocation: 1. The AL item described as "Building Permit Allocation" has been set as noted and shall be included in the Total Base Bid for each Bidder. This allocation shall be used for the payment of the Construction Permit and Municipal Solid Waste fees required to be paid by the Contractor for this project (Allocation does not cover the disposal/tipping fee at the landfill). Payment to the Contractor shall be made strictly on the actual amount of the calculated fee and payment made to the City Development Services Department. There is no guarantee that all of these funds will need to be used to cover the cost of the Building Permit Fee. E. Allocation C4—AEP Allocation: 1. The AL item described as "AEP Allocation" has been set as noted and shall be included in the Total Base Bid for each Bidder. This allocation shall be used for the payment of the cost for AEP (Local Power Company) to provide the modifications to incoming primary power supply to the plant required for this project. Contractor shall coordinate with AEP for scheduling this work. Payment to the Contractor for AEP's cost shall be made strictly on the actual amount of invoices(s)from AEP. There is no guarantee that all of these funds will need to be used to cover the cost of AEP's cost. F. Allocation C5— Building Improvement Allocation: 1. The AL item described as "Building Improvement Allocation" has been set as noted and shall be included in the Total Base Bid for each Bidder. This allocation shall be used for the cost of any additional building improvements identified in the field. This item shall be measured for payment by the allocation and shall include but is not limited to all materials, labor and equipment required to provide the building improvements identified in the field. Alternates and Allowances 012310-2 Citywide Lift Station Repairs 2018-2019 (Williams L.S.)- Project No.21143 Rev 5/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 2.00 PRODUCTS(NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Alternates and Allowances 012310-3 Citywide Lift Station Repairs 2018-2019 (Williams L.S.)- Project No.21143 Rev 5/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 01 29 01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENTS ON LUMP SUM ITEMS A. Include all cost for completing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for lump sum payment items. Include all direct cost for the Work associated with that lump sum item and a proportionate amount for the indirect costs as described in Article 17 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS for each lump sum item. Include cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the lump sum price. B. Measurement for progress payments will be made on the basis of the earned value for each item shown as a percentage of the cost for the lump sum item as described in Article 17 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. Payment at Final Completion will be equal to the total lump sum amount for that item. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENTS ON UNIT PRICE ITEMS A. Include all cost for completing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents in unit price payment items. Include all direct cost for the Work associated with that unit price item and a proportionate amount for the indirect costs as described in Article 17 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS for each unit price item. Include cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the unit price. B. Measurement for payments will be made only for the actual measured and/or computed length, area, solid contents, number, and weight, unless other provisions are made in the Contract Documents. Payment on a unit price basis will not be made for Work outside finished dimensions shown in the Contract Documents. Include cost for waste, overages, and tolerances in the unit price for that line item. Measurement will be as indicated for each unit price item. 1.03 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT FOR BASE BID ITEMS A. Bid Item A-1—Mobilization (Maximum 5%): 1. Include the following costs in this Bid item: a. Transportation and setup for equipment; b. Transportation and/or erection of all field offices, sheds, and storage facilities; C. Salaries for preparation of documents required before the first Application for Payment; d. Salaries for field personnel assigned to the Project related to the mobilization of the Project; e. Demobilization; and f. Mobilization may not exceed 5 percent of the total Contract Price. Measurement and Basis for Payment 0129 01- 1 Citywide Life Station Repairs 2018-2019(Williams L.S.)- Project No. 21143 Rev 5/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 2. Measurement for payment will be made per lump sum on the following basis: When at least 5% of the adjusted contract amount for construction is earned, 75% of the mobilization lump sum bid amount will be eligible for payment, minus retainage. Upon substantial completion of all work under this Contract and removal of all equipment and materials from the Project site, the remaining 25% of the mobilization lump sum bid amount will be eligible for payment, minus retainage. B. Bid Item A-2—Bonds and Insurance (Maximum Allocation of 2%) 1. Payment shall include all bonds and insurance required under the Contract Documents. 2. Payment for bonds and insurance will be based on the receipt of documentation of actual costs. Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence of the rate or rates paid for all bonds and insurance. Contractor will be reimbursed for the actual cost of unique insurance as required and obtained specifically for this Project, not including the routine and general company insurance policies that are maintained for the course of conducting normal business operations. Contractor will be reimbursed for the actual cost of project specific bonds and insurance, not to exceed the bid amount or the verifiable costs of Project specific bonds and insurance incurred by the Contractor. C. Bid Item B-1 — Dry Pit Submersible Pumps (Four Main & One Jockey) (Pre-Selected and as described in Specification 1E24): 1. Lump Sum 2. This item shall be measured for payment by the lump sum and shall include but is not limited to all materials,labor and equipment required to provide the Dry Pit Submersible Pumps as identified in the plans and specifications. D. Bid Item B-2 — Lift Station Improvements (All work for the improvements included in the Contract Documents that are not specifically described in another bid item): 1. Lump Sum 2. This item shall be measured for payment by the lump sum and shall include but is not limited to all materials, labor and equipment required to provide the Lift Station Improvements as identified in the plans and specifications. E. Bid Item B-3—Electrical Improvements (All work for the improvements included in the Contract Documents that are not specifically described in another bid item): 1. Lump Sum 1. This item shall be measured for payment by the lump sum and shall include but is not limited to all materials, labor and equipment required to provide the Electrical portion of the project per plans and specifications and obtain electrical permit from City (one permit is required for entire project). F. Bid Item B-4—HVAC System: 1. Lump Sum 2. This item shall be measured for payment by the lump sum and shall include but is not limited to all materials, labor and equipment required to provide the HVAC System portion of the project per plans and specifications. Measurement and Basis for Payment 0129 01-2 Citywide Life Station Repairs 2018-2019(Williams L.S.)- Project No. 21143 Rev 5/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 G. Bid Item B-5—Control of Flow: 1. Lump Sum 2. This item shall be measured for payment by the lump sum and shall include but is not limited to all materials, labor and equipment required to provide the Control of Flow piping and pumping portion of the project per plans and specifications, and as outline in Specification 13C1.8. H. Bid Item B-6—Wet Well Cleaning: 1. Lump Sum 2. This item shall be measured for payment by the lump sum and shall include but is not limited to all materials, labor and equipment required to provide the Wet Well Cleaning as identified in the plans and specifications. I. Bid Item B-7—Odor Control: 1. Lump Sum 2. This item shall be measured for payment by the lump sum and shall include but is not limited to all materials, labor and equipment required to provide the Odor Control as identified in the plans and specifications. J. Bid Item B-15—Temporary Traffic Control: 1. Lump Sum 2. This item shall be measured for payment by the lump sum and shall include but is not limited to all materials, labor and equipment required to provide the Temporary Traffic Control as identified in the plans and specifications. K. Bid Item C-1—Utility Unforeseen Allocation: 1. Allocation 2. The Allocation bid item described as "Utility Unforeseen Improvements" has been set as noted and shall be included in the Total Base Bid for each Bidder. This allocation may be used at the OAR's discretion should an unanticipated adjustment of a utility, unknown structure or similar situation warrant the use of the allocation funds. Should the use of funds from the "Utility Unforeseen Improvements" become necessary, the OAR will provide written authorization at a cost negotiated between the City and the Contractor. Payment shall be negotiated for each circumstance. There is no guarantee that any of these funds will need to be used throughout the course of the work. L. Bid Item C-2— Force Main Dewatering Allocation: 1. Allocation 2. The AL bid item described as"Force Main Dewatering Allocation" has been set as noted and shall be included in the Total Base Bid for each Bidder.This item shall be measured for payment by the allocation and shall include but is not limited to all materials, labor and equipment required to provide the Force Main Dewatering Allocation as identified in the plans and specifications. Measurement and Basis for Payment 0129 01-3 Citywide Life Station Repairs 2018-2019(Williams L.S.)- Project No. 21143 Rev 5/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 M. Allocation C-3—Building Permits Allocation: 1. Allocation 2. The AL item described as "Building Permit Allocation" has been set as noted and shall be included in the Total Base Bid for each Bidder. This allocation shall be used for the payment of the Construction Permit and Municipal Solid Waste fees required to be paid by the Contractor for this project (Allocation does not cover the disposal/tipping fee at the landfill). Payment to the Contractor shall be made strictly on the actual amount of the calculated fee and payment made to the City Development Services Department. There is no guarantee that all of these funds will need to be used to cover the cost of the Building Permit Fee. N. Allocation C-4—AEP Allocation: 1. Allocation 2. The AL item described as "AEP Allocation" has been set as noted and shall be included in the Total Base Bid for each Bidder. This allocation shall be used for the payment of the cost for AEP (Local Power Company) to provide the modifications to incoming primary power supply to the lift station required for this project. Contractor shall coordinate with AEP for scheduling this work. Payment to the Contractor for AEP's cost shall be made strictly on the actual amount of invoices(s) from AEP. There is no guarantee that all of these funds will need to be used to cover the cost of AEP's cost. O. Allocation C-5—Building Improvement Allocation: 1. Allocation 2. The AL item described as "Building Improvement Allocation" has been set as noted and shall be included in the Total Base Bid for each Bidder. This allocation shall be used for the cost of any additional building improvements identified in the field. This item shall be measured for payment by the allocation and shall include but is not limited to all materials, labor and equipment required to provide the building improvements identified in the field. P. Other Bid Items 1. The basis of measurement and payment for other Bid Items shall be as described in the applicable Specification Sections, Construction Drawings and/or SECTION 00 30 01 BID FORM. 2.00 PRODUCTS(NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Measurement and Basis for Payment 0129 01-4 Citywide Life Station Repairs 2018-2019(Williams L.S.)- Project No. 21143 Rev 5/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 0133 01 Submittal Register j o , f o MCI 01 33 01-1 Citywide Lift Station Repairs 2018-2019(Williams L.S.)-Project No.21143 10/2018 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 01 35 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE A. Perform the Work as required to complete the entire Project within the Contract Times and in the sequence suggested in Technical Specification 13C: B. Work shall be completed within the specified time for these items: Description Time Substantial Completion of Entire Project 240 Calendar Days Final Completion of Entire Project 270 Calendar Days Note that the Williams Lift Station provides a critical service for the City of Corpus Christi,TX and is operating under the terms of a discharge permit issued by the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality. This permit specifies the effluent quality limits that the lift station must meet prior to discharge of the treated water. Work shall be performed in a manner that will not prevent the existing facility from achieving the effluent water quality established by the permit. The Contractor shall bear the cost of penalties imposed on the Owner for water quality violations caused by actions of the Contractor. It is critical that the Contractor coordinates with the Williams Lift Station plant operators, design engineer and the OAR throughout construction to maintain the treatment of wastewater at all times. It is understood that rerouting of flow at the unit and the shutdown of portions of the unit for short and controlled durations, may be necessary to complete construction. However, Contractor shall work with the City and OAR to schedule work that may impact the bar screening and grit removal in such a manner that delivery of collected wastewater can still be provided from the Plant Lift Station to the downstream treatment units. The Contractor's project schedule will be structured to maintain capacity requirements. In the event that construction activity begins to impact upstream storage capacity and treatment constraints in a manner unforeseen by the Contractor, the Contractor shall immediately take all steps necessary to resolve the issue caused by construction and restore treatment capabilities. The Contractor shall provide the City and OAR a request for shutdown 30 calendar days prior to the scheduled temporary shutdowns or rerouting of flow. The City reserves the right to grant, delay, or deny such shutdowns or rerouting requests depending upon the anticipated weather conditions or other issues that would affect the ability to maintain delivery and treatment of the collected wastewater. In addition, the Contractor's overall construction schedule shall clearly highlight the anticipated scheduled shutdown and rerouting dates and duration. The time of any shutdowns will be decided by the City and will likely occur during night time. The Contractor shall not be entitled to additional payment for shutdown work scheduled during night-time,Sundays or holidays to meet the Williams Lift Station treatment demands. Special Procedures 013500- 1 Citywide Lift Station Repairs 2018-2019 (Williams L.S.)—Project No. 21143 Rev 10/2018 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 C. Consider the sequences, duration limitations, and governing factors outlined in this Section to prepare the schedule for the Work. D. Perform the Work not specifically described in this Section as required to complete the entire Project within the Contract Times. 1.02 PLAN OF ACTION A. Submit a written plan of action for approval for shutting down essential services. These include: 1. Electrical power, 2. Control power, 3. Pipelines or wastewater systems, 4. Communications equipment, and 5. Other designated functions. B. Describe the following in the plan of action: 1. Scheduled dates for construction; 2. Work to be performed; 3. Utilities, piping, or services affected; 4. Length of time the service or utility will be disturbed; 5. Procedures to be used to carry out the Work; 6. Plan of Action to handle emergencies; 7. List of manpower, equipment, and ancillary supplies; 8. Backups for key pieces of equipment and key personnel; 9. Contingency plan that will be used if the original schedule cannot be met; and C. Submit plan 2 weeks prior to beginning the Work. 1.03 CRITICAL OPERATIONS A. The Owner has identified critical operations that must not be out of service longer than the designated maximum time out of service and/or must be performed only during the designated times. These have been identified in Technical Specifications 13C. 1.04 OWNER ASSISTANCE A. Coordinate with the Owner for the operation of any valve,they shall not be opened or closed without a City operator being present. The Contractor will be responsible for providing dewatering pumps, etc. required to completely dewater the lift station and handle any leakage past closed valves,gates or adjacent structures. See also Technical Specification 13C for more detailed information. Special Procedures 013500-2 Citywide Lift Station Repairs 2018-2019 (Williams L.S.)—Project No. 21143 Rev 10/2018 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Special Procedures 013500-3 Citywide Lift Station Repairs 2018-2019 (Williams L.S.)—Project No. 21143 Rev 10/2018 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide temporary facilities, ineluding ^DT'" f,t-'d eff;r-e and the Contractor's field offices, storage sheds, and temporary utilities needed to complete the Work. B. Install and maintain temporary Project identification signs. Provide temporary on-site informational signs to identify key elements of the construction facilities. Do not allow other signs to be displayed. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE maintaining the fellewing eenditieqns- 2. Geelingi Minimum 75 degFeeS 11)temp at 105 degFees ambi 3. RR-lative hamidityi 49 t9 54 PeFr=ePA B. Inspect and test each service before placing temporary utilities in use. Arrange for all required inspections and tests by regulatory agencies, and obtain required certifications and permits for use. 1.03 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Arrange transportation, loading, and handling of temporary buildings and sheds. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS A. Locate buildings and sheds at the Site as indicated or as approved by the OPT. B. Prepare the Site by removing trees, brush, or debris and performing demolition or grubbing needed to clear a space adequate for the structures. C. Pay for the utilities used by temporary facilities during construction. D. Provide each temporary service and facility ready for use at each location when the service or facility is first needed to avoid delay in the performance of the Work. Provide OPT's field office complete and ready for occupancy and use within 7 days of the Notice to Proceed. E. Maintain, expand as required, and modify temporary services and facilities as needed throughout the progress of the Work. F. Remove services and facilities when approved by the OAR. G. Operate temporary facilities in a safe and efficient manner. 1. Restrict loads on temporary services or facilities to within their designed or designated capacities. 2. Provide sanitary conditions. Prevent public nuisance or hazardous conditions from developing or existing at the Site. Temporary Facilities and Controls 015000- 1 Citywide Lift Station Repairs 2018-2019 (Williams L.S.)-Project No. 21143 Rev 8/2019 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 3. Prevent freezing of pipes,flooding, or the contamination of water. 4. Maintain Site security and protection of the facilities. 1.05 OPTIONS A. Construction offices may be prefabricated buildings on skids or mobile trailers. B. Storage sheds may be prefabricated buildings on skids or truck trailers. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 TEMPORARY FIELD OFFICES—FIELD OFFICE NOT REQUIRED must 60- iRehes and_ *;.ye enhamrs. The GeRtracmtAr shall meve the field effiese AR the Site as FequiFed by OAR. TheFe-is-Re sepaFate pay fer the field-effie2. fleir of 10 r ple C. Other trades may provide their own offices only when space is available at the Site, and the OPT agrees to its size, condition, and location. 2.02 TEMPORARY STORAGE BUILDINGS A. Furnish storage buildings of adequate size to store any materials or equipment delivered to the Site that might be affected by weather. 2.03 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide sanitary facilities at the Site from the commencement of the Project until Project conclusion. Maintain these facilities in a clean and sanitary condition at all times,and comply with the requirements of the local health authority. On large sites, provide portable toilets at such locations that no point in the Site shall be more than 600 feet from a toilet. B. Use these sanitary facilities. Do not use restrooms within existing or Owner-occupied buildings. 2.04 TEMPORARY HEAT A. Provide heating devices needed to protect buildings during construction. Provide fuel needed to operate the heating devices and attend the heating devices at all times they are in operation, including overnight operations. Temporary Facilities and Controls 015000-2 Citywide Lift Station Repairs 2018-2019 (Williams L.S.)—Project No. 21143 Rev 8/2019 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 2.05 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Provide the temporary utilities for administration, construction, testing, disinfection, and start-up of the Work, including electrical power, water, and telephone. Pay all costs associated with furnishing temporary utilities. 1. Provide a source of temporary electrical power of adequate size for construction procedures. a. Use existing power systems where spare capacity is available. Provide temporary power connections that do not adversely affect the existing power supply. Submit connections to the OAR for approval prior to installation. b. Provide electrical pole and service connections that comply with Laws and Regulations and the requirements of the power company. 2. the 0DTAs fineld- A-ffinen, 2.06 WATER FOR CONSTRUCTION A. Provide temporary water. Potable water may be purchased from the Owner by obtaining a water meter from the Owner and transporting water from a water hydrant. Non-potable water may be used for hydraulic testing of non-potable basins or pipelines. Include the cost of water in the Contract Price. B. Contractor must comply with the City of Corpus Christi's Water Conservation and Drought Contingency Plan as amended (the "Plan"). This includes implementing water conservation measures established for changing conditions. The City Engineer will provide a copy of the Plan to Contractor at the pre-construction meeting. The Contractor will keep a copy of the Plan on the Site throughout construction. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 LOCATION OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Locate temporary facilities in areas approved by the OAR. Construct and install signs at locations approved by the OAR. Install informational signs so they are clearly visible. 3.02 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS A. The Owner will furnish two Project signs to be installed by the Contractor.The signs must be installed before construction begins and will be maintained throughout the Project period by the Contractor. The locations of the signs will be determined in the field by the OAR. 3.03 TEMPORARY LIGHTING A. Provide temporary lighting inside buildings once buildings are weatherproof. B. Provide lighting that is adequate to perform Work within any space. Temporary lights may be removed once the permanent lighting is in service. C. Provide portable flood lights at any time that Work will be performed outside the structure at night. Provide adequate lighting at any location Work is being performed. Temporary Facilities and Controls 015000-3 Citywide Lift Station Repairs 2018-2019 (Williams L.S.)—Project No. 21143 Rev 8/2019 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 3.04 DRINKING WATER A. Provide all field offices with potable water. Provide a dispenser and cooling apparatus if bottled drinking water is provided. B. Pay for water services and maintain daily. 3.05 CONSTRUCTION FENCE A. Install and maintain a construction fence around the Site and off-site storage yards. Fence must be a minimum 6 feet high chain link construction unless shown otherwise. Provide gates with padlocks. 3.06 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Remove temporary buildings, sheds,and utilities at the conclusion of the Project and restore the Site to original condition or finished in accordance with the Drawings. B. Remove informational signs upon completion of construction. C. Remove Project identification signs,framing, supports, and foundations upon completion of the Project. 3.07 MAINTENANCE AND JANITORIAL SERVICE A. Provide janitorial service (sweeping/mopping)for the OPT's field office on a weekly basis or as requested. Empty trash receptacles daily or as needed. B. Maintain signs and supports in a neat, clean condition. Repair damage to structures, framings, or signs. C. Repair any damage to Work caused by placement or removal of temporary signage. D. Service, maintain, and replace, if necessary, the OPT's field office computer equipment throughout the Project as required by the OPT including replacement cartridges for all office equipment. END OF SECTION Temporary Facilities and Controls 015000-4 Citywide Lift Station Repairs 2018-2019 (Williams L.S.)—Project No. 21143 Rev 8/2019 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 01 57 00 TEMPORARY CONTROLS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to construct temporary facilities to provide and maintain control over environmental conditions at the Site. Remove temporary facilities when no longer needed. B. Construct temporary impounding works, channels, diversions, furnishing and operation of pumps, installing piping and fittings, and other construction for control of conditions at the Site. Remove temporary controls at the end of the Project. C. �;ss ge €ttffln;at+e;rSySteffl--(T-PP€ ) GeReFal Pe.r.m.it Ne. TXR1500-0-0- fe—r r.#A—H,tea*e Comply with all requirements of the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ)and Laws and Regulations. File required legal notices and obtain required permits prior to beginning any construction activity. D. Provide labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to prevent stormwater pollution for the duration of the Project. Provide and maintain erosion and sediment control structures as required to preventive sediment and other pollutants from the Site from entering any stormwater system including open channels. Remove pollution control structures when no longer required to prevent stormwater pollution. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Construct and maintain temporary controls with adequate workmanship using durable materials to provide effective environmental management systems meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents and Laws and Regulations. Use materials that require minimal maintenance to prevent disruption of construction activities while providing adequate protection of the environment. B. Periodically inspect systems to determine that they are meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.03 DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL A. Provide documents requiring approval by the OPT as Shop Drawings in accordance with Article 25 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. B. Provide copies of notices, records, and reports required by the Contract Documents or Laws and Regulations as Record Data in accordance with Article 26 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. 1.04 STANDARDS A. Provide a SWPPP that complies with all requirements of TPDES General Permit No. TXR150000 and any other applicable Laws and Regulations. Temporary Controls 015700- 1 Citywide Lift Station Repairs 2018-2019 (Williams L.S.)—Project No. 21143 Rev 8/2019 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 B. Perform Work to comply with the City of Corpus Christi Code of Ordinances, Part III, Chapter 14, Article X - titled "STORM WATER QUALITY MANAGEMENT PLANS" and any other applicable Laws and Regulations. 1.05 PERMITS A. As applicable, submit the following to the TCEQ and the Operator of any Municipal Separate Storm Sewer System (MS4) receiving stormwater discharges from the Site: 1. Notice of Intent (NOI) at least 48 hours prior to beginning construction activity. Construction activity may commence 24 hours after the submittal of an electronic NOI. 2. Notice of Change (NOC) letter when relevant facts or incorrect information was submitted in the NOI, or if relevant information in the NOI changes during the course of construction activity. 3. Notice of Termination (NOT) when the construction Project has been completed and stabilized. B. Post a copy of the NOI at the Site in a location where it is readily available for viewing by the general public and as required by Laws and Regulations prior to starting construction activities and maintain the posting until completion of the construction activities. C. Maintain copies of a schedule of major construction activities, inspection reports, and revision documentation with the SWPPP. 1.06 STORMWATER POLLUTION CONTROL A. Comply with the current requirements of TPDES General Permit No.TXR150000 as set forth by the TCEQ for the duration of the Project as applicable to the nature of the work and the total disturbed area: 1. Develop a SWPPP meeting all requirements of the TPDES General Permit. 2. Submit of a Notice of Intent to the TCEQ. 3. Develop and implement appropriate Best Management Practices as established by local agencies of jurisdiction. 4. Provide all monitoring and/or sampling required for reporting to the TCEQ. 5. Submit reports to the TCEQ as required as a condition of the TPDES General Permit. 6. Submit copies of the reports to the Designer as Record Data in accordance with Article 26 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. 7. Retain copies of these documents at the Site at all times for review and inspection by the OPT or regulatory agencies. Post a copy of the permit as required by Laws and Regulations. 8. Assume sole responsibility for implementing, updating, and modifying the TPDES General Permit per Laws and Regulations for the SWPPP and Best Management Practices. B. Use forms required by the TCEQ to file the Notice of Intent. Submit the Notice of Intent at least 2 days prior to the start of construction. Develop the SWPPP prior to submitting the Temporary Controls 015700-2 Citywide Lift Station Repairs 2018-2019 (Williams L.S.)—Project No. 21143 Rev 8/2019 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 Notice of Intent. Provide draft copies of the Notice of Intent,SWPPP,and any other pertinent TCEQ submittal documents to Owner for review prior to submittal to the TCEQ. C. Return any property disturbed by construction activities to either specified conditions or pre- construction conditions as set forth in the Contract Documents. Provide an overall erosion and sedimentation control system that will protect all undisturbed areas and soil stockpiles/spoil areas. Implement appropriate Best Management Practices and techniques to control erosion and sedimentation and maintain these practices and techniques in effective operating condition during construction. Permanently stabilize exposed soil and fill as soon as practical during the Work. D. Assume sole responsibility for the means, methods,techniques, sequences, and procedures for furnishing, installing, and maintaining erosion and sedimentation control structures and procedures and overall compliance with the TPDES General Permit. Modify the system as required to effectively control erosion and sediment. E. Retain copies of reports required by the TPDES General Permit for 3 years from date of Final Completion. 1.07 POLLUTION CONTROL A. Prevent the contamination of soil, water, or atmosphere by the discharge of noxious substances from construction operations. Provide adequate measures to prevent the creation of noxious air-borne pollutants. Prevent dispersal of pollutants into the atmosphere. Do not dump or otherwise discharge noxious or harmful fluids into drains or sewers, nor allow noxious liquids to contaminate public waterways in any manner. B. Provide equipment and personnel and perform emergency measures necessary to contain any spillage. 1. Contain chemicals in protective areas and do not dump on soil. Dispose of such materials at off-site locations in an acceptable manner. 2. Excavate contaminated soil and dispose at an off-site location if contamination of the soil does occur. Fill resulting excavations with suitable backfill and compact to the density of the surrounding undisturbed soil. 3. Provide documentation to the Owner which states the nature and strength of the contaminant, method of disposal, and the location of the disposal site. 4. Comply with Laws and Regulations regarding the disposal of pollutants. C. Groundwater or run-off water which has come into contact with noxious chemicals, sludge, or sludge-contaminated soil is considered contaminated. Contaminated water must not be allowed to enter streams or water courses, leave the Site in a non-contained form, or enter non-contaminated areas of the Site. 1. Pump contaminated water to holding ponds constructed by the Contractor for this purpose, or discharge to areas on the interior of the Site, as designated by the OAR. 2. Construct temporary earthen dikes or take other precautions and measures as required to contain the contaminated water and pump to a designated storage area. 3. Wash any equipment used for handling contaminated water or soil within contaminated areas three times with uncontaminated water prior to using such equipment in an Temporary Controls 015700-3 Citywide Lift Station Repairs 2018-2019 (Williams L.S.)—Project No. 21143 Rev 8/2019 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 uncontaminated area. Dispose of wash water used to wash such equipment as contaminated water. 1.08 EARTH CONTROL A. Remove excess soil, spoil materials, and other earth not required for backfill at the time of generation. Control stockpiled materials to eliminate interference with Contractor and Owner's operations. B. Dispose of excess earth off the Site. Provide written approval from the property owner for soils deposited on private property. Obtain approval of the Owner if this disposal impacts the use of Site or other easements. 1.09 OZONE ADVISORY DAYS—N/A A. Do not conduct roofing, priming, or hot-mix paving operations, except for repairs, on days the City Engineer has notified Contractor that an ozone advisory is in effect. An extension of time will be allowed for each day for which priming or hot mix paving was scheduled, crews were prepared to perform this Work and the City Engineer issued ozone alert prevents this Work. Contractor will be compensated at the unit price indicated in the Bid for each day for which an extension of time was granted due to an ozone alert. 1.10 MANAGEMENT OF WATER A. Manage water resulting from rains or ground water at the Site. Maintain trenches and excavations free of water at all times. B. Lower the water table in the construction area by acceptable means if necessary to maintain a dry and workable condition at all times. Provide drains, sumps, casings, well points, and other water control devices as necessary to remove excess water. C. Provide continuous operation of water management actions. Maintain standby equipment to provide proper and continuous operation for water management. D. Ensure that water drainage does not damage adjacent property. Divert water into the same natural watercourse in which its headwaters are located, or other natural stream or waterway as approved by the Owner. Assume responsibility for the discharge of water from the Site. E. Remove the temporary construction and restore the Site in a manner acceptable to the OAR and to match surrounding material at the conclusion of the Work. 1.11 DEWATERING A. This item is considered subsidiary for all dewatering methods other than "well pointing" to the appropriate bid items as described in the Bid Form where dewatering is needed to keep the excavation dry, as approved by the Designer, and shall include all costs to provide a dry foundation for the proposed improvements. B. Storm water that enters an excavation can be pumped out as long as care is taken to minimize solids and mud entering the pump suction and flow is pumped to a location that allows for sheet flow prior to entering a storm water drainage ditch or storm water inlet. Temporary Controls 015700-4 Citywide Lift Station Repairs 2018-2019 (Williams L.S.)—Project No. 21143 Rev 8/2019 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 C. An alternative to sheet flow is to pump storm water to an area where ponding occurs naturally without leaving the designated work area or by a manmade berm(s) prior to entering the storm water system. Sheet flow and ponding is to allow solids screening and/or settling prior to entering a storm water conduit or inlet. D. Storm water or groundwater shall not be discharged to private property without permission. It is the intent that Contractor discharges groundwater primarily into the existing storm water system, provided that the quality of groundwater is equal to or better than the receiving location. E. Testing of groundwater quality is to be performed by the Contractor, at the Contractor's expense, prior to commencing discharge and shall be retested by the Contractor, at the Contractor's expense, a minimum of once a week. Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner on all testing. Tests will also be performed as each new area of construction is started. F. Another option for disposal of groundwater by Contractor would include pumping to the nearest wastewater system. If discharging to temporary holding tanks and trucking to a wastewater or wastewater plant, the costs for these operations shall be negotiated. Other groundwater disposal alternatives or solutions may be approved by the Designer on a case by case basis. G. Prior to pumping groundwater from a trench to the wastewater system the Contractor shall contact the Wastewater Pre-treatment Coordinator at 826-1817 to obtain a"no cost" permit from the Owner's Waste Water Department. Contractor will pay for any water quality testing or water analysis cost required. The permit will require an estimate of groundwater flow. Groundwater flow can be estimated by boring a hole or excavating a short trench then record water level shortly after completion, allow to sit overnight, record water level again, pump hole or trench dry to a holding tank or vacuum truck then record how long it takes to fill to original level and overnight level. 1.12 DISPOSAL OF CONTAMINATED GROUNDWATER—N/A A. An allowance will be included in the Bid for the unanticipated disposal of contaminated groundwater. This allowance may not be needed but is provided in case contaminated groundwater is encountered during the course of the Project and does not meet the water quality requirements for discharge into the storm water or wastewater systems. This allowance includes all materials, tools, equipment, labor, transportation, hauling, coordination, and proper disposal of the contaminated water at an approved landfill, deep water injection well, or other site as agreed to by the Designer. B. The payment for this Work will be based on the Contractor's actual costs and will be negotiated. Payment will not include costs associated with routine dewatering, which is considered subsidiary to the appropriate bid items as described in Paragraph 1.11. 1.13 DISPOSAL OF HIGHLY CHLORINATED WATER A. Dispose of water used for testing, disinfection, and line flushing. Comply with Owner's requirements and Laws and Regulation regarding the disposal of contaminated water, including water with levels of chlorine,which exceed the permissible limits for discharge into wetlands or environmentally sensitive areas. Comply with the requirements of all regulatory agencies in the disposal of all water used in the Project. Include a description and details for Temporary Controls 015700-5 Citywide Lift Station Repairs 2018-2019 (Williams L.S.)—Project No. 21143 Rev 8/2019 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 disposal of this water in a Plan of Action per SECTION 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES. Do not use the Owner's wastewater system for disposal of contaminated water. 1.14 WINDSTORM CERTIFICATION A. All affected materials and installation shall comply with Texas Department of Insurance Requirements for windstorm resistant construction for design wind speed as required by the current version of the International Building Code 2015 (IBC). When applicable, Contractor shall be responsible for contracting with a licensed structural engineer in the State of Texas to perform all inspections and provide documentation for windstorm certification to the Texas Board of Insurance. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all necessary design/assembly documentation for all new windows, doors, louvers, etc. to the windstorm engineer/inspectors required to conform with the requirements of the Texas Department of Insurance. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide materials that comply with Laws and Regulations. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTING, MAINTAINING AND REMOVING TEMPORARY CONTROLS A. Construct temporary controls in accordance with Laws and Regulations. B. Maintain controls in accordance with regulatory requirements where applicable, or in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. C. Remove temporary controls when no longer required, but before the Project is complete. Correct any damage or pollution that occurs as the result of removing controls while they are still required. END OF SECTION Temporary Controls 015700-6 Citywide Lift Station Repairs 2018-2019 (Williams L.S.)—Project No. 21143 Rev 8/2019 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 SECTION 022020 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work for excavation and backfill for utilities required to complete the project. 2. CONSTRUCTION (1) Unless otherwise specified on the drawings or permitted by the Engineer, all pipe and conduit shall be constructed in open cut trenches with vertical sides. Trenches shall be sheathed and braced as necessary throughout the construction period. Sheathing and bracing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor (refer to Section 022022 "Trench Safety for Excavations" of the City Standard Specifications). Trenches shall have a maximum width of one foot beyond the horizontal projection of the outside surfaces of the pipe and parallel thereto on each side unless otherwise specified. The Contractor shall not have more than 200 feet of open trench left behind the trenching operation and no more than 500 feet of ditch behind the ditching machine that is not compacted as required by the plans and specifications. No trench or excavation shall remain open after working hours. For all utility conduit and sewer pipe to be constructed in fill above natural ground, the embankment shall first be constructed to an elevation not less than one foot above the top of the pipe or conduit, after which excavation for the pipe or conduit shall be made. If quicksand, muck, or similar unstable material is encountered during the excavation, the following procedure shall be used unless other methods are called for on the drawings. If the unstable condition is a result of ground water,the Contractor,prior to additional excavation, shall control it. After stable conditions have been achieved,unstable soil shall be removed or stabilized to a depth of 2 feet below the bottom of pipe for pipes 2 feet or more in height; and to a depth equal to the height of pipe, 6 inches minimum,for pipes less then 2 feet in height. Such excavation shall be carried at least one foot beyond the horizontal limits of the structure on all sides. All unstable soil so removed shall be replaced with suitable stable material, placed in uniform layers of suitable depth as directed by the Engineer,and each layer shall be wetted, if necessary, and compacted by mechanical tamping as required to provide a stable condition. For unstable trench conditions requiring outside forms, seals, sheathing and bracing, any additional excavation and backfill required shall be done at the Contractor's expense. (2) Shaping of Trench Bottom. The trench bottom shall be undercut a minimum depth sufficient to accommodate the class of bedding indicated on the plans and specifications. 022020 Page 1 of 4 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 (3) Dewatering Trench. Pipe or conduit shall not be constructed or laid in a trench in the presence of water. All water shall be removed from the trench sufficiently prior to the pipe or conduit planing operation to insure a relatively dry (no standing water), firm bed. The trench shall be maintained in such dewatered condition until the trench has been backfilled to a height at lease one foot above the top of pipe. Removal of water may be accomplished by bailing,pumping, or by installation of well-points, as conditions warrant. Removal of well- points shall be at rate of 1/3 per 24 hours (every third well-point). The Contractor shall prevent groundwater from trench or excavation dewatering operations from discharging directly into the storm water system. Groundwater from dewatering operations shall be sampled and tested, if applicable, and disposed of, in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 022021 "Control of Ground Water". (4) Excavation in Streets. Excavation in streets,together with the maintenance of traffic where specified, and the restoration of the pavement riding surface, shall be in accordance with drawing detail or as required by other applicable specifications. (5) Removing Abandoned Structures. When abandoned masonry structures or foundations are encountered in the excavation, such obstructions shall be removed for the full width of the trench and to a depth one foot below the bottom of the trench. When abandoned inlets or manholes are encountered and no plan provision is made for adjustment or connection to the new utility, such manholes and inlets shall be removed completely to a depth one foot below the bottom of the trench. In each instance,the bottom to the trench shall be restored to grade by backfilling and compacting by the methods provided hereinafter for backfill. Where the trench cuts through utility lines which are known to be abandoned, these lines shall be cut flush with the sides of the trench and blocked with a concrete plug in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. (6) Protection of Utilities. The Contractor shall conduct his work such that a reasonable minimum of disturbance to existing utilities will result. Particular care shall be exercised to avoid the cutting or breakage of water and gas lines. Such lines,if broken, shall be restored promptly by the Contractor. When active wastewater lines are cut in the trenching operations, temporary flumes shall be provided across the trench while open, and the lines shall be restored when the backfilling has progressed to the original bedding line of the sewer so cut. The Contractor shall inform utility owners sufficiently in advance of the Contractor's operations to enable such utility owners to reroute, provide temporary detours, or to make other adjustments to utility lines in order that the Contractor may proceed with his work with a minimum of delay. The Contractor shall not hold the City liable for any expense due to delay or additional work because of utility adjustments or conflicts. (7) Excess Excavated Material. All materials from excavation not required for backfilling the trench shall be removed by the Contractor from the job site promptly following the completion of work involved. 022020 Page 2 of 4 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 (8) Backfill A. Backfill Procedure Around Pipe Initial Backfill) All trenches and excavation shall be backfilled as soon as is practical after the pipes or conduits are properly laid. In addition to the specified pipe bedding material, the backfill around the pipe as applicable shall be granular material as shown on the standard details or as described in the applicable specification section, and shall be free of large hard lumps or other debris. If indicated on the plans, pipe shall be encased with cement-stabilized sand backfill as described below. The backfill shall be deposited in the trench simultaneously on both sides of the pipe for the full width of the trench,in layers not to exceed ten(10)inches (loose measurement), wetted if required to obtain proper compaction, and thoroughly compacted by use of mechanical tampers to a density comparable to the adjacent undisturbed soil or as otherwise specified on the plans,but not less than 95%Standard Proctor density. A thoroughly compacted material shall be in place between the external wall of the pipe and the undisturbed sides of the trench and to a level twelve (12)inches above the top of the pipe. B. Backfill Over One Foot Above Pipe (Final Backfill) UNPAVED AREAS: The backfill for that portion of trench over one(1)foot above the pipe or conduit not located under pavements (including waterlines, gravity wastewater lines, wastewater force mains and reinforced concrete storm water pipe) shall be imported select material or clean, excess material from the excavation meeting the following requirements: Free of hard lumps, rock fragments, or other debris, No clay lumps greater than 2" diameter Moisture Content: +/-3% Backfill material shall be placed in layers not more than ten (10) inches in depth (loose measurement),wetted if required to obtain proper compaction,and thoroughly compacted by use of mechanical tampers to the natural bank density but not less than 95%Standard Proctor density, unless otherwise indicated. Flooding of backfill is not allowed. Jetting of backfill may only be allowed in sandy soils and in soils otherwise approved by the Engineer. Regardless of backfill method, no lift shall exceed 10 inches and density shall not be less than 95% Standard Proctor density. A period of not less than twenty-four(24) hours shall elapse between the time of jetting and the placing of the top four (4) feet of backfill. If jetting is used, the top four (4) feet of backfill shall be placed in layers not more than 10 inches in depth (loose measurement), wetted if required to obtain proper compaction, and thoroughly compacted by use of mechanical tampers to the natural bank density but not less than 95% Standard Proctor density (ASTM D698). PAVED AREAS: At utility line crossings under pavements (including waterlines, gravity wastewater lines, wastewater force mains, and reinforced concrete storm water pipe), and where otherwise indicated on the drawings, trenches shall be backfilled as shown below: From top of initial backfill (typically twelve (12)inches above top of the pipe)to three (3)feet below bottom of road base course, backfill shall be select material meeting the requirements of 022100 "Select Material". 022020 Page 3 of 4 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 Asphalt Roadways The upper three (3)feet of trench below the road base course shall be backfilled to the bottom of the road base course with cement-stabilized sand containing a minimum of 2 sacks of Standard Type I Portland cement per cubic yard of sand and compacted to not less than 95% Standard Proctor density. Concrete Roadways The Contractor may elect to backfill the upper three (3) feet of trench below the road base course with cement stabilized sand as noted above, or in the case of storm water pipe or box installation the Contractor may backfill and compact select material to 98% Standard Proctor density(ASTM D698)following City Standard Specification Section 022100. 3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, excavation and backfill for utilities, including select material or cement-stabilized sand backfill, shall not be measured and paid for separately. It shall be considered subsidiary to the items for which the excavation and backfill is required. 022020 Page 4 of 4 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 SECTION 022022 TRENCH SAFETY FOR EXCAVATIONS 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work for providing for worker safety in excavations and trenching operations required to complete the project. 2. REQUIREMENTS Worker Safety in excavations and trenches shall be provided by the Contractor in accordance with Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Standards, 29 CFR Part 1926 Subpart P - Excavations. It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor, and not the City or Engineer or Consultant, to determine and monitor the specific applicability of a safety system to the field conditions to be encountered on the job site during the project. The Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the City and Engineer and Consultant from all damages and costs that may result from failure of methods or equipment used by the Contractor to provide for worker safety. Trenches, as used herein, shall apply to any excavation into which structures, utilities, or sewers are placed regardless of depth. Trench Safety Plan, as used herein, shall apply to all methods and materials used to provide for worker safety in excavation and trenching operations required during the project. 3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Measurement of Trench Safety shall be by the linear foot of trench, regardless of depth. Measurement shall be taken along the centerline of the trench. Measurement for Excavation Safety for Utility Structures shall be per each excavation. Excavations include, but are not limited to, those for manholes, vaults, pits and other such structures that are incidental to utility work. Measurement for Excavation Safety for Special Structures shall be per each excavation or by the lump sum for each special structure identified in the Proposal. Payment shall be at the unit price bid and shall fully compensate the Contractor for all work, equipment, materials, personnel, and incidentals as required to provide for worker safety in trenches and excavations for the project. Revision current for Texas Code Chapter 756 Subchapter C. Trench Safety. 022022 Page 1 of 1 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 SECTION 022100 SELECT MATERIAL 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern the use of Select Material to be used to treat designated sections of roadways, embankments, trenches, etc. Select material shall be non-expansive sandy clay (CL) or clayey sand (SC), in accordance with the Unified Soil Classification System (ASTM D2487). Select Material shall meet the following requirements: Free of vegetation, hard lumps, rock fragments, or other debris No clay lumps greater than 2" diameter Liquid Limit(L.L.): <35 Plasticity Index (P.I.)Range: 8 to 20 Moisture Content: as specified in the drawings 2. CONSTRUCTION METHODS Select material shall be mixed uniformly and placed in layers as indicated, not to exceed 10 inches loose depth (or 12 inches maximum for sanitary sewer trench backfill per City Standard Details for Sanitary Sewers). Unless otherwise specified, the material shall be compacted to a minimum of 95% Standard Proctor density. Each layer shall be complete before the succeeding layer is placed. The finished surface of the select material shall conform to the grade and section shown on the drawings. 3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, select material shall not be measured for pay, but shall be subsidiary to the appropriate bid item. 022100 Page 1 of 1 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 SECTION 025620 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern for the construction of Portland cement concrete pavement on a prepared subgrade or base course, in accordance with the typical sections shown on the drawings. The concrete shall be composed of Portland cement, aggregates (fine and coarse), admixtures if desired or required, and water, proportioned and mixed as hereinafter provided. All subsurface utilities must be inspected, tested, and accepted prior to any paving. 2. MATERIALS (1) Cement The cement shall be either Type I, Type II or Type III Portland cement conforming to ASTM Designation: C150, modified as follows: Unless otherwise specified by the Engineer, the specific surface area of Type I and II cements shall not exceed 2000 square centimeters per gram (Wagner Turbidimeter— TxDOT Test Method Tex-310-D). The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with a statement as to the specific surface area of the cement, expressed in square centimeters per gram, for each shipment. For concrete pavements, strength requirements shall be demonstrated using flexural (beam) or compressive (cylinder)tests as required in the drawings. Either Type I or II cement shall be used unless Type II is specified on the plans. Except when Type II is specified on the plans, Type III cement may be used when the anticipated air temperature for the succeeding 12 hours will not exceed 60°F. Type III cement shall be used when high early strength concrete pavement is specified on the drawings. Different types of cement may be used in the same project, but all cement used in any one monolithic placement of concrete pavement shall be of the same type and brand. Only one brand of each type of cement will be permitted in any one project unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer. Cement may be delivered in bulk where adequate bin storage is provided. All other cement shall be delivered in bags marked plainly with the name of the manufacturer and the type of cement. Similar information shall be provided in the bills of lading accompanying each shipment of packaged or bulk cement. Bags shall contain 94 pounds net. All bags shall be in good condition at time of delivery. All cement shall be properly protected against dampness. No caked cement will be accepted. 025620 Page 1 of 5 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 Cement remaining in storage for a prolonged period of time may be retested and rejected if it fails to conform to any of the requirements of these specifications. (2) Mixing Water Water for use in concrete and for curing shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 030020"Portland Cement Concrete". (3) Coarse Aggregate Coarse aggregate for use in concrete mixture shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete", Grade No. 2. (4) Fine Aggregate Fine aggregate for use in concrete mixture shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete", Grade No. 1. (5) Mineral Filler Mineral filler shall consist of stone dust, clean crushed sand, or other approved inert material. (6) Mortar(Grout) Mortar for repair of concrete pavements shall consist of 1 part cement, 2 parts finely graded sand, and enough water to make the mixture plastic. When required to prevent color difference, white cement shall be added to produce the color required. When required by the Engineer, latex adhesive shall be added to the mortar. (7) Admixtures Calcium chloride will not be permitted. Unless otherwise noted, air-entraining, retarding and water-reducing admixtures may be used in all concrete and shall conform to the requirements of City Standard Specification Section 030020"Portland Cement Concrete". (8) Reinforcing Steel Unless otherwise designated on the plans, all steel reinforcement shall be deformed bars, and shall conform to ASTM Designation: A615, Grade 60, and shall be open hearth, basic oxygen or electric furnace new billet steel in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 032020 "Reinforcing Steel". Dowels shall be plain billet steel smooth bars conforming to ASTM Designation: A615, Grade 60, and shall have hot-dip galvanized finish. 3. STORAGE OF MATERIALS All cement and aggregate shall be stored and handled in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". 025620 Page 2 of 5 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 4. MEASUREMENT OF MATERIALS Measurement of the materials, except water, used in batches of concrete, shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". 5. CLASSIFICATION AND MIX DESIGN It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish the mix design to comply with the requirements herein and in accordance with THD Bulletin C-11. The Contractor shall perform, at his own expense, the work required to substantiate the design, except the testing of strength specimens, which will be done by the Engineer. Complete concrete design data shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. It shall also be the responsibility of the Contractor to determine and measure the batch quantity of each ingredient, including all water, so that the mix conforms to these specifications and any other requirements shown on the plans. In lieu of the above mix design responsibility, the Contractor may accept a design furnished by the Engineer; however, this will not relieve the Contractor of providing concrete meeting the requirements of these specifications. Trial batches will be made and tested using all of the proposed ingredients prior to placing the concrete, and when the aggregate and/or brand of cement or admixture is changed. Trial batches shall be made in the mixer to be used on the job. When transit mix concrete is to be used, the trial designs will be made in a transit mixer representative of the mixers to be used. Batch size shall not be less than 50 percent of the rated mixing capacity of the truck. Mix designs from previous or concurrent jobs may be used without trial batches if it is shown that no substantial change in any of the proposed ingredients has been made. This specification section incorporates the requirements of City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". 6. CONSISTENCY In cases where the consistency requirements cannot be satisfied without exceeding the maximum allowable amount of water, the Contractor may use, or the Engineer may require, an approved water-reducing or retarding agent, or the Contractor shall furnish additional aggregates or aggregates with different characteristics, which will produce the required results. Additional cement may be required or permitted as a temporary measure until aggregates are changed and designs checked with the different aggregates or admixture. The consistency of the concrete as placed should allow the completion of all finishing operations without the addition of water to the surface. When field conditions are such that additional moisture is needed for the final concrete surface finishing operation, the required water shall be applied to the surface by fog spray only, and shall be held to a minimum. The concrete shall be 025620 Page 3 of 5 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 workable, cohesive, possess satisfactory finishing qualities, and of the stiffest consistency that can be placed and vibrated into a homogenous mass. Excessive bleeding shall be avoided. Slump requirements shall be as specified in Table 1. TABLE 1 Slump Requirements Construction Method Desired Slump Minimum Slump Maximum Slump Concrete Pavement(slipformed) 1.5 inches 1 inch 3 inches Concrete Pavement(formed) 4 inches 2.5 inches 6.5 inches NOTE: No concrete will be permitted with slump in excess of the maximum shown. 7. QUALITY OF CONCRETE The concrete shall be uniform and workable. The cement content, maximum allowable water- cement ratio, desired slump, minimum slump, maximum slump, and the strength requirements of the class of concrete for concrete pavement shall conform to the requirements of Table I and Table 2 and as required herein. During the process of the work, the Engineer will cast test beams or cylinders as a check on the flexural or compressive strength of the concrete actually placed. Testing shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". If the required flexural or compressive strength is not secured with the cement specified in Table 2, changes in the batch design will be made. The concrete shall meet either the minimum flexural (beam) strength (7-day or 28-day) or minimum compressive strength(7-day or 28-day) shown in Table 2. TABLE 2 Class of Concrete for Concrete Pavement Class Minimum Minimum Maximum of Flexural(Beam) Compressive Water-Cement Coarse Concrete Strength Strength Ratio Aggregate P* 450 psi(7 days) 3200 psi(7 days) 5.6 gal./sack No. 2 (1'/z") 570 psi(28 days) 4000 psi(28 days) 0.50 * 5% entrained air 8. MIXING CONDITIONS The concrete shall be mixed in quantities required for immediate use. Any concrete which is not in place within the limits outlined in City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures", Article "Placing Concrete-General", shall not be used. Re-tamping of concrete will not be permitted. 025620 Page 4 of 5 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 Mixing conditions shall conform to the requirements of City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". 9. MIXING AND MIXING EQUIPMENT Mixing and mixing equipment shall conform to the requirements of City Standard Specification Section 030020"Portland Cement Concrete". 10. READY-MIX PLANTS The requirements for ready-mix plants shall be as specified in City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". 11. PLACING, CURING AND FINISHING All subsurface utilities must be inspected, tested, and accepted prior to any paving. Subgrade preparation shall be as specified on the plans. The placing of concrete, including construction of forms and falsework, curing and finishing shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures". For membrane curing, curing material shall conform to Type 2, Class A curing compound, or as otherwise shown on the drawings. 12. JOINTS IN CONCRETE PAVEMENT The placing of joints in concrete pavement shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures" and as detailed on the drawings. 13. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, the quantities of concrete for concrete pavement(s), which will constitute the completed and accepted pavement(s) in-place, will be measured by the square yard or square foot for the indicated thickness and type of cement. Payment shall be full compensation for furnishing, hauling, mixing, placing, curing and finishing all concrete; all grouting and pointing; furnishing and placing reinforcing steel and steel dowels as shown on the plans; furnishing and placing drains; furnishing and placing metal flashing strips; furnishing and placing expansion joint material, joint filler and sealants, and contraction (control) joints required by this specification or shown on the plans; and for all forms and falsework, labor, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work. Any paving placed prior to inspection, testing, and acceptance of underground utilities may be rejected by the City and will be replaced at the Contractor's expense after correcting any subsurface utility defects. 025620 Page 5 of 5 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 SECTION 026202 HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF PRESSURE SYSTEMS 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work necessary for hydrostatic testing the completed pressure system. The Contractor shall provide all tools, equipment, materials, labor, etc., as necessary, except as noted, and accomplish all testing under this specification. 2. MATERIALS Water for filling the line and making tests will be furnished by the Contractor through a standard meter connection. A meter and gauges for testing shall be supplied by the Contractor. A test pump with appropriate connector points as approved by the Water Superintendent for the installation of meter and gauge shall be furnished by the Contractor. The meter shall be directly connected to the main or pipe being tested by the use of copper tubing or an approved reinforced hose. The meter shall be protected against extreme pressures by the use of a one-inch (1") safety relief valve set at the test pressure plus ten pounds per square inch(psi) and furnished by the Contractor. 3. TEST PROCEDURE Tests shall be made only after completion of backfill as specified, and not until at least thirty-six (36) hours after the last concrete thrust block has been cast. Contractor shall coordinate hydrostatic testing with the proposed construction sequencing and phasing. Each section of pipeline shall be slowly filled with water and the specified test pressure, measured at the point of lowest elevation, shall be applied. During the filling of the pipe and before applying the specified test pressure, all air shall be expelled from the pipeline. During the test, all exposed pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and joints shall be carefully examined. If found to be leaking, they shall be corrected immediately by the Contractor. If the leaking is due to cracked or defective material, the defective material shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor with sound material. All pipes shall be subjected to two hydrostatic tests. The first hydrostatic test shall be a two-hour test at a pressure of 150 psi. The second test shall be no less than 48 hours after successful completion of the first hydrostatic test. The second hydrostatic test shall be for a 24-hour period at City operating pressure for waterlines or at 50 psi for wastewater force mains and effluent lines. 026202 Page 1 of 2 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 The maximum allowable leakage shall be as follows: Ductile Iron Pipe, AWWA C600 L= SD P �1� or L=ND P �_�_2 133,200 7,400 Asbestos - Cement Pipe, AWWA C603 L=ND P 4,000 PVC Pipe -Uni-bell equation 99 L=ND P 7,400 WHERE: L=Maximum Allowable Leakage(gallons/hour) S =Length of Pipe Tested(feet) N=Number of Joints in Tested Line (pipe and fittings) D =Nominal Diameter of Pipe (inches) P=Average Test Pressure (psi) If the pressure system fails to meet the leakage requirements, the Contractor shall make the required repairs to the system and the system shall be retested. This procedure shall be repeated until the system complies with leakage requirements. The cost of each retest shall be $100. 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, hydrostatic testing of pressure systems will not be measured for pay, but shall be subsidiary to the installation of the pressure system component. 026202 Page 2 of 2 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 SECTION 026206 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work necessary for furnishing all ductile iron pipe and fittings required to complete the project. 2. GENERAL All ductile iron pipe shall conform to AWWA C151. The interior of pipe and fittings (excluding fittings for wastewater force mains)shall have a shop-applied cement-mortar lining(40 mils thick)in accordance with AWWA C104. The exterior of pipe and fittings shall have a coating of coal tar enamel of approximately 1 mil thick or as specified in AWWA C105. Ductile iron pipe shall be wrapped in two plys of 8-mil polyethylene in accordance with Section 026402 "Waterlines" of the City Standard Specifications. 3. FITTINGS All fittings shall be ductile iron and in accordance with AWWA C153. Fittings shall have a pressure rating of 250 psi for sizes through 12" and 150 psi for 14" and larger sizes,unless shown differently on the drawings. Unless noted otherwise on the drawings, Mechanical Joints shall be used. 4. JOINTS Joints for pipe shall be mechanical type or push-on type such as "Tyton Joint", or approved equal; joints for fittings shall be mechanical joints, unless shown otherwise on the drawings. Mechanical joints shall conform to AWWA C153. Mechanical joints shall be furnished complete with joint material, Cor-ten nuts, Cor-ten bolts, glands and gaskets. When restrained joints are indicated on the drawings, restrained joints for pipe and fittings of 12" diameter and less shall be mechanical joint with retainer gland Series 1100 by EBAA Iron or approved equal, with a minimum of 250 psi rated working pressure. Restrained joints for pipe and fittings over 12"in diameter shall be push on type with a retainer ring as LOK-RING or FLEX-RING by American Ductile Iron Pipe, or TR FLEX by U.S. Pipe, or approved equal. Gaskets shall be of synthetic rubber. An analysis of the material used in each size gasket showing the type of synthetic rubber and that no natural rubber is present shall be supplied. 026206 Page 1 of 3 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 5. PIPE Pressure class ductile iron pipe requirements: Pressure Wall Range of Maximum Diameter Class Thickness Allowable Depth Cover (inches) (psi) (inches) (feet) - (feet) A-B* 49 350 0.25 60+ 6 350 0.25 30 - 65 8 350 0.25 20 - 50 109 350 0.26 15 - 45 12 350 0.28 15 - 44 149 300 0.30 13 - 42 16 300 0.32 13 - 39 18 300 0.34 13 - 36 20 300 0.36 13 - 35 24 250 0.37 11 - 29 24+ x x x * Range of maximum allowable depth of pipe where: A = Ground water, or unstable bottom, or quick condition. B = Ideal trench conditions, and sand encasement is at an average density in excess of 90% Standard Proctor density. # Pipe sizes not typically specified on City projects, but shown for reference. x Requires special evaluation. The face of bells shall be plainly marked by color coding for classes so as to be readily identified in the field. 6. CERTIFICATIONS A certification shall accompany each order of pipe and fittings furnished to job site. Certification shall include the following items: indicate that pipe complies with Part 3 of this specification; indicate that fittings and joints comply with Part 4 of this specification (it should be noted that the supplier shall furnish sufficient technical material for the Engineer to determine whether or not push- on j oints can comply with the "or equal" clause); and a copy of a laboratory analysis of the material used in each size gasket showing the type of synthetic rubber and that no natural rubber is present. 026206 Page 2 of 3 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 7. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, ductile iron pipe shall be measured by the linear foot along the centerline for each size of pipe installed. Measurement of pipe shall be up to, but not include, the fittings. Ductile iron fittings shall be measured per each by the type and size, as indicated in the Bid Form. Payment shall include all labor, materials, tools and equipment for the completed installation and testing of the waterline,together with all incidentals necessary to install the pipe and fittings complete in place. 026206 Page 3 of 3 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 SECTION 026210 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE (AWWA C900 and C905 Pressure Pipe for Municipal Water Mains and Wastewater Force Mains) 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work necessary for furnishing all PVC pipe (AWWA C900 and C905)required to complete the project. 2. MATERIAL PVC pipe shall be made of Class 12454-A or Class 12454-B virgin compounds, as defined in ASTM D1784 with an established hydrostatic-design-basis of 4000 psi for water at 73.4 degrees F. 3. DIMENSIONS Pipe shall be manufactured to ductile iron pipe equivalent outside diameters. 4. JOINT Pipe shall have a gasket bell end with a thickened wall section integral with the pipe barrel. The use of solvent weld pipe shall not be allowed. 5. GASKETS Gaskets for jointing pipe shall be in accordance with ASTM F477 (High Head). 6. PIPE PRESSURE CLASS AND DIMENSION RATIO Unless indicated otherwise on the drawings, pipe shall have a dimension ratio (DR) of 18 and in accordance with: Pipe Size Designation 4" to 12" AWWA C900 Over 12" AWWA C905 7. CAUSE FOR REJECTION Pipe shall be clearly marked in accordance with AWWA Requirements. Unmarked or scratched pipe shall be rejected. 026210 Page 1 of 2 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 8. CERTIFICATION The contractor shall furnish in duplicate to the Engineer a copy of the manufacturer's affidavit of compliance with this specification, to include gaskets. Certification shall accompany each delivery of materials. 9. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified in the Bid Form, PVC pipe (AWWA C900 or C905) will be measured by the linear foot along the centerline for each size of pipe installed. Measurement of pipe shall be up to, but not include, the fittings. Payment shall include all labor, materials, tools and equipment for the completed installation, backfilling and testing of the PVC pipe, together with all incidentals necessary to install the pipe complete in place, per linear foot. 026210 Page 2 of 2 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 SECTION 026402 WATERLINES 1. DESCRIPTION This specification, in conjunction with the City of Corpus Christi's Water Distribution System Standards, shall govern all work necessary for the installation of all waterline facilities required to complete the project. 2. MATERIALS Concrete: Concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3000 psi at 28 days. Bedding Sand for Encasement: Bedding sand and initial backfill around the pipe shall be granular material of low plasticity as indicated on the drawings. Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings: See City Standard Specification Section 026206. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe: See City Standard Specification Section 026210. Tapping Sleeves and Valves: See City Standard Specification Section 026409. Gate Valves for Waterlines: See City Standard Specification Section 026411. Fire Hydrants: See City Standard Specification Section 026416. 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS (1) HANDLING MATERIALS a) General: The Contractor shall be responsible for the safe storage of all materials furnished to, or by him, and accepted by him, until it has been incorporated into the completed project. All material found during the progress of the work to have cracks, flaws or other defects will be rejected, and the Contractor shall remove such defective material from the site of the work. b) Unloading and Distribution of Materials at Work Site: Pipe and other materials shall be unloaded at point of delivery, hauled to and distributed at the job site by the Contractor. Materials shall at all times be handled with care and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Care shall be taken not to scratch PVC pipe. Excessive scratching shall be considered cause for rejection of PVC pipe. Materials may be unloaded opposite or near the place where it is to be installed provided that it is to be incorporated into the work within 10 days. The Contractor shall not distribute material in such a manner as to cause undue inconvenience to the public. 026402 Page 1 of 5 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 c) Storing Materials: Materials that are not to be incorporated into the work within 10 days shall be stored on platforms. The interior of pipes and accessories shall be kept free from dirt and foreign matter. (2) ALIGNMENT AND GRADE a) General: All pipes shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades. Fittings, valves and hydrants shall be at the required locations with joints centered, spigots home and all valve and hydrant stems plumb. Temporary support and adequate protection of all underground and surface utility structures encountered in the progress of the work shall be furnished by the Contractor. Where the grade or alignment of the pipe is obstructed by existing utility structures such as conduits, ducts, pipes, connections to sewers or drains, the obstruction shall be permanently supported, relocated, removed, or reconstructed by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense, in cooperation with the owners of such utility structures. One (1) 20-ft. section of waterline pipe shall be centered over/under gravity wastewater line at all gravity wastewater line crossings. Waterline shall be ductile iron pipe with mechanical joint fittings, in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 026206, wherever new waterline crosses under new gravity wastewater line. Maintain a minimum of six inches (2 feet usual)vertical clearance between outsides of pipes where a new waterline crosses over a new wastewater line. Maintain a minimum of twelve inches vertical clearance between outsides of pipes where a new waterline crosses under a new wastewater line. Alternatively, at gravity wastewater line crossings, the proposed PVC waterline may be encased in a 20-ft.joint of ductile iron pipe with a minimum pressure rating of 150 psi that is at least two nominal sizes larger than the carrier pipe. The carrier pipe shall be supported in the casing at five foot (5) intervals with spacers, or shall be filled to the spring line with clean washed sand, graded as shown in the City Standard Water Details. The casing pipe shall be centered under the gravity wastewater line as indicated on the drawings, and both ends of the casing shall be sealed with cement grout or manufactured seal. b) Deviation from Drawings: No deviation from the line and grade shown on the plans may be made without the written consent of the Engineer. c) Depth of Cover: Depth of cover will be measured from the established street grade or the surface of the permanent improvement, or from finished grade to the top of the pipe barrel. Unless otherwise shown on drawings, the minimum depth of cover shall be 36 inches. Waterlines 12" and larger located under streets shall have 48 inches of cover at all points. 026402 Page 2 of 5 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 (3) TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL See City Standard Specification Section 022020, "Excavation and Backfill for Utilities" and applicable City Standard Details for Water. (4) POLYETHYLENE WRAPPING All ductile iron pipe, valves and fittings, except pipe or valves which are laid in encasement pipe or in concrete valve boxes, shall be wrapped in polyethylene. The polyethylene material shall have a thickness of 8 mils and may be either clear or black. The wrapping shall be lapped in such manner that all surfaces of pipe, valves and fittings, including joints, shall have a double thickness of polyethylene. If a single longitudinal lap is made using a double thickness of polyethylene, it shall be lapped a minimum of 18 inches and the lap shall be placed in the lower quadrant of the pipe and in such a manner that backfill material cannot fall into the lap. The polyethylene shall be secured in place with binder twine at not more than 6-foot intervals. If wrapping is applied before the pipe is placed in the trench, then special care shall be taken in handling the pipe so that the wrapping will not be damaged. Care shall also be exercised in backfilling around the pipe and fittings and in blocking fittings so as not to damage the wrapping. Any wrapping that may be damaged shall be repaired in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer and so as to form the best protection to the pipes. (5) SAND ENCASEMENT All pipe and fittings that are not enclosed in concrete valve boxes or laid in encasement pipe, shall be completely encased with a minimum of eight inches (8") of sand on the bottom and sides of waterlines smaller than 16 inches in diameter, and twelve inches (12") over the top of the waterline, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. This encasement includes the bottom, sides and top of pipe and fittings including bells, so that all portions will be encased with sand to insulate the pipe from the natural ground and from the backfill. The sand shall be compacted to a minimum of 90% Standard Proctor density. Provide twelve inches (12") of sand encasement all around the pipe for 16-inch diameter and larger waterlines. Sand shall be placed in a manner that will not injure the polyethylene wrapping and shall be compacted under, around the side, and over the pipe in a manner that will reduce settlement to a minimum and as approved by the Engineer. In order to reduce the amount of sand required, the trench bottom may be excavated in a rounded manner so as to maintain at least a minimum of eight inches of sand between the excavation and the pipe (twelve inches for 16-inch diameter and larger waterlines), unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. (6) LOWERING PIPE AND ACCESSORIES IN THE TRENCH a) General: The trench shall be excavated true and parallel to the pipe center line with a minimum clearance of eight inches below the pipe bottom and with a like clearance 026402 Page 3 of 5 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 from the bottom of the bell to the bottom of the bell hole. The trench shall then be refilled to the proper grade with sand as specified. The placing of the encasing material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil rock or other foreign matter. After final grading in the trench of the encasing material, bell holes shall be excavated at each joint. Proper implements, tools and facilities satisfactory to the Engineer shall be provided and used by the Contractor for the safe and efficient execution of the work. All pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and accessories shall be carefully lowered into the trench by means of a derrick, ropes or other suitable equipment, in such a manner as to prevent damage to pipe and fittings. Under no circumstances shall pipe or accessories be dropped or dumped into the trench. b) Inspection of Pipe and Accessories: The pipe and accessories shall be inspected for defects prior to lowering in the trench. Any defective, damaged or unsound pipe shall be replaced. c) Clean Pipe: All foreign matter or dirt shall be removed from the interior of the pipe prior to lowering into the trench. Pipe shall be kept clean both in and out of the trench at all times during the laying. (7) JOINTING PIPES All pipes shall be made up in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation. Pipe deflection shall not exceed 75% of the maximum amount recommended by the manufacturer. (8) CONCRETE THRUST BLOCKS Temporary thrust blocks or other means of carrying thrust loads generated by hydrostatic testing shall be provided at all ends of lines to be tested. Details of the end connections and method of temporary blocking shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. After satisfactory completion of the hydrostatic testing, this temporary blocking shall be removed so that connections may be made with existing lines. This work is subsidiary to waterline installation and no separate payment will be made for it. Temporary thrust blocks are not allowed for long term use. (9) METAL HARNESS Metal harness, tie rods and clamps, or swivel fittings shall be used to prevent pipe movement. Steel rods and clamps shall be galvanized or otherwise rust proofed, or coated with hot coal tar enamel, then wrapped with two layers of polyethylene wrapping. 026402 Page 4 of 5 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 (10) STERILIZATION a) Fittings: Valves, hydrants and fittings shall be stored on timbers and kept clean. Where soil or other substance has come in contact with the water surfaces of the fittings, the interior shall be washed and sterilized with 2% solution of calcium hypochlorite. b) Pipe: As each joint of pipe is laid, the Contractor, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, shall throw powdered calcium hypochlorite (70%) through the length of the joint(one pound for each 1,680 gallons of water to give 50 ppm). When the waterline is complete, and before testing, the waterline shall be slowly filled with water between valves and allowed to stand for 48 hours. After the sterilization period is completed, lines shall be flushed by the Contractor under the direct supervision of a representative of the City Water Department. The Engineer will take sample for testing two hours after refilling. If the sample does not pass State Health Department purification standards, the procedure shall be repeated. The entire procedure shall be coordinated under the supervision of the Water Division Superintendent/Engineer. During the sterilization process, valves shall be operated only under the supervision of the Water Division Superintendent/Engineer. There shall be a base fee of $100 paid by the Contractor to the City for each retest that is required. (11) HYDROSTATIC TESTING WATER SYSTEM See City Standard Specification Section 026202, "Hydrostatic Testing of Pressure Systems". (12) WATER SERVICE CONNECTIONS See Standard Specification Section 026404, "Water Service Lines". 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, waterlines will be measured by the linear foot for each size installed. Payment for waterlines will be made under the appropriate pipe material item and shall include, but not be limited to, trenching, dewatering, bedding, pipe (except for fittings), restraints, temporary thrust blocking, backfill, sterilization, and hydrostatic testing. Payment shall be full compensation for all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals required to complete the work. 026402 Page 5 of 5 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 SECTION 026409 TAPPING SLEEVES AND TAPPING VALVES 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work and materials required for furnishing and installing tapping sleeves, sleeves and valves required to complete the project. 2. MATERIALS Tapping sleeves shall have a Class 125 ANSI B16.1 outlet flange of cast iron, ductile iron or stainless steel. Sleeves shall be of ductile iron or 304 or 316 stainless steel. Lugs, bolts, washers and nuts shall be of 304 or 316 stainless steel. Iron sleeves shall be of the mechanical joint or caulked joint type as manufactured by Mueller, Clow, or approved equal. Stainless steel sleeves shall be of the compression gasket type capable of providing full support of the tapped pipe, as manufactured by Ford, Smith Blair, Romac, or approved equal. Gasket materials shall be of material suitable for potable water systems. Tapping sleeves shall be sized for the type and size of pipe to be tapped. The class of asbestos cement pipe that will most likely be encountered in the water will be Class 200 for pipes 6 inches in diameter and smaller, and Class 150 for larger pipes. It should be understood that existing pipes to be tapped may not be of the type of material and/or size that is shown on the drawings. The proper size and type of tapping sleeve shall be provided and installed regardless of what is encountered. Tapping valves shall conform to AWWA Standards and City Standard Specification Section 026411, "Gate Valves for Waterlines". Valve boxes shall be as described in City Standard Specification Section 026411, "Gate Valves for Waterlines". 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS Construction methods shall adhere to those set out in City Standard Specification Section 026402 "Waterlines", and City Standard Specification Section 022020 "Excavation and Backfill for Utilities". 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, tapping sleeves and tapping valves shall be measured on a per each basis for each size installed. Payment for tapping sleeves and tapping valves shall include, but not be limited to, furnishing and installing the valves complete in-place including joint materials, cast iron valve box, box extension, cover, concrete collar, and all other related items such as bolting, wrapping, cement-stabilized sand encasing, backfilling and compacting; and shall be full compensation for all labor, material, tools, equipment and incidentals required to properly install the valves as indicated and specified. 026409 Page 1 of 1 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 SECTION 026411 GATE VALVES FOR WATERLINES 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work necessary to provide and install all gate valves and valve boxes required to complete the project. 2. MATERIALS Gate Valves All valves shall meet the following requirements. Gate valves shall conform to AWWA Standard C515. 1) The gate valves shall be ductile iron resilient wedge (C515)with non-rising stems. 2) Valve ends shall be flanged or mechanical joint type or a combination of these as indicated or specified. A complete set of joint materials shall be furnished with each valve, except for bell ends and flanges. 3) Valves 16 inches and larger shall be furnished for horizontal installation—lay over. 4) Stem seals shall be the O-ring type on valves through 12-inch size. Valves 16 inches and larger may be equipped with stuffing boxes. 5) Valves shall open left(counter clockwise). Valves over 18 inches shall have the main valve stem furnished with a combination hand wheel and operating nut. 6) Tapping valves to be used with tapping saddles shall have one end mechanical joint. 7) No position indicator will be required. 8) Within 30 days after award of contract, the Contractor shall submit in triplicate, for approval, the following: a) Certified drawings of each size and type of valve 16 inches and larger showing principal dimensions, construction details, and materials used. b) On all size valves, the composition of bronze to be offered for various parts of the valve, complete with minimum tensile strength in psi, the minimum yield strength in psi, and the minimum elongation in 2" per cent. 026411 Page 1 of 2 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS Gate Valves Gate valves shall be installed as indicated on the drawings. Cast Iron Valve Boxes Valve boxes shall be installed as indicated on the drawings. When valves are in the street right-of- way, the top of box shall be set flush with the pavement or surrounding ground. In cultivated areas, the top of box shall be set twelve inches (12")below natural ground and long enough to be raised to natural ground at a future date. 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, gate valves for waterlines will be measured as a unit for each gate valve and valve box installed. Payment shall include, but not be limited to, furnishing and installing the valves complete in-place including joint materials, cast iron valve box, box extension, cover, concrete collar, and all other related items such as bolting, wrapping, cement- stabilized sand encasing, backfilling and compacting; and shall be full compensation for all labor, material, tools, equipment and incidentals required to properly install the valves as indicated and specified. 026411 Page 2 of 2 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 SECTION 026602 WASTEWATER FORCE MAIN 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work required for the installation of all wastewater force mains required to complete the project. 2. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1. All work shall be done in a workmanlike manner, in accordance with the drawings and specifications. 2. Prior to construction, the Contractor shall submit, for approval, certificates of inspection in duplicate to the Engineer from the pipe and fittings manufacturer(s) that said materials supplied have been inspected at the plant and meet the requirements of this specification. 3. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to keep on hand extra fittings and pipe, as he may deem necessary to make adjustments due to unknown obstructions, or to replace defective materials without delay to the project. When defective materials are discovered, they shall be immediately marked and removed from job site. 4. All pipe and fittings shall be clearly marked with trademark of manufacturer, batch number, location of plant, ASTM/ANSI/AWWA designation, size, pressure rating, class/SDR, and pressure rating. 5. Wastewater marking tape shall be continuously applied along the top of the force main, except at joints. The tape shall be green and 2 inches wide and state "Sewer". 3. MATERIALS A. Ductile Iron Pipe Fittings: See City Standard Specification Section 026206. B. PVC Pipe(AWWA C900 or C905): See City Standard Specification Section 026210. C. Concrete: Concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3000 PSI at 28 days. 026602 Page 1 of 7 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 D. Bedding Sand for Encasement: Sand shall be as indicated on the drawings. E. Non-Standard Fittings: Fittings having non-standard dimensions or fabricated especially for this project shall have a minimum pressure rating of 250 psi and durability comparable to that of the system. Drawings and specifications for non-standard fittings shall be submitted for approval of the Engineer prior to construction. Couplings and adapters for DIP and PVC connections shall be considered non-standard fittings. F. Ceramic Epoxy Lining for Ductile Iron Pipe Fittings: When indicated in the drawings or Special Provisions, the interior of DI pipe and fittings shall be furnished with a factory applied ceramic epoxy lining. Lining material shall be Protecto 401 Ceramic Epoxy Lining, of 40 mils nominal dry thickness. The epoxy shall be fused to the interior of the pipe by heat, forming a securely bonded lining. 1. Operating Limits: The lining shall have the capability of withstanding operating temperatures from 0°F to 170°F and withstanding sewage with a minimum pH of 4.0. 2. Application: The interior surface of each pipe shall be blast-cleaned to remove high temperature oxide film and to form an anchor pattern over the entire surface prior to heating and lining. Epoxy lining is to cover the inner surface of the pipe, extending from the plain or beveled end to the rear of the gasket socket. 3. Adhesion: Pipe shall be checked at the point of manufacture to assure bond of the lining to the pipe. Any indication of separation of lining from pipe is cause for rej ection. 4. Entrapped Material: Any sizeable protrusion in the lining, obviously caused by lining over foreign materials, shall be cause for rejection. 5. Separations: Linings which have separations caused during the lining operation shall be rejected. 6. Damages to Lining: Injurious mechanical damage, such as chuck marks and gouges, extending to bare metal are not acceptable. The pipe having such a defect shall be rejected. 7. Lining Thickness: Linings of nominal 40 mil thickness shall generally equal or exceed 40 mil throughout the pipe. At pipe ends, lining thickness may taper for a distance of 4 inches from the ends, to a minimum of 20 mil thickness. However, the lining shall not deviate by more than 5 mil from the 40 mil nominal thickness as required through the pipe. The lining thickness of each pipe and fitting shall be taken at the point of manufacture using a general electric magnetic dry film thickness device, digital coating thickness gauge, Positector 2000, or approved 026602 Page 2 of 7 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 equal. Pipe and/or fittings with a lining thickness less than the minimum specified shall be rejected. 8. Bell and Plain End Overcoat: The bell socket and the last 2 inches of the plain end of each pipe shall be coated on the inside and outside with a factory applied mastic or epoxy coating. This coating shall be a minimum of 10 mil thickness and shall be Koppers 300M, Industrial Ruff Stuff, Roskote Mastic A-938, or equal. 9. Pinholes and/or Holidays: The inside surface of each pipe or fitting shall be free of pinholes, holiday discontinuities and any blister type surface imperfections. The manufacturer shall check each pipe and fitting for holidays at the point of manufacture with a high voltage holiday detection device. Tinker & Rasor Model AP-W, or approved equal. Testing shall be conducted at the voltage as calculated in Section 3: Testing and Voltages of the "Recommended Practice for High Voltage Electrical Inspection of Pipeline Coatings Prior to Installation" as published by the National Association of Corrosion Engineers (MACE) Technical Practices Committee. All actual holiday testing procedures shall conform to NACE standard RP-02-74 and American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) Designation: G62- (latest) "Standard Test Methods for Holiday Detection in Pipeline Coatings." No holidays, misses or skips larger than a pinhole will be accepted for repair. A maximum of 6 holidays, as defined in ASTM Standard G62 and as determined by the detection test described above, on any one standard pipe length, fitting or special may be repaired with epoxy. 10. Independent Testing Laboratory Representation: All testing as specified herein including the lining thickness test and the holiday test shall be witnessed by a representative from an approved independent testing laboratory. The independent laboratory shall be a member of the American Council of Independent Laboratories. Manufacturer must submit for approval by the City the name of the testing laboratory and actual qualifications of actual representative that will witness the testing. The manufacturer shall furnish three (3) copies of report by independent testing laboratory depicting results of all testing witnessed by the independent laboratory. 11. Field Testing: Each pipe and fitting is subject to inspection in the field by the City for conformance to these specifications prior to installation. Any defects as specified herein with any pipe or fittings shall be grounds for rejection. 12. Sealing Cut Ends and Repairing Field Damaged Areas: Remove burrs from field cut ends and smooth out edge of epoxy lining. Remove all traces of oil or lubricant used during field cutting operation. All areas of loose lining associated with the cutting operation shall be removed and the exposed metal cleaned by sanding or scraping. For larger areas, roughen the bare pipe surface with a small chisel to provide an anchor pattern for the epoxy. The epoxy lining shall be "stripped" back by chiseling, cutting or scraping about V to 2" into well adhered 026602 Page 3 of 7 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 lined area before patching. After removal of loose lining and dirt, the area to be patched shall be "scratched" or "gouged" to offer an anchor pattern for the epoxy. Include an overlap of 1" to 2" of roughened epoxy lining in the area to be epoxy coated. The roughening shall be done with a rough grade emery paper (40 grit), rasp, or small chisel. Avoid honing, buffing, or wire brushing since these tend to make surface to be repaired too smooth. With the area to be sealed or repaired absolutely clean and suitably "roughened," apply a thick coat of two-part coal tar epoxy. The detailed mixing and application procedure for the epoxy shall follow the epoxy manufacturer's instructions. This heavy coat of epoxy shall be "worked" into the scratched surface by brushing. The Contractor shall maintain a supply of epoxy on the job site as required to seal cut ends and repair damaged pipe when encountered. Epoxy shall be of the type recommended or supplied by the pipe manufacturer. 13. Warranty: A five year warranty shall be furnished by the manufacturer on the serviceability of the lining. This warranty shall include, but not be limited to the statement, at any time up to the end of the fifth year from the date of pipe shipment: a. The lining shall not have disbound. b. The lining shall not have suffered any appreciable underfilm migration. C. The interior pipe metal, at points of pinholes or holidays, shall not have suffered detrimental deterioration. d. The lining shall have maintained its smooth surface characteristics. Contractor and/or manufacturer shall not make any exemption or exception to the above stated conditions or warranty within the limits as stated in this specification section. 14. Certification: The manufacturer shall furnish notarized certificates of compliance stating that the lining conforms to all requirements of these specifications. 4. CONSTRUCTION METHODS 4.1 HANDLING AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS A. General: The Contractor shall be responsible for the safe storage of all materials furnished to or by him and accepted by him until the materials have been incorporated in the completed project. All material found during the progress of the work to have cracks, flaws or other defects will be rejected, and the Contractor shall remove such defective material from the site of the work. 026602 Page 4 of 7 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 B. Unloading and Distribution of Materials at Work Site: Pipe and other materials shall be unloaded at point of delivery, hauled to, and distributed at the job site by the Contractor. Materials shall at all times be handled with care and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Care shall be taken not to scratch PVC pipe. Excessive scratching shall be considered cause for rejection of PVC pipe. Materials may be unloaded opposite or near the place where it is to be installed provided that it is to be incorporated into the work within ten days. The Contractor shall not distribute material in such a manner as to cause undue inconvenience to the public. C. Storing Materials: Materials that are not to be incorporated into the work within 10 days shall be stored on platforms. The interior of pipes and accessories shall be kept free from dirt and foreign matter. 4.2 INSTALLATION A. Alignment and Grade: All pipes shall be laid and maintained to the required line and grade. Temporary support and adequate protection of all underground and surface utility structures encountered in the progress of the work shall be furnished by the Contractor. Where the grade or alignment of the pipe is obstructed by existing utility structures such as conduits, ducts, pipes, connections to sewers or drains, the obstruction shall be permanently supported, relocated, removed, or reconstructed by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense, in cooperation with the owners of such utility structures. Force Mains shall be laid with no less than 36 inches of cover, unless indicated otherwise in the drawings. Greater depths will be permitted when required to avoid conflicts with existing structures. Lines shall be laid to grade which permit entrapped air to flow to a high point for release through an air release valve as shown on the drawings. The Contractor shall investigate well in advance of pipe laying for conflicts which may necessitate the readjustment of planned line and grade. B. Trench Excavation and Backfill: See City Standard Specification Section 022020 "Excavation and Backfill for Utilities and Sewers", and drawings. C. Force Main Connection to Existing Manhole: Where new force main is connected to existing manhole, the manhole shall be prepared to receive the proposed force main and restored after connection. Manhole inverts shall be repaved as necessary to provide a smooth flowing system. D. Polyethylene Encasement: All metallic pipe, valves and fittings, except those 026602 Page 5 of 7 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 which occur in encasement pipe or in concrete valve boxes, shall be wrapped in polyethylene. The polyethylene material shall have a thickness of 8 mils and may be either clear or black. The wrapping shall be lapped in such a manner that all surfaces of pipe valves and fittings, including joints, shall have a double thickness of polyethylene. If a single longitudinal lap is made using a double thickness of polyethylene, it shall be lapped a minimum of 18 inches and the lap shall be placed in the lower quadrant of the pipe and in such a manner that backfill material cannot fall into the lap. The polyethylene shall be secured in place with binder twine at not more than 6-foot intervals. If wrapping is applied before the pipe is placed in the trench, then special care shall be taken in handling the pipe so that the wrapping will not be damaged. Care shall also be exercised in backfilling around the pipe and fittings and in blocking fittings so as not to damage the wrapping. Any wrapping that may be damaged shall be repaired in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer and so as to form the best protection to the pipes. E. Sand Encasement: Sand shall be granular soil of low plasticity such that 30% minimum passes a #4 sieve and no more than 20 % passes a #200 sieve, and the plasticity index (PI) shall not exceed 10. Soils with a Unified Classification of SW and SP, or AASHTO Classification of A3 and some A2 soil shall be required. F. Pre-Placement Inspection: Prior to lowering into trench, all pipe and accessories shall be inspected for defects. All foreign matter or dirt shall be removed from the interior of the pipe prior to lowering into trench. Pipe shall be kept clean at all times during the laying. G. Jointing Pipe and Fittings: All pipes and fittings shall be made up in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation. Pipe deflection shall not exceed 75% of the maximum amount recommended by the manufacturer. H. Concrete Thrust Blocks: Temporary thrust blocks or other means of carrying thrust loads generated by hydrostatic testing shall be provided at all ends of lines to be tested. Details of the end connections and method of temporary blocking shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. After satisfactory completion of the hydrostatic test, this temporary blocking shall be removed so that connections may be made with existing lines. This work is subsidiary and no separate payment will be made for it. I. Restrained Joints and Fittings: Metal harness, tie rods and clamps or restrained fittings shall be used to prevent movement when soil conditions will not withstand thrust blocking. Steel rods and clamps shall be galvanized or otherwise rust-proofed or coated with hot coal tar enamel then wrapped with two layers of polyethylene wrapping. 026602 Page 6 of 7 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 4.3 HYDROSTATIC TESTING WASTEWATER FORCE MAIN See City Standard Specification Section 026202, Hydrostatic Testing of Pressure Systems. 5. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified in the Bid Form, wastewater force mains will be measured by the linear foot along the centerline of pipe. Payment shall include, but not be limited to, trenching, dewatering, pipe, bedding, thrust blocks, fittings, restraints and backfill, and shall be full compensation for all labor, materials, equipment, tools and incidentals required to complete the work at the unit price bid. 026602 Page 7 of 7 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 SECTION 027604 DISPOSAL OF WASTE FROM WASTEWATER CLEANING OPERATIONS 1. SCOPE: This specification governs all work required for disposal of waste from wastewater cleaning operations required to complete the project. 2. METHODS: Grit,rubble, dislodged bricks and other such inorganic waste that is removed during cleaning shall not be allowed to continue down stream of the operation. Organic solids that remain in suspension would be allowed to continue downstream through the wastewater system. A weir or other suitable trap shall be installed and maintained by the Contractor for the collection of such waste. This material shall be de-watered and delivered by the Contractor to a facility that is authorized to receive it. If this material is free of organic sludge and is sufficiently de-watered to pass the paint filter test,it would be acceptable for disposal at the Elliott Sanitary Landfill subj ect to prior approval of the facility and the associated disposal fees. The Contractor has the option of using the City's de-watering facilities. The City has six drying beds, each with a 1-foot high containment wall each with an area of about 2,300 square feet. These drying beds are at the Greenwood Wastewater Treatment Plant, 1541 Saratoga. The Contractor would be required to haul and handle the material to, at and from the facility as well as the restoration of drying beds. Restoration of the drying beds includes the removal of all the de- watered material and the replacement of the existing sand bed with new sand. All work required within the treatment plant, including the replacement of sand shall be in accordance with the requirements set forth by the Plant Supervisor. The use of the drying beds would be subject to prior approval of the facility and the associated de-watering fees. If the City's facilities are used for de-watering or disposal of waste, the Contractor shall be responsible for making contact with the appropriate Solid Waste or Wastewater Officials or both, making all arrangements for the use of City facilities, scheduling of delivery and pickup, etc. Materials and handling operations shall meet the requirements set forth by said Officials. Failure to meet these requirements shall be cause for rejection of the materials by either the landfill or the treatment plant operations. Proper disposal of this waste shall be responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with written documentation of the proper disposal of this waste. 3. MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT: Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form,this work shall be considered subsidiary to the project. 027604 Page 1 of 1 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 SECTION 030020 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern for the materials used; for the storing and handling of materials; and for the proportioning and mixing of concrete for culverts, manholes, inlets, curb and gutter, sidewalks, driveways, curb ramps, headwalls and wingwalls, riprap, and incidental concrete construction. The concrete shall be composed of Portland cement, aggregates (fine and coarse), admixtures if desired or required, and water, proportioned and mixed as hereinafter provided. 2. MATERIALS (1) Cement The cement shall be either Type I, II or III Portland cement conforming to ASTM Designation: C150, modified as follows: Unless otherwise specified by the Engineer, the specific surface area of Type I and II cements shall not exceed 2000 square centimeters per gram (Wagner Turbidimeter— TxDOT Test Method Tex-310-D). For concrete piling, the above limit on specific surface area is waived for Type II cement only. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer, with each shipment, a statement as to the specific surface area of the cement expressed in square centimeters per gram. For cement strength requirements, either the flexural or compressive test may be used. Either Type I or II cement shall be used unless Type II is specified on the plans. Except when Type II is specified on the plans, Type III cement may be used when the anticipated air temperature for the succeeding 12 hours will not exceed 60°F. Type III cement may be used in all precast prestressed concrete, except in piling when Type II cement is required for substructure concrete. Different types of cement may be used in the same structure, but all cement used in any one monolithic placement shall be of the same type and brand. Only one brand of each type will be permitted in any one structure unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer. Cement may be delivered in bulk where adequate bin storage is provided. All other cement shall be delivered in bags marked plainly with the name of the manufacturer and the type of cement. Similar information shall be provided in the bills of lading accompanying each shipment of packaged or bulk cement. Bags shall contain 94 pounds net. All bags shall be in good condition at time of delivery. All cement shall be properly protected against dampness. No caked cement will be accepted. Cement remaining in storage for a prolonged period of time may be retested and rejected if it fails to conform to any of the requirements of these specifications. 030020 Page 1 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 (2) Mixing Water Water for use in concrete and for curing shall be free from oils, acids, organic matter or other deleterious substances and shall not contain more than 1000 parts per million of chlorides as CL nor more than 1000 parts per million of sulfates as 5O4. Water from municipal supplies approved by the State Health Department will not require testing, but water from other sources will be sampled and tested before use in structural concrete. Tests shall be made in accordance with the "Method of Test for Quality of Water to be Used in Concrete" (AASHTO Method T26), except where such methods are in conflict with provisions of this specification. (3) Coarse Aggregate Coarse aggregate shall consist of durable particles of gravel, crushed blast furnace slag, crushed stone, or combinations thereof, free from frozen material or injurious amount of salt, alkali, vegetable matter, or other objectionable material either free or as an adherent coating; and its quality shall be reasonably uniform throughout. It shall not contain more than 0.25 percent by weight of clay lumps, nor more than 1.0 percent by weight of shale, nor more than 5 percent by weight of laminated and/or friable particles when tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-413-A. It shall have a wear of not more than 40 percent when tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-410-A. Unless otherwise specified on the plans, coarse aggregate will be subjected to five cycles of the soundness test in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-411-A. The loss shall not be greater than 12 percent when sodium sulfate is used, or 18 percent when magnesium sulfate is used. Permissible sizes of aggregate shall be governed by Table 4 and Table 1, except that when exposed aggregate surfaces are required, coarse aggregate gradation will be as specified on the plans. When tested by approved methods, the coarse aggregate, including combinations of aggregates when used, shall conform to the grading requirements shown in Table 1. 030020 Page 2 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 TABLE 1 Coarse Aggregate Gradation Chart Percent Retained on Each Sieve Aggregate Nominal 2-'/2 2 1-'/2 1 3/4 1/2 3/8 Grade No. Size In. In. In. In. In. In. In. No. 4 No. 8 1 2 in. 0 0 to 15 60 to 95 to 20 to 80 100 50 2 (467)* 1-'V2 in. 0 0 30 to 70 95 to to 65 to 100 5 90 4 (57)* 1 in. 0 0 40 90 to 95 to to to 100 100 5 75 8 3/8 in. 0 0 to 35 to 90 to 5 80 100 *Numbers in parenthesis indicate conformance with ASTM C33. The aggregate shall be washed. The Loss by Decantation (TxDOT Test Method Tex-406-A) plus the allowable weight of clay lumps, shall not exceed one percent, or the value shown on the plans, whichever is smaller. (4) Fine Aggregate Fine aggregate shall consist of clean, hard, durable and uncoated particles of natural or manufactured sand or a combination thereof, with or without a mineral filler. It shall be free from frozen material or injurious amounts of salt, alkali, vegetable matter or other objectionable material and it shall not contain more than 0.5 percent by weight of clay lumps. When subjected to the color test for organic impurities (TxDOT Test Method Tex-408-A), it shall not show a color darker than standard. The fine aggregate shall produce a mortar having a tensile strength equal to or greater than that of Ottawa sand mortar when tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-317-D. Where manufactured sand is used in lieu of natural sand for slab concrete subject to direct traffic, the acid insoluble residue of the fine aggregate shall be not less than 28 percent by weight when tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-612-J. When tested by approved methods, the fine aggregate or combination of aggregates, including mineral filler, shall conform to the grading requirements shown in Table 2. 030020 Page 3 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 TABLE 2 Fine Aggregate Gradation Chart Percent Retained on Each Sieve Aggregate Grade No. 3/8 In. No. 4 No. 8 No. 16 No. 30 No. 50 No. 100 No. 200 1 0 0 to 5 0 to 20 15 to 50 35 to 75 70 to 90 90 to 100 97 to 100 NOTE 1: Where manufactured sand is used in lieu of natural sand, the percent retained on the No. 200 sieve shall be 94 to 100. NOTE 2: Where the sand equivalent value is greater than 85, the retainage on the No. 50 sieve may be 70 to 94 percent. Fine aggregate will be subjected to the Sand Equivalent Test (TxDOT Test Method Tex-203-F). The sand equivalent shall not be less than 80 nor less than the value shown on the plans, whichever is greater. For concrete Classes `A' and `C', the fineness modulus as defined below for fine aggregates shall be between 2.30 and 3.10. The fineness modulus will be determined by adding the percentages by weight retained on the following sieves, and dividing by 100; Nos. 4, 8, 16, 30, 50 and 100. (5) Mineral Filler Mineral filler shall consist of stone dust, clean crushed sand, or other approved inert material. (6) Mortar(Grout) Mortar for repair of concrete shall consist of 1 part cement, 2 parts finely graded sand, and enough water to make the mixture plastic. When required to prevent color difference, white cement shall be added to produce the color required. When required by the Engineer, latex adhesive shall be added to the mortar. (7) Admixtures Calcium Chloride will not be permitted. Unless otherwise noted, air-entraining, retarding and water-reducing admixtures may be used in all concrete and shall conform to the following requirements: A "water-reducing, retarding admixture" is defined as a material which, when added to a concrete mixture in the correct quantity, will reduce the quantity of mixing water required to produce concrete of a given consistency and will retard the initial set of the concrete. A "water-reducing admixture" is defined as a material which, when added to a concrete mixture in the correct quantity, will reduce the quantity of mixing water required to produce concrete of a 030020 Page 4 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 given consistency. (a) Retarding and Water-Reducing Admixtures. The admixture shall meet the requirements for Type A and Type D admixture as specified in ASTM Designation: C494, modified as follows: (1) The water-reducing retarder shall retard the initial set of the concrete a minimum of 2 hours and a maximum of 4 hours, at a specified dosage rate, at a temperature of 90°F. (2) The cement used in any series of tests shall be either the cement proposed for specific work or a "reference" Type I cement from one mill. (3) Unless otherwise noted on the plans, the minimum relative durability factor shall be 80. The air-entraining admixture used in the referenced and test concrete shall be neutralized Vinsol resin. (b) Air-Entraining Admixture. The admixture shall meet the requirements of ASTM Designation: C260, modified as follows: (1) The cement used in any series of tests shall be either the cement proposed for specific work or a "reference" Type I cement from one mill. (2) Unless otherwise noted on the plans, the minimum relative durability factor shall be 80. The air-entraining admixture used in the referenced concrete shall be neutralized Vinsol resin. 3. STORAGE OF CEMENT All cement shall be stored in well-ventilated weatherproof buildings or approved bins, which will protect it from dampness or absorption of moisture. Storage facilities shall be ample, and each shipment of packaged cement shall be kept separated to provide easy access for identification and inspection. The Engineer may permit small quantities of sacked cement to be stored in the open for a maximum of 48 hours on a raised platform and under waterproof covering. 4. STORAGE OF AGGREGATE The method of handling and storing concrete aggregate shall prevent contamination with foreign materials. If the aggregates are stored on the ground, the sites for the stockpiles shall be clear of all vegetation and level. The bottom layer of aggregate shall not be disturbed or used without recleaning. 030020 Page 5 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 When conditions require the use of two or more sizes of aggregates, they shall be separated to prevent intermixing. Where space is limited, stockpiles shall be separated by physical barriers. Methods of handling aggregates during stockpiling and subsequent use shall be such that segregation will be minimized. Unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer, all aggregate shall be stockpiled at least 24 hours to reduce the free moisture content. 5. MEASUREMENT OF MATERIALS The measurement of the materials, except water, used in batches of concrete, shall be by weight. The fine aggregate, coarse aggregate and mineral filler shall be weighed separately. Where bulk cement is used, it shall be weighed separately, but batch weighing of sacked cement will not be required. Where sacked cement is used, the quantities of material per batch shall be based upon using full bags of cement. Batches involving the use of fractional bags will not be permitted. Allowance shall be made for the water content in the aggregates. Bags of cement varying more than 3 percent from the specified weight of 94 pounds may be rejected, and when the average weight per bag in any shipment, as determined by weighing 50 bags taken at random, is less than the net weight specified, the entire shipment may be rejected. If the shipment is accepted, the Engineer will adjust the concrete mix to a net weight per bag fixed by an average of all individual weights which are less than the average weight determined from the total number weighed. 6. CLASSIFICATION AND MIX DESIGN It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish the mix design, using a coarse aggregate factor acceptable to the Engineer, for the class(es) of concrete specified. The mix shall be designed by a qualified concrete technician to conform with the requirements contained herein and in accordance with the THD Bulletin C-11. The Contractor shall perform, at his own expense, the work required to substantiate the design, except the testing of strength specimens, which will be done by the Engineer. Complete concrete design data shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. It shall also be the responsibility of the Contractor to determine and measure the batch quantity of each ingredient, including all water, so that the mix conforms to these specifications and any other requirements shown on the plans. Trial batches will be made and tested using all of the proposed ingredients prior to placing the concrete, and when the aggregate and/or brand of cement or admixture is changed. Trial batches shall be made in the mixer to be used on the job. When transit mix concrete is to be used, the trial designs will be made in a transit mixer representative of the mixers to be used. Batch size shall not be less than 50 percent of the rated mixing capacity of the truck. Mix designs from previous or concurrent jobs may be used without trial batches if it is shown that 030020 Page 6 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 no substantial change in any of the proposed ingredients has been made. The coarse aggregate factor shall not be more than 0.82, except that when the voids in the coarse aggregate exceed 48 percent of the total dry loose volume, the coarse aggregate factor shall not exceed 0.85. The coarse aggregate factor shall not be less than 0.70 for Grades 1, 2 and 3 aggregates. If the strength required for the class of concrete being produced is not secured with the cement specified in Table 4, the Contractor may use an approved water-reducing or retarding admixture, or he shall furnish aggregates with different characteristics which will produce the required results. Additional cement may be required or permitted as a temporary measure until the redesign is checked. Water-reducing or retarding agents may be used with all classes of concrete at the option of the Contractor. When water-reducing or retarding agents are used at the option of the Contractor, reduced dosage of the admixture will be permitted. Entrained air will be required in accordance with Table 4. The concrete shall be designed to entrain 5 percent air when Grade 2 coarse aggregate is used and 6 percent when Grade 3 coarse aggregate is used. Concrete as placed in the structure shall contain the proper amount as required above with a tolerance of plus or minus 1.5 percentage points. Occasional variations beyond this tolerance will not be cause for rejection. When the quantity of entrained air is found to be above 7 percent with Grade 2 coarse aggregate or above 8 percent for Grade 3 coarse aggregate, additional test beams or cylinders will be made. If these beams or cylinders pass the minimum flexural or compressive requirements, the concrete will not be rejected because of the variation in air content. 7. CONSISTENCY In cases where the consistency requirements cannot be satisfied without exceeding the maximum allowable amount of water, the Contractor may use, or the Engineer may require, an approved water-reducing or retarding agent, or the Contractor shall furnish additional aggregates or aggregates with different characteristics, which will produce the required results. Additional cement may be required or permitted as a temporary measure until aggregates are changed and designs checked with the different aggregates or admixture. The consistency of the concrete as placed should allow the completion of all finishing operations without the addition of water to the surface. When field conditions are such that additional moisture is needed for the final concrete surface finishing operation, the required water shall be applied to the surface by fog spray only, and shall be held to a minimum. The concrete shall be workable, cohesive, possess satisfactory finishing qualities, and of the stiffest consistency that can be placed and vibrated into a homogenous mass. Excessive bleeding shall be avoided. Slump requirements will be as specified in Table 3. 030020 Page 7 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 TABLE 3 Slump Requirements Concrete Designation Desired Slump Max. Slump Structural Concrete: (1) Thin-Walled Sections (9" or less) 4 inches 5 inches (2) Slabs, Caps, Columns,Piers, Wall Sections over 9", etc. 3 inches 4 inches Underwater or Seal Concrete 5 inches 6 inches Riprap, Curb, Gutter and Other Miscellaneous Concrete 2.5 inches 4 inches NOTE: No concrete will be permitted with slump in excess of the maximums shown. 8. QUALITY OF CONCRETE General The concrete shall be uniform and workable. The cement content, maximum allowable water- cement ratio, the desired and maximum slump and the strength requirements of the various classes of concrete shall conform to the requirements of Table 3 and Table 4 and as required herein. During the process of the work, the Engineer or his designated representative will cast test cylinders or beams as a check on the compressive or flexural strength of the concrete actually placed. Test cylinders must be picked up by the testing lab within 24 hours. A test shall be defined as the average of the breaking strength of two cylinders or two beams, as the case may be. Specimens will be tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Methods Tex-418-A or Tex-420-A. Test beams or cylinders will be required as specified in the contract documents. For small placements on structures such as manholes, inlets, culverts, wingwalls, etc., the Engineer may vary the number of tests to a minimum of one for each 25 cubic yards placed over a several day period. All test specimens, beams or cylinders, representing tests for removal of forms and/or falsework shall be cured using the same methods, and under the same conditions as the concrete represented. "Design Strength" beams and cylinders shall be cured in accordance with THD Bulletin C-11. The Contractor shall provide and maintain curing facilities as described in THD Bulletin C-11 for the purpose of curing test specimens. Provision shall be made to maintain the water in the curing tank at temperatures between 70°F and 90°F. When control of concrete quality is by twenty-eight-day compressive tests, job control will be by seven-day compressive tests which are shown to provide the required twenty-eight-day strength, based on results from trial batches. If the required seven-day strength is not secured with the 030020 Page 8 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 cement specified in Table 4, changes in the batch design will be made. TABLE 4 Classes of Concrete Minimum Class Compressive Min. Beam Maximum Coarse of Sacks Cement Strength (f c) Strength Water-Cement Aggregate Concrete per C.Y. (min.) 28-Day(psi) 7-Day(psi) Ratio (gal/sack) No. A* 5.0 3000 500*** 6.5 2-4-8**** B* 4.5 2500 417 8.0 2-4-8**** C* 6.0 3600 600*** 6.0 1-2-4** D 6.0 3000 500 7.0 2-4 S 6.5 4000 570 5.0 2-4 *Entrained Air(slabs,piers and bent concrete). **Grade 1 Coarse Aggregate may be used in foundation only(except cased drilled shafts). ***When Type H Cement is used with Class C Concrete, the 7-day beam break requirement will be 550 psi; with Class A Concrete, the minimum 7-day beam break requirement will be 460 psi. ****Permission to use Grade 8 Aggregate must have prior approval of the Engineer. 9. MIXING CONDITIONS The concrete shall be mixed in quantities required for immediate use. Any concrete which is not in place within the limits outlined in City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures", Article "Placing Concrete-General", shall not be used. Retamping of concrete will not be permitted. In threatening weather, which may result in conditions that will adversely affect the quality of the concrete to be placed, the Engineer may order postponement of the work. Where work has been started and changes in weather conditions require protective measures, the Contractor shall furnish adequate shelter to protect the concrete against damage from rainfall, or from freezing temperatures. If necessary to continue operations during rainfall, the Contractor shall also provide protective coverings for the material stockpiles. Aggregate stockpiles need be covered only to the extent necessary to control the moisture conditions in the aggregates to adequately control the consistency of the concrete. 10. MIXING AND MIXING EQUIPMENT All equipment, tools, and machinery used for hauling materials and performing any part of the work shall be maintained in such condition to insure completion of the work underway without excessive delays for repairs or replacements. The mixing shall be done in a batch mixer of approved type and size that will produce uniform 030020 Page 9 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 distribution of the material throughout the mass. Mixers may be either the revolving drum type or the revolving blade type, and shall be capable of producing concrete meeting the requirements of these specifications. After all the ingredients are assembled in the drum, the mixing shall continue not less than 1 minute for mixers of one cubic yard or less capacity plus 15 seconds for each additional cubic yard or portion thereof. The mixer shall operate at the speed and capacity designated by the Mixer Manufacturers Bureau of the Associated General Contractors of America. The mixer shall have a plate affixed showing the manufacturer's recommended operating data. The absolute volume of the concrete batch shall not exceed the rated capacity of the mixer. The entire contents of the drum shall be discharged before any materials are placed therein for the succeeding batch. The first batch of concrete materials placed in the mixer for each placement shall contain an extra quantity of sand, cement and water sufficient to coat the inside surface of the drum. Upon the cessation of mixing for any considerable length of time, the mixer shall be thoroughly cleaned. The concrete mixer shall be equipped with an automatic timing device which is put into operation when the skip is raised to its full height and dumping. This device shall lock the discharging mechanism and prevent emptying of the mixer until all the materials have been mixed together for the minimum time required, and it shall ring a bell after the specified time of mixing has elapsed. The water tank shall be arranged so that the amount of water can be measured accurately, and when the tank starts to discharge, the inlet supply shall cut off automatically. Whenever a concrete mixer is not adequate or suitable for the work, it shall be removed from the site upon a written order from the Engineer and a suitable mixer provided by the Contractor. Pick-up and thro-over blades in the drum of the mixer which are worn down more than 10 percent in depth shall be repaired or replaced with new blades. Improperly mixed concrete shall not be placed in the structure. Job mix concrete shall be concrete mixed in an approved batch mixer in accordance with the requirements stated above, adjacent to the structure for which the concrete is being mixed, and moved to the placement site in non-agitating equipment. 11. READY-MIX PLANTS A. General. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to furnish concrete meeting all requirement of the governing specification sections, and concrete not meeting the slump, workability and consistency requirements of the governing specification sections shall not 030020 Page 10 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 be placed in the structure or pavement. Ready-Mixed Concrete shall be mixed and delivered by means of one of the following approved methods. (1) Mixed completely in a stationary mixer and transported to the point of delivery in a truck agitator or a truck mixer operating at truck agitator or truck mixer agitation speed. (Central-Mix Concrete) (2) Mixed complete in a truck mixer and transported to the placement site at mixing and/or agitating speed (Transit-Mix Concrete), subject to the following provisions: (a) Truck mixers will be permitted to transport concrete to the job site at mixing speed if equipped with double actuated counters which will separate revolutions at mixing speed from total revolutions. (b) Truck mixers equipped with a single actuated counter counting total revolutions of the drum shall mix the concrete at the plant not less than 50 nor more than 70 revolutions at mixing speed, transport it to the job site at agitating speed and complete the required mixing before placing the concrete. (3) Mixed completely in a stationery mixer and transported to the job site in approved non-agitating trucks with special bodies. This method of transporting will be permitted for concrete pavement only. B. Equipment. (1) Batching Plant. The batching plant shall be provided with adequate bins for batching all aggregates and materials required by the specifications. Bulk cement shall be weighed on a scale separate from those used for other materials and in a hopper entirely free and independent of that used for weighing the aggregates. (2) Mixers and Agitators. (a) General: Mixers shall be of an approved stationary or truck-type capable of combining the ingredients into a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass. Facilities shall be provided to permit ready access to the inside of the drum for inspection, cleaning and repair of blades. Mixers and agitators shall be subject to daily examination for changes in condition due to accumulation of hardened concrete and/or wear of blades, and any hardened concrete shall be removed before the mixer will be permitted to be used. Worn blades shall be repaired or replaced with new in 030020 Page 11 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 accordance with the manufacturer's design and arrangement for that particular unit when any part or section is worn as much as 10 percent below the original height of the manufacturer's design. (b) Stationary Mixers: These shall conform to the requirements of Article "Mixing and Mixing Equipment". Truck mixers mounted on a stationary base will not be considered as a stationary mixer. (c) Truck Mixers: In addition, truck mixers shall comply with the following requirements: An engine in satisfactory working condition and capable of accurately gauging the desired speed of rotation shall be mounted as an integral part of the mixing unit for the purpose of rotating the drum. Truck mixers equipped with a transmission that will govern the speed of the drum within the specified revolutions per minute(rpm)will not require a separate engine. All truck mixers shall be equipped with actuated counters by which the proper number of revolutions of the drum, as specified in Article 11. A. above, may be readily verified. The counters shall be read and recorded at the start of mixing at mixing speeds. Each until shall have adequate water supply and accurate metering or gauging devices for measuring the amount used. (d) Agitators: Concrete agitators shall be of the truck type, capable of maintaining a thoroughly mixed and uniform concrete mass and discharging it within the same degree of uniformity specified for mixers. Agitators shall comply with all of the requirements for truck mixers, except for the actual mixing requirements. C. Operation of Plant and Equipment. Delivery of ready-mixed concrete shall equal or exceed the rate approved by the Engineer for continuous placement. In all cases, the delivery of concrete to the placement site shall assure compliance with the time limits in the applicable specification for depositing successive batches in any monolithic unit. The Contractor shall satisfy the Engineer that adequate standby trucks are available. A standard ticket system will be used for recording concrete batching, mixing and delivery date. Tickets will be delivered to the job inspector. Loads arriving without ticket and/or in unsatisfactory condition shall not be used. When a stationary mixer is used for the entire mixing operation, the mixing time for one cubic yard of concrete shall be one minute plus 15 seconds for each additional cubic yard or portion thereof. This mixing time shall start when all cement, aggregates and initial water have entered the drum. 030020 Page 12 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 The mixer shall be charged so that some of the mixing water will enter the drum in advance of the cement and aggregate. All of the mixing water shall be in the drum by the end of the first one- fourth of the specified mixing time. Water used to flush down the blades after charging shall be accurately measured and included in the quantity of mixing water. The introduction of the initial mixing water, except blade wash down water and that permitted in this Article, shall be prior to or simultaneous with the charging of the aggregates and cement. The loading of truck mixers shall not exceed 63 percent of the total volume of the drum. When used as an agitator only, the loading shall not exceed 80 percent of the drum volume. When Ready-Mix Concrete is used, additional mortar (one sack cement, three parts sand and sufficient water) shall be added to the batch to coat the drum of the mixer or agitator truck, and this shall be required for every load of Class C concrete only and for the first batch from central mix plants. A portion of the mixing water, required by the batch design to produce the desired slump, may be withheld and added at the job site, but only with permission of the Engineer and under his supervision. When water is added under the above conditions, it shall be thoroughly mixed as specified below for water added at the job site. Mixing speed shall be attained as soon as all ingredients are in the mixer, and each complete batch (containing all the required ingredients) shall be mixed not less than 70 nor more than 100 revolutions of the drum at mixing speed except that when water is added at the job site, 25 revolutions (minimum) at mixing speed will be required to uniformly disperse the additional water throughout the mix. Mixing speed shall be as designated by the manufacturer. All revolutions after the prescribed mixing time shall be at agitating speed. The agitating speed shall be not less than one (1) nor more than five (5) rpm. The drum shall be kept in continuous motion from the time mixing is started until the discharge is completed. 12. PLACING, CURING AND FINISHING The placing of concrete, including construction of forms and falsework, curing and finishing, shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures". 13. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, the quantities of concrete of the various classifications which will constitute the completed and accepted structure(s) in-place will be measured by the cubic yard, per each, square foot, square yard or linear foot, as the case may be. Measurement will be as shown on the drawings and/or in the Bid Form. Payment shall be full compensation for furnishing, hauling, mixing, placing, curing and finishing all concrete; all grouting and pointing; furnishing and placing drains; furnishing and placing metal flashing strips; furnishing and placing expansion joint material required by this specification or shown on the plans; and for all forms and falsework, labor, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 030020 Page 13 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 SECTION 032020 REINFORCING STEEL 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern the furnishing and placing of reinforcing steel, deformed and smooth, of the size and quantity designated on the plans and in accordance with these specifications. 2. MATERIALS Unless otherwise designated on the plans, all bar reinforcement shall be deformed, and shall conform to ASTM Designation: A 615, Grades 60 or 75, and shall be open hearth, basic oxygen, or electric furnace new billet steel. Large diameter new billet steel (Nos. 14 and 18), Grade 75, will be permitted for straight bars only. Where bending of bar sizes No. 14 or No. 18 of Grade 60 is required, bend testing shall be performed on representative specimens as described for smaller bars in the applicable ASTM Specification. The required bend shall be 90 degrees around a pin having a diameter of 10 times the nominal diameter of the bar. Spiral reinforcement shall be smooth (not deformed) bars or wire of the minimum diameter shown on the plans, and shall be made by one or more of the following processes: open hearth, basic oxygen, or electric furnace. Bars shall be rolled from billets reduced from ingots and shall comply with ASTM Designation: A 306, Grade 65 minimum (references to ASTM Designation: A 29 is voided). Dimensional tolerances shall be in accordance with ASTM Designation: A 615, or ASTM Designation: A 615, Grade 60, except for deformations. Wire shall be cold-drawn from rods that have been hot-rolled from billets and shall comply with ASTM Designation: A 185. In cases where the provisions of this specification are in conflict with the provisions of the ASTM Designation to which reference is made, the provisions of this specification shall govern. Report of chemical analysis showing the percentages of carbon, manganese, phosphorus and sulphur will be required for all reinforcing steel when it is to be welded. 032020 Page 1 of 6 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 The nominal size and area and the theoretical weight of reinforcing steel bars covered by this specification are as follows: Nominal Weight per Bar Size Diameter, Nominal Area, Linear Foot, Number In. Sq. In. Pounds 2 0.250 0.05 0.167 3 0.375 0.11 0.376 4 0.500 0.20 0.668 5 0.625 0.31 1.043 6 0.750 0.44 1.502 7 0.875 0.60 2.044 8 1.000 0.79 2.670 9 1.128 1.00 3.400 10 1.270 1.27 4.303 11 1.410 1.56 5.313 14 1.693 2.25 7.6 18 2.257 4.00 13.60 Smooth round bars shall be designated by size number through No. 4. Smooth bars larger than No. 4 shall be designated by diameter in inches. When wire is ordered by gauge numbers, the following relation between gauge number and diameter, in inches, shall apply unless otherwise specified: Equivalent Equivalent Gauge Diameter, Gauge Diameter, Number Inches Number Inches 0 0.3065 8 0.1620 1 0.2830 9 0.1483 2 0.2625 10 0.1350 3 0.2437 11 0.1205 4 0.2253 12 0.1055 5 0.2070 13 0.0915 6 0.1920 14 0.0800 7 0.1770 032020 Page 2 of 6 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 3. BENDING The reinforcement shall be bent cold, true to the shapes indicated on the plans. Bending shall preferably be done in the shop. Irregularities in bending shall be cause for rejection. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, the inside diameter of bar bends, in terms of the nominal bar diameter(d), shall be as follows: Bends of 90 degrees and greater in stirrups, ties and other secondary bars that enclose another bar in the bend: Grade 60 #3, #4, #5 4d #6, #7, #8 5d All bends in main bars and in secondary bars not covered above: Grade 60 Grade 75 #3 thru#8 6d -- #9, #10 8d -- #11 8d 8d #14, #18 10d -- 032020 Page 3 of 6 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 4. TOLERANCES Fabricating tolerances for bars shall be within 3 percent of specified or as follows: Plan Dimon. a 3/4" 7/8'* Sar or Smatter--Pfon. Oirnen_ = 1/2" 1'* Sar or t_arger --P+ons D+men. H c over 6"-agmen.- Zero or -1/27 ►i = 6 0-'nd leas-i?iersen. • Zero or -1/4 H 7/8- Bar or Smaller-Plan Dimon- I'. imon_1" Sar or Larger-Plan Dimon. s 1" Spiral or Circular Tie Tie air Stirrup Plan pienen.:1 IP§on Din�s 1/2 5. STORING Steel reinforcement shall be stored above the surface of the ground upon platforms, skids or other supports, and shall be protected as far as practicable from mechanical injury and surface deterioration caused by exposure to conditions producing rust. When placed in the work, reinforcement shall be free from dirt, paint, grease, oil, or other foreign materials. Reinforcement shall be free from injurious defects such as cracks and laminations. Rust, surface seams, surface irregularities or mill scale will not be cause for rejection, provided the minimum dimensions, cross- sectional area and tensile properties of a hand wire crushed specimen meets the physical requirements for size and grade of steel specified. 6. SPLICES No splicing of bars, except when provided on the plans or specified herein, will be permitted without written approval of the Engineer. Splices will not be permitted in main reinforcement at points of maximum stress. When permitted in main bars, splices in adjacent bars shall be staggered a minimum of two splice lengths. 032020 Page 4 of 6 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 TABLE 1 Minimum Lap Requirements Lia Uncoated Coated Lap in inches > 40d 60d Where: d=bar diameter in inches Welding of reinforcing bars may be used only where shown on the plans or as permitted herein. All welding operations, processes, equipment, materials, workmanship and inspection shall conform to the requirements of the drawings and industry standards. All splices shall be of such dimension and character as to develop the full strength of bar being spliced. End preparation for butt welding reinforcing bars shall be done in the field. Delivered bars shall be of sufficient length to permit this practice. For box culvert extensions with less than one foot of fill, the existing longitudinal bars shall have a 20-diameter lap with the new bars. For box culvert extensions with more than one foot of fill, a minimum of 6 inches lap will be required. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, dowel bars transferring tensile stresses shall have a minimum embedment equal to the minimum lap requirements shown in Table 1. Shear transfer dowels shall have a minimum embedment of 12 inches. 7. PLACING Reinforcement shall be placed as near as possible in the position shown on the plans. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, dimensions shown for reinforcement are to the centers of the bars. In the plane of the steel parallel to the nearest surface of concrete, bars shall not vary from plan placement by more than one-twelfth of the spacing between bars. In the plane of the steel perpendicular to the nearest surface of concrete, bars shall not vary from plan placement by more than one-quarter inch. Cover of concrete to the nearest surface of steel shall meet the above requirements but shall never be less than one inch or as otherwise shown on the plans. Vertical stirrups shall always pass around the main tension members and be attached securely thereto. The reinforcing steel shall be spaced its required distance from the form surface by means of approved galvanized metal spacers, metal spacers with plastic coated tips, stainless steel spacers, plastic spacers, or approved pre-cast mortar or concrete blocks. For approval of plastic spacers on the project, representative samples of the plastic shall show no visible indications of deterioration after immersion in a 5 percent solution of sodium hydroxide for 120 hours. All reinforcing steel shall be tied at all intersections, except that where spacing is less than one foot in each direction, alternate intersections only need be tied. Before any concrete is placed, all mortar shall be cleaned from the reinforcement. Precast mortar or concrete blocks to be used for holding steel in position adjacent to formed surfaces shall be cast in molds meeting the approval of the Engineer and shall be cured by covering with wet burlap or 032020 Page 5 of 6 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 cotton mats for a period of 72 hours. The blocks shall be cast in the form of a frustum of a cone or pyramid with the smaller face placed against the forms. A suitable tie wire shall be provided in each block, to be used for anchoring to the steel. Except in unusual cases, and when specifically otherwise authorized by the Engineer, the size of the surface to be placed adjacent to the forms shall not exceed two and one-half inches square or the equivalent thereof in cases where circular or rectangular areas are provided. Blocks shall be cast accurately to the thickness required, and the surface to be placed adjacent to the forms shall be a true plane free of surface imperfections. Reinforcement shall be supported and tied in such manner that a sufficiently rigid case of steel is provided. If the cage is not adequately supported to resist settlement or floating upward of the steel, overturning of truss bars or movement in any direction during concrete placement, permission to continue concrete placement will be withheld until corrective measures are taken. Sufficient measurements shall be made during concrete placement to insure compliance with the first paragraph of Article 7 of this specification. Mats of wire fabric shall overlap each other sufficiently to maintain a uniform strength and shall be fastened securely at the ends and edges. No concrete shall be deposited until the Engineer has inspected the placement of the reinforcing steel and given permission to proceed. 8. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, reinforcing steel is considered subsidiary to the various items shown in the Bid Form and shall not be measured and paid for as a separate item. 032020 Page 6 of 6 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 SECTION 038000 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern for construction of all types of structures involving the use of structural concrete, except where the requirements are waived or revised by other governing specifications. All concrete structures shall be constructed in accordance with the design requirements and details shown on the plans; in conformity with the pertinent provisions of the items contracted for; the incidental specifications referred to; and in conformity with the requirements herein. 2. MATERIALS (1) Concrete. All concrete shall conform to the provisions of City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". The class of concrete for each type of structure or unit shall be as specified on the plans or by pertinent governing specifications. (2) Expansion Joint Material. (a) Preformed Fiber Material. Preformed fiber expansion joint material shall be of the dimensions shown on the plans. The material shall be one of the following types, unless otherwise noted on the plans: 1. Preformed Bituminous Fiber Materials shall meet the requirements of ASTM Designation: D1751 "Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types)". 2. Preformed Non-Bituminous Fiber Material shall meet the requirements of ASTM Designation: D1751 "Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types)", except that the requirements pertaining to bitumen content, density and water absorption shall be voided. 3. Redwood. (b) Joint Sealing Materials. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, joint sealing material shall conform to the following requirements. The material shall adhere to the sides of the concrete joint or crack and shall form an effective seal against infiltration of water and incompressibles. The material shall not crack or break when exposed to low temperatures. 038000 Page 1 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 1. Class 1-a. (Two-Component, Synthetic Polymer, Cold-Extruded Type). Curing is to be by polymerization and not by evaporation of solvent or fluxing of harder particles. This type is specifically designed for vertical or sloping joints and hence not self-leveling. It shall cure sufficiently at an average temperature of 77 degrees F ± 3 degrees F in a maximum of 24 hours. For performance requirements see under 2.(2)(b)2. below. 2. Class 1-b. (Two-Component, Synthetic Polymer, Cold-Pourable, Self-Leveling Type). Curing is to be by polymerization and not by evaporation of solvent or fluxing of harder particles. It shall cure sufficiently at an average temperature of 77 degrees F ± 3 degrees F in a maximum of 3 hours. Performance Requirements: Class 1-a and Class 1-b joint materials,when tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-525-C, shall meet the above curing times and the following requirements: It shall be of such consistency that it can be mixed and poured, or mixed and extruded into joints at temperatures above 60 degrees F. Penetration, 77°F.: 150 gm. cone, 5 sec., max., cm.................. 0.90 Bond and Extension 75%, O°F, 5 cycles: Dry Concrete Blocks............................ Pass Wet Concrete Blocks............................ Pass Steel Blocks...(Primed if specified by manuf.). Pass Flow at 200°F................................. None Water Content%by weight, max................. 5.0 Resilience: Original sample min. % (cured)................. 50 Oven aged at 158'F min. % .................... 50 For Class 1-a Material Only: Cold Flow (10 min.)............................ None (c) Asphalt Board. Asphalt Board shall consist of two liners of 0.016-inch asphalt impregnated paper,filled with a mastic mixture of asphalt and vegetable fiber and/or mineral filler. Boards shall be smooth,flat and sufficiently rigid to permit installation. When tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-524-C,the asphalt board shall not deflect from the horizontal more than one inch in three and one-half inches (1" in 31/2"). (d) Rebonded Neoprene Filler. Rebonded neoprene filler shall consist of ground closed- cell neoprene particles, rebonded and molded into sheets of uniform thickness, of the dimensions shown on plans. Filler material shall have the following physical properties and shall meet the requirements of ASTM Designation: D1752"Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction", Type 1, where applicable: 038000 Page 2 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 PROPERTY METHOD REQUIREMENT Color ASTM D 1752, Type 1 Black Density ASTM D1752, Type 1 40 lb./ft' Min. Recovery ASTM D1752, Type 1 90%Min. Compression ASTM D1752, Type 1 50 to 500 psi Extrusion ASTM D1752, Type 1 0.25 inch Max. Tensile Strength ASTM D1752, Type 1 20 psi Min. Elongation 75%Min. The manufacturers shall furnish the Engineer with certified test results as to compliance with the above requirements and a 12 inch x 12 inch x 1 inch sample from the shipment for approval. (3) Curing Materials. (a) Membrane curing materials shall comply with ASTM Designation: C 309 "Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete",Type 1 clear or translucent, or Type 2 white-pigmented. The material shall have a minimum flash-point of 80 degrees F when tested by the "Pensky-Martin Closed Cup Method". It shall be of such consistency that it can be satisfactorily applied as a fine mist through an atomizing nozzle by means of approved pressure spraying equipment at atmospheric temperatures above 40 degrees F. It shall be of such nature that it will not produce permanent discoloration of concrete surfaces nor react deleteriously with the concrete or its components. Type 1 compound shall contain a fugitive dye that will be distinctly visible not less than 4 hours nor more than 7 days after application. The compound shall produce a firm, continuous,uniform moisture impermeable film free from pinholes and shall adhere satisfactorily to the surfaces of damp concrete. It shall, when applied to the damp concrete surface at the rate of coverage specified herein,be dry to the touch in not more than 4 hours, and shall adhere in a tenacious film without running off or appreciable sagging. It shall not disintegrate, check, peel or crack during the required curing period. The compound shall not peel or pick up under traffic and shall disappear from the surface of the concrete by gradual disintegration. The compound shall be delivered to the job only in the manufacturer's original containers, which shall be clearly labeled with the manufacturer's name, the trade name of the material, and a batch number or symbol with which test samples may be correlated. The water retention test shall be in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-219-F. Percentage loss shall be defined as the water lost after the application of the curing material was applied. The permissible percentage moisture loss (at the rate of coverage specified herein) shall not exceed the 038000 Page 3 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 following: 24 hours after application............2 percent 72 hours after application............4 percent Type 1 (Resin Base Only)curing compound will be permitted for slab concrete in bridge decks and top slabs of direct traffic culverts. (b) Mat curing of concrete is allowed where permitted by Table 1 in this specification or where otherwise approved by the Engineer. 3. EXPANSION JOINTS Joints and devices to provide for expansion and contraction shall be constructed where and as indicated herein or on the plans. All open j oints and j oints to be filled with expansion j oint material, shall be constructed using forms adaptable to loosening or early removal. To avoid expansion or contraction damage to the adjacent concrete, these forms shall be loosened as soon as possible after final concrete set to permit free movement without requiring full form removal. Prior to placing the sealing material, the vertical facing the joint shall be cleaned of all laitance by sandblasting or by mechanical routing. Cracked or spalled edges shall be repaired. The j oint shall be blown clean of all foreign material and sealed. Where preformed fiber j oint material is used,it shall be anchored to the concrete on one side of the joint by light wire or nails, to prevent the material from falling out. The top one inch(1") of the joint shall be filled with joint sealing material. Finished joints shall conform to the indicated outline with the concrete sections completely separated by the specified opening or joint material. Soon after form removal and again where necessary after surface finishing, all projecting concrete shall be removed along exposed edges to secure full effectiveness of the expansion joints. 4. CONSTRUCTION JOINTS The j oint formed by placing plastic concrete in direct contact with concrete that has attained its initial set shall be deemed a construction joint. The term "monolithic placement" shall be interpreted to mean at the manner and sequence of concrete placing shall not create construction joints. Construction joints shall be of the type and at the locations shown on the plans. Additional joints will not be permitted without written authorization from the Engineer, and when authorized, shall have details equivalent to those shown on the plans for joints in similar locations. Unless otherwise provided, construction joints shall be square and normal to the forms. Bulkheads shall be provided in the forms for all joints, except when horizontal. Construction joints requiring the use of joint sealing material shall be as detailed on the plans. The 038000 Page 4 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 material will be specified on the plans without referenced to joint type. A concrete placement terminating at a horizontal construction joint shall have the top surface roughened thoroughly as soon as practicable after initial set is attained. The surfaces at bulkheads shall be roughened as soon as the forms are removed. The hardened concrete surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of all loose material, laitance, dirt or foreign material, and saturated with water so it is moist when placing fresh concrete against it. Forms shall be drawn tight against the placing of the fresh concrete. 5. FORMS (1) General. Except where otherwise specified, forms may be of either timber or metal. Forms for round columns exposed to view shall be of steel, except that other materials will be allowed with written permission of the Engineer. Forming plans shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval as specified. Forms shall be designed for the pressure exerted by a liquid weighing 150 pounds per cubic foot. The rate of placing the concrete shall betaken into consideration in determining the depth of the equivalent liquid. For j ob fabricated forms, an additional live load of 50 pounds per square foot shall be allowed on horizontal surfaces. The maximum unit stresses shall not exceed 125 percent of the allowable stresses used by the Texas Department of Transportation for the design of structures. Commercially produced structural units used in formwork shall not exceed the manufacturer's maximum allowable working load for moment, shear or end reaction. The maximum working load shall include a live load of 35 pounds per square foot of horizontal form surface, and sufficient details and data shall be submitted for use in checking formwork details for approval. Forms shall be practically mortar-tight,rigidly braced and strong enough to preventbulging between supports, and maintained to the proper line and grade during concrete placement. Forms shall be maintained in a manner that will prevent warping and shrinkage. Offset at form joints shall not exceed one-sixteenth of an inch(1/16"). Deflections due to cast-in-place slab concrete and railing shown in the dead load deflection diagram shall be taken into account in the setting of slab forms. All forms and footing areas shall be cleaned of any extraneous matter before placing concrete. Permission to place concrete will not be given until all such work is completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer. If, at any stage of the work, the forms show signs of bulging or sagging, the portion of the concrete causing such condition shall be removed immediately,if necessary, and the forms shall be reset and securely braced against further movement. 038000 Page 5 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 (2) Timber Forms. Lumber for forms shall be properly seasoned, of good quality, and free from imperfections which would affect its strength or impair the finished surface of the concrete. The lumber used for facing or sheathing shall be finished on at least one side and two edges and shall be sized to uniform thickness. Form lining will be required for all formed surfaces, except for the inside of culvert barrels, inlets and manholes; surfaces that are subsequently covered by backfill material or are completely enclosed; and, any surface formed by a single finished board. Lining will not be required when plywood forms are used. Form lining shall be of an approved type such as Masonite or plywood. Thin membrane sheeting, such as polyethylene sheets, shall not be used for form lining. Forms may be constructed of plywood not less than one-half inch in thickness, with no form lining required. The grain of the face plies on plywood forms shall be placed parallel to the span between the supporting studs or joists. Plywood used for forming surfaces that remain exposed shall be equal to that specified as B-B Plyform Class I or Class II Exterior, of the U. S. Department of Commerce, National Bureau of Standards and Technology, latest edition. Forms or form lumber to be reused shall be maintained clean and in good condition. Any lumber which is split, warped, bulged, marred, or has defects that will produce inferior work, shall not be used and, if condemned, shall be promptly removed from the work. Studs and j oists shall be spaced so that the facing form material remains in true alignment under the imposed loads. Wales shall be spaced close enough to hold forms securely to the designated lines and scabbed at least 4 feet on each side of joints to provide continuity. A row of wales shall be placed near the bottom of each placement. Facing material shall be placed with parallel and square joints and securely fastened to supporting studs. Forms for surfaces receiving only an ordinary finish and exposed to view shall be placed with the form panels symmetrical,i.e., long dimensions set in the same direction. Horizontal joints shall be continuous. Molding specified for chamfer strips or other uses shall be made of materials of a grade that will not split when nailed and which can be maintained to a true line without warping. Wood molding shall be mill cut and dressed on all faces. Unless otherwise provided, forms shall be filleted at all sharp corners and edges with triangular chamfer strips measuring three-quarter inch(3/4") on the sides. Forms for railing and ornamental work shall be constructed to standards equivalent to first-class millwork. All moldings, panel work and bevel strips shall be straight and true with nearly mitered joints designed so the finished work is true, sharp and clean cut. 038000 Page 6 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 All forms shall be constructed to permit their removal without marring or damaging the concrete. The forms may be given a slight draft to permit ease of removal. Metal form ties of an approved type or a satisfactory substitute shall be used to hold forms in place and shall be of a type that permits ease of removal of the metal as hereinafter specified. All metal appliances used inside of forms for alignment purposes shall be removed to a depth of at least one-half inch (1/2") from the concrete surface. They shall be made so the metal may be removed without undue chipping or spalling, and when removed, shall leave a smooth opening in the concrete surface. Burning off of rods, bolts or ties will not be permitted. Any wire ties used shall be cut back at least one-half inch(1/2")from the face of the concrete. Devices holding metal ties in place shall be capable of developing the strength of the tie and adjustable to allow for proper alignment. Metal and wooden spreaders which are separate from the forms shall be removed entirely as the concrete is being placed. Adequate clean-out openings shall be proved for narrow walls and other locations where access to the bottom of the forms is not readily attainable. Prior to placing concrete, the facing of all forms shall be treated with oil or other bond breaking coating of such composition that it will not discolor or otherwise injuriously affect the concrete surface. Care shall be exercised to prevent coating of the reinforcing steel. (3) Metal Forms. The foregoing requirements for timber forms regarding design,mortar-tightness, filleted corners,beveled projections,bracing, alignment,removal,reuse and wetting shall also apply to metal forms, except that these will not require lining, unless specifically noted on the plans. The thickness of form metal shall be as required to maintain the true shape without warping or bulging. All bolt and rivet heads on the facing sides shall be countersunk. Clamps, pins or other connecting devices shall be designed to hold the forms rigidly together and to allow removal without injury to the concrete. Metal forms which do not present a smooth surface or line up properly shall not be used. Metal shall be kept free from rust, grease or other foreign materials. 6. PLACING REINFORCEMENT Reinforcement in concrete structures shall be placed carefully and accurately and rigidly supported as provided in the City Standard Specification Section 032020 "Reinforcing Steel". Reinforcing steel supports shall not be welded to I-beams or girders. 7. PLACING CONCRETE-GENERAL The minimum temperature of all concrete at the time of placement shall be not less than 50 degrees F. 038000 Page 7 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 The consistency of the concrete as placed should allow the completion of all finishing operations without the addition of water to the surface. When conditions are such that additional moisture is needed for finishing,the required water shall be applied to the surface by fog spray only,and shall be held to a minimum amount. Fog spray for this purpose may be applied with hand operated fogging equipment. The maximum time interval between the addition of cement to the batch and the placing of concrete in the forms shall not exceed the following: Air or Concrete Temperature Maximum Time Non-Agitated Concrete: Above 80 degrees F 15 minutes Up to 80 degrees F 30 minutes Agitated Concrete: Above 90 degrees F 45 minutes 75 degrees F to 90 degrees F 60 minutes 35 degrees F to 74 degrees F 90 minutes The use of an approved retarding agent in the concrete will permit the extension of each of the above temperature-time maximums by 30 minutes for direct traffic culverts, and one hour for all other concrete except that the maximum time shall not exceed 30 minutes for non-agitated concrete. Before starting work,the Contractor shall inform the Engineer fully of the construction methods he proposes to use, the adequacy of which shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall give the Engineer sufficient advance notice before placing concrete in any unit of the structure to permit the inspection of forms,reinforcing steel placement,and other preparations. Concrete shall not be placed in any unit prior to the completion of formwork and placement of reinforcement therein. Concrete mixing, placing and finishing shall be done during daylight hours, unless adequate provisions are made to light the entire site of all operations. Concrete placement will not be permitted when impending weather conditions will impair the quality of the finished work. If rainfall should occur after placing operations are started,the Contractor shall provide ample covering to protect the work. In case of drop in temperature,the provisions set forth in Article "Placing Concrete in Cold Weather" of this specification shall be applied. The placing of concrete shall be regulated so the pressures caused by the plastic concrete shall not exceed the loads used in form design. 038000 Page 8 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 The method of handling, placing and consolidation of concrete shall minimize segregation and displacement of the reinforcement, and produce a uniformly dense and compact mass. Concrete shall not have a free fall of more than 5 feet, except in the case of thin walls such as in culverts. Any hardened concrete spatter ahead of the plastic concrete shall be removed. The method and equipment used to transport concrete to the forms shall be capable of maintaining the rate of placement approved by the Engineer. Concrete may be transported by buckets, chutes, buggies, belt conveyors, pumps or other acceptable methods. When belt conveyors or pumps are used, sampling for testing will be done at the discharge end. Concrete transported by conveyors shall be protected from sun and wind,if necessary,to prevent loss of slump and workability. Pipes through which concrete is pumped shall be shaded and/or wrapped with wet burlap, if necessary, to prevent loss of slump and workability. Concrete shall not be transported through aluminum pipes, tubes or other aluminum equipment. Chutes,troughs, conveyors or pipes shall be arranged and used so that the concrete ingredients will not be separated. When steep slopes are necessary, the chutes shall be equipped with baffle boards or made in short lengths that reverse the direction of movement, or the chute ends shall terminate in vertical downspouts. Open troughs and chutes shall extend, if necessary, down inside the forms or through holes left in them. All transporting equipment shall be kept clean and free from hardened concrete coatings. Water used for cleaning shall be discharged clear of the concrete. Each part of the forms shall be filled by depositing concrete as near its final position as possible. The coarse aggregate shall be worked back from the face and the concrete forced under and around the reinforcement bars without displacing them. Depositing large quantities at one point and running or working it along the forms will not be allowed. Concrete shall be deposited in the forms in layers of suitable depth but not more than 36 inches in thickness, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. The sequence of successive layers or adjacent portions of concrete shall be such that they can be vibrated into a homogenous mass with the previously placed concrete without a cold j oint. Not more than one hour shall elapse between adjacent or successive placements of concrete. Unauthorized construction joints shall be avoided by placing all concrete between the authorized joints in one continuous operation. An approved retarding agent shall be used to control stress cracks and/or unauthorized cold j oints in mass placements where differential settlement and/or setting time may induce stress cracking. Openings in forms shall be provided, if needed, for the removal of laitance of foreign matter of any kind. All forms shall be wetted thoroughly before the concrete is placed therein. All concrete shall be well consolidated and the mortar flushed to the form surfaces by continuous working with immersion type vibrators. Vibrators which operate by attachment to forms or reinforcement will not be permitted, except on steel forms. At least one stand-by vibrator shall be 038000 Page 9 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 provided for emergency use in addition to those required for placement. The concrete shall be vibrated immediately after deposit. Prior to the beginning of work, a systematic spacing of the points of vibration shall be established to insure complete consolidation and thorough working of the concrete around the reinforcement, embedded fixtures, and into the corners and angles of the forms. Immersion type vibrators shall be inserted vertically,at points 18 to 30 inches apart, and slowly withdrawn. The vibrator may be inserted in a sloping or horizontal position in shallow slabs. The entire depth of each lift shall be vibrated, allowing the vibrator to penetrate several inches into the preceding lift. Concrete along construction joints shall be thoroughly consolidated by operating the vibrator along and close to but not against the joint surface. The vibration shall continue until thorough consolidation,and complete embedment of reinforcement and fixtures is produced,but not long enough to cause segregation. Vibration may be supplemented by hand spading or rodding,if necessary,to insure the flushing of mortar to the surface of all forms. Slab concrete shall be mixed in a plant located off the structure. Carting or wheeling concrete batches over completed slabs will not be permitted until they have aged at least four(4)full curing days. If carts are used,timber planking will be required for the remainder of the curing period. Carts shall be equipped with pneumatic tires. Curing operations shall not be interrupted for the purpose of wheeling concrete over finished slabs. After concrete has attained its initial set, at least one(1)curing day shall elapse before placing strain on projecting reinforcement to prevent damage to the concrete. The storing of reinforcing or structural steel on completed roadway slabs generally shall be avoided and, when permitted, shall be limited to quantities and distribution that will not induce excessive stresses. 8. PLACING CONCRETE IN COLD WEATHER (1) Cast-in-Place Concrete. Concrete maybe placed when the atmospheric temperature is not less than 35 degrees F. Concrete shall not be placed in contact with any material coated with frost or having a temperature less than 32 degrees F. Aggregates shall be free from ice, frost and frozen lumps. When required, in order to produce the minimum specified concrete temperature,the aggregate and/or the water shall be heated uniformly, in accordance with the following: The water temperature shall not exceed 180 degrees F,and/or the aggregate temperature shall not exceed 150 degrees F. The heating apparatus shall heat the mass of aggregate uniformly. The temperature of the mixture of aggregates and water shall be between 50 degrees F and 85 degrees F before introduction of the cement. All concrete shall be effectively protected as follows: (a) The temperature of slab concrete of all unformed surfaces shall be maintained at 50 degrees F or above for a period of 72 hours from time of placement and above 40 degrees F for an additional 72 hours. 038000 Page 10 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 (b) The temperature at the surface of all concrete in piers, culverts walls,retaining walls,parapets,wingwalls,bottoms of slabs, and other similar formed concrete shall be maintained at 40 degrees F or above for a period of 72 hours from time of placement. (c) The temperature of all concrete, including the bottom slabs of culverts placed on or in the ground, shall be maintained above 32 degrees F for a period of 72 hours from time of placement. Protection shall consist of providing additional covering, insulated forms or other means, and if necessary, supplementing such covering with artificial heating. Curing as specified under Article "Curing Concrete" of this specification shall be provided during this period until all requirements for curing have been satisfied. When impending weather conditions indicate the possibility of the need for such temperature protection, all necessary heating and covering material shall be on hand ready for use before permission is granted to begin placement. Sufficient extra test specimens will be made and cured with the placement to ascertain the condition of the concrete as placed, prior to form removal and acceptance. (2) Precast Concrete. A fabricating plant for precast products which has adequate protection from cold weather in the form of permanent or portable framework and covering, which protects the concrete when placed in the forms, and is equipped with approved steam curing facilities,may place concrete under any low temperature conditions provided: (a) The framework and covering are placed and heat is provided for the concrete and the forms within one hour after the concrete is placed. This shall not be construed to be one hour after the last concrete is placed,but that no concrete shall remain unprotected longer than one hour. (b) Steam heat shall keep the air surrounding the concrete between 50 degrees F and 85 degrees F for a minimum of three hours prior to beginning the temperature rise which is required for steam curing. (c) For fabricating plants without the above facilities and for j ob site precast products,the requirements of the Article "Curing Concrete" of this specification shall apply. The Contractor is responsible for the protection of concrete placed under any and all weather conditions. Permission given by the Engineer for placing concrete during freezing weather will in no way relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for producing concrete equal in quality to that placed under normal conditions. Should concrete placed under such conditions prove unsatisfactory,it shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost. 038000 Page 11 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 9. PLACING CONCRETE IN WATER Concrete shall be deposited in water only when specified on the plans or with written permission by the Engineer. The forms or cofferdams shall be sufficiently tight to prevent any water current passing through the space in which the concrete is being deposited. Pumping will not be permitted during the concrete placing, nor until it has set for at least 36 hours. The concrete shall be placed with a tremie, closed bottom-dump bucket, or other approved method, and shall not be permitted to fall freely through the water nor shall it be disturbed after it has been placed. The concrete surface shall be kept approximately level during placement. The tremie shall consist of a water-tight tube 14 inches or less in diameter. It shall be constructed so that the bottom can be sealed and opened after it is in place and fully charged with concrete. It shall be supported so that it can be easily moved horizontally to cover all the work area and vertically to control the concrete flow. Bottom-dump buckets used for underwater placing shall have a capacity of not less than one-half cubic yard. It shall be lowered gradually and carefully until it rests upon the concrete already placed and raised very slowly during the upward travel; the intent being to maintain still water at the point of discharge and to avoid agitating the mixture. The placing operations shall be continuous until the work is complete. 10. PLACING CONCRETE IN BOX CULVERTS In general, construction joints will be permitted only where shown on the plans. Where the top slab and walls are placed monolithically in culverts more than 4 feet in clear height, an interval of not less than one (1) nor more than two (2) hours shall elapse before placing the top slab to allow for shrinkage in the wall concrete. The base slab shall be finished accurately at the proper time to provide a smooth uniform surface. Top slabs which carry direct traffic shall be finished as specified for roadway slabs in Article"Finish of Roadway Slabs". Top slabs of fill type culverts shall be given a reasonably smooth float finish. 11. PLACING CONCRETE IN FOUNDATIONS AND SUBSTRUCTURE Concrete shall not be placed in footings until the depth and character of the foundation has been inspected by the Engineer and permission has been given to proceed. Placing of concrete footings upon seal concrete courses will be permitted after the caissons or cofferdams are free from water and the seal concrete course cleaned. Any necessary pumping or bailing during the concreting operation shall be done from a suitable sump located outside the forms. All temporary wales or braces inside cofferdams or caissons shall be constructed or adjusted as the work proceeds to prevent unauthorized construction joints in footings or shafts. 038000 Page 12 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 When footings can be placed in a dry excavation without the use of cofferdams or caissons, forms may be omitted,if desired by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer,and the entire excavation filled with concrete to the elevation of the top of footing; in which case, measurement for payment will be based on the footing dimensions shown on the plans. 12. TREATMENT AND FINISHING OF HORIZONTAL SURFACES EXCEPT ROADWAY SLABS All unformed upper surfaces shall be struck off to grade and finished. The use of mortar topping for surfaces under this classification will not be permitted. After the concrete has been struck off, the surface shall be floated with a suitable float. Sidewalks shall be given a wood float or broom finish, or may be striped with a brush, as specified by the Engineer. Other surfaces shall be wood float finished and striped with a fine brush leaving a fine- grained texture. 13. FINISH OF ROADWAY SLABS As soon as the concrete has been placed and vibrated in a section of sufficient width to permit working,the surface shall be approximately leveled, struck off and screeded,carrying a slight excess of concrete ahead of the screed to insure filling of all low spots. The screed shall be designed rigid enough to hold true to shape and shall have sufficient adjustments to provide for the required camber. A vibrating screed may be used if heavy enough to prevent undue distortion. The screeds shall be provided with a metal edge. Longitudinal screeds shall be moved across the concrete with a saw-like motion while their ends rest on headers or templates set true to the roadway grade or on the adjacent finished slab. The surface of the concrete shall be screeded a sufficient number of times and at such intervals to produce a uniform surface, true to grade and free of voids. If necessary, the screeded surface shall be worked to smooth finish with a long handled wood or metal float of the proper size, or hand floated from bridges over the slab. When required by the Engineer,the Contractor shall perform sufficient checks with a long handled 10-foot straightedge on the plastic concrete to insure that the final surface will be within the tolerances specified below. The check shall be made with the straightedge parallel to the centerline. Each pass thereof shall lap half of the preceding pass. All high spots shall be removed and all depressions over one-sixteenth inch(1/16")in depth shall be filled with fresh concrete and floated. The checking and floating shall be continued until the surface is true to grade and free of depressions, high spots, voids or rough spots. Rail support holes shall be filled with concrete and finished to match the top of the slab. Surface Texturing. Perform surface texturing using a either carpet drag or metal tining as indicated on the drawings. Complete final texturing before the concrete has attained its initial set. Draw the carpet drag 038000 Page 13 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 longitudinally along the pavement surface with the carpet contact surface area adjusted to provide a satisfactory coarsely textured surface. A metal-tine texture finish is required using a tining machine unless otherwise shown on the plans. Provide the metal-tine finish immediately after the concrete surface has set enough for consistent tining. Operate the metal-tine device to obtain grooves spaced at 1 in., approximately 3/16 in. deep, with a minimum depth of 1/8 in., and approximately 1/12 in. wide. Do not overlap a previously tined area. Use manual methods for achieving similar results on ramps and other irregular sections of pavements. Repair damage to the edge of the slab and joints immediately after texturing. Do not tine pavement that will be overlaid. Upon completion of the floating and/or straight edging and before the disappearance of the moisture sheen, the surface shall be given a broom or burlap drag finish. The grooves of these finishes shall be parallel to the structure centerline. It is the intent that the average texture depth resulting from the number of tests directed by the Engineer be not less than 0.035 inch with a minimum texture depth of 0.030 inch for anyone test when tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-436-A. Should the texture depth fall below that intended, the finishing procedures shall be revised to produce the desired texture. After the concrete has attained its final set, the roadway surface shall be tested with a standard 10- foot straightedge. The straightedge shall be placed parallel to the centerline of roadway to bridge any depressions and touch high spots. Ordinates of irregularities measured from the face of the straightedge to the surface of the slab shall not exceed one-eighth of an inch(1/8"), making proper allowances for camber,vertical curvature and surface texture. Occasional variations,not exceeding three-sixteenth of an inch (3/16") will be acceptable, if in the opinion of the Engineer it will not affect the riding qualities. When directed by the Engineer,irregularities exceeding the above requirements shall be corrected. In all roadway slab finishing operations,camber for specified vertical curvature and transverse slopes shall be provided. 14. CURING CONCRETE The Contractor shall inform the Engineer fully of the methods and procedures proposed for curing; shall provide the proper equipment and material in adequate amounts; and shall have the proposed methods, equipment and material approved prior to placing concrete. Inadequate curing and/or facilities,therefore, shall be cause for the Engineer to stop all construction on the j ob until remedial action is taken. All concrete shall be cured for a period of four(4) curing days except as noted herein. 038000 Page 14 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 EXCEPTIONS TO 4-DAY CURING Description Required Curing Upper Surfaces of Bridge Slabs and 8 curing days (Type I or III) cement Top Slabs of Direct Traffic Culverts 10 curing days (Type 11 cement) Concrete Piling (non-prestressed) 6 curing days When the air temperature is expected to drop below 35 degrees F,the water curing mats shall be covered with polyethylene sheeting, burlap-polyethylene blankets or other material to provide the protection required by Article "Placing Concrete in Cold Weather" of these specifications. A curing day is defined as a calendar day when the temperature, taken in the shade away from artificial heat, is above 50 degrees F for at least 19 hours (colder days if satisfactory provisions are made to maintain the temperature of all surfaces of the concrete above 40 degrees F for the entire 24 hours). The required curing period shall begin when all concrete therein has attained its initial set. The following methods are permitted for curing concrete subj ect to the restrictions of Table 1 and the following requirements for each method of curing. (1) Form Curing. When forms are left in contact with the concrete, other curing methods will not be required except for cold weather protection. (2) Water Curing. All exposed surfaces of the concrete shall be kept wet continuously for the required curing time. The water used for curing shall meet the requirements for concrete mixing water as specified in the specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". Seawater will not be permitted. Water which stains or leaves an unsightly residue shall not be used. (a) Wet Mat. Cotton mats shall be used for this curing method. They shall be placed as soon as possible after the surface has sufficiently hardened to prevent damage to the concrete. (See Article, "Placing Concrete" of this specification.) Damp burlap blankets made from nine-ounce stock may be placed on the damp concrete surface for temporary protection prior to the application of the cotton mats which may be placed dry and wetted down after placement. The mats shall be weighted down adequately to provide continuous contact with all concrete surfaces where possible. The surfaces of the concrete shall be kept wet for the required curing time. Surfaces which cannot be cured by contact shall be enclosed with mats and anchored positively to the forms or to the ground so that outside air cannot enter the enclosure. Sufficient moisture shall be provided inside the enclosure to keep all surfaces of the concrete wet. (b) Water Spray. This curing method shall consist of overlapping sprays or sprinklers that keep all unformed surfaces continuously wet. (c) Ponding. This curing method requires the covering of the surfaces with a minimum of two inches (2") of clean granular material, kept wet at all times, or a minimum of one-inch 038000 Page 15 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 (1") depth of water. Satisfactory provisions shall be made to provide a dam to retain the water or saturated granular material. (3) Membrane Curing. This consists of curing concrete pavement,concrete pavement(base),curbs, gutters, retards, sidewalks, driveways, medians, islands, concrete riprap, cement-stabilized riprap, concrete structures and other concrete as indicated on the plans by impervious membrane method. Unless otherwise provided herein or shown on the plans, either Type 1-D or Type 2 membrane curing compound may be used where permitted except that Type 1-D (Resin Base Only) will be required for slab concrete in bridge decks and top slabs of direct traffic culverts. TABLE 1 REQUIRED PERMITTED MEMBRANE MEMBRANE STRUCTURE UNIT WATER FOR WATER FOR DESCRIPTION FOR INTERIM FOR INTERIM CURING CURING CURING CURING 1 Top slabs of direct traffic culverts X X 2 Top surface of any concrete unit upon which concrete is to be placed and bonded at a later interval (Stub walls, risers, etc.). X Other superstructure concrete (wing walls, parapet walls, etc.) 3 Concrete pavement (base), curbs, gutters, retards, sidewalks, driveways, medians, X* X* islands, concrete structures, concrete riprap, etc. 4 All substructure concrete, culverts, box sewers, inlets, X* X* manholes, retaining walls *Polyethylene sheeting, burlap-polyethylene mats or laminated mats to prevent outside air from entering will be considered equivalent to water or membrane curing for items 3 and 4. 038000 Page 16 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 Membrane curing shall not be applied to dry surfaces,but shall be applied just after free moisture has disappeared. Formed surfaces and surfaces which have been given a first rub shall be dampened and shall be moist at the time of application of the membrane. When membrane is used for complete curing, the film shall remain unbroken for the minimum curing period specified. Membrane which is damaged shall be corrected immediately by reapplication of membrane. Unless otherwise noted herein or on the plans,the choice of membrane type shall be at the option of the Contractor. Only one type of curing compound will be permitted on any one structure. The membrane curing compound shall be applied after the surface finishing has been completed,and immediately after the free surface moisture has disappeared. The surface shall be sealed with a single uniform coating of curing compound applied at the rate of coverage recommended by the manufacturer and directed by the Engineer, but not less than 1 gallon per 180 square feet of area. The Contractor shall provide satisfactory means and facilities to properly control and check the rate of application of the compound. The compound shall be thoroughly agitated during its use and shall be applied by means of approved mechanical power pressure sprayers. The sprayers used to apply the membrane to concrete pavement or concrete pavement (base) shall travel at uniform speed along the forms and be mechanically driven. The equipment shall be of such design that it will insure uniform and even application of the membrane material. The sprayers shall be equipped with satisfactory atomizing nozzles. Only on small miscellaneous items will the Contractor be permitted to use hand-powered spray equipment. For all spraying equipment, the Contractor shall provide facilities to prevent the loss of the compound between the nozzle and the concrete surface during the spraying operations. The compounds shall not be applied to a dry surface. If the surface of the concrete has become dry, it shall be moistened prior to application of membrane by fogging or mist application. Sprinkling or coarse spraying will not be allowed. At locations where the coating shows discontinuities,pinholes or other defects, or if rain falls on the newly-coated surface before the film has dried sufficiently to resist damage,an additional coat of the compound shall be applied immediately at the same rate of coverage specified herein. To insure proper coverage, the Engineer shall inspect all treated areas after application of the compound for the period of time designated in the governing specification for curing, either for membrane curing or for other methods. Should the foregoing indicate that any area during the curing period is not protected, an additional coat or coats of the compound shall be applied immediately, and the rate of application of the membrane compound shall be increased until all areas are uniformly covered. When temperatures are such as to warrant protection against freezing, curing by this method shall be supplemented with an approved insulating material capable of protecting the concrete for the specified curing period. If at any time there is reason to believe that this method of curing is unsatisfactory or is detrimental 038000 Page 17 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 to the work,the Contractor,when notified, shall immediately cease the use of this method and shall change to curing by one of the other methods specified under this contract. 15. REMOVAL OF FORMS Except as herein provided, forms for vertical surfaces may be removed when the concrete has aged not less than one day(24 hours)when Type I and Type H cement is used, and not less than one-half day (12 hours) when Type III cement is used, provided it can be done without damage to the concrete. Forms for inside curb faces may be removed in approximately three hours provided it can be done without damage to the curb. 16. FINISHING EXPOSED SURFACES Concrete shall be finished as required in the specification Section for the respective item or as otherwise specified on the plans. An ordinary surface finish shall be applied to all concrete surfaces either as a final finish or preparatory to a higher finish. Ordinary Surface Finish shall be as follows: After form removal, all porous or honey-combed areas and spalled areas shall be corrected by chipping away all loose or broken material to sound concrete. Feather edges shall be eliminated by cutting a face perpendicular to the surface. Shallow cavities shall be repaired using adhesive grout or epoxy grout. If judged repairable by the Engineer, large defective areas shall be corrected using concrete or other material approved by the Engineer. Holes and spalls caused by removal of metal ties, etc., shall be cleaned and filled with adhesive grout or epoxy grout. Exposed parts of metal chairs on surfaces to be finished by rubbing, shall be chipped out to a depth of one-half inch(1/2") and the surface repaired. All fins, runs, drips or mortar shall be removed from surfaces which remain exposed. Form marks and chamfer edges shall be smoothed by grinding and/or dry rubbing. Grease, oil, dirt, curing compound, etc., shall be removed from surfaces requiring a higher grade of finish. Discolorations resulting from spillage or splashing of asphalt,paint or other similar material shall be removed. Repairs shall be dense, well bonded and properly cured, and when made on surfaces which remain exposed and do not require a higher finish, shall be finished to blend with the surrounding concrete. 038000 Page 18 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 17. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form,no direct measurement or payment will be made for the work to be done or the equipment to be furnished under this specification,but it shall be considered subsidiary to the particular items required by the plans and the contract documents. 038000 Page 19 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 TECHNICAL SPECIAL PROVISIONS These Technical Special Provisions amend or supplement the Technical Specifications and other provisions of the Contract Documents. All provisions which are not so amended or supplemented remain in full force and effect. ARTICLE TS-1 DEFINITIONS Design Specification - Whenever the term "Design Specification" is used, it shall be understood that the performance of the completed work is as designed by the ENGINEER, and the CONTRACTOR must follow the requirements of the drawings and specifications; followed the manufacturer's recommendations (material and equipment);followed industry standard procedures and provided top quality workmanship. Performance Specification -Whenever the term "Performance Specification" is used, it shall be understood that the performance of the completed work is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR, provided the OWNER has faithfully followed all written operational and maintenance instructions supplied by the CONTRACTOR. (The CONTRACTOR is not relieved of the responsibility for improper performance of the completed work even if there was improper operation and/or maintenance by the OWNER but it obviously was not the cause of improper performance.) In a performance specification, the CONTRACTOR is responsible for the design of the item furnished and the installation. It is intended that the item function properly without excessive operation and maintenance being required by the OWNER. The item furnished must incorporate the features specified but still perform as intended. The materials specified are to set a minimum standard but shall not be considered a design. If the design furnished by the CONTRACTOR requires higher quality material in order to perform as intended, it shall be furnished at no increase in cost to the Contract amount. When minimum dimensions are specified, they shall not be considered a design. If the design furnished by the CONTRACTOR requires larger dimensions in order to perform as intended,it shall be furnished at no increase in cost to the Contract amount. ARTICLE TS-2 [NOT USED] ARTICLE TS-3 [NOT USED] ARTICLE TS-4 LAYOUT OF THE WORK The Contractor shall layout the work from the existing facilities. If,for whatever reason, it is necessary to deviate from proposed line and grade to properly execute the work, the Contractor shall obtain approval of the Engineer prior to deviation. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the required deviation would necessitate a revision to the Drawings,the Contractor shall provide supporting measurements as required by the Engineer. ARTICLE TS-5 QUALIFICATIONS OF MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICE REPRESENTATIVES 1. General: The technical specifications require that for certain equipment and other items,the manufacturer shall include in the cost to the Contractor specified periods of on-site time of a qualified factory field service engineer to provide certain services. Providing these services is an extremely important part of seeing that the item is installed, adjusted and serviced properly. This, in turn, will help insure that the item furnished will function as intended and have a useful,trouble-free service life. 2. Prior Approval: As part of the submittal data required, the name and complete qualifications of the person the manufacturer proposes to send as the representative must be included. The Engineer will have the right to reject any person who, in the Engineer's opinion, is not qualified to perform the required services based on the information furnished. 3. On-The-Site Rejection: In the event a manufacturer's representative, while on the job site, demonstrates (in the opinion of the Engineer) that they are not thoroughly qualified to perform the required services, the Engineer shall have the right to immediately stop these services. The Contractor is obligated to replace the manufacturer's representative with a person who is qualified to redo as much of the completed Technical Special Provisions Page I of 3 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 service designated by the Engineer and complete the remaining services. This shall be done at no increase in the Contract amount(no cost to the City). 4. Video Tapes: The City reserves the right to video tape any and all services performed by manufacturer's field service representative(s). The Contractor shall give the Engineer seven days advance notice of when services will be performed by the manufacturer's representative. Should the Contractor fail to provide the required advance notice, the Engineer shall have the right to reschedule services to accommodate the City. ARTICLE TS-6 TENTATIVE APPROVAL AND ALTERNATE DESIGNS 1. General: Manufacturers shall obtain tentative approval (prior to bidding) for certain major items of equipment on which the Contractors are basing their bid. The successful bidder shall have the option of using any product which received tentative approval prior to bidding. 2. Procedure: a. Submission to the Engineer: (1) The Manufacturer shall deliver to the Engineer prior to the date set for bid opening, information (Which will be hereafter referred to as the Formal Submission) and this submission shall be on the major items of equipment,as set out hereinafter. To be considered, specific information must be received by the Engineer no later than 14 calendar days prior to the date set for bid opening. If the 14th day falls on Saturday or Sunday,then submission must be delivered to the Engineer by 5:00 P.M. on the previous Friday. Incomplete submissions will not be reviewed and will automatically be disapproved. The Engineer will respond in writing either approving or disapproving the submission within 48 hours prior to the bid opening time. (2) The Manufacturer is responsible for obtaining written proof that the Engineer has received this information and that it is approved for use on the project. b. The following major items of equipment require specific information to be furnished in order to obtain tentative approval. The required information is contained in the technical sections listed below: (1) 11D8 Clarifier Equipment (2) 11D11 Sludge Thickener Equipment (3) 11D21 Adjustable Slotted Pipe Skimmer (4) 11E1 Chlorination and Dechlorination Equipment (5)43 11 12 Integrally Geared Single Stage Centrifugal Blower C. Tentative Approval of Other Equipment: All other equipment must meet all requirements of the specifications, but tentative approval (prior to Bidding) will not be given. Any information on equipment, other than that listed above, submitted to the Engineer prior to bidding will not be reviewed and will be automatically be discarded without notification. d. Final Approval: If the equipment does receive tentative approval for use on the project, this does not constitute final approval. If it is found at any time in the future that exceptions were not listed or the item is not as it was represented, the Engineer shall have the right to reject the equipment; or require the Contractor to modify it to bring it into compliance at no increase in cost to the Contract. Tentative approval does not relieve the Contractor of any responsibility regarding performance of the equipment after installation. Likewise, no extra payment will be made to the Contractor for any changes found necessary to adapt this equipment, such as modifications to structures, foundations, piping,valves,electrical system,etc. Technical Special Provisions Page 2 of 3 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 ARTICLE TS-7 CITY WASTEWATER FACILITIES: SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS 1. Operation of City-Owned Equipment The Contractor shall not start, operate, or stop any pump, motor, valve, equipment, switch, breaker, control, or any other item related to City wastewater facility at any time. All such items must be operated by an operator or other authorized maintenance employee of the City. 2. Protection of Water Quality: The City must treat all wastewater entering the treatment plant at all times. The Contractor shall coordinate its work with the City at all times to protect the quality of the treated water. 3. Handling and Disposal of Trash: All trash generated by the Contractor or their employees, agents, or sub- contractors shall be contained at all times at the facility site. Blowing trash will not be allowed. The Contractor shall keep work areas clean and remove all trash as necessary. Technical Special Provisions Page 3 of 3 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 SECTION 01011 EQUIPMENT DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS PART 1-GENERAL A. INTENT The intent of this specification is to provide definite requirements for the format of operating and maintenance documentation for all purchased equipment to be transmitted by the Contractor to the Owner. This includes all mechanical,electrical,and instrumentation equipment. B. APPLICABLE STANDARDS Work shall be in accordance with the applicable codes and standards of the following organizations: INSTRUMENT SOCIETY OF AMERICA(ISA) NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE(NEC) NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION(NEMA) INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC ENGINEERS (IEEE) AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE(ANSI) OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH ACT OF 1970,AS AMENDED (OSHA) PART 2-PRODUCTS A. PLC PROGRAMS Contractor shall provide to the Engineer an electronic file copy of any programs used for PLCs in equipment control panels. Electronic copy of the program shall be provided on a hard drive or USB stick. B. DOCUMENTATION FORM-HARDCOPY Two printed copies of each maintenance and operating manual shall be submitted. C. DOCUMENTATION-ELECTRONIC FORMAT 1. One electronic copy of each maintenance and operating manual shall be submitted:Contractor shall submit 2 hardbound copies for review as indicated below,prior to final inspection,bound in 8-1/2 x 11 inch three D side ring binders with durable covers. Engineer shall review,provide comments,and return to contractor. After final approval,contractor shall submit final copies within 14 days after final review. a. The Operating and Maintenance(O&M)Manuals shall be in a"multimedia format''suitable for viewing with Microsoft's Internet Explorer,version 4.0. As a minimum the Introduction,Table of Contents,and Index shall be in HTML(HyperText Markup Language)format,with hypertext links to the other parts of the manual. The remainder of the manual can be scanned images or a mixture of scanned images and text. The electronic manual shall contain a "run-execute" file to automatically start and open the manuals Table of Contents or Main Page. b. The common formats for scanned images-GIF,TIFF,JPEG,etc.-shall be used. If software in addition to the Internet Explorer web browser(e.g. a web browser"plug-in")is required for viewing images or other portions of the documentation,the Contractor shall provide this software on the CD-ROM withthe documentation. 01011 Equipment Documentation Requirements Page 1 of 2 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 c. Prepare binder covers with printed title"OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS",title of project,and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are required. d. Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers,logically organized as described below;with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs. e. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each Product or system description identified,type on white paper. f Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Engineer, Contractor, Subcontractors,and major equipment suppliers. g. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following: 1) List of equipment. 2) Parts list for each component. 3) Operating instructions. 4) Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. 5) Maintenance instructions for special flnishes, including recommended cleaning methods and materials and special precautions identifying detrimental agents. h. Part 3: Project documents and certificates,including the following: 1) Shop drawings and product data. 2) Certificates. 3) Photocopies of warranties. i. The manuals shall be delivered on a CD-ROM, not on floppy disks. The CD-ROM disk shall be provided in a square case with an end label to include "Project Year—Project Name —Equipment (Example: 2003—N.Navigation Pump Sta.—Bridge Crane). Disk shall have a cover label to include "Year—Project Full Name-City Project Number—title"Operation and Maintenance Manual"—Type of Equipment-Manufacturer—Manufacturer's Telephone Number". j. The Contractor (or Subcontractor) is encouraged to view the electronic Operating and Maintenance Manual at the O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant prior to beginning work on the manuals for this proj ect. 2. The electronic copy must contain all the information present in the printed version of the manual. D. SPARES LIST AND MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The Contractor shall be responsible for submitting a list of recommended spare parts and a recommended maintenance schedule for all instrumentation and electrical equipment provided as part of this project. PART 3—EXECUTION (Not used) END OF SECTION 01011 Equipment Documentation Requirements Page 2 of 2 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 DIVISION 1 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION IE- SPECIAL CONDITIONS 1E24[2] PRE-SELECTED EQUIPMENT 1E24.1 GENERAL: 1E24.1.1 Work Included The City of Corpus Christi has standardized on certain equipment for the wastewater treatment plants that serve the City. Equipment costs have been provided from equipment manufacturers listed in the following and equipment costs are included in the Bid Form. The manufacturer's quote or proposal(s) for the pre-selected equipment listed in the following will be provided separately by the Manufacturer directly to each Contractor bidding the project. The noted specification(s) are attached as an attachment to this specification Section 1E24. Preselected Equipment 1. Section I IB5 Submersible Pump (Attached to Spec. 1E24) Manufacturer: Xylem Water Solutions—Flygt Products Representative: Barrie Hamm (!2anrie„hannin(d)x.�leininc.co� a. The Contractor shall be responsible for all aspects of the pre-selected equipment as if bid directly to the Contractor and as provided in the individual equipment specifications, including placement of purchase orders; submittal coordination and transmittal, the delivery,handling,and storage;payment for the equipment;the installation; Operation and Maintenance Manual transmittal, arranging for the manufacturer's representative; equipment testing,performance testing,functional testing,and startup;and for the training of the Owner's personnel. b. Contractor shall provide the required structure, supports, piping, wiring connections and related work as necessary for the equipment installation to provide a complete operating and functional system. c. As noted in the Measurement and Payment section of Division 1-General Requirements, prices shown in the Bid Form are for the equipment only, as described in the Manufacturer/Supplier's cost proposal/quote scopes. Contractor shall include in Bid Item BI Lift Station Improvements any overhead, profit, work for unloading, storage and installation of the equipment and any other cost to provide the equipment, complete in place, as outlined in the plans and contract documents. 1E24.1.2 Delivery, Storage, and Handling: The Contractor shall be responsible for scheduling the delivery; unloading, storage, and handling at the Project site in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations and requirements. 1E24.1.3 Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of pre-selected equipment that fail(s), in materials or workmanship, within specified warranty period. 1E24.1.4 Pam: The Contractor shall be responsible for all payments due the Manufacturer for the amounts shown on the Bid Form and these amounts shall be included in the Total Contract Amount. The terms and conditions for each pre-selected equipment, including payment, are provided in 1E24 Pre-Selected Equipment Page 1 of 2 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 the Manufacturer/Supplier's scope attached to their cost proposal/quote that is being provided separately and directly to the Contractors bidding this project. 1E24.2 PRODUCTS: 1E24.2.1 Pre-selected Equipment: a. The pre-selected equipment listed above shall be as described in the individual specifications provided in the Contract Documents. Contractor shall provide the required structure, supports, piping, wiring connections, and related work as necessary for the equipment installation to provide a complete operating and functional system. b. For general information regarding the equipment,refer to the Drawings, specifications and Manufacturer/Supplier's scope (provide with cost proposal/quote that is being provided separately and directly to the Contractors bidding this project). 1E24.3 EXECUTION: 1 E24.3.1 Installation: Install equipment as shown on the Drawings and in accordance with the pre-selected equipment specifications included in the Contract Documents. 1E24 Pre-Selected Equipment Page 2 of 2 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 DIVISION 11 -EQUIPMENT SECTION 11B-PUMPS 11B5[6] DRY PIT SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS (Wastewater) 11B5.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: 11B5.1.1 Scope 11B5.1.2 Specification Type 11B5.1.3 General Description 11B5.1.4 List of Pumps to Be Furnished and Installed 11B5.1.5 Operating Conditions for Each Pump 11B5.1.6 Quality Assurance 11B5.1.7 Tentative Approval Prior To Bidding 11B5.1.8 Factory Testing 11B5.1.9 Manufacturer's Representative 11B5.1.10 Field Service 11B5.1.11 Start Up And Field Testing 11B5.1.12 Submittal Data 11B5.1.13 Operation and Maintenance Manuals 11B5.1.14 Warranty 11B5.2 PRODUCTS/MATERIALS: 11B5.2.1 Pump Construction 11B5.2.2 Pump Motor and Cable 11B5.2.3 Controls 11B5.2.4 Float Controls 11B5.2.5 Hardware 11B5.2.6 Anchorages 11B5.2.7 Spare Parts 11B5.3 CONSTRUCTION METHODS: 11B5.3.1 Equipment and Materials Shipping and Storage 11B5.3.2 Installation 11B5.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: 11B5.1.1 Scope: This specification shall govern for all work necessary for furnishing, installing and placing into initial operation the submersible pumps at: a. Williams Lift Station.................................. Four Main Pumps and One Jockey Pump 11B5.1.2 Specification Type: This is a performance specification as defined in Article TS-1 of the Technical Special Provisions. 11B5.1.3 General Description: The pumps shall be designed for handling a raw unscreened wastewater and raw wastewater sludge containing up to 5% solids. The equipment shall be designed such that cooling is sufficient for continuous operation under full nameplate load in a dry environment. The pump shall be capable of handling liquid up to 104°F. 11B5.1.4 List of Pumps to be Furnished and Installed: 1. Williams Lift Station—Main Pumus—F1y2t NT3531,840 Imueller(645 mm) a. Number..................................................................................... 4 pumps b. Pump Discharge Size................................................................ 2011 c. Pump Inlet Size......................................................................... 2411 d. Minimum Motor Horsepower: I IB5 Dry Pit Submersible Pumps ° LJ III �� IIIA '.IIIA^W...L..A...L....I."A(�'"' .���Ilh...I IIIA III�IIIIIIIC I[4...IIL.. Page 1 of 9 ��� II III:........, , „P'A..IIL..III ';���'�'��III"'^j 24 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 The pump shall not overload the motor at any point on the pump curve but in any case it shall be not less than 500 HP. 2. Williams Lift Station—Jockev Pumu—F1v2t NT3306,670 Imueller(445 mm) a. Number..................................................................................... 1 pump b. Pump Discharge Size................................................................ 1211 c. Pump Inlet Size......................................................................... 1611 d. Minimum Motor Horsepower: The pump shall not overload the motor at any point on the pump curve but in any case it shall be not less than 215 HP. 11B5.1.5 Operating Conditions for Each Pump: 1. Williams Lift Station—Main Pumps a. One Pump Running...................................... 16,156GPM @ 101' T.D.H. b. Two Pumps Running.................................... 24,402 GPM @ 119' T.D.H. c. Three Pumps Running.................................. 30,210 GPM @ 132` T.D.H. 2. Williams Lift Station—Jockey Pump a. Minimum Head Conditions.......................... 10,000 GPM @ 25' T.D.H. b. Design Head Conditions.............................. 6,100 GPM @ 87' T.D.H. c. Maximum Head Conditions......................... 1,000 GPM @ 140' T.D.H. d. MaximumR.P.M.......................................... 1,185 11B5.1.6 Quality Assurance: a. Qualifications: The pumps shall be furnished by a manufacturer engaged in the production of the specific type of pump for a minimum of 10 years. The manufacturer shall have furnished similar pumps for at least 5 other installations in Texas performing similar duty. Each previous installation shall have performed satisfactorily for at least 5 years and are still in operation. b. Workmanship and Design: All manufacturer parts and components shall be engineered for long, continuous and uninterrupted service. Provisions shall be made for easy lubrication, adjustment, or replacement of all parts. c. Equipment Uniformity: Where like items are incorporated into equipment systems (i.e. motors, push buttons, etc.) such items must be identical to achieve standardization for appearance, operation, maintenance, spare parts,and service. Corresponding parts of multiple units shall be interchangeable. d. Manufacturer's Quality Control: All stages of the manufacturing process shall be carefully inspected at the factory by factory inspectors who shall use whatever means necessary to assure the proper fit of all field connections and compliance with all material and fabrication requirements of the specifications. e. Service and Spare Parts: It is absolutely imperative that parts be available within 60 miles of the project site for immediate repairs should repairs become necessary. Unless it can be demonstrated that parts and service have been available at a service center within 60 miles of the project site through the same financially sound firm on a continuing basis for at least 10 years, the spare parts listed in paragraph 11135.2.5 must be furnished with the pumps at no additional cost to the Owner. 11B5.1.7 NOT USED III� III�IIIIIII': ,' III�IIIIIIIC IIL.......III�IIIIIIC '�:�° IIL III�IIIIIII':III:'. 11135 '., LJ IA [14...IIL.. A...IIL....I..'A(1, I IIIA [J...IIL.. Dry Pit Page 2 o blue Pumps L..,�.,� ,�' II:� � ': '�:�° '�:�°A j 24 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 11B5.1.8 Factory Testing: The pump manufacturer shall furnish certified pump curves showing the results of testing pumping units of identical design, size,horsepower and power supply as those being furnished. 11B5.1.9 Manufacturer's Representative: See Article TS-5 of the Technical Special Provisions. 11B5.1.10 Field Service: The equipment manufacturer shall furnish the services of a qualified factory field service engineer for one 8-hour working day at the site to inspect the installation and instruct the Owner's personnel on the operation and maintenance of the pumping units. 11B5.1.11 Start Up And Field Testing: a. Installation Inspection: After the pumps have been completely installed and wired the pump manufacturer shall: (1) Megger stator and power cables (2) Measure and record combined resistance of motor windings and power cable. (3) Check seal lubrication (4) Check for proper rotation (5) Check power supply voltage (6) Measure motor no load current During this initial inspection, the manufacturer's service representative shall review recommended operation and maintenance procedures with the Owner's personnel. b. Initial Operation: After initial inspection, the manufacture's service representative shall then perform an initial operation check of each pump,including: (1) Motor current with one pump operating and with two pumps operating. (2) Power supply voltage with one pump operating and with two pumps operating. (3) Vibration c. Report: On completion of initial inspection and operation checks the pump manufacturer shall furnish the Engineer with a written report of findings and data determined,with regard to the pumps,motors, and electrical protection devices. This report shall bear the stamp of a Registered Professional Engineer employed or retained by the pump manufacturer to indicate engineering review of field test data. A copy of the report shall also be included in the operation and maintenance manuals to be provided. 11B5.1.12 Submittal Data: a. General: All equipment and materials shall be new and shall be specially designed or selected for the function and service specified. No equipment or materials may be used in the project that has not been approved by the Engineer. Submittals shall be complete and shall contain data to confirm compliance or exception to all sections of these specifications. Any exceptions must be clearly indicated. Absence of data will be considered as noncompliance and basis for disapproval. Approval for incorporation into the project will be made only after the review of shop drawings, specifications and data. Before manufacture, the Contractor shall furnish for the Engineer's review and approval as the data as required hereinafter. b. General Arrangement Drawings: All mechanical and electrical components specified herein must be included to be considered a complete submittal. Drawings shall be complete with all dimensions, anchor locations and location of any required electrical connections. I I IIIA III: IIP^�J����III III�:�����IIIA III��'�'�'�'�'�'�'�'�:IIIA^�W...IIL.. �...IIL.. ���'��:�'�Ilh... Dry Pit Submersible Pumpsi �„ ...IIL..".� III�:�����IIIIIIIIIIIC�'�'�III III�:����'III�' ...IIL..III�''���IIIA ^j PI III�IIIIIIICP���:"��. Page 3 of 9 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 c. Wiring Diagrams: For each electrical component include wiring diagrams showing integration with other components of the equipment package. All terminals and wires shall be numbered on the drawings. d. Specifications: Specifications for all mechanical and electrical components. e. Operating Instructions: Complete operating instructions and sequences for all components, electrical and mechanical, shall be included. f. Manufacture's Instructions: Manufacturer's recommended procedures for Project Site storage of equipment, handling and erection. g. Pump Curves: In addition to published catalog curves, the pump manufacturer shall furnish certified pump curves showing the results of testing pumping units of identical design, size, horsepower and power supply as those to be furnished. Pump curves shall include flow, hydraulic HP input kW and wire to water efficiency plotted against T.D.H. Curves shall be drawn to a large scale. Additional data on the curve shall include the model, serial number,impeller size,motor rated HP, power supply voltage and frequency, customer for whom the tests were conducted,date and place of testing and name of the individual supervising testing. All data must be indicated in U.S. units (gallons,feet,etc.). 11B5.1.13 Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Prior to delivery of the equipment and within 45 days following receipt of submittal data the manufacturer shall furnish six (6) sets of complete and detailed operation and maintenance manuals which shall include the following information as a minimum requirement: a. Name, address and phone number of a competent service organization located within 60 miles of the project site who can supply parts and service. If this is not the manufacturer's own service department, then furnish letters confirming that the named organization has been factory authorized to represent the manufacturer of the pumps furnished. b. Complete descriptive literature and drawings of all material furnished. This is to include "as-built" wiring diagrams of all electrical equipment, "as-built" erection drawings providing up-to-date information on the actual construction of the equipment furnished and any field modifications made during installation, startup and testing. c. Installation, operation and maintenance brochures from the original manufacturers of all mechanical components incorporated into the completed installation. d. A complete parts list with a list of recommended spare parts. e. Guide to "trouble shooting". f. All required alignment,adjustment and checking instructions. g. All required operating instructions. h. All required maintenance instructions, including schedules of routine maintenance and lubrication checks. i. Copies of the pump curves submitted as part of the approved submittal data. 11135 III:�����III:�����III�IIIIIII':...,' III�IIIIIIIC IIL...III�IIIIIIIC�'�:�°�...IIL..III�IIIIIII':III:'. L....I ( „ I IIIA III: IIP^�J IIL D Pit Submersible Pumps �� III��,"�h III:. . ��.�III III:°':III ��.�"�..IIL..III , ���4 Page 4 of 9 � W '� :�������������: � DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 11B5.1.14 Warranty: a. Guarantee By the Contractor: The equipment in this specification is subject to the guarantee provisions set out in the General Conditions. b. Guarantee By the Pump Manufacturer: In addition to the general guarantee required elsewhere in these specifications, the pump manufacturer shall furnish the Owner a written guarantee to warrant the pumps and motors against defects in workmanship and material for a period of five (5)years or 10,000 hours under normal use, operation and service. The pump manufacturer will pay the following share of the cost of all replacement parts and labor from the date of full operation of each pump unit. Pumps repaired under warranty will be returned to the Owner freight prepaid. Months: 0 -18 19 -39 40 -60 Hours: 0 -3000 3000 -6500 6500 - 10,000 Warranty: 100% 50% 25% The warranty shall be in printed form and previously published as the manufacturer's standard warranty for all similar units manufactured. The Contractor shall provide storage and maintenance during construction as instructed by the manufacturer in order to assure full warranty to the Owner. c. Accelerated Implementation of Date of Guarantee: Under certain circumstances,the date the warranty period begins on this equipment may be before the entire project is completed. 11B5.2 PRODUCTS/MATERIAL 11B5.2.I Pump Construction: a. General: Major pump components shall be of gray cast iron, Class 35B, with smooth surfaces devoid of blowholes and other irregularities. All exposed nuts and bolts shall be of AISI type 304 stainless steel or brass construction. All surfaces, coming into contact with wastewater,other than stainless steel, shall be factory sprayed with PVC epoxy primer and a chloric rubber paint finish. All mating surfaces where watertight sealing is required shall be machined and fitted with Nitrile or Viton rubber O-rings. Fittings shall be such that sealing is accomplished by metal-to-metal contact between machined surfaces which will result in controlled compression of rubber O-rings in two planes and O-ring contact on four sides without the requirement of a specific torque limit. Rectangular cross- sectioned gaskets requiring specific torque limits to achieve compression shall not be considered as adequate or equal. No secondary sealing compounds, rectangular gaskets, elliptical O-rings, grease or other devices shall be used. Tolerances of all parts shall allow replacement of any part without additional sealing required to insure sealing as described above. b. Volute: Pump volutes shall be single-piece gray cast iron, Class 30, non-concentric design with smooth passages large enough to pass any solids that may enter the impeller. Minimum inlet and discharge size shall be as indicated below and on the Drawings. c. Impeller: All impellers shall be hard iron, dynamically balanced, semi-open, multi-vane, back swept non- clog design with no acute turns and capable of handling solids, fibrous material, heavy sludge and other matter normally found in raw domestic wastewater and settled activated sludge. Mass moment of inertia calculations shall be provided by the manufacturer on request. Impellers for pump 7.5 HP and larger shall be single or multivane with keyed and Allen head bolt locking fit to the motor shaft. Impellers for 5.0 HP and smaller pumps shall be single vane with conical sleeve 11135 I Dry Pit Submersible Pumps III III IIIA IIL...I IIP'^W IIL III"I A('"" Page 5 of 9 L) ..�h�������I IIIA [J III �� :��:III���.��flA...11l...11l '��.:'��III"^�j 24 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 interference and Allen head bolt locking fit to the shaft. Minimum impeller openings dimension shall be 4-inch for pumps 20 HP and larger, and 3-inch for 15 HP and smaller. All impellers shall be coated with epoxy primer. d. Wear Rings: Pumps 10 HP and smaller shall be equipped with nitrile rubber coated steel volute wear rings. Pumps larger than 10 HP shall be equipped with nitrile rubber coated steel, or bronze volute wear rings and 304 stainless steel impeller wear rings. Wear rings shall be designed to prevent deterioration of the machined castings and shall be easily replaceable. e. Shaft: Pump shafts shall be single piece extending through the pump and motor. Extension couplings shall not be acceptable. For pump designed such that the shaft is not exposed to pumped liquid shaft material shall be C1034 carbon steel. If any portion of the shaft is exposed to pumped liquid the entire shaft material shall be 420 stainless steel. Shaft sleeves of dissimilar metals shall not be used. f. Mechanical Seals: Pumps shall be provided with a mechanical seal system consisting of two totally independent seal assemblies operating and in oil chamber between the pump volute and motor chamber for seal lubrication and cooling. The lower seal shall act as the primary unit to prevent entry of pumped liquid to the oil chamber. The upper seal shall act as a secondary unit to prevent pumped liquid or oil from entering the motor stator. The seal system shall allow continuous pump operation with the motor exterior totally dry. Each seal unit shall consist of a positive driven rotating ring, a stationary ring and an independent spring to maintain interface contact. The seal assemblies shall not require maintenance or adjustment, shall be easily inspected, shall be separately replaceable, and shall not be dependent on operating pressure differential for proper sealing. Conventional or cartridge type double mechanical seals utilizing a common spring system shall not be acceptable. The lower seal for all pumps shall have tungsten carbide rotating and stationary rings. The upper seal for pumps 20 HP and larger shall also have tungsten carbide rotating and stationary rings. For pumps 10 HP and smaller the upper seal may be furnished with a tungsten carbide stationary ring and a carbon rotating ring. The pump motor shall be designed to allow simple access for seal inspection. Pumps 20 HP and larger shall be equipped with tapped plugs to allow inspection for leakage in the oil housing and motor stator housing without pump disassembly. Separate oil chamber drain plugs shall also be provided. g. Bearings: Pumps shall be equipped with permanently lubricated bearings with a system B-10 life of 40,000 hours. Upper bearings shall be single row ball or roller. Lower bearings for pumps 60 HP and smaller shall be double row angular contact. Pumps larger than 60 HP shall be equipped with both a double row angular contact and a roller lower bearing. h. Discharge Connection: A discharge connection shall be provided as an integral part of the pump assembly and shall have a 125-psi ASA flange for connection to discharge piping. i. Suction Connection: A suction connection shall be provided by a 90°bend with a cleanout port with bolted cover. The connection shall have a 125-psi ASA flange for connection to suction piping. III:�����III:�����III�IIIIIII':...,' III�IIIIIIIC IIL...III�IIIIIIIC�'�:�°�...IIL..III�IIIIIII':III:'. '., L) IA [Ij...IIL.. A...IIL....I..'A('"� I IIIA [J...IIL.. 11135 "P'A j '1 24 Dry Pit Submersible Pumps Page 6 of 9 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 11B5.2.2 Pump Motor and Cable: a. Motor: Pump motors shall be NEMA Design B squirrel-cage induction type with the stator and rotor housed in an air-filled, watertight chamber. Motors 40 HP and smaller shall be dual voltage suitable for operation with 230 or 460 volt, three-phase power. The stator winding, stator leads and insulating paper shall be moisture resistant NEMA Class F and shall be dipped and baked a minimum of three times in Class F varnish for a total temperature rating of 155° C. The stator unit shall be heat-shrink fitted into the stator housing. Use of bolts, pins or other fastening devices requiring penetration of the stator housing shall not be acceptable. The rotor bars and short circuit rings shall be of aluminum. The motor shall be designed for continuous duty in 40° C ambient air and capable of 10 starts per hour. Thermal switches embedded in the stator windings shall be used to monitor stator temperature. The switches shall be normally closed and set to open at 155° C. Automatic re-closing shall occur when stator temperature cools to 150° C. Motors 10 HP and smaller shall be air-cooled. Motors 15 HP and larger shall be equipped with an internal water jacket that encircles the stator housing and utilizes circulation of the pumped liquid. Cooling water channels and ports shall be non-clogging by virtue of their dimensions. Cooling systems requiring separate source cooling water will not be acceptable. Motors driven by a variable frequency drive shall be rated for inverter duty suitable for IGBT drive applications. b. Power Cable Entry and Connection: The power cable entry seal design shall preclude specific torque requirements to insure a watertight seal and shall allow simple, field changing of power cables without affecting pump or motor warranty. The cable entry assembly shall consist of a seal flange designed and machined to provide precise compressions of a single,cylindrical,elastomer grommet flanked by stainless steel washers all having a close tolerance fit against the outside diameter of the cable and the inside diameter of the entry body. The sealing flange shall bolt to a machined surface on the pump and the compression washer shall bear against a machined shoulder in the entry body. Compression by the entry body shall provide a strain relief function separate from the cable sealing function. A separate junction chamber shall be provided inside the pump for connection of power cable to stator leads. The junction chamber shall be sealed by a nonmetallic plate, or terminal board, bolted to a machined surface and utilizing an O-ring to obtain a watertight seal. Penetrations of the sealing plate or terminal board for stator leads shall be separately sealed to prevent moisture or contamination that might enter through the cable, cable entry or during field change of cables from entering the motor stator housing. Pumps 20 HP and larger shall be furnished with threaded, compression type binding posts mounted in a terminal board. Pumps 10 HP and smaller shall have screwed compression type terminal strips. All pumps 40 HP and less shall be capable of field reconnection for operation with 230 or 460 V 3-phase power. c. Power Cable: All pump power cables shall be multi-conductor externally jacketed with oil resistant chloroprene rubber. Internal tinned copper conductors insulation shall be ethylene propylene rubber (DuPont Nordel) and shall be color-coded to identify each power and control lead. Conductor sizing shall comply with N.E.C. requirements and cables for pumps 40 HP and smaller shall be suitably sized for operation with 230 or 460 volt power. Power cables shall comply with N.E.C. requirements for portable power use. The cable shall be specifically designed for submersible pump service and shall be identified as such by external marking as type SUB CAB (Submersible Cable). Pump power cables shall be provided with enough length so that the pump in the drywell can be connected to the junction box at floor level. No splices between pump and junction box will be allowed. III:�����III:�����III�IIIIIII':...,' III�IIIIIIIC IIL.......III�IIIIIIIC�'�:�°�...IIL..III�IIIIIII':III:'. '., 11BsLJ IA [IJ...IIL.. A...IIL....I..'N'"� I IIIA [J...IIL.. Dry Pit Submersible Pumps L..';�:'��� ,' III II[II (I°""III III II('"°"A j 24 Page 7 of 9 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 d. Leakage Sensors: A miniature float switch leakage sensor located in the bottom of the stator housing shall be provided for sensing the presence of any water or oil. The leakage sensor shall be connected to a monitoring unit and shall be wired in series with the thermal switches. 11B5.2.3 Controls: See Electrical Specifications. 11B5.2.4 Floats Controls: Float controls shall be furnished by the pump supplier and shall consist of the float switch, cable and hardware necessary to secure a neat permanent installation. Float switches shall be the non-floating type with internal weighting to keep the switch below water after tilting. Float switches shall be non- metallic with a normally open contact that closes on liquid level rise. The switch shall consist of polypropylene float housing; mercury switch and neoprene jacketed control cable. Float housing shall be leak proof, shock and corrosion resistant. Mercury switch shall be metal-encased, shock resistant, with 10 amp, 120-volt contact, N.O. or N.C. as indicated by the control schematics. Floats shall be the product of Anchor Scientific, Inc. or Flygt or an approved equal. All float control circuits to operate at 24 VAC. Brackets and clamps shall be of the same manufacturer as the float control provided. Power cables shall be of adequate length to prevent splicing prior to terminal connection (provide excess cable to allow float adjustment). Hardware shall include cable clamps,brackets,pipe supports etc. All cable hardware shall be stainless steel construction. 11B5.2.5 Hardware: All nuts,bolts,washers,anchor bolts or any attachment hardware shall be 316 stainless steel. 11B5.2.6 Anchorages: The equipment manufacturer shall furnish all anchor bolts, nuts,washers and gaskets necessary for the equipment furnished by him, as well as any templates required for setting the anchorage. The General Contractor shall place the anchorage in accordance with certified prints supplied by the equipment manufacturer. All equipment anchorage and fasteners, including nuts and washers, shall be 316 stainless steel. The minimum size of any drop-in anchor shall be 1/2"diameter. 11B5.2.7 Spare Parts: a. General: The submersible pumps for this project are the most important mechanical components of this project. It is absolutely imperative that parts be available within 60 miles of the project site for immediate repairs should repairs become necessary. Unless it can be demonstrated that parts and service have been available at a service center within 60 miles of the project site through the same financially sound firm on a continuing basis for at least 10 years, the spare parts listed below must be furnished with the pumps at no additional cost to the Owner. b. List of Spare Parts to be Furnished: (1) Basic Package: The following items shall be considered a basic package of spare parts for each size pump and motor: Impeller Upper mechanical seal Lower mechanical seal Wear ring Complete set of 0-rings and gaskets Cable entry assembly 50'-Power cable Set of bearings. Impeller puller and special tools O Quantities uantities of Basic Packages of Spare Parts: g p � � [IJ 1 Package (one for each pair of pumps) IIL.........�� ����.�' IIIA III, �..� .. II : I^ ...IIL.. ... 11135 A...IIL....I..'��°:�`��Ilh...I IIIA III�IIIIIIIC III���W...IIL.. Dry Pit Submersible Pumps L..';�:'��� ,' III III�IIIIIII': '��:�°III III '��:�°"A IIL III ';�:��� IIIA^J 24 Page 8 of 9 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 11B5.3 CONSTRUCTION METHODS: 11B5.3.I Eguipment And Materials Shipping And Storage: a. Preparation for Shipment: The pumping units shall be fully assembled and suitable crated for shipment. Electrical panels and components shall be protected from the weather and suitable packaged to facilitate handling and storage. All motors, electrical panels and components shall be kept thoroughly dry at all times. b. Storage of Equipment: (1) All equipment stored on the Project Site shall be protected and maintained in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. (2) Electrical equipment must be stored in weatherproof, ventilated enclosures. Temporarily connect motor space heater until permanently installed. (3) Equipment shall not be allowed to contact the ground directly. (4) The storage area shall be kept clean. 11B5.3.2 Installation: a. General: All installation shall be "First Class" and done in accordance with standard practice to provide a neat, structurally sound installation. The equipment shall be furnished complete by the manufacturer and shall be installed by the Contractor as directed by the manufacturer in his working drawings and written instructions. The installation shall be checked,tested and approved by a factory representative before acceptance. When installed,pumping units shall be level and in proper alignment. Piping shall not be in a"Bind". b. Installation of Anchorages: All cast in place anchor bolts shall be placed in strict accordance with the equipment manufacturer's instructions and templates. Length of the anchor bolts, depth of embedment and projection shall be in strict accordance with the equipment manufacturer's directions. Anchors other than cast in place shall be drop-in style (hole size equal bolt size) or chemical/ capsule anchors and shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's directions, particularly embedment length. After the concrete or the anchoring chemical has set, coat the threads of the anchor bolt(s) with "Never Seize" or an approved equal before attaching equipment thereto. Threads of erection bolts shall also be coated with "Never Seize" or an approved equal before assembly. 11135 III:�����III:�����III�IIIIIII':...,' III�IIIIIIIC IIL...III�IIIIIIIC�'�:�°�...IIL..III�IIIIIII':III:'. Dry Pit Submersible Pumps LJ A [IJ IA^W....., A.......I M1, I A IIA^W...���... Page 9 of 9 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK SECTION 2A- CLEARING OF SITE 2A2[i] DEVIATIONS OCCASIONED BY EXISTING OBSTRUCTIONS 2A2.1 SCOPE: The drawings show the locations of all known surface and subsurface structures. In the case of underground obstructions such as existing water, sewer, storm sewer, gas or electrical lines that are not shown on the drawings,their location is not guaranteed. The Owner assumes no responsibility for failure to show any or all these structures on the drawings or to show them in their exact location. Failure to show will not be considered sufficient basis for claims for additional compensation for extra work in any manner whatsoever unless the obstruction encountered necessitates substantial changes in the lines or grades or requires the building of special work for which no provision is made in the drawings and which is not essentially subsidiary to some item of work for which provision is made. It is assumed, that as elsewhere provided, the Contractor has thoroughly inspected the site, is informed as to the correct location of surface structures,and has included the cost of such incidental work in the price bid, and has considered and allowed for all foreseeable incidental work due to variable sub- surface conditions, whether such conditions and such work are fully and properly described on the drawings or not. Minor changes and variations of the work specified and shown on the drawings shall be expected by the Contractor and allowed for as incidental to the satisfactory completion of a whole and functioning work or improvement. 2A2.2 ABANDONED LINES: When a line is uncovered that is not necessary for the proper operation of the plant, the line shall be cut and plugged with concrete. Owner's representative shall be notified prior to authorizing the cutting and plugging. No claim for additional compensation for extra work will be considered for this. 2A2.3 SERVICE LINES When an unshown line is uncovered that must remain in service for the proper operation of the plant, the line shall be rerouted. In this instance, consideration of a claim for additional compensation for extra work will be handled on an individual basis. 2A2.4 TRENCHING AHEAD: 2A2.4.1 General: The Contractor is required to conduct trenching operations in a manner which will allow conflicts to be anticipated thereby allowing measures to be taken in certain cases to circumvent the conflict. Specifically the Contractor shall do the following: a. Trenching shall be performed a minimum of 100 feet(or the total length of the trench)ahead of pipe laying operations. Pilot Trenches may be used at the Contractor's option. b. If unshown buried lines are discovered which may cause conflict, Contractor shall stop pipe laying operations and notify Engineer of discovery. 2A2.4.2 Grade Alignment If conflict can be avoided by adjusting grades by a maximum of two feet up or down and no additional fittings are required, no claim for additional compensation for extra work will be considered. Lines requiring adjustments greater than 2 feet, additional fittings or the soil being trenched significantly different will be considered for extra compensation on an individual basis. 2A2.4.3 Avoidable Conflicts: Conflicts occurring because of the Contractor's failure to comply with 2A2.4.1 and which could have been avoided by grade adjustment in accordance with 2A2.4.2 will not be considered for extra compensation. 2A2.5 EXTRA WORK No work for which extra compensation is to be received shall be performed until approved by the Engineer and the Owner. 2A2 Deviations Occasioned by Exist. Obstructions Page 1 of 1 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK SECTION 2A- CLEARING OF SITE 2A3[i] CLEARING, GRUBBING AND STRIPPING 2A3.1 SCOPE: This specification shall govern for all work necessary to complete the clearing,grubbing and stripping as indicated by the drawings and as specified herein and shall include removing and disposing of all trees, stumps, brush, roots, logs, vegetation, rubbish and other objectionable matter from the project area. This specification is a performance specification as defined in Article TS-1 of the Technical Special Provisions. 2A3.2 CONSTRUCTION METHODS: 2A3.2.1 Clearing: Clear the project site of all trees, stumps, brush, roots, logs, vegetation, rubbish, and objectionable material. 2A3.2.2 Grubbing: Grub all stumps and roots to a depth of two and one half feet below natural ground. 2A3.2.3 Stripper: Stripping all area, which underlie compacted fill, of all humus, vegetation or other unsuitable materials encountered within the top 6 inches of soil. 2A3.2.4 Disposal: Remove all materials from the clearing, grubbing, and stripping operation from the site when no disposal area is shown on the drawings. Burning will be allowed when not in violation with local ordinances; however, Contractor shall be held responsible for any fires or accidents resulting from this operation. 2A3 Clearing, Grubbing & Stripping Page 1 of 1 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK SECTION 2B- EARTHWORK 2BI[i] SITE GRADING 2B1.1 SCOPE: This specification shall govern for all work necessary to accomplish shaping and grading indicated on the drawings and specified herein and shall include maintaining surface drainage during construction, finish grading and all phases of the cleanup operation. This specification is a performance specification as defined in Article TS-1 of the Technical Special Provisions. 2B1.2 GENERAL: The Contractor shall uniformly grade the entire project site to provide a pleasing appearance. 2B1.3 CONSTRUCTION METHODS: 2B1.3.1 Finishing Slopes and Surfaces: The Contractor shall shape and grade the project site to conform to the proposed grade and/or sections shown on the drawings, and as directed by the Engineer. In any case, the Contractor shall grade the site to provide positive drainage away from buildings and towards roads and drainage facilities. The finished appearance shall be reasonably smooth and even(abrupt changes in slope shall not be used). The degree of finish for grading slopes shall be that ordinarily obtainable from either blade-grader operations, or by hand-shovel operations, as the Contractor may elect, subject to the approval of the Engineer. Adjust any existing or new valve boxes,manhole rims, etc. to new final grades and pour concrete pads as shown in details provided in drawings. 2B1.3.2 Clean-Up: The Contractor shall keep the site and structures free from accumulations of waste materials, debris, etc. caused by the work or his employees. All material, debris, rocks, concrete spoil, etc. exposed at grade or lying on top of the ground shall be picked up and disposed of by the Contractor. Upon completion of the project and before requesting final inspection,the site and his work shall be "broom clean" or its equivalent. 2131 Site Grading Page I of I DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 DIVISION 2- SITE WORK SECTION 2B - EARTHWORK 2B3[i] PIPE TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL 2B3.1 SCOPE: This specification shall govern for all work necessary to accomplish the pipe trench excavation for all piping required to complete the project. This specification is a performance specification as defined in Article TS-1 of the Technical Special Provisions. 2B3.2 MATERIAL: Trench excavation shall include all material encountered including dirt, asphalt, base material, concrete,masonry,rock,trees, stumps and roots. Trench excavation will not be measured. 2B3.3 TRENCHES EXCEEDING 5 FEET IN DEPTH: 2B3.3.1 Trench Excavation Safety: The Contractor's trench excavation safety procedures shall, in all respects, meet the current standards established by the U. S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)on excavation,trenching and shoring. 2B3.3.2 Responsibility: Contractor has the sole and exclusive responsibility for the sufficiency of the trench excavation safety systems utilized. The Contractor shall specifically agree that neither the Owner nor the Engineer has such responsibility, and Contractor will not rely on the Owner or the Engineer or any of their representatives for inspection, design, supervision, construction or any other aspect of trench excavation safety protection. Contractor shall fully indemnify, safe and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, their employees and agents (hereinafter the Indemnities) against any and all liability, damage, loss, claims, demands and actions of any nature whatsoever on account of personal injuries (including, without limitation on the foregoing,workers'compensation and death claims), or property loss or damage of any kind whatsoever,which arise out of or are in any manner connected with, or are claimed to arise out of or be in any way connected with, the negligence of the Contractor in the inspection, design, engineering, supervision, construction, safety devices or other activity connected with the trench excavation safety protection under this Agreement. Contractor shall, at his own expense, investigate all such claims and demands, attend to their settlement or other disposition, defend all actions based thereon and pay all charges of attorneys and all other costs and expenses of any kind arising from any such liability,damage,loss,claims demands,and actions. 2B3.4 TRENCHES 5 FEET OR LESS IN DEPTH: The Contractor shall maintain vertical sides of the trench. The minimum and maximum width of trench is set out on the Drawings. The Contractor shall provide and install any sheeting, shoring and bracing as necessary to provide a safe work area as required to protect workmen, structures, equipment,trees, etc. The Contractor shall be responsible for the design and adequacy of all shoring, bracing and sheeting. The Contractor shall remove shoring,bracing and sheeting, as the excavation is backfilled,in such a manner as to prevent injurious caving. 2B3.5 CONSTRUCTION METHODS: 2B3.5.1 General: The Contractor shall schedule the excavation of pipe trenches at such times and in such sequence as to present the least interference with other items of the work and the operation of the existing facilities. The Contractor shall pile excavated material in a manner that will not endanger the work, and will avoid obstructing sidewalks and driveways. Gutters shall be kept clear. 2B3 Pipe Trench Excavation Page 1 of 4 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 2B3.5.2 Unauthorized Over-excavation: If the Contractor should excavate below the proposed trench grade (without authorization of the Engineer) the Contractor shall correct the grade by filling in with sand and tamping thoroughly as directed by the Engineer. 2B3.5.3 Trees, Stumps or Roots: Where trees, stumps or roots are encountered, they shall be removed and disposed of by the Contractor. Roots shall be cut off flush with the sides of the trench. 2B3.5.4 Rocks,Boulders,Existing Structures,etc.: Where rocks, boulders, existing structures or other unsuitable soil conditions are encountered, they shall be removed by the Contractor to a depth of 12 inches below the grade line for the full width of the trench and refilled with sand and tamped thoroughly as directed by the Engineer. 2B3.5.5 Maintenance of Flow in Sewers and Drains: The Contractor shall make adequate provision for maintaining the flow of sewers and drains encountered during construction. 2B3.5.6 Dewatering: The Contractor shall keep the pipe trench free from water by use of bailing, pumping well points or any combination as the particular situation may warrant. It is the intent of these specifications to install pipe on a firm dry bed. All dewatering methods and procedures are subject to the approval of the Engineer. The cessation of the dewatering operation will be accomplished during a sufficient period of time to insure that there is no displacement of the pipe due to unequal hydrostatic pressure. 2B3.5.7 Unstable Trench Bottom: When the soil encountered at the established bedding grade is a quicksand,muck or similar unsuitable material, the Contractor shall proceed as follows: All unstable soil shall be removed to a depth of 2 feet below bottom of pipe for pipe 2 feet or more in diameter, and to a depth equal to the diameter of pipe for pipe less than 2 feet in diameter. Such excavation shall be carried at least one foot beyond the horizontal limits of the structure on all sides. All unstable soil so removed shall be replaced with suitable stable material, placed in uniform layers of suitable depth as directed by the Engineer, and each layer shall be wetted, if necessary, and compacted by tamping as required to provide a stable foundation for the structure. Soil which is considered to be of sufficient stability to sustain properly the adjacent sections of the roadway embankment will be considered a suitable foundation material for the pipe. 2B3.5.8 Un. ie�g Trench Bottom: When the soil encountered at the established bedding grade is ledge rock, rocky or gravelly soil, hard pan or other unyielding material, such materials shall be removed prior to bedding the pipe. These materials shall be excavated for a minimum of 6 inches below the bottom of the pipe and shall be replaced with sand. 2B3.5.9 Shaping Trench Bottom: The bottom of the trench shall be shaped to support the bottom quadrant uniformly and for its entire length. Provide bell holes for couplings. The pipe shall be bedded in a foundation of stable material accurately shaped to fit the lower part of the pipe exterior. 2133 Pipe Trench Excavation Page 2 of 4 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 2B3.5.10 Sand For Encasement,Embedment And/Or Haunchin : When the drawings require sand for encasement, haunching and/or embedment, the material shall be screened,free of foreign material and be a finely divided sand as follows: Sand Specifications: Passing 7/8" Sieve:........................................................................................ 100%by weight Passing No. 4 Sieve:...................................................................................... 80%by weight Clay Lumps not to Exceed: ........................................................................... 20%by weight Plasticity Index:............................................................................................. NP-10 max. 2B3.5.11 Crushed Stone For Haunchmg And/Or Embedment: When the drawings require crushed stone for haunching and/or embedment,the material used shall be angular crushed stone, in the general size range of 3/4" to 1/16" which has good stability. Crushed stone shall be graded in accordance with Size#67 or#68 of AASHO M 43, ASTM D 448. 2B3.5.12 Concrete Embedment: When concrete embedment is required on the drawings, the concrete shall conform to Section 3C1 "Normal Weight Aggregate Concrete". Concrete embedment shall be allowed to cure for at least 24 hours before placing initial backfill and at least 48 hours before placing final backfill unless approved otherwise by the Engineer. 2B3.5.13 Backfill Material: a. General: Unless shown otherwise on the drawings, suitable material chosen from the excavation shall be used for backfill. The material chosen shall be free of large lumps, or clods, which will not readily break down under compaction. Backfill material shall be free of vegetation or other extraneous material. Material will be subject to approval by the Engineer. In areas not under existing or proposed pavement,the last 6 inches of backfill shall be topsoil. b. Select Backfill Material: When "select" backfill material is shown on the drawings, it shall be granular in nature, free of large clods,and have a plasticity index(P.I.)of less than 15. 2B3.5.14 Initial Backfill: Initial backfill is defined as that backfill from the bottom of the trench (or from the top of the haunching when shown on the drawings) to 1 foot above the top of the pipe. The Contractor shall place initial backfill in maximum 8-inch layers (loose measure) and mechanically compact it to a density between 90% and 95% of the maximum density as determined by ASTM D-698 with a moisture content near optimum. Backfill below the top of the pipe shall be placed and compacted along the sides of the pipe equally to prevent strain on or displacement of the pipe. 2B3.5.15 Final Backfill: a. General: Final backfill is defined as that backfill from 1 foot above the top of the pipe to finished subgrade or ground line. See the drawings for locations where final backfill is mechanically tamped or water tamped. b. Mechanically Tamped: The Contractor shall place final backfill in maximum 8-inch layers (loose measure) and mechanically compact it to a density between 90%and 95%of the maximum density ASTM D- 698 with a moisture content near optimum. 2133 Pipe Trench Excavation Page 3 of 4 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 c. Water Tamped: The Contractor shall place final backfill to a level of 18 inches below the surface of the ground. Backfill will be consolidated by jetting. When jetting, selected excavated material shall be placed in layers of not more than 6 to 8 feet in depth and jetted until all settlement ceases. Water jets shall be long enough to reach through the material being tamped. It is the intent of these specifications that water tamping shall continue until all cavities have been eliminated and the material is completely consolidated. After the jetting is completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer,the remaining 18 inches shall be placed in two equal layers and mechanically tamped to at least 90%Standard Proctor Density ASTM D-698. 2B3.5.16 Excess and Unsuitable Material: All excess and/or unsuitable excavated material shall be loaded and hauled from the project site by the Contractor. 2133 Pipe Trench Excavation Page 4 of 4 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 DIVISION 2- SITE WORK SECTION 2H-ROADS AND WALKS 21116[1] CONCRETE SIDEWALK AND CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS 21416.1 SCOPE: This specification shall govern for all work necessary to provide the concrete sidewalk and/or concrete driveways required to complete the project. This specification is a Performance specification as defined in Article TS-1 Technical Special Provisions. 21416.2 MATERIALS: 21416.2.1 Steel Reinforcing And Dowel Bars: Billet Steel,ASTM A615 Grade 60. a. Steel reinforcing: Provide 4" x 4" -W2.9 x W2.9 welded wire fabric or as shown on drawings. b. Dowels: Provide 1/2" diameter smooth bars as follows: Width of Walk No. of Dowels Width of Drive No. of Dowels per Joint per Joint 2 ft. ................. 2 8 ft. .................................. 6 3 ft. ................. 2 10 ft. .................................. 7 4 ft. ................. 3 12 ft. .................................. 8 5 ft. ................. 4 16 ft. .................................. 11 6 ft. ................. 5 18 ft. .................................. 12 20 ft. .................................. 13 24 ft. .................................. 16 21416.2.2 Concrete: Concrete shall be Class A, 3000 PSI 28 days as specified in Subsection 3C1 "Normal Weight Aggregate Concrete". 21416.2.3 Expansion Joint Material: Expansion joint material shall be 3/4" wood fiber asphalt-impregnated expansion board. 21416.2.4 Paving Cap Seal: Paving cap seal shall be Greenstreak #610 or approved equal stapled or nailed to expansion board. 21416.2.5 Curing Compound: Resin base ASTM C309 Type I,with light red tint of fugitive dye. 21416.3 CONSTRUCTION METHODS: 21416.3.1 Excavation: Excavation shall include all classes of material, including old concrete. 21416.3.2 Subgrade: Subgrade under the sidewalk and/or driveway shall be thoroughly compacted and shall be true to line and grade. The subgrade shall be free from soft spots and loose material. 21416 Concrete Sidewalk and Concrete Driveways Page 1 of 3 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 Compaction under concrete driveways shall be 95% Standard Proctor Density (ASTM D- 698)unless shown otherwise on the drawings. 2H16.3.3 Forms: Forms shall be straight, durable and have a depth equal to the required concrete depth (Commercial size lumber may be used provided full depth of concrete is obtained). The forms shall be securely staked to line and grade in such a manner that there shall be no movement when the concrete is placed. The subgrade shall be wet down before placing concrete. The forms shall be cleaned and oiled before placing concrete. Concrete shall not be placed until forms have been approved by the Engineer. 2H16.3.4 Reinforcing Steel: Wire mesh shall be supported to insure that it is covered with a minimum of 1-1/2" of concrete. 2H16.3.5 Expansion Joints and Transverse Markings: Expansion joints and transverse markings shall be square with the sidewalk and/or concrete driveway. Expansion joints with dowels and transverse marking shall be located and accomplished in accordance with the drawings. When not shown on the drawings, provide doweled expansion joints at changes of direction and at maximum 40 feet spacing and provide transverse markings (1/8 inch wide and 1/2 inch minimum depth) at maximum 10 feet spacing. 2H16.3.6 Concrete Placement: The concrete shall be placed in such a manner so that segregation does not occur. The concrete shall be thoroughly tamped with a"jitterbug" or other approved tool. 2H16.3.7 Jointing and Tooling: All joints and edges shall be tooled and the finished surface shall be lightly broomed (with a hair broom) to provide a non-skid surface. When directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall apply an approved sand-cement mixture to the surface just before the final floating and troweling. 2H16.3.8 Curing: Immediately after the brooming has been completed, curing compound shall be evenly applied. The quantity applied shall be as directed by the Engineer. 2H16.3.9 Removing Forms: Forms shall be carefully removed so that the sidewalk and/or concrete driveway is not damaged. All "honeycomb" shall be plastered before backfilling is accomplished. 2H16.3.10 Joining New and Old Concrete: When joining new and old concrete, the old concrete shall be cut with a concrete saw for a depth of 1/2", then the remaining depth shall be neatly broke using an approved method, then the exposed edges shall be thoroughly cleaned and then painted with an epoxy bonding agent before placing the new concrete. The epoxy bonding agent shall be applied in strict conformance with manufacturer's recommendations. When expansion joints are provided utilize 3/4" wood fiber expansion board and Greenstreak 4628 paving cap seal at interface with existing and new concrete. 21-116 Concrete Sidewalk and Concrete Driveways Page 2 of 3 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 2H16.3.11 Backfilling: The concrete sidewalk and/or driveway shall be carefully backfilled with material taken from the excavation. The Contractor shall neatly spread all excess material as directed by the Engineer. The area adjacent to the sidewalk and/or driveway shall be uniformly graded so as to provide positive drainage towards the street. 21-116 Concrete Sidewalk and Concrete Driveways Page 3 of 3 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK SECTION 2H- ROADS AND WALKS 21117[1] REMOVING AND REPLACING PAVEMENTS, CURB AND GUTTER, DRIVEWAYS AND SIDEWALK 2H17.1 SCOPE: This specification shall govern for all work necessary to complete the removing and replacing of all types of pavements,curb and gutter,driveways and sidewalks as required to complete the project. This specification is a performance specification as defined in Article TS-1 Technical Special Provisions. 2H17.2 METHOD OF CUTTING: The outline of the trench shall be marked on the surface to be cut. The cut shall be made as nearly vertical as possible. The excavated pavement or concrete shall be removed from the site and disposed of by the Contractor. 2H17.3 REPLACING PAVEMENT: 2H17.3.1 Concrete Pavement: Replace with 8-inch thick 2500 p.s.i. concrete slab,reinforced with No. 3 bars on 12-inch centers both ways. Tamp and float to finish flush with surface of pavement cut. Repair to be wider than ditch excavation. Concrete slab and reinforcement to rest on at least 9-inches of undisturbed soil on each side of ditch. 2H17.3.2 Asphalt Pavement: a. Base Course: Replace with 8-inches of cement stabilized flexible base (limestone) compacted to 95%Standard Proctor Density in accordance with A.A.S.H.O. Standard Method T-99. Base material shall be obtained from approved sources. Material shall consist of argillaceous limestone, calcareous clay particles with or without stone, conglomerate, gravel or sand free of vegetation and other foreign materials. All the acceptable material shall be screened and the oversize shall be crushed and returned to the screened material in such a manner that a uniform product will be produced. The quality of the caliche shall be controlled by a recognized commercial testing laboratory and shall meet the following requirements: (1) Gradation(ASTM D-422) Passing 2-1/2" screen .............................................................................. 100% Passing 2" screen..................................................................................... 95%to 100% Passing 1" screen..................................................................................... 65%to 90% Passing 3/4" screen.................................................................................. 60%to 80% Passing 40 mesh screen............................................................................ 15%to 40% (2) Liquid Limit(ASTM D-423)................................................................... 45 max. (3) Plasticity Index......................................................................................... 5 - 16 (4) Linear Shrinkage(ASTM D-427)............................................................ 7.5 max. (5) Los Angeles Abrasion Loss(ASTM C-131)............................................ 55%max. All material with a Plasticity Index (P.I.) between 9 and 16 must be stabilized with lime admixture using that amount of lime, as determined by laboratory tests,required to lower the P.I. to 7 or less. b. Prime Coat: Apply prime coat at the rate of 0.15 gal./s.y. Prime coat shall conform to Item 300 "Asphalt, Oil and Emulsions, of the Standard Specification for Construction of Highways, Streets and Bridges, 1982;of the Texas Department of Highways and Public Transportation,Type MC-70. 2H17 Replacing Pavement Page 1 of 2 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 c. Asphaltic Concrete: Apply hot mix-hot laid asphaltic concrete applied at the rate of 165 lb./s.y. compacted to 1-1/2 inch thickness. Hot mix shall conform to Item 340 "Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete Pavement" of the Standard Specifications for Construction of Highways, Streets and Bridges, 1982; of the Texas Department of Highways and Public Transportation,Type D. Repair to be wider than ditch excavation. Flexible base shall rest on at least 9-inches of undisturbed soil on each side of the ditch 2H17.3.3 Caliche or Shell Streets and Shoulders: Replace with 9-inches of flexible base (limestone) compacted to 90% Standard Proctor Density in accordance with A.A.S.H.O. Standard Method T-99. Repair to be larger than ditch excavation. Flexible base shall rest on at least 9-inches of undisturbed soil on each side of ditch. 2H17.4 REPLACING CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS: Replace with 2500 p.s.i. concrete, 6" thick, reinforced with 6 x 6 #646 wire mesh. Finish replaced section same as that appearing on old driveway. Use an epoxy bonding agent, in conformance with the manufacturer's recommendations,when bonding new concrete to old concrete. 2H17.5 REPLACING CONCRETE SIDEWALKS: Replace with 2500 p.s.i. concrete, 4" thick, reinforced with 6 x 6 #6 46 wire mesh. Finish replaced section same as that appearing on old sidewalk. Use an epoxy bonding agent,in conformance with the manufacturer's recommendations,when bonding new concrete to old concrete. 2H17 Replacing Pavement Page 2 of 2 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 DIVISION 2- SITE WORK SECTION 2I- SITE IMPROVEMENTS 2I1[4]CHAIN-LINK FENCE (HEAVY DUTY—VINYL COATED) 1.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01 SCOPE This specification shall govern for all work necessary for providing and installing the 7' high (6' high fabric and 3 strands of barbed wire and 6' tall vinyl privacy slats) chain-link fence required to complete the project. This is a performance specification as defined in Article TS-1 of the Technical Special Provisions. 2.0 PRODUCTS/MATERIALS 2.01 GENERAL All materials used for fencing shall be new and shall be First Class. The use of re-rolled, open seam tubing,or any used material will not be allowed. Posts,gate frames,braces,rails, stretcher bars,and truss rods shall be of steel; reinforcing wires shall be of high carbon steel; and gate hinges,post caps, stretcher bar bands, and other parts shall be of steel, malleable iron, ductile iron or equal except that ties and clips may be of aluminum. Exposed portion of fence,except barbed wire, shall be polyvinyl coated. All vinyl and vinyl coated materials shall be black in color. 2.02 POSTS,GATE FRAMES,RAILS AND BRACES Posts, gate frames, rails, and braces shall conform to the dimensions and weights shown in the following table. Outside Diameter Weight Use and Section or Dimensions, Per Foot, Nominal Nominal Inches Inches End,corner,and pull posts(tubular): Round 2.875 5.79 Square 2.50 5.70 Gate posts for nominal width of gate, single,or one leaf of double 6 feet and less: Round 2.875 5.79 Square 2.50 5.70 Gate width 13 feet and less: Round 4.00 9.10 Square 3.00 9.10 Gate width over 13 feet to 18 feet,incl.: Round 6.625 18.97 Gate width over 18 feet: Round 6.625 24.70 Gates: exterior frames: Round 1.90 2.72 Square 1.50 2.10 Internal gate bracing: Round 1.66 1.806 Square 2.00 1.90 Rails and post braces(tubular): Round 1.660 1.806 Intermediate posts: Tubular,Round 2.375 3.65 H-Section 2.25 x1.95 x 1.43 4.10 2I1 Chain-Link Fence(Heavy Duty) Page 1 of 5 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 All steel and iron parts shall be zinc-coated after fabrication, using zinc grade "E" in accordance with Federal Specification QQ-Z-351. The weight of the zinc coating per square foot of actual surface area shall average not less than 1.2 ounces and no individual specimen shall show less than 1.0 ounces. After the zinc coating is applied,the above ground portion of the post shall be coated with 20 mil black polyvinyl. 2.03 FABRIC A. DEFINITIONS 1. Chain link fence fabric: Chain link fence fabric is a fencing material made from wire helically wound and interwoven in such a manner as to provide a continuous mesh without knots or ties except in the form of knuckling or of twisting and barbing the ends of the wires to form the selvage of the fabric. 2. Knuckling: Knuckling is the term used to describe the type of selvage obtained by interlocking adjacent pairs of wire ends and binding the wire ends back into a closed loop. B. BASE METAL The base metal of the fabric shall be a good commercial quality of steel wire. The wire shall withstand a breaking load of 1,290 lbs. C. FABRIC COATING 1. Zinc Coating: The fabric shall be zinc-coated by the hot-dip process after fabrication, or shall be fabricated from wire zinc-coating by the electrolytic or hot-dip process. The weight of zinc- coating shall be not less than 1.2 ounces per square foot of actual surface covered. The zinc used for the coating shall conform to the grades specified in ASTM Designation B6 Standard Specifications for Slab Zinc. 2. Vinyl Coating: After the zinc coating is applied, the fabric shall be coated on all sides with 20 mil black polyvinyl. D. FABRIC SIZES 1. General: The height, size of mesh, and wire diameters of chain link fence shall be 72-inch high by 2-inch meshby 0.1483-inch diameter(No. 9 gauge). 2. Height of fabric: The height of fabric shall be the overall dimension from ends of barbs or knuckles. The tolerance on the nominal height shall be plus or minus one inch. 3. Mesh sizes: The size of mesh shall be determined by measuring the minimum clear distance between the wires forming the parallel sides of the mesh, measured in either direction. The tolerance in the size of 1-3/4 and 2-inch mesh shall be plus or minus 1/8 inch. 4. Wire diameter: The diameter of the coated wire shall be determined as the average of two readings measured to the nearest 0.001-inch taken at right angles to each other on the straight portion of the parallel sides of the mesh. The tolerance in the diameter of the coated wire shall be plus or minus 0.005-inch. E. SELVAGE Fabric shall be furnished with twisting and barbing on both selvages. F. WORKMANSHIP The chain link fence fabric shall be made of high-grade materials and with good workmanship. The zinc-coating shall be applied in a continuous process and shall not be applied to the fabric in roll form. Excessive roughness, blisters, salammoniac spots, bruises and flaking shall be noted. These and other obvious defects,if present to any considerable extent,may provide a basis for rejection. 2I1 Chain-Link Fence(Heavy Duty) Page 2 of 5 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 2.04 BARBED WIRE Barbed wire shall consist of 3 strands of 12-1/2 gauge wire with 14 gauge 4-point barbs spaced approximately 4 inches apart. All wire shall be zinc coated with a minimum coating of.80 ounces per square foot of surface area on 12-1/2 gauge wire and .60 ounces per square foot of surface area on 14 gauge wire. 2.05 VINYL PRIVACY SLATS Privacy slats shall be vinyl and installed vertically throughout the entire perimeter of the fence including all gates. Slats shall fit two wide per one square of mesh. A connecting strip of vinyl shall be inserted horizontally at the bottom of the fence fabric to hold the vertical slats in place. 2.06 CONCRETE Concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 2000 p.s.i. at 28 days and shall be in accordance with Section 030020—Portland Cement Concrete. 2.07 FEATURES A. GATES Gates shall be swing type complete with latches, stops, keepers, hinges, and provisions for padlocking. 1. Gate Frames: Gate frames shall be constructed of tubular members(round or square)welded at all corners or assembled with fittings. On steel, welds shall be painted with aluminum based or zinc based paint. Where corner fittings are used gates shall have truss rods of 3/8-inch nominal diameter to prevent sag or twist. Gate leaves shall have vertical intermediate bracing as required, spaced so that no members are more than 8 feet apart. Gate leaves 10 feet or over shall have a horizontal brace or one 3/8-inch, diagonal truss rod. Dimensions and weights of gate frames shall be as shown in Table above. Gate filler shall be of the same fabric as specified for fence and shall be attached securely to gate frame at intervals of 15 inches. 2. Fabric: Fabric shall be the same type as used in the fence construction. The fabric shall be attached securely to the gate frame at intervals not exceeding 15-inches. 3. Hinges: Hinges shall be of adequate strength for gate, and with large bearing surfaces for clamping in position. The hinges shall not twist or turn under the action of the gate. The gates shall be capable of being opened and closed easily by one person. 4. Latches, Stops, and Keepers: Latches, stops, and keepers shall be provided for all gates. Latches shall have a plunger-bar arranged to engage the centerstop, except that for single gates of openings less than 10 feet wide a forked latch may be provided. Latches shall be arranged for locking. Center stops shall consist of a device arranged to be set in concrete and to engage a plunger bar of the latch of double gates. No stop is required for single gates. Keepers shall consist of a mechanical device for securing the free end of the gate when in the full open position. B. POSTS Posts shall be of the lengths specified and shall be tubular,except that lineposts may be H-beam. C. POST BRACES Post braces shall be provided for each gate corner, pull, and end post and shall consist of a round tubular brace extending to each adjacent line post at approximately mid-height of the fabric, and a truss consisting of a rod not less than 3/8-inch in nominal diameter from the line post back to the gate,corner,pull,or end post,with a turnbuckle or other equivalent provision for adjustment. 2I1 Chain-Link Fence(Heavy Duty) Page 3 of 5 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 D. POST TOPS Post tops shall consist of combination tops with barbed wire supporting arms. The top shall be provided with a hole suitable for the through passage of the top rail. The post tops shall fit over the outside of posts and shall exclude moisture from tubular posts. E. SUPPORTING ARMS Barbed wire supporting arms shall be at an angle of approximately 45° and shall be fitted with clips or other means for attaching 3 strands of barbed wire. With 45° arms, the top wire shall be approximately 12 inches horizontally from the fence line and the other wires spaced uniformly between the top of the fence fabric and the outside strand. Barbed wire arm shall be of sufficient strength to withstand a weight of 200 lbs. applied at the outer strand of barbed wire. F. TOP RAILS Top rails shall be round (tubular), shall be in lengths not less than 18 feet, and shall be fitted with couplings for connecting the lengths into a continuous run. The couplings, shall be not less than 6- inches long, with.070 minimum wall thickness, and shall allow for expansion and contraction of the rail. Open seam outside sleeves shall be permitted only with a minimum wall thickness of .100 inches. Suitable ties or clips shall be provided in sufficient number for attaching the fabric securely to the top rail at intervals not exceeding 2 feet. Means shall be provided for attaching the top rail to each gate,corner,pull,and end post. G. STRETCHER BARS Stretcher bars shall not be less than 3/16 by 3/4 inch and not be less than 2" shorter than the full height of the fabric with which they are to be used. The stretcher bars shall be arranged for attaching the fabric to all terminal posts by threading through the fabric, by hand, or by other positive mechanical means. One stretcher bar shall be provided for each gate, and end post, and two for each corner and pull post. H. TIES OR CLIPS Ties or clips of adequate strength shall be provided in sufficient number for attaching the fabric to all line posts at intervals not exceeding 15-inches. L BANDS OR CLIPS Bands or clips of adequate strength shall be provided in sufficient number for attaching the fabric and stretcher bars to all terminal posts at intervals not exceeding 15-inches. Tension bands and brace bands shall be formed from flat or beveled steel and shall have a minimum thickness of± .115" after galvanizing with a minimum width of 7/8 of an inch±.015". 3.0 CONSTRUCTION METHODS 3.01 GENERAL All materials and workmanship shall be of first class in every respect, shall be done in a neat, workmanlike manner. 3.02 POST SPACING Line posts shall be spaced at intervals not to exceed 10 feet average when measured from center to center between terminal posts. In general, in determining the post spacing, measurement will be made parallel to the slope of the natural ground, and all posts shall be placed in a vertical position except where designated otherwise by the owner or the representative of the owner. 2I1 Chain-Link Fence(Heavy Duty) Page 4 of 5 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 3.03 POST SETTING All posts shall be set in holes of diameter and depth as indicated below. After the post has been set and plumbed, the hole shall be filled with 2,000 p.s.i. concrete. The exposed surface of the concrete shall be crowned to shed water. Table of Post Hole Diameter and Depth Type Hole of diameter Hole Post Post at top Depth Embedment Line 9" 38" 36" Terminal 12" 38" 36" 3.04 TERMINAL POST End, corner, gate and pull posts shall be set as shown hereinbefore, and shall be braced to the nearest post with a galvanized pipe horizontal brace used as a compression member,and a galvanized 3/8-inch steel truss rod and truss tightener used as a tension member. All changes in direction of fence line of 30 degrees or more shall be considered as corners. Pull posts shall be used at all abrupt changes in grade. 3.05 CHAIN LINK FABRIC Fabric shall be placed on the side of the fence as designated by the owner or his representative. The fabric shall be stretched taut approximately 2-inches above the ground, and securely fastened to the posts. The fabric shall be cut and each span shall be attached independently at all terminal posts. Fastening to terminal posts shall be with stretcher bars and fabric bands spaced at maximum 15-inch intervals. Fastening to line post shall be with tie wire, metal bands, or other approved method, attached at maximum 15-inch intervals. The top edge of the fabric shall be fastened to the top rail with wire ties at intervals not exceeding 24-inches. The bottom edge of fabric shall be fastened to the bottom tension wire with wire ties at intervals not exceeding two feet. Rolls of wire fabric shall be joined by weaving a single strand into the ends of the rolls to form a continuous mesh. 2I1 Chain-Link Fence(Heavy Duty) Page 5 of 5 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 DIVISION 5- METALS SECTION 5A- STRUCTURAL METAL 5Al[1] STRUCTURAL STEEL AND OTHER METALS 5A1.1 SCOPE: This specification shall govern for all work necessary to furnish and install all the structural steel and other metal items required to complete the project. All misc. ferrous metal and fabricated assemblies shall be hot dipped galvanized unless noted otherwise. This specification is a design specification as defined in Section 1D General Conditions, Subsection"Supplemental General Conditions",Art. SC-1. 5A1.2 MATERIAL: 5A1.2.1 General: All metals and galvanized items shall conform to the requirements of the local building code and the current applicable specification of the American Society for Testing Materials. 5A1.2.2 Structural Steel: Structural steel shapes shall conform to A.S.T.M. Specification A572, Gr. 50. Steel plates and bars shall conform to ASTM Specification A36. Steel pipe shall conform to ASTM Specification A53, Type E, Grade B. Steel tubing shall conform to ASTM Specification A500, Grade B. Miscellaneous steel and iron shall be well finished standard commercial shapes, or commercial bar steel and iron of sizes and shapes indicated. 5A1.2.3 Aluminum: Aluminum shapes shall conform to Aluminum Association Alloy Designation 6061-T6 unless specifically stated otherwise. 5A1.2.4 Malleable Castings: Malleable castings shall conform to A.S.T.M. Spec. A-47. 5A1.2.5 Copper: Copper sheet strips and plates shall conform to A.S.T.M. B-152 Type ETP. Copper rods and bars shall conform to A.S.T.M.B-133. 5A1.2.6 Bronze: Bronze machined parts shall conform to Copper Development Association Copper Alloy No. 544 (free machining Phosphor Bronze B-2)or A.S.T.M. Specification B-139. 5A1.3 ZINC COATINGS: 5A1.3.1 General: Ferrous metal structures, fabricated assemblies, welded steel assemblies and miscellaneous hardware specified to be galvanized shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Zinc electroplating is not allowed. 5A1.3.2 Hot-Dip Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanizing shall conform to the latest revisions of A.S.T.M. Specifications A-153, A-386, A- 123 or A-394 as applicable. Minimum weight of zinc coating required by these specifications are given by the following Table. 5A1 Structural Steel Page 1 of 4 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 TABLE-MINIMUM ZINC COATING REQUIREMENTS AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS(ASTM) Minimum Weight of Zinc Coating Oz.per Sq.Ft.of Surface(a) ASTM Average of Any Class of Material Spec. Specimen Individual Tested(b) Specimens Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates,Bars,and Strip A123 1/8"-3/16"thick ................................................................................................ 2.00 1.80 1/4"-and heavier ................................................................................................ 2.30 2.00 HARDWARE Class A- Castings: gray iron,malleable iron,steel........................................ 2.00 1.80 Class B- Rolled,pressed,and forged articles(except those that would be included under classes C and D) B-1- 3/16 in.and over in thickness and over 8 in.in length A153 ................. 2.00 1.80 B-2- Under 3/16 in.in thickness and over 8 in.in length See Notes Below...... 1.50 1.25 B-3- 8 in.and under in length and any thickness .............................. 1.30 1.10 Class C- Bolts and drive screws(over 3/8 in.diameter)& similar articles. Washers 3/16 and 1/4 in.thick..............................1.25 1.00 Class D- Screws,stove bolts,and bolts(3/8"in.and under in diameter),rivets,nails,and similar articles. Washers under 3/16 in.thick .............................. 1.00 0.85 ASSEMBLIES Class A- Castings: gray iron malleable iron,steel .............................. 2.00 1.80 Class B- Rolled,pressed and forged steel: B-1-3/16 in.and over in thickness .............................. 2.00 1.80 B-2-Under 3/16 in.in thickness A386.................. 1.50 1.25 Class C- Bolts and drive screws(over 3/8 in.in diameter) and similar articles .............................. 1.25 1.00 Class D- Bolts and drive screws(3/8 in.and under in diameter) and similar articles .............................. 1.00 0.85 HIGH-STRENGTH BOLTS A153.................. 1.25 1.00 Class C TOWER BOLTS A394.................. 1.25 1.00 (a) In the case of long pieces,such as anchor rods and similar articles over 5 ft.in length,the weight of coating and uniformity of test shall be average of the determinations made at each end and the middle of the article. In the case of composite pieces,each part shall be tested separately,as they may fall in different classifications. (b) The number of specimens to be tested per order shall be agreed upon at the time of purchase, by the manufacturer and the purchaser. Notes on A152 Hardware: Note 1- Length of piece,stated in classes B-1,B-2 and B-3 refers to the overall dimension and not to its developed length. Note 2- One ounce of zinc per square foot of surface,based upon mathematical calculations,corresponds to a coating thickness of 0.0017 in. 5A1 Structural Steel Page 2 of 4 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 5A1.3.3 Anchors,Fasteners and Bolts: The sizes, kinds and spacing of anchors not indicated or specified shall be as necessary for their purposes. All anchors,fasteners and bolts in walls and surfaces shall be 316 stainless steel. All required nuts and washers shall have same finish as anchors,fasteners and bolts. 5A1.4 CONSTRUCTION METHODS: 5A1.4.1 General: Structural and miscellaneous metal shall be fabricated to conform to dimensions, sizes and thickness shown on the plans. Workmanship shall be equal to the best modern practice in modern steel fabrication shops. All fabrication shall conform to standards, specifications and details given in the latest edition of"Steel Construction Handbook". 5A1.4.2 Shop Welding: The equipment manufacturer's shop welding procedures, welders and welding operators shall be qualified and certified in accordance with the requirements of AWS D1.0 "Welding in Building Construction" of the American Welding Society. The equipment manufacturer's shop drawings shall clearly show complete information regarding location,type, size and length of all welds in accordance with "Standard Welding Symbols" AWS A2.0 of the American Welding Society. Special Conditions shall be fully explained by notes or details. 5A1.4.3 Field Welding: No field welding is allowed unless specifically called for in the plans and specifications or approval is requested in writing by Contractor and authorized by the Project Engineer. 5A1.4.4 Storage: Structural steel and other fabricated metal items delivered to the job site shall be placed on sufficient shores or blocking to keep metal above ground and prevent injury from deflection. They shall also be separated with strip spacers to provide free access of air to all parts of the surface as well as being inclined in such a manner as to give maximum drainage. Resinous wood may not be used for spacers or packing of Hot-Dipped Galvanized members. The storage area should be kept clean. 5A1.4.5 Straightening: Bent materials shall be straightened by methods not producing injury or fracture. Heat shall not be used unless specifically authorized by the Engineer. (Under no circumstances shall heat be used on galvanized items) When heated it shall only be to a dark cherry red. The material shall then cool slowly and be inspected carefully for evidence of fracture. 5A1.4.6 Temporary Connections: Structures shall be braced or shored to prevent deflection or misalignment from wind, concrete placing, excavation, etc. Welding shall not be used for temporary connections. After assembly and before a permanent connection is made, the structure shall be inspected for alignment, plumbness, dimensions and levelness. 5A1.4.7 Misalignment All steel and metal parts are to be assembled accurately as shown on the drawings. Corrections of minor misfits shall be permitted as well as a reasonable amount of reaming and cutting of excess stock on items that are not galvanized. On items that are not galvanized enlargement of holes necessary to make connections which cannot be made by moderately drifting, shall be done by reaming with drills, care being taken not to weaken adjoining metal. If in the opinion of the Engineer,the extent of reaming is such that holes cannot be properly filled out or accurately adjusted after reaming,the faulty member shall be discarded and replaced by a new one. Enlargement of holes by burning is absolutely prohibited. 5A1 Structural Steel Page 3 of 4 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 5A1.4.8 Miscellaneous Steel Items: Miscellaneous steel items such as straps, braces, clip angles, etc., shall be as shown, detailed or required for complete installation. All miscellaneous steel items shall be hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication,unless stainless steel is noted on the plans or in the specifications. 5A1.4.9 Installation of Anchors and Bolts: All cast in place anchor bolts shall be placed in strict accordance with the equipment manufacturer's instructions and templates. Length of the anchor bolts, depth of embedment and projection shall be in strict accordance with the equipment manufacturer's directions. Anchors other than cast in place shall be drop-in style (hole size equal bolt size) or chemical/capsule anchors and shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's directions, particularly embedment length. After the concrete or the anchoring chemical has set, coat the threads of the anchor bolts) with "Never Seize" or an auuroved equal before attaching equiument thereto. Threads of erection bolts shall also be coated with "Never Seize" or an auuroved equal before assembly. 5A1.5 DETAILED DRAWINGS: Complete specifications,data sheets and drawings covering the items furnished under this section shall be submitted in accordance with the submittals section. 5A1 Structural Steel Page 4 of 4 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 DIVISION 5- METALS SECTION 5E- MISCELLANEOUS METAL ITEMS 5E2[i] STAIRS AND WALKWAYS 5E2.1 SCOPE: This specification shall govern for all work necessary to furnish all stairs and walkways required to complete the project. This specification is a performance specification as defined in Article TS-1 Technical Special Provisions. 5E2.2 GENERAL: It is the intent of this specification that all stairs and walkways meet the requirements of the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970(O.S.H.A.). 5E2.3 SUPPORTING STRUCTURE: 5E2.3.1 Design: The supporting structure shall be capable of safely withstanding a moving concentrated load of 1,000 pounds. 5E2.3.2 Materials: See Subsection 5A1 -Structural Steel and Other Metals. 5E2.3.3 Protective Coatings: Supporting structure shall be hot dip galvanized as specified in 5A1.3 -Zinc Coatings. 5E2.3.4 Bolts: All fasteners shall conform to ASTM A-325. Bolts, nuts and washers for stair assembly shall be hot dip galvanized as specified in 5A1.3 -Zinc Coatings. Anchor bolts to concrete shall be 304 s.s. 5E2.3.5 Workmanship: All fabrication and erection shall be first class and done in accordance with standard practice to provide a neat, structurally sound installation. 5E2.3.6 Connections: Connections may be either welded or bolted except step assemblies and flooring material shall be bolted to the supporting structure. a. Welded Connections: Welded connections shall be in accordance with Subsection 5A1 and shall develop the full strength of the members being joined. Welds shall be ground smooth. b. Bolted Connections: Bolts shall be neatly installed in properly aligned holes. Bolts shall not be located in such a manner as to be a safety hazard. c. Anchor Bolts: Anchor bolts for stair mounting to concrete wall and concrete landing shall be stainless steel. 5E2.4 FLOOR PANELS AND STEPS -TREADS: See Subsection 5E5 -Floor Grating. 5E2.5 HANDRAILS: See Subsection 5E3 -Handrails. 5E2.6 DETAILED DRAWINGS: Before fabrication, the Contractor shall submit 6 sets of detailed drawings of all stairs and walkways for the Engineer's review and approval. 5E2 Stairs&Walkways Page 1 of 1 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 DIVISION 5- METALS SECTION 5E- MISCELLANEOUS METAL ITEMS 5E3[3] HANDRAILS 5E3.1 SCOPE: This specification shall govern for all work necessary to furnish and install all handrails required to complete the project. This specification is a performance specification as defined in Article TS-1 Technical Special Provisions. 5E3.2 GENERAL: It is the intent of this specification that all handrails meet the requirements of the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (0.S.H.A.). 5E3.3 DESIGN: 5E3.3.1 Minimum StrenZh: The anchoring posts, connection of members and framing of members shall be capable of withstanding a load of at least 200 pounds applied in any direction at any point of the top rail. 5E3.3.2 General Dimensions: a. Handrail dimensions perpendicular to horizontal walkways and landings: (1) Height of Top Rail: The center line of the top rail shall be 42 inches above the walkway surface. (2) Height of Second Rails shall be 21 inches above walkway surface. (3) Post shall be at 6'-0" maximum spacing for aluminum pipe. (4) Toe boards shall be provided on all walkways and shall be 4" nominal in vertical height from its top edge to the level of the floor, positioned not more than 1/4" (clearance) above floor level. b. Handrail heights for stairways and ramps: (1) Ramps - 39" (2) 6"Riser-32" (3) 7"Riser-33" (4) 8"Riser-34" (5) Ship's Ladder-33" *Measured perpendicular to the top of the tread. 5E3.4 MATERIAL: 5E3.4.1 General: All materials used for handrails shall be First Class.No used material will be allowed. 5E3.4.2 Pipe: Material used in the fabrication of handrails shall be: a. Aluminum pipe used in the fabrication of handrails shall conform to Aluminum Association Alloy Designation 6063. Specific components shall conform to the following: Component Aluminum Association Alloy Designation Posts .......................................... 6063-T832,6063-T6,or 6063-T52 Rails .......................................... 6063-T6,6063-T5,or 6063-T52 Fittings .......................................... 6063-T6,6063-T5,or 6063-T52 Reinforcing Bars .......................................... 6063-T832 5E3 Handrails Page I of 2 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 5E3.4.3 Pipe Size: a. Aluminum Pipe: Aluminum pipe used in the fabrication of handrails shall be 1-1/2 inch diameter pipe weighing no less than 0.94 lbs./foot. (1.900" O.D. x 1.61" LD.). Splices and reinforcing sleeves shall be placed on the inside of the pipe and shall be of these dimensions(1.600" O.D. x 0.125"wall). 5E2.4.4 Bolts: All anchor bolts and fastener bolts,nuts and washers shall be 316 stainless steel. Set screws for slip on fittings shall be stainless steel. 5E3.5 CONSTRUCTION: 5E3.5.1 Aluminum Handrail With Slip On Joints: Aluminum Pipe: All joints shall be formed with fittings. The fittings and mechanical fasteners shall provide a neat joint and be free of sharp edges and burrs. Components shall slip together and be joined by concealed mechanical fasteners at intersections and by epoxy structural adhesive at splice joints. The assembly of system components shall be performed in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for installation. If set screws are used for slip on fittings they shall be stainless steel. 5E3.5.2 Mountings: Post mounting shall meet the O.S.H.A. strength requirements. Vertical supports shall be installed by use of bolted, slip on fittings (including stairways). Post shall not be finely attached until the complete handrail system is in place and properly leveled. When aluminum system components come into contact with dissimilar metals, surfaces shall be kept from direct contact by painting the dissimilar metal with a heavy coat of a proper primer or asphalt paint. When aluminum railing components come into contact with concrete or lime mortar, exposed aluminum surfaces shall be painted with alkaline- resistant coating such as heavy-bodied bituminous paint or water-white methacrylate lacquer. 5E3.5.3 Corrosion Protection Of Steel Hardware: All steel hardware shall be either be made from stainless steel or shall be galvanized in accordance with Subsection 5AL 5E3.5.4 Workmanship: All fabrication and erection shall be first class and done in accordance with standard practice to provide a neat, structurally sound installation. 5E3.6 DETAILED DRAWINGS: Before fabrication, the Contractor shall submit 6 sets of detailed drawings of all handrails for the Engineer's review and approval. 5E3 Handrails Page 2 of 2 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 DIVISION 5- METALS SECTION 5E- MISCELLANEOUS METALS 5E5[2] FLOOR GRATING (GALVANIZED STEEL) 5E5.1 SCOPE: This specification shall govern for all work necessary to furnish and install all floor grating and step assemblies required to complete the project. This specification is a performance specification as defined in Article TS-1 Technical Special Provisions. 5E5.2 GENERAL: It is the intent of these specifications that all grating meet the requirements of the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970. (O.S.H.A.) 5E5.3 DESIGN: 5E5.3.1 Minimum Strength: The grating when installed shall be capable of safely withstanding a moving concentrated load of 1,000 pounds and deflection shall be limited to 1/4"or less. 5E5.3.2 Minimum Dimensions: a. Floor Grating: (1) General: Steel floor grating shall be welded rectangular design, Type L W. A. Cross bars shall be resistance welded at right angles to the bearing bars; shall have a hexagonal cross section and shall be spaced 4" on center. (2) Spans up to 2'-0": Main bearing bars shall be a minimum of 1"x 3/16", spaced 1-3/16" center to center. Grating shall weigh at least 7.4 pounds per square foot. (3) Spans up to 4'-6": Main bearing bars shall be a minimum of 1-1/2"x 3/16", spaced 1-3/16" center to center. Grating shall weigh at least 10.8 pounds per square foot. (4) Spans up to 8'-0": Main bearing bars shall be a minimum of 2"x 3/16", spaced 1-3/16" center to center. Grating shall weigh at least 14.1 pounds per square foot. b. Stair Steps: Stair step assemblies shall be fabricated from the same material as floor grating (meeting the minimum requirements for the span)and shall be 11-3/4"wide including a checkered plate nosing. 5E5.4 MATERIAL: 5E5.4.1 Gratin: Grating shall be fabricated from carbon steel. 5E5.4.2 Finish: Floor grating and step assemblies shall be hot dipped galvanized after fabrication as specified in Subsection 5A1. 5E5.5 CONSTRUCTION: Floor grating and step assemblies shall be bolted to the supporting structure. Where the grading is cut for obstructions the cut area shall be banded. 5E5.6 DETAILED DRAWINGS: Before fabrication, the Contractor shall submit 6 sets of detailed drawings of this grating for the Engineer's review and approval. 5E5 Floor Grating Page 1 of 1 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 DIVISION 6- CARPENTRY SECTION 6A- ROUGH CARPENTRY 6AI[i] FRAMING AND SHEATHING 6A1.1 SCOPE: This specification shall govern for all work necessary for providing the framing and sheathing required to complete the Project. This specification is a design specification as defined in Article TS-1 Technical Special Provisions. 6A1.2 MATERIAL: 6A1.2.1 Quality of Materials: All materials shall be as specified herein. Where no specific grade or size of material is specified for certain miscellaneous items of framing, the Contractor shall furnish a grade suitable for and consistent with the use thereof, and of sufficient size to support safely any loads which it may be called upon to support. 6A1.2.2 Framing Lumber: Framing lumber shall be S4S No.2 Southern Yellow Pine. 6A1.2.3 Roof Sheathing: Roof sheathing shall be 3/4" thick- Standard C-D Plywood with exterior glue, conforming to Product Standard PS 1-66.Plywood shall bear the stamp of the American Plywood Association. (DFPA Grade- Trademark). 6A1.2.4 Hurricane Ties: Hurricane ties shall be: a. Strong-Tie Connectors, Model H-1, 18 gauge galvanized metal as manufactured by the Simpson Company,or b. Du-Al-Clips by Teco Company, c. or an approved equal. 6A1.2.5 Anchor Bolts: Anchor bolts shall be galvanized. 6A1.2.6 Nails: All nails shall be galvanized box nails of the required size. 6A1.3 CONSTRUCTION METHODS: 6A1.3.1 General: The Contractor shall verify all measurements on the drawings. He shall be held responsible to have checked the measurements on the drawings to ascertain if the various items on the job coordinate. Should any discrepancies in figured dimensions be found,the Contractor shall notify the Engineer and shall not begin any of the work until remedial instructions have been received. 6A1.3.2 Top Plate: The top plate shall be a 2 x 8 bolted to the concrete bond beams with 1/2" x 8" galvanized anchor bolts at 4'-0" centers. A layer of 30 lb.felt shall be placed between the bond beam and the plate. 6A1.3.3 Roof Joists: Roof joists shall be secured to the perimeter plate with 1 hurricane anchor for each joist. Any location that the joists cross a plate (including the perimeter plate) the joist shall be nailed to the plate with 6A1 Framing& Sheathing Page 1 of 2 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 three 16d box nails. Two nails shall be on one side and one nail on the other side. Securely nail all blocking and bridging that is called for on the drawings. 6A1.3.4 Roof Sheathing: Roof sheathing shall be nailed with 8d box nails at a spacing not to exceed 12". 6A1 Framing& Sheathing Page 2 of 2 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 DIVISION 6- CARPENTRY SECTION 6B- FINISH CARPENTRY 6B4[i] DRY WALL 6B4.1 SCOPE: This specification shall govern for all work necessary for providing the dry wall (gypsum board) and miscellaneous finish carpentry required to complete the project. This specification is a performance specification as defined in Article TS-1 Technical Special Provisions. 6B4.2 GENERAL: All work shall be done by skillful craftsmen and shall be"First Class" in every respect. 6B4.3 MATERIAL: 6B4.3.1 Gypsum Wall Board: Gypsum wall board shall be 1/2" thick conforming to A.S.T.M. Standard Specification C-36. Gypsum wall board shall have tapered edges to permit smooth joint treatment and concealment. Nails for gypsum wall board shall be 1-3/8" annular ring 12-1/2 gauge nails conforming to A.S.T.M. Standard Specification C-514. 6B4.3.2 Stripper: Gypsum wall board shall be attached to 1 x 4 stripping running perpendicular to the roof joists. 6B4.3.3 Nails: Nails shall be galvanized of a size and type suitable for their intended use. 6B4.3.4 Corner Guards: 1"x 1-1/2"x 1/8 inch pre-drilled. 6B4.4 CONSTRUCTION METHODS: 6B4.4.1 Gypsum Wall Board: a. General: Gypsum wall board shall be installed in conformance with the recommended procedures of the Gypsum Association and in accordance with best accepted practices. b. Applying Gypsum Wall Board: All ceiling gypsum board shall be applied with the long dimension at right angles to the roof joists and with end joints over framing members. Use boards of the maximum practical length and stagger end joints. c. Nailing: Fasten gypsum board with nails with nail heads driven so that nail head rests in a slight dimple formed by crowned head of driving tool without breaking paper. Space nails 12 inches on center in the field of the board and 8 inches on center along abutting edges. Do not drive nails closer than 3/8 inches from any edge. d. Corner Guards: Install corner guards on all exterior corners of drywall construction. e. Finishing: The taping, floating, and texturing shall be done by skilled craftsmen and shall be done in accordance with accepted practices for this trade. All joints shall be neatly taped and floated. Texture shall be evenly applied to give the "Monterrey Finish". The thickness of the texture shall be as directed by the Engineer. 6134 Dry Wall Page 1 of 1 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 DIVISION 7-MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 7C- BUILDING INSULATION 7C1[2] BLANKET INSULATION 70.1 SCOPE: This specification shall govern for all work necessary to provide the blanket insulation as required to complete the project. This specification is a design specification as defined in Article TS-1 Technical Special Provision. 9F1.1.2 Locations Where Blanket Insulation Required: Location a. Wooldridge Lift Station Electrical Control Room 70.2 MATERIAL: Thermal blanket insulation shall be ASTM 0665, Type II, R-38 and 12-inch full thick, krafted faced fiberglass roll blanket insulation (blankets with reflective vapor-retarder membrane facing and flame spread of 25 or less). Insulation shall be: a. Owens-Corning or, b. Certainteed or, c. an approved equal. 70.3 CONSTRUCTION METHODS: Verify substrates have been properly prepared and that all mechanical and electrical services in ceilings have been installed and tested. Install insulation in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Insulation shall be securely stapled to the ceiling joists. Blankets in ceiling shall be stapled to the joists so as to form a tight seal and an air space between the ceiling material and the insulation blanket. 7C1 Blanket Insulation Page 1 of 1 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 DIVISION 7- MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 7F -MEMBRANE ROOFING 7F5[3] MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING 7F5.1 SCOPE: This specification shall govern for all work necessary to provide built-up bituminous roofing over an existing roof deck. This specification is a performance specification as defined in Article TS-1 of the Technical Special Provisions. 7F5.2 GENERAL: 7F5.2.1 Roofing Overview: a. Remove existing roofing material completely down to existing decking. b. Lay one ply (Siplast Parabase FS or approved equal) over the entire area to be roofed. Lap each sheet 3 inches over the underlying sheet and lap ends 6 inches. c. Beginning at the low point of the roof, fully mop on ply (Siplast Paradiene 20 TG or approved equal)to the first ply (Siplast Parabase FS or approved equal),lapping sides and ends a minimum of 3 inches. Offset end laps a minimum of 3 feet. d. Beginning again at the low point on the roof, fully torch one ply (Siplast Pardiene 30 FR TG or approved equal) to the previous ply (Siplast Paradiene 20 TG), lapping sides and ends a minimum of 3 inches. Offset end laps a minimum of 3 feet. Stagger laps between plies. 7F5.2.2 Roofing Contractors Qualifications: a. Roofing Contractor shall: 1) Be specialized in built-up bituminous roof applications with minimum 5 years experience. 2) Be acceptable by roofing material manufacturer. 3) Submit a letter from the membrane manufacturer referencing the project by name indicating that the applicator is a currently approved roofing contractor. 4) Verify all measurements and dimensions. It is the contractor's responsibility to assure adequate amount of materials to complete the work. b. Roofing Manufacturer shall: 1) Be associate member in good standing with National Roofing Contractors Association (NBCA). 7F5.2.3 Regulatory Requirements: a. These buildings are located in the Inland I Catastrophe Area and roofing material and installation shall meet the requirements of 2006 IBC/IRC with Texas Revisions for 120 MPH 3-second gust design wind speed and UL Class A Fire Hazard Classification where applicable. b. Provide appropriate written State Board of Insurance certification that newly installed built-up asphalt roofing meets specified Factory Mutual or UL requirements. c. All required permits by the City of Corpus Christi, Texas Department of Insurance Windstorm Inspections, etc. for Windstorm Certification shall be secured and paid for by the General Contractor or Sub-contractor directly responsible to meet the Texas Department of Insurance (Windstorm) requirement. This includes all structural inspections to be performed by a Texas licensed engineer appointed by the T.D.I. to enable certification. Contractor shall provide the Engineer the Windstorm Certification WPI-8 prior to acceptance of the project. 7175 Modified Bitumen Roofing Page 1 of 9 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 d. Provide all roof covering,insulation and mechanical fasteners,bearing classification markings UL and FM on bundles, containers or packages, indicating that materials have been produced and tested under UL and FM classification and follow-up service. 7F5.2.4 Warran : a. The Contractor shall provide a two year warranty for all materials and installation. b. The roofing system manufacturer shall provide a 20 year unlimited monetary warranty (NDL)for materials and installation at no additional cost to the Owner for all re-roofed building areas. c. Under no circumstances will the Owner accept a limited warranty. 7F5.3 MATERIAL: 7F5.3.1 Manufacturers: a. Siplast Inc. b. U.S. Intec c. GAF Materials Corp. d. Approved Equivalent 7F5.3.2 Base Sheet: The base sheet shall be a fiberglass reinforced, asphalt coated sheet with a polyolefin film backing, having minimum weight of 20 pounds per 100 square feet. The sheet shall conform to ASTM D 4601, Type II requirements. Material shall be Siplast Parabase FS or approved equal. 7F5.3.3 Intermediate Sheet: The intermediate sheet shall be Siplast Paradiene 20 TG,or approved equal,having a minimum weight of 76 pounds per 100 square feet. 7F5.3.4 Final Sheet: The final sheet shall be Siplast Paradiene 30 FR TG, or approved equal, having a minimum weight of 112 pounds per 100 square feet. 7F5.3.5 Insulation: a. Polyisocyanurate: Insulation shall be a polyisocyanurate composite board type created for use with modified bitumen, built-up roof systems (BMCA Energy Guard or equivalent). It shall consist of a rigid high thermal polyisocyanurate foam core with strong organic glass facer sheet on the other. It shall meet Federal Specification HH-1-1972/Gen. The insulation shall have the following characteristics: 1) Board Density............................................ 9 lb/cu ft min. 2) Board Size.................................................. 24x48 inch 3) Board Thickness........................................ 2.5 inch at office only 4) Long Term Thermal Resistance................. 19.9 5) Board Edges............................................... Square Product characteristics of the insulation material shall be as follows: 1) Flame Spread...................................... <75................................ ASTM E-84 7175 Modified Bitumen Roofing Page 2 of 9 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 2) Moisture Vapor Trans......................... <1 perm......................... ASTM C-96 3) Weight .............................................. 1.93 LB/SF 4) Water Absorption 2 Hours.................. <1.5%by Volume......... ASTM C-209 5) Compression Resistance 10%Consolidation............................. 20 P.S.I. ....................... ASTM D-1621 7F5.3.6 Asphalt Primer: Liquid primer shall meet ASTM D 41. The primer shall be formulated from highly penetrating and durable asphalt petroleum resins and selected solvents (BCMA Matrix 307, Gulf Seal or equivalent). The asphalt primer shall meet the following: a. Consistency Liquid: ........................................................Apply by brush, spray or roller b. Drying time to touch at OF................................... 77 c. Hrs. (based on 8 mil wet film thickness). ........................................................ 1/2-2 d. Dry film characteristics........................................ Non-tacky,fine,glossy e. Flash point(ASTM D 3143), OF.......................... 105 + f. Service temperature range,OF.............................. -20-200 g. Chemical resistance to mild acids and alkalis................................................... Good h. Weight per gallon,lbs.......................................... 7.3 7F5.3.7 Asphalt Bitumen: Asphalt Bitumen shall meet or exceed requirements of ASTM D312, Type IV. The asphalt shall conform to the following: a. Softening Point(ASTM D36).................................. 99°F Min.to 107°F Max. b. Ductility,77°F(ASTM D113)................................. >1.5 cm c. Penetration,77°F(ASTM D5)................................. 12 Min.to 25 Max. d. Flash Point(ASTM D92)......................................... >500°F min. 7F5.3.8 Base Flashing: Strong, resilient, granule-surfaced asphalt modified bitumen membrane containing a core of non- woven polyester mat coated with flexible, SBS polymer-modified asphalt. Conforms to or exceeds requirements of ASTM D 6164 Type I Grade G. 7F5.3.9 Cant Strips(Not Laminated): The cant strip shall be a 1-1/2 inch thick fire retardant treated perlite board with a nominal 4 inch face, and preformed to a 45 degree angle. 7F5.3.10 Lap and Caulking Adhesive: a. Celotex Elastigum Roof Cement(Plastic) b. GAF Flashtite Cement(Plastic)or an approved equal 7175 Modified Bitumen Roofing Page 3 of 9 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 7F5.3.I I Related Materials: a. Clay Coping: Provide clay coping to match existing clay coping removed to install new roofing. 7F5.4 CONSTRUCTION METHODS: 7F5.4.1 Delivery, Storage,and Inspection: a. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original containers,dry,undamaged, seals and labels intact. b. Store materials in weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture. Materials shall be stored above 55T(120C)a minimum of 24 hours prior to application. c. Stand roll materials on end. d. All roll goods and insulation shall be loaded on the roof on a daily basis. No materials shall be stored on the roof overnight. e. Any materials becoming wet or damaged will be rejected and shall be removed from the job site and not applied. Any materials found to be improperly stored at the job site shall be considered damaged at the discretion of the materials manufacturer's inspector or Owner. 7F5.4.2 Environmental Requirements: a. Do not apply roofing membrane during inclement weather or when air temperature is or may fall below 45 degrees F. b. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp deck surface. c. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be weatherproofed during same day. 7F5.4.3 Protection: a. Materials shall be protected against contact with extreme heat; sparks and open flames during storage and installation. b. Materials shall be protected against contact with incompatible materials including but not limited to petroleum distillates,organic solvents and solvent. c. Workmen shall wear clean, soft rubber-soled shoes for any application work where they may be walking on the in place roofing membrane. Precautions shall be taken to protect the membrane and to maintain a clean appearance. 7F5.4.4 Inspection: a. Verify deck is sound,clean and smooth,free of depressions,waves,or projections. b. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roof are solidly set, wood nailing strips are in place. c. Verify deck surfaces are dry. d. Verify that all specification requirements related to roofing,have been followed prior to beginning installation of the roofing system. e. Beginning installation means acceptance of substrate by the Contractor and the Manufacturer. 7F5 Modified Bitumen Roofing Page 4 of 9 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 7F5.4.5 Preparation of the Deck: a. The deck must be smooth, level and cannot be wet or frozen. If deck is determined to be wet, it must be allowed to dry. b. Treat cracks in the deck greater than 1/8" (3 mm) in width in accordance with the deck manufacturer's recommendations. c. For insulated decks, wood nailers of equivalent thickness to the roof insulation must be provided at perimeters and projection openings to act as an insulation stop and to provide for the nailing of the flanges of metal flashing. d. For non-insulated decks,nailers must be flush with deck surfaces. e. When applying roofing or insulation directly to the deck,prime deck with asphalt/concrete primer, ASTM D 41 at the rate of one gallon per 100 square feet(0.4 L/m2) and allow the primer to dry prior to the application of the roofing system. f. Decks with broomed or textured surfaces are not acceptable for direct application of a non- insulated roofing system. 7F5.4.6 Bitumen: a. Do not mix different types of asphalt. b. Use only an ASTM D 312, Type III or Type IV Steep Asphalt. Type III asphalt may be used on slopes up to 1/2" per ft (4cm/m) Type IV asphalt must be used on all slopes greater than 1/2" per foot(4 cm/m) c. Discontinue application of asphalt over any substrate where foaming of asphalt is observed. d. Application with hot asphalt requires continuous, uniform interply mopping rates of 25 lbs. +/- 20%per 100 square feet of roof area(1.2 kg/m2). Too little asphalt may result in voids,while too much asphalt can result in membrane slippage. e. When applying fiberglass base or fiberglass interply sheets, the point of application temperature of the asphalt must be at the Equiviscous Temperature (EVT) with a tolerance of +/- 25°F (13.9°C), at which a viscosity of 125 centipoise is attained. When using mechanical asphalt applicators,the target viscosity should be 75 centipoise. f. For all SBS modified asphalt flashings; the minimum point of application temperature of the asphalt must be at the EVT or 425°F (218°C), whichever is greater, with a rolling bank (puddle) of mopping asphalt across the full width of the roll. g. The equiviscous temperature (EVT)for the asphalt can be found on the asphalt cartons or bills of lading. h. For substrates that absorb asphalt, apply the asphalt in sufficient quantity to assure the level of adhesion specified. i. Asphalt application shall not commence when the outside temperatures is below 45°F (7.2°C) unless cold weather application instructions such as using insulated piping and luggers to maintain the required asphalt temperature at the point of application and using products stored above 55°F (12.6°C)for at least 24 hours prior to installation. 7175 Modified Bitumen Roofing Page 5 of 9 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 j. The operator of the roofing bitumen kettle shall be fully trained and familiar with its safe operation and have the required safety equipment and clothing for his protection. Under no circumstances shall the roofing bitumen kettle be left unattended while operating. k. Accurate thermometers to check temperatures at the kettle and point of application are required. Do not heat the asphalt to or above its flash point. 1. Do not hold the asphalt at temperatures above the finished blowing temperature for more than 4 hours. Do not keep heated tankers above 325°F(163°C)overnight or weekends. 7F5.4.7 Insulation Application: a. Do not apply roof insulation and roofing until all other work trades have completed jobs that require them to traverse the deck on foot or with equipment. b. Install insulation boards per insulation board manufacturer's requirements. Do not install wet damaged or warped insulation boards.Do not kick insulation boards into place. c. Install insulation boards with staggered board joints in one direction(unless taping joint). Install insulation board snug. Boards shall be cut to fit neatly against adjoining surfaces. Gap between board joints must not exceed 1/4" (6 mm). All gaps in excess of 1/4" (6 mm) must be filled with like insulation material. d. Edges of insulation board shall be mitered and filled at ridges and elsewhere to prevent open joints or irregular surfaces. Avoid breaking or crushing of the insulation at the corners. e. For steep slope roof applications, if insulation is to be installed, mechanically attach insulation or mop between wood nailers. f. The roof deck shall be smooth,dry,clean,and free of sharp projections and depressions. All wood nailers shall be the same thickness as the insulation. g. Insulation must not be left exposed to the weather. No more insulation shall be applied than can be completely covered with the finished roof each day. h. It is recommended that the insulation be set in more than one layer. Additional layers of insulation shall be installed with the joints staggered in one direction, assuring that board ends and sides touch all along their length. Press each board firmly in place. Stagger the joints of each additional layer by as much as possible in relation to the insulation joints in the layer(s)below to eliminate continuous vertical joints. 7F5.4.8 Cant Strips: a. Cant strips must be installed at the intersection of the roof and all walls, parapets, curbs, or transitions approaching 90°,to be flashed. They shall be approximately 4" (10.2 cm)in horizontal and 4" (10.2 cm)in vertical dimension. The face of the cant shall have an incline of not more than 45 degrees with the roof. b. Wood cants shall be solid, and pressure treated for rot resistance. Fiberboard cants shall comply with Federal Specification LLL-1-535. Use solid wood cants when mechanical securement to cants is required or when solid wood cants will help stabilize the vertical wood milers at projections or expansion joint openings. c. Metal cant or metal curb strips are not approved. d. Cants shall always be installed on top of the roof insulation,or wood milers. 7175 Modified Bitumen Roofing Page 6 of 9 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 e. Mechanically fasten cant where applicable. Otherwise, set in hot asphalt or Matrix Trowel Grade SB S flashing cement and install as shown in the flashing details section. f. Neatly fit all joints and miters. 7F5.4.9 Wood Nailers: Wood nailers must be 3-1/2" (8.9 cm) minimum width or 1" (25 mm) wider than metal flange and minimum 1" (25 mm) thick and securely fastened to the deck. Wood nailers must be pressure treated and have water based preservatives. Petroleum or creosote base preservatives are not recommended because of possible incompatibility with asphalt-based products. Wood nailers are required at all eaves, gable ends, penetrations or wherever metal flanges must be incorporated into the roof system. Nailers must be mechanically fastened to the deck. Wood nailers shall be the same thickness as tapered edge strip or insulation. 7F5.4.10 Applying Base/Interply Sheets: a. Provide starter strips,following sheets and laps per the manufacturer's recommendations, applied shingle style. b. Embed the full width of each ply in hot asphalt in a uniform layer,without voids, at the rate of 25 lb/square (1.2 kg/m2) +/-20%. Each ply shall be lightly broomed as it is applied. Turn ply up to top of cant. c. Stagger ply sheet side and end laps from underlying base sheet laps. d. The ply sheet shall be applied so that the flow of water is over or parallel to,but never against the laps. 7F5.4.11 Applying Cap Membrane: a. The surface over which the membrane is to be installed shall be in accordance with this specification. b. For slopes 11/2'per foot(4 cm per meter)and over, SBS membranes must be run vertically,parallel to roof slope and back nailed in accordance with steep slope applications. For slopes less than 11/2' per foot(4 cm per meter),install cap sheet perpendicular to slope. c. Cap sheet application: The cap sheet shall start at the low point of the roof and progress to the high point. Install full width cap sheets, lapping 4" (10.2 cm) on the sides and 6" (15.2 cm) on ends. Stagger adjacent end laps a minimum of 18" (45.7 cm) apart. All side and end laps must be staggered from underlying plies. d. The coiled membrane shall be unrolled, placed upside down and allowed to "relax" prior to installation. Then rerolled to apply. Care should be taken to insure that the cap sheet lays flat in the asphalt. There must be complete adhesion between the cap sheet and the mopping asphalt. Brooming-in may be necessary under certain conditions to insure that the cap sheet adheres solidly to the asphalt. Apply sufficient asphalt to avoid creating open channels where three or more membranes are lapped. e. A minimum 3/8" (10 mm) asphalt flow-out must be obtained at all laps. Dry laps are not acceptable. Check all seams for full and uniform adhesion. Un-adhered seams must be lifted with a heated trowel and resealed with SBS flashing cement. f. Install the SBS roof membrane in a full and uniform mopping of hot asphalt applied at the rate of 25 lbs. per 100 square feet(1.2 kg/m2). The asphalt temperature at point of application must be maintained at the asphalt's EVT or 425°F (218°C) whichever is greater; with a rolling bank (puddle)of mopping asphalt across the full width of the roll. 7175 Modified Bitumen Roofing Page 7 of 9 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 g. Matching granules may be broadcast into the asphalt flow-out at seams while hot to enhance the finished appearance of the membrane. h. All end laps must be staggered a minimum of 18" (45.7 cm)so that no adjacent end laps coincide. If end laps fall in line or are not staggered the proper distance, a full width of membrane must be installed over the end laps. All laps must be parallel or perpendicular to the slope of the roof such that the flow is never against the lap. i. SBS membranes must not be applied during adverse weather or without precautionary measures in temperatures below 45°F (7.2°C). In cold weather, remove rolls from the heated storage only as they are being installed. Install membrane rolls immediately after removal from storage to avoid membrane cooling. Modified rolls must be at least 45°F (7.2°C). The use of insulated asphalt handling equipment is recommended in cold weather. j. Mopping must not precede the roll by more than five feet. k. If night stops or water cutoffs are needed at the end of the day's work, they must be made of waterproof membrane and applied with hot asphalt or cold adhesive. Before restarting the job, all stops and cutoffs shall be cut out and completely removed. 7F5.4.12 Clay Copes: Coping shall be embedded in a thick bed of mortar laid on top of the wall. All socket joints shall be completely filled and the exposed mortar carefully pointed. 7F5.5 BASE FLASHING: 7F5.5.1 General: Apply base flashing as required to prevent leakage. Prior to applying base flashing all masonry wall will be primed with an asphalt concrete primer, thinned if necessary to assure good penetration at the rate of approximately 1 gal. per 100 sq. ft. Surfaces to be flashed must be clean and dry. Flashing material shall be installed in flashing adhesive only. Do not install flashing material in hot mopping of asphalt or bituminous roofing cements. 7F5.5.2 Installation of Flashing: Over the roofing, on the cant and over all wall surfaces to receive flashing, apply a uniform coating of approximately 35 pounds per 100-sq. ft. of plastic roof cement. Into this embed one (1) ply of modified bitumen asphalt felt extending approximately 4 inches out from the base of the cant on the roof and up the face of the cant, the face of the wall. Nail base flashing in mortar joints at 8-inch intervals using flat head masonry nails through 1 inch metal discs. End laps to be a minimum of 3 inches, nailed vertically and treated with lap and caulking adhesive. Over this entire area supply a second coat of approximately 35 pounds per 100 sq.ft. of plastic roof cement;into this embed one ply flashing sheet extending from a minimum of 4 inches on roof up cant face, and up the wall to immediately below where the metal counter flashing enters wall using flat head masonry nails through 1 inch metal discs, 8 inches on center in mortar joints where possible. At all corners cut the sheets of flashing material so as to provide a 4 inch wrap-around fold from each direction,being careful to make the angle cuts between cant and roof and cant and wall accurate so as to make effective and neat folds to insure against leaks. Being sure that an adequate amount of lap and caulking adhesive has been used to cover all folds,laps and edges,with particular attention to the spot where the 2 top edges of the cant meet at right angles. All end laps shall not be less than 3 inches and nailed vertically and the lap treated with lap and caulking adhesive. 7F5.6 SUBMITTALS: a. Submit product data for all types of fasteners, fastening pattern, membrane cap sheet, flashing membrane if different than roofing membrane, plying felt,base sheet, asphalt, primer, insulation and all other roofing components and accessories. 7175 Modified Bitumen Roofing Page 8 of 9 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 b. Contractor must submit letter from roofing system manufacturer naming him as an approved applicator. c. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. d. Submit draft copy of manufacturer's warranty to be provided for the system proposed to be installed. e. Submit written confirmation from the roofing system manufacturer that progress inspections and follow-up annual inspections will be provided as specified. f. Submit material safety data sheets on specified products, Form OSHA-20, as required by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration. 7F5.7 References: a. Underwriters Laboratories(UL) -Fire Hazard Classification b. Factory Mutual Research Corporation(FM)—Approval Guide c. Asphalt Roofing Manufacturer's Association(ARMA) d. ASTM C 728\FS HH-I-529b-Insulation board,thermal(expanded perlite mineral aggregate) e. FS HH-I-1972/Gen. -Insulation board,thermal(isocyanurate/perlite composite) f. ASTM D 41 -Asphalt primer used in roofing,dampproofing and waterproofing g. ASTM D 312 -Asphalt used in roofing h. ASTM D 2178,Type IV-Asphalt impregnated glass (felt)mat used as an inter-ply in roofing and waterproofing i. ASTM D 4263 — Standard test method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method. j. ASTM D 4586—Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement,Asbestos-Free k. ASTM D 5147, Standard test method for sampling and testing modified bituminous sheet material. 1. ASTM D 6164, Type I, Grade G — Standard Specification for Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) Modified Bitumen Sheet Materials Using Polyester Reinforcements. in. ASTM D 6221, Type 1, — Standard Specification for Reinforced Bituminous Flashing Sheets for Roofing and Waterproofing. 7F5.8 CLEANING: Remove markings and drippage of the bitumen adhesives from all walls,windows,walks,and finished surfaces. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled asphalt or any other source of soiling caused by work of this Section, consult manufacture of surfaces for cleaning advice and conform to their instructions. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of this section. 7175 Modified Bitumen Roofing Page 9 of 9 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 DIVISION 8- DOORS,WINDOWS AND GLASS SECTION 8F- FINISH HARDWARE 8Fl[i] DOOR HARDWARE 8F1.1 SCOPE: This specification shall govern for all work necessary to furnish and install the door hardware required to complete the project. This hardware shall be suitable for mounting on the doors furnished under Subsection 8A1 and 8C4. This specification is a performance specification. 8F1.1.1 Regulato1y Requirements: a. Conform to ADA requirements for barrier-free accessibility. 8F1.2 HINGES: 8F1.2.1 Hinges for Metal and Fiberglass Doors: Hinges shall be 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" full mortise heavyweight template hinges with five knuckle 4 ball bearings. Hinges shall be made of 316 stainless steel. Hinges shall have U.S. 32D finish (satin stainless steel). Hager Co.BB 1199 or approved equivalent. 8F1.2.2 Number of Hinges Required: a. Doors 7-2" high or less: 1-1/2 pair per door(3 hinges) b. Doors 7'-4" high to 8'-0"high: 2 pair per door(4 hinges) c. Doors 8'-2" high or more: 2-1/2 pair per door(5 hinges) 8F1.3 LOCKSETS AND DEADLOCKS FOR EXTERIOR DOORS: 8F1.3.1 General: Exterior doors shall be provided with a dual locking system consisting of an entrance lockset and a cylindrical deadlock. Hardware shall be of stainless steel construction. a. Locksets: (1) Case: 316 stainless steel for 2-1/8"hole indoor (2) Front: 1-1/8"x 2-1/4" (3) Latch Bolt: 1/2"throw(dead locking feature) (4) Latch Unit: for 1" hole in door (5) Backset 2-3/4" (6) Strike: ASA 4-7/8" x 1-1/4" (7) Lever: Solid Cast—Mine 5" (8) Finish: U.S. 32D (satin stainless steel) b. Deadlock: (1) Chassis: Stainless steel (2) Case: Pressure cast alloy (3) Dead Bolt: Stainless steel (4) Trim: Stainless steel (5) Backset 2-3/4" (6) Bolt Projection: 5/8" (7) Strike: ASA 4-7/8" x 1-1/4" (8) Finish: U.S. 32D (satin stainless steel) 8F1.3.2 Single Doors: a. Function of Lockset (1) Latch bolt by knob either side,except when turn button locks outside knob. (2) Key outside retracts latch bolt. (3) Dead locking latch b. Functions of Deadlock: (1) Key outside projects and retracts deadbolt. 8F1 Door Hardware Page 1 of 2 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 (2) Turn piece inside projects and retracts deadbolt 8F1.4 THRESHOLDS: 8F1.4.1 General: All exterior doors and interior doors leading from climate controlled to non-climate controlled rooms shall be provided with extruded aluminum thresholds. Thresholds shall be cast with integral weather protection stop. 8F1.4.2 Outswinging Doors: 5" wide xl/4" x 1/2" aluminum threshold (A. J. May 450-AV, Ultra TH040, or equal) with door mounted bottom weather seal door sweep with drip caps(A. J.May Utra DB037 or equal). 8F1.5 DOOR CLOSERS: 8F1.5.1 General: Door closers shall be heavy duty,ADA compliant and provided for all doors. 8F1.5.2 Description: a. Rack-and-pinion construction. Molded or metal full cover. Properly size for door application. b. Valve design to permit adjustable closing and latching speeds,by turning an adjusting screw. c. Conform to Federal Specification Type 3001 and 3009. d. Finish: U.S. 26D (satin chromium plated). e. Fasteners shall be stainless steel. 8F1.6 KICK PLATES: 8F1.6.1 General: Kick plates(inside and outside)shall be provided for the following doors: a. All exterior doors. b. All interior electrical room doors. 8F1.6.2 Description: Kick plates shall be 316 stainless steel and shall be attached to the door by the door manufacturer using stainless steel fasteners. Plate shall be a minimum of 8"high. 8F1.7 BUMPERS: All doors shall be provided with floor or wall bumpers with U.S. 26D finish. 8F1.8 KEYS: All locks furnished under this specification shall be keyed alike. Provide 5 keys. 8F1.9 SUBMITTAL DATA: Complete descriptive data and details of hardware shall be submitted in 6 copies to the Engineer for approval. 8F1 Door Hardware Page 2 of 2 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 DIVISION 9-FINISHES SECTION 9K-PAINTING 9K[i] GENERAL 9K1.1 SCOPE: This specification shall govern for all work necessary to provide all painting required to complete the project. This specification is a performance specification as defined in Article TS-1 Technical Special Provisions. 9K1.2 WORKMANSHIP: All work shall be done using"first class workmanship". The Engineer shall be the sole judge as to what constitutes "first class workmanship" and shall have the right to immediately stop the work covered under this section, if said work is not being done to his satisfaction. The painting operation shall not resume until the methods have been corrected to the Engineer's satisfaction. 9K1.3 PROTECTIVE COATING FOR UNDERGROUND PIPE: See pipe specification. 9K1.4 COLORS: All colors shall be selected by the Engineer and/or City based on color charts and color cards provided by the manufacturer (see also Spec 9K4.1.4). The Contractor shall prepare samples of colors, if requested,for approval by the Engineer and/or City. 9K1.5 SAMPLES: The Contractor shall submit for approval,if requested, samples of paint materials proposed for use, in three displays of each kind of color of paint to be applied. The Contractor shall make panels used for displays,representative of respective types of surfaces to which several kinds and colors are to be applied in actual work. The Contractor shall not order paint materials until color selections have been made and samples approved. 9K1.6 PREPARATION OF SURFACES: 9K1.6.1 General: Not less than 30 minutes,nor more than 8 hours prior to application of paint, completely clean surfaces to be painted. 9K1.6.2 Metal: a. General: All metal surface to be painted shall be cleaned by abrasive blasting, except items that are shop coated. Cleaning shall be to "Near White Metal" SP-10 or NACE#2, b. "Near White Metal" (Abrasive blast cleaning SP-10 or NACE#2.): (1) Definition: "Near White Metal"is a method of preparing the metal surfaces for the application of protective coatings by removing mill scale, rust, old paint and any foreign matter by propelling blasting media through a nozzle with compressed air. This is defined as a surface, gray white in appearance,being almost a completely uniform metallic color, with very light shadows allowed over less than 10%of the surface area. (2) Procedure: (a) Before blasting, grind smooth any rough welds and sharp edges. (b) Remove heavy deposits of oil and grease by detergent cleaning using one pound Sodium Meta Silicate per five gallons of water. (c) The blasting media used shall be 16-35 mesh,or 20-60 sharp angular grained silica blasting media that is fresh water washed, dried, properly graded and delivered to the job site in moisture proof bags(bulk blasting media of equal quality and size is acceptable). Blasting media shall not be re-used. 9K Painting Page 1 of 11 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 (d) Compressed air shall be delivered at a minimum nozzle pressure of 90 p.s.i.,not to exceed 110 p.s.i. This shall be free of detrimental amounts of condensed water and oil. (e) All blast products shall be swept or blown from the surface before priming commences. (f) Blast cleaning will not be conducted on surfaces that may become wet after blasting and before priming is complete,or when surfaces are less than 5°F above dew point, or when relative humidity is above 85%. (g) The blasted surface shall be primed within 8 hours. c. Removal of Oil and Grease: Remove oil and grease with approved solvents such as naphtha., or by steam combined with approved detergent.USE OF GASOLINE OR KEROSENE NOT PERMITTED. d. Scraping, Grinding and Chipping: Scrapers or other suitable grinding and chipping tools may be used for removal of existing paint coating prior to repainting,or for cleaning before application of secondary coats only when approved by the Engineer. e. Abrasive blasting: Clean such surfaces by "Near White" abrasive blasting and leave clean, dry and ready to receive prime coat. Remove all dust and blasting media from surfaces before painting.Take care to remove all blasting media and grit around and between joints of connecting members. Schedule operations to avoid settling of dust or grit on freshly painted surfaces and adequately protect machinery or other equipment in vicinity of abrasive blasting work. 9K1.6.3 Concrete and Masonry: The Contractor shall thoroughly clean all existing and new concrete and masonry with methods subject to the approval of the Engineer.The last step in the cleaning operation shall be to wash the surface to be painted with a 20 percent solution of muriatic acid and then the surface shall be rinsed with fresh water. The surface shall be allowed to dry thoroughly before applying paint. 9K1.7 STORING AND MIXING OF PAINT: The Contractor shall use one convenient location for storing and mixing of paint materials, and keep an approved type fire extinguisher available in this area. The Contractor shall protect all areas where paint is stored or painting is done and he shall remove oily rags and waste from buildings at close of each day. 9K1.8 WEATHER AND SITE CONDITIONS: 9K1.8.1 Temperature: Painting shall not be accomplished when either the surface or ambient temperatures are less than 50 degrees Fahrenheit;or when temperature drop of 20 degrees,or below 50 degrees Fahrenheit is forecast. Material shall be stored in area where the extreme cold or heat will not greatly affect viscosity. Coatings apply much better when product temperature is held within 60°F-90°F range(77°F is optimum). 9K1.8.2 Humidity: Painting shall not be accomplished during misty or rainy weather, or on surfaces that have any frost or moisture. Painting shall not be permitted at temperatures less than 5°F above the dew point. 9K1.8.3 Wind and Dust: Painting shall not be accomplished in dusty rooms or on the exterior during excessive wind. The Engineer shall be the sole judge as to what constitutes excessive wind. 9K1.9 APPLICATION PROCEDURES: 9K1.9.1 General: Paint shall be applied by skilled workmen. Paint may be applied with brush or spray equipment. Paint shall be applied in even and thorough coats, without runs, sags or other blemishes. Contractor shall properly sand painted surfaces between coats of enamel, paint or shellac when applied to any surface other than masonry. Apply paints in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Do not apply finish field painting to machinery,equipment or piping until operational testing has been completed. 9K Painting Page 2 of 11 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 9K1.9.2 Drying Time: Allow thorough drying of each coat before succeeding coat is applied, except when manufacturer recommends otherwise,or as specified herein. 9K1.9.3 Coverage: Shall be as recommended by manufacturer. 9K1.9.4 Delivery of Paint: Contractor shall deliver paint to the site in original, unbroken, sealed containers, with manufacturer's label attached. 9K1.9.5 Thinners and Solvents: Contractor shall use only those thinners and solvents specified in paint formulas of paint being used and mix in proportions as recommended by paint manufacturer. 9K1.9.6 Brush Application: Contractor shall apply paint in uniform thickness consistent with specified coverage and with sufficient cross brushing to insure filling of surface irregularities. He shall exercise particular care in painting around rivet heads,bolt heads and nuts,in corners,restricted spaces,and on irregular concrete surfaces. 9K1.9.7 Spray Application: Contractor shall apply paint with adjustable air gun equipped with suitable water trap to remove moisture from compressed air, and with paint pot having hand or air driven agitator. Application of paint by suitable airless spray equipment is acceptable.Paint shall be applied with the width of spray not less than 6 inches nor more than 18 inches, and with suitable pressure for particular type of paint being used. Contractor shall make frequent checks to insure correct spreading rate and coating, and apply without sags,runs or"orange peel"effect. Correct all such imperfections. The Contractor shall take special care to cover edges,corners and rivet head without bridging over of paint film. 9K1.9.8 Application of Protective Coating: When applying coats designed to prevent corrosion due to liquids and gases, the coating must be complete and absolutely free of the slightest pinhole, air pocket or other defect which would allow the entrance of either liquid or gas. 9K1.9.9 Painting Shop Coated Metal Surfaces: a. Prior to Installation: After delivery to site of work, and prior to installation, keep all shop coated metal work clean and free from corrosion. When directed,clean and retouch damaged areas with additional primer. b. After Installation: After erection or installation of shop coated metal work,clean and retouch all rust spots,all places where paint has been rubbed or scraped off,and all field rivet and bolt heads nuts. After previously applied paint has hardened, and when surfaces to receive succeeding coats of paint have been perfectly cleaned and dried, apply paint as set out elsewhere in these specifications. Allow interval of not less than 48 hours, or as recommended by manufacturer,between coats, and if surface is to be submerged in water,allow 5 days or more for hardening of final coat before placing in water. c. Machinery and Electrical Equipment: After installation of machinery and electrical equipment,check base coats carefully and retouch all damaged surfaces. Do not paint nameplates, serial number bases, chrome or bronze trim, or any rotating parts. Clean off any excess paint that impairs convenient removal of covers or gauges, instrumentation or other equipment fitted with doors or covers. d. Bolted and Embedded Surfaces: All surfaces to be bolted together, to concrete, or to be embedded in concrete or grouted, to have prime and complete finish coats applied and dried before erecting in place. 9K Painting Page 3 of 11 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 9KI.10 CLEANING: Upon completion of painting operations,the Contractor shall clean off all paint spots,oil and stain from all surfaces and leave entire project in perfect condition as far as painting work is concerned. Remove from premises all containers and debris resulting from painting operations. 9K2 SURFACES TO RECEIVE PAINT 9K2.1 INTENT: It is the intent of this specification that all ferrous metal or unfinished material furnished on this project be furnished with a protective coating,but stainless steel,aluminum,bronze,copper,lead and galvanized surfaces are not to be painted unless noted otherwise in the specifications or on the drawings.Any factory painted item that is damaged or shows any sign of corrosion prior to the date of Substantial Completion shall be repainted by the Contractor. Concrete or concrete block is to be painted only when shown on the drawings to be painted. 9K2.2 SCHEDULE OF SURFACES TO BE PAINTED: The painting Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for reviewing all of the drawings and specifications to determine all painting requirements. which may or may not be listed in the following: The following schedule of surfaces to be painted is general and does not change the intent of this section as stated above: GENERAL A. Paint all new exposed pipe,valves,fittings 9K3 PAINTING EQUIPMENT, MACHINERY AND METAL WORK 9K3.1 INTERIOR - METAL DOORS, FRAMES, WINDOWS, & MISC. ARCHITECTURAL METAL WORK: (Surface Preparation-SP-10,or PT-4 "Hot Phosphate Treat") 9K3.1.1 Prime Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carboguard 60 Series—Min. 2 mils DMT*,or b. 1 coat - PPG Multiprime 4160—Min. 2 DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 37H-77 Chem-Prime -Min. 2 DMT*. d. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 Epoxy-Min. 2 DMT* 9K3.1.2 Intermediate Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carboguard 60 Series-Min. 2 DMT*.,or b. 1 coat - PPG Amerlock 2/400-Epoxy Finish-Min. 2 DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 66 Epoxoline-Min. 2 DMT*. d. 1 coat -Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 Epoxy —Min. 2 DMT* 9K3.1.3 Top Coat a. 1 coat - Carboline Carboguard 60 Series—Min. 2 mils DMT*,or b. 1 coat - PPG Amerlock 2/400-Epoxy Finish-Min. 2 DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 66 Epoxoline-Min. 2 DMT*. d. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 Epoxy —Min. 2 DMT* 9K3.2 EXTERIOR - METAL DOORS, FRAMES WINDOWS, & MISC. ARCHITECTURAL METAL WORK: (Surface Preparation-SP-10,or PT-4 "Hot Phosphate Treat") 9K3.2.1 Prime Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carboguard 60 Series—Min. 3 mils DMT*,or b. 1 coat - PPG Multiprime 4160—Min. 2 DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 37H-77 Chem-Prime-2.5 DMT*. 9K Painting Page 4 of 11 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 d. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 Epoxy—Min. 2.5 DMT* 9K3.2.2 Intermediate Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carboguard 60 Series-Min. 3 DMT*,or b. 1 coat - PPG Amerlock 2/400 High Solids Epoxy -Min. 3 mils DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 66 Epoxoline-Min 4 DMT*. d. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 Epoxy —Min. 4 DMT* 9K3.2.3 Top Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carbothane 134HG Series—Min. 2 mils DMT*,or b. 1 coat - PPG Pitthane Ultra Gloss Urethane 95-812-Min. 2 DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 1075 Endura-Shield-Min. 2.5 DMT*. d. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams Acrolon Ultra Polyurethane—Min. 2.5 DMT* 9K3.3 INTERIOR-STRUCTURAL STEEL, HANDRAILS, WALKWAYS & OTHER MISC. METAL WORK: (Surface Preparation-Abrasive blast"Near White Metal" SP-10,or NACE#2) 9K3.3.1 Prime Coat: a. 1 coat -Carboline Carboguard 60 Series—Min. 3 mils DMT*,or b. 1 coat - PPG Amerlock 2/400 High Solids Epoxy -Min. 2 mils DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 66 Epoxoline -Min. 2 DMT*. d. 1 coat -Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 Epoxy —Min. 2.5 DMT* 9K3.3.2 Intermediate Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carboguard 60 Series-Min. 3 DMT*,or b. 1 coat - PPG Amerlock 2/400 High Solids Epoxy -Min. 2 mils DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 66 Epoxoline -Min. 2 DMT*. d. 1 coat -Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 Epoxy—Min. 3 DMT* 9K3.3.3 Top Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carboguard 60 Series—Min. 2 mils DMT*,or b. 1 coat - PPG Amerlock 2/400 High Solids Epoxy -Min. 2 mils DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 84-Ceramlon II-Min 2.5 DMT*. d. 1 coat -Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 Epoxy —Min. 3 DMT* 9K3.4 EXTERIOR-STRUCTURAL STEEL,HANDRAILS,WALKWAYS&OTHER MISC. METAL WORK: (Surface Preparation-Abrasive blast"Near White Metal" SP-10,NACE#2) 9K3.4.1 Prime Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carboguard 60 Series—Min. 3 mils b. 1 coat - PPG Amerlock 2/400 High Solids Epoxy -Min. 2.5 mils DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 37H-77 Chem-Prime-2.5 DMT*, d. 1 coat -Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 Epoxy—Min. 2.5 DMT* 9K3.4.2 Intermediate Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carboguard 60 Series-Min. 3 DMT*,or b. 1 coat -PPG Amerlock 2/400 High Solids Epoxy -Min. 3 mils DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 66 Epoxoline-Min. 4 DMT*, d. 1 coat—Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 Epoxy-Min. 4 DMT* 9K3.4.3 Top Coat a. 1 coat - Carboline Carbothane 134HG—Min. 2.5 mils b. 1 coat - PPG Pitthane Ultra Gloss Urethane 95-812-Min. 2 DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 1075 Endura-Shield-Min. 2.5 DMT*, d. 1 coat—Sherwin-Williams Acrolon Ultra Polyurethane-Min. 2.5 DMT* 9K3.5 STRUCTURAL STEEL AND OTHER MISCELLANEOUS METAL SUBMERGED IN WASTE WATER: (Surface Preparation-Abrasive blast"Near White Metal" SP-10,or NACE#2) 9K3.5.1 Prime Coat: 9K Painting Page 5 of 11 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 a. 1 coat - Carboline Carboguard 60 Series—Min. 2 mils DMT*,or b. 1 coat - PPG Amerlock 2/400 High Solids Epoxy -Min. 2 mils DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 66 Hi-Build Epoxoline,2.5 -3 DMT*. d. 1 coat -Sherwin-Williams Copoxy Primer—Min.3 DMT* 9K3.5.2 Intermediate Coat: (Shall be applied in not less than 4 hours and not more than 15 hours after applying the previous coat.) a. 1 coat Carboline Bitumastic 300M-Min. 8 DMT*,or b. 1 coat - PPG Amercoat 78HB High Build Coal Tar Epoxy—Min. 8 mils DMT* c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 46 H-413 Tnemec Tar-Min. 8 DMT*. d. 1 coat -Sherwin-Williams TarGuard—Min. 8 DMT* 9K3.5.3 Top Coat (Shall be applied in not less than 4 hours and not more than 15 hours after applying the previous coat.) a. 1 coat - Carboline Bitumastic 300M—Min. 8 mils DMT*,or b. 1 coat - PPG Amercoat 78HB High Build Coal Tar Epoxy—Min. 8 mils DMT* c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 46 H-413 Tnemec Tar-Min. 8 DMT*. d. 1 coat -Sherwin-Williams TarGuard—Min. 8 DMT* *Minimum Dry Mil Thickness 9K3.6 STRUCTURAL STEEL AND OTHER MISCELLANEOUS METAL SUBMERGED IN POTABLE WATER: (Surface Preparation-Abrasive blast"Near White Metal" SP-10,or NACE#2) 9K3.6.1 Prime Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carboguard 61 Series—Min. 4 mils DMT*,or b. 1 coat - Tnemec 20-1255 'Beige"Pota-Pox Primer-Min 3 DMT*. c. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 PW Min. 3 DMT* d. 1 coat - PPG Amerlock 2 High Solids Epoxy-Min. 3 mils DMT* 9K3.6.2 Intermediate Coat: (Shall be applied in not less than 4 hours and not more than 15 hours after applying previous coat.) a. 1 coat - Carboline Carboguard 61 Series—Min. 4 mils DMT*,or b. 1 coat - Tnemec 20-11W"White"Pota-Pox-Min. 4 DMT*. c. 1 coat -Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 PW Min. 4 DMT* d. 1 coat -PPG Amerlock 2 High Solids Epoxy-Min. 4 mils DMT* 9K3.6.3 Top Coat (Shall be applied in not less than 4 hours and not more than 15 hours after applying previous coat.) a. 1 coat - Carboline Carboguard 61 Series—Min. 4 mils DMT*,or b. 1 coat - Tnemec 20-15BL "White"Pota-Pox-Min. 4 DMT*. c. 1 coat -Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 PW—Min.4 DMT* d. 1 coat -PPG Amerlock 2 High Solids Epoxy-Min. 4 mils DMT* 9K3.7 INTERIOR-SHOP PAINTED PUMPS,MACHINERY AND MOTORS: 9K3.7.1 Prime Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carbocoat 150 UP—Min. 2 mils DMT*,or b. 1 coat - PPG Multiprime 4160—Min. 2 DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 37H-77 Chem-Prime-Min. 2.5 DMT*. d. 1 coat -Sherwin-Williams Kern Kromik Universal—Min 2.5 DMT* 9K3.7.2 Intermediate Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carbocoat 150 UP-Min. 2 DMT*,or b. 1 coat - PPG HPC Industrial Alkyd 4308—Min. 2 mils DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 2H Hi-Build Tneme-Glass-Min. 2 DMT*. d. 1 coat -Sherwin-Williams Industrial Enamel B54 series—Min 2 DMT* 9K Painting Page 6 of 11 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 9K3.7.3 Top Coat a. 1 coat - Carboline Carbocoat 45—Min. 2 mils DMT*,or b. 1 coat - PPG HPC Industrial Alkyd 4308—Min. 2 mils DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 2H Hi-Build Tneme-Glass-Min. 2 DMT*. d. 1 coat -Sherwin-Williams Industrial Enamel B54 series—Min. 2 DMT* 9K3.8 EXTERIOR-SHOP PAINTED PUMPS,MACHINERY AND MOTORS: 9K3.8.1 Prime Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carboguard 60 Series—Min. 3 mils DMT*,or b. 1 coat - PPG Amerlock 2/400 High Solids Epoxy-Min. 2 mils DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 27 FC-Min. 2 DMT*, d. 1 coat -Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 Epoxy—Min. 4 DMT* 9K3.8.2 Intermediate Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carboguard 60 Series—Min. 4 mils DMT*,or b. 1 coat - PPG Amerlock 2/400 High Solids Epoxy-Min. 4 mils DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 66 Epoxoline-Min. 2 DMT*, d. 1 coat -Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646—Min. 4 DMT* *Minimum Dry Mil Thickness 9K3.8.3 Top Coat a. 1 coat - Carboline Carbothane 134HB—Min. 2 mils DMT*,or b. 1 coat - PPG Pitthane Ultra Gloss Urethane 95-812-Min. 2 DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 1075 Endura-Shield-Min. 2.5 DMT*, d. 1 coat -Sherwin-Williams Acolon Ultra Polyurethane—Min 2.5 DMT* 9K3.9 ELECTRICAL CONTROL EQUIPMENT: 9K3.9.1 Prime Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carboguard 60 Series—Min. 2 mils DMT*,or b. 1 coat - PPG Amerlock 2/400 High Solids Epoxy-Min. 2 mils DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 27 FC-Min. 2 DMT*, d. 1 coat -Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 Epoxy—Min. 2.5 DMT* 9K3.9.2 Intermediate Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carboguard 60 Series-Min. 2 DMT*,or b. 1 coat - PPG Amerlock 2/400 High Solids Epoxy-Min. 2 mils DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 66 Hi-Build-Min. 2 DMT*, d. 1 coat -Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 Epoxy—Min. 2 DMT* 9K3.9.3 Top Coat a. 1 coat - Carboline Carboguard 60 Series—Min.2 mils DMT*, or b. 1 coat - PPG Amerlock 2/400 High Solids Epoxy-Min. 2 mils DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 66 Hi-Build-Min. 2 DMT*, d. 1 coat -Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646—Min. 2 DMT* 9K4 PAINTING EXPOSED AND SUBMERGED METAL PIPING 9K4.1 EXPOSED VALVES,FITTINGS AND PIPES: (Surface Preparation-Abrasive blast"Near White Metal" SP-10, or NACE#2) 9K4.1.1 Prime Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carboguard 60 Series—Min. 2.5 mils DMT*,or b. 1 coat - PPG Amerlock 2/400 High Solids Epoxy-Min. 2.5 mils DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 37H-77 Chem-Prime-2.5 DMT*. d. 1 coat -Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 Epoxy—Min. 2.5 DMT* 9K Painting Page 7 of 11 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 9K4.1.2 Intermediate Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carboguard 60 Series-Min. 4 DMT*,or b. 1 coat - PPG Amerlock 2/400 High Solids Epoxy-Min. 4 mils DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 66 Epoxoline -Min. 4 DMT*. d. 1 coat -Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 Epoxy—Min. 4 DMT* 9K4.1.3 Top Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carbothane 134HG—Min. 2 mils DMT*,or b. 1 coat - PPG Pitthane Ultra Gloss Urethane 95-812-Min. 2 DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 1075 Endura-Shield-Min. 2.5 DMT*. d. 1 coat -Sherwin-Williams Acrolon Ultra Polyurethane—Min 2.5 DMT* 9K4.1.4 Color Coding:Piping shall be color coded as shown on the drawings. When coding is not shown on the drawings,the following shall apply: Sludge Line.......................... Brown Chlorine Line......................... Yellow Gas Line............................... Red Sewage Line.......................... Gray Potable Water ...................... Blue Compressed Air Line............. Green Non-Potable Water............... White stenciled"Unsafe Water" Valve Bodies........................ OSHA Orange Pumps And Blowers.............. OSHA Orange Electric Motors..................... OSHA Orange Belt/Shaft Guards.................. OSHA Orange Effluent Reuse...................... Purple *Minimum Dry Mil Thickness 9K4.2 VALVES,FITTINGS AND PIPES SUBMERGED IN WASTEWATER: (Surface Preparation-Abrasive blast"Near White Metal" SP-10,or NACE#2) 9K4.2.1 Prime Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carboguard 60 Series—Min. 2 mils DMT*,or b. 1 coat - PPG Amerlock 2/400 High Solids Epoxy-Min. 2 mils DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 66 Hi-Build Epoxoline,2.5 -3 DMT*. d. 1 coat -Sherwin-Williams Copoxy Primer—2.5—3 DMT* 9K4.2.2 Intermediate Coat: (Shall be applied in not less than 4 hours and not more than 15 hours after applying the previous coat.) a. 1 coat - Carboline Bitumastic 300M—Min. 8 mils DMT*,or b. 1 coat - PPG Amercoat 78HB High Build Coal Tar Epoxy—Min. 8 mils DMT* c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 46 H-413 Tnemec Tar-Min 8 DMT*. d. 1 coat -Sherwin-Williams TarGuard—Min. 8 DMT* 9K4.2.3 Top Coat: (Shall be applied not less than 4 hours and not more than 15 hours after applying the previous coat.) a. 1 coat -Carboline Bitumastic 300M—Min. 8 mils DMT*,or b. 1 coat - PPG Amercoat 78HB High Build Coal Tar Epoxy—Min. 8 mils DMT* c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 46 H-413 Tnemec Tar-Min 8 DMT*. d. 1 coat -Sherwin-Williams TarGuard—Min. 8 DMT * 9K4.3 VALVES,FITTINGS AND PIPES SUBMERGED IN POTABLE WATER: (Surface Preparation-Abrasive blast"Near White Metal" SP-10, or NACE#2) 9K4.3.1 Prime Coat: a. Carboline Carboguard 61 Series—Min. 4 mils DMT*,or b. 1 coat - Tnemec 20-1255 'Beige"Pota-Pox Primer-Min. 3 DMT*. c. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 PW—Min. 3 DMT* d. 1 coat - PPG Amerlock 2 High Solids Epoxy-Min. 3 mils DMT* 9K4.3.2 Intermediate Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carboguard 61 Series—Min. 4 mils DMT*,or b. 1 coat - Tnemec 20-11 WE "White"Pota-Pox-Min. 4 DMT*. c. 1 coat -Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 PW—Min. 4 DMT* d. 1 coat -PPG Amerlock 2 High Solids Epoxy-Min. 4 mils DMT* 9K Painting Page 8 of I I DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 9K4.3.3 Top Coat: (Shall be applied within 48 hours of Intermediate Coat) a. 1 coat - Carboline Carboguard 61 Series—Min. 4 mils DMT*,or b. 1 coat - Tnemec 20-15BL "White"Pota-Pox-Minimum 4 DMT*. c. 1 coat -Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 PW—Min. 4 DMT* d. 1 coat -PPG Amerlock 2 High Solids Epoxy-Min. 4 mils DMT* 9K5 PAINTING CONCRETE AND MASONRY 9K5.1 INTERIOR OF CONCRETE WASTEWATER WET WELLS: N/A 9K5.2 INTERIOR-CONCRETE AND CONCRETE BLOCK: 9K5.2.1 Prime Coat: (Applied as necessary to fill surface to the satisfaction of the Engineer) a. 1 coat - Carboline Santile 600 b. 1 coat - PPG Amerlock 400 BF c. 1 coat - Tnemec 54-130 Modified Epoxy Masonry Filler. d. 1 coat -Sherwin-Williams Heavy Duty Block Filler 9K5.2.2 Intermediate Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carboguard 60 Series—Min. 2 mils DMT*,or b. 1 coat - PPG Amerlock 2/400 High Solids Epoxy-Min. 2 mils DMT* c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 66 Hi-Build Epoxoline-Min. 2 DMT*. d. 1 coat- Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646—Min 2 DMT* 9K5.2.3 Top Coat a. 1 coat - Carboline Carboguard 60 Series—Min. 2 mils DMT*,or b. 1 coat - PPG Amerlock 2/400 High Solids Epoxy-Min. 2 mils DMT* c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 66 Hi-Build Epoxoline-Min. 2 DMT*. d. 1 coat -Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646—Min. 2 DMT* 9K5.3 EXTERIOR-CONCRETE AND CONCRETE BLOCK: 9K5.3.1 Prime Coat: (Applied as necessary to fill surface to the satisfaction of the Engineer) a. 1 coat - Carboline Santile 600,or b. 1 coat - PPG Amerlock 400 BF, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 54-130 Modified Epoxy Masonry Filler. d. 1 coat -Sherwin-Williams Heavy Duty Block Filler 9K5.3.2 Intermediate Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carboguard 60 Series—Min. 2 mils DMT*,or b. 1 coat - PPG Amerlock 2/400 High Solids Epoxy-Min. 2 mils DMT* c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 66 Hi-Build Epoxoline-Min. 2 DMT*. d. 1 coat -Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646—Min. 2 DMT* 9K5.3.3 Top Coat a. 1 coat - Carboline Carbothane 134HG—Min. 2 mils DMT*,or b. 1 coat - PPG Pitthane Ultra Gloss Urethane 95-812-Min. 2 DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 1075 Endura-Shield-Min. 2.5 DMT*. d. 1 coat -Sherwin-Williams Acrolon Ultra Polyurethane—Min 2.5 DMT* 9K6 PAINTING WOOD SURFACES 9K6.1 INTERIOR WOODWORK: 9K6.1.1 Prime Coat: 9K Painting Page 9 of I I DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 a. 1 coat - Carboline Carbocoat 45 -thinned 201/oDMT*,or b. 1 coat -PPG Seal-Grip Universal Primer 17-941XI—Min. 2 mils DMT* c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 10-1009 Undercoater-Min. 2 DMT*. d. 1 coat -Sherwin-Williams Industrial Enamel—Min. 2 DMT* 9K6.1.2 Intermediate Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carbocoat 45—Min. 2 mils DMT*,or b. 1 coat - PPG HPC Industrial Alkyd 4308—Min. 2 mils DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 2H Hi-Build Tnemec Gloss-Min. 2 DMT*. d. 1 coat -Sherwin-Williams Industrial En.B54 series—Min. 2 DMT* *Minimum Dry Mil Thickness 9K6.1.3 Top Coat a. 1 coat - Carboline Carbocoat 45—Min. 2 mils DMT*,or b. 1 coat - PPG HPC Industrial Alkyd 4308—Min. 2 mils DMT*, c. 2 coats-Tnemec Series 2H Hi-Build Tnemec Gloss-Min. 2 DMT*. d. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams Industrial En.B54 series—Min. 2 DMT* 9K6.2 EXTERIOR WOODWORK: 9K6.2.1 Prime Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carbocoat 45 -thinned 20%DMT*,or b. 1 coat - PPG Seal-Grip Universal Primer 17-921XI—Min. 2 mils DMT* c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 10-1009 Undercoater-Min. 2 DMT*. d. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams Industrial En.B54 series—Min. 2 DMT* 9K6.2.2 Intermediate Coat: a. 1 coat -Carboline Carbocoat 45—Min. 2 mils DMT*,or b. 1 coat - PPG Pitt-Tech Plus 4216 HP—Min. 2 mils DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 6 Enduratone -Min. 2 DMT*. d. 1 coat -Sherwin-Williams Industrial En.B54 series—Min. 2 DMT* 9K6.2.3 Top Coat a. 1 coat - Carboline Carbocoat 45 -Min. 2 DMT*,or b. 1 coat - PPG Pitt-Tech Plus 4216 HP—Min. 2 mils DMT*, c. 2 coats-Tnemec Series 6 Enduratone -Min. 2 DMT*. d. 1 coat -Sherwin-Williams Industrial En.B54 series Min. 2 DMT* 9K7 PAINTING GYPSUM BOARD 9K7.1 GENERAL INTERIOR-GYPSUM BOARD 9K7.1.1 Prime Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Sanitile 120—Min. 2 mils DMT*,or b. 1 coat - PPG Speedhide 6-2 Latex Sealer-Min. 2 DMT*,or c. 1 coat - Tnemec 51-12.4 PVA Sealer-Min. 2 DMT*. d. 1 coat -Sherwin-Williams ProMar 200 Ltx. Wall Primer.—Min. 2 DMT* 9K7.1.2 Top Coat a. 1 coat - Carboline Sanitile 255—Min. 2 mils b. 1 coat - PPG Pitt-Glaze WB 1 Int.Pre-Cat.Water-Borne Acrylic Epoxy 16-310—Min.2 mils DMT* c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 113 H.B. Tnemec-Tufcoat-Min. 2 DMT*. d. 1 coat -Sherwin-Williams ProIndustrial Water Based Epoxy—Min. 2 DMT* 9K7.2 WASHROOM, SHOWER ROOM,LOCKER ROOM INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD: 9K7.2.1 Prime Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Sanitile 120 - Min. 2 mils b. 1 coat - PPG Speedhide 6-2 Latex Sealer-Min. 2 DMT*, 9K Painting Page 10 of 11 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 151-1050 PVA Sealer-Min. 2 DMT*. d. 1 coat -Sherwin-Williams ProMar 200 Latex Primer—Min.2 DMT* 9K7.2.2 Intermediate Coat: a. 1 coat- Carboline Carboguard 60 Series—Min. 2 mils b. 1 coat -PPG Pitt-Glaze WB 1 Interior Pre-Catalyzed Water-Borne Acrylic Epoxy 16-310- Epoxy Finish-Min. 2 DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 66 Hi-Build-Min. 2 DMT*, d. 1 coat -Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial Precatalyzed Water Based Epoxy—Min. 2 DMT* *Minimum Dry Mil Thickness 9K7.2.3 Top Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carboguard 60 Series-Min. 2 mils DMT*,or b. 1 coat - PPG Pitt-Glaze WB 1 Interior Pre-Catalyzed Water-Borne Acrylic Epoxy 16-310- Epoxy Finish-Min. 2 DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 66 Hi-Build-Minimum 2 DMT*. d. 1 coat -Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial Precatalyzed Water Based Epoxy Min. 2 DMT* *Minimum Dry Mil Thickness 9K8 RESPONSIBILITY FOR PAINT SYSTEMS 9K8.1 INTENT: It is the intent of this specification to provide the Contractor with several manufacturers'paint systems on which to base his bid. The manufacturers'list was furnished to the Engineer by each manufacturer with the product designations listed herein and was represented to list materials to be suitable for their intended use and that they were comparable to other systems listed. The Contractor is responsible for verifying with the paint manufacturer before he purchases any material,that the paint system is suitable for use on this project and that application rates, etc., are in compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 9K Painting Page 11 of 11 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 11GI[31 SOIL BED BIOFILTER ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. This section covers the work necessary to provide all air plenum and activated soil media, air header and distribution pipe, humidification system, moisture control, startup and performance testing services, and all necessary appurtenances for a complete and properly functioning soil bed biofilter odor control system. This specification is a performance specification as defined in Article TS-1 of the Technical Special Provisions. 1. The scope of supply associated with the work, in addition to equipment and material supply, shall include the following services: a. Laboratory analysis, development and supply of the soil biofilter media and air plenum materials. b. Oversight of biofilter installation and operator training. C. Performance testing of the completed installation. 1.02 SYSTEM SUPPLIER A. Design, testing, and all components of the soil bed biofilter odor control system shall be provided by a single supplier who shall have sole-source responsibility for the performance of the system (the System Supplier). B. System Supplier Experience Requirements: The System Supplier must have a minimum of five (5) soil bed biofilter installations of similar size, or larger, that have successfully operated to control the odors associated with hydrogen sulfide, organic sulfur compounds, and other malodorous compounds associated with a municipal wastewater treatment plant. These installations must have been in operation for a minimum of three (3)years. Successful operation will be defined as having operated within the original performance criteria for the life of the installation without requiring a media replacement. C. Acceptable System Suppliers: 1. Bohn Biofilter Corporation,Tucson,Arizona,(520)624-4644. 2. Or equal. 1.03 DESIGN CRITERIA A. The biofilter odor control system shall be installed as generally shown on the Drawings. This arrangement is intended to represent the minimum standard of quality and treatment capacity. B. Service Conditions: The biofilter system shall be designed to incorporate provisions to meet the following service conditions: 1. Temperature Ranges: 45°to 100°F. 2. Precipitation: Approximately 32 inches per year. 11G1[3] Odor Control System Page 1 of 10 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 3. Altitude: Approximately 18 feet above mean sea level(MSL). C. The biofilter system shall be designed to treat 4,150 scfm of continuously ventilated air. This system shall be designed to eliminate odorous compounds from the airstream typical of a municipal wastewater treatment facility. These compounds shall include, but not be limited to, hydrogen sulfide, mercaptans, reduced sulfur compounds,and volatile organic compounds typical of this type of application. D. The biofilter design shall utilize a soil bed type media. Compost, wood chips, and other types of organic media will not be acceptable. E. The maximum allowable pressure drop through the biofilter media shall be 2 inches of water column (WC)per foot depth. 1.04 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA A. Removal Efficiency: 1. Hydrogen Sulfide: A 99 percent removal rate for concentrations above 10 ppmv. A 100 ppbv maximum discharge concentration at inlet concentrations less than 10 ppmv. 2. Ammonia: A 90 percent removal rate for concentrations above 50 ppmv. For inlet concentrations below 50 ppmv,a maximum outlet concentration of 5 ppmv. B. Olfactory Performance: The biofilter shall emit no nuisance odors and have no detectable odors within a distance of thirty(30)feet of the bed. C. Media Life: The activated soil medium and the air plenum medium shall have a minimum useful life of twenty (20) years. "Useful life" shall be defined to mean operation under the following conditions: no detectable degradation in the odor removal performance of the biofilter when operated and maintained in accordance with the System Supplier's written operations and maintenance requirements. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Shop Fabricated Piping: Pipe fabrication drawings showing special fittings and bends, dimensions, field connection details,and other pertinent information. B. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Submit performance test certificates and reports. C. Performance Test Submittals: 1. Submit a Detailed Performance Testing Plan which includes: a. Test equipment and apparatus. b. Calibration and setup procedures. C. The specific testing methodology to be used. d. The sampling and analysis procedures. l lG1[3] Odor Control System Page 2 of 10 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 2. Submit a final report that provides a narrative of the sampling activities, a copy of the original sample log, photographs showing the locations of the velocity measurements, tabular summary of the data,calculated results,and conclusions of these results. D. Product Data Submittals: 1. Product literature to provide a complete description of the equipment. 2. Drawings,catalog information and cut sheets,and performance data. E. Contract Closeout Submittals: Furnish Operations and Maintenance Manuals. 1.06 GUARANTEE A. The System Supplier shall guarantee the useful life of the activated soil biofilter medium for a period of at least 20 years and the System Supplier shall guarantee there will be no nuisance odors detectable a distance of 30 feet beyond the edge of the biofilter bed. If any defects or malperformance occurs in that period,the System Supplier must make all necessary alterations,repairs,or replacements free of charge. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 BIOFILTER MEDIA A. Plenum Zone Material: Coarse gravel as approved by System Supplier. B. Activated Soil Medium: 1. The media shall be as tested and approved by the System Supplier. 2. Media development; blending, amendment components and quantities, and laboratory analysis, shall be the responsibility of the System Supplier. 3. The media shall be delivered moist; if stockpiled greater than 1 week, the Contractor shall make efforts to wet the material. Media shall be placed in a uniform manner that will prevent aggregation and compaction of materials,and prevent displacement of the air piping. 2.02 FOUL AIR PIPING A. Pipe lengths and fittings shall be supplied by the same manufacturer. B. Protection shall be provided against ultraviolet light degradation using carbon black, not less than 2 percent well dispersed in the resin. C. Main Air Header Manifold Pipes: 1. Main air header manifold pipes shall be HDPE pipe meeting all requirements of AASHTO M294, Type S. 2. Manufacturer shall weld stubs onto the air header manifold pipes for the 6-inch HDPE lateral connections. a. Stubs shall consist of a short length of 6 inch SDR 32.5 HDPE welded flush into the header manifold pipe and a short length of 6 inch corrugated HDPE welded onto the other end. b. Total length of the stub shall not exceed 12 inches. C. No stubs shall be welded at abell and spigot joint. d. Stub spacing shall be approximately 3 feet on center,as per System Supplier's requirements. 3. Joints: HDPE water-tight bell and spigot couplings. 11G1[3] Odor Control System Page 3 of 10 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 D. Air Distribution Laterals: 1. Laterals shall be 6-inch-diameter corrugated and slotted HDPE pipe meeting all requirements of AASHTO M252,Type CD. 2. Slot size and quantity shall be as recommended by the System Supplier. 3. Joints: HDPE snap couplings. E. Fittings: Snap type or factory welded with HDPE welds per manufacturer's standard procedures and requirements. F. Manufacturer: 1. Advanced Drainage Systems(ADS),Inc. 2. Or equal. 2.03 HUMIDIFICATION SYSTEM A. The biofilter system shall include a humidification system for the vapor stream. The humidification system shall operate continuously and shall include an isolation valve, a wye strainer, unions, and spray nozzle assembly. The spray nozzle assembly shall be mounted in the Exhaust Fan discharge piping at the location shown on the Drawings. B. The spray nozzle assembly shall consist of a spray nozzle mounted on a removable lance. The assembly shall be removable from the odorous air piping for inspection and maintenance without disassembly of the piping system. C. The spray nozzle shall provide fine spray atomization in a hollow cone pattern using hydraulic pressure alone. The nozzle shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel and shall have an integral strainer. 1. Flowrate: 0.04 gallons per minute. 2. Water Pressure: 40 psig. 3. Manufacturer: a. Bete Fog Nozzles,Inc.,Model PJ. b. Or equal. 2.04 SPRINKLER SYSTEM A. The biofilter system shall include a sprinkler system for moisture control of the activated soil media. The sprinkler system shall include a sprinkler nozzle, sprinkler timer,and solenoid control valve. B. The layout of the sprinkler system and the number of sprinkler system zones shall be determined by the Biofilter System Supplier. C. Sprinkler Nozzle: The sprinkler nozzles shall be a full or part-circle sprinkler. The sprinkler shall be a Rain Bird,Model 1800 sprinkler,or equal. D. Control Valve: The sprinkler control valve shall be a Rain Bird PESB scrubber valve. Valve shall be supplied with 24V ac coil and fail closed on a loss of power. E. Sprinkler Control System: The sprinkler control system shall consist of a Rain Bird Model ESP-4M sprinkler timer. Electrical input required: 120 VAC f 10%, 60 Hz or 220V f 10%, 50 Hz. Electrical output: 24-26.5 VAC. 11G1[3] Odor Control System Page 4 of 10 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 F. Control Panel: See Sheet 23 of 32. 2.05 FOUL AIR FAN A. The Belt Drive Fiberglass Backward Curved Centrifugal Fan shall be manufactured by Hartzell Fan,Inc.®, Series 41,Type FA,ARRG. 1,4, 9, 9M,or 10,in Classes 1,11,111. The resin used on the solid fiberglass type FA wheel shall be Dow Derakane 510-A vinylester.Blades shall be backward curved to provide non- loading,highly efficient operation. The wheel shall have a totally encapsulated aluminum core insert for secure attachment to the shaft.The wheel shall be one-piece,resin transfer molded,without hand lay-up or assembly of components. The fan is suitable for temperatures up to 250°F. B. Fan housing shall be constructed of Ashland Hetron 693 polyester resin and glass fiber with 3%antimony trioxide added to achieve Class I flame spread below 25. All fiberglass surfaces shall be protected with a minimum 10 mil thickness of chemical,flame and ultraviolet resistant resin. The inlet cone shall be solid fiberglass. The entire housing shall have a finish coat of resin to provide superior protection and smooth airflow. All airstream hardware shall be 304 stainless steel. The fan drive base shall be epoxy coated steel. C. The fan shaft shall be ground and polished carbon steel with an FRP sleeve in the airstream.Bearings shall be heavy-duty, self-aligning,with extended lube tubes for continuous service,with a minimum of 50,000 hours L10 life. A neoprene shaft seal shall be located where the shaft enters the housing with a neoprene shaft slinger between the seal and wheel. V-belt drives shall be sized for continuous service. D. The fan assembly shall be dynamically balanced at the Hartzell factory prior to shipping.Fans shall be balanced in accordance with AMCA Standard 204-96,fan application category BV-3 (comparable to Grade G6.3).Fans shall be manufactured in accordance with Hartzell's standard quality assurance procedures.Fan performance shall be based on tests conducted in Hartzell's AMCA accredited test laboratory and in accordance with the latest revision of AMCA Standard 210 for air performance and AMCA Standard 300 for sound.Fans shall be licensed to bear the AMCA Certified Seal for Sound and Air Performance. 1. Fan Details: a. Flow rate: 4,150 CFM b. Static pressure: 9 inches water column C. Fan rpm: 2,835 2. Motor Details: a. 10 HP,460/60/3 phase,TEFL,Mill&Chemical Duty 2.06 CONTAINMENT LINER A. The containment liner shall be an HDPL/LDPE fabric designed for safe containment of contaminated soils, liquids,or sludges with common use for contaminated materials,fuels,chemicals,water,etc. 11G1[3] Odor Control System Page 5 of 10 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 B. The containment liner shall conform to the following: 3 WEIGHT PER YD2 12 OZ./SQ.YD. (+/-10%) ASTM D 1910 ... NOMINAL THICKNESS 24 MILS(+/-10%) .... ......... ......... ......... ......... ... TENSILE STRENGTH WARP 449 LBS. 3 ASTM D 751 (GRAB METHOD) WEFT 405 LBS. ..mm, ,,,,,,,,, ,,,,,,,,, . .................._.._, ELONGATION TO BREAK WARP 29% WEFT 34% ..mm, ,,,,,,,,, ,,,,,,,,, . .................._.._. TEAR STRENGTH WARP 74 LBS/IN. ASTM D 751 (TONGUE METHOD) WEFT 94 LBS/IN. ..mm, ,,,,,,,,, ,,,,,,,,, . .................._.._. BURSTING STRENGTH 818 PSI ASTM D 3786 (MULLEN) . ................._.._ HYDROSTATIC RESISTANCE 1310 PSI A S TM D 7 5 1 A .. PUNCTURE RESISTANCE 642 PSI ASTM D 751 (1" STEEL BALL TIPPED PROBE) .. MOISTURE VAPOR 0.048 GRAMS/ 3 ASTM E96 B TRANSMISSION M2/24HRS ... PERMEABIL,IL,TY 0.00 ASTM D 4491 LOW TEMPERATURE COLD 3-65F 3 ASTM D 2136 CRACK .. FLEX/ABRASION NO DAMAGE TO SCRIM AFTER ASTM D 3885 2800 CYCLES,BLACK COATING WORN AWAY .. HEAT BONDED SEAM 188.166 ppi ASTMD 6392 STRENGTH mm, ................, ................, .................._,._, BONDED PEEL ADHESION FTBADelam ASTMD 6392 11G1[3] Odor Control System Page 6 of 10 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 , DIMENSIONAL (4EDGE: WARP-9.3 WEFT-7.7 1 ASTM D 1204 STABILITY@212F/1HR @CENTER: WARP-7.6 WEFT-6.4 ENVIRONMENTAL RESISTANCE .. ACCELERATED MORE THAN 80%OF STRENGTH ASTM G 53 WEATHERING,UV RETAINED AFTER 2000 HOURS ..mm, ,,,,,,,,, ,,,,,,,,, .................._,._, CARBON BLACK CONTENT 3% ..mm, ,,,,,,,,, ,,,,,,,,, . .................._.._. CARBON BLACK A-1 DISPERSION C. Manufacturer: 1. Bend Tarp&Liner,model PPL-24 2. Or equal. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 BIOFILTER INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Elevations shall be surveyed at the biofilter floor, top of plenum zone, and top of soil media to establish correct slope and correct thickness of each layer. 2. Do not compact materials per section 3.02. 3.02 PLACING SOIL/GRAVEL MATERIALS A. Placement Into Bed: 1. Plenum zone gravel shall be placed in a manner that will limit displacement of the HDPE lateral pipes. 2. Air plenum gravel shall be leveled and undisturbed prior to soil media placement. Do not permit workers to walk or stand directly on soil media; use boards that will sustain workers' weight without displacing materials. 3. Use placement devices as approved by System Supplier;for example front end loaders, excavators, and/or concrete conveyors. 11G1[3] Odor Control System Page 7 of 10 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 B. Hot Weather: 1. Make provisions for windbreaks, shading, fog spraying, sprinkling, wet cover, or other means to maintain media with a wet surface. 2. Addition of chemical wetting agents or other additives are not allowed. C. Bedding,Plenum Zone,and Soil Filter Media: 1. Place in layers as specified below: Gravel Layer Layer Thickness Size Limits Plenum Zone 12-inches minimum 1 inch-3/8 inch Soil Filter Media 4-feet(place to prevent Per System Supplier aggregation) Cover Rock 3-inches minimum 2 inches—3/8 inch 2. Complete each layer before next layer above is started. 3. Use only clean gravel. Contractor shall be responsible to avoid contamination of materials by native fill dirt or other. 3.03 ODOROUS AIR DISTRIBUTION PIPING INSTALLATION A. Examination: Verify size, material,joint types, elevation, horizontal location, and pipe service of existing pipelines to be connected to new pipelines or new equipment. B. Preparation: Inspect pipe and fittings before installation,clean ends thoroughly,and remove foreign matter and dirt from inside. C. Installation—General: 1. Joint pipe and fittings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, unless otherwise shown or specified. 2. Remove foreign objects prior to assembly and installation. D. Flanged Joints: 1. Install perpendicular to pipe centerline. 2. HDPE flange with no bolt holes. 3. Use torque-limiting wrenches to ensure uniform bearing and proper bolt tightness. 4. Use flat-face flange when joining with flat-faced FRP flange. Use minimum '/4" thick neoprene gaskets. 11G1[3] Odor Control System Page 8 of 10 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 3.04 INSTALLATION—AIR DISTRIBUTION PIPE A. Placement: 1. Keep trench dry until pipe laying and joining are completed. 2. Exercise care when lowering pipe into trench to prevent twisting or damage to pipe and stubs. 3. Measure for grade at pipe invert not at crown. 4. Excavate trench bottom and sides of ample dimensions to permit visual inspection and testing of entire flange,valve,or connection. 5. Prevent foreign material from entering pipe during placement. 6. Close and block open end of last laid pipe section when placement operations are not in progress and at close of day's work. 7. Lay pipe upgrade with bell ends pointing in direction of laying. 8. After joint has been made, check pipe elevation at pipe ends and corners of soil filter piping network. 3.05 BIOFILTER TESTING A. Functional Testing: 1. Test all system components for proper adjustment and operation.Adjust as necessary. 2. Provide certification of functional acceptance prior to commencing performance testing. B. Performance Testing: 1. General: a. To demonstrate that the biofilter system furnished hereunder is installed and performs in accordance with the provisions of these Specifications, the System Supplier shall conduct a four (4) hour performance test in accordance with an approved testing protocol. The performance test shall not commence until a test plan has been received and approved,and the functional testing has been completed. b. The System Supplier shall provide, install, and maintain, if required, all temporary metering or analytical equipment necessary to measure the various performance parameters. C. The System Supplier shall inform the Engineer at least 14 days prior to the start of any performance testing. The Engineer shall have the right to observe, sample, and make any parallel determinations during the performance test. d. Within 10 days after the conclusion of the test period, the System Supplier shall submit a Performance Test Report, including all laboratory and field test data, stating the conclusions of the test with regard to the performance criteria. 2. Test Conditions: a. The biofilter shall have been fully functional and receiving odorous air from the facility for a minimum of 14 consecutive days prior to commencing the testing. b. All testing,adjusting,and balancing shall have been completed and approved. C. The actual sample day shall be chosen to limit weather interference. l lG1[3] Odor Control System Page 9 of 10 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 3. Sampling and Data Measurement: During the test period, at a minimum, the following data and measurements shall be taken at the frequency indicated: a. Fan airflow rate: Initially. b. Fan discharge pressure in inches of WC: Initially. C. Unit airflows(cfm/ft2) shall be taken at four(4)locations across the biofilter;two corners and two equally spaced locations in the interior of the bed. These measurements shall be taken before gas sampling. d. Hydrogen sulfide concentrations(ppb)at the inlet to the biofilter:Every hour. C. Hydrogen sulfide concentrations (ppb) at two locations on the biofilter bed using a flux chamber: Every hour. The results will then be calculated by: 1) Percent Removal = (Average Inlet — Average Outlet)/Average Inlet Note: percent Removal only comes into play when the biofilter inlet sample's concentrations of hydrogen sulfide are greater than 10 ppmv. For concentrations less than 10 ppmv, all Average Biofilter Outlet samples must be less than 100 ppbv to meet performance verification requirements. f. A photographic record of the sampling technique and bed sampling location will be completed for each type of sampling. g. Sampling Log: A sampling log shall be maintained that will include: 1) A hand-drawn map showing the approximate locations of all bed sampling locations. 2) Date,time,location, sampler,and results of each sample. 3) A description of each photograph taken. 4) Weather conditions for the sampling day. 5) A description of any exceptions from the sampling plan. h. Hydrogen Sulfide Sampling: Hydrogen sulfide sampling shall be completed using a Jerome Analyzer with a detection limit of 1 ppbv. The analyzer shall be operated in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions. A copy of the instructions shall be submitted with the final report. The results of the hydrogen sulfide sampling shall be recorded in the sampling log. 3.06 MANUFACTURERS' SERVICES A. A representative for the System Supplier specified herein shall be present at the jobsite for the minimum person-days listed for the services hereinunder,travel time excluded: 1. Three person-days for installation assistance, inspection, and certification of the installation. Provide certificate. 2. Two person-days for functional testing,operator training,and performance testing. 3.07 MANUFACTURERS' CERTIF'ICATE(S) A. Provide manufacturers' certificate(s)of proper installation. END OF SECTION l lG1[3] Odor Control System Page 10 of 10 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT SECTION 11G- SPECIALTY EQUIPMENT 11G3[4] LIFT STATION IDENTIFICATION SIGNS 11G3.1 SCOPE: This specification shall govern for all work necessary for furnishing and installing all identification signs to complete the project. This specification is a performance specification as defined in Article TS-1 of the Technical Special Provisions. 11G3.2 GENERAL: Identification signs are required for new fences at lift stations and shall be installed on the gate. The signs shall be the fiberglass type with permanently legible lettering. 11G3.3 DIMENSIONS: Identification signs shall be sized as necessary for the wording required. 11G3.4 NUMBER REQUIRED: One sign shall be provided for each lift station provided with a new fence. 11G3.5 WORDING: Identification signs shall read: XXXXXXXX WWTP 24 HR EMERG. CONTACT (361)XXX-XXXX Letters shall be block lettering a minimum of 1.5 inches tall. Sign shall identify the wastewater treatment plant collection system that the lift station is a part of. Coordinate with City wastewater staff and/or the City inspector for the treatment plant name and the contact telephone number. 11G3.6 CONSTRUCTION: The signs shall be made of fiberglass that is resistant to chemicals, fumes, salt water and ultra-violet light. The lettering shall be applied by the "silk-screen" methods and shall be epoxy coated for added protection. Signs shall be made at least 1/16" thick and shall be mounted on a 1/4" thick aluminum plate using epoxy cement over the full contact surface. 11 G3.7 INSTALLATION: For chainlink fences use alum. or stainless steel wire at the four corners to secure to the gate fabric. For wood fences use stainless steel screws and washers at the four corners to secure to the gate pickets. I I G3 Identification Signs Page 1 of 1 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 DIVISION 13-SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION SECTION 13C- REPAIRS,ADDITIONS AND MODIFICATIONS OF EXISTING STRUCTURES 13C1[l] GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 130.1 SCOPE: This specification shall govern for all work necessary to repair, renovate or modify the existing structures as required to complete the project. 130.2 SPECIFICATION TYPE: This specification is a performance specification as defined in Article TS-1 of the Technical Special Provisions. 130.3 INTENT: It is the intent of this Section to summarize the scope of work required to provide the repairs,additions and modifications to existing structures and to provide additional information and requirements that are not specified in other sections. 130.4 VERIFICATION OF DIMENSIONS: It is the intent of this specification that the Contractor shall verify all dimensions before starting demolition,modifications,renovations and the ordering of any material. 130.5 DEWATERING: Lift station existing pumps can be used to pump the station down as much as possible. Contractor shall be aware that the station will still contain an amount of raw wastewater and solids in the bottom of the wet well. Contractor shall provide all equipment, material and labor to completely dewater the lift station. All liquid to be removed from the lift stations after they are taken out of service for modifications shall be pumped or bailed to a manhole for return to the wastewater collection system. Contractor shall provide all equipment, material, and labor to completely clean the wet well of all solids. Solids from the wet well shall be removed and hauled by the Contractor to a sludge drying bed at the Greenwood WWTP (see Specification 027604). After the solids have dried the Contractor shall be responsible for removing the dried solids from the plant site, cleaning the bed to original condition and properly disposing of the solids at the Cefe Valenzuela Landfill (at the intersection of FM 2444 and CR 20). 130.6 SALVAGE: All items removed during lift station improvements shall be neatly piled at the site (out of the way of the construction operation) as directed by the Inspector. The Contractor shall notify the Wastewater Dept. upon removal of said items until it may be inspected by the Wastewater Dept. The Wastewater Dept. will, within seven (7) days after being notified, mark all items it wishes to keep. These items shall remain the property of the Wastewater Dept., especially the pump's upper guide rail bracket and guide rails. Any item not marked by the Wastewater Dept. shall become the property of the Contractor. 130.7 PHOTO DOCUMENTATION: Contractor shall document the existing conditions at each lift station site using photographs prior to moving on to the site and before undertaking any construction work. 130.8 LIFT STATION CONTROL OF FLOW: a. General: Contractor shall provide a minimum of 72 hour notice to the Wastewater Dept. for the startup of control of flow operations at each lift station once the completed control of flow plan has been approved by the design engineer. The contractor shall consider and be responsible for the effects on the collection system area both upstream and downstream of the control of flow. Upstream effects include, but are not limited to backups and overflows. Downstream effects include,but are not limited to surcharges and overflows. Contractor is completely responsible for 13C1—13C8 Special Construction Page 1 of 4 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 providing, installing, operating, and maintaining a pumping and flow control system for the lift station to be improved. Contractor shall neither anticipate nor expect any assistance from the City of Corpus Christi departments for any of the control of flow operation. Some locations require multiple control of flow systems. If control of flow system is provided with air release valves the valve drains shall be piped to a manhole for discharge. Contractor shall make all effort to minimize spills of raw wastewater during the improvements and control of flow. All spills and sanitary sewer overflows shall immediately be reported to the City at 361-826-2489 and contractor shall be solely responsible for clean-up of said spillages or overflows at no additional cost to the City of Corpus Christi. Contractor can work extended hours to perform the improvements during the control of flow operation. Work during extended hours cannot create a nuisance for the neighbors. Once the lift station is taken out of service and control of flow operations have begun, work shall be continuous on the lift station improvements until all improvements are completed and the lift station returned to service. b. Control of Flow Pump: Pumping capacity of the control of flow pump shall be capable of handling the flow conditions at all times and shall be a minimum of 1.5 times the existing pump capacity. Pumps shall be diesel operated, self-priming, auto-starting pumps (Godwin, Rain-for-Rent, or approved equal). Pumps shall be equipped with critically silenced, sound attenuated enclosures with a maximum 72 dB (30-feet from pump) and a diesel day tank with a minimum 24-hour runtime without refuel. Pumps shall also be provided with automatic level controls to pump out of existing manhole(s). Existing Pump Capacities: 1) Wooldridge L. S.—34,200 GPM c. Inclement Weather: Contractor shall not be allowed to commence control of flow operation should inclement weather be forecast for the period of the scheduled improvements. d. Control of Flow Operations: 1) Once the control of flow plan is approved and 72 hours prior to initiation of the control of flow, the contractor is responsible for setting up a meeting between the consultant engineer/City/operating department to affirm the approved control of flow plan and verify the site installation conforms to the approved plan. 2) Contractor shall exercise (open and close) existing isolation valves to verify that the lift station piping can be isolated from the force main. 3) Contractor is responsible for operation and maintenance of the control of flow pumping system and fuel for the system. 4) Once lift station is taken out of service, all improvements, testing and inspection shall be completed prior to termination of control of flow pumping. 5) Control of flow pumping can onlv be initiated and terminated between 8:00 a.m. and 12:00 p.m. on a Tuesdav, Wednesdav, and Thursdav, but not the day immediately before or after a holiday. 6) Before beginning control of flow operations, contractor shall provide emergency contact info/cell phone number of control of flow operators/monitors, project superintendent and pump supplier. 7) The City is permitted through the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality to operate the wastewater system. The final authority comes from the City as to the operation of the wastewater system and as such it reserves the right to halt the control of flow operation at any time in order to maintain public health and safety. 8) Any coordination or assistance required from the City personnel for lift station access, pumping systems down, etc. shall be done during City's normal working hours and/or scheduled so that the City personnel can complete the service required by City personnel during the normal working hours. Normal working hours for the City are Monday through Friday from 7:30 am to 3:00 pm. 9) Control of flow system shall be manned by the Contractor 24 hours a day from the time it is started to the time the lift station is out back into normal automatic service. 10) Before the control of flow system is terminated,the Contractor must demonstrate that full automatic operation of the lift station has been restored and that the SCADA system is fully functional. The wastewater department will need to observe the functionality of the lift station for a full two hours (during normal working hours) before the control of 13C1—13C8 Special Construction Page 2 of 4 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 flow pumping system is disabled to confirm that the lift station is operating properly. The two hour observance period shall begin no later than 12:00 p.m. on a Tuesday, Wednesday, or Thursday but not the day immediately before or after a holiday. Normal working hours for the City of Corpus Christi Wastewater Department is between 7:30 a.m. and 3:30 p.m. 11) Contractor is responsible for all control of flow pumping from time of startup to time of termination for each lift station. Contractor shall complete all work inside of wet well and drywell prior to termination of control of flow. All testing and inspections shall be completed and found acceptable prior to control of flow termination e. Control of Flow Plan: It shall be the contractor's responsibility to submit, in writing, a control of flow pumping system plan prior to the installation of any control of flow pumping system proposed for use. The approval protocol is as follows: The contractor prepares and submits the plan to the Engineer. The Engineer reviews the control of flow plan and coordinates approval with Engineering Services and the operating department. At a minimum the control of flow plan should include the following items: 1) Size,type,and rating or pumps. 2) Size and type of inlet and discharge piping. 3) Approximate location(schematic)of control of flow pumping components. 4) General arrangement/type of additional support equipment. 5) Contractor personnel list of those manning the control of flow system 24 hours per day. 6) Traffic Control Plan if the control of flow system is within the right-of-way. 7) Decant location. 8) Handling of flows: Contractor is responsible to assure that the wastewater collection system is not compromised during the period in which the lift station has been shut off for control of flow installation, and Contractor shall insure that the system operates properly during this period. f. Discharge and Suction Piping shall be adequately secured to prevent movement during pumping operation. g. Odor Control: Contractor shall provide and install plywood or other materials as necessary to form around the suction piping to seal where it leaves the manholes. Use caulking, urethane foam,Ram-nek,etc.to help seal around the suction pipes and manhole tops. h. All Contractors and Sub-contractors are to provide their own power during construction at the lift stations that are part of this project. They are not allowed to use electrical power from the lift station as it is a violation of TCEQ and a code violation. All Contractors and Sub-contractor are to have a Superintendent on the jobsite at all times while working and no work should be performed with heavy equipment near high voltage lines without contacting AEP first. 13C1.13 STAINLESS STEEL BOLTS: All fasteners,nuts,bolts,anchor bolts and washers shall be 316 stainless steel. Coat the threads of all stainless steel anchor bolts, erection bolts, fasteners, etc with"Never Seize" or an approved equal before attaching equipment thereto or before assembly. 13C1.14 CONFINED SPACE: Contractor shall meet OSHA requirements while performing work in confined spaces. 13C1.15 GENERAL LIFT STATION SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION: 1. Install emergency pumping connections. 2. Verify size and number of gravity lines entering the lift station that need to be plugged for control of flow. Contractor to order and have all plugs, material and equipment delivered to job site prior to setting up and beginning control of flow operations. 3. Contractor shall notify Wastewater Dept. staff and Engineer a minimum of seven(7) days before lift station control of flow is started. 4. Exercise (open and close) existing isolation valves to verify that lift station piping can be isolated from force main. 5. Install traffic control(when required). 13C1—13C8 Special Construction Page 3 of 4 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 6. Install, start-up, and test control of flow pumping system. Install plugs and test control of flow pumping system under operating conditions. Take the lift station out of service. 7. Schedule power outage with the power company (when required). Contractor shall be responsible for and include in his bid any cost from the power company associated with the power outages. 8. Perform improvements outlined in the following scope of work. Note that when removing, replacing or dealing with existing suction and discharge piping the contactor shall be prepared to handle and deal with any liquids or solids remaining in that piping. 9. Schedule return of power with the power company(when required). 10. Coordinate and schedule with Wastewater Dept. and Engineer time to inspect the completed work. Contractor shall demonstrate that pumps are turning in correct direction. 11. As soon as improvements are completed and inspected by City and Engineer, return the Lift Station back to service. 12. Remove all control of flow materials and equipment, debris and salvaged material unwanted by City and return site to original conditions. 13C2 MODIFICATIONS/REHABILITATION FOR WOOLDRIDGE LIFT STATION 13C2.1 SCOPE OF WORK: This item includes but is not limited to the following items of work: 1. Install new emergency pumping connection. 2. Install temporary traffic control. 3. Provide control of flow pumping system to allow isolation of the existing lift station. 4. Clean out wet well completely of all solids, grit, debris, etc. from the floor, walls and suction pipes,haul off and properly dispose of(see also Section 13C1.5 above). 5. Construct new extension to existing electrical room. 6. Install new electrical gear. 7. Install new electrical generator and concrete foundation. 8. Install new fuel tank foundation and concrete foundation. 9. Install new HVAC system. 10. Install new odor control system. 11. Lower level crane improvements. 12. Upper level crane improvements. 13. Replace suction piping and valves. 14. Replace discharge piping and valves. 15. Install new dry pit submersible pumps. 16. Install new PVC coated chain link perimeter fence. 17. Contractor is responsible for obtaining a building permit prior to construction. 13C1—13C8 Special Construction Page 4 of 4 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 BYPASS PUMPING PLAN FORM Date: Project Title: No.: Engineer: Contractor: Service Area: Lift Station No.(if applicable): Start Date &Time: Completion Date &Time: Sewer Line Size being Bypassed: Estimated Peak Flow: Line Plugging Method &Locations: Suction Manhole or Lift Station Number and Depth: Discharge Manhole or Lift Station Number and Depth: Maximum Surcharge Depth Allowed: Bypass Forcemain Size,Material &Length: Pump Description: (Self-Priming,Critically Silenced,and Automatic Level Controls Required) Make, Model, Suction/Discharge Size: Diesel or Electric Total Number of Pumps/Standby Pumps: Total&Firm Capacity (GPM�TDH): Vacuum Trucks (if required,number and capacity): Contractor Personnel Manning Bypass System (24 hours/day): Name: Phone: Name: Phone: Emergency Contacts: Name: Phone: Name: Phone: Additional Notes: Required Checklist: YES NO ❑ ❑ Schematic drawing providing details of proposed bypass pumping system,routing of bypass lines(using manhole numbers and/or lift station names as applicable),equipment location,and proposed sequencing. ❑ ❑ Has traffic control plan been appropriately modified to facilitate the bypass pumping equipment? ❑ ❑ Pumps: Self-priming&Critically Silenced. Provide pump curve with Bypass plan. (Requirement). ❑ ❑ Contractor shall coordinate with Supplier for appropriate instruction and training on pump operation. ❑ ❑ Have emergency and/or backup provisions been made for quick pump change out in the case of system failure? ❑ ❑ Contractor has confirmed no rain(less than 1/2-in)in the forecast? Prepared by: Reviewed by: Contractor Representative Date Wastewater Representative Date Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS SECTION 14C- HOIST & CRANES 14C2[i] POWER DRIVEN HOIST AND TROLLEY (HEAVY DUTY) 14C2.1 SCOPE: This specification shall govern for all work necessary to furnish, install and place into initial operation the 8 Ton power driven hoist and trolley system (heavy duty) as required to complete the upper level lift system at the Williams Lift Station. This specification is a performance specification as defined in Section 1D General Conditions, Subsection "Supplemental General Conditions",Art. SC-1 Definitions. The 8 Ton power driven hoist and trolley shall be manufactured by Kone Cranes or approved equal. The purpose of the power driven hoist and trolley is to lift and lower equipment from ground level (upper level) to the floor of the wet well (lower level). There is an opening in the concrete floor at ground level that the equipment will pass through. Contractor and crane manufacturer to verify that the proposed power driven hoist and trolley will be provided so that the hoist can directly be positioned over the opening in the floor. Contractor to verify all existing building measurements, proposed upper level lift system structure dimensions, and all bridge crane dimensions prior to providing submittals. 14C2.2 GENERAL: 14C2.2.1 Hoist and Trollgy S ste The system is to be used in the maintenance of the lift station pumps,piping, and valves. The system shall basically consist of: a. One-8 Ton capacity,top running,electric motor driven bridge crane trolley; b. One-8 Ton capacity low head room type electric motor driven hoist unit; c. All structural steel and related items required to complete the system. All structural steel and welding shall conform to all requirements as set forth in Subsection 5A1 - Structural Steel and Other Metals. 14C2.2.2 Safety: All capacities shall be designed with a safety factor of 5. The system shall comply with the requirements of the U.S.A. Standard Safety Code for Cranes,Derricks and Hoists(DSAS B30.2),The National Electric Code(DSAS C-1)and O.S.H.A. 14C2.3 BRIDGE CRANE: The bridge crane shall be electric motor driven top running type with a capacity of 8 Ton with standard single girder and having top running type end trucks for operation on top of 40# ASCE runway rail. The entire bridge is to be a single welded unit. 14C2.3.1 End Trucks: Crane end trucks shall be constructed of double structural channels with heavy plate diaphragms welded into a single rigid box section which are to be line bored for correct axle alignment after all welding is complete. Heavy steel enclosure plates are to be designed to act as heavy duty bumpers and rail sweeps. End trucks will be furnished with energy absorbing rubber bumpers. 14C2.3.2 Bridge Wheels: Crane bridge wheels shall be made of high strength allow steel and the treads and flanges shall be flame hardened to a minimum 350 brinnel hardness. The drive wheels shall have tapered treads. Wheel bearings shall be of heavy duty roller type selected to provide a minimum 25,000 hour average 14C2 Power Driven Hoist&Trolley Page 1 of 3 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 life. Axles shall be of the pin and keeper type and shall be of hardened and ground steel, and shall act as the inner race of the bearing assembly. 14C2.3.3 Gear Reduction: At each end truck there will be a large diameter heat treated pinion gear mounted between bearings and pressed and keyed onto the pinion stub shaft. This pinion gear shall mesh with a large diameter ring gear which is bolted to the drive wheel. 14C2.3.4 Bridge Drive: The drive shall be center mounted with a motor reducer unit coupled to a cross-shaft providing power to the gear reduction at each end truck. Drive motor shall be 480 volt, 1/2 h.p., 3 phase, single speed, totally enclosed non-ventilated motor, rated 30 minutes, 55° C rise above ambient temperature, and will be equipped with direct acting AC type motor brake. The drive speed shall be approximately 125 F.P.M., and shall be equipped with adjustable type ballast resistors in the motor circuit for smooth acceleration. All connections between the drive reducer and the cross-shaft shall be by flexible couplings and the drive shaft shall be supported at close intervals by self-aligning sealed ball bearing pillow blocks. 14C2.3.5 Bridge Electrification: The cross bridge conductor power supply to the traveling hoist unit shall be by means of flexible multiple rubber covered cable suspended from a messenger wire stretched between the crane and end trucks. 14C2.4 HOIST: The hoist shall be a low-headroom type with 8 Ton capacity. Hoist shall have 45'-0" of lift with lifting speed of 20 F.P.M. with 14.8 H.P., 480 volt, 3 phase motor. Unit shall be mounted on a single speed motor driven trolley with travel speed of 35 F.P.M. The hoist motor shall be totally enclosed non-ventilated rated 30 minutes, 55° C rise above ambient temperature. The hoist unit shall be furnished with 2 braking systems, one being an electric brake coupled directly to the motor, and the other brake shall be of a Weston type mechanical lock brake designed to control the lowering speed of the hoist under full load condition. Either of the brakes shall be capable of supporting the full rated load independent of the other. Control of all motions of the crane and hoist shall be from an 8-button pushbutton station suspended from the hoist to within 3'of the floor,with buttons for each motion of the bridge crane and hoist, and also to have On/Off buttons for control of the magnetic mainline contactors on the bridge crane assembly. Hoist drum shall be 7/16" grooved right and left hand with double reeving to provide true vertical lift. All load hooks shall have safety latch. 14C2.5 RUNWAY ELECTRIFICATION SYSTEM: The 480 volt, 3 phase power supply to the crane and trolley system shall be by means of flexible multiple rubber covered cables suspended from a messenger wire stretched between the end brackets for the full length of the crane runway. The spring wheel, swivel type, mainline current collectors shall be furnished. Conductors shall be#4 round,hard drawn copper trolley wire. 14C2.5.1 Electrification System Features: Manufacturer shall furnish and include these features: main disconnect, magnetic main line contactor, circuit breakers, magnetic motor starters, thermal overload relays, transformer for 120 volt control, load limit switch,and upper(plugging)limit switch. 14C2.6 PAINTING: 14C2.6.1 Shop(Factory)Painting: All exterior portions of the hoist shall be factory primed and painted prior to assembly. Cranes and all structural steel shall be cleaned,primed and factory painted. 14C2.6.2 Field Painting: See Section 9K-Painting for requirements. 14C2 Power Driven Hoist&Trolley Page 2 of 3 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 14C2.7 DETAILED DRAWINGS: Before manufacture, the Contractor shall submit detailed drawings of this equipment to the Engineer for review and approval. 14C2.8 FIELD SERVICE: The manufacturer's field engineer or representative shall inspect and check the equipment and installation after erection and be on hand for initial start-up and trial run. 14C2.9 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL: The manufacturer shall furnish to the Engineer four sets of complete operation and maintenance instructions, complete control schematics and wiring diagrams for the electric hoist and trolley equipment. 14C2 Power Driven Hoist&Trolley Page 3 of 3 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 DIVISION 15- MECHANICAL SECTION 15C -PROCESS PIPING AND FITTINGS 15C14[i] PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 1504.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: 1504.1.1 Scobe: This specification shall govern for all work necessary for furnishing all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required to design and to provide hangers, supports, restraints and appurtenances for all piping systems complete and operational as shown and specified. All pipe supports shall be steel, adjustable, and include a baseplate. The baseplate shall have a hole at each corner for the anchor bolt. All anchor bolts and hardware shall be minimum '/2" diameter and 316 stainless steel. 15C14.1.2 Specification Type: This specification is a performance specification as defined in Section 1D General Conditions, Subsection"Supplemental General Conditions"Art. SC-1 Definitions. 1504.1.3 Related Work Specified Elsewhere: a. Section 9K—Painting b. Section 15C2—Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings 1504.1.4 Quality Assurance: a. All supports and hangers shall be furnished by a manufacturer fully experienced, reputable and qualified in the manufacture of the materials to be furnished. All supports and hangers shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best practices and methods and shall comply with these specifications. b. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, except as otherwise shown or specified. 1. The Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry (Latest update): a. MSS SP-58,Pipe Hangers and Supports—Materials and Design. b. MSS SP-69,Pipe Hangers and Supports—Selection and Application. 2. Federal Specification,FS W-H-171,Hangers and Support,Pipe. 3. ASTM A 575,Merchant Quality Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Bars. 4. Underwriters'Laboratories,Inc., Standard UL-203-Pipe Hanger Equipment. 15C14.1.5 Acceptable Products: Standard pipe supports and components shall be manufactured by Standon, Aickinstrut, B-Line, Carpenter&Patterson,Kin-Line, Grinnell,Michigan, Superstrut,Unistrut,or equal. 1504.1.6 Submittal Data: The Contractor shall submit a pdf electronic copy of the manufacturer's catalogs, literature, and engineering data on all hangers, supports and restraints. 1504.2 MATERIALS: 1504.2.1 General: a. Furnish standard and fabricated hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts,bolts,nuts, rods, washers, and other accessories of the type indicated on the drawings and/or as required to properly support the piping to prevent sagging and as hereinafter described. The Contractor shall review the piping layout in relation to the surrounding structure and adjacent piping and equipment before selecting the type of support to be used at each hanger point. 15C14 Pipe Hangers& Supports Page 1 of 3 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 b. The equipment furnished under this Section shall be constructed of new material free from defects in workmanship and material quality. c. Hangers and supports shall withstand all static and specified dynamic conditions of loading to which the piping and associated equipment may be subjected. As a minimum, consideration should be given to the following conditions: 1. Weights of pipe, valves, fittings, insulating materials, suspended hanger components, and normal fluid contents. 2. Reaction forces due to the operation of safety or relief valves. 3. Wind loadings on outdoor piping. d. Hangers and supports shall be sized to fit the outside diameter of pipe, tubing, or, where specified,the outside diameter of insulation. e. Install hangers or supports at all locations where pipe changes direction. There shall be a hanger within 2 feet of each elbow or tree. Provide additional supports at valves, strainers, etc. Ductile iron pipe shall have no less than one hanger per length of pipe. f. All hangers and supports to be capable of adjustment after placement of piping. Wall hangers shall have slotted bolt holes. Ceiling hangers shall have turnbuckles and floor supports shall have extended anchor bolts such that the support can be wedged to proper elevation and grouted. g. Each type of hanger or support to be the product of one manufacturer. Keep types of hangers or supports to a minimum. Stock hanger and support components shall be used wherever practical. h. The supporting systems shall provide for and control the free or intended movement of the piping including its movement in relation to that of connected equipment. Where there is horizontal movement at a suspended type hanger location, hanger components shall be selected to allow for swing. The vertical angle of the hanger rod shall not,at any time,exceed 4 degrees. i. Provide a hanger or support adjacent to each hub on all suspended or supported cast iron pipe. j. All vertical risers shall be supported by riser clamps or supports at each floor and between floors at every 8 feet. k. Where negligible movement occurs at hanger locations, rod hangers should be used for suspended lines, wherever practical. For piping supported from below, bases, brackets or structural cross members should be used. Install hanger rods straight and vertical. Chain, wire, strap or perforated bar hangers shall not be permitted. Do not suspend hangers from piping. 1. Maximum support spacing, unless otherwise shown or approved for standard weight steel pipe, shall be: Pipe Size(inches) Spacing(feet) up to 1-1/2 6 2 through 3 10 3-1/2 and greater 12 in. Unless otherwise shown, maximum support spacing for plastic pipe at ambient temperature to be one-half of the values specified for steel pipe. n. Supports midway between expansion joints shall be rigid clamps allowing no vertical or horizontal movement. All other supports in lines with expansion joints shall be of the roller type with the roller contoured to the pipe outside dimension. Where the pipe is insulated, the roller type support shall be contoured to the insulation and protective saddle. o. Where proper hanger or support spacing does not correspond with joist or rib spacing, structural steel channels may be attached to joists or ribs and pipes suspended therefrom. p. There shall be no contact between a pipe and hanger or support component of dissimilar metals. Prevent contact between dissimilar metals when supporting copper tubing by use of copper- plated, rubber,plastic or vinyl coated, or stainless steel hanger and support components. Isolate thin walled stainless steel piping from carbon steel used by use of plastic coated hangers or supports or by taping at points of contact with PVC or vinyl. 15C14.2.2 Protective Coating: a. Unless otherwise specified, metal hangers and supports shall be hot-dip after fabrication. Uni- strut shall be aluminum. All anchor bolts and fastener nuts,bolts and washers shall be 316 stainless steel. 15C14 Pipe Hangers& Supports Page 2 of 3 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 1504.3 EXECUTION: 1504.3.1 General: Restrain, block, brace, support, or suspend pipe and fittings as shown on the Drawings and as required to prevent displacement, vibration, sagging, warping, deformation, or failure of piping and fittings while allowing for expansion and contraction. 15C14.3.2 Hanger and Support Locations: a. The Contractor shall locate hangers and supports as near as possible to concentrated loads such as valves, flanges, etc. Locate hangers, supports and accessories within the maximum span lengths specified to support continuous pipeline runs unaffected by concentrated loads. b. There should be at least one hanger or support located within 2 feet from where pipe changes direction. c. The Contractor shall locate hangers and supports to ensure that connections to equipment, tanks, etc.,are substantially free from loads transmitted by the piping. d. Where piping is connected to equipment, a valve, etc. that will require removal for maintenance, the piping shall be supported in such a manner that temporary supports shall not be necessary. e. Pipe shall not have low spots formed in the span due to sagging of the pipe between supports caused by the weight of the pipe,medium in the pipe,insulation,valves and fittings. 15C14.3.3 Installation: a. Install items to be embedded before concrete placement. Fasten embedded items securely to prevent movement during concrete placement. b. Install hangers and support units on piping systems as recommended by manufacturer. c. Hanger components shall not be used for purposed other than for which they were designed. They shall not be used for rigging and erection purposes. d. Hanger and support components in contact with plastic pipe shall be free of burrs and sharp edges. Rollers shall roll freely without binding. e. Welded and bolted attachments to the building structural steel shall be in accordance with the requirements of AISC MO11. Unless otherwise specified,there shall be no drilling or burning of holes in the building structural steel. f. Plastic or rubber end caps shall be provided at the exposed ends of all framing channels that are located up to 7 feet above the floor. g. The Contractor shall adjust hangers and supports to obtain required pipe slope and elevation. Shims made of material that is compatible with the piping material may be used. Stanchions shall be adjusted prior to grouting their baseplates. 15C14 Pipe Hangers& Supports Page 3 of 3 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 DIVISION 15- MECHANICAL SECTION 15C- PROCESS PIPING AND FITTINGS 15C2[5] DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15C2.1 SCOPE: This specification shall govern for all work necessary for furnishing all ductile iron pipe and fittings required to complete the process piping. This specification is a design specification as defined in Article TS-1 Technical Special Provisions. 15C2.2 DUCTILE IRON PIPE: 15C2.2.1 General: Ductile iron pipe shall conform to ANSI A21.51/AWWA C151. The interior of the pipe shall be factory lined with Protecto 401 Ceramic Epoxy, at a thickness of 40 mils. Lining shall be done by qualified applicators utilizing specialized application equipment and as per manufacturer's specifications. Lining shall be checked with holiday detection for defects/pin holes and thickness measured.Pipe for air service shall not be mortar lined but interior shall be lined with 1 mil bituminous coating. 15C2.2.2 Pipe Installed below Ground(buried directly in the ground): Pipe installed below ground shall be ductile iron with ductile iron fittings. Fittings shall have mechanical joints except that when space limitations require it, compact push on type fittings will be allowed. Pipe joints shall be push on joint. 15C2.2.3 Pipe Installed above Ground(not buried directly in the ground): Pipe installed above ground shall be ductile iron with ductile iron fittings. Joints shall be flanged. 15C2.2.4 Wall Pipe: Wall pipes shall be ductile iron and all provisions of this specification entitled "Fabricated Pipe" shall apply, except when the drawings require a mechanical joint or a push on joint. Then the joint specification shall conform to the applicable specification for pipe installed below ground. 15C2.3 FITTINGS: Fittings shall be ductile iron conforming to ANSI A21.10/AWWA C110 or ANSI A21.53/AWWA C153 (Compact)with a minimum pressure rating of 250 psi. The interior of the fittings shall be factory lined with Protecto 401 Ceramic Epoxy, at a thickness of 40 mils. Lining shall be done by qualified applicators utilizing specialized application equipment and as per manufacturer's specifications. Lining shall be checked with holiday detection for defects/pin holes and thickness measured. Fittings for air service shall not be mortar lined but interior shall be lined with 1 mil bituminous coating. 15C2.4 JOINTS: 15C2.4.1 Mechanical Joints: Mechanical joints shall conform to ANSI A21.11/AWWA Clll. All mechanical joints shall be furnished complete with joint material,gaskets,nuts,bolts and glands. 15C2.4.2 Push-On Joints: Push-on joints shall conform to ANSI A21.11/AWWA C111. All required lubricant shall be furnished with the pipe and/or fittings. 15C2.4.3 Flanges: Flanged joints shall conform to ANSI A21.15/AWWA C115. Flanges to have full-face factory cut gaskets. Flanges shall be Class 125 drilled and faced and conform to A.N.S.I. Standard Specification B 16.1. 15C2 Ductile Iron Pipe Page 1 of 4 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 15C2.4.4 Nuts And Bolts: Nuts and bolts shall be 316 stainless steel. 15C2.5 PIPE INSTALLED BELOW GROUND(BURIED): Pipe to be installed below ground shall have a minimum wall thickness as follows: Pipe to be installed below ground shall have a minimum wall thickness as follows: 3"Diameter 0.25 inch* 14"Diameter 0.28 inch** 36"Diameter 0.47 inch** 4"Diameter 0.25 inch* 16"Diameter 0.30 inch** 42" Diameter 0.52 inch** 6"Diameter 0.25 inch* 18"Diameter 0.31 inch** 48"Diameter 0.58 inch** 8"Diameter 0.25 inch* 20"Diameter 0.33 inch** 54"Diameter 0.65 inch** 10"Diameter 0.26 inch* 24"Diameter 0.37 inch** *Pressure Class 350 12"Diameter 0.28 inch* 30"Diameter 0.42 inch** **Pressure Class 250 15C2.6 FABRICATED PIPE: 15C2.6.1 General: All fabricated ductile iron pipe, whether flanges, plain end or fabricated wall pieces shall be furnished in accordance with ANSI A21.15/AWWA. C-115 latest revisions. 15C2.6.2 Pipe Barrel: The thickness of the ductile iron pipe barrel shall comply as follows: 3"Diameter 0.31 inch* 18"Diameter 0.44 inch* 4"Diameter 0.32 inch* 20"Diameter 0.45 inch* 6"Diameter 0.34 inch* 24"Diameter 0.47 inch* 8"Diameter 0.36 inch* 30"Diameter 0.51 inch* 10"Diameter 0.38 inch* 36"Diameter 0.58 inch* 12"Diameter 0.40 inch* 42"Diameter 0.65 inch* 14"Diameter 0.42 inch* 48"Diameter 0.72 inch* 16"Diameter 0.43 inch* 54"Diameter 0.81 inch* *(Class 53) 15C2.6.3 Pipe Flanges: All flanges furnished shall be ductile iron and in strict accordance with the following tables: Nominal Bolt Hole Bolt Dia. Pipe Size OD BC Dia. &Length No. Of In. In. In. T In. In. In. Bolts 3 7.50 6.00 0.75 f 0.12 3/4 5/8 x 2-1/2 4 4 9.00 7.50 0.94 f 0.12 3/4 5/8 x 3 8 6 11.00 9.50 1.00 f 0.12 7/8 3/4 x 3-1/2 8 8 13.50 11.75 1.12 f 0.12 7/8 3/4 x 3-1/2 8 10 16.00 14.25 1.19 f 0.12 1 7/8 x 4 12 12 19.00 17.00 1.25 f 0.12 1 7/8 x 4 12 14 21.00 18.75 1.38 f 0.19 1-1/8 1 x 4-1/2 12 16 23.50 21.25 1.44 f 0.19 1-1/8 1 x 4-1/2 16 18 25.00 22.75 1.56 f 0.19 1-1/4 1-1/8 x 5 16 20 27.50 25.00 1.69 f 0.19 1-1/4 1-1/8 x 5 20 24 32.00 29.50 1.88 f 0.19 1-3/8 1-1/4 x 5-1/2 20 30 38.75 36.00 2.12 f 0.25 1-3/8 1-1/4 x 6-1/2 28 36 46.00 42.75 2.38 f 0.25 1-5/8 1-1/2 x 7 32 42 53.00 49.50 2.62 f 0.25 1-5/8 1-1/2 x 7-1/2 36 48 59.50 56.00 2.75 f 0.25 1-5/8 1-1/2 x 8 44 54 66.25 62.75 3.00 f 0.25 2 1-3/4 x 8-1/2 44 15C2 Ductile Iron Pipe Page 2 of 4 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 15C2.6.4 Pipe Facing: The pipe will be threaded through the flange and shall be faced after fabrication. 15C2.6.5 Pipe Markin: The length and weight shall be shown on each pipe. The letters D.I. shall be cast on the back of the flange for identification. 15C2.6.6 Fabricated Wall Pieces: All fabricated wall pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with paragraph 15C2.6.2-wall thickness and shall be ductile iron. In the case of a mechanical joint bell by flange or plain end wall piece, the bell shall be integrally cast with the pipe barrel. "Screwed on"bells will not be acceptable. The wall collar or center flange shall be welded on and of minimum thickness as indicated by the following: Pipe Size Thickness Pipe Size Thickness 3" .50 18" .75 4" .50 20" .75 6" .50 24" .75 8" .50 30" 1.00 10" .50 36" 1.00 12" .50 42" 1.25 14" .75 48" 1.25 16" .75 54" 1.50 15C2.7 COUPLINGS: 15C2.7.1 Steel Couplings: a. Where steel couplings are shown on the plans or as required to make piping connections they shall be, unless noted otherwise, a dressor"type" flexible coupling consisting of one cylindrical sleeve with conical inner surfaces at each end, two resilient, wedge-shaped, rubber gaskets, two ring- shaped followers and a set of rolled-thread bolts with heavy hex nuts. (Steel couplings are not the same as"Solid Sleeve"MJ Fittings) b. Coupling material as follows: 1. Sleeve: Ductile iron or carbon steel having a minimum yield of 30,000 psi 2. Follower: Ductile Iron ASTM A536 or carbon steel having a minimum yield of 30,000 psi 3. Gasket: Nitrile(Bona-N) 4. Bolts and Nuts: 304 stainless steel 5. Finish: Fusion bonded epoxy per AWWA C213 c. For installation on an existing pipe the contractor shall expose (if buried)and confirm the material type and outside diameter prior to ordering the coupling. d. Buried steel couplings shall be wrapped in 8 mil thick polyethylene before being backfilled. Polyethylene wrapping shall be lapped with adjacent piping wrap with a minimum 6"lap. e. Provide"long body" style sleeve when shown on the plans. f Steel couplings for potable water systems shall meet NSF 61 requirements. g. Steel couplings shall be Smith Blair Style 411,Dresser Style 38 or Romac 501. 15C2.7.2 Flange Coupling Adapter: a. Where flange coupling adapters are shown on the plans or as required to make piping connections they shall be flexible coupling with joint restraint provided anchor studs. b. Coupling material as follows: 1. Body:Ductile Iron ASTM A536 2. Follower: Ductile Iron ASTM A536 3. Gasket: Nitrile(Bona-N) 4. T-Bolts: Ductile Iron 5. Studs: 304 Stainless Steel 6. Finish: Fusion bonded epoxy per AWWA C213 15C2 Ductile Iron Pipe Page 3 of 4 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 c. For installation on an existing pipe the contractor shall confirm the material type and outside diameter prior to ordering the coupling. e. Provide"long body" style sleeve when shown on the plans. f. Flange coupling adapters for potable water systems shall meet NSF 61 requirements. g. Flange coupling adapters shall be Smith Blair Style,Dresser or Romac. 15C2.8 EXTERIOR PROTECTION OF PIPE AND FITTINGS: 15C2.8.1 Below Ground Installation(Buried): Pipe and fittings installed below ground shall have a bituminous coating approximately 1 mil. thick and shall be protected with a polyethylene wrap. The polyethylene material shall have an 8 mil. thickness and may be either clear or black. The wrapping shall be lapped in such a manner that all surfaces of pipe and fittings shall have a minimum 6" lap. 15C2.8.2 Above Ground Installation(Not Buried): Pipe and fittings installed above the ground shall be painted in the field in accordance with the applicable provisions on Section 9K"Painting". 15C2.9 HANDLING OF PIPE AND FITTINGS: Pipe and fittings lined with Protecto 401 shall be handled only from the outside. No forks, chains, straps, hooks, etc. shall be placed inside the pipe and fittings for lifting,positioning, or laying so as not to disturb the protective interior coating. 15C2 Ductile Iron Pipe Page 4 of 4 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 DIVISION 15- MECHANICAL SECTION 15D- PROCESS VALVES 15D3[i] PLUG VALVES 15D3.1 SCOPE: This specification shall govern for all work necessary to furnish and install the plug valves and accessories as required to complete the project. This specification is a design specification as defined in Article TS-1 of the Technical Special Provisions. 15D3.2 GENERAL: Plug valves shall be of the non-lubricated, eccentric type. Flanged ends shall be faced and drilled to ANSI 125 lb. The valve shall be designed for a minimum 150 p.s.i. water working pressure service, and shall be capable of tight shut-off against 50 p.s.i. reverse pressure differential. Valves 6" and larger shall be provided with geared actuators conforming to AWWA C-504-87, Section 3.8. The valves shall have a flow area not less than 80%of the connecting pipe area. Seat end and standard flow direction shall be cast on the valve body. Provide position indicator for above ground valves. 15D3.3 CONSTRUCTION: 15D3.3.1 Body: Cast iron ASTM A-126 Class B in compliance with AWWA C-504-87, Sec. 2.2. 15D3.3.2 Plug: Resilient faced with neoprene or nitrile butadiene. The plug/seat interface shall be externally adjustable while the valve is in service and under pressure. 15D3.3.3 Seat: Nickel overlay (minimum 90% nickel) in compliance with AWWA C-507-87, Sec. 3.2 and AWWA C-504-87, Sec. 3.5. 15D3.3.4 Bushings: Stainless steel or bronze in compliance with AWWA C-504-87, Sec. 3.6. 15D3.3.5 Stem Seal: Adjustable,multiple ring Buna packing in compliance with AWWA C-507-87, Sec. 3.2 and C-504-87, Sec.3.7. Stem seals shall be replaceable without disassembling the valve and while the valve is under system operating pressure. 15D3.3.6 Fasteners: All exposed fasteners shall be 316 stainless steel. Coat threads with"Never Seize" or an approved equal before assembly. 15D3.4 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES: 15D3.4.1 Above Ground: Valves installed above ground shall have flanged ends conforming to ANSI A21.15 and AWWA C- 115. All valves whose centerline is 6 ft. or greater above the floor shall be equipped with a chainwheel actuator and galvanized steel chain. 15D3.4.2 Below Ground: Valves installed below ground shall be wrapped with polyethylene and have mechanical joint connections conforming to ANSI A21.11 and AWWA C-111. All direct buried valves shall be equipped with a valve box and stem extension consisting of 8" SDR 18 PVC pipe and a cast iron drop- in cap. The stem extension shall have a 2" operating nut extended to within 6" of finished grade. All valves shall have a geared actuator suitable for buried service with necessary stem seals and gaskets to prevent entry of water into housing. 15D3 Plug Valves Page 1 of 2 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 15D3.4.3 Valve Wrenches: When five or more buried valves are required provide two suitable tee wrenches. For above ground where handwheels or levers can not be used provide two wrench heads with suitable length of Schedule 40-pipe handle. All wrenches shall be painted as set out hereinafter. 15D3.5 PAINTING: 15D3.5.1 Valve Interior: Valve interior shall be coated with 4-6 mils of epoxy. 15D3.5.2 Valve Exterior: a. Above Ground Installation: See Section 9K. b. Under Ground Installation: Exterior of valve shall be coated by the manufacturer with a material suitable for underground service to protect against corrosion. 15D3.6 SUBMITTAL DATA: Before shipping, the Contractor shall submit six sets of detailed drawing, detailed specifications and installation instruction to the Engineer for approval. 15D3.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL: The manufacturer shall furnish to the Engineer four sets of printed instructions, including a parts list, as required to provide proper operation and maintenance of the plug valves. 15D3 Plug Valves Page 2 of 2 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL SECTION 15D - PROCESS VALVES 15D4[i] CHECK VALVES (SWING CHECK) 15D4.1 SCOPE: This specification shall govern for all work necessary to furnish and install the swing check valves as required to complete the project. This is a design specification as defined in Article TS-1 of the Technical Special Provisions. 15D4.2 GENERAL: This specification is for check valves less than 12 inches in diameter. The check valves shall be the swing check type and shall be designed for a minimum of 150 p.s.i. water working pressure service and shall be suitable for domestic water or wastewater service. The check valve shall have the ability to be installed either horizontally or vertically and shall be furnished with lever and weight. The check valve shall be in accordance with AWWA C508 and prevent the return of fluid through the valve upon pump shutoff. The check valve shall be Mueller Type A-2600-6-01 or approved equal. 15D4.3 CONSTRUCTION: 15D4.3.1 Materials Of Construction: The check valve shall have a heavy cast iron body with bronze clapper disc seated by a bronze clapper arm against a bronze seat ring. The clapper shall be secured to a stainless steel shaft which turns in the bronze bushings. All exposed fasteners shall be stainless steel. Coat threads with"Never Seize" or an approved equal before assembly. 15D4.4 PAINTING: See Section 9K-Painting. 15D4.5 SUBMITTAL DATA: Before shipping, the Contractor shall submit six (6) sets of detailed drawings, detailed specifications and installation instructions for the Engineer's review and approval. 15D4.6 SUITABILITY CERTIFICATION: As part of the submittal data required above,the Contractor shall submit a certification stating that the manufacturer's authorized representative for the valves furnished under this section has studied the Contract Documents (drawings and specifications), questioned the Contractor and/or the Engineer to determine the conditions affecting these valves and hereby certifies that they should be suitable for use on this project and should require no more than normal maintenance if not damaged or abused. 15D4.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL: The manufacturer shall furnish to the Engineer four sets of printed instructions, including a parts list, as required to provide proper operation and maintenance of the check valves. 15D4 Check Valves(Swing Check) Page I of 1 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 DIVISION 15- MECHANICAL SECTION 15D- PROCESS VALVES 15D5[i] CHECK VALVES (OIL CUSHION CHECK 15D5.1 SCOPE: This specification shall govern for all work necessary to furnish and install all the cushion swing check valves required to complete the project. This specification is a design specification as defined in Article TS-1 of the Technical Special Provisions. 15D5.2 GENERAL: Check valves furnished under this section shall be the oil control type(side mounted). 15D5.3 OIL CONTROLLED CHECK VALVES: The oil controlled swing check valve body shall be cast iron per AWWA C-508 with integral flanges (not Wafer) and have a centrifugally cast bronze body seat. The seat shall be locked in place with stainless lock screws and be field replaceable, without the use of special tools. The shaft shall be one (1) piece hi-strength Type 174PH stainless, extending through both sides of the valve body. For control open and three stage closing; side mounted hydraulic cylinders shall provide control opening and closing speeds for the prevention of surge and water hammer. The cylinders must have two (2) stages of control during the closing cycle and a third stage, by means of a timing valve, to permit instant closure of the disc from full open to any degree of closure on pump stop. Typically as follows: 1st stage: instant closure to any degree 2nd stage: stage variable slow closure towards final closure 3rd stage: stage variable closure to shut-off Each stage shall be infinitely, independently adjustable and the oil system self-contained and separate from the main line media. The valve shall control close, while flow reverses in the pipeline during normal pump shut-off or power failure in a time sequence to prevent water hammer. Each stage closure shall be field adjustable. The disc shall have a double clevice binge connected to a Ductile iron disc arm. The disc arm assembly shall be suspended from the stainless steel shaft. The disc seat shall be Buna-N(replaceable)to provide water tight shut-off. Materials shall be certified to the following ASTM Specifications: Body,cover,disc....................................................... Cast iron ASTM A-126, Class B Disc arm.................................................................... Ductile iron ASTM A-536 Body seat ring........................................................... Aluminum bronze ASTM A-148 Discseat.................................................................... Buna-N Dashpot cylinder....................................................... Steel Commercial Pivot shaft................................................................. Stainless steel T174PH 15D5.4 SUBMITTAL DATA: Before shipping, the Contractor shall submit 6 sets of detailed drawings, detailed specifications, installation instructions and maintenance instructions for the Engineer's review and approval. 15D5.5 FIELD SERVICE: The manufacturer's field service engineer shall check the installation, adjust the valves and be on hand for the initial startup of the system. The qualifications of the field service engineer are subject to the approval of the Engineer. 15D5.6 SUITABILITY CERTIFICATION: As part of the submittal data required above,the Contractor shall submit a certification stating that the manufacturer's authorized representative for the valves furnished under this section has studied the Contract Documents (drawings and specifications), questioned the Contractor and/or the Engineer to determine the conditions affecting these valves and hereby certifies that they should be suitable for use on this project and should require no more than normal maintenance if not damaged or abused. 15D5 Check Valves(Oil Cushion Check) Page 1 of 1 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 DIVISION 15- MECHANICAL SECTION 15D- PROCESS VALVES 15D11[3] SURGE RELIEF VALVES 15D11.1 SCOPE: This specification shall govern for all work necessary to furnish and install all surge relief valves required to complete the project. This specification is a performance specification as defined in Section 1D General Conditions, Subsection "Supplemental General Conditions", Art. SC-1 Definitions. 15D11.2 GENERAL: Surge relieve valves furnished under this section shall be an angle valve manufactured by Dezurick/APCO or approved equal. 15D11.3 ANGLE SURGE RELIEF VALVES: The angle surge relief valves shall be heavily constructed cast iron body and cover/spacer to withstand severe shock conditions. The body shape shall be 90° angle pattern to permit side or downward discharge. The cover/spacer shall provide an air gap between the surge valve and the hydraulic cylinder. The valve stem shall be connected to the hydraulic cylinder by means of a self- aligning universal connector to insure smooth positive opening, without binding, during shock opening of the valve. The hydraulic cylinder shall be removable from the valve,without dismantling or removing the valve from the line. Closing speed shall be externally adjustable by means of a color coded micrometer control valve. The valve disc shall be normally closed against the system operating pressure by means of a spring or springs, plus a hydro-pneumatic accumulator. When the system pressure exceeds the normal operating pressure by 10%, the angle surge relief valve shall open immediately to relieve the pressure surge, and close slowly as the system pressure returns to normal, by means of the hydraulic cylinder. The hydraulic cylinder shall be capped on both ends (totally enclosed) to prevent dirt or dust from fouling up the cylinder operation. The shut-off pressure shall be set at the factory,but additional adjustments can be made in the field by increasing or decreasing the pressure inside the hydro-pneumatic accumulator. All materials of construction shall be in writing to ASTM Specifications as follows: Description Material Specification Body&cover/spacer Cast iron ASTM A-48, Class 30 Body seat ring Aluminum bronze ASTM B-148 Disc seat Buna-N Disc Steel ASTM A-36 Heavy duty hydraulic cylinder Steel Commercial 15D11.4 PAINTING: See Section 9K Painting. 15D11.5 SUBMITTAL DATA: Before shipping,the Contractor shall submit six(6) sets of detailed drawings, detailed specifications, installation instructions and maintenance instructions for the Engineer's review and approval. 15D11.6 FIELD SERVICE: The manufacturer's field service engineer shall check the installation, adjust the valves and be on hand for the initial startup of the system. The qualifications of the field service engineer are subject to the approval of the Engineer. 15D11.7 SUITABILITY CERTIFICATION: As part of the submittal data required above,the Contractor shall submit a certification stating that the manufacturer's authorized representative for the valves furnished under this section has studied the Contract Documents (drawings and specifications), questioned the Contractor and/or the Engineer to 51311 Surge Relief Valves Page 1 of 2 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 determine the conditions affecting these valves and hereby certifies that they should be suitable for use on this project and should require no more than normal maintenance if not damaged or abused. 5D11 Surge Relief Valves Page 2 of 2 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 DIVISION 15- MECHANICAL SECTION 15D- PROCESS VALVES 15D30[i]MISCELLANEOUS GAUGES, COUPLINGS AND VALVES 15D30.1 SCOPE: This section covers all valves, except where specific requirements are stipulated in other sections. This is a design specification as defined in Article TS-1 of the Technical Special Provisions. 15D30.1.1 SUBMITTALS: Complete specifications, data, and catalog cuts or drawings covering the items furnished under this section shall be submitted in accordance with the submittals section. 15D30.2 PRODUCTS: 15D30.2.1 Pressure Gauges: Pressure gauges shall be provided as follows: a. Range: Shall be sized so it reads in middle with normal pressure expected. b. Case: 304 Series Stainless Steel Case and Removable Bezel Ring. c. Dial Size: 4"to 4-1/2" d. Window: Acrylic or Glass e. Socket:Brass f. Bourdon Tube: Brass g. Connections: 1/4"NPT standard. h. Mounting: Stem Mount,Lower Connected only. i. Movement:Brass or stainless steel j. Pointer:Black painted aluminum,zero adjustable from face of dial. k. Dial: White flnished aluminum with black numerals and graduations. 1. Accuracy:f 1%mid-range. Each gauge shall be provided with a snubber. 15D30.2.2 Steel Couplings: a. Where steel couplings are shown on the plans or as required to make piping connections they shall be, unless noted otherwise, a dressor"type" flexible coupling consisting of one cylindrical sleeve with conical inner surfaces at each end, two resilient, wedge-shaped, rubber gaskets, two ring- shaped followers and a set of rolled-thread bolts with heavy hex nuts. b. Coupling material as follows: 1. Sleeve: Carbon steel having a minimum yield of 30,000 psi 2. Follower: Ductile Iron ASTM A536 or carbon steel having a minimum yield of 30,000 psi 3. Gasket: Nitrile(Bona-N) 4. Bolts and Nuts: 304 stainless steel 5. Finish: Fusion bonded epoxy per AWWA C213 c. For installation on an existing pipe the contractor shall expose (if buried)and confirm the material type and outside diameter prior to ordering the coupling. d. Buried steel couplings shall be wrapped in 8 mil thick polyethylene before being backfilled. Polyethylene wrapping shall be lapped with adjacent piping wrap with a minimum 6"lap. e. Provide"long body" style sleeve when shown on the plans. f. Steel couplings for potable water systems shall meet NSF 61 requirements. g. Steel couplings shall be Smith Blair Style 411,Dresser Style 38 or Romac 501. 15D30 Misc. Gauges, Couplings and Valves Page 1 of 3 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 15D30.2.3 Flange Coupling Adapter: a. Where flange coupling adapters are shown on the plans or as required to make piping connections they shall be flexible coupling with joint restraint provided anchor studs. b. Coupling material as follows: 1. Body:Ductile Iron ASTM A536 2. Follower: Ductile Iron ASTM A536 3. Gasket: Nitrile(Bona-N) 4. T-Bolts: Ductile Iron 5. Studs: 304 Stainless Steel 6. Finish: Fusion bonded epoxy per AWWA C213 c. For installation on an existing pipe the contractor shall confirm the material type and outside diameter prior to ordering the coupling. e. Provide"long body" style sleeve when shown on the plans. f Flange coupling adapters for potable water systems shall meet NSF 61 requirements. g. Flange coupling adapters shall be Smith Blair Style,Dresser or Romac. 15D30.2.4 Ball Valves: a. Unless otherwise indicated or specified, all 2-1/2 inch and smaller shutoff valves shall be ball valves. b. Ball valves for air and water service in 2-1/2 inch size shall be ANSI Class 150 regular port valves with split, bolted steel or ductile iron body, hard chrome-plated carbon steel ball, reinforced Teflon seats, O-ring or adjustable chevron stem packing, a removable operating lever, and flanged ends. Flange diameter and drilling shall conform to ANSI/ASME B 16.5, Class 150. Valves shall be driptight in both directions and shall be Conbraco Industries "Apollo 88-209" or Balon Series F"ball valves. c. Three inch and larger ball valves for air and water service shall be ANSI Class 150 regular port valves with end entry carbon steel body, hard chrome-plated carbon steel ball, reinforced Teflon seats, Teflon upper and lower stem seal, Teflon body seal, a removable operating lever, and flanged ends. Flange diameter and drilling shall conform to ANSI/ASME B 16.5, Class 150. Valves shall be driptight in both directions and shall be Conbraco Industries "Apollo 88-100 Series",Neles-Jamesbury"Series 5000,Fig 5150-11-2200TT",or Powell Fig 4224T"ball valves. d. Ball valves 2-1/2 through 4 inches for welded steel piping systems shall be of three-piece design, with carbon steel body and end caps, nickel-plated or hard chrome-plated carbon steel ball and stem, Teflon seats and seals,buttwelding ends, and a removable operating lever. Buttwelding end ball valves shall be Contromatics"C-1133-BB-DL". 15D30.2.5 Extension Stems: a. Extension stems and stem guides shall be furnished and installed where specified,indicated on the drawings, or otherwise required for proper valve operation. Extension stems shall be of solid steel and shall be not smaller in diameter than the stem of the valve actuator shaft. Extension stems shall be connected to the valve actuator with a single Lovejoy "Type D" universal joint with grease-filled protective boot. All stem connections shall be pinned. b. At least two stem guides shall be furnished with each valve. Stem guides shall be of cast iron, bronze bushed, and adjustable in two directions. Stem guide spacing shall not exceed 100 times the stem diameter or 10 feet,whichever is smaller. The top stem guide shall be designed to carry the weight of the extension stem. The extension stem shall be provided with a collar pinned to the stem and bearing against the stem thrust guide. c. Extension stems shall be provided for buried valves where the valve actuator is 4 feet or deeper below finished grade. The extension stem shall extend to within 6 inches of the ground surface, shall be centered in the valve box using spacers,and shall be equipped with a wrench nut. 15D30 Misc. Gauges, Couplings and Valves Page 2 of 3 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 15D30.2.6 Floor Boxes: a. Openings through concrete slabs provided for key operation of valves shall be provided with a cast iron floor box complete with cover. The floor box shall be of the depth indicated on the drawings. Where the operating nut is in the slab,the stem shall have a guide to maintain the nut in the center of the box; where the nut is below the slab, the opening in the bottom of the box shall accommodate the operating key. Covers shall have cast thereon designation of the service for which the valve is used. b. Each floor box and cover shall be shop coated by dipping in asphalt varnish. 15D30.2.7 Valve Boxes: a. Each valve buried to a depth of 4 feet or less shall be provided with a slide type valve box. Valve boxes shall be cast iron, extension sleeve type, suitable for the depth of cover indicated on the drawings. Only one extension will be allowed with each slide type valve box. Valve boxes shall be not less than 5 inches in inside diameter, shall be at least 3/16 inch thick at any point,and shall be provided with suitable cast iron bases and covers. b. Each buried valve shall be provided with a valve box consisting of a cast iron cover and a 6 inch cast iron pipe section. The cover shall be Clay & Bailey "No 2193" or Tyler "Series 6890-A". The pipe shaft shall extend from the valve to 5 inches inside the valve box cover. Covers shall have cast thereon designation of the service for which the valve is used. c. All parts of valve boxes,bases,and covers shall be shop coated by dipping in asphalt varnish. d. Top sections and covers for valve boxes which are to be provided with position indicators shall be designed for proper installation of the position indicator and accessories. 15D30.3 CONSTRUCTION METHODS: 15D30.3.1 Installation: a. Each unit shall be leveled,plumbed,and aligned. Installation procedures shall be as recommended by the equipment manufacturer and as specified herein. b. Valves and valve boxes shall be set plumb. Each valve box shall be placed directly over the valve it serves, with the top of the box brought flush with the finished grade. After each valve box is placed in proper position,earthfill shall be placed and thoroughly tamped around the box. 15D30 Misc. Gauges, Couplings and Valves Page 3 of 3 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 SECTION 23 00 00 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 INTRODUCTION A. This Section 23 00 00 includes basic requirements, which are specifically applicable to all of Division 23. 1. The drawings and specifications (including but not limited to the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1) apply to work of this Section and to all of Division 23. In the event of conflict between any of the documents, Contractor shall submit written request for clarification to Engineer. Engineer's instructions in response to such requests shall be final. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. The terms below have the same meaning whether or not they are capitalized. Contractor shall be bound by all comments following definitions. 1. "Architect" (also sometime referred to herein as "Architect/Engineer") refers to the prime professional responsible to Owner for design of the Project. Although Architect may retain sub-consultants who may also be Architects or Engineers, the terms Architect and Architect/Engineer as used herein always refer to the prime professional and not to sub-consultants. 2. "Consultant" refers to the sub-consultant retained by Engineer for the design of Division 23 work. Consultant is Bath Engineering Corporation, Inc. 5656 S. Staples, Suite 110, Corpus Christi, Texas 78411. Phone 361/992-2284. Fax 361/992-2287. Consultant may sometimes be referred to as the "Mechanical Engineer". Nothing in Owner-Contractor Agreement, contract documents, specifications, or drawings shall create a contractual relationship between Consultant and Contractor. Neither Consultant's authority to act under the Contract Documents nor any decision made by Consultant in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority shall give rise to any duty or responsibility of Consultant to Contractor, any subcontractor, any supplier, or any other person or organization performing any of the work, or to any surety for any of them. Whenever in the Contract Documents the terms "as ordered", "as directed", "as required", "as allowed", "as approved", or terms of like effect or import are used, or the adjectives "reasonable", "suitable", "acceptable", "proper", or "satisfactory" or adjectives of like effect or import are used to describe a requirement, direction, review, or judgment of Consultant as to the work, it is intended that such requirement, direction, review or judgment will be solely to evaluate the work for compliance with the Contract Documents (unless there is a specific statement indicating otherwise). The use of any such term or adjective shall not be effective to assign to Consultant any duty or authority to supervise or direct the furnishing 23 00 00 -Basic Mechanical Requirements Page 1 of 7 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 or performance of the work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility contrary to the provisions of the Contract Documents. Consultant will not be responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, and Consultant will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Consultant will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Owner, Contractor, any subcontractor, any supplier, or of any other person or organization performing or furnishing any of the work. Although Consultant is not authorized to issue or award Change Orders, Consultant may offer advise, suggestions, and opinions. Contractor shall not rely on such advise, suggestions, and opinions unless directed in writing to do so by Engineer, and shall, in no event, make any claim against the Consultant for any such advise, suggestions, and opinions. 3. "Contractor" refers to the company that Owner selects to perform the work described hereunder. (These specifications frequently omit the name of the responsible party when describing work which is to be performed. In such cases, it shall be understood that Contractor is the responsible party.) Although Contractor may retain materialmen and subcontractors to provide or perform certain functions, Contractor is responsible to Owner for all Work. Contractor is solely responsible for project safety and for the execution of the construction work. To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Consultant and Consultant's employees from and against any and all claims, costs, losses and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) caused in whole or in part by the acts or omissions of Contractor or Contractor's officers, directors, partners, employees, subcontractors, and material men in the performance and furnishing of services on this Project. 4. "Mechanical Contractor" refers to the company that Contractor retains to install mechanical systems. Mechanical Contractor may sometimes be referred to a Plumbing Contractor, HVAC Contractor, or other similar terms. 5. "As-built Drawings " (sometimes referred to herein as "Record Documents ") refers to drawings maintained by Contractor on a daily basis during the construction period to record measured depths of buried items in relation to finish floor datum; measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements; measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work; field changes of dimension and detail; and details not on original Contract Drawings. Contractor shall make the As-built Drawings available for Engineer's review during the construction period. As the Project nears completion, Contractor shall request an electronic copy of the drawings from Consultant. Contractor shall then transfer all as-built notations to the electronic files, and add "As-Built" and Contractor's 23 00 00 -Basic Mechanical Requirements Page 2 of 7 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 name (both in bold letters) near the title block of each drawing. Contractor shall submit the As-built Drawings in both hard copy and electronic format to Engineer with final Application for Payment. 6. "Contract Documents" refers to drawings, specifications, contract, general and special provisions, and instructions to bidders. 7. "Drawings" refers to the drawings prepared by Engineer; not the record documents or shop drawings prepared by Contractor. 8. "Provide" (as applies to Contractor only) refers to the furnishing and installing of a Product, complete and ready for the intended use. As used in Division 23, all items which Contractor is to provide are to be installed by Contractor, and all items which Contractor is to furnish are to be provided by Contractor. 9. "Specifications" refers to the narrative instructions and descriptions prepared by Engineer. 10. "Product" (also referred to herein as "features") refers to material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems forming the Work. It does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying and erection of the Work. The term products also includes existing materials or components required for reuse. 11. "Submittal" refers to documents and objects submitted by Contractor to Engineer. It includes, but is not limited to product data, shop drawings, samples, written warranties, certifications, and notices. 12. "Product data" refers to manufacturer's standard drawings and descriptions of products. It often consists of catalogues, cut sheets, or brochures. 13. "Shop drawings" refers to drawings prepared by Contractor (or Contractor's subcontractors or materialmen) specifically for this Project. Shop drawings indicate the details of construction and/or fabrication of features of the project. 14. "Mechanical system" refers to all mechanical equipment and software including, but not limited to, plumbing fixtures, pipes, and ducts. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Contractor shall coordinate the Work under Division 23 with the Work under all other Division of the Specification. In the event of conflicts between the various divisions of the specifications and/or drawings, Contractor shall notify Engineer in writing and request instructions as to which takes precedence. B. The drawings and specifications are complementary and are to be read together as a unit. Notes, which appear on a drawing, may apply to Work, which is depicted on other drawings. Contractor shall carefully read all specifications and drawings before 23 00 00 -Basic Mechanical Requirements Page 3 of 7 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 commencing Work. Where specification sections refer to other sections, the intent is to provide complementary guidance to the reader, but not to infer that only the referenced sections apply to the Work. C. The drawings are not based on any particular brand(s) of equipment. Therefore, Contractor must take great care to select equipment that will fit in the space allotted on the drawings. Contractor shall select equipment that does fit or shall submit shop drawings showing adjustments to be made to the construction to provide adequate space and clearance. Such adjustments shall be at Contractor's expense. 1.4 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Except where specifically noted otherwise, Contractor may propose the use of equipment of any manufacture by notifying Engineer in writing that a substitution is desired by Contractor. Such notice shall identify the product by manufacturer's name and number, and shall include detailed drawings, dimensions, descriptions, and manufacturer's literature. Contractor must demonstrate to Engineer's satisfaction that the proposed substitution is equal to the specified product. Engineer's decision of approval or disapproval of a proposed substitution shall be final. Substitution must be Engineer pre-approved ten days before bid date. A complete submittal package shall be submitted for review. B. Products described in these Specifications establish a standard of required function, appearance, and quality that must be met by any proposed substitution. C. Owner accepts no responsibility for the performance of materials and services provided by Contractor. This statement applies to substituted products and to products specified by brand name and model number in these specifications. Contractor is solely responsible for selecting manufactures and subcontractors, coordinating the Work by and among them, and assuring that they perform in strict accordance with the requirements of these specifications. 1.5 REFERENCES A. All products, materials, Work, and techniques for the mechanical systems shall comply with the most rigid standards and recommendations of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA); the National Electric Code (NEC); the International Building Codes as modified and/or adapted by local authorities; the American Society of Heating Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Engineer (ASHRAE); the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors (SMACNA); the American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME); the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM); and the American National Standards Institute (ANSI). All materials and equipment for the electrical portion of the mechanical system shall bear the approval label of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). 23 00 00 -Basic Mechanical Requirements Page 4 of 7 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. General Submittal Topics: Submit under provisions of Division 1, except that two additional copies of each submittal under Division 23 are required. (For example, if Division 1 requires four copies of submittals, Contractor shall submit six copies of Division 23 submittals. Consultant will retain one of the extra copies. One of the extra copies will be returned to Contractor and is to be maintained in a properly cross references and well organized file at the site.) B. Shop drawings and product data shall be grouped to include complete submittals of related systems, products, and accessories in a single submittal package. Shop drawings and product data shall be submitted in three-ring binders with each product separated from the others by a tabbed divider page. If Contractor submits shop drawings and product data piece meal (i.e., not in a single binder), Consultant may reject submittals data and require that Contractor resubmit in proper form. C. Contractor shall revise and resubmit submittals to Consultant. If Consultant rejects submittals two times, Contractor must resubmit and install the exact product specified in the Contract Documents. Transmittal letter shall identify all changes made since previous submittal. D. Marking Submittals: Mark product data sheets to indicate model numbers, parts, dimensions and values which apply to the products being proposed. Do not use colored highlighter to draw attention to important information on product data sheets. Highlighter causes a lack of clarity when documents are duplicated. Instead, neatly circle or draw arrows to important information. E. Liability for proceeding without approved submittal: A complete submittal must be submitted prior to bid date for verification by Consultant. If Contractor place orders and/or proceeds with work prior to receipt of Engineer's approval of submittal data, such action shall be at Contractor's sole risk. In the event that submittal data is rejected by Engineer, Contractor shall cancel all related orders and replace all related Work at Contractor's sole expense. Any progress schedule impact caused by Contractor proceeding in advance of Engineer's approval of submittal data shall be for Contractor's account. 1.7 REGULATORY AND UTILITY REQUIREMENTS A. Contractor's work shall conform to the International Building Code, Fire Code, International Plumbing Code, Electrical Code, International Mechanical Code, International Energy Code, and all other laws, ordinances, and rules of the City of Cuero and the State of Texas. B. Contractor shall obtain permits and request inspections from the authorities having jurisdiction. 23 00 00 -Basic Mechanical Requirements Page 5 of 7 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 C. The drawings indicate possible points and methods of connection to utility services. Contractor is solely responsible for negotiating actual points and methods of connection to utility services. Contractor shall pay all utility company fees, including by way of reference but not exclusion, connection fees, frontage fees, deposits, and tap fees. 1.8 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Install products in locations shown on drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions. B. The drawings are diagrammatic; that is, not all features are depicted and those features which are depicted may not be accurately depicted in the correct location, to the correct scale, or in complete form. C. In the event of conflicts, differing site conditions, or other problems which preclude installing products as shown on drawings, Contractor shall prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of Work to meet Project conditions, including changes to Work specified in other Sections, and shall obtain written permission of Engineer before proceeding. D. Where features are indicated on more than one drawing (for example, the reflected ceiling plan appears on architectural, mechanical, and electrical drawings), Contractor shall refer all conflicts (if any) to Engineer for clarification prior to the commencement of any work by Contractor. If Contractor fails to notify Engineer of any such conflict prior to the commencement of work on the Project, Contractor shall not be compensated or extra work occasioned by the resolution of such conflicts. 1.9 WRITTEN DIRECTIVES A. Contractor's questions and comments are to be addressed to Engineer; however, as a matter of courtesy, Consultant may respond to informal questions and comments made by Contractor. If Consultant does so, neither Engineer nor Consultant shall be bound by such responses. Only written responses by the Engineer shall be binding. 1.10 NOISE AND VIBRATION A. At final completion of the Project, all products, equipment, and systems shall operate under all conditions of load without any sound or vibration which is objectionable in the opinion of the Consultant. Sound or vibration noticeable outside the space of a product will be considered objectionable. Vibration which, in the opinion of Consultant will impact on the life, warranty, or performance of a product is considered objectionable. Sound or vibration conditions considered objectionable by Consultant shall be corrected by Contractor at Contractor's expense. Vibration control shall be by means of vibration eliminators installed in the manner recommended by the manufacturer of the eliminators. 23 00 00 -Basic Mechanical Requirements Page 6 of 7 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 1.11 ACCESSIBILITY A. Contractor shall locate all equipment and products (specifically including but not limited to valves, traps, cleanouts, motors, and dampers) which require service, operation, observation, or maintenance in fully accessible positions. If required for better accessibility, any change(s) of location shall be submitted by Contractor to Engineer for review and approval before relocation is made. Contractor shall provide access panels for concealed valves, fire dampers, and other devices requiring service. Access panels in the surfaces of the premises, equipment, ductwork, and other surfaces, whether or not specifically shown on the drawings, shall be provided and installed by Contractor at no additional cost to Owner. Access panels shall be of a type and finish which, in the opinion of Architect, are aesthetically acceptable. 1.12 STARTUP A. Contractor shall demonstrate operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment to Owner's representative. Contractor shall train Owner's representative in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment. B. Contractor shall submit five copies of outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module. 1.13 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Contractor shall submit PDF copies of Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Manuals shall include manufacturers' recommended operation and maintenance procedures. 1.14 WARRANTY A. Contractor shall warrant labor and material to be free from defects for a period of one- year beginning with the date of Substantial Completion. (If a longer warranty period is required by other provisions of these Specifications, the longer period shall prevail.) Contractor shall organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. Bind warranties in a three-ring binder and must be included in the submittal package for review. The must also provide warranty certificates to owner. The warranty certificate must be part of the operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - Not Used. PART 3 - EXECUTION- Not Used. END OF SECTION 23 00 00 -Basic Mechanical Requirements Page 7 of 7 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 SECTION 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Pipe, duct, and equipment hangers, supports, and associated anchors. B. Sleeves and seals. C. Flashing and sealing equipment, pipe penetrations through building surfaces, and pipe stacks. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM B633 - Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel. B. ASTM A123 - Specification for Zinc (Hot-Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strip C. ASTM A653 - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process D. ASTM A1011 — Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability (Formerly ASTMA570) E. MSS SP58 - Manufacturers Standardization Society: Pipe Hangers and Supports- Materials, Design, and Manufacture F. MSS SP69 - Manufacturers Standardization Society: Pipe Hangers and Supports- Selection and Application G. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hangers 1. Un-insulated pipes 2 inch and smaller: Adjustable steel swivel ring (band type) hanger. 23 05 29 —Hangers and Supports Page 1 of 5 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 2. Un-insulated pipes 2 '/z inch and larger: Adjustable steel clevis hanger. B. Multiple or trapeze hanger 1. Trapeze hangers shall be constructed from 12 gauge roll formed ASTM A 10 11 SS Grade 33 structural steel channel, 1-5/8 inch by 1-5/8 inch minimum. 2. Mount pipes to trapeze with 2 piece pipe straps sized for outside diameter of pipe. C. Wall Supports 1. Pipes 4 inch and smaller: 12 gauge roll formed ASTM A1011 SS Grade 33 structural steel channel, 1-5/8 inch by 1-5/8 inch minimum bolted to wall with pipe attached to steel channel with 2 piece pipe straps. D. Floor Supports 1. Pipes 4 inch and smaller: 12 gauge roll formed ASTM A1011 SS Grade 33 structural steel channel, 1-5/8 inch by 1-5/8 inch minimum bolted to floor with pipe attached to steel channel with 2 piece pipe straps. E. Vertical Supports 1. Pipes 4 inch and smaller: 12 gauge roll formed ASTM A1011 SS Grade 33 structural steel channel, 1-5/8 inch by 1-5/8 inch minimum bolted to wall with pipe attached to steel channel with 2 piece pipe straps. F. Plastic Pipe Supports 1. V-bottom clevis hanger with galvanized 18-gauge continuous support channel to form a continuous support system for plastic pipe or flexible tubing. G. Copper Tubing Supports 1. Adjustable steel swivel ring (band type) hanger. 2. For vertical runs use 12 gauge roll formed ASTM A1011 SS Grade 33 structural steel channel, 1-5/8 inch by 1-5/8 inch minimum bolted to wall with pipe attached to steel channel with 2 piece epoxy painted pipe straps. 3. Use trapeze hangers when multiple pipe runs are in close proximity to each other. 4. Hangers shall be sized to fit copper tubing outside diameters. 23 05 29 —Hangers and Supports Page 2 of 5 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 2.2 DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hang and support ductwork per SMACNA 1995, ch.4. B. Do not hang ductwork from piping or other ducts or equipment. C. Provide at least two supports for each length of duct. Install supports on both sides of duct turns, branch fittings and transitions. D. Support rectangular duct sizes to 36 inches by trapeze hangers. E. Use angle iron "V" construction supports or similarly rigid construction for vertical ducting which needs lateral support. F. Anchor duct and supports to prevent swaying. After system start-up replace or otherwise alleviate condition of any duct support element which vibrates. G. Where ductwork system contains heavy equipment, hang equipment independently of the ductwork. 2.3 HANGER ROD S A. Steel hanger rods: Threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded. 2.4 INSERTS A. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Design hangers without disengagement of supported pipe. 2.6 FINISH A. Stainless steel with S.S. anchors and fasteners. 23 05 29 —Hangers and Supports Page 3 of 5 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Support horizontal piping as follows: Pipe Size Max Hanger Spacing Hanger Rod Diameter 1/2 to 1-1/4" 6'-6" 3/8" 1-1/2" 9'-0" 3/8" 2" 101-01, 3/8" 2-1/2" 10'-0" 1/2" 3" 12'-0" 1/2" 3-1/2" 13'-0" 1/2" 4" 14'-0" 5/8" PVC all sizes 5'-0" 3/8" B. Support horizontal copper tubing as follows: Pipe Size Max Hanger Spacing Hanger Rod Diameter 1/2 to 3/4" 5'-0" 3/8" F 6'-0" 3/8" 1-1/4" 7'-0" 3/8" 1-1/2" 8'-0" 3/8" 2" 8'-0" 3/8" 2-1/2" 9'-0" 1/2" 3" 10'-0" 1/2" C. Install hangers to provide minimum '/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. D. Place a hanger within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow. E. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. F. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. G. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. 23 05 29 —Hangers and Supports Page 4 of 5 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 H. Provide means of preventing dissimilar metal contact such as plastic coated hangers, copper colored epoxy paint, or non adhesive isolation tape. Galvanized felt isolators sized for copper tubing may also be used. END OF SECTION 23 05 29 —Hangers and Supports Page 5 of 5 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 SECTION 23 05 93 TESTING,ADJUSTING AND BALANCING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of air systems. B. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems. 1.02 REFERENCES AABC - National Standards for Field Measurement and Instrumentation, Total System Balance. ASHRAE- 1984 Systems Handbook: Chapter 37, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing. NEBB - Procedural Standards for Testing, Balancing and Adjusting of Environmental Systems. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Provide three copies of final report in letter size, 3-ring binder manuals, complete with index page and indexing tabs, with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduced drawings with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets. Indicate thermostat and sensor locations and zone boundaries on drawings. The report shall indicate all initial set points for each mode of operation. The report shall indicate all test pressures, temperatures, volumes, flow rates, and other similar parameters. 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS A. All work under this section of the specification shall be performed by or under the direct supervision of the Test and Balance Contractor. B. The Test and Balance Contractor must be certified by AABC, certified by NEBB, or under direct supervision of mechanical engineer with Texas registration as professional engineer. C. Total system balance shall be performed in accordance with AABC or NEBB National Standards for field measurement and instrumentation, system balance. 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Page 1 of 4 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 1.05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Sequence work to commence after completion of all systems installation and schedule completion of work before Substantial Completion of Project. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 BALANCING AND ADJUSTING MATERIALS A. Test and Balance Contractor shall provide all materials and accessories which are required to balance and adjust systems. By way of description, but not limitation, materials and accessories include filters, sheaves, shims, lubricants, and belts. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Before commencing work, verify that all systems are complete and operable. Do not start testing and/or balancing until all equipment is complete and operable. Ensure the following: B. Equipment is operable and in a safe and normal condition. (Do not start testing and/or balancing until all equipment is complete and operable.) C. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable. D. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment. E. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to final filters. F. Duct systems are clean of debris. G. Correct fan rotation. H. Air outlets are installed and connected. I. Duct system leakage has been minimized. J. Test and Balance Contractor shall make immediate written report to both Contractor and Architect noting any defects or deficiencies noted during performance of services. K. Promptly report abnormal conditions in mechanical systems or conditions which prevent system balance. 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Page 2 of 4 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. Make instruments available to Architect and Engineer to facilitate spot checks during testing. B. Provide additional balancing devices and materials as required. C. Carefully remove ceiling tiles so as to avoid damage. Replace when testing, adjusting, and balancing work is completed. If ceiling tiles are damaged or soiled, they shall be replaced by Contractor at his own expense. 3.03 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Adjust air handling systems to plus or minus 5 percent for supply systems and plus or minus 10 percent for return from figures indicated. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work to obtain design conditions. Modify factory settings and install new sheaves, shims, and other accessories as necessary; but limit adjustments to those recommended and allowed by manufacturer. Test and Balance Contractor shall provide all sheaves, shims, and other accessories at no additional cost to Owner. Note all adjustment in report. B. Recorded data shall represent actually measured or observed condition. C. Permanently mark settings of dampers and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops. D. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such disruption has been rectified. E. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings. F. At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck points or areas as selected and witnessed by the Owner. 3.05 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return, and exhaust air quantities at site altitude. B. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of duct. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets. 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Page 3 of 4 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 C. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts and noise. D. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extent that adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devices such as dampers and splitters. E. Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet or inlet. F. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units under full load, including filter and coil pressure drops, and total pressure across the fan. 3.06 REPORT FORMS A. Submit reports on AABC National Standards for Total System Balance forms. Similar forms in NEBB (National Environmental Balancing Bureau)format will be accepted. B. Forms shall include the following information: C. Title page: Company name, company address, company telephone number, project name, project location, project architect, architect's Division 23 consultant, project contractor, project altitude. D. Instrument list: Instrument, manufacturer, model, serial number, range, calibration date. E. Air moving equipment: Location, manufacturer, model, air flow, specified and actual, return air flow, specified and actual, outside air flow, specified and actual, total static pressure (total external), specified and actual, inlet pressure, discharge pressure, fan rpm, set points in occupied mode. F. Return air/outside air data: Identification/location., design air now, actual air flow, design return air flow, actual return air flow, return air temperature, outside air temperature, actual mixed air temperature. G. Electric motors: Manufacturer, hp/bhp, phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load, Rpm, service factor, starter size, rating, heater elements. H. Air distribution test sheet: Air terminal number, room number/location, terminal type, terminal size, area factor, design velocity, design air flow, test (final) velocity, test (final) air flow, percent of design air flow, set points in occupied mode. END OF SECTION 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Page 4 of 4 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 SECTION 23 07 00 HVAC INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL. 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Piping insulation. B. Duct Liner. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM C518 - Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. B. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. C. ASTM E96 -Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. D. UL 723 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. E. ASTM C553 -Mineral Fiber Blanket and Felt Insulation. F. SMACNA-HVAC Duct Construction Standards -Metal and Flexible. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide product description, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate procedures which ensure acceptable workmanship and installation standards will be achieved. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Materials: Flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 or less in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255, or UL 723. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site. Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness. Store insulation in original wrapping and protect from weather and 23 07 00 -HVAC Insulation Page 1 of 3 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 construction traffic. Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives, mastics, and insulation cements. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours. B. Contractor shall provide asbestos-free insulation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS. 2.01 CELLULAR FOAM FOR PIPING A. Armaflex Pipe Insulation or equal, flexible elastomeric thermal insulation, black in color, supplied as unslit tubing,. Expanded closed-cell structure. 1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 2. Water Vapor Transmission: 0.10 3. Flame-spread rating: 25 or less 4. Smoke-developed rating: 50 or less 2.02 GLASS FIBER DUCT LINER, FLEXIBLE A. Manufacturers: 1. Manville Linacoustic or equal. B. Insulation: ASTM C1071; flexible, noncombustible blanket. 1. 'K' value : ASTM C518, 0.13 at 75 degrees F. 2. Maximum service temperature: 250 degrees F. 3. Maximum Velocity on Coated Air Side: 5,000 ft/min. 4. Liner Thickness: See Section 3.05 Ductwork Insulation Schedule. 5. Adhesive: Waterproof fire-retardant type. 6. Liner Density: 1.5 lb/cu ft. C. Fasteners: Galvanized steel, impact applied or welded with integral press on head. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry. 3.02 PIPING INSULATION INSTALLATION 23 07 00 -HVAC Insulation Page 2 of 3 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. On exposed piping, locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. C. Insulated all pipes: 1. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with like material and thickness as adjacent pipe. 2. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations. 3. Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, and expansion joints. D. Finish insulation at through supports, protrusions, and interruptions. 3.03 DUCTWORK INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Duct dimensions shown on drawings are free area inside insulation. Exterior envelope dimensions are larger to allow for insulation on each side. For example, if Drawing shows duct dimension of 12 x 20 on duct which is to have 1 inch of insulation, outside envelope dimension would be 14 x 22. B. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Insulated all ductwork conveying air(except for exhaust systems): 1. Provide insulation with vapor barrier jackets. Finish with tape and vapor barrier jacket. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations. 2. Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible connections, and expansion joints. 3.04 CELLULAR FOAM INSULATION THICKNESS SCHEDULE PIPING SYSTEMS PIPE SIZE THICKNESS Condensate Drains all sizes 3/4" Refrigerant Suction Line all sizes 3/4" 3.05 DUCTWORK INSULATION SCHEDULE SUPPLY THICKNESS TYPE LOCATION DUCTWORK Cooling and 2" Interior ductlining w/glass fiber duct Interior Heating liner to dampen noise generation. Cooling and 2" Interior ductlining w/glass fiber duct Exterior Heating liner to dampen noise generation. END OF SECTION 23 07 00 -HVAC Insulation Page 3 of 3 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 SECTION 23 11 13 DIESEL FUEL SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES A. All publications listed in the text form a part of this specification to extent referenced. Publications are referred to within the text by basic designation only. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following: 1. Product Data: Aboveground storage tank, Aboveground storage tank Accessories, Pipe and fittings, Valves, miscellaneous equipment, and leak detection monitoring system. 2. Test Reports: Pneumatic test, Leak detection monitoring system test, Operational test 3. Certificates: Permits, Personnel license/certification 4. Operation and Maintenance Data: Leak detection monitoring system. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standard Products: Material and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products. Materials shall be resistant to diesel fuel and gasoline. Completed installation shall conform to applicable requirements of NFPA 30 and NFPA 30A. B. Permitting: Contractor shall obtain necessary permits in conjunction with installation of petroleum piping as may be required by federal, state, or local authority. Submit copy of permits to the Contracting Officer. C. Licensed Personnel: Personnel required to install petroleum piping shall be licensed/certified by the state when the state requires licensed installers. 23 11 13 —Diesel Fueling Systems Page 1 of 7 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 D. Safety: Ensure employees are trained in requirements of 29 CFR 1910.1200 and understand information contained in material safety data sheets for their protection against toxic and hazardous chemical effects. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT CARRIER PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Steel Pipe: Black carbon steel, ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade A or B, or API SPEC 5L, seamless or electric-weld, Grade A or B, Schedule 40. B. Joint Compound: Joint compound for piping system shall be resistant to water and be suitable for use with fuel containing 40 percent aromatics. C. Flange Gaskets: Provide non-asbestos compressed material in accordance with ASME B16.21, 1/16 inch thickness, full face or self-centering flat ring type. Gaskets shall contain aramid fibers bonded with styrene butadiene rubber (SBR) or nitrite butadiene rubber(NBR). NBR binder shall be used for hydrocarbon service. D. Flexible Connectors: Flexible metal hose, corrugated type with braided wire sheath covering, close-pitch annular corrugations, rated for working pressure of at least 125 psig, 12 inch minimum live length, threaded end connections and shall conform to requirements of UL 567. Metal for hose and braided wire sheath shall be ANSI 300 series stainless steel. Listed for above ground storage tank installation 2.2 VALVES A. Valves shall be Class 150. Gate valves shall be wedge disc type, union bonnet, inside screw, rising stem, and shall have threaded ends with an "O"-ring seal. Check valves shall be synthetic disc, swing check type with screwed ends. Valve body shall be 23 11 13 —Diesel Fueling Systems Page 2 of 7 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 bronze. Provide UL listed emergency shut-off valve in accordance with NFPA 30 with stainless steel main spring, fusible link, and test port. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT A. Emergency Shut-Off Valves. Emergency shut-off valves shall be OPW IOBP Series or approved equal. B. Flexible Connectors. Flexible connectors shall be Titeflex, Containment Technologies, Total Containment or approved equal. 2.4 ABOVEGROUND STORAGE TANK AND ACCESSORIES. A. Acceptable Manufacturers: ConVault, or Approved Equal. B. Provide aboveground concrete vaulted fuel storage tank. Tank shall be factory- fabricated, have factory installed insulation, and be factory tested for capacity. C. The aboveground vaulted tank shall be steel tank contained in a vault that rests a minimum of I-1/2 inches above the finished grade. The entire encased tank assembly shall be UL listed in accordance with Standard 2085 (Vehicle Impact Protection and Projectile Resistance), SwR195-03, or approved equal. Tank shall be provided with means to anchor to slab. D. The steel tank shall be manufactured and listed in accordance with UL Standard 142 and have a minimum 3/16 inch thick ASTM A-36 steel shell. Tanks shall be rectangular or as approved by the Owner Representative. The tank shall be pressure tested at 5 pounds per square inch (psi) in accordance with UL Standard 142 and shall be coated with rust resistant red oxide primer. The tank shall be internally braced as required, and the maximum deflection shall not exceed 0.1 inches at an internal pressure of 5.0 pounds per square inch gauge (psig). Tanks shall be fabricated such that the maximum deflection including fabrication tolerances of the primary and secondary containment shall not exceed five percent of the greatest dimension of any face. E. Each tank compartment shall have threaded openings including four inch fill nipple, two inch suction nipple, two inch minimum gauge nipple, two inch vent nipple, six inch emergency vent nipple, and four inch spare nipple with cap. 23 11 13 —Diesel Fueling Systems Page 3 of 7 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 F. Vault shall be tested in accordance with UL 2085 SwRI 95-03 or approved equal. The vault shall allow monitoring of the annulus between primary and secondary containment. Vault shall be built to applicable ACI standards including but not limited to reinforcement placement and bending, concrete placement, vibration and quality assurance procedures. G. Tank shall be equipped with integral overfill containment with a minimum seven gallon capacity. The integral overfill containment device will include a 3/4 inch diameter drain valve, a lockable hinged cover, a four inch diameter fill fitting, a four inch diameter spare fitting and a two inch diameter sticking port. H. Metal exterior of vault components shall be sand-blasted to a minimum SSPC-SP6 and primed with an organic zinc primer a minimum three (3) mils dry film thickness (DFT), intermediate coat shall be fuel resistant epoxy a minimum of 0.4 mils DFT and top coated with aliphatic polyurethane a minimum of 1.5 mils DFT. I. Exterior concrete surface shall be cleaned to remove all loose material and all oil and grease from all voids. In addition, all voids in exterior concrete surface shall be repaired in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Apply initial coat around all comers, edges of supports, pipe risers, etc. Apply two additional coats to entire exterior concrete surface. Paint shall be aliphatic moisture cured urethane or approved equal with a minimum of 3.0 to 5.0 mils DFT for each coat. Final coat shall be uniform in appearance. Apply and cure paint in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. J. Grounding rod and cables shall be provided for tank. Contractor shall submit grounding system data for review. K. The contractor shall provide two gauge sticks with 1/8 inch measurement gradations and strapping chart with 1/8 inch volume measurements for new tank installation site. Strapping charts shall reflect the specific maximum volume of the split tank product compartment. Contractor shall supply two tubes of water indicator paste and two tubes of gasoline gauging paste for AST installation or system reconfiguration site. L. Furnish and install emergency vent as required by API 2000, Venting Atmospheric and Low-Pressure Storage Tank. M. Tank compartments shall have individual two inch black pipe product vent lines extending a minimum 12 feet above tank. 23 11 13 —Diesel Fueling Systems Page 4 of 7 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 N. Gate Valves. Gate valves shall be suitable for petroleum products. Three inch and smaller valves used in fuel lines shall have threaded ends and be installed per approved shop drawings. Valve components shall be rated for gasoline, diesel and gasoline/methanol. Packing shall be non-asbestos graphite/aramid fiber. O. Solenoid Valves. Solenoid valves shall be suitable for petroleum products and shall be Morrison Figure 710, ASCO, Magnatrol, Snaptite or approved equal. P. Expansion Relief Valves. Expansion relief valves shall be suitable for petroleum products and shall be Morrison Figure 79 Dl, Red Jacket, Universal, Clay and Bailey or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION DISPENSER A. Contractor shall furnish and install all new electrical components including but not limited to conductors, conduit, flexible conduit, fittings, unions, junction boxes, wireways, seal fittings/seal-offs, emergency stops, normally closed solenoid valves, etc. between day tanks and the selected power source. B. Emergency stops shall be clearly identified and easily accessible and be installed in a remote location more than 20 feet but less than 100 feet from the tank C. Install all valves in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. D. All installations are to be square, plumb, and neatly arranged. E. Support valves so that if valve is removed, adjacent piping will not be improperly supported. 3.2 TANK INSTALLATION A. Install as shown on Contract Drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Level tanks as necessary with non-metallic, non-shrink grout and steel shims. Grouting shall be continuous and chamfered at 45 degrees. 23 11 13 —Diesel Fueling Systems Page 5 of 7 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 C. Each tank compartment shall supply fuel to the dispenser. Do not manifold tank fill, vent, or suction lines. D. Tank Tightness Testing. 1. Contractor shall notify the Owner Representative in writing a minimum of seven calendar days prior to scheduling the installation testing. Completed installation testing shall be identified as a milestone on the Contractor's time line submitted at the pre-construction conference. 2. Air testing of new piping, fittings, and valves shall be conducted in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. All product piping shall be tested before being placed in service. Air testing of all system piping shall be done with compressed air at 150 percent of the maximum piping operating pressure, or a minimum of 50 pounds per square inch gauge (psig), for at least one hour, and shall be witnessed by the Owner Representative. 3. After successful air testing of the completed primary piping system, the secondary containment piping, if applicable, shall be air tested in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications and the above procedures. 4. Piping not passing the air test shall be repaired in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications and retested. In the event the piping will not pass the air test it shall be removed from the site by the Contractor and replaced at Contractor's expense. 5. Upon completion of all construction activities and prior to placing the aboveground storage tank system into operation, the Contractor shall conduct a pressure test on all piping. The Contractor shall be required to submit a report summarizing the test results to the Owner Representative. 6. The Contractor shall include all reports summarizing the piping tests for both air and pressure test in the Operations and Maintenance manuals. 3.3 ELECTRICAL WORK A. Provide switches and devices required for controlling electrical equipment. Wiring, equipment, and fittings shall be explosion-proof in conformance with applicable requirements of UL 674, UL 698, and UL 886 for Class I, Division 1, Group C and D 23 11 13 —Diesel Fueling Systems Page 6 of 7 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 hazardous locations. Submit proof of such conformance. Electrical installations shall conform to requirements of NFPA 70. 3.4 FLUSHING AND OPERATIONAL TEST A. Install temporary piping or hose equipped with a strainer having not less than 40-mesh screen between supply pipe and tank fill connection on tank from which fuel is being pumped. Furnish temporary pump for flushing. Flush each system with same type of fuel intended for use in system until out-flowing fuel is "clean" and "bright": Clean means absence of sediment or emulsion; bright refers to fluorescent appearance of fuel that has no cloud or haze. Furnish calibrated instruments and equipment, as well as the fuel, required to clean and flush each system and to conduct tests. Upon completion of tests replace filters. 3.5 LEAK DETECTION MONITORING SYSTEM TEST A. Activate leak monitoring system and test in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION 23 11 13 —Diesel Fueling Systems Page 7 of 7 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 SECTION 23 3100 DUCTWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Scope of Work: A. Work under this section includes: 1. Ductwork materials, construction and fabrication. 2. Low pressure ductwork. 3. Duct test holes. 4. Duct sealing, inspection and leak testing. 5. Painting. 1.2 Quality Assurance A. SMACNA 1995: Except as otherwise noted, fabricate, reinforce, support, join and install ductwork, access doors, dampers and accessories per SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Second Addition, 1995, with Addendum No. 1 B. NFPA 90A- Installation of Ventilation and Air Conditioning Systems, 1999 Edition. C. SMACNA 1985: SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual, 1985. D. ACGIH: Industrial Ventilation - A Manual of Recommended Practice, 20th edition, American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists. E. SMACNA Industrial Duct Construction Standard. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Non-combustible or conforming to requirements for Class 1 air duct materials, or LJL 181. B. Steel Ducts: galvanized steel sheet, lock-forming quality, having zinc coating of 1.25 oz per sq ft for each side in conformance with ASTM A90. C. Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws. 23 31 00 -Ductwork Page 1 of 4 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 D. Sealant: Non-hardening, water resistant, fire resistive, compatible with mating materials; liquid used alone or with tape, or heavy mastic. 2.2 LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK A. All interior ducts and/or return plenums to be internally lined with 1" duct liner as specified in Section 15260 Mechanical Insulation. B. All exterior ducts and/or return plenums to be internally lined with 2" duct liner as specified in Section 15260 Mechanical Insulation. C. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards and ASHRAE handbooks, except as indicated. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated. D. Size round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE table of equivalent rectangular and round ducts. No variation of duct configuration or sizes permitted except by written permission. E. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide turning vanes. Where acoustical lining is indicated, provide turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation. F. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible. Divergence upstream of equipment shall not exceed 30 degrees; convergence downstream shall not exceed 45 degrees. G. Provide easements where low pressure ductwork conflicts with piping and structure. Where easements exceed 10 percent duct area, split into two ducts maintaining original duct area. H. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands. I. Use crimp joints with or without bead for joining round duct sizes 8 inch and smaller with crimp in direction of air flow. J. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports. 2.3 DUCT TEST HOLES A. Provide permanent, factory fabricated duct test holes, with air tight flanged fittings and screw cap where indicated on drawings. Provide extended neck fittings to clear insulation. Manufacturers: Ventlock Model 699 23 31 00 -Ductwork Page 2 of 4 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DUCTWORK INSTALLATION A. Provide necessary offsets, transitions and streamliners to avoid interference with the building construction, piping, or equipment. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities. B. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers. Provide pilot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring. C. Repair damaged galvanized surfaces with zinc rich paint. D. Enclose dampers located behind architectural intake or exhaust louvers in a sheet metal collar and seal to building construction. E. Set plenum doors 6" to 12" above floor. Arrange door swings so that fan static pressure holds door in closed position. F. Provide temporary closures on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system. G. Provide straight runs of ductwork at equipment, fans, coils, air terminal units, and humidifiers per manufacturer's recommendations. H. Provide flexible connector where ductwork connects to fans, air handling units and other rotating equipment and where indicated on drawings. I. Provide fire and smoke dampers at locations where ducts and outlets pass through fire rated components, where required by code, and where required by authorities having jurisdiction. Install with required perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct connections, corrosion resistant springs, bearings, bushings and hinges. 3.2 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS A. Install between sheet metal work and vibrating equipment and where ducts cross building expansion joints. Install loosely without tension at any point and free of wrinkles caused by misalignment or fan reaction. Seal end with caulk. B. Check connections during operation for leaks and binding. 3.3 DUCT ACCESS HOLES A. Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes. 23 31 00 -Ductwork Page 3 of 4 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 3.4 DUCTWORK SEALING, INSPECTING AND LEAKAGE TESTING A. Visually inspect all ductwork: Place fan system in operation, or pressurize ductwork with portable fan. Inspect ductwork for audible leaks, and leaks perceptible to hand 2" from duct. Reseal all perceptible leaks. END OF SECTION 23 31 00 -Ductwork Page 4 of 4 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 SECTION 23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1. 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Volume dampers. 2. Turning vanes. 3. Duct-mounting access doors. 4. Flexible connectors. 5. Flexible ducts. 6. Duct accessory hardware. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Volume dampers. 2. Turning vanes. 3. Duct-mounting access doors. 4. Flexible connectors. 5. Flexible ducts. B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Special fittings. 2. Manual-volume damper installations. 3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and ceiling-mounting items. Show ceiling-mounting access panels and access doors required for access to duct accessories. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 23 33 00 —Air Duct Accessories Page 1 of 8 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and NFPA 9013, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems." 1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise indicated. B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and having [G60 (Z180)] [G90 (Z275)] coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed to view. C. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 480/A 480M. D. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy 3003, temper H14; with mill finish for concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts. E. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy 6063, temper T6. F. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts. 23 33 00 —Air Duct Accessories Page 2 of 8 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 G. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches (900 mm) or less; 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches (900 mm). 2.3 VOLUME DAMPERS A. Available manufacturers: 1. Air Balance, Inc. 2. American Warming and Ventilating. 3. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 4. McGill AirFlow Corporation. 5. METALAIRE, Inc. 6. Nailor Industries Inc. 7. Penn Ventilation Company, Inc. 8. Ruskin Company. 9. Vent Products Company, Inc. B. General Description: Factory fabricated, with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen damper blades for stability. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed position without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal duct consistent with pressure class. 1. Pressure Classes of 3-Inch wg (750 Pa) or Higher: End bearings or other seals for ducts with axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. C. Standard Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single-blade, parallel- or opposed-blade design as indicated, standard leakage rating and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 1. Steel Frames: Hat-shaped, galvanized sheet steel channels, minimum of 0.064 inch (1.62 mm) thick, with mitered and welded corners; frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts. 2. Roll-Formed Steel Blades: 0.064-inch- (1.62-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel. 3. Aluminum Frames: Hat-shaped, 0.10-inch- (2.5-mm-) thick, aluminum sheet channels; frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls; and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts. 4. Roll-Formed Aluminum Blades: 0.10-inch- (2.5-mm-)thick aluminum sheet. 5. Extruded-Aluminum Blades: 0.050-inch- (1.2-mm-)thick extruded aluminum. 6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. 7. Bearings: Oil-impregnated bronze. 8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum. 9. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel. 23 33 00 —Air Duct Accessories Page 3 of 8 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 D. Jackshaft: 1-inch- (25-mm-) diameter, galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe- bearing assembly mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple- damper assemblies. 1. Length and Number of Mountings: Appropriate to connect linkage of each damper in multiple-damper assembly. E. Damper Hardware: Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch- (2.4-mm-) thick zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch (19-mm) hexagon locking nut. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting. 2.10 TURNING VANES A. Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for vanes and vane runners. Vane runners shall automatically align vanes. B. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) wide, single-vane, curved blades of galvanized sheet steel set 3/4 inch (19 mm) o.c.; support with bars perpendicular to blades set 2 inches (50 mm) o.c.; and set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting. 1. Available manufacturers: a. Ductmate Industries, Inc. b. Duro Dyne Corp. C. METALAIRE, Inc. d. Ward Industries, Inc. C. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and fibrous-glass fill. 2.11 DUCT-MOUNTING ACCESS DOORS A. General Description: Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class. B. Door: Double wall, duct mounting, and rectangular; fabricated of galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. Include vision panel where indicated. Include 1-by-1-inch (25-by-25-mm) butt or piano hinge and cam latches. 1. Available manufacturers: a. American Warming and Ventilating. b. CESCO Products. C. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 23 33 00 —Air Duct Accessories Page 4 of 8 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 d. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. e. Greenheck. f. McGill AirFlow Corporation. g. Nailor Industries Inc. h. Ventfabrics, Inc. i. Ward Industries, Inc. 2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets. 3. Provide number of hinges and locks as follows: a. Less Than 12 Inches (300 mm) Square: Secure with two sash locks. b. Up to 18 Inches (450 mm) Square: Two hinges and two sash locks. C. Up to 24 by 48 Inches (600 by 1200 mm): Three hinges and two compression latches[with outside and inside handles]. d. Sizes 24 by 48 Inches (600 by 1200 mm) and Larger: One additional hinge. C. Door: Double wall, duct mounting, and round; fabricated of galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and 1-inch (25-mm)thickness. Include cam latches. 1. Manufacturers: a. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. b. As approved by Engineer on Record. 2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with spin-in notched frame. 2.12 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Duro Dyne Corp. 2. Ventfabrics, Inc. 3. Ward Industries, Inc. 4. As approved by Engineer on Record. B. General Description: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives complying with UL 181, Class 1. C. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches (89 mm) wide attached to two strips of 2-3/4-inch- (70-mm-) wide, 0.028-inch- (0.7-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch- (0.8-mm-) thick aluminum sheets. Select metal compatible with ducts. D. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof, synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone. 1. Minimum Weight: 24 oz./sq. yd. (810 g/sq. m). 23 33 00 —Air Duct Accessories Page 5 of 8 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 2. Tensile Strength: 530 lbf/inch (93 N/mm) in the warp and 440 lbf/inch (77 N/mm)in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 50 to plus 250 deg F (Minus 45 to plus 121 deg Q. 2.13 FLEXIBLE DUCTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 3. Hart& Cooley, Inc. 4. McGill AirFlow Corporation. 5. As approved by Engineer on Record. B. Insulated-Duct Connectors: UL 181, Class 1, 2-ply vinyl film supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene vapor barrier film. 1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa) positive and 1.0-inch wg (250 Pa) negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm (20.3 m/s). 3. Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F (Minus 23 to plus 71 deg Q. C. Flexible Duct Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a worm-gear action , in sizes 3 through 18 inches (75 to 450 mm) to suit duct size. 2.14 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct insulation thickness. B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease. PART 3 —EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION 23 33 00 —Air Duct Accessories Page 6 of 8 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AHI 16, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts. B. Provide duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts. D. Install volume dampers in ducts with liner; avoid damage to and erosion of duct liner. E. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches lead from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install at a minimum of two duct widths from branch takeoff. F. Install duct access doors to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and terminal units as follows: 1. On both sides of duct coils. 2. Downstream from volume dampers, turning vanes, and equipment. 3. Adjacent to fire or smoke dampers, providing access to reset or reinstall fusible links. 4. To interior of ducts for cleaning; before and after each change in direction, at maximum 50-foot(15-m) spacing. 5. On sides of ducts where adequate clearance is available. G. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, rectangular access doors: 1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches (200 by 125 mm). 2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches (300 by 150 mm). 3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches (460 by 250 mm). 4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches (530 by 355 mm). 5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches (635 by 355 mm). 6. Body Plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches (635 by 430 mm). H. Label access doors according to Division 23 Section "Mechanical Identification." I. Install flexible connectors immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and motorized equipment supported by vibration isolators. J. For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg (1250 Pa) and higher, cover flexible connectors with loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps. K. Connect terminal units to supply ducts with maximum 12-inch (300-mm) lengths of flexible duct. Do not use flexible ducts to change directions. L. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to low pressure ducts with maximum 60-inch (1500-mm)lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place. 23 33 00 —Air Duct Accessories Page 7 of 8 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 M. Connect flexible ducts to metal duts with adhesive plus sheet metal screws. N. Install duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Adjust duct accessories for proper settings. B. Adjust fire and smoke dampers for proper action. C. Final positioning of manual-volume dampers is specified in Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing." END OF SECTION 23 33 00 —Air Duct Accessories Page 8 of 8 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 SECTION 23 37 13 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS,AND GRILLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes ceiling mounted diffusers and registers. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 23 Section 'Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume- control dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles. 2. Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for balancing diffusers, registers, and grilles. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Diffuser: Circular, square, or rectangular air distribution outlet, generally located in the ceiling and comprised of deflecting members discharging supply air in various directions and planes and arranged to promote mixing of primary air with secondary room air. B. Register: A combination grille and damper assembly over an air opening. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each model indicated, include the following: 1. Data Sheet: For each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indicate construction, finish, and mounting details. 2. Performance Data: Include throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings for each type of air outlet and inlet. 3. Schedule of diffusers, registers, and grilles indicating drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished. 4. Assembly Drawing: For each type of air outlet and inlet; indicate materials and methods of assembly of components. 23 37 13 -Diffusers, Registers and Grilles Page 1 of 3 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale to show locations and coordination of diffusers and registers with other items installed in ceilings. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Options: Drawings and schedules indicate specific requirements of diffusers, registers, and grilles and are based on the specific requirements of the systems indicated. Other manufacturers' products with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions." B. NFPA Compliance: Install diffusers, registers, and grilles according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems." PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Diffusers, registers, and grilles are scheduled on Drawings. 2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Test performance according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions, Coordination Drawings, original design, and referenced standards. 23 37 13 -Diffusers, Registers and Grilles Page 2 of 3 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practicable. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of the panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location. C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connection to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing. 3.4 CLEANING A. After installation of diffusers, registers, and grilles, inspect exposed finish. Clean exposed surfaces to remove burrs, dirt, and smudges. Replace diffusers, registers, and grilles that have damaged finishes. END OF SECTION 23 37 13 -Diffusers, Registers and Grilles Page 3 of 3 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 SECTION 23 62 00 DX AIR-COOLED CONDENSING UNIT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division O1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Perform all Work required to provide a unitary packaged or split, air-cooled, direct expansion (DX) condenser coil. The ACCU shall perform to manufacturer's product data, installation instructions, start-up instructions and maintenance information indicated by all Specification Sections and Contract Documents with supplementary items necessary for proper operation. ACCU shall be provided by same manufacturer as respective AHU. B. This section contains: a. Large air-cooled condensing units (larger than 5 tons). C. The DX unit shall consist of a hermetic scroll compressor(s), air-cooled condenser coil, condenser fan, evaporator coil, supply air fan, space temperature thermostat, and microprocessor control center. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless identified by a specific edition date. B. All reference amendments adopted prior to the effective date of this Contract shall be applicable to this Project. C. All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and standards addressed within the following references: 1. ARI 210/240 -Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment. 2. ARI 340/360 - Commercial Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment. 3. ANSFASHRAE 15 - Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems. 4. ASHRAE 90.1 - Energy Standard for Buildings except Low High Rise Residential Buildings. 5. ASTM B-117 - Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus. 23 62 00—Packaged or DX Air Conditioners Page 1 of 6 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Sound data shall be certified to ANSUAHRI Standard 270. C. The design of the unit shall be AGA and ARI certified as combination heating-cooling units. D. Unit construction shall comply with ASHRAE 15 safety code, NEC, and UL applicable codes. E. Cooling capacity testing and efficiency ratings shall be in accordance with ARI standard 210/240. F. The air conditioning unit selected shall have an EER, SEER, 1EER, or HSPF equal to or greater than that specified in the minimum efficiency tables in ASHRAE 90.1, Section 6.8. G. Provide minimum outside air to the space served by the unit as required by ASHRAE 62.1. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Dimensions 2. Weight and loading 3. Clearances 4. Capacities 5. Material gauges, thickness, and finishes 6. Electrical requirements 7. Electrical connections 8. Type of refrigerant 9. Refrigerant charge 10. Rigging, installation, testing, start-up and operating instructions, maintenance data including type and quantity of oil and refrigerant change (pounds), parts lists, and troubleshooting guide. 11. Data on energy input versus cooling load output from 100 percent to 20 percent of full load with constant entering condenser air temperature. 12. Control and wiring diagrams. 23 62 00—Packaged or DX Air Conditioners Page 2 of 6 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 13. Product test data on sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet at the rated design capacity. 14. Operating data, including fan speeds, compressor LRA and RA, and sound levels. 15. Product data on condenser coil coatings. 16. Product data on all condenser fan accessories such as controls. 17. Cross plotted performance data providing the simultaneous evaporator coil performance and condensing unit coil performance at the scheduled design conditions. 18. ARI certificate showing the certified efficiency rating for the unit. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to the Project Site under provisions of Division 01 and Division 20. B. Accept products on Site in factory-fabricated protective containers or coverings, with factory- installed shipping skids and lifting lugs. Inspect for damage. C. Store in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish. D. Check and maintain equipment on monthly basis to ensure equipment is being stored in accordance with manufacturer's recommended practices. Maintain a storage record indicating that the above requirements have been met. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Large AC units. 1. Provide 5-year compressor warranty. 2. Provide 1-year parts warranty. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LARGE AC UNITS (LARGER THAN 5 TONS) A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Addison 2. Aaon 3. Daikin/McQuay 4. As Approved by EOR B. Refrigerant: 23 62 00—Packaged or DX Air Conditioners Page 3 of 6 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 1. The refrigerant for the units shall be R-41OA. C. Manufactured Units: 1. Description: Factory assembled and tested; consisting of casing, condenser coils, condenser fans and motors, and unit controls. 2. Condenser Coil: Seamless copper or aluminum tubes, aluminum finned coil; factory leak tested to 150 psig and pressure tested to 650 psig. Circuit to match compressors. 3. Fans and Drives: Propeller fans for condenser air discharge; directly driven with permanently lubricated ball-bearing motors with integral current- and thermal-overload protection. Fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced. 4. Operating and Safety Controls: Include condenser fan motor thermal and overload cutouts; magnetic contactors for condenser fan motors; high and low pressure switches; a nonfused factory-mounted and -wired disconnect switch for single external electrical power connection; and anti-short cycle timer control circuit to prevent the compressor from restarting for five (5) minutes after stopping. 5. Condenser Unit Casing: Galvanized or zinc-coated steel treated and finished with manufacturer's standard paint coating, designed for outdoor installation with weather protection for components and controls, and with removable panels for access to controls, condenser fans, motors, and drives; fan guards, lifting eyes, and removable legs. Unit shall be capable of withstanding 500 hour salt spray test by ASTM B 117. 6. Accessories: Provide the following accessories with each unit: a. Low-Ambient Kit for temperatures down to 0°F. b. Crankcase Heater. C. Thermal Expansion Valve (TXV)(Provided within respective AHU). d. Hard Start Kit. e. Filter Driers f Hail Guard. g. All three phase motors shall be provided with phase monitor. h. Vibration Isolators. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install the unit according to the manufacturer's published instructions. B. Install units level and plumb, firmly anchored in locations indicated; maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance. C. Install ground-mounted air-cooled condensers on concrete housekeeping pads. D. Install roof-mounted units on equipment roof curb. E. Vibration Isolation: Mount air-cooled condensers on rubber pads with a minimum deflection of 1/4 inch. 23 62 00—Packaged or DX Air Conditioners Page 4 of 6 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 F. Refrigerant Piping: Connect piping to unit with all appurtenances recommended by condensing unit manufacturer(e.g. pressure relief, service valve, filter-dryer, and moisture indicator on each refrigerant-circuit liquid line, etc.). G. Furnish refrigerant and oil charge. H. Furnish and install all low voltage control wires as required. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections. Report results in writing. B. Contractor shall perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Perform electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection. 2. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 3. Non-precharged refrigerant piping: a. After all refrigeration equipment and piping is installed, charge the system with the proper refrigerant and dry nitrogen to 300 psig. Test all joints for leaks with electronic leak detector. Repair any leaks and recharge and retest. b. After refrigerant system has been pressure tested, connect a suitable vacuum pump and evacuate the piping system and equipment. Operate the vacuum pump as long as required to evaporate all moisture in the system. Check the humidity within the system with a wet bulb indicator until the wet bulb temperature is reduced to minus 40°F. After the system has been evacuated, break the vacuum by charging the proper refrigerant into the system. 4. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Complete manufacturer's starting checklist. 5. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. C. Verify that vibration isolation and flexible connections properly dampen vibration transmission to structure. D. Remove and replace malfunctioning air-cooled condensers and retest as specified above. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Supply initial charge of refrigerant and oil for each refrigeration system. Replace losses of oil or refrigerant prior to end of correction period. B. Shut down system if initial start-up and testing takes place in winter and machines are to remain inoperative. Repeat start-up and testing operation at beginning of first cooling season. 23 62 00—Packaged or DX Air Conditioners Page 5 of 6 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 C. Provide cooling season start-up and winter season shutdown for first year of operation. END OF SECTION 23 62 00 23 62 00—Packaged or DX Air Conditioners Page 6 of 6 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 SECTION 23 73 00 INDOOR AIR HANDLING UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. See also the Division 01 Contract Requirements and Division 02 General Requirements included with this contract. B. See also all other Division 23 specifications included with this contract. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Perform all Work required to furnish and install factory assembled, custom-built air handling units, including factory installed fans, dampers, filters, coils, motors, and any specialty equipment as indicated by the Contract Documents with supplementary items necessary for proper installation. B. This Specification applies to all air handling equipment for special applications as scheduled on the Drawings. C. See Division 23 Airside Design Guidelines for design and configuration of air handler units. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless identified by a specific edition date. B. All reference amendments adopted prior to the effective date of this Contract shall be applicable to this Project. C. All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and standards addressed within the following references: D. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook. E. AMCA 210 -Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes. F. AMCA 300 - Test Code for Sound Rating Air Moving Devices. G. AMCA 301 -Method of Publishing Sound Ratings for Air Moving Devices. H. AMCA 500 - Test Methods for Louver, Dampers, and Shutters. I. ARI 410 -Forced Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils. J. ARI 610 - Central System Humidifiers. K. NEMA MGI -Motors and Generators. L. NFPA 70 -National Electrical Code. 23 73 00 - Indoor Air Handling Units Page 1 of 12 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 M. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning. N. NFPA 262 - Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and Cables for Use in Air-Handling Spaces. O. SMACNA -HVAC Duct Construction Standards -Metal and Flexible. P. UL 900 - Test Performance of Air Filter Units. Q. ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1 - Energy Standard for Buildings except Low Rise Residential Buildings. R. ASHRAE 62.1 —Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum three (3)years documented experience, who issues complete catalog data on total product. B. Performance Ratings: unit shall be tested in accordance with ARI 430 to establish acceptability (note that the unit does not have to be ARI 430 certified). C. Sound Ratings: Test air handling unit in accordance with AMCA 300 (ASHRAE 68) and ARI 260 Guidelines. D. Air Coils: meet or exceed the capacities, pressure drops, and selection procedures in accordance with ARI 410. E. Base performance on sea level conditions, unless otherwise scheduled. F. Provide complete unit including components designed to operate within range of 20 degrees F to 135 degrees F ambient temperature, 20 to 70 percent relative humidity in conditioned mechanical rooms and 100 percent relative humidity in unconditioned mechanical rooms or exterior installations. G. The Contract Documents are based on the equipment scheduled. Contractor is advised that the use of equipment other than that scheduled may directly affect and require coordination with (but not limited to)the following items: 1. Mechanical room sizes and building structural conditions, with required clearances. 2. Electrical starter/disconnect switch/VFD, wire and conduit sizes; electrical clearances as per NEC. 3. Ductwork and piping layouts and return air opening sizes and locations. 4. Plumbing floor drain location. 5. Housekeeping pad sizes H. Units shall fit into the space available with adequate clearances meeting manufacturer's requirements for service and as determined by the Engineer. Submitted units which do not 23 73 00 - Indoor Air Handling Units Page 2 of 12 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 meet these criteria shall be rejected. The Contractor shall not assume that all of the manufacturers listed as acceptable manufacturers are able to provide a unit that will fit in the space allocated for the unit(s). Contractor is responsible for coordination and redesign (if required)if unit other than specified unit is submitted. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. WITHOUT EXCEPTION— submittals shall be prepared and transmitted by the sales office local to the Engineer of Record. Submittals prepared by other sales offices will be returned, un-reviewed, and no additional time shall be afforded the contractor as a result of any delays associated with the resubmission. B. Product Data Record Documents: 1. Provide literature that indicates dimensions,weights, capacities,ratings,fan performance, gages and finishes of materials, electrical characteristics and connection requirements. Refer to detailed list of submittal data in this Section. 2. Provide data of filter media, filter performance data, filter assembly and filter frames as tested and certified per ASHRAE 52.2 and UL-900 class 1. 3. Provide fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted, as tested and certified per AMCA standards (refer to fan array section for AMCA requirements on fan arrays). Ratings to include system effects inside the air handling units. Bare fan ratings will not satisfy this requirement but shall be submitted for comparison purposes. All fan data shall be generated from specified testing. Where two fans are operated in parallel, provide Hagen's Line plots on fan curves to prove that fans will not be operating in the unstable region. 4. Submit sound power level data for both fan outlet and casing radiation at rated capacity, as tested and certified per AMCA standards. All fan data shall be generated from specified testing. The selected unit will not exceed the scheduled sound power data. 5. Unit manufacturer shall submit full sound performance data to the Project sound consultant for evaluation. Unit shall be finally configured so as not to exceed sound levels as scheduled on Contract Documents. 6. Provide data on all coils as tested and certified per ARI standards. 7. All electrical power, lighting, control, sensor, and pressure taps, and TAB access ports are to be noted on the submittal Drawings. 8. Submit electrical requirements for power supply wiring including wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring, clearly indicating factory installed and field installed wiring. 9. Wiring shall have smoke and flammability rating of 25/50 or better per test method of NFPA 262. Note that the liquid tight flexible metal conduit connections to the fan motor are exempt from this portion of the specification. 10. Base Rail Height Calculations: Provide calculations for required base rail heights to allow for proper condensate trapping per condensate drain details. 23 73 00 - Indoor Air Handling Units Page 3 of 12 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 11. Note each deviation and reason for the deviation on the shop drawing submittal. 12. Specification Compliance Document: Provide a copy of the specification with a note beside each paragraph indicating that the submitted product complies or manufacturer requests a variance. Include documentation on requested variances for review by Owner, Engineer of Record, and Owner's Test and Balance Consultant. Note that the Reviewers may (at their option)reject the request for variance and require the manufacturer provide a product that meets the specification. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Include instructions for lubrication, filter replacement, motor and drive replacement, spare parts lists and wiring diagrams. 2. Provide Operating and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals for air handling units per Division 01. 3. Permanently mount condensate trapping calculation instructions within the unit O&M Manual that illustrates the unit casing at the condensate drain connection. 4. Manufacturer's Instructions: Provide Start-up information and maintenance required prior to Start-up. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to the Project Site under provisions of Division 01 and Division 02. B. Accept products on site in factory-fabricated protective containers, with factory-installed shipping skids and lifting lugs. Inspect for damage. C. Store in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish. D. Protect openings in casing and seal them with plastic wrap to keep dirt and debris, also protect coils from entry of dirt and debris with pipe caps or plugs. E. Under no circumstance are air handling units to be used for storage of construction materials. 1.7 DRAWING SCHEDULES A. In general, all capacities of equipment and motor and starter characteristics are shown in schedules on the drawings. Reference shall be made to the schedules for such information. The capacities shown are minimum capacities. Fan motor horsepower(unless noted otherwise) is maximum horsepower. Fan Brake horsepower cannot be exceeded by more than 5%. Variations in the capacities of the scheduled equipment supplied under this contract will be permitted only with the written direction of the Owner. B. Insofar as is possible, all items of the same type (i.e., coils, fans, etc.) shall be by the same manufacturer. 23 73 00 - Indoor Air Handling Units Page 4 of 12 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 C. Where installation instructions are not included in the Contract Documents, the manufacturer's instructions shall be followed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Addison B. AAON C. Daikin D. As approved by EOR 2.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION A. Unit configuration is indicated on the drawings and may vary from unit to unit. B. Refer to the mechanical schedule(s) in the drawings for AHU performance information. Performance base conditions are at sea level. C. Fabricate each AHU according to AMCA 99 and ARI 430 in the absence of direction in this specification. 2.3 AIR HANDLER CASINGS: A. General: Provide horizontal or vertical type factory fabricated air handling units as indicated, of sizes and capacities as scheduled, and as specified herein. Refer to drawings for additional information. B. Construction: Each unit shall have a double wall airtight and weatherproof casing and shall be sectionalized for placement indoors for all internal components. 1. For units located in un-air-conditioned spaces, provide a welded, full perimeter structural or tubular steel base frame with intermediate supports for all internal components. 2. Exterior casing: 18-gauge minimum galvanized steel (16-gauge for built-up units). 3. Interior liner: 20-gauge minimum galvanized steel (18-gauge for built-up units) unless otherwise indicated. (Note that fan sections may be lined with a perforated metal liner if this is indicated elsewhere in the specifications or the contract drawings). 4. Thermal Break: Provide full thermal break construction between exterior panel and frame. a. All sheet metal joints throughout the air handler, and between panelized sections, shall be gasketed with closed cell, soft rubber gaskets, fabricated from neoprene, EPDM, or other approved material. b. Internal walls and roof outside shall be sealed such that there is no passage of air from inside the unit to the outer casing. 23 73 00 - Indoor Air Handling Units Page 5 of 12 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 C. Casing assembly shall be configured to eliminate all thru-metal in portions of the unit subject to below ambient temperatures. d. Where fasteners are used in the assembly of the unit components, they shall not extend from the outside of the unit into the air stream. 5. Insulation: 2" minimum thickness foam insulation on all walls, ceiling, and floor. Unit casings shall be insulated internally to provide minimum R-13 thermal resistance. 6. Floor: Provide double bottom floor construction with minimum R-13 thermal resistance and full walk-on interior 14-gauge non-skid galvanized floor (or equivalent aluminum). An 18-gauge galvanized sheet shall enclose and form a vapor barrier for the insulation on the bottom of the unit. All points of contact between the floor, vapor barrier and structure shall be thermally isolated with gasketing of closed cell soft rubber or EPDM. C. Coil Section: The coil section shall completely enclose the coil headers and return bends. Coil frames shall not be used as structural members of the coil section. The coil section shall be constructed in such a manner that the coils can be removed without affecting the structural integrity of the casing. D. Condensate (fin water)Drain Pan: 1. Provide insulated, double wall IAQ type drain pans that meet all requirements of the latest version of ASHRAE 62.1. 2. Materials: Minimum 16 gauge 304 stainless steel inner pan; galvanized or painted outer pan. 3. Insulation: 2" minimum thickness foam insulation between inner and outer pans. 4. Drain pans shall be rigid and watertight and sloped in 2 planes to accessible side of unit. 5. Connections: Provide stainless steel drain connections, minimum 1-1/2 inches male NPT, extending 2 inches beyond the outside wall of the unit casing, unless indicated otherwise on the drawings 6. The drain pan shall extend under the complete cooling coil, hot water coil, steam coil, and humidifier section, and where otherwise indicated on drawings. Drain pans shall not recess into floor of casing. 7. Drain pans shall extend a minimum 24 inches downstream of coils, and provide downspouts and intermediate condensate collectors for stacked coil banks. Pans shall not be recessed into unit casing. E. Access Doors: 1. Provide double wall insulated walk-in access doors with full perimeter gaskets in each casing section. 2. Provide doors with windows, continuous stainless steel hinges, and quick opening handle with locking latch. 23 73 00 - Indoor Air Handling Units Page 6 of 12 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 3. Doors shall be 24 inches wide and full height of wall panel or maximum 72 inches tall, except where indicated otherwise on drawings. 4. Windows: Provide a minimum of 8 inch by 6-inch double glazed view window, capable of withstanding the total developed pressure of the unit. 5. All access doors shall open against air pressure, unless approved by the owner in writing. All doors opening outward of casing shall have heavy-duty pull handles separate from latches. 6. For units greater than 60" in width, provide an access doors on each side of the cabinet for access from both sides of the air unit. 7. Access doors for the fan section must be large enough to allow removal of fan(s)without cutting the fan or base into pieces. F. Filter Gauges: 1. Provide surface mounted Magnahelic gauge for each prefilter and final filter bank. Provide each gauge with integral leveling screw. Gauges shall be graduated to read appropriate pressure range based on maximum dirty filter pressure loss. 2. Provide pressure tips, tubing, gauge connections, and mounting brackets. G. Base Rail: Unit shall have a complete perimeter channel base of at least 6" galvanized steel. H. Casing Acoustical Guidelines: 1. Minimum Casing Sound Transmission Loss (dB) per ASTM E-90 & E-413. Octave 2 3 4 5 6 7 STC+ Perf Liner 22 26 37 44 53 55 39 Solid Liner 22 38 49 50 57 62 42 2. Minimum Casing Sound Absorption Coefficients per ASTM C-423 & E-795. Octave 2 3 4 5 6 7 NRC+ No liner .26 .71 1.09 1.02 .96 .83 .95 Perf Liner .25 .79 1.06 1.06 1.04 .78 1.00 Full sound performance data shall be submitted to the Project sound consultant for evaluation. Unit shall be finally configured and installed so as to not exceed the room Noise Criteria (NC) values as recommended in the ASHRAE HVAC Applications Handbook, Chapter 48 - Noise and Vibration Control, Table 1 - Design Guidelines for HVAC Related Background Sound in Rooms. 23 73 00 - Indoor Air Handling Units Page 7 of 12 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 2.4 DX COOLING AND HOT-GAS REHEAT COILS: A. All coils shall be tested at 300 psig air pressure, under water. B. All coils shall be installed on tracks for easy removal from the air handling unit. Units that require disassembly of the unit for coil removal are not acceptable. C. Coils shall be aluminum plate fin type with belled collars and shall be bonded to 1/2 inch or 5/8 inch OD copper tubes by mechanical expansion. Coils shall have headers with steel MPT connections. Working pressure shall be 250 psig at 300°F. D. Direct expansion coils shall be furnished with a brass distributor with solder type connections. Suction and discharge connections shall be on the same end regardless of rows deep. Coils shall have intertwined circuits for equal operation on each circuit. E. Maximum face velocity across cooling coils shall be 500 FPM, unless noted otherwise on equipment schedule. 2.5 SINGLE FANS: A. Double Inlet, Double Width Scroll Fans: 1. Fans shall be both dynamically and statically balanced. Housed fans shall be equipped with quick opening access doors in the fan scroll. The motor mounting for each unit shall be an integral part of the fan support frame. The fan/motor unit shall be mounted on spring isolators within the air handler casing. Housed fans shall have an appropriately designed fabric duct vibration isolator installed within the air handler casing. The unit shall be supplied with a factory installed and sealed flange for connection to ductwork. For belt drive units, manufacturer shall provide fixed sheave on units of 10 HP and larger. 2. Bearings: a. Manufacturers: Provide catalogued type as manufactured by Fafnir, SKF, Sealmaster, or approved equal, and stocked locally. b. Anti-friction type, either ball or roller. C. Provide factory lubricated bearings. d. Provide grease fitting for lubrication on the outside of the bearing housing. e. Both inboard and outboard bearings shall be the same, identical size. f Bearings shall have an L-10 minimum life of 200,000 hours. Intermediate bearings will not be acceptable. Grease fittings for bearings shall be remotely mountedl.4 within line of sight of the bearing, where possible. Where it is not possible, then the fitting shall be mounted where it is most easily accessible for service. The tubing used for remoting the fitting shall be stainless steel, installed with a strain relief pigtail approximately 4 inches in diameter and located on the drive side of the assembly. 3. After assembly, the unit manufacturer shall balance the fan (per ANSI/AMCA 204-96 fan application category BV-3) at design fan speed with belts and drives in place to a vibration velocity less than or equal to 0.157 inches (0.100 inches for direct-drive 23 73 00 - Indoor Air Handling Units Page 8 of 12 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 applications)per second measured on horizontal,vertical, and axial planes at each bearing pad. Vibration amplitudes are in inches/second peak velocity. All values recorded are to be filter-in at the fan speed. B. Fans shall be selected at a maximum of 1800 RPM and a maximum motor speed of 60 Hz unless specifically scheduled otherwise. C. Fans shall be selected to operate outside of the surge line with a variance of up to 20% of TSP. 2.6 MOTORS AND DRIVES: A. Refer to Section 23 05 13 —Common Motor Requirements for HVAC for motor requirements. Motors shall be mounted to be accessible and shall be removable through the casing access door. B. V-belt drives: Shall be designed for a minimum of 50% overload. Where more than one belt is required, matched sets shall be used. All belt drives shall be furnished with belt guards. C. Variable frequency drives: See Division 26. 2.7 DAMPERS A. All automatic control dampers and manual volume control dampers located within the air handling unit or at the air opening on the air handling unit shall be furnished by AHU manufacturer. The actuators for the dampers shall be furnished by the Building HVAC Controls Contractor. B. Mixing Boxes: Section with factory built, factory mounted outside, relief and return air dampers of aluminum or stainless steel and edge seals in aluminum or stainless steel frame, with aluminum or stainless steel axles in self-lubricating nylon bearings, in opposed blade arrangement with damper blades positioned across short air opening dimension. Provide removable, full width rack for supporting freeze protection thermostat, with removable end panel to permit rack removal. C. Damper Leakage: Maximum 4 cfm/ft2 at 4 inch WG differential pressure. Dampers shall be sized for 2000 fpm maximum face velocity or the same size as the duct connection where one is present. D. Face and Bypass Dampers: Same construction as noted for mixing box dampers, arranged to match coil face with bypass, blank-off and division sheets, external linkage, access doors, and adjustable resistance plate. 2.8 FILTERS A. Refer to Section 23 4100—Particulate Air Filtration. 2.9 ELECTRICAL A. See Motors and Drives, above. B. Fan motors shall be interlocked with fan access door to shut down when door is opened. 23 73 00 - Indoor Air Handling Units Page 9 of 12 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 1. Refer to Fan Array Section for specific fan array requirements C. Provide a ceiling or wall mounted vapor proof light in each compartment with an access door. Lights shall have at least one obvious, labelled switch on the accessible, outside of the AHU. Also provide a convenient GFI plug outlet on this same side. Wire lights and outlets to an external 120v, 20a power circuit for connection by Division 26. See also Division 26, Electrical. D. All wiring shall be 600v rated type MTW/THWN stranded copper in EMT or LiquidTite conduit(max 3 feet). All junction boxes shall be UL approved and gasketed. 2.10 FINISHES: A. G90 Galvanize all parts of the unit, both inside and out, including supports. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Provide a trained manufacturer's representative on site during assembly and installation of the unit to verify that it is done correctly. B. Install in conformance with ARI 435. 1. Assemble high-pressure units by bolting sections together. Isolate fan section with flexible duct connections for units equipped with housed fans 2. Unit shall be installed level and plumb. Where units are installed on a concrete housekeeping pad, units shall be installed on neoprene pads as indicated on installation details and in Section 23 05 48 - Vibration Isolation for HVAC. 3. Piping and duct connections shall be installed so that all access doors swing freely. 3.2 TESTING A. Units with cabinet mounted fans shall be tested and certified at rated conditions using AMCA 210 and AMCA 300 test procedures with fan mounted in the cabinet. Bare fan data will not be accepted. B. Casing Deflection Test 1. Deflection limit of L/250 shall be demonstrated in the factory prior to shipping and witnessed by a representative of the Owner's Test and Balance Consultant. 2. `L' is defined as the height of the largest panel on the sides, width across the top of the largest panel on the unit, and the smaller of width or height of the largest panel for the ends. These are known as the governing panels. 3. That portion of the unit after the fan discharge shall be tested at positive pressure. The remainder of the unit shall be tested at negative pressure. 23 73 00 - Indoor Air Handling Units Page 10 of 12 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 4. Measurements shall betaken at midpoint of`L' using dial indicators reading in 1/1000ths. Mounting of dial indicators shall be independent of the unit casing. Multiple measurements shall be made. Dial indicator shall be mounted at midpoint of `L'. Measurements shall then be spaced along the sides, ends and top at mid-point and quarter points of the negative section and the positive section. Spacing shall be adjusted to fall on nearest flange or panel joint. Any section of less than five feet shall require only one measurement at the center. 5. Unit shall be furnished with proper blank offs to facilitate the pressure testing. 6. In order to reduce the number of pressure cycles, it is recommended that multiple dial indicators be used at the measurement points. Separate set-ups will be required for the positive pressure tests and the negative pressure tests. C. Casing Leakage Test. With unit set in place, leveled, secured, all penetrations complete, and ready to receive duct work connections, unit shall be tested for casing leakage. Seal all unit openings and pressurize to 2.5 times rated pressure (defined as total static pressure of unit) or 10" WG, whichever is smaller. Maximum allowable leakage rate is 1.5% of rated unit now. Test is to be performed using flow measurement devices and shall be witnessed by a representative of the Owner's Test& Balance firm. D. Fan/Motor Vibration Test. With the unit set in place, leveled, and ductwork attached, the manufacturer shall perform a final dynamic vibration trim balance to verify the fan/motor vibration velocity limit over the following operating speed range: Fans with VFDs shall be checked by operating at VFD speeds from 20 to 65 Hz. Constant speed fans shall be checked at 100% of rated fan speed. `Lock-out' ranges may be used to correct up to three ranges of excess vibration. The span of each `lock-out' range shall be limited to an effective fan speed of 50 RPM. Any `lock-out' range used shall be clearly identified in the test report and shall be prominently displayed on a typed, laminated legend mounted inside the VFD controller cabinet. This testing shall be witnessed by a representative of the Owner's Test and Balance firm. 1. Note that for air handling units equipped with multiple fans, each fan shall be tested individually and the fan array shall be tested as an assembly. E. Failure of the leakage and/or deflection test shall require sealing and bracing of the unit and retesting until criteria is met. Failure of the trim balance to confirm vibration limit shall require rebalancing and re-testing until criteria is met. Contractor shall bear all costs involved in the modifications, balancing, and re-testing, including travel and hourly costs associated with the representatives of the Owner's Test and Balance firm. 3.3 FINAL CLEANING AND PREPARATION A. Prior to substantial completion, contractor will clean and prepare the unit for acceptance by the owner by doing the following: 1. Wipe down and clean the unit inside and outside. The unit shall be free of dirt, dust, foot prints, paint splatter, etc. 2. All coils shall be combed to straighten any bent fins. 23 73 00 - Indoor Air Handling Units Page 11 of 12 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 3. Filters that were used in the construction phase shall be replaced with new filters. 4. All penetrations made in the unit cabinet (power, controls, tab, etc) shall be sealed air tight. 5. Any devices that require lubrication, tensioning, etc shall be serviced. END OF SECTION 23 73 0 23 73 00 - Indoor Air Handling Units Page 12 of 12 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 26 01 26 ELECTRICAL TESTING 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Furnish labor, material, equipment and incidentals of a NETA certified independent testing agency. Testing shall be inclusive of all medium voltage and low voltage equipment including conductors for the pump station. Testing shall include all relay protective schemes and operation of the low and medium voltage equipment. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE Independent testing agency shall be NETA certified. 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 0133 00, "Document Management" and shall include: A. EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION REPORT A written report shall be submitted by the testing agency performing installation checks, operation and testing of the medium voltage equipment. This report shall certify that 1)the equipment has been properly installed, 2) is in accurate alignment, 3) meets the acceptance testing specifications of NETA and the equipment manufacturer, and 4) NETA certification of the testing agency. 1.04 STANDARDS The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: American National Standards Institute (ANSI) American Standards for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) International Electrical Testing Association (NETA) 2.00 EXECUTION 2.01 GENERAL A. Perform all testing identified in the latest edition of NETA Standard for Accepting Testing Specifications B. All testing shall be witnessed by the Owner's Representative. Types of equipment required to be tested by these specifications shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Low voltage cables 2. Grounding 3. CT's Electrical Testing 260126- 1 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 4. Surge arresters C. All testing shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for energization and start-up of the equipment. D. Testing shall include a complete functionality testing of electrical equipment under all the different operating parameters identified by the OWNER and ENGINEER. E. Testing shall be in accordance with NETA Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications, latest edition. F. The following is a listing of the major equipment test to be performed. 1. Low Voltage Cables a. Insulation -resistance test. 2. Surge Arresters a. Doble Test END OF SECTION Electrical Testing 260126-2 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 26 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary for complete and operational electrical systems, as specified herein. B. This Section, as well as Division 01, incorporate to all other Sections in Division 26, and shall be considered a part of each of those Sections as if written in their entirety. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Contractors' Qualifications: Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen,trained and experienced in their crafts, and who are familiar with the specifications and methods of performing the work in this Division. B. Workmanship: Work shall be performed in accordance with quality, commercial practices. The appearance of finished work shall be of equal importance with its operation. Materials and equipment shall be installed based upon the actual dimensions and conditions at the project site. Locations for materials or equipment requiring an exact fit shall be field measured. Conduit and motors shall be isolated to avoid unacceptable noise levels from objectionable vibrations from all systems. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall include: 1. Component catalog number and manufacturing data sheet, indicating pertinent data and identifying each component by the item number and nomenclature as specified. 2. Component drawings showing dimensions, mounting, and external connection details. 3. Complete control schematics and point to point wiring diagrams. 4. Unless other additional information is required by the detailed equipment specifications,the following information shall be included for motors: a. Motor identification number and nomenclature as specified. b. Make and motor type. c. Brake horsepower of the motor. d. Locked rotor current at full load. e. Motor efficiency at full load (three-phase motors only). f. Starting torque. g. Method of insulating and impregnating motor coils (three-phase only). h. Speed of the motor at full torque. i. Full load current. j. Service factor. Common Work Results For Electrical 260500- 1 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 k. Number of poles I. Motor temperature rise measured by resistance over 40 C ambient. 1.04 STANDARDS A. Electrical work shall be executed in accordance with local, State and national codes, ordinances and regulations which have jurisdiction or authority over the work. If the standards and codes conflict with each other,the most stringent shall apply. The applicable provisions of the following standard shall apply as if written here in their entirety: National Electrical Manufacturer Association (NEMA) American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) National Electrical Safety Code (NESC) Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) National Electrical Code (NEC) Underwriters Laboratories (UL) American National Standards Institute(ANSI) Uniform Building Code (UBC) Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Local Utility Companies Local Electrical Ordinance Rural Electrification Association (REA) Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association (IPCEA) National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA) Association Edison Illuminating Companies (AEIC) B. Electrical work shall be performed under the direct supervision of a Master Electrician who holds a valid license in the State of Texas. C. Contractor shall submit the company names of the electrical contractor with the bid documents. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Follow the Manufacturer's directions for the delivery, storage and handling of equipment and materials.Tightly cover equipment and materials and protect it from dirt, water, chemical or mechanical injury and theft. Damaged equipment shall not be acceptable. Upon installation, protect the materials until the work is completed and accepted by the Owner. Common Work Results For Electrical 260500-2 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Permits, licenses and inspections shall be secured and paid for as required by law for the completion of the work. Certificates of approval shall be secured, paid for, and delivered to the Owner before receiving the final acceptance of the work. B. The location of materials, equipment, devices and appliances indicated are approximate and subject to revisions at the time the work is installed.The Contractor shall utilize approved manufacturer shop drawings for final layouts of equipment and raceways. Final location shall be as proposed by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. C. Should project conditions require any rearrangement of work, or if equipment or accessories can be installed to a better advantage than the general arrangement of work on the plans, the Contractor shall before proceeding with the work prepare and submit plans of the proposed rearrangement for the Engineer's review and approval. D. Motor Horsepower ratings identified are anticipated ratings. If the actual equipment is a different size,the contractor shall provide the appropriate wiring, conduit, over current protection, starters and accessories for a complete and working system at no cost to the owner. E. All enclosures for equipment unless specifically identified otherwise shall be NEMA 4X, 316 Stainless Steel for exterior installations, NEMA 1 for indoor enclosures. 2.00 EXECUTION 2.01 INSTALLATION A. Maintain the waterproof integrity of conduit penetrations through the roof, exterior walls and floors. B. Submit location drawings and obtain Engineer approval prior to installing conduit penetrations through slabs, beams, and walls. The complete installation shall be watertight and the fire rating of penetrations through walls,floors and ceilings shall be maintained. C. Install steel reinforced concrete foundations, (housekeeping pads), below floor mounted switchboards, panelboards, motor control centers,transformers, and other floor mounted electrical equipment. Concrete foundations shall not be less than 4 inches high. Neatly chamfer top edges. Concrete foundations shall be 6 inches wider and 6 inches longer than the base of the equipment being installed. Concrete shall be in accordance with Division 03, and shall be reinforced with a minimum of 6-by-6-inch#6 welded wire mesh. 2.02 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Provide adequate support during cutting operations to prevent any damage to the affected masonry. Where openings are cut through masonry walls, provide lintels or structural supports to protect the remaining masonry. The cutting of structural members shall not be permitted without the specific written approval of the Engineer. Common Work Results For Electrical 260500-3 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 2.03 PAINTING A. Maintain the original factory finish on material and equipment installed, unless specifically indicated on the plans or specifications. If the finish is marred in transit or during installation, re-finish to a neat, workmanlike appearance. Leave equipment and raceway systems clean and free of grease, dirt, rust, and in a suitable condition for painting. 2.04 EXCAVATION,TRENCHING, BACKFILLING AND GRADING A. Prior to any excavation or trenching, notify the Owner's representative, utility companies and Owner's facilities department. Allow sufficient time for utilities to be located prior to excavation to avoid disruption of services. Provide a minimum of 72 hours written notice to the Owner prior to trenching or excavation. Do not proceed with trenching or excavation until authorized by the Owner. Utilities or services which are damaged, which are identified prior to excavation or trenching, or where confirmation by utility companies has not been obtained verifying that utilities are marked, shall be repaired to operable condition immediately, at no cost to the Owner. B. Barricade open trenches and excavations for the entire duration of the project. Barricades for excavations shall have warning lights maintained during hours of darkness. Trenches shall be marked with warning tape, or access to trenches shall be prohibited with readily identifiable sawhorses, warning tape or other acceptable means. Barriers shall be illuminated or recognizable during hours of darkness. Barriers and tape shall be properly maintained at all times. C. Protect all adjacent work, structures and properties. Damage to adjacent work, structures or properties shall be repaired, or the cost of repair reimbursed in full. D. All construction areas shall be finally graded as indicated on the contract documents or to the conditions of the site prior to construction. Grading shall bring the site back to the existing conditions as close as practical. Turfed areas shall be sodded, or hydro-mulched with matching turf. Landscaping shall be replaced with identical shrubbery, ground cover, or plants as existed. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining water on new turf and landscaping until established. If new turf and landscaping is impractical due to weather conditions, contractor shall provide satisfactory arrangements to have turf and landscaping furnished and installed at the earliest opportunity thereafter. Provide a 90 day warranty on new turf and landscaping. E. Determine if irrigation systems exist prior to trenching and excavation. Obtain record or as- built drawings and locate control wiring and pressure main branches and devices. Determine by actual operation that systems are functional and repair or replace damaged systems to their original condition prior to beginning construction. 2.05 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. The identification of electrical equipment shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Equipment." Identify electrical equipment in accordance with the NEC,the local authorities, and as specified. Common Work Results For Electrical 260500-4 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 B. Use laminated three-ply engraved plastic nameplates with black surface and white interior core, at least 1/16 inch thick. Engraved lettering shall be condensed gothic at least 1/4 inch high and properly spaced for legible and easy reading. Attach plates to equipment with stainless steel screws. Adhesive attachment is only acceptable on NEMA 4X enclosures. Identify the following items with engraved nameplates, located as follows: 1. Each switch/fuse unit or circuit breaker in each main panel and each distribution panel - adjacent to switch/fuse unit or circuit. 2. Spares shall be labeled "Spare". 3. Each branch circuit panel -on panel trim cover immediately above panel door. 4. Each safety disconnect switch, relay cabinet, control panel -on outside of cover. 5. Each exhaust fan switch -custom engraved on outside of switch cover plate (high and low if required). 6. Instrument transmitters and sensors. 7. Each motor starter-on outside cover. 8. Outside light switches -custom engraved on outside of switch cover plate. 9. Any switch for load that cannot be seen from the control point-custom engraved on outside of switch cover plate. C. Branch circuit panelboard directories shall be completely and properly typewritten. Cover with plastic and attach to the inside of the cabinet door. Spares shall be labeled as "Spare." D. Refer to Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables"for conductor coding requirements. E. Install special custom engraved switch cover plates with engraving on the outside of the cover plate at outside light switches, and at any switch for equipment which is out of sight from the control point. F. Install same brand/manufacturer fittings throughout the project. Install UL listed products. Fasteners, anchor bolts, nuts, and washers shall be stainless steel. 2.06 LOCKING OF ELECTRICAL FACILITIES A. Install locks immediately upon the installation of the electrical facility. Provide padlocks for exterior electrical facilities subject to unauthorized entry. Furnish the Owner with two keys per lock up to a quantity of 10 keys. Furnish locks to match the Owner's locking system. Key all locks alike. 2.07 ACCESS DOORS A. Wherever access is required in walls, ceilings, or soffits to concealed junction boxes, pull boxes or other electrical equipment, provide and install access doors. Install panels in locations approved by the Engineer. Paint as directed. Common Work Results For Electrical 260500-5 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 2.08 CLEAN AND ADJUST A. Remove shipping labels, dirt, paint, grease, and stains from equipment. Remove debris as it accumulates. Upon completion of work, clean electrical equipment and the entire electrical installation. 2.09 TESTING A. See each section for particular testing requirements for each type of equipment. END OF SECTION Common Work Results For Electrical 260500-6 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 26 05 13 MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLES PART GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes cables and related cable splices, terminations, and accessories for medium-voltage (2001 to 35,000 V) electrical distribution systems. 1.3 DEFINITIONS The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. Jacket: A continuous nonmetallic outer covering for conductors or cables. B. NETA ATS: Acceptance Testing Specification. C. Sheath: A continuous metallic covering for conductors or cables. 1.4 ACTIONS SUBMITTAL A. Product Data: For each type of cable. Include splices and terminations for cables and cable accessories. B. Samples: 8-inch (400-mm) lengths for each type of cable specified. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Material Certificates: For each type of cable and accessory. C. Source quality-control reports. D. Field quality-control reports. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: Engage a cable splicer, trained and certified by splice material manufacturer, to install, splice, and terminate medium-voltage cable. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member Company of NETA or an NRTL. C. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner no fewer than seven (7) working days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner's written permission. Medium Voltage Cables 26 05 13.00- 1 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 PART 2 PRODUCTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Cables: a. Aetna Insulated Wire. Inc.; a Berkshire Hathaway company. b. General Cable Technologies Corporation. C. Kerite; a Marmon Wire &Cable/Berkshire Hathaway company. d. Okonite Company,The (Preferred) e. Prysmian Cables & Systems. f. Southwire Company. 2. Cable Splicing and Terminating Products and Accessories: a. Thomas & Betts Corporation/Elastimold. b. 3M; Electrical Markets Division. C. Tyco Electronics; Raychem Products (Preferred) B. Source Limitations: Obtain cables and accessories from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Electrical Components, Devices,and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with IEEE C2 and NFPA 70. 2.3 CABLES A. Cable Type: Type MV 105 5/8kV Shielded Power Cable / 105°C Rating B. Comply with UL 1072, AEIC CS8Conductor: C. Copper. D. Conductor Stranding: Compact round, E. Strand Filling: Conductor interstices are filled with impermeable compound. F. Conductor Insulation: Ethylene-propylene rubber. G. Voltage Rating: 5 kV. H. Insulation Thickness: 133 percent insulation level. I. Shielding: Copper tape, helically applied over semiconducting insulation shield. J. Shielding and Jacket: Corrugated copper drain wires embedded in extruded, chlorinated, polyethylene jacket. K. Three-Conductor Cable Assembly: Three insulated, shielded conductors cabled together with ground conductors. 1. Circuit Identification: Color-coded tape (black, red, blue) under the metallic shielding. L. Cable Sheath: Interlocked aluminum or Corrugated aluminum tube applied over cable. M. Cable Jacket: Sunlight-resistant PVC 2.4 CONNECTORS A. Comply with ANSI C119.4 for connectors between aluminum conductors or for Medium Voltage Cables 26 05 13.00-2 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 connections between aluminum to copper conductors. B. Copper-Conductor Connectors: Copper barrel crimped connectors. 2.5 SOLID TERMINATIONS A. Multiconcluctor Cable Sheath Seals: Type recommended byseal manufacturerfor type of cable and installation conditions, including orientation. 1. Compound-filled,cast-metal-body, metal-clad cable terminatorfor metal-clad cable without external plastic jacket. 2. Cold-shrink sheath seal kit with preformed sleeve openings sized for cable and insulated conductors. 3. Heat-shrink sheath seal kit with phase- and ground-conductor rejacketing tubes, cable-end sealing boot, and sealing plugs for unused ground-wire openings in boot. 4. Cast-epoxy-resin sheath seal kit with wraparound mold and packaged, two- part, epoxy-resin casting material. B. Shielded-Cable Terminations: Comply with the following classes of IEEE 48. Insulation class shall be equivalent to that of cable. Include shield ground strap for shielded cable terminations. 1. Class 1 Terminations: Modular type,furnished as a kit, with stress-relief tube; multiple, molded-silicone-rubber, insulator modules;shield ground strap;and compression-type connector. 2. Class 1 Terminations: Heat-shrink type with heat-shrink inner stress control and outer nontracking tubes; multiple, molded, nontracking skirt modules;and compression-type connector. 3. Class 1 Terminations: Modular type,furnished as a kit,with stress-relief shield terminator; multiple-wet-process, porcelain, insulator modules;shield ground strap; and compression-type connector. 4. Class 1Terminations, Indoors: Kit with stress-relief tube, nontracking insulator tube, shield ground strap, compression-type connector, and end seal. 5. Class 2Terminations, Indoors: Kit with stress-relief tube, nontracking insulator tube, shield ground strap, and compression-type connector. Include silicone- rubbertape;cold-shrink-rubber sleeve;or heat-shrink, plastic-sleeve moisture seal for end of insulation whether or not supplied with kits. 6. Class 3 Terminations: Kit with stress cone and compression-type connector. 2.6 SEPARABLE INSULATED CONNECTORS A. Description: Modular system, complying with IEEE 386, with disconnecting, single-pole,cable terminators and with matching,stationary, plug-in,dead-front terminals designed for cable voltage and for sealing against moisture. B. Terminations at Distribution Points: Modular type, consisting of terminators installed on cables and modular, dead-front, terminal junctions for interconnecting cables. C. Load-Break Cable Terminators: Elbow-type units with 200-A-load make/break and continuous-current rating;coordinated with insulation diameter,conductor size, and material of cable being terminated. Include test point on terminator body that is capacitance coupled. Medium Voltage Cables 26 05 13.00-3 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 D. Dead-Break Cable Terminators: Elbow-type unit with 600-A continuous-current rating;designed forde-energized disconnecting and connecting;coordinated with insulation diameter, conductor size, and material of cable being terminated. Include test point on terminator body that is capacitance coupled. E. Dead-Front Terminal Junctions: Modular bracket-mounted groups of dead-front stationary terminals that mate and match with above cable terminators. Two-, three-, or four-terminal units as indicated, with fully rated, insulated,watertight conductor connection between terminals and complete with grounding lug, manufacturer's standard accessory stands,stainless-steel mounting brackets,and attaching hardware. 1. Protective Cap: Insulating,electrostatic-shielding,water-sealing cap with drain wire. 2. Portable Feed-Through Accessory: Two-terminal,dead-front junction arranged for removable mounting on accessory stand of stationary terminal junction. 3. Grounding Kit: Jumpered elbows, portable feed-through accessory units, protective caps, test rods suitable for concurrently grounding three phases of feeders, and carrying case. 4. Standoff Insulator: Portable, single dead-front terminal for removable mounting on accessory stand of stationary terminal junction. Insulators suitable for fully insulated isolation of energized cable-elbow terminator. F. Test-Point Fault Indicators: Applicable current-trip ratings and arranged for installation in test points of load-break separable connectors, and complete with self-resetting indicators capable of being installed with shotgun hot stick and tested with test tool. G. Tool Set: Shotgun hot stick with energized terminal indicator,fault-indicator test tool, and carrying case. 2.7 SPLICE KITS A. Splice Kits: Comply with IEEE 404;type as recommended by cable or splicing kit manufacturer for the application. B. Splicing Products: As recommended, in writing, by splicing kit manufacturer for specific sizes, materials, ratings,and configurations of cable conductors. Include all components required for complete splice, with detailed instructions. 1. Combination tape and cold-shrink-rubber sleeve kit with rejacketing by cast- epoxy-resin encasement or other waterproof, abrasion-resistant material. 2. Heat-shrink splicing kit of uniform, cross-section, polymeric construction with outer heat-shrink jacket. 3. Premolded, cold-shrink-rubber, in-line splicing kit. 4. Premolded, EPDM splicing body kit with cable joint sealed by interference fit of mating parts and cable. 5. Separable multiway splice system with all components for the required splice configuration. 2.8 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TAPES A. Ethylene/propylene rubber-based, 30-mil (0.76-mm)splicing tape, rated for 130 deg C operation. Minimum 3/4 inch (20 mm) wide. B. Silicone rubber-based, 12-mil (0.30-mm) self-fusing tape, rated for 130 deg C Medium Voltage Cables 26 05 13.00-4 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 operation. Minimum 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide. C. Insulating-putty, 125-mil (3.175-mm) elastic filler tape. Minimum 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide. 2.9 ARC PROOFING MATERIALS A. Tape for First Course on Metal Objects: 10-mil- (250-micrometer-) thick, corrosion-protective, moisture-resistant, PVC pipe-wrapping tape. B. Arc-Proofing Tape: Fireproof tape,flexible,conformable, intumescentto0.3 inch (8 mm) thick, and compatible with cable jacket. C. Glass-Cloth Tape: Pressure-sensitive adhesive type, 1 inch (25 mm) wide. 2.10 FAULT INDICATORS A. Indicators: [Automatically] [Manually] reset fault indicator[ with inrush restraint feature],arranged to clamp to cable sheath and provide a display after a fault has occurred in cable. Instrument shall not be affected by heat, moisture, and corrosive conditions and shall be recommended by manufacturer for installation conditions. B. Resetting Tool: Designed for use with fault indicators, with moisture-resistant storage and carrying case. 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Test and inspect cables according to ICEA S-93-639 before shipping. B. Test strand-filled cables for water-penetration resistance accordingtolCEAT-31- 610, using a test pressure of 5 psig (35 kPa). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install cables according to IEEE 576. B. Proof conduits prior to conductor installation by passing a wire brush mandrel and then a rubber duct swab through the conduit. Separate the wire brush and the rubber swab by 48 to 72 inches (1200 to 1800 mm) on the pull rope. 1. Wire Brush Mandrel: Consists of a length of brush approximately the size of the conduit inner diameter with stiff steel bristles and an eye on each end for attaching the pull ropes. If an obstruction is felt, pull the brush back and forth repeatedly to break up the obstruction. 2. Rubber Duct Swab: Consists of a series of rubber discs approximately the size of the conduit inner diameter on a length of steel cable with an eye on each end for attaching the pull ropes. Pull the rubber duct swab through the ductto extract loose debris from the duct. C. Pull Conductors: Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. 1. Where necessary, use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant that does not deteriorate conductor or insulation. 2. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave cable grips, that do not damage cables and raceways. Do not use rope hitches for Medium Voltage Cables 26 05 13.00-5 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 pulling attachment to cable. 3. Use pull-in guides,cable feeders,and draw-in protectors as required to protect cables during installation. 4. Do not pull cables with ends unsealed. Seal cable ends with rubber tape. D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicularto surfaces of exposed structural members and follow surface contours where possible. E. Support cables according to Section 260529"Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." Install cables in Duct Banks as per drawings and details. F. Install direct-buried cables on leveled and tamped bed of 3-inch-(75-mm-)thick, clean sand. Separate cables crossing other cables or piping by a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) of tamped earth, plus an additional 2 inches (50 mm) of sand. Install permanent markers at ends of cable runs,changes in direction,and buried splices. G. Install "buried-cable" warning tape 12 inches (305 mm) above cables. H. In manholes, handholes, pull boxes,junction boxes,and cable vaults,train cables around walls by the longest route from entry to exit; support cables at intervals adequate to prevent sag. I. Install sufficient cable length to remove cable ends under pulling grips. Remove length of conductor damaged during pulling. J. Install cable splices at pull points and elsewhere as indicated; use standard kits. Use dead-front separable watertight connectors in manholes and other locations subject to water infiltration. K. Install terminations at ends of conductors, and seal multiconductor cable ends with standard kits. L. Install separable insulated-connector components as follows: 1. Protective Cap: At each terminal junction,with one on each terminal to which no feeder is indicated to be connected. 2. Portable Feed-Through Accessory: At each terminal junction,with one on each terminal. 3. Standoff Insulator: At each terminal junction, with one on each terminal. M. Arc Proofing: Unless otherwise indicated, arc proof medium-voltage cable at locations not protected by conduit, cable tray, direct burial, or termination materials. In addition to arc-proofing tape manufacturer's written instructions, apply arc proofing as follows: 1. Clean cable sheath. 2. Wrap metallic cable components with 10-mil(250-micrometer)pipe-wrapping to pe. 3. Smooth surface contours with electrical insulation putty. 4. Apply arc-proofing tape in one half-lapped layer with coated side toward cable. 5. Band arc-proofing tape with two layers of 1-inch-(25-mm-) wide half-lapped, adhesive, glass-cloth tape at each end of the arc-proof tape. N. Provide suitable firestop rated seal around cables passing through fire-rated elements. O. Install fault indicators on each phase where indicated. P. Ground shields of shielded cable at terminations,splices,and separable insulated connectors. Ground metal bodies of terminators, splices, cable and separable Medium Voltage Cables 26 05 13.00-6 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 insulated-connector fittings, and hardware. Q. Ground shields of shielded cable at one point only. Maintain shield continuity and connections to metal connection hardware at all connection points. R. Identify cables according to Section 260553"Identification for Electrical Systems." Identify phase and circuit number of each conductor at each splice,termination, pull point, and junction box. Arrange identification so that it is unnecessary to move the cable or conductor to read the identification. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency,ownerwill engage a qualified testing agencyto perform tests and inspections. B. After all cable terminations are made, coordinate with and assist owners test agency to perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. After installing medium-voltage cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 3. Perform direct-current High Potential test of each new conductor accordingto NETA ATS, Ch. 7.3.3. Do not exceed cable manufacturer's recommended maximum test voltage. C. Medium-voltage cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION Medium Voltage Cables 26 05 13.00-7 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 26 05 19 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install 600-volt wires and cables. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 00 "Common Work Results for Electrical." B. Work shall include building wire, cable, wiring connections and terminations, and modular wiring systems. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing: Megger test circuits for continuity and ground. Verify phasing at connection points. Torque test conductor connections and terminations to the Manufacturer's recommended values. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member Company of NETA and/or NRTL C. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 0133 00 "Submittal Procedures" and shall include: 1. Product Data for each type of product 2. Field Test/Quality Control Reports 3. Qualification Data for Testing Agency 1.04 STANDARDS A. The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: 1. National Electrical Manufacturer Association (NEMA) Standards: NEMA WC-3 Rubber-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy NEMA WC-5 Thermoplastic-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver cable and wire to the project site in the original packages. Conductors with damaged insulation or exposed nylon jacketing shall not be permitted. Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 260519- 1 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 2.00 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division 2. Alpha Wire 3. Belden Inc. 4. Encore Wire Corporation 5. General Cable Technologies Corporation 6. Southwire Incorporated 7. Okonite Company(Preferred) B. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658. C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for Type THHN,Type THWN, and Type XHHW or as indicated on the drawings. D. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for Tray Cable,Type TC with ground wire. E. Conductors: Soft-drawn, annealed copper with a conductivity of not less than that of 98 percent pure copper bearing the U.L. label. The minimal size shall be#12. F. Single Conductors: Conductor with thermoplastic insulation rated at 600 volts and insulated with type THHN/THWN or XHHW insulation. Wire in light fixture channels and other special locations shall be as specifically noted for temperature in NEC Article 300. G. Ground Wire: Tinned, Class B stranded conductor without insulation H. Paired Shielded Cable: 18 gauge, 7/28 stranded,tinned copper conductors with 0.015-inch extruded PVC; 0.004-inch nylon insulation twisted into pairs, stranded into a core and enclosed by a non-hygroscopic core tape, 100 percent coverage, helically wound, aluminum foil shield, drain wire, and 0.045-inch minimum extruded PVCjacket. Pairs shall be black/red or black/white numbered. Cables shall be 600 volts in accordance with NEC-725 and IEEE 383. I. Triad Shielded Cable (RTD Cable): RTD cable shall have the following characteristics: 1. Eight triads each with three 18 AWG conductors 2. Triads shall each have individual shield and overall shield. 3. Each conductor insulated for 600 V and entire cable rated for 90 C. Primary Insulation 15 mils nominal; PVC; 4 mils nylon Number of Conductors 3 Color Code Black and white and red Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 260519-2 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 Group Identification Each triad numbered 100%coverage; .35 mil aluminum x .5 mil Mylar tape and 20 gauge 7 strand tinned copper drain wire; shield tape to Pair Shield be applied to give a total shield isolation from all other triad shields. Cable Shield 100%coverage; 2.35 mil aluminum Mylar tape shield and an 18 gauge 7 strand tinned copper drain wire. Jacket Black 90 C FR PVC J. Tray Cable: Type TC; multi-conductor cable specifically approved for the installation in cable trays, in accordance with NEC Article 340. Each cable conductor shall be insulated with THHN/THWN or XHHW type insulation rated at 600 volts. The individual conductors shall be twisted together and jacketed with a PVC outer covering containing a U.L. label and necessary identification, including the Manufacturer,the number of conductors, size, insulation type, sun-resistance, and other pertinent information. 2.02 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into Work include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Gardner Bender 3. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 4. Ideal Industries, Inc. 5. Ilsco; a branch of Bardes Corporation 6. NSi Industries LLC 7. O-Z/Gedney: a brand of the EGS Electrical Group 8. 3M; Electrical Markets Division 9. Tyco Electronics/ Raychem (Preferred) B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, Ampacity rating, material, type and class for application and service indicated. 2.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Electrical Components, Devices and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70 by a qualified testing agency and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with NFPA 70. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 260519-3 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 A. Completely swab raceway system before installing conductors. Do not use cleaning agents and lubricants which have a deleterious effect on the conductors or their insulation. 3.02 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS A. Feeders: Stranded Copper B. Branch Circuits: Stranded Copper 3.03 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS A. Service Entrance: Type XHHW single conductors in raceway B. Exposed Feeders:Type XHHW single conductors in raceway C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings,Walls, Partitions and Crawlspaces: Type XHHW single conductors in raceway D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade and Underground: Type XHHW single conductors in raceway E. Feeders in Cable Tray: Tray Cable Type TC F. Exposed Branch Circuits: Type XHHW single conductors in raceway G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade and Underground: Type XHHW single conductors in raceway H. Branch Circuits in Cable Tray: Tray Cable Type TC 3.04 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Unless necessary for pulling purposes, conductors shall be continuous from terminal block to terminal block without splice. Condulet type fittings shall not contain splices. No splicing of conductors shall be performed in any below ground structure. 2. Splice only in junction or outlet boxes. Neatly train wiring inside boxes, equipment and panelboards. Pull conductors into a raceway at the same time and use U.L. listed, wire pulling lubricant for pulling No. 4 AWG and larger wire. Install raceway first as a complete system without conductors. Do not install pull wires and conductors until the raceway system is in place. 3. Circuits shall be tagged at terminations (both ends), in pull boxes, cabinets, and enclosures as follows: a. Tags relying on adhesives or taped-on markers are not acceptable. b. Provide conductor tags for conductors No. 10 AWG and below with legible permanent sleeve of yellow or white PVC with machine printed black marking, Raychem TMS sleeves or approved equal. c. Provide tags for cables and for conductors No. 8 AWG and larger consisting of permanent nylon marker plates with legible designations hot stamped on the plate. Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 260519-4 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 Attach these marker plates to conductors and cables with plastic wire wraps. Tags shall be Raychem TMS-CM cable markers or approved equal. d. Tags shall be imprinted with panelboard and panelboard position number(e.g. LA3- 23)for conductors fed from panelboards. Other conductors shall have tags imprinted with the MCC which feeds the conductors (e.g. MCC 1). e. Switchlegs shall have the designation described above on their tags, plus an "S" suffix. Travelers shall have the designation described above on their tags, plus a "T" suffix. f. Where more than one neutral is present with a group of conductors, a tag shall be applied to each neutral indicating which phase conductors are served by each neutral (e.g. HA-2, 4, 6). 4. Wire other than telephone station wire shall be stranded. The minimum size conductor permitted is#12 AWG, except as specifically indicated on the plans. Wire shall bear the approval of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Conductors terminated on a screw termination shall have a crimp on type spade connector applied on the wire end, Panduit PanTerm or approved equal. 5. Color coding of cables shall comply with the local city codes. In the absence of a local color coding requirement,the following shall be used: a. For 480/277-V, 3-phase wiring: Phase A Brown Phase B Orange Phase C Yellow Neutral Gray Equipment Grounding Conductor Green b. For 208/120 or 240/120-V, 3-phase wiring: Phase A Black Phase B Red Phase C Blue Neutral White Equipment Grounding Conductor I Green c. For 240/120-V, 1-phase wiring: Leg A Black Leg B Red Neutral White Equipment Grounding Conductor Green 6. Colored,vinyl marking tape shall be allowed only on conductors greater than 8 AWG. Under no condition shall conductors of a different color be spliced together. Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 260519-5 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 7. Grouping conductors together into one conduit shall not be allowed where the plans indicate the conductors to be placed in separate conduits. Each home run shown on the plans shall be in its own conduit. B. Single Conductors: Conductors shall be continuous from outlet to outlet and no splices shall be made except at outlets. Sufficient wire shall be left at outlets to make connections to equipment without straining. C. Paired Shielded and Triad Shielded Cable: Ground paired shielded and triad shielded cables at the instrument panel end only and insulate from ground elsewhere. The shield shall be continuous for the entire run. The paired shielded and triad shielded cable shall not be laced with or placed in the same conduit with power cables. Each termination of paired shielded or triad shielded cable shall be coated with silicone jelly after termination. The shield of pair shielded cable and triad shielded cable shall only be broken when the conductors are terminated on terminal strips. D. Ground Conductors: 1. Conduits and other raceway shall contain an equipment grounding conductor whether the raceway is metallic or not. Conduits, motors, cabinets, outlets, and other equipment shall be properly grounded in accordance with National Electric Code requirements. Where ground wire is exposed to mechanical damage, install wire in rigid aluminum conduit. Make connections to equipment with solderless connections. Wire connections to the ground rods of the ground mat shall be of the fused type equal to the Cadweld process. 2. Ground metallic material, including but not limited to metallic raceway, metallic boxes and metallic enclosures. Where metallic material is not connected by raceway to a solid ground, connect the metallic material to the largest equipment grounding conductor which it houses. Clean the metal surface under the grounding lug to bright metal. Connections to motors shall be to the grounding stud which shall be threaded into the stationary frame; Burndy KC Servit, or approved equal and not an end bell. The ground wire shall not be lugged to a mounting bolt. 3. Ground wire shall be uninsulated tinned copper sized as shown on the plans in all cases where a single ground wire is indicated to be installed in a conduit with no other conductors in the conduit, or where the ground wire is directly buried in earth or concrete. In all other cases, insulate ground wire with insulation as specified for low voltage wire. END OF SECTION Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 260519-6 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 26 05 19.01 WIRE CONNECTIONS AND DEVICES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install wire connections and devices. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 00 "Common Work Results for Electrical." 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. 600-volt connectors shall comply with the specifications and the following Manufacturers will be acceptable: a. Burndy. b. Thomas& Betts. c. Ideal Industries. d. Ilsco e. Gould Shawmut f. Allen Bradley g. Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall include all applicable wire connectors and devices. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS A. Connectors, Compression: For splicing and termination; 600-volt wiring; connectors for cable sizes 250 MCM and larger shall be the long barrel type for double indentation (soldered connections shall not be permitted). B. Connectors, 600-Volt Twist-On: Spring insulated, properly sized and resistant to vibration; may be used for No. 14 through No. 10 gauge conductors. C. Connectors, 600-Volt Terminal: Of the appropriate hole sizes and spacing which are in accordance with NEMA standards;two holes in the tongue for use on conductor sizes 250 MCM or larger; not required for connections to the circuit breakers in the lighting and/or receptacle panels. D. 600-Volt Plastic Tape: Minnesota Mining& Manufacturing Company, No. 35. E. Wirenuts: Buchannan B-Cap, Ideal, ITT or Panduit spring wire connecting devices with plastic covering; shall be reusable after initial installation and removal. 3M Scotchloks shall not be installed on this project. Wire Connections and Devices 26 05 19.01- 1 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 F. Mechanical Set Screw Connector: Blackburn HPS, ADR-ALCUL, GP or GT, Burndy or Ilsco; consisting of an aluminum body which has openings on opposite ends for insertion of the conductors. Conductors inserted into these holes shall each be clamped by two set screws. Connectors shall be suitable for use with copper conductors. G. Rubber Tape: Scotch 2210. H. Vinyl Tape: Scotch 88. I. Insulating Resin: Scotch 3576, 3577, or 3578. J. Power Distribution Blocks: Gould Shawmut, Ilsco or Allen Bradley; rated for 600 VAC and termination of copper conductors. Individual poles shall be constructed of tin plated aluminum and mounted on an insulating base. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Insulate connections made with non-insulated connectors with a minimum of three layers of plastic tape. Half-lap each layer. B. Splice 600-volt conductors in junction boxes or at outlets only. C. For No. 10 and smaller, connect conductors with a twist-on spring wirenut. If a splice or tap is below 3 feet above the final grade,fill the spring connectors with an electrical insulating resin so that conductor and spring materials are encapsulated by the resin. Conductor splices and taps inside enclosures shall be on the terminal strips or power distribution blocks. D. For No. 8 and larger, connect conductors with a mechanical, set screw type connector. Wrap splices and taps with a single half-lapped layer or rubber tape followed by successive layers of vinyl tape until a vinyl tape layer thickness of twice the original conductor insulation thickness is achieved. If splice or tap is below 3 feet above the finished grade,the tape or splice shall have a final outer coating or insulating resin. E. Furnish and install power distribution blocks as shown on the plans for tapping conductors at their load connection point with conductors of smaller size. Install power distribution blocks with the number of poles and sizes needed for connecting the phase, neutral, and ground conductors. F. Pair shielded cable shield and triad shielded cable (RTD cable) shield shall be broken at terminal strips only. END OF SECTION Wire Connections and Devices 26 05 19.01-2 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install a complete grounding system in strict accordance with Article 250 of the National Electrical Code (NEC) as shown on the drawings or as specified herein. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 00 "Common Work Results for Electrical." 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal shall be in accordance with Section 0133 00 "Submittal Procedures" and shall include: 1. Grounding materials, equipment and processes. 2. Product Data: For each type of product supplied. 3. Field quality-control test reports. 4. Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems. 5. Grounding for sensitive electronic equipment. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member Company of NETA or an NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS A. Measure the ground grid resistance with the earth test megger and install additional ground rods and conductors as required until the resistance to the ground conforms to National Electrical Code requirements. Ground resistance measurement shall not exceed 5 ohms. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Ground Rods: Stainless Steel having a diameter of 3/4 inch and a minimum length of 10 feet. B. Ground Cables: Stranded, bare tinned copper of 98 percent conductivity and as specified in Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." Grounding and Bonding For Electrical Systems 260526- 1 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 C. Conduit Ground Fittings: Fittings for bonding ground cable to the conduit shall be FCI Burndy Corp.,type NE or Thomas& Betts No. 3951 series or approved equal. D. Ground Rod Boxes: Precast Box with cast iron lid. Lid shall read "ground rod" on lid. Brooks Precast Model. "3-RT" or approved equal. Ground rod boxes located in driveway areas shall have an AASHO H-20 rating. E. Ground Plate Electrodes: 20 gauge copper with terminated 2-foot welded pigtail connection. 2.02 PROCESSES A. All grounding system connections to building steel and ground rods shall be exothermically welded including all cable connections, and cable steel terminations. B. All materials involved must be from the same sources to insure compatibility. Connections made from this process shall meet the requirements of IEEE Standards 80 and 837 and as listed in MIL 419 and other standards, National Electrical Code, etc. C. All welding materials used shall be Cadweld Materials—as manufactured by ERICO Products, Inc., or approved equal. 2.03 GROUNDING SYSTEM A. Provide a grounding system that includes all connections and the testing of ground rods, ground cables, ground buses, conduits,fittings, anchor supports,thermite process materials and equipment and other materials required for a complete installation. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Conductor Terminations and Connections: 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted/clamp type connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Exothermically welded connectors, except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. 3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Exothermically welded connectors. 4. Connections to Structural Steel: Exothermically welded connectors. B. Ground electrical work in accordance with NEC Article 250 and local codes. C. Install ground cables in conduits above grade or directly buried in earth to a depth of not less than 12 inches below grade. Installation to provide sufficient mechanical protection so as not to break ground cables or connections. D. Install ground cables continuously between connections. Splices shall not be permitted, except where indicated on the plans. Where ground cables pass through floor slabs, buildings, etc., and when not in metallic enclosures, provide a sleeve of approved, non- metallic materials. Grounding and Bonding For Electrical Systems 260526-2 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 E. Install a green-colored, equipment grounding conductor in raceways. Size conductors in accordance with NEC Article 250. F. Where ground wire is directly buried in earth or concrete, use standard bare tinned copper cable, in all other cases install a green-colored insulation, equipment grounding conductor in accordance with Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." Size conductors in accordance with NEC Article 250. Provide grounding conductors as required per the NEC. G. Metal conduits stubbed up into switchgear, motor control center or other electrical equipment shall be terminated with insulated grounding bushings and connected to the equipment ground bus. Size the grounding wire in accordance with applicable sections of the National Electrical Code. H. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance, except where routed through short lengths of conduit. 1. Provide grounding and bonding jumpers as required per the NEC. 2. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure,taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. 3. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. 4. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp. I. Grounding and Bonding for Piping: 1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus,to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes, using a bolted clamp connector or by bolting a lug-type connector to a pipe flange, using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end. 2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector. 3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve. J. Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install a copper bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity. K. Liquid tight flexible metal conduit in sizes 1 foot to 1 foot-2 inches or larger shall have bonding jumpers. Bonding jumpers shall be external, run in parallel (not spiraled) and fastened with plastic tie wraps. L. All equipment enclosures, motor and transformer frames, conduit systems, cable armor, exposed structural steel and all other equipment and materials required by the NEC to be grounded, shall be grounded and bonded in accordance with the NEC. Provide grounding and bonding jumpers as required per the NEC. Grounding and Bonding For Electrical Systems 260526-3 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 M. Ground transformer neutrals to the nearest available grounding electrode with a conductor sized in accordance with NEC Article 250. N. Run a grounding cable the full length of each cable tray section and bond to each cable tray section. Provide#4/0 bare copper in cable tray. O. Where exothermic bonding is used, molds shall be of the appropriate size for the wire and rod used. All bonds shall remain exposed for inspection of the Owner's Representative. P. Ground rod shall be installed such that the top of the ground rod is 6" below grade and enclosed by a ground rod box. Q. Install #4/0 AWG bare tinned copper ground cable that follows the route of the underground duct banks on top of the duct bank envelop, but in no case is embedded in the concrete. Run ground through the manholes. Tie ground cable to pump station main grounding system at both ends. R. At each convenience outlet, install a grounding clip attached to the outlet box and leave a sufficient length of#12 wire with green-colored insulation to connect to the grounding terminal at the receptacle. S. Signal and Communication Equipment: 1. For telephone, alarm,voice and data, and other communication equipment, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location,terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment location. 2. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding conductor on a 1/4-by-2-by-12-inch grounding bus. 3. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal. 3.02 INSPECTION A. Inspect the grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper installation. B. Use Biddle Direct Reading Earth Resistance Tester or equivalent to measure resistance to ground of the system. Perform testing in accordance with the test instrument manufacturer's recommendation using the fall of potential method in accordance with IEEE 81. C. All test equipment shall be provided under this section and approved by the Engineer. D. Resistance to ground testing shall be performed during dry season. Submit test results in the form of a graph showing the number of points measured (12 minimum) and the numerical resistance to ground. E. Testing shall be performed before energizing the distribution system. F. A separate test shall be conducted for each building or system. G. Notify the Engineer immediately if the resistance to ground for any building or system is greater than the following values: 1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA or less: 5 ohms. Grounding and Bonding For Electrical Systems 260526-4 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms. 3. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity more than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms. 4. Power Distribution Units or Panelboards serving electronic equipment: 1 ohm. 5. Substations and Pad Mounted Equipment: 5 ohms. 6. Manhole Grounds: 10 ohms. H. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Owner's Representative promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance. Provide additional ground rods and conductors as required to bring the resistance to required level. END OF SECTION Grounding and Bonding For Electrical Systems 260526-5 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install supporting devices. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 00 "Common Work Results for Electrical." 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code—Steel". B. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.03 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement and formwork requirements are specified together with Concrete Specifications. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 0133 00 "Submittal Procedures" and shall include all applicable units, materials and appurtenances for the following: 1. Steel slotted support systems. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following: 1. Trapeze Hangers. Include Product Data for components. 2. Steel Slotted Channel Systems. Include Product Data for Components. 3. Equipment Supports. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 SUPPORT,ANCHORAGE AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4,factory fabricated components for field assembly. For this project, all steel supports shall be hot double dipped galvanized or aluminum materials where approved. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: a. Allied Tube &Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. Hangers and Supports For Electrical Systems 260529- 1 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 c. ERICO International Corporation. d. GS Metals Corporation. e. Thomas& Betts Corporation. f. Unistrut;Tyco International, Ltd. (Preferred) g. Wesanco, Inc. 2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA- 4. 3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-4. 4. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to M F MA-4. 5. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria. B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101. C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Stainless Steel and aluminum hangers, clamps and associated fittings designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. D. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36A 36M, steel plates, shapes and bars; black and galvanized. E. Mounting,Anchoring and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following: 1. Powder Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-316 Stainless steel stud,for use in hardened Portland cement concrete, steel or wood with tension, shear and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: a. Hilti Inc. (Preferred) b. ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. c. MKT Fastening, LLC. d. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit. 2. Mechanical Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, 316 stainless steel for use in hardened Portland cement concrete with tension, shear and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: a. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. b. Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. c. Hilti Inc. (Preferred) Hangers and Supports For Electrical Systems 260529-2 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 d. ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. e. MKT Fastening, LLC. 3. Concrete Inserts: 316 Stainless Steel, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58. 4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: 316 Stainless Steel,type suitable for attached structural element. 5. Through Bolts: 316 Stainless Steel Structural type, hex head and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 6. Toggle Bolts: 316 Stainless Steel All-steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded 316 Stainless Steel. 2.02 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES A. Description: Welded or bolted, 316 stainless steel shapes or aluminum, welded hot dipped galvanized in shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions and bare weight of supported equipment. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter. B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for RMC as scheduled in NECA 1, where its Table 1 lists maximum spacing less than stated in NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall % Inch in diameter. C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt conduit clamps or single bolt conduit clamps using spring friction action for retention in support channel. D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1- 1/2 inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports. 3.02 SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in the Article. B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70. C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading Hangers and Supports For Electrical Systems 260529-3 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 2001b. D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface Mounted Equipment Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard weight concrete, 4 inches thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. 6. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25 or 27) complying with MSS SP-69. 7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers and other devices on slotted channel racks attached to substrate. E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS A. Cut,fit and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment. 3.04 CONCRETE BASES A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than the supported unit and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from the edge of the concrete base. B. Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa) 28-day compressive strength. Install concrete materials, reinforcement and placement requirements as per drawings and details. C. Anchoring Equipment to Concrete Base: 1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings,templates, diagrams, instructions and directions furnished with items to be embedded/mounted. 2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3. Install anchor bolts in accordance with anchor bolt manufacturer's written instructions. Hangers and Supports For Electrical Systems 260529-4 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 3.05 PAINTING A. Touchup: Clean abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching-up field painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION Hangers and Supports For Electrical Systems 260529-5 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal conduits,tubing, and fittings. 2. Nonmetal conduits,tubing, and fittings. 3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 4. Nonmetal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 5. Surface raceways. 6. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. 7. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 26 05 43 "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems"for exterior ductbanks, manholes, and underground utility construction. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit. B. RGS: Galvanized rigid steel conduit. C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. D. RNC: Rigid Non Metallic conduit. E. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit F. FMC: Flexible Metal Conduit 1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For surface raceways,wireways and fittings, standard floor boxes, standard hinged-cover enclosures, and standard cabinets. B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved: Raceways and Boxes For Electrical Systems 260533- 1 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 1. Structural members in paths of conduit groups with common supports. 2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with common supports. B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer. C. Source quality-control reports. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL CONDUITS,TUBING, AND FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. 3. Anamet Electrical, Inc. 4. Electri-Flex Company. 5. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group. 6. Picoma Industries, a subsidiary of Mueller Water Products, Inc. 7. Republic Conduit. 8. Robroy Industries. 9. Southwire Company. 10. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 11. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation. 12. Wheatland Tube Company; a division of John Maneely Company. 13. Approved Equal B. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits,tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. RGS: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6. D. ARC: Comply with ANSI C80.5 and UL 6A. E. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242. F. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit. 1. Comply with NEMA RN 1. 2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch (1 mm), minimum. 3. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797. Raceways and Boxes For Electrical Systems 260533-2 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 G. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel or aluminum. H. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360. I. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 5148. 1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and NFPA 70. 2. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper. 3. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch (1 mm), with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints. J. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity. 2.02 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS,TUBING, AND FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Anamet Electrical, Inc. 3. Arnco Corporation. 4. CANTEX Inc. 5. CertainTeed Corp. 6. Carlon 7. Electri-Flex Company. 8. Kraloy. 9. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 10. Niedax-Kleinhuis USA, Inc. 11. RACO; a Hubbell company. 12. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 13. Approved equal. B. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduits,tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. ENT: Comply with NEMA TC 13 and UL 1653. D. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated. E. LFNC: Comply with UL 1660. Raceways and Boxes For Electrical Systems 260533-3 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 F. Rigid HDPE: Comply with UL 651A. G. Continuous HDPE: Comply with UL 651B. H. Coilable HDPE: Preassembled with conductors or cables, and complying with ASTM D 3485. I. RTRC: Comply with UL 1684A and NEMA TC 14. J. Fittings for ENT and RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material. K. Fittings for LFNC: Comply with UL 5148. L. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less, respectively,when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). M. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." 2.03 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Hoffman; a Pentair company. 3. Mono-Systems, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric—(Preferred). 5. Approved equal. B. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250,Type 1,Type 3R,Type 4X, as indicated on drawings unless otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70. 1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system. D. Wireway Covers: Hinged type NEMA 3R, Screw-cover type NEMA 1, NEMA 4X flanged-and- gasketed as indicated. E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. 2.04 NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Raceways and Boxes For Electrical Systems 260533-4 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 1. Allied Moulded Products, Inc. 2. Hoffman; a Pentair company. 3. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 4. Niedax-Kleinhuis USA, Inc. 5. Approved equal. B. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic wireways and auxiliary gutters shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Description: Fiberglass polyester, extruded and fabricated to required size and shape, without holes or knockouts. Cover shall be gasketed with oil-resistant gasket material and fastened with captive screws treated for corrosion resistance. Connections shall be flanged and have stainless-steel screws and oil-resistant gaskets. D. Description: PVC, extruded and fabricated to required size and shape, and having snap-on cover, mechanically coupled connections, and plastic fasteners. E. Fittings and Accessories: Couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings shall match and mate with wireways as required for complete system. F. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less, respectively,when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). G. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." 2.05 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Adalet. 2. Cooper Technologies Company; Cooper Crouse-Hinds. 3. EGS/Appleton Electric. 4. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company. 5. FSR Inc. 6. Hoffman; a Pentair company—(Preferred). 7. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Division. 8. Kraloy. 9. Milbank Manufacturing Co. Raceways and Boxes For Electrical Systems 260533-5 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 10. Mono-Systems, Inc. 11. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group. 12. RACO; a Hubbell Company. 13. Robroy Industries. 14. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company. 15. Stahlin Non-Metallic Enclosures; a division of Robroy Industries. 16. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 17. Wiremold / Legrand. 18. Approved equal. B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations. C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A. D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, aluminum,Type FD, with gasketed cover. E. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C. F. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 Ib (23 kg). Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 Ib (23 kg) shall be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight. G. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. H. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box. I. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep (100 mm square by 60 mm deep) or 4 inches by 2-1/8 inches by 2-1/8 inches deep (100 mm by 60 mm by 60 mm deep). J. Gangable boxes are prohibited. K. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250,Types as indicated with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated. 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel,finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Fiberglass. 3. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 RACEWAY APPLICATION A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed Conduit: Rigid Aluminum. Raceways and Boxes For Electrical Systems 260533-6 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: Rigid Aluminum. 3. Underground Conduit: RNC,Type EPC-40-PVC, concrete encased. 4. Underground Conduit Stub-ups to Equipment Pads, Concrete Floors or Other: Utilize PVC coated aluminum Long Radius Sweeps for transition from underground ductbank to above ground. 5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 6. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250,Type 4X SS as indicated. B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage in Pump Room: Rigid Aluminum 2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage in Pump Room: Rigid Aluminum 3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage in Pump Room: Rigid Aluminum 4. Exposed in Electrical Room: Rigid Aluminum C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch (21-mm)trade size except for lighting circuit taps not longer than 72". D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Aluminum Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer. 3. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with NEMA FB 2.20. E. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve. F. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth. G. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors. B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot- water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. Raceways and Boxes For Electrical Systems 260533-7 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 D. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports. E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab. F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring conduits,for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches (300 mm) of changes in direction. G. Conceal conduit within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines. H. Support conduit within 12 inches (300 mm)of enclosures to which attached or as otherwise dictated by Code. I. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: 1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch (27-mm)trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot (3-m) intervals. 2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings. 3. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 1 inch (25 mm) of concrete cover in all directions. 4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Engineer for each specific location. 5. Change from ENT to PVC coated RGS or Rigid Aluminum as per conditions before rising above floor. J. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions. K. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive compound prior to assembly. L. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No.4 AWG. M. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch (35mm)trade size and insulated throat metal bushings on 1-1/2-inch (41-mm)trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits. N. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more. O. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path. Raceways and Boxes For Electrical Systems 260533-8 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 P. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch (53-mm)trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length. Q. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-Ib (90-kg)tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use. R. Surface Raceways: 1. Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inch (50-mm)radius control at bend points. 2. Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not exceeding 48 inches (1200 mm) and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section. Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods. S. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70. T. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points: 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. 2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure. 3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. U. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings. V. Expansion-Joint Fittings: 1. Install in each run of aboveground RGS that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F (17 deg C) and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet(7.6 m). Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations: a. Revise list below to include all locations in Project with environmental conditions that require considering expansion-joint fittings in conduit runs. For each Project, consider only locations with PVC conduit with straight-run length exceeding 25 feet (7.6 m) or metal conduit in lengths over 100 feet (30 m). Also revise temperature change for each location so it safely represents conditions anticipated. Temperature-change figures below are examples of maximum total swings from the lowest to the highest environmental temperatures at the indicated types of locations and must be revised to represent temperature swings or changes that may occur at Project locations. b. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F (70 deg C) temperature change. Raceways and Boxes For Electrical Systems 260533-9 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 c. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F (86 deg C)temperature change. 2. Install fitting(s)that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F (0.06 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C) of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s)that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F (0.0115 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C) of temperature change for metal conduits. 3. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints. 4. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement. W. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches (1830 mm) of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. 1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage. X. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel. Y. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes. Z. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose. AA. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT A. Duct Bank—Install duct bank per drawing and details. B. Direct-Buried Conduit: Not Permitted for this Project 3.04 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch (12.5-mm) sieve to No.4 (4.75-mm) sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth. C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other enclosures 1 inch (25 mm) above finished grade. D. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as Raceways and Boxes For Electrical Systems 260533- 10 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in enclosure. E. Field-cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect coatings,finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION Raceways and Boxes For Electrical Systems 260533- 11 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 26 05 43 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Conduit, ducts, and duct accessories for concrete-encased duct banks. 2. Handholes and boxes. 1.03 DEFINITION A. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit. 1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Duct-bank materials, including separators and miscellaneous components. 2. Ducts and conduits and their accessories, including elbows, end bells, bends,fittings, and solvent cement. 3. Accessories for, handholes, boxes, 4. Warning tape. B. Shop Drawings for Precast or Factory-Fabricated Underground Utility Structures: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, attachments to other work, and accessories, including the following: 1. Duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes. 2. Reinforcement details. 3. Grounding details. 4. Joint details. C. Shop Drawings for Factory-Fabricated Handholes and Boxes: Include dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations, and fabrication and installation details, including the following: 1. Duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes. 2. Cover design. 3. Grounding details. Underground Ducts And Raceways For Electrical Systems 260543- 1 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Duct-Bank Coordination Drawings: Show duct profiles and coordination with other utilities and underground structures. 1. Include plans and sections, drawn to scale, and show bends and locations of expansion fittings. 2. Drawings shall be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. B. Product Certificates: For concrete and steel used in precast concrete manholes and handholes, as required by ASTM C 858. C. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency. D. Source quality-control test reports. E. Field quality-control test reports. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. B. Comply with ANSI C2. C. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver ducts to Project site with ends capped. Store nonmetallic ducts with supports to prevent bending, warping, and deforming. B. Store precast concrete and other factory-fabricated underground utility structures at Project site as recommended by manufacturer to prevent physical damage. Arrange so identification markings are visible. C. Lift and support precast concrete units only at designated lifting or supporting points. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner no fewer than 7 days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Owner's written permission. 1.09 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of ducts, handholes, and boxes with final arrangement of other utilities, site grading, and surface features as determined in the field. B. Coordinate elevations of ducts and duct-bank entrances into handholes, and boxes with final locations and profiles of ducts and duct banks as determined by coordination with Underground Ducts And Raceways For Electrical Systems 260543-2 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 other utilities, underground obstructions, and surface features. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as required to suit field conditions and to ensure that duct runs drain to handholes, and as approved by Architect. 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. B. Furnish cable-support stanchions, arms, insulators, and associated fasteners in quantities equal to 5 percent of quantity of each item installed. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUIT A. As per section 26 05 33 "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems". 2.02 HANDHOLES AND BOXES A. Description: Comply with SCTE 77. 1. Color: Green. 2. First option in first subparagraph below facilitates bottom duct entry. Second option may be provided by a separate slab placed in the excavation under an open-bottom enclosure;third option is obtained by molding or fabricating the bottom integrally with the body of the unit. 3. Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have open bottom, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural load rating consistent with enclosure. 5. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 6. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC." Or as indicated for each service. 7. Consider retaining subparagraph below if wires or cables are direct buried and will enter enclosure through the side. Otherwise, entry will be made through an open bottom or through side openings cut in the field as specified in Part 3. Coordinate with Drawings. 8. Direct-Buried Wiring Entrance Provisions: Knockouts equipped with insulated bushings or end-bell fittings, selected to suit box material, sized for wiring indicated, and arranged for secure,fixed installation in enclosure wall. 9. Retain first subparagraph below if ducts will enter enclosure through the side. Otherwise, entry will be made through an open bottom or through side openings cut in the field as specified in Part 3. Coordinate with Drawings. 10. Duct Entrance Provisions: Duct-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts for secure,fixed installation in enclosure wall. Underground Ducts And Raceways For Electrical Systems 260543-3 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 B. Polymer Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with a polymer resin, and reinforced with steel or fiberglass or a combination of the two. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Armorcast Products Company. b. Carson Industries LLC. c. CDR Systems Corporation. d. NewBasis. e. Approved equal. C. Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes with Polymer Concrete Frame and Cover: Sheet-molded, fiberglass-reinforced, polyester resin enclosure joined to polymer concrete top ring or frame. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Armorcast Products Company. b. Carson Industries LLC. c. Christy Concrete Products. d. Synertech Moulded Products, Inc.; a division of Oldcastle Precast. e. Approved equal. D. Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes: Molded of fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin,with covers of fiberglass. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Carson Industries LLC. b. Christy Concrete Products. c. Nordic Fiberglass, Inc. d. Approved equal. Underground Ducts And Raceways For Electrical Systems 260543-4 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Test and inspect precast concrete utility structures according to ASTM C 1037. B. Nonconcrete Handhole and Pull-Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of boxes for compliance with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products supplied. 1. Tests of materials shall be performed by a independent testing agency. 2. Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an independent testing agency or the manufacturer. A City provided qualified registered professional engineer shall certify tests by manufacturer. 3. Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification complying with ISO 9000 and ISO 10012, and traceable to NIST standards. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 UNDERGROUND DUCT APPLICATION A. Ducts for Electrical Cables Over 600 V: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, in concrete-encased duct bank, unless otherwise indicated. B. Ducts for Electrical Feeders 600 V and Less: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, in concrete- encased duct bank, unless otherwise indicated. C. Underground Ducts Crossing paved paths,walks, driveways, roadways or railroads: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, encased in reinforced concrete. 3.02 EARTHWORK A. Excavation and Backfill: Do not use heavy-duty, hydraulic-operated, compaction equipment. B. Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation and reestablish original grades, unless otherwise indicated. Replace removed sod immediately after backfilling is completed. C. Restore areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other work. Restore vegetation and include necessary topsoiling,fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging, and mulching. D. Cut and patch existing pavement in the path of the underground ducts and utility structure. 3.03 DUCT INSTALLATION A. Slope: Pitch ducts a minimum slope of 1:300 down toward handholes and away from buildings and equipment. Slope ducts from a high point in runs to drain in both directions. B. Curves and Bends: Use 5-degree angle couplings for small changes in direction. Use manufactured long sweep bends both horizontally and vertically, at other locations, unless otherwise indicated. C. Joints: Use solvent-cemented joints in ducts and fittings and make watertight according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger couplings so those of adjacent ducts do not lie in same plane. Underground Ducts And Raceways For Electrical Systems 260543-5 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 D. Sealing: Provide temporary closure at terminations of ducts that have cables pulled. Seal spare ducts at terminations. Use sealing compound and plugs to withstand at least 15-psig (1.03-MPa) hydrostatic pressure. E. Pulling Cord: Install 100-lbf- (445-N-)test nylon cord in ducts, including spares. F. Concrete-Encased Ducts: Support ducts on duct separators. 1. Separator Installation: Space separators close enough to prevent sagging and deforming of ducts,with not less than 4 spacers per 20 feet(6 m)of duct. Secure separators to earth and to ducts to prevent floating during concreting. Stagger separators approximately 6 inches (150 mm) between tiers. Tie entire assembly together using fabric straps; do not use tie wires or reinforcing steel that may form conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups. 2. Concreting Sequence: Pour each run of envelope between or other terminations in one continuous operation. a. Start at one end and finish at the other, allowing for expansion and contraction of ducts as their temperature changes during and after the pour. Use expansion fittings installed according to manufacturer's written recommendations, or use other specific measures to prevent expansion-contraction damage. b. If more than one pour is necessary,terminate each pour in a vertical plane and install 3/4-inch (19-mm) reinforcing rod dowels extending 18 inches (450 mm) into concrete on both sides of joint near corners of envelope. 3. Pouring Concrete: Spade concrete carefully during pours to prevent voids under and between conduits and at exterior surface of envelope. Do not allow a heavy mass of concrete to fall directly onto ducts. Use a plank to direct concrete down sides of bank assembly to trench bottom. Allow concrete to flow to center of bank and rise up in middle, uniformly filling all open spaces. Do not use power-driven agitating equipment unless specifically designed for duct-bank application. 4. Reinforcement: Reinforce concrete-encased duct banks where they cross disturbed earth and where indicated. Arrange reinforcing rods and ties without forming conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups. 5. Forms: Use walls of trench to form side walls of duct bank where soil is self-supporting and concrete envelope can be poured without soil inclusions; otherwise, use forms. 6. Minimum Space between Ducts: 3 inches (75 mm) between ducts and exterior envelope wall, 2 inches (50 mm) between ducts for like services, and 4 inches (100 mm) between power and signal ducts. 7. Depth: Install top of duct bank at least 24 inches (600 mm) below finished grade in areas not subject to deliberate traffic, and at least 30 inches (750 mm) below finished grade in deliberate traffic paths for vehicles, unless otherwise indicated. 8. Stub-Ups: Use manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor, unless otherwise indicated. Extend concrete encasement throughout the length of the elbow. 9. Stub-Ups: Use manufactured rigid metal conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor. Underground Ducts And Raceways For Electrical Systems 260543-6 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 a. Couple metal conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches (75 mm)of concrete. b. Stub-Ups to Equipment: For equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches (1500 mm)from edge of base. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment. 10. Warning Tape: Bury warning tape approximately 12 inches (300 mm) above all concrete-encased ducts and duct banks. Align tape parallel to and within 3 inches (75 mm)of the centerline of duct bank. Provide an additional warning tape for each 12-inch (300-mm) increment of duct-bank width over a nominal 18 inches (450 mm). Space additional tapes 12 inches (300 mm) apart, horizontally. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF CONCRETE HANDHOLES, AND BOXES A. Elevations: 1. Handhole Covers: In paved areas and trafficways, set surface flush with finished grade. Set covers of other handholes 1 inch (25 mm) above finished grade. 2. Where indicated, cast handhole cover frame integrally with handhole structure. B. Drainage: Install drains in bottom of manholes where indicated. Coordinate with drainage provisions indicated. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF HANDHOLES AND BOXES A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting ducts to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. Use box extension if required to match depths of ducts, and seal joint between box and extension as recommended by the manufacturer. B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) sieve to No.4 (4.75-mm) sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth. C. Elevation: In paved areas and trafficways, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other handholes 1 inch (25 mm) above finished grade. D. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables, but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in the enclosure. E. Field-cut openings for ducts and conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed. F. For enclosures installed in asphalt paving or earth and subject to occasional, nondeliberate, heavy-vehicle loading,form and pour a concrete ring encircling, and in contact with, enclosure and with top surface screeded to top of box cover frame. Bottom of ring shall rest on compacted earth. 1. Concrete: 3000 psi (20 kPa), 28-day strength, complying with Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in- Place Concrete," with a troweled finish. Underground Ducts And Raceways For Electrical Systems 260543-7 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 2. Dimensions: 10 inches wide by 12 inches deep (250 mm wide by 300 mm deep). 3.06 GROUNDING A. Ground underground ducts and utility structures according to Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements on completion of installation of underground ducts and utility structures. 2. Pull aluminum or wood test mandrel through duct to prove joint integrity and test for out-of-round duct. Provide mandrel equal to 80 percent fill of duct. If obstructions are indicated, remove obstructions and retest. 3. Test manhole grounding to ensure electrical continuity of grounding and bonding connections. Measure and report ground resistance as specified in Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." B. Correct deficiencies and retest as specified above to demonstrate compliance. 3.08 CLEANING A. Pull leather-washer-type duct cleaner, with graduated washer sizes,through full length of ducts. Follow with rubber duct swab for final cleaning and to assist in spreading lubricant throughout ducts. END OF SECTION Underground Ducts And Raceways For Electrical Systems 260543-8 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Section Includes: 1. Identification for raceways. 2. Identification of power and control cables. 3. Identification for conductors. 4. Underground-line warning tape. 5. Warning labels and signs. 6. Instruction signs. 7. Equipment identification labels. 8. Miscellaneous identification products. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with ANSI A13.1. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145. D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels. E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, are not acceptable. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Circuits shall be tagged at terminations (both ends), in pull boxes, cabinets, and enclosures as follows: Identification for Electrical Systems 260553- 1 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 1. Tags relying on adhesives or tapes-on markers are not acceptable. 2. Provide conductor tags for conductors No. 10 AWG and below with legible permanent sleeve of yellow or white PVC with machine printed black marking, Raychem TMS sleeves or approved equal. 3. Provide tags for cables and for conductors No. 8 AVWG and larger consisting of perma- nent nylon marker plates with legible designations hot stamped on the plate. Attach these marker plates to conductors and cables with plastic wire wraps. Tags shall be Raychem TMS-CM cable markers or approved equal. 4. Tags shall be imprinted with panelboard and panelboard position number(e.g. LA3-23) for conductors fed from panelboards. Other conductors shall have tags imprinted with the MCC which feeds the conductors (e.g. MCC 1). 5. Switchlegs shall have the designation described above on their tags, plus an "S" suffix. Travelers shall have the designation described above on their tags, plus a "T" suffix. 6. Where more than one neutral is present with a group of conductors, a tag shall be ap- plied to each neutral indicating which phase conductors are served by each neutral (e.g. HA-2, 4, 6). 2.02 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by Ito 2 inches wide. 2.03 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE A. Tape: 1. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and locate underground electrical and communications lines. 2. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations. 3. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when ex- posed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils. B. Color and Printing: 1. Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5. 2. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE 2.04 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145. B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive la- bels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless oth- erwise indicated. C. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs: Identification for Electrical Systems 260553-2 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application. 2. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting. 3. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches. D. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends: 1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER- ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD- EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES." 2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING -OSHA REGULATION -AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES." 2.05 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS A. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient view- ing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device. E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with stainless steel mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate. F. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous under- ground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use mul- tiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches overall. G. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for sur- face preparation and paint application. 3.02 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE Identification for Electrical Systems 260553-3 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 A. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase. 1. Color-Coding for Phase Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for un- grounded service,feeder, and branch-circuit conductors. a. Color shall be field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits: 1) Phase A: Black. 2) Phase B: Red. 3) Phase C: Blue. 4) Neutral: White c. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits: 1) Phase A: Brown. 2) Phase B: Orange. 3) Phase C: Yellow. d. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a mini- mum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwind- ing. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings. B. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable. 1. Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables. 2. Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in race- way. C. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self- adhesive warning labels 1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. 2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. 3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of equip- ment including, but not limited to,the following: a. Power transfer switches. b. Controls with external control power connections. D. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation. E. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Identification for Electrical Systems 260553-4 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations,terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems un- less equipment is provided with its own identification. 1. Labeling Instructions: a. Indoor Equipment: stainless steel screws and nuts, engraved and laminated name- plates. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch high letters on 1-1/2-inch high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high. b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor. d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment,fasten labels with appro- priate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the en- closure. 2. Equipment to Be Labeled: a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panel- board manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be laminated acrylic or mela- mine label and placed in a clear plastic sleeve. b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. c. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the trans- former,feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary. d. Enclosed switches. e. Enclosed circuit breakers. f. Enclosed controllers. g. Push-button stations. h. Monitoring and control equipment. i. Junction and Pull Boxes. END OF SECTION Identification for Electrical Systems 260553-5 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 26 05 73.01 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM STUDIES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION General: This section specifies that the CONTRACTOR prepare a short circuit and protective device coordination study,and an arc flash hazard analysis forthe electrical power system as shown on the plans. NO EQUIPMENT IS TO BE ENERGIZED UNTIL THE POWER SYSTEM STUDIES HAVE BEEN APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER, THE PROTECTIVE RELAYS AND BREAKERS HAVE BEEN SET PER THE SHORT CIRCUIT AND RELAY COORDINATION STUDY AND THE ARC FLASH LABELS HAVE BEEN INSTALLED ON THE EQUIPMENT. NO EXCEPTIONS. Short Circuit and Protective Device Coordination Study, and Arc Flash Analysis The studies shall provide an evaluation of the electrical power system and the model numbers and settings of the protective relays or devices and metering or motor monitoring devices for setting by the CONTRACTOR. The Studies shall include settings for all protective relays and electric system monitoring. The Contractor shall obtain any needed data or information for the electrical equipment from Contract Documents, various suppliers, and from conducting his own field investigations. A. Scope: 1. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for providing all pertinent information necessary for the successful completion of the Short Circuit and Relay Coordination Study, and Arc Flash Analysis. All cable and raceway data,data from all new Switchgear, motor control centers, transformers, panelboards,and separately mounted fuses,starters or circuit breakers shall be obtained by the CONTRACTOR. Obtain all existing or new protective device information to include all present settings. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain any needed data or information from Contract Documents, various suppliers, the Electric Utility and from conducting his own field investigations. The data obtained shall be organized and submitted to the ENGINEER to show that all the necessary data gathering work has been done. 2. Calculations shall utilize actual X/R and three phase short circuit values obtained by the CONTRACTOR from the Electric Utility. The use of infinite bus fault current calculation is not acceptable. 3. The studies shall include both scenarios: under normal power and under generator power. Electrical Power System Studies 26 05 73.01- 1 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 4. Provide a complete short circuit study. Include three phase and phase-to-ground calculations. Provide an equipment interrupting or withstand evaluation based on the actual equipment and model numbers provided on this project. Generic devices are not acceptable. Normal system operating method, alternate operation, and operations that could result in maximum fault conditions shall be thoroughly addressed in the study.The study shall assume all motors operating at rated voltage with the exception that motors identified as"standby"shall not be included. Electrical equipment bus impedance shall be assumed zero. Short circuit momentary duties and interrupting duties shall be calculated on the basis of maximum available fault current at the electrical equipment busses. The Study shall be performed using actual available short circuit currents available and system impedances as obtained from the Electric Utility. An assumption of infinite bus for the purposes of the Study is not acceptable. Study shall use actual motor X/R and subtransient reactance data obtained from equipment suppliers. 5. A protective device coordination study shall be performed to determine appropriate relay settings.The study shall include all electrical equipment provided under this contract and any up-stream equipment that has an impact on the coordination study. The study shall show transformer damage curves,generator damage curves,cable short circuit withstand curves and motor curves. Include all medium and low voltage switchgear, distribution switchboards, motor control centers, starters, and panelboards main circuit breakers. Complete the short circuit study down to the main breaker or main lugs on all panelboards. Panelboard branch circuit devices need not be considered. The phase over current and ground-fault protection shall be included as well as settings for all other adjustable protective devices. All motor monitoring relays and protective or monitoring devices that are a part of a supplier's equipment(such as soft starters,switchgear)shall be in included. Include the last protective device in the Electric Utility's system feeding each facility being considered. 6. Provide Time-Current Curves on 11X17 log-log paper. Do not put more than one branch of protective devices on any one coordination curve. Include a one-line diagram and the names of each protective device in the branch. Use the names designated in the Contract Documents. Include motor and transformer damage curves, and cable short circuit withstand curves. Coordination study time-current curves (11x17 log-log type) including the instrument transformer ratios, model numbers of the protective relays, and the relay settings associated with each breaker. Organize the curves as specified here in. Ground fault time current curves shall be on a separate sheet. 7. An equipment evaluation study shall be performed to determine the adequacy of the fault bracing of all bus from the panelboard level up to the main Switchgear or protective device. Include circuit breakers, controllers, surge arresters, busway, switches, and fuses by tabulating and comparing the short circuit ratings of these devices with the available fault currents. 8. Provide arc flash hazard analysis in accordance with the applicable NFPA, ANSI, and IEEE standards. 9. The studies shall be performed, sealed and signed by a Registered Professional Engineer licensed in the state of Texas. 10. Any problem areas or inadequacies in the equipment shall be promptly brought to the ENGINEER's attention. Electrical Power System Studies 26 05 73.01-2 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 11. Use industry standard short circuit software, SKM CAPTOR and DAPPER or an equal approved by the ENGINEER. 12. The report shall include a comparison of short circuit duties of each bus to the interrupting capacity of the equipment that is protecting that bus. 13. The report shall include all data that was used as input to the report. This data shall include cable impedance, conduit type, source impedance, equipment ratings, motor X/R and subtransient reactance data, etc. 14. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with the Utility for electrical data required for the studies. 15. The studies shall include and model the different operating configurations that may be encountered at the pump station. This includes different transformers operating individually with various main and tie breakers open and closed. The studies shall clearly identify the particular operating configuration being evaluated. 1.02 REFERENCES A. This Section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents,the requirements of this Section shall prevail. Reference Title IEEE 141 Recommended Practicefor Electric Power Distributionfor Industrial Plants IEEE 242 Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems NFPA 70E Handbook for Electrical Safety in the Workplace IEEE 1584 IEEE Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations NEC National Electrical Code 1.03 SCHEDULE A. The report shall be provided to the ENGINEER NO LATER THAN 60 days before the equipment is shipped to the Work site. SHIPMENT AND DELIVERY OF EQUIPMENT WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED ATTHEJOBSITE UNTILTHE STUDY HAS BEEN COMPLETED,SUBMITTED AND APPROVED BYTHE ENGINEER. 1.04 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 0133 00, "Submittal Procedures"and shall include: A. Shop Drawings: 1. Short Circuit and Protective Device Coordination Study. Time current curves shall be on 11x17 log-log type paper. The CONTRACTOR can provide time current curves on 8%x 11 log-log type paper as a supplement but not as a replacement. 2. Arc Flash Hazard Analysis Electrical Power System Studies 26 05 73.01-3 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 a. Provide a color copy of project specific Arc Flash labels for each panelboard, switchboard, switchgear, disconnect, Motor Control Center, VFDs, starters,transfer switches, including all existing electrical equipment—switchgear, starters, motor control center, panelboards, starters, etc. b. Provide a copy of the one-line diagram color-coded to show the incident ranges& clothing classifications at each bus. The one-line shall be on 11x17 paper and shall be separated out across three (3)-11x17 sheets. 1) Provide a table indicating the color coding used for each incident range& clothing classification. The one-line shall also include the information specified in section 2.03 below. The following is a recommended color coding for the following Hazard/Risk Category numbers: a) Green to indicate a Category 0 b) Blue to indicate a Category 1 c) Brown to indicate a Category 2 d) Yellow to indicate a Category 3 e) Orange to indicate a Category 4 f) Red to indicate Above a Category 4 B. Provide six(6)bound color copies of the completed studies to be submitted to the ENGINEER for approval. Each hard copy of studies shall be bound in a 3-ring binder. C. The Contractor shall redo the Power System Studies if any changes are made during the field testing checkout and/or start-up. The Contractor shall submit the Power System Studies for Engineer Approval. The Studies shall include an updated copy of the color copy Arc Flash Labels. D. A CD with all SKM input files and a PDF of all output files is required for both the preliminary and final power system studies submittals. 1. Two Software copies of actual power systems computer program project data files burned in on a CD. The CONTRACTOR shall provide an electronic copy on a CD-ROM of all files used to develop the electrical system model in the power system analysis program and all files for the written study analysis and summary data tables. For instance if SKM software is used for the power system studies,then the SKM files shall be burned in on a CD-ROM and provided to the OWNER/ENGINEER. This shall include any library files used for circuit breakers,fuses, etc.for the power system analysis. 2.00 EXECUTION 2.01 GENERAL A. Provide a short-circuit and relay coordination study load flow and motor starting study,and arc flash hazard analysis on the electrical power distribution system,as specified. The studies shall be performed in accordance with IEEE Standards 141 and 242, IEEE 1584,ANSI, and the NEC and shall utilize the ANSI method of short circuit analysis in accordance with ANSI C37.010. The studies shall be performed using actual equipment data for all equipment. The coordination studies shall use the data from the manufacturer of protective devices. Electrical Power System Studies 26 05 73.01-4 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 2.02 QUALIFICATIONS A. The studies shall be performed by the by an electrical manufacturer/consultant service/electrical testing agency who is regularly engaged in power system studies. A Licensed Professional Engineer with proficiency in electrical power engineering shall conduct the studies and shall seal and sign the studies. The Professional ENGINEER shall be licensed to practice engineering in the State of Texas. A study submitted without a Professional ENGINEER's seal will not be reviewed and returned Not Approved, Revise& Resubmit. 2.03 SHORT CIRCUIT STUDY A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for obtaining and verifying all data needed to perform the study. B. Asa minimum, each short circuit study shall include the following: 1. One-Line Diagram: a. Location and function of each protective device in the system, such as relays, direct- acting trips,fuses, etc. b. Type designation,current rating,range or adjustment,manufacturer's style and catalog number for all protective devices. c. Power and voltage ratings, impedance, primary and secondary connections of all transformers. Use the ratings (ie. Impedence, X/R, etc.) of the actual transformers being provided where available. d. Type, manufacturer, and ratio of all instrument transformers energizing each relay. e. Nameplate ratings of all motors and generators with their subtransient reactances. Transient reactances of synchronous motors and generators and synchronous reactances of all generators. Obtain data on the actual equipment being provided. Generic or average data numbers are not acceptable. f. Sources of short circuit currents such as utility ties, generators, synchronous motors, and induction motors. Provide short circuit studies using each source of power separately. The study shall determine if there is sufficient short circuit current to adequately cause interruption of a protective device using the weaker power source (typically local generation), and shall determine if the equipment can safely interrupt the fault if the greater power source is connected. Additional short circuit calculations shall include emergency as well as normal switching conditions as well as normal and emergency power sources described here in. 1) Show short circuit calculations listing short circuit levels at each bus. Provide the same data in tabular from. g. All significant circuit elements such as transformers, cables, breakers,fuses, reactors, etc shall be included. h. The time-current setting of existing adjustable relays and direct-acting trips, if applicable. i. One-Line showing available fault current at each bus all the way down to the 208Y/120V panelboards. Electrical Power System Studies 26 05 73.01-5 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 2. Impedance Diagram: a. Available MVA or impedance from the utility company. b. Local generated capacity impedance. c. Bus impedance. d. Transformer and/or reactor impedances. e. Cable impedances. f. Equipment impedances. g. System voltages. h. Grounding scheme (resistance grounding, solidly grounding, or no grounding). i. Motor contribution assuming the new and existing motors as shown on the plans all running at the same time. 3. Calculations: a. Determine the paths and situations where short circuit currents are the greatest. Assume bolted faults and calculate the 3-phase and line-to-ground short circuits of each case. b. Calculate the maximum and minimum fault currents. c. A discussion section evaluating the adequacy or inadequacy of the equipment method of calculation and formulas used such that all calculations can be verified manually by the ENGINEER, with recommendations as required for improvements to the system. d. Any inadequacies shall be called to the attention of the ENGINEER and recommendation made for improvements. 2.04 PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY A. As a minimum, the coordination study for the power distribution system shall include the following on 5-cycle, log-log graph paper: 1. The time-current coordination analysis shall be performed with aid of a digital computer. a. Time-current curves for each device shall be positioned to provide for maximum selectivity to minimize system disturbances during fault clearing, but still maintain a low incident energy level.Where selectivity cannot be achieved,the ENGINEER shall be notified as to the cause. 2. Time-current curves for each device shall be positioned to provide for maximum selectivity to minimize system disturbances during fault clearing. Where selectivity cannot be achieved,the ENGINEER shall be notified as to the cause. 3. Time-current curves and points for cable and equipment damage. 4. Circuit interrupting device operating and interrupting times. 5. Indicate maximum fault values on the graph. 6. Sketch of bus and breaker arrangement. 2.05 ARC FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS A. The study shall be performed in accordance with the NEC and all applicable OSHA, ANSI, and IEEE standards. Electrical Power System Studies 26 05 73.01-6 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 B. The CONTRACTOR shall adjust all adjustable time-current devices such that the trip settings lower the arc flash exposure and minimizing the clearing time. However, the CONTRACTOR shall adjust the time-current devices to avoid nuisance tripping. C. The CONTRACTOR shall utilize fault current values from the short circuit analysis to determine the Incident energy, limited approach boundary, restricted approach boundary, prohibited approach boundary and appropriate PPE required. D. The CONTRACTOR shall provide project specific arc-flash labeling. The arc-flash labeling shall be placed on the outside of the cover of the switchgear,motor control centers,combination motor starters, panelboard,switchboard,distribution panel,and all electrical panels,etc.such that it can be read without opening the electrical equipment. Mount arc-flash labels a maximum of 6'- 6"AFF,include the housekeeping pad in the mounting height. The CONTRACTOR shall provide arc-flash labeling on all existing panelboards, switchboards, distribution panel, etc. where breakers are added or work is performed in or on the electrical equipment. E. Arc Flash Labels shall be chemical resistant, UV resistant,water resistant,scratch resistant,and made of 3.0 mil vinyl tape as manufactured by Dura Label, Brady or approved equal. The lettering shall be performed by thermal transfer print. 1. Arc Flash labels and label lettering shall be sized large enough to be legible at a distance outside the hazard area. 2. Arc Flash Labels shall be placed on the door(s) of the room if the hazard area reaches or extends beyond the electrical room door(s). 3. The arc flash label shall include a DANGER header when the incident energy is above 40ca1/cm2, and a WARNING header for all other incident energy levels. F. To ensure a safe workplace, and that the labeling meets NEC, OSHA, IEEE, and NFPA requirements, use specialized arc flash software to calculate protection boundaries. These protection boundaries shall includethe Flash Protection Boundary, Limited Approach Boundary, Restricted Approach Boundary and the Prohibited Approach Boundary. G. The arc-flash analysis shall be based on calculated fault from the Short Circuit Study at each respective bus. The arc-flash software program shall be used to calculate the available arcing fault at each bus in the system,the resultant flash protection boundary based on the applicable protective device operating times and the associated incident energy that workers may be exposed to at the specified working distances. H. The report shall include the following information: Arc-flash evaluation table, arc-flash and shock hazard label definitions, arc-flash evaluation information, arc-flash and shock hazard labels and definitions of terms used in the arc-flash hazard analysis. Electrical Power System Studies 26 05 73.01-7 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 I. Arc Flash labels shall be similar to the following example: AA, WARN 1 GI Arc Flash and Shock Hlazard Appropriate PIPE Required 113 inch Flash Hazard Sourndary 0.67 calfcirn2 Flash Hlazairdat 18 inches Category 11 Hazard/Risk Category, Per NFPA 70E 480 VAC Shock Hazard' when cover is iremoved' 0 Clove Class 42 inch Limited Approach 112 inch Restricted Approach 11 inch Prohibited Approach 110.692 kA Calculated Available Fault Current Equip. ID: Panel LPI Protected By: 125A CB: TX1 (480' IC 1) Study IC1ate: August 9, 201 END OF SECTION Electrical Power System Studies 26 05 73.01-8 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 Attachment A SUBMITTAL CHECKLIST SPECIFICATION: 26 05 73.01 Electrical Power INSTRUCTIONS: 1. Prior to sending submittal fill out checklist and verify all of the following information is included and clearly identified by highlighting, circling or other method. The items below are the minimum required and the Engineer may require additional information. 2. Indicate any substitutions or deviations from the specification and provide additional information as required per Specification 0133 00, "Submittal Procedures." 3. Sign form prior to submittal and include with submittal. Submittals provided without "Submittal Checklist" will be returned without review. CHECK BOX IF ITEM HAS BEEN ADDRESSED: ❑ 1. Provide Short Circuit and Protective Device Coordination Study. Time current curves shall be on 11x17 log-log type paper. The CONTRACTOR can provide time current curves on 8%x 11 log-log type paper as a supplement but not as a replacement. ❑ 2. Provide Arc Flash Hazard Analysis. ❑ 3. Provide a color copy of project specific Arc Flash labels for each panelboard, switchboard, switchgear, disconnect, Motor Control Center, VFDs, starters,transfer switches, including all existing electrical equipment— switchgear, starters, motor control center, panelboards, starters, etc. ❑ 4. Provide a copy of the one-line diagram color-coded to show the incident ranges& clothing classifications at each bus. The one-line shall be on 11x17 paper and shall be separated out across three (3)-11x17 sheets. 1) Provide a table indicating the color coding used for each incident range&clothing classification. The one-line shall also include the information specified in section 2.03 below. The following is a recommended color coding for the following Hazard/Risk Category numbers: a) Green to indicate a Category 0 b) Blue to indicate a Category 1 c) Brown to indicate a Category 2 d)Yellow to indicate a Category 3 e) Orange to indicate a Category 4 f) Red to indicate Above a Category 4 ❑ 5. A CD with all SKM input files and a PDF of all output files is required for both the preliminary and final power system studies submittals. Provide Two Software copies of actual power systems computer program project data files burned in on a CD. The CONTRACTOR shall provide an electronic copy on a CD-ROM of all files used to develop the electrical system model in the power system analysis program and all files for the written study analysis and summary data tables. For instance if SKM software is used for the power system studies, then the SKM files shall be burned in on a CD-ROM and provided to the OWNER/ENGINEER. This shall include any library files used for circuit breakers,fuses, etc.for the power system analysis. Electrical Power System Studies 26 05 73.01-9 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 ❑ 8. Provide letter of qualification for studies being performed by the electrical manufacturer/consultant service/electrical testing agency who is regularly engaged in power system studies. A Licensed Professional Engineer with proficiency in electrical power engineering shall conduct the studies and shall seal and sign the studies. The Professional ENGINEER shall be licensed to practice engineering in the State of Texas. A study submitted without a Professional ENGINEER's seal will not be reviewed and returned Not Approved, Revise & Resubmit. CONTRACTOR NOTES/COMMENTS TO ENGINEER: STATEMENT: I have reviewed and certify that the submittal is complete and that the submittal is legible, accurate, and complete in a clear, easily understood manner. Signature: Date: Electrical Power System Studies 26 05 73.01- 10 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 261219 PAD-MOUNTED LIQUID-FILLED MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pad-mounted, liquid-filled, medium-voltage distribution transformers, with primary and secondary bushings within or without air-terminal enclosures. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 260500 "Common Work Results for Electrical" for other Project requirements applicable to Work specified in this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Bushing: An insulating structure including a central conductor, or providing a central passage for a conductor, with provision for mounting on a barrier, conducting or otherwise, for the purpose of insulating the conductor from the barrier and conducting current from one side of the barrier to the other. B. Bushing Elbow: An insulated device used to connect insulated conductors to separable insulated connectors on dead-front, pad-mounted transformers and to provide a fully insulated connection.This is also called an "elbow connector." C. Bushing Insert: That component of a separable insulated connector that is inserted into a bushing well to complete a dead-front, load break or non-load break, separable insulated connector(bushing). D. Feed-Through Bushing Insert: That component of a separable insulated connector that is inserted into a bushing well to complete a dead-front, load break or non-load break, separable insulated connector (bushing). Allowing for two (2) each connections for each phase. E. Bushing Well: A component of a separable insulated connector, either permanently welded or clamped to an enclosure wall or barrier, having a cavity that receives a replaceable component (bushing insert)to complete the separable insulated connector (bushing). 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. For each type of product. Pad Mounted Liquid filled Medium Voltage Transformers 261219 - 1 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 a. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: 1. For pad-mounted, liquid-filled, medium-voltage transformers. a. Include plans and elevations showing major components and features. 1) Include plan view and cross section of equipment base, showing clearances, required workspace, and locations of penetrations for grounding and conduits. b. Include details of equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of field connections. C. Include single-line diagram. d. Include list of materials. e. Include nameplate data. f. Manufacturer's published time-current curves of transformer line-side fuses, with transformer damage curve, inrush curve, and thru fault current indicated. C. Field Quality-Control Submittals: 1. Field quality-control reports. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For transformers, signed by product manufacturer. B. Source quality-control reports. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled in accordance with NFPA 70, by qualified electrical testing laboratory recognized by authorities having jurisdiction and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with IEEE C2. C. Comply with IEEE C57.12.00. Pad Mounted Liquid filled Medium Voltage Transformers 261219 -2 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Windings Material: Copper Primary/Aluminum Sheet Secondary B. Surge Arresters: Comply with IEEE C62.11, Distribution Class; metal-oxide-varistor type, fully shielded, separable-elbow type, suitable for plugging into inserts provided in line-side section of transformer. Connected in each phase of incoming circuit and ahead of disconnecting device. C. Winding Connections: Connection of windings and terminal markings must comply with IEEE C57.12.70. D. Efficiency: Comply with 10 CFR 431, Subpart K. E. Insulation: Transformer kVA rating must be as follows: Average winding temperature rise above 30 deg C ambient temperature must not exceed 65 deg C and 80 deg C hottest-spot temperature rise at rated kVA when tested in accordance with IEEE C57.12.90, using combination of connections and taps that give highest average winding temperature rise. F. Tap Changer: External handle,for de-energized operation. G. Tank: Sealed, with welded-on cover. H. Enclosure Integrity: Comply with IEEE C57.12.28 for pad-mounted enclosures that contain energized electrical equipment in excess of 600 V that may be exposed to public. I. Mounting: Integral skid mounting frame, suitable to allow skidding or rolling of transformer in any direction, and with provision for anchoring frame to pad. J. Insulating Liquids: 1. Mineral Oil: ASTM D3487,Type II, and tested for compliance with ASTM D117. K. Sound level must comply with NEMA TR 1 requirements. L. Corrosion Protection: 1. Transformer coating system must be factory applied, complying with requirements of IEEE C57.12.28 in manufacturer's standard color pad mount green. 2.3 THREE-PHASE TRANSFORMERS A. Description: 1. Comply with IEEE C57.12.26. B. Compartment Construction: Pad Mounted Liquid filled Medium Voltage Transformers 261219 -3 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 1. Double-Compartment Construction: Individual compartments for line- and load-side sections, formed by steel isolating barriers that extend full height and depth of compartments, with hinged, lift-off doors and three-point latching, with stop in open position and provision for padlocking. C. Primary Fusing: Designed and rated to provide thermal protection of transformer by sensing overcurrent and high liquid temperature. 1. 150 kV BIL current-limiting fuses, conforming to requirements of IEEE C37.47. 2. Interrupting Rating: 50 000 A(rms sym) at system voltage. 3. Fuse Assembly: Bayonet-type, liquid-immersed, expulsion fuses in series with liquid- immersed, partial-range, current-limiting fuses. Bayonet fuse must sense both high currents and high oil temperature to provide thermal protection to transformer 4. Provide bayonet fuse assembly with oil retention valve and external drip shield inside housing to eliminate or minimize oil spills. Valve must close when fuse holder is removed, and external drip shield is installed. 5. Provide conspicuously displayed warning adjacent to bayonet fuse(s), cautioning against removing or inserting fuses unless transformer has been de-energized and tank pressure has been released. D. Line-Side Section: Dead-front design. 1. To connect primary cable, use separable insulated connectors; coordinated with and complying with requirements of Section 260513 "Medium-Voltage Cables." Bushings must be one-piece units, with ampere and BIL ratings same as connectors. 2. Bushing inserts: a. Conform to requirements of IEEE 386. b. Rated at 200 A, with voltage class matching connectors. Provide parking stand near bushing wells. Parking stands must be equipped with insulated standoff bushings for parking of energized load-break elbow connectors on parking stands.] C. Provide insulated protective caps for insulating and sealing out moisture from unused bushing inserts. 3. Bushing wells configured for loop-feed application. 4. Access to liquid-immersed fuses. 5. Dead-front surge arresters. 6. Tap-changer operator. 7. Ground pad. E. Load-Side Section: 1. Bushings with spade terminals drilled for terminating number of conductors indicated on Drawings, and lugs that comply with requirements of Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 2. Insulated bracing installed and rated to relieve bushing tension from potential conductor stresses. Pad Mounted Liquid filled Medium Voltage Transformers 261219 -4 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 F. Capacities and Characteristics: 1. Power Rating: 500 kVA. 2. Voltage Ratings: 4160 Delta V-480Y/277 V. 3. Taps: Comply with IEEE C57.12.26 requirements 4. Transformer BIL(kV): Comply with IEEE C57.12.26 requirements 5. Minimum Tested Impedance (Percent) at 85 deg C: 6. K-factor: complying with UL 1562. 7. Comply with UL listing requirements for combination classification and listing for transformer and less-flammable insulating liquid. G. Transformer Accessories: 1. Drain and filter connection. 2. Filling and top filter press connections. 3. Pressure-vacuum gauge. 4. Dial-type analog thermometer. 5. Magnetic liquid level indicator. 6. Automatically resetting pressure-relief device. Device flow must be as recommended by manufacturer. 7. Stainless steel ground connection pads. 8. Machine-engraved nameplate, made of anodized aluminum or stainless steel. 2.4 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS A. Comply with requirements for labels and signs specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. High-Voltage Warning Label: Provide self-adhesive warning signs on outside of line-side compartment door(s). Sign legend must be "DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE" printed in two lines of nominal 2 inch (50 mm) high letters. Word "DANGER" must be in white letters on red background and words "HIGH VOLTAGE" must be in black letters on white background. 2. Arc Flash Warning Label: Provide self-adhesive warning signs on outside of line-side compartment door(s), warning of potential electrical arc flash hazards and appropriate personal protective equipment required. 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing:Test and inspect transformer in accordance with IEEE C57.12.90. 1. Resistance. 2. Turns ratio, polarity, and phase relation. 3. Transformer no-load losses and excitation current at 100 percent of ratings. 4. Transformer impedance voltage and load loss. 5. Operation of devices. 6. Lightning impulse. Pad Mounted Liquid filled Medium Voltage Transformers 261219 -5 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 7. Low frequency. 8. Leak. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine pad-mounted, liquid-filled, medium-voltage transformers upon delivery. 1. Upon delivery of transformers and prior to unloading, inspect equipment for damage that may have occurred during shipment or storage. 2. Verify that tie rods and chains are undamaged and tight, and that blocking and bracing is tight. Verify that there is no evidence of load shifting in transit, and that readings from transportation shock recorders, if equipped, are within manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Verify that there is no indication of external damage and no dents or scratches in doors and sill,tank walls, radiators and fins, or termination provisions. 4. Verify that there is no evidence of insulating-liquid leakage on transformer surfaces, at weld seams, on line-or load-side bushing parts, and at transformer base. 5. Verify that there is positive pressure or vacuum on tank. Check pressure gauge; it is required to read other than zero. 6. Compare transformers and accessories received with bill of materials to verify that shipment is complete. Verify that transformers and accessories conform with manufacturer's quotation and shop drawings. If shipment is incomplete or does not comply with Project requirements, notify manufacturer in writing immediately. 7. Verify presence of polychlorinated biphenyl content labeling. 8. Unload transformers carefully, observing packing label warnings and handling instructions. 9. Open termination compartment doors and inspect components for damage or displaced parts, loose or broken connections, cracked or chipped insulators, bent mounting flanges, dirt or foreign material, and water or moisture. B. Handling: 1. Handle transformers carefully, in accordance with manufacturer recommendations, to avoid damage to enclosure, termination compartments, base, frame, tank, and internal components. Do not subject transformers to impact,jolting,jarring, or rough handling. 2. Protect transformer termination compartments against entrance of dust, rain, and snow. 3. Transport transformers upright, to avoid internal stresses on core and coil mounting assembly and to prevent trapping air in windings. Do not tilt or tip transformers. 4. Verify that transformer weights are within rated capacity of handling equipment. 5. Use only manufacturer-recommended points for lifting, jacking, and pulling. Use lifting lugs when lifting transformers. 6. Use jacks only at corners of tank base plate. 7. Use nylon straps of same length to balance and distribute weight when handling transformers with crane. Pad Mounted Liquid filled Medium Voltage Transformers 261219 -6 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 8. Use spreaders or lifting beam to obtain vertical lift and to protect transformer from straps bearing against enclosure. Lifting cable pull angles may not be greater than 15 degrees from vertical. 9. Exercise care not to damage tank base structure when handling transformer using skids or rollers. Use skids to distribute stresses over tank base when using rollers under large transformers. C. Storage: 1. Store transformers in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Transformers may be stored outdoors. If possible, store transformers at final installation locations on concrete pads. If dry concrete surfaces are unavailable, use pallets of adequate strength to protect transformers from direct contact with ground. Ensure transformer is level. 3. Ensure that transformer storage location is clean and protected from severe conditions. Protect transformers from dirt, water, contamination, and physical damage. Do not store transformers in presence of corrosive or explosive gases. Protect transformers from weather when stored for more than three months. 4. Store transformers with compartment doors closed. 5. Regularly inspect transformers while in storage and maintain documentation of storage conditions, noting discrepancies or adverse conditions. Verify that effective pressure seal is maintained using pressure gauges. Visually check for insulating-liquid leaks and rust spots. D. Examine areas and space conditions for compliance with requirements for pad-mounted, liquid-filled, medium-voltage transformers and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. E. Examine roughing-in of conduits and grounding systems to verify the following: 1. Wiring entries comply with layout requirements. 2. Entries are within conduit-entry tolerances specified by manufacturer, and no feeders will cross section barriers to reach load or line lugs. F. Examine concrete bases for suitable conditions for transformer installation. G. Pre-Installation Checks: 1. Verify removal of shipping bracing after placement. H. Verify that ground connections are in place and that requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Maximum ground resistance must be 5 Q at transformer location. I. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Pad Mounted Liquid filled Medium Voltage Transformers 261219 -7 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install transformers on cast-in-place concrete equipment base(s). Comply with requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." B. Transformer must be installed level and plumb and must tilt less than 1.5 degrees while energized. C. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation and seismic control devices specified in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems". D. Maintain minimum clearances and workspace at equipment in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and IEEE C2. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Ground equipment in accordance with Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." 1. Make joints in grounding conductors and loops by exothermic weld or compression connector. 2. Terminate grounding and bonding conductors on common equipment grounding terminal on transformer enclosure. 3. Complete transformer tank grounding and lightning arrester connections prior to making other electrical connections. B. Connect wiring in accordance with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 1. Maintain air clearances between energized live parts and between live parts and ground for exposed connections in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. 2. Bundle associated phase, neutral, and equipment grounding conductors together within transformer enclosure. Arrange conductors such that there is not excessive strain that could cause loose connections. Allow adequate slack for expansion and contraction of conductors. C. Terminate medium-voltage cables in incoming section of transformers in accordance with Section 260513 "Medium-Voltage Cables." 3.4 SIGNS AND LABELS A. Comply with installation requirements for labels and signs specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Install warning signs as required to comply with 29 CFR 1910.269. Pad Mounted Liquid filled Medium Voltage Transformers 261219 -8 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field tests and inspections must be witnessed by authorities having jurisdiction . B. Tests and Inspections: 1. General Field-Testing Requirements: a. Comply with provisions of"Testing and Test Methods" Chapter in NFPA 70B. b. Perform visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests. Certify compliance with test parameters. C. After installing transformer but before primary is energized, verify that grounding system at transformer is tested at specified value or less. d. After installing transformer and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements. e. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: 1) Verify equipment nameplate data complies with Contract Documents. 2) Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the following two methods: a) Use low-resistance ohmmeter to compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections. Investigate values that deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of lowest value. b) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench method in accordance with manufacturer's published data or NETA ATS, Table 100.12. Bolt- torque levels must be in accordance with manufacturer's published data. In absence of manufacturer's published data, use NETA ATS, Table 100.12. C. Nonconforming Work: 1. Equipment and devices will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. 2. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest. END OF SECTION 261219 Pad Mounted Liquid filled Medium Voltage Transformers 261219 -9 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 26 13 26.13 MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. The Contractor shall furnish and install metal-enclosed drawout breaker switchgear equipment as specified herein and as shown on the contract drawings.The switchgear shall be front accessible such that it can be installed against the wall and shall not require rear access for maintenance, inspection, or operation. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS 1.03 REFERENCES A. The medium voltage metal-enclosed switchgear and all components shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest applicable standards as follows: 1. ANSI/IEEE C37.20.3 & C37.20.2 2. ANSI C37.04 3. ANSI C37.09 4. NEMA SG 4 5. NEMA SG 5 6. CAN/CSA-22.2 No. 31-04 B. The entire assembly shall be UL(Underwriters Laboratories) or CSA(Canadian Standards Association) listed. 1.04 SUBMITTALS—FOR REVIEW/APPROVAL A. The following information shall be submitted to the Engineer: 1. Master drawing index 2. Front view elevation 3. Floor plan 4. Top view 5. Single line 6. Three line diagram 7. Schematic diagram 8. Nameplate schedule 9. Component list 10. Conduit entry/exit locations 11. Assembly ratings including: a. Short-circuit rating b. Voltage Medium Voltage Switchgear 26 13 26.13 - 1 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 C. Continuous current d. Basic Impulse Level 12. Major component ratings including: a. Voltage b. Continuous current C. Interrupting ratings 13. Cable terminal sizes 14. Product data sheets. B. Where applicable the following additional information shall be submitted to the Engineer: 1. Busway connection 2. Connection details between close-coupled assemblies 3. Composite floor plan of close-coupled assemblies 4. Electrical Schematic diagram 5. Key interlock scheme drawing and sequence of operations 6. Descriptive bulletins 7. Product data sheets. 1.05 SUBMITTALS— FOR CONSTRUCTION A. The following information shall be submitted for record purposes when equipment ships: 1. Final as-built drawings and information for items listed in paragraph 1.04 2. Wiring diagrams 3. Certified production test reports 4. Installation information including equipment anchorage provisions 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. The manufacturer of the assembly shall be the manufacturer of the major components within the assembly. B. For the equipment specified herein,the manufacturer shall be ISO 9000, 9001 or 9002 certified. C. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced medium voltage metal-enclosed and metal-clad switchgear equipment for similar functions for a minimum period of five (5)years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Each switchgear assembly shall be split into shipping groups for handling as indicated on the drawings or per the manufacturer's recommendations. All drawout elements must be shipped installed in their respective compartments. If any parts or restraints are added Medium Voltage Switchgear 26 13 26.13 -2 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 for shipping,those parts must be clearly identified. Clear instructions shall be included as to when and how those parts/restraints are to be removed during the installation. Any special cautions and care to be exercised prior to opening the packaging shall be noted outside the packaging. Shipping groups shall be suitable for shipment by truck, rail or ship. Shipping groups shall be bolted to skids and suitable for loading, unloading, and handling with a fork truck. Each shipping group shall be equipped with lifting provisions for handling by crane. Accessories shall be packaged and shipped separately. B. Equipment unloading, handling, storage, and installation instructions shall be included with the packaging in such a manner that it can be easily located and accessed before unloading the equipment. C. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.09 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Equipment operation and maintenance manuals shall be provided with each assembly shipped, and shall include instruction leaflets and instruction bulletins for the complete assembly and each major component. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Eaton B. Square D C. Approved equal The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings,features and functions.To eliminate possible disputes between circuit breaker and switchgear coordination,the manufacturer of the switchgear shall also be the manufacturer of the circuit breaker. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. Products in compliance with the specification and manufactured by others not named will be considered only if pre-approved by the Engineer ten (10) days prior to bid date. 2.02 SWITCHGEAR AND CIRCUIT BREAKER RATINGS A. The switchgear described in this specification shall be designed for operation on a 4.16 kV, 3-phase, 3 wire, solidly grounded, 60 Hertz system. B. The switchgear main bus (when applicable) shall be rated 1200 amperes.The switchgear shall be constructed so that all buses, bus supports and connections shall withstand stresses that would be produced by fault currents equal to the close and latch rating of the circuit breakers. The short time short circuit current withstand capability of the switchgear busses shall be the same as that of the circuit breakers.The temperature rise of the bus and connections shall be in accordance with IEEE standard C37.20.3 and C37.20.2, and documented by design tests. C. Each circuit breaker shall have the following ratings: Rated Maximum Voltage 4.76 kV 1-minute Power Freq withstand voltage 19 kV rms Impulse withstand voltage (BIL) 60 kV Peak Continuous Current As shown on drawings Rated Short-Circuit Current at Rated Maximum Voltage 25 kA rms Sym. Rated Voltage Range Factor K 1.0 Medium Voltage Switchgear 26 13 26.13 -3 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 Maximum symmetrical Interrupting and 2-Sec short-time current carrying capability 25 kA rms Sym. Closing and Latching Capability 52 kA peak 3-Phase MVA at rated maximum voltage. 165 Rated Interrupting Time 5 Cycle 2.03 CONSTRUCTION A. The switchgear assembly shall consist of completely metal-enclosed, dead front vertical sections requiring only front access for connection, maintenance and operation of the switchgear and containing various combinations of circuit breakers and auxiliaries of rating and type noted on the drawings or specified herein. B. The switchgear shall be a metal-enclosed design incorporating the following requirements from IEEE standard C37.20.3 and C37.20.2. 1. Switchgear designed for use with removable switching and interrupting devices as described in C37.20.2. 2. Metal barrier in front of, or a part of,the circuit interrupting device to ensure that, when in the connected (operating) position, no primary circuits are exposed by the opening of the circuit interrupting device's compartment door. 3. Automatic shutters that cover primary circuit elements when removable element (circuit breaker, VT, CPT, or primary fuse) is moved to the test/disconnected position as described in C37.20.2. 4. Mechanical interlocks for proper operating sequence under normal operating conditions as described in C37.20.2. 5. Bare bus and connections as characterized in C37.20.3. Insulated bus bars and connections shall be used where necessary to meet specified voltage withstand ratings. 6. Metal-enclosed design per C37.20.3, with no barriers between primary circuits in cable pull-sections, or bus-transition sections. C. The switchgear shall be front accessible such that it can be installed against the wall, and shall not require rear access for its maintenance, inspection, or operation. Primary bus joints and supports that are not accessible from the front are to be designed such that no maintenance is necessary for those joints or supports. All necessary access for owner's primary cable terminations,joining of main and ground bus joints at shipping splits, and termination of control wires shall be provided from the front or top of the switchgear. Access to primary cable terminals shall not require the removal of any primary or secondary devices. D. Access to any medium-voltage cable or bus connection shall be through removable panels requiring the use of tools and shall be marked with caution signs to indicate the presence of energized conductors behind them. E. Switchgear design shall allow safe installation and removal of all drawout elements into and from their compartments. No high voltage circuits shall be exposed to maintenance personnel when drawout element compartment doors are opened or drawout elements are removed from the compartment. No high voltage circuits shall be exposed when control compartment doors are opened. Clearly visible caution signs and warnings shall be placed on all removable covers or bolted panels provided for access to primary circuits and cables. Medium Voltage Switchgear 26 13 26.13 -4 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 F. All low voltage devices and their associated control wiring shall be isolated by grounded metal barriers from primary circuits with the exception of short lengths of wires such as at instrument transformer and space heater terminals. Space heaters shall be supplied when noted on the drawings or specified herein. G. The following features shall be supplied on every compartment containing a drawout vacuum circuit breaker: 1. The compartment front door shall be capable of being safely opened. Barrier all high voltage parts with grounded metal,to provide full access to the front of the circuit breaker control faceplate and all low voltage control and instrumentation devices. 2. The stationary primary high voltage contacts in each breaker compartment shall be silver-plated and recessed within insulating tubes. A metal safety shutter shall automatically cover those stationary high voltage contacts when the breaker is in the test or disconnected position or out of the cell. Provide provision for padlocking the shutters in an open position for inspection or in the closed position to prevent inadvertent contact with the stationary primary high voltage contacts, when the breaker is removed from its cell. 3. Each compartment and circuit breaker shall be provided with mechanical interlocks to prevent the insertion of a circuit breaker into the compartment with a higher frame size or interrupting rating. 4. Each circuit breaker shall have three positions within its compartment,with compartment door closed: Disconnected,Test, and Connected. a. In the DISCONNECTED position, no primary high voltage or secondary control wiring connections shall be made and the safety shutters automatically close over the stationary high voltage contacts in the compartment. b. The TEST position shall be same as the DISCONNECTED position, except secondary control wiring shall be connected so that the breaker can be opened or closed electrically or manually. C. In the CONNECTED position,the circuit breaker shall be in the normal operating position inside the compartment, with safety shutters fully opened, and primary and secondary connections fully made. Provide a label or other marking on the compartment floor, visible when compartment door is opened,to indicate that the circuit breaker is fully connected. 5. Provide cell switches with two each DPST-NO/NC(1 Form A and B) contacts for breaker position status.Additionally,two switches shall be provided in each circuit breaker compartment. One switch shall change its state when breaker is moved to connected position, and the other switch shall change its state when breaker is moved to test/disconnected position. When additional contacts are required for controls or interlocking, provide auxiliary relays as required. H. Provide the following interlocks for each drawout circuit breaker to insure safe and proper operation: 1. It shall not be possible to engage levering crank and withdraw the breaker when the breaker is in the connected position and closed. 2. It shall not be possible to close the circuit breaker manually or electrically while it is being levered or while the breaker is in any position between the connected and the test/disconnected. 3. It shall not be possible to insert the circuit breaker into the connected position if the circuit breaker control wiring connector is not properly engaged with its compartment control wiring connector. Interlocking shall also be provided to prevent disconnection of circuit breaker control wiring connector (manually or automatically) Medium Voltage Switchgear 26 13 26.13 -5 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 while the circuit breaker is in the connected position or in any position between the connected and the test/disconnected. I. Each auxiliary drawout compartment shall be provided with safety shutter to cover stationary high voltage connections when the auxiliary drawer is withdrawn from the connected position. J. Vertical section construction shall be of the universal frame type using die-formed bolted and welded parts. All enclosing covers and doors shall be fabricated from steel whose thickness shall be equal to or greater than those specified in ANSI/IEEE C37.20.3. K. Width, depth, and height of each vertical section containing circuit breakers or drawout auxiliary equipment shall not exceed 26-inches wide, 61.5-inches deep, and 92-inches high, excluding handles or other device projections on the door, skid, or lifting eye/angles.When a cable pull box is required adjacent to a single-high or two-high breaker structure, or when a bus transition section is required adjacent to a bus-tie breaker structure, width of such pull-box or transition section shall not exceed 19-inches. 2.04 BUS A. All bare buses shall be continuously silver-plated copper. Insulated buses only need to be plated at the joints. B. Ground bus conductor shall be bare copper and be directly fastened to a bare metal surface of each vertical section, and be of a size sufficient to carry the rated momentary and short time short circuit current of the switchgear assembly. 2.05 BUS SUPPORTING SYSTEMS A. Main bus shall be supported utilizing a high strength glass polyester support. Bus support devices within vertical sections shall have either molded fins of highly track-resistant Aramid Nylon or be glass polyester type A-20 insulators 2.06 WIRING/TERMINATIONS A. All control, CT and VT secondary wiring shall be minimum #14 AWG,type SIS or an equivalent, rated 600 volt, 90 degrees C. Wiring for logic-level and/or supervisory circuits shall use wire size and type as required by the circuit function or device termination. B. Provide sleeve type wire markers on all control wiring at each termination. Each wire marker shall indicate wire identification as shown on three line and schematic diagrams. C. The switchgear manufacturer shall provide suitable terminal blocks for secondary wire terminations. Wires shall terminate on terminal blocks with marker strips numbered in agreement with detailed connection diagrams.Terminal blocks shall be provided for customer connections to other apparatus. D. One NEMA 2-hole terminal pad per phase shall be provided for attaching contractor supplied power cable terminal lugs for a maximum of two conductors per phase of the sizes indicated on the drawings. Sufficient space shall be allowed for Contractor supplied electrical stress relief termination devices. 2.07 CIRCUIT BREAKER A. Circuit breakers shall utilize vacuum interrupters for interruption and switching functions. The current transfer between the circuit breaker and primary circuits conductors in the compartment shall be via heavily silver plated and spring loaded copper finger cluster (primary disconnect) on the breaker, and rigidly mounted silver plated copper stabs within the insulated housing mounted on the compartment wall.The current transfer from vacuum interrupter moving stem to the primary disconnect cluster on the breaker Medium Voltage Switchgear 26 13 26.13 -6 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 shall be non-sliding type via heavily silver or tin plated flexible copper leaf conductors attached on each end. B. Each circuit breaker shall be supplied with contact surface erosion (contact wear) indicator that requires no tools or measurements for the checking of the contact surface erosion. C. Each circuit breaker shall be equipped with high-speed stored energy operating mechanism and shall permit open-close-open (OCO) operating sequence without recharging the closing springs. D. The breaker front panel shall be removable when the compartment door is open for ease of inspection and maintenance of the mechanism. E. Each circuit breaker shall be equipped with mechanical operations counter on the front of the breaker to provide record of the number of circuit breaker operations. F. Each circuit breaker shall include contacts Open/Close and spring Charged/Discharged status indications on the front of the breaker. G. Each circuit breaker shall be supplied with an auxiliary switch with 5 NO and 5 NC contacts.The switch shall be heavy duty, double break type with wipe type contacts. All unused contacts from this switch shall be wired out to terminal blocks for owner's use. H. Circuit breakers shall be manually operated (MO) unless shown on the drawings as electrically operated (EO). Energy required for closing and opening of the circuit breaker shall be provided by manual charging of springs.The spring charging handle shall be integral to the breaker and conveniently located on the front of the circuit breaker. I. Each circuit breaker shall be supplied with Manual "ON" and "OFF" push buttons located on the front of the circuit breaker for opening and closing the breaker manually,without a need for external control power. J. Where indicated on the drawings as EO, each circuit breaker shall be electrically operated. Energy required for closing and opening of the circuit breaker shall be provided by charging of springs by an electrical motor. Electrical closing/opening of the circuit breaker shall be accomplished by energizing spring release coil/shunt trip coil. Control voltage required for electrical operation of the breakers shall be derived from a control power transformer mounted within the switchgear and shall be as follows: 1. 120 Vac CLOSE and AC Capacitor Trip. K. Two control circuit cutout devices shall be provided and installed in the control compartment of each circuit breaker for control circuit isolation and short circuit protection. One circuit shall be provided for breaker trip controls.The second circuit shall be provided for breaker close controls.The breaker close control circuit shall be powered from the breaker trip circuit such that the breaker cannot be closed if the breaker trip circuit is not powered. L. All EO circuit breakers shall also be supplied with a spring charging handle located on the front of the circuit breaker for manually charging closing springs during an emergency or for maintenance. Manual "ON" and "OFF" push buttons shall be located on the front of the circuit breaker for opening and closing the breaker manually. 2.08 PROTECTIVE RELAYS A. The switchgear manufacturer shall furnish and install, in the metal-enclosed switchgear, the quantity,type and rating of protection relays as indicated on the drawings and described hereafter in this specification. B. Microprocessor Based Protective Relay Medium Voltage Switchgear 26 13 26.13 -7 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 1. MAIN SEL 751 Feeder Protection Relay, microprocessor-based multifunction protection and metering unit, ANSI device functions: 51/50, 51N/50N, 5013F, 25, 32, 46, 67, 27, 59, 47, 81-0, 81-U, and 86.The relay shall be powered from an internal 120 Vac control power source. 2. BUS SEL 587Z Bus Differential Protection Relay, microprocessor-based protection unit, ANSI device functions: 87.The relay shall be powered from an internal 120 Vac control power source. 3. FEEDER SEL 751A Feeder Protection Relay, microprocessor-based multifunction protection and metering unit, ANSI device functions: 51/50, 51N/50N, 5013F, 25, 32, 46, and 47.The relay shall be powered from an internal 120 Vac control power source. C. Current and voltage input for the protective relays shall be derived from conventional CTs and VTs connected in the primary circuits.Zero sequence CTs are to be included when shown on the drawings or specified herein after in this specification. 2.09 INTERFACE/CONTROL DEVICES A. Switchgear PLC HMI 1. When indicated on the drawings, provide an HMI mounted locally on one of the switchgear compartment door or access, monitoring, and display of parameters of multiple SEL relays.The HMI shall be locally mounted on one of the switchgear compartment door, all required communication wiring to between the Dashboard and the relays shall be factory installed. 2.10 AUXILIARY DEVICES A. Ring type current transformers shall be furnished when required for protective relays and metering.The thermal and mechanical ratings of the current transformers shall be coordinated with the circuit breakers.Their accuracy rating shall be adequate for the type of relay/meter burden connected to each CT. Shorting terminal blocks shall be furnished on the secondary of all the current transformers. B. Voltage transformers or resistive voltage dividers shall be supplied as shown on the one- line diagram. 1. The voltage transformers shall be mounted on tilt-out trunnions or drawout drawer assemblies and equipped with current limiting primary fuses. In the withdrawn position,the fuses and the potential transformers shall be disconnected and grounded to permit safe inspection and/or replacement of the fuses.The trunnion frame shall be connected to ground by a flexible copper cable that is attached directly to the frame.The mechanism shall be arranged so that full access to potential transformers or fuses cannot be accomplished until they are disconnected from high voltage and grounded. Live parts shall be isolated when the voltage transformers are in the withdrawn position to prevent accidental contact by operating or maintenance personnel. Stationary contacts shall be silver plated copper and mounted on porcelain or glass polyester supports. Cables connected to voltage transformer primaries shall be rated for the full voltage and BIL rating of the switchgear. C. A mechanical interlock shall be provided to require the secondary breaker to be open before the CPT drawer can be withdrawn. D. Test switches shall be provided for protection relay current and voltage inputs,trip control inputs and outputs.Test switches shall be ABB type FT1. Medium Voltage Switchgear 26 13 26.13 -8 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 E. Each protective relay shall have a common trouble output contact.This contact output shall be fail-safe and form-C.This alarm contact output shall be wired to the PLC from annunciation through the SCADA network. F. Each protective relay shall have a Trip Coil Monitor input with a series connected 5K Ohm 1W resistor.This circuit shall be powered from the DC power from the CTD. G. A lockout relay shall be provided with the SEL-587Z bus differential relay.This lockout relay, when tripped, shall cause all breakers in the switch gear to trip and prevent all circuit breakers from being closed.This relay shall be wired to the SEL-587Z per manufacturers recommendations.The lockout relay shall be Electroswitch Series 24 No. 7810 or equivalent. H. Each feeder breaker protective relay shall be equipped with a fiber optic arc flash point sensor. Each of these sensors shall be located in the feeder terminal area. 2.11 ACCESSORIES A. Provide surge protection as shown on the drawings. 2.12 NAMEPLATES A. Engraved nameplates, mounted on the face of the assembly, shall be furnished for all main and feeder circuits as indicated on the drawings. Nameplates shall be laminated plastic, black characters on white background, and secured with screws. Characters shall be 3/16-inch high, minimum. Furnish master nameplate giving information in accordance with IEEE Standard C37.20.2-1999, section 7.4.1 for each switchgear lineup. Circuit nameplates shall be provided with circuit designations as shown on purchaser's single- line diagrams. B. Control components mounted within the assembly, such as fuse blocks, relays, pushbuttons, switches, etc., shall be suitably marked for identification corresponding to appropriate designations on manufacturer's three line and schematic diagrams. 2.13 FINISH A. Prior to assembly, all enclosing steel shall be thoroughly cleaned and phosphatized. A powder coating shall be applied electrostatically, and then fused on by baking in an oven. The coating is to have a thickness of not less than 1.5 mils.The finish shall have the following properties: Impact resistance (ASTM D-2794) 60 direct/60 indirect Pencil hardness (ASTM D-3363) H Flexibility (ASTM D-522) Pass 1/8-inch mandrel Salt spray(ASTM B117-85 [20]) 600 hours Color ANSI 61 gray 2.14 SPECIAL SWITCHGEAR CONFIGURATIONS A. Automatic Transfer Control—Three Breaker Automatic Transfer Control with Common Load Bus 1. Furnish, where shown on the drawings, a switchgear assembly with microprocessor- based automatic transfer control system for two (2) main breakers and (1) emergency generator with a common load bus.The system shall consist of the two (2) breakers and (1) emergency generator with electrical operators as herein specified, and an integrated microprocessor-based automatic transfer control system containing sensing devices, low voltage logic control, and auxiliary equipment, as indicated on the drawings and specified here.The automatic transfer control system, Medium Voltage Switchgear 26 13 26.13 -9 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 when placed in the "automatic" mode, shall automatically transfer the load bus circuit to the alternate power source upon failure of the preferred source. 2. The basic sequence of operation based upon two normally energized sources shall be as follows. Normal operation shall be with the preferred source main breaker closed and standby main breaker open. Upon detection of an undervoltage to the line side of the preferred main breaker and after a field adjustable time delay,that main breaker shall open and after an additional field adjustable time delay,the standby breaker shall close restoring power to the facility. Upon restoration of voltage to the line side of the preferred main breaker and after a field adjustable time delay the standby main breaker shall open and after a field adjustable time delay the preferred main breaker shall close. 3. The basic sequence of operation based upon two normally energized sources shall be as follows. Normal operation shall be with the preferred source main breaker closed and standby main breaker open. Upon detection of an undervoltage to the line side of the both main breakers and after a field adjustable time delay,that main breakers shall open and after an additional field adjustable time delay the automatic transfer control system will send a start signal to the emergency generator. When the emergency generator voltage and frequency is an acceptable value,the generator breaker shall close restoring power to the facility. Upon restoration of voltage to the line side of either the preferred main breaker or the standby main breaker, and after a field adjustable time delay the generator emergency breaker shall open and after a field adjustable time delay the preferred or standby main breaker shall close. 4. If the preferred source is the first to return,the automatic transfer control system will transfer to the preferred source and no further operations will occur. If the standby source is the first to return,the automatic transfer control system will transfer to the standby source. Upon restoration of voltage to the line side of the preferred main breaker and after a field adjustable time delay the standby main breaker shall open and after a field adjustable time delay the preferred main breaker shall close. 5. The logic of the transfer shall function via a microprocessor controller.The set points shall be field adjustable without the use of special tools. LED lights shall be included on the controller to show: a. Normal Source Available b. Standby Source Available C. Emergency Source Available d. Normal Source Connected e. Standby Source Connected f. Emergency Source Connected g. Load Energized. 6. A digital readout shall display each option as it is functioning. Readouts shall display actual line-to-line voltage, line frequency and timers.When timers are functioning, the microprocessor shall display the timer counting down. All set points shall be re- programmed from the front panel of the controller when it is in the program mode. In addition the controller shall display date,time and reason of last 16 transfers, set points of timers, voltage pickup and dropout set points. A communications port shall be provided for communication to an external Power Monitoring System or other system. 7. The transfer system shall include the following: Medium Voltage Switchgear 26 13 26.13 - 10 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 a. A time delay transfer from the normal power source to the standby power or emergency source and from the standby power or emergency source to the normal source,forcing a neutral position to ensure the load voltage has decayed before reconnecting to the source from which the load is to be fed (0 seconds to 30 minutes). b. A time delay to override a momentary power outage or voltage fluctuation (0 seconds to 120 seconds). C. A time delay for transferring from the standby power source to the normal power source (0 seconds to 30 minutes). d. A Form C relay contact that changes state when the power is available on the normal source. e. A Form C relay contact that changes state when the power is available on the standby source. f. A preferred source selection (Source 1 or Source 2, or none). g. Electrical Interlocking shall prevent paralleling of two sources in manual and auto mode. h. A means to manually initiate emergency generator test and load test maintenance. 8. Two (2) sets of WYE-WYE three-phase "line side" of the main breaker voltage transformers with primary fuses and secondary supplementary protectors to provide both sensing and control power. 9. The automatic transfer system shall contain: a. One (1) selector switch with automatic and manual positions. b. One (1) open-close control switch for manual electrical operation of each controlled breaker. C. One (1) pushbutton to initiate manual retransfer to preferred source when the Controller is functioning in automatic mode and programmed for manual retransfer. B. The switchgear manufacturer shall furnish accessories for operation and maintenance, including: 1. One—Levering crank for moving the breaker between test and connected positions 2. One—Lifting device for installation/removal of breaker to/from its compartment 3. One Manual type Ground and Test Device, 1200A designed to be powered from 120VAC. 2.15 BILLS OF MATERIAL B. The metal-enclosed switchgear main circuit breaker section for control of a main circuit breaker shall include the following: 1. One—Electrically Operated Drawout power circuit breaker rated 1200 ampere 2. Six—Current transformers, single secondary, ratio as shown on drawings Medium Voltage Switchgear 26 13 26.13 - 11 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 3. One—SEL 751 Feeder Proctection microprocessor based multifunction protection and metering unit, ANSI device functions: 51/50, 51N/50N, 5013F, 25, 32, 46, 67, 27, 59, and 47. 4. One—Circuit breaker Control Switch with Red (closed) and Green (opened) indicating lights 5. One—Circuit nameplate 6. One—Set of NEMA drillings for primary cable connections D. Each metal-clad switchgear feeder breaker section for control of a feeder circuit breaker shall include the following: 1. One—Electrically Operated Drawout power circuit breaker, rated current as shown on drawings 2. Six—Current transformers, single secondary, ratio as shown on drawings 3. One—SEL 751A Feeder Protection microprocessor-based three-phase and ground overcurrent relay, ANSI device number 51/50/N, and 86. 4. One—Circuit breaker Control Switch with Red (closed) and Green (opened) indicating lights 5. One—Circuit nameplate 6. One—Set of NEMA drillings for primary cable connections PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FACTORY TESTING A. The following standard factory tests shall be performed on the circuit breaker element provided under this section. All tests shall be in accordance with the latest version of ANSI and NEMA standards. 1. Electrically operated circuit breaker shall be operated over the range of minimum to maximum control voltage 2. Factory setting of contact gap 3. One (1) minute dielectric test per ANSI standards 4. Final inspections and quality checks. B. The following production test shall be performed on the circuit breaker housing: 1. One (1) minute dielectric test per ANSI standards on primary and secondary circuits 2. Operation of wiring, relays and other devices verified by an operational sequence test 3. Final inspection and quality check. C. The manufacturer shall provide three (3) certified copies of factory test reports. D. Factory tests as outlined above shall be witnessed by the owner's representative. Medium Voltage Switchgear 26 13 26.13 - 12 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 1. The manufacturer shall notify the owner two (2)weeks prior to the date the tests are to be performed. 2. The manufacturer shall include the cost of transportation and lodging for up to three (3) owner's representatives.The cost of meals and incidental expenses shall be the owner's responsibility. E. As-built drawings will be provided when equipment is shipped. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The Contractor shall provide three (3) copies of the manufacturer's field start-up report. 3.03 TRAINING A. The Contractor shall provide a training session for up to five (5) owner's representatives for (one) normal workdays at a jobsite location determined by the owner. B. The training session shall be conducted by a manufacturer's qualified representative and consist of instruction on the assembly of switches, circuit breaker(s), protective devices, and other major components. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. The Contractor shall install all equipment per the manufacturer's recommendations and the contract drawings. B. All necessary hardware to secure the assembly in place shall be provided by the contractor. 3.05 FIELD ADJUSTMENTS A. The relays or trip units shall be set/programmed in the field by The Contractor in accordance with settings designated in a coordination study of the system as required elsewhere in the contract documents. END OF SECTION Medium Voltage Switchgear 26 13 26.13 - 13 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 26 18 39.04 MEDIUM VOLTAGE DRIVES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. This Specification defines the requirements for Medium Voltage Variable Frequency Drive Systems (VFD's) rated up to 1250HP variable torque, 4160V for the operation of medium voltage motors. B. The Bidder shall prepare the bid to be in complete compliance with this specification. Any exception shall be included in the bid with an explanation, clearly indicating the paragraph of this specification to which the exception applies, and concisely stating the reasons. C. Unless clearly identified as an exception, this specification shall have precedence where there is conflict between bidder's descriptive information and this specification. D. The contractor shall furnish all tools, equipment, material, supplies and perform all labor required to install the medium voltage Variable frequency drive system[s] as indicated on the drawings and specified herein in order install,test and place the VFDs into satisfactory operation. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 26 18 16—Fuses—Medium Voltage B. Section 26 27 13—Microprocessor-Based Metering Equipment C. Section 26 18 39 - Motor Starters - Medium Voltage 1.03 REFERENCES A. IEEE 519—Recommended practice and requirements for harmonic control in electric power systems B. IEEE 1100—Powering and grounding sensitive electronic equipment C. IEEE 995—Recommended practice for efficiency determination of AC drives D. IEEE 1566—Standard for performance of AC drives rated 375kW and larger E. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) F. NEMA ICS 6—Industrial Control and Systems Enclosures G. UL 347A—Medium Voltage Power Conversion Equipment 1.04 SUBMITTALS—FOR REVIEW/APPROVAL A. The VFD Manufacturer shall submit digital copies of the following information for approval by the engineer: 1. Dimensional outline and plan arrangement drawings including clearance requirements,foundation details and weights. 2. Electrical schematics,wiring and interconnection drawings. 3. Component list 4. Conduit entry/exit locations 5. Assembly ratings Medium Voltage Drives 261839- 1 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 6. Major component ratings 7. Cable terminal sizes 8. Descriptive bulletins 9. Product and component data sheets 10. Harmonic analysis B. The Manufacturer shall provide overall efficiency data at 25%, 50%, 75% and 100% speed for all components. C. The VFD manufacturer shall provide system total power factor data at 25%, 50%, 75%and 100%load. D. The bidder shall provide harmonic calculations to the 49th harmonic with the bid when requested. The calculations shall show total harmonic voltage and current distortion at the designated Point of Common Coupling (PCC) 1.05 SUBMITTALS—FOR CONSTRUCTION A. The following information shall be submitted for record purposes: 1. Final as-built drawings and information for items listed in Paragraph 1.04 above, and shall incorporate all changes made during the manufacturing process. 2. Wiring diagrams 3. Certified production test reports 4. Installation information, including equipment anchorage provisions 5. Seismic certifications as specified 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. The VFD manufacturer shall have ISO 9001 certification. B. The VFD manufacturer shall be able to provide start-up service, 24-hour/day emergency call service, repair work, maintenance and troubleshooting training of customer personnel. C. The supplier of the assembly shall be the manufacturer of the electromechanical power components used within the assembly, such as bypass contactors when specified. D. The supplier of this equipment shall have produced similar electrical equipment for a minimum period of ten (10) years. 2. The following minimum mounting and installation guidelines shall be met, unless specifically modified by the above referenced standards. a. The Contractor shall provide equipment anchorage details, coordinated with the equipment mounting provision, prepared and stamped by a licensed civil engineer in the state. Mounting recommendations shall be provided by the manufacturer based upon the above criteria to verify the seismic design of the equipment. b. The equipment manufacturer shall certify that the equipment can withstand, that is, function following the seismic event, including both vertical and lateral required response spectra as specified in above codes. C. The equipment manufacturer shall document the requirements necessary for proper seismic mounting of the equipment. Seismic qualification shall be Medium Voltage Drives 261839-2 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 considered achieved when the capability of the equipment, meets or exceeds the specified response spectra. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. The VFD shall meet the latest revision of the following standards: 1. ANSI/ NEMA Standards 2. UL-347A(certified) 3. CSA 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. One (1) copy of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment. 1.09 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Equipment operation and maintenance manuals shall be provided with each assembly shipped, and shall include instruction leaflets and instruction bulletins for the complete assembly and each major component. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Eaton B. Square D Approved equal The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. Products in compliance with the specification and manufactured by others not named will be considered only if pre-approved by the Engineer ten (10) days prior to bid date. System Description C. The system shall consist of the following main components: one medium voltage Variable frequency drive (VFD), fused isolation switch, isolation contactor, drive isolation/phase shifting transformers with minimum 24 pulse rectification, DC bus pre-charge circuit, and output harmonic filter as necessary. All above items are to be integrated in an enclosure not to exceed 65 W x50" D x 92" H. D. The integrated dedicated fused contactor with isolation switch shall be rated to protect the VFD from specified short-circuit levels. The minimum interrupting rating of the input contactor shall be 8500A for a 400A contactor. The VFD enclosure doors shall be interlocked to prevent opening when main power is available. E. The capacitor pre-charge system shall be designed to eliminate transformer in-rush currents and avoid premature diode failure. This system shall utilize soft-magnetization technology to charge both the isolation transformer and the DC bus in phase with the line voltage prior to closing the main contactor. F. The VFD shall meet the latest requirements of IEEE 519 at the point of common coupling (PCC),without the need of an input filter. The point of common coupling shall be located at the point in the power system closest to the user where the system owner or operator could offer service to another user. Medium Voltage Drives 261839-3 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 G. The harmonic current distortion shall not exceed the limits listed in Table 2 of IEEE 519 at the PCC. The harmonic voltage distortion shall not exceed the limits listed in Table 1 of IEEE 519 (2014) at the PCC. H. Drive shall operate with a +/-10%input voltage variation. I. The VFD shall be rated for 60kV BIL and 50kA short circuit. J. Auxiliary power 480V, 3-phase,50/60 Hz shall be provided internal to the integrated Drive. External auxiliary supply voltage sources will not be acceptable. K. The drive will be suitable for the motor(s) rated 4160V, 3-phase, 60 Hz, up to 1250HP for variable torque applications. L. For variable torque applications the overload capacity shall be 110%of rated current for 1 minute repeated every 10 minutes. For constant torque applications the overload capacity shall be 150%of rated current for 1 minute repeated every 10 minutes. M. The VFD shall be suitable for use with a new or an existing standard squirrel cage motor with 1.0 service factor and standard medium-voltage insulation. For new motor installations, inverter-duty motors compliant with NEMA MG.1-2009 Section IV Part 31 are recommended. 2.02 INVERTER DESIGN A. The VFD inverter shall be of the pulse width modulated (PWM) neutral point clamp (NPC) type. The output devices shall be insulated gate bipolar transistors (IGBT's) with a voltage rating of 6500V for 4160V outputs. Use of lower voltage rated devices is unacceptable. The inverter shall be one three-phase inverter up to 1250HP. Inverters shall be of the roll- in / roll-out design to minimize downtime in the event of inverter failure. Multiple single- phase inverters will not be acceptable. B. The VFD inverter shall be constructed using six individual chopper modules and six IGBT's installed on a roll-in/roll-out inverter. All power electronic components associated with the inverter should be installed on an appropriately sized heatsink in order to properly conduct the heat out of the VFD. All inverter mounted printed circuit boards shall be conformal coated. C. Metallized polypropylene film self-healing power capacitors must be used; electrolytic devices are not acceptable. D. The VFD inverter shall be cooled using heat sink technology and dedicated cooling fans with optional redundant capability 2.03 INTEGRATED INPUT ISOLATION TRANSFORMER AND RECTIFIER A. The VFD shall contain an incoming isolation transformer with primary voltage as specified on the data sheet. B. The transformer shall contain 12 three phase secondary windings that provide the proper phase shifting to develop a 24-pulse rectification to reduce harmonic currents and voltages reflected to the primary power system. Anything less than 24-pulse is not acceptable. Transformer shall have a 220 degree C insulation rating. C. The transformer and rectifier shall be an integral part of the VFD assembly along with primary isolation switch, power fuses,and input vacuum contactor eliminating the need for separate components,field installation, or wiring. D. The rectifier shall be a diode bridge design with fast acting current limiting semi-conductor fuses to protect the bridge. Fuse-less diode bridges are not acceptable. Medium Voltage Drives 261839-4 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 E. A drive isolation transformer shall be integrated in the VFD enclosure to provide power conversion from the line voltage to the required VFD voltage and to isolate the line from harmonics and common mode voltages. The transformer shall conform to ANSI/IEEE C57. F. The transformer shall be designed to withstand a short circuit of 25kA. It shall maintain electromagnetic symmetry when only one secondary winding is in short circuit in order to minimize the resulting short circuit forces. The transformer shall be capable of thermally withstanding a short circuit for 2 seconds. G. Transformers shall be of a high efficiency type with full load losses of no greater than 2%. H. Suitable vibration dampers shall be provided with the transformer and its enclosure in order to attenuate mechanical resonance and to reduce the operational sound level. I. The transformer shall include electrostatic shielding between the windings to carry high frequency capacitive currents to ground. J. The transformer shall be of the air-cooled type and be forced ventilated. K. Only rectifier grade K-factor transformers shall be utilized, with K-Factor of 6 for diode rectifiers. VFD manufacturers providing SCR type rectifiers shall include K 12 transformers for variable torque applications and K 20 for constant torque applications. L. Standard winding material shall be aluminum with copper as an option. 2.04 RELIABILITY A. The manufacturer shall list any control or power components that require recommended maintenance or replacement before 50,000 hours of operation. Information must be available in the manufacturer's maintenance manual and available for submittal. B. The drive system and all its components shall be designed and manufactured for a minimum service life of 20 years. Required maintenance and frequency to achieve this service life shall be clearly documented. C. The VFD shall be capable of continuous operation ("ride-through") in the event of a power loss of up to 5 cycles. D. The VFD shall be able to safely operate,without tripping,with up to 30%voltage sag on the rated input voltage. E. All power semiconductors and passive power components in both the rectifier and inverter sections shall be medium voltage rated components. Low voltage components are not acceptable in the power sections. 2.05 INPUT POWER QUALITY A. The VFD shall meet the latest requirements of IEEE 519 at the point of common coupling (PCC),without the need of an input filter. The point of common coupling shall be located at the point in the power system closest to the user where the system owner or operator could offer service to another user. B. The harmonic current distortion shall not exceed the limits listed in Table 2 of IEEE 519 at the PCC. The harmonic voltage distortion shall not exceed the limits listed in Table 1 of IEEE 519 (2014) at the PCC. C. The VFD fundamental power factor shall be>0.97. The total power factor at the VFD input shall be > 0.95, for the load range of 20 to 100%. The VFD manufacturer shall provide a power factor correction filter if the VFD does not meet this requirement. The VFD including power factor correction and/or harmonic filter shall never have a leading power factor. Medium Voltage Drives 261839-5 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 D. For any VFD employing capacitors on the input side, such capacitors shall be rated 12.47kV or higher to avoid harmonic transient resonance. 2.06 OUTPUT POWER QUALITY A. Output waveform switching transients and harmonic content shall have a negligible contribution to motor heating, acoustical noise in the motor,torsional stress in the power train, and motor insulation. B. Common mode voltages on the VFD output shall be isolated from the motor. C. Motor cable voltage reflections and the resulting restrictions on motor cable length shall be taken into consideration and the drive shall be properly applied to the motor. D. The VFD shall be suitable for use with a new or an existing standard squirrel cage motor with 1.0 service factor and standard medium-voltage insulation. For new motor installations, inverter-duty is recommended (NEMA MG.1-2009 Section IV Part 31) E. If an output filter is required in order to meet any of these requirements, the addition of this filter shall be integrated within the VFD without increasing its footprint. 2.07 CONTROL FUNCTIONS A. Frequently accessed VFD programmable parameters shall be Variable from a digital operator keypad located on the front of the VFD. The VFD's shall have a three line alphanumeric programmable display with status indicators. Keypads must use plain English words for parameters, status, and diagnostic messages. Keypads that are difficult to read or understand are not acceptable, particularly those that use alphanumeric codes and tables. Keypads shall be Variable for contrast with large characters easily visible in normal ambient light. B. The keypad shall include a local/remote pushbutton selection. Both start/stop source and speed reference shall be independently programmable for keypad, remote I/O, or field- bus. C. The keypad shall have copy/paste capability. D. Upon initial power up of the VFD,the keypad shall display a startup guide that will sequence all the necessary parameter adjustments for general start up. E. Standard advanced programming and trouble-shooting functions shall be available by using a personal computer's RS-232 port and WindowsTm based software. In addition the software shall permit control and monitoring via the VFD's RS232 port. The manufacturer shall supply the required software. An easily understood instruction manual and software help screens shall also be provided. The computer software shall be used for modifying the drive setup and reviewing diagnostic and trend information as outlined in this section. F. The operator shall be able to scroll through the keypad menu to choose between the following: 1. Monitor 2. Operate 3. Parameter setup 4. Actual parameter values 5. Active faults 6. Fault history Medium Voltage Drives 261839-6 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 7. LCD contrast adjustment 8. Information to indicate the standard software and optional features software loaded. G. The following setups and adjustments, at a minimum, are to be available: 1. Start command from keypad, input or communications port 2. Speed command from keypad, input or communications port 3. Motor direction selection 4. Maximum and minimum speed limits 5. Acceleration and deceleration times,two settable ranges 6. Critical (skip)frequency avoidance 7. Torque limit 8. Multiple preset speeds adjustment 9. Catch a spinning motor start or normal start selection 10. Programmable analog output 11. PID process controller 2.08 THE VFD SHALL HAVE THE FOLLOWING SYSTEM INTERFACES: A. Inputs—A minimum of six(6)programmable digital inputs,two(2)Analog inputs and serial communications interface shall be provided with the following available as a minimum: 1. Start/stop 2. Local/remote 3. Forward/reverse 4. Preset speeds 5. External trip 6. Fault reset 7. Process control speed reference interface, 4-20mAdc 8. Potentiometer and 1-10Vdc speed reference interface 9. RS232 programming and operation interface port B. Outputs — A minimum of two (2) discrete programmable digital outputs, four (4) programmable relay outputs, and one (1) programmable open collector output, and one (1) programmable analog output shall be provided, with the following available at minimum. 1. Programmable relay outputs with one (1) set of Form C contacts for each, selectable with the following available at minimum: a. Fault b. Alarm (Warning) C. Run Medium Voltage Drives 261839-7 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 d. Ready e. Reversed f. At speed g. Current Limit Supervision h. Over-temperature 2. Programmable analog output signal, selectable with the following available at minimum: a. Motor current b. Output frequency C. Frequency reference d. Motor speed e. Motor torque f. Motor power g. Motor voltage h. DC-bus voltage C. Monitoring and Displays 1. The VFD display shall be a LCD type capable of displaying three (3) lines of text and the following thirteen (13) status indicators: a. Run b. Forward C. Reverse d. Stop e. Ready f. Alarm g. Fault h. 1/0 terminal i. Keypad j. Bus/Comm k. Local (LED) I. Remote (LED) M. Fault (LED) 2. The VFD keypad shall be capable of displaying the following monitoring functions at a minimum: a. Output frequency b. Frequency reference Medium Voltage Drives 261839-8 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 C. Motor speed d. Motor current e. Motor torque f. Motor power g. Motor voltage h. Dc-bus voltage i. Unit temperature j. Calculated motor temperature k. Voltage level of analog input I. Current level of analog input M. Digital inputs status n. Digital and relay outputs status 0. Analog out D. Protective Functions 1. The VFD shall include the following protective features at minimum: a. Over current b. Over voltage C. Inverter fault d. Under voltage e. Input phase loss f. Output phase loss g. Under temperature h. Over temperature i. Motor stalled j. Motor over temperature k. Motor under load I. Logic voltage failure M. Microprocessor failure 2. The VFD shall provide ground fault protection during power-up, starting, and running. VFD's with no ground fault protection during running are not acceptable. E. Diagnostic Features 1. Fault History 2. Record and log faults 3. Indicate the most recent first, and store up to 50 faults. Medium Voltage Drives 261839-9 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 4. An Emergency-stop (E-Stop) shall be provided on the VFD door in addition to inputs for customer supplied E-Stop command. 2.09 CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMERS (CPT'S) A. A control power transformer (CPT) shall be provided within the enclosure. B. The kilovolt-ampere rating of the CPT shall be determined by the manufacturer and shall have a minimum of 25%spare capacity. C. The CPT secondary voltage shall be 120 Vac. D. The CPT primary shall be fused with current limiting fuses with an interrupting rating no less than 50,000 amperes. E. The CPT secondary shall be fused and have one grounded terminal. 2.10 HARMONIC FILTERS AND POWER FACTOR CORRECTION A. Power factor correction equipment shall be provided if necessary to maintain a constant input power factor of 0.95 lagging throughout the entire load range. B. Filters shall be contained and mounted in the VFD enclosure. Freestanding filters will not be acceptable. C. Capacitors shall be environmentally safe. Discharge resistors and a method of shorting the phases shall be provided. D. Inductors may be air or iron core. Inductors shall have Class F insulation with Class B temperature rise. E. There shall be annunciation of output filter failure. 2.11 EFFICIENCY A. Overall efficiency of the VFD shall include the drive isolation transformer, VFD and all VFD auxiliaries, output filter, power factor correction and harmonic filter. B. VFD system efficiency calculations shall be in accordance with IEEE 995. C. The overall efficiency shall be not less than 96.5%at full load,full speed. 2.12 AUXILIARY DEVICES A. For stand-alone VFD's, provide fixed mounted potential transformers, fused-type, of the quantity and ratings indicated on the contract drawings. For integrated line-up and multiple devices, a draw-out or disconnecting PT is required. B. Provide window-type current transformers of the quantity and current rating as indicated on the contract drawings. Current transformer accuracy shall be suitable for the connected burden. C. Provide an auxiliary control power transformer of the quantity and kVA rating as indicated on the contract drawings. D. Provide a 120V remote input source for the specific use of testing low voltage controls when main power is off. 2.13 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. The VFD shall operate in an ambient temperature range of 0° C to 40° C (32° F to 104° F) with a relative humidity of up to 95% (non-condensing), unless specified otherwise. Medium Voltage Drives 261839- 10 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 B. The equipment shall be capable of being stored in an environment with an ambient temperature range of-40°C to 70° C. C. The equipment shall operate at altitudes from 0 to 1000m (3,300 ft.) above sea level, without de-rating. For applications above 1000m,the maximum ambient temperature and Basic Impulse Levels (BIL) of the controllers shall be de-rated as necessary, and vacuum contactors shall be compensated for operation at the specified altitude. 2.14 ENCLOSURES A. Indoor enclosures shall be NEMA 1A with gasket and filters. B. The VFD shall require front access only. Designs requiring rear or side access are not acceptable. C. The VFD enclosure doors shall include an interlocking system with the isolation switch. D. A safety grounding device shall be provided for grounding the positive, negative, and neutral buses to ensure all stored VFD energy is discharged. E. Enclosures shall be configurable separately or in a continuous line-up. VFD's shall be capable of being integrated with conventional motor starters, load break switches, circuit breakers, and reduced voltage starters into a continuous control-gear assembly under a common plenum. F. The drive isolation transformer, fused input contactor, isolation switch, ac pre-charge circuit contactor, output filter if required, and input harmonic filter and power factor correction filter if required shall be factory mounted wired by the manufacturer and integrated into the VFD enclosure. G. All painted surfaces shall be ANSI 61 Gray. H. The enclosure must be designed to avoid harmonic and inductive heating and eliminate radio frequency interference. I. The VFD enclosure shall comply with UL 347 standards suitable for installation in an indoor, unclassified area. J. All enclosure openings exceeding 0.25 inch (6 mm) in,width shall be provided with screens to prevent the entrance of snakes, rodents,etc. The maximum screen mesh opening width shall be 0.25 inch (6 mm). K. Air filters shall be of a reusable type that can be easily cleaned. All doors or front panels will be fully gasketed. Air exhaust from cooling fans will be at the top of the enclosure and direct exhaust airflow away from personnel in front of the equipment. L. The VFD shall be designed for harsh environments. All exposed copper components shall be tin-plated or epoxy-coated. All printed circuit cards shall be conformal coated. 2.15 COOLING A. A"loss of cooling"fault shutdown shall be furnished with forced-cooled equipment. In the event of clogged filters or fan failure, the drive will shut down safely without electronic component failure. B. Fan motors shall be protected from overcurrent faults. Metal squirrel cage ball bearing 460V three phase fan motors with 50,000 hour life are to be used in the drive design. Plastic muffin fans are not acceptable. As specified on the data sheet,fan power will be obtained from the primary 4160V power through a 480V, 3-phase, 60 Hz internal auxiliary power supply. In the event of a fault or opening of the main contactor feeding the drive, the fans will continue to run for a time to allow for sufficient cooling of the drive.Convection cooling Medium Voltage Drives 261839- 11 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 in the case of fault or main contactor opening is unacceptable as a method to ensure proper cooling of the drive. C. The VFD shall have internal fans to ensure proper operation in the above referenced ambient. When specified furnish additional redundant fan(s) to ensure operation in the event of primary fan failure. 2.16 SPACE HEATERS A. VFD Enclosure Space Heaters 1. The space heater circuit shall turn on automatically when the drive is not operating. 2. A fused switch or circuit breaker for space heater circuit shall be provided for overload protection and as a disconnecting means. 3. When specified, a meter and a test circuit shall be provided on the enclosure door for indication that space heater power is available. 4. Space heater elements shall be rated 240 Vac and operated at 120 Vac, single-phase. B. AC Motor Space Heaters 1. Motor space heater control shall be provided. The space heater circuit shall turn on automatically when the motor is not operating. 2.17 NAMEPLATES A. Nameplates shall be 2-inch high x 2-1/2-inch wide, laminated [black with white text] [white with black text]. B. Unit nameplate and device marker lettering shall be 3/16-inch high. 2.18 FINISH A. The finish for internal and external parts shall consist of a coat of ANSI 61 (gray) thermosetting, polyester, powder paint applied electrostatically to pre-cleaned phosphatized steel and aluminum surfaces. 2.19 ACCESSORIES A. Provide a portable lifting device for transporting contactor outside its compartment. B. Provide a portable lifting device for transporting inverter outside its compartment C. An auxiliary and portable Ampgard Remote Operator(ARO) shall be used to enable users to open or close the VFD input isolation switch through the use of a pushbutton station operated up to 30 feet away from the door. Users can mount the ARO on the front of the door, plug it into any available 120 VAC source, and operate the isolation switch from outside the arc flash boundary. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FACTORYTESTING A. The VFD System shall undergo standard manufacturing testing. B. Each VFD shall be factory load tested with an induction motor on a dynamometer or M-G test stand for a minimum of 8 hours at rated ambient temperature(40-deg C standard)and rated load with VFD system at full voltage. Resistive or Inductive load-bank testing shall not be acceptable Medium Voltage Drives 261839- 12 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 1. Constant torque VFD's shall be tested at 100% rated load for 9 minutes, 150% rated load for 1 minute. This cycle will continue throughout the 8-hour test. 2. Variable torque VFD's shall be tested at 100% rated load for 9 minutes, 110% rated load for 1 minute. This cycle will continue throughout the 8-hour test. C. The manufacturer shall provide three (3) certified copies of factory test reports. D. If required, factory tests as outlined above shall be witnessed by the owner's representative. The manufacturer shall notify the owner two (2) weeks prior to the date the tests are to be performed. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Supplier and User shall schedule an on-site meeting to cover the following: 1. The start-up and commissioning plan 2. The start-up and commissioning schedule 3. The VFD's installation requirements. B. The VFD Manufacturer shall provide the services of a manufacturer's employed field service engineer for the start-up of the VFD after it is installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Functional testing, commissioning and first parameter adjusting is carried out by the manufacturer's employed field service engineer. (No third-party representatives will be permitted). C. Testing, final parameter adjustment and performance tests are carried out by the manufacturers' employed field service engineer with the customer present. D. After commissioning, the manufacturer's employed field service engineer shall review the customer's operating procedures and provide(2)two hours of basic hands-on maintenance and operation training to the customer's personnel. E. Typical commissioning will be at (3) consecutive eight-hour man-days per VFD. Rate schedule for commissioning, travel to the jobsite and living expenses during the period of work shall be included with the bid proposal. F. Microsoft WindowsTm based software shall be provided for VFD commissioning, parameter setup,fault log viewing, diagnostic analysis, and monitoring and control.The software shall provide real time graphical displays of VFD performance. G. The Contractor shall provide three (3) copies of the manufacturer's field startup report. H. The VFD manufacturer shall certify in writing that the equipment has been installed, adjusted and tested in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. I. The Contractor shall provide three (3) copies of the manufacturer's representative's certification. 3.03 TRAINING A. The manufacturer shall provide a training session for five (5) owner representative(s) for one normal workday(s) at a job site location determined by the owner. B. The training session shall be conducted by the manufacturer (no third-party representatives will be permitted) and include instruction on assembly, starters, and other major components. 3.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Medium Voltage Drives 261839- 13 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 A. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. One (1) copy of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment. 3.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Equipment operation and maintenance manuals shall be provided with each assembly shipped, and shall include instruction leaflets and instruction bulletins for the complete assembly and each major component. 3.06 INSTALLATION A. The Contractor shall install all equipment per the manufacturer's recommendations and the contract drawings. B. All necessary hardware to secure the assembly in place shall be provided by the Contractor. C. Check all bolted connections to assure that they are in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended torque requirements. 3.07 FIELD ADJUSTMENTS A. VFD parameters shall be programmed to owner or owner representative provided settings. B. If RTD Module is included with the VFD, program Module settings as determined by owner or owner's representative. 3.08 FIELD TESTING A. Field testing by a manufacturer employed and trained Engineering Services Field Service Engineer will include the following as a minimum: 1. Sight Inspection 2. Power-Off Checklist 3. Power Up (Control Assembly only) checklist 4. Full Voltage Main Power-Up No Load Testing 5. Full Load Testing. 3.09 MAINTENANCE/WARRANTY SERVICE A. Warranty to commence 24 months from the date of commissioning by manufacturer, not to exceed 30 months from the date of shipment, and include all parts, labor, and travel time. B. Spare Parts 1. The VFD manufacturer shall provide a complete list of spare parts for the VFD. 2. The VFD manufacturer shall provide local support for renewal parts and stock spares. 3. As a minimum,the VFD manufacturer shall include these spare parts as part of the bid: a. Inverter Extraction Ramp b. Chopper Module C. 4160V/1250V Drive Controller Kit d. Control Fuse Kit Medium Voltage Drives 261839- 14 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 e. Phase Loss Relay f. Fans g. Blowers h. Current Sensors i. Voltage Sensors j. Isolation Switch Mechanical Interlock k. URTD Module I. Power Supply M. Gate Driver Control Board n. Remote Signal 1/0 kit o. Main Contactor Coils p. Contactor Auxiliary Switch q. Primary Fuse Kit Inverter power components, which shall be interchangeable between output phases shall be provided. A minimum of one complete phase is required. r. Special tools for testing or maintaining equipment. 4. All spare parts shall be properly marked and packaged for long-term storage. All printed circuit boards shall be provided in separate anti-static containers. END OF SECTION Medium Voltage Drives 261839- 15 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 26 22 00 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following types of dry-type transformers rated 600 V and less,with capacities up to 1000 kVA: 1. Distribution transformers 2. Buck-boost transformers 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum clearances, installed devices and features, and performance for each type and size of transformer indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions,weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Electrical Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that transformers, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following: 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified." b. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event." 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. B. Qualification Data: For testing agency. C. Source quality-control test reports. D. Field quality-control test reports. Low Voltage Transformers 262200- 1 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency,with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated,that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory(NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated,that is a nationally recognized testing laboratory(NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7. C. Source Limitations: Obtain each transformer type through one source from a single manufacturer. D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. E. Comply with IEEE C57.12.91, "Test Code for Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers." 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written instructions within the enclosure of each ventilated-type unit,throughout periods during which equipment is not energized and when transformer is not in a space that is continuously under normal control of temperature and humidity. 1.08 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual transformer provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete B. Coordinate installation of wall-mounting and structure-hanging supports with actual transformer provided. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: Low Voltage Transformers 262200-2 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Acme Electric Corporation. b. Challenger Electrical Equipment Corp. c. Controlled Power Company. d. Eaton Electrical Sector; Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products. e. Federal Pacific Transformer Company. f. General Electric Company. g. Hammond Co. h. Magnetek Power Electronics Group. i. Micron Industries Corp. j. Myers Power Products, Inc. k. Siemens Energy&Automation, Inc. I. Sola/Hevi-Duty. m. Square D Co./Groupe Schneider NA; Schneider Electric. 2.02 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service. B. Cores: Grain-oriented, non-aging silicon steel. C. Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps. 1. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type. 2. Coil Material: Copper. 2.03 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS A. Comply with NEMA ST 20, and list and label as complying with UL 1561. B. Provide transformers that are constructed to withstand seismic forces specified in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." C. Cores: One leg per phase. D. Enclosure: Ventilated, NEMA 250,Type 2. 1. Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound, sealing out moisture and air. E. Transformer Enclosure Finish: Comply with NEMA 250. 1. Finish Color: ANSI 49 gray. 2.04 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION Low Voltage Transformers 262200-3 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 A. The identification of electrical equipment shall be in accordance with Section 40 05 53 "Identification for Process Piping and Equipment." Identify electrical equipment in accordance with the NEC,the local authorities, and as specified. B. Use laminated three-ply engraved plastic nameplates with black surface and white interior core, at least 1/16 inch thick. Engraved lettering shall be condensed gothic at least 1/4 inch high and properly spaced for legible and easy reading. Attach plates to equipment with stainless steel screws. Adhesive attachment is only acceptable on NEMA 4X enclosures. Identify the following items with engraved nameplates, located as follows: 1. Each switch/fuse unit or circuit breaker in each main panel and each distribution panel - adjacent to switch/fuse unit or circuit. 2. Spares shall be labeled "Spare". 3. Each branch circuit panel -on panel trim cover immediately above panel door. 4. Each safety disconnect switch, relay cabinet, control panel -on outside of cover. 5. Each exhaust fan switch -custom engraved on outside of switch cover plate (high and low if required). 6. Instrument transmitters and sensors. 7. Each motor starter-on outside cover. 8. Each Variable Frequency Drive. 9. Outside light switches -custom engraved on outside of switch cover plate. 10. Any switch for load that cannot be seen from the control point-custom engraved on outside of switch cover plate. C. Branch circuit panelboard directories shall be completely and properly typewritten. Cover with plastic and attach to the inside of the cabinet door. Spares shall be labeled as "Spare." D. Refer to Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables"for conductor coding requirements. E. Install special custom engraved switch cover plates with engraving on the outside of the cover plate at outside light switches, and at any switch for equipment which is out of sight from the control point. F. Install same brand/manufacturer fittings throughout the project. Install UL listed products. Fasteners, anchor bolts, nuts, and washers shall be stainless steel. 2.05 LOCKING OF ELECTRICAL FACILITIES A. Install locks immediately upon the installation of the electrical facility. Provide padlocks for exterior electrical facilities subject to unauthorized entry. Furnish the Owner with two keys per lock up to a quantity of 10 keys. Furnish locks to match the Owner's locking system. Key all locks alike. 2.06 ACCESS DOORS Low Voltage Transformers 262200-4 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 A. Wherever access is required in walls, ceilings, or soffits to concealed junction boxes, pull boxes or other electrical equipment, provide and install access doors. Install panels in locations approved by the Engineer. Paint as directed. B. Refer to Division 08 for access door requirements. 2.07 CLEAN AND ADJUST A. Remove shipping labels, dirt, paint, grease, and stains from equipment. Remove debris as it accumulates. Upon completion of work, clean electrical equipment and the entire electrical installation. 2.08 TESTING A. See each section for particular testing requirements for each type of equipment. END OF SECTION Low Voltage Transformers 262200-5 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Distribution panelboards. 2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards. 3. Load centers. 4. Electronic-grade panelboards. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating. B. TVSS:Transient voltage surge suppressor. 1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers'technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment. 1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. 2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250,Type 1. 3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. 5. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 6. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components. 7. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 8. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device included in panelboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. 1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Panelboards 262416- 1 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency. B. Field Quality-Control Reports: 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements. C. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load balancing. 1.06 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices. 2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device that allows adjustments. 1.07 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Keys:Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock. 2. Circuit Breakers Including GFCI and Ground Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP)Types: Two spares for each panelboard. 3. Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type. 4. Fuses for Fused Power-Circuit Devices: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type. 1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing. B. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer. C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions. D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. Panelboards 262416-2 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 E. Comply with NEMA PB 1. F. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary electric heating (250 W per panelboard)to prevent condensation. B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NEMA PB 1. 1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: 1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 23 deg F (minus 5 deg C)to plus 104 deg F (plus 40 deg C). b. Altitude: Not exceeding 3300 feet (2000 m). B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows: 1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified. 2. Altitude not exceeding 3300 feet (2000 m). C. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner's written permission. 3. Comply with NFPA 70E. 1.11 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. Panelboards 262416-3 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete. 1.12 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS A. Enclosures: Surface-mounted cabinets. 1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location. a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250,Type 1. b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250,Type 4X 316 grade SS. c. Corrosive Locations: NEMA 250,Type 4X, 316 grade SS. d. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids: NEMA 250,Type 12. 2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match box dimensions;for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box. 3. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover. 4. Skirt for Surface-Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboard front with flanges for attachment to panelboard,wall, and ceiling or floor. 5. Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure; integral with enclosure body.Arrange to isolate individual panel sections. 6. Finishes: a. Panels and Trim: Steel,factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. b. Back Boxes: Same finish as panels and trim. c. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for overcurrent protective devices and other components. 7. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder. Card to be type written with circuit service. Hand written legends are not allowed. B. Incoming Mains Location:Top and bottom. C. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses: Panelboards 262416-4 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 1. Material:Tin-plated aluminum. 2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding conductors; bonded to box. 3. Isolated Ground Bus: Adequate for branch-circuit isolated ground conductors; insulated from box. 4. Extra-Capacity Neutral Bus: Neutral bus rated 200 percent of phase bus and UL listed as suitable for nonlinear loads. 5. Split Bus: Vertical buses divided into individual vertical sections. D. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes. 1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type. 3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type. 4. Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device. 5. Extra-Capacity Neutral Lugs: Rated 200 percent of phase lugs mounted on extra-capacity neutral bus. E. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards or load centers with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices. F. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections,filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices. G. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Rated for series-connected system with integral or remote upstream overcurrent protective devices and labeled by an NRTL. Include size and type of allowable upstream and branch devices, listed and labeled for series-connected short-circuit rating by an NRTL. H. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals. 2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Surge Suppression: Factory installed as an integral part of indicated panelboards, complying with UL 1449 SPD Type 1. 2.03 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer& Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy&Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. (Preferred) Panelboards 262416-5 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 5. Approved equal B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type. C. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. 1. For doors more than 36 inches (914 mm) high, provide two latches, keyed alike. D. Mains: As indicated. E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt-on circuit breakers. F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt-on circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires mechanical release for removal. 2.04 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer& Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy&Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. (Preferred) 5. Approved equal. B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type. C. Mains: Circuit breaker. D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units. E. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. F. Column-Type Panelboards: Narrow gutter extension, with cover, to overhead junction box equipped with ground and neutral terminal buses. 2.05 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer& Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy&Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. (Preferred) 5. Approved equal. Panelboards 262416-6 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents. 1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. 2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting. 3. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or field-replicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings: a. Instantaneous trip. b. Long- and short-time pickup levels. C. Long-and short-time time adjustments. d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and Izt response. 4. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5. 5. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground- fault protection (6-mA trip). 6. Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip). 7. Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) Circuit Breakers: Comply with UL 1699; 120/240-V, single-pole configuration. 8. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories: a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor materials. C. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high- intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits. d. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking ground-fault protection function with other upstream or downstream devices. e. Multipole units enclosed in a single housing or factory assembled to operate as a single unit B. Fused Switch: NEMA KS 1,Type HD; clips to accommodate specified fuses; lockable handle. Panelboards 262416-7 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 1. Fuses, and Spare-Fuse Cabinet: Comply with requirements specified in Section 262813 "Fuses." 2. Fused Switch Features and Accessories: Standard ampere ratings and number of poles. 3. Auxiliary Contacts:Two normally open and normally closed contact(s)that operate with switch handle operation. 2.06 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation. B. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from panelboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard meters and switchboard class relays. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1. B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have been subjected to water saturation. C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1. B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards. C. Mount top of trim 72 inches (1828 mm) above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. D. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. E. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed. 1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges. F. Install filler plates in unused spaces. G. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties. H. Comply with NECA 1. 3.03 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." Panelboards 262416-8 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads; incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable. C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. C. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. D. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit. E. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports: a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each panelboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. c. Instruments and Equipment: 1). Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. F. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. Panelboards 262416-9 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 G. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated. C. Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes. 1. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading. 2. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax machines and on-line data processing, computing,transmitting, and receiving equipment. 3. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings before and after changes and submit test records. 4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads,within a panelboard, is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum requirement. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION Panelboards 262416- 10 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 262923 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. The Contractor shall furnish and install the Variable frequency drives as specified herein and as shown on the contract drawings. 1.02 REFERENCES A. The Variable frequency drives and all components shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest applicable standards of ETL, UL, ANSI, and NEMA. 1.03 SUBMITTALS—FOR REVIEW/APPROVAL A. The following information shall be submitted to the Engineer. 1. Master drawing index. 2. Dimensioned outline drawing. 3. Schematic diagram. 4. Component list. 5. Conduit entry/exit locations. 6. Assembly ratings including: a. Short circuit rating. b. Voltage. c. Continuous current. 7. Cable terminal sizes. B. Where applicable the following information shall be submitted to the Engineer. 1. Connection details between close-coupled assemblies. 2. Composite floor plan of close-coupled assemblies. 3. Key interlock scheme drawing and sequence of operations. C. Submit ten (10) copies of the above information. 1.04 SUBMITTALS—FOR INFORMATION Variable Frequency Drives 262923 - 1 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 A. When requested by the Engineer the following product information shall be submitted: 1. Descriptive bulletins. 2. Product sheets. 1.05 SUBMITTALS—FOR CLOSEOUT A. The following information shall be submitted for record purposes prior to final payment. 1. Final as-built drawings and information for items listed section in 1.04. 2. Wiring diagrams. 3. Certified production test reports. 4. Installation information. 5. Seismic certification and equipment anchorage details. 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. The manufacturer of the assembly shall be the manufacturer of the major components within the assembly. B. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9000, 9001 or 9002 certified. C. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar electrical equipment for a minimum period of five (5) years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. One (1) copy of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment. 1.08 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. PDF copies of the equipment operation and maintenance manuals shall be provided prior to final payment. B. Operation and maintenance manuals shall include the following information: 1. Instruction books and/or leaflets. Variable Frequency Drives 262923 - 2 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 2. Recommended renewal parts list. 3. Drawings and information required by section 1.06. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Eaton B. Square D C. Approved equal 2.02 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES(VFD) A. Where shown on the drawings, Variable frequency drives shall have the following features: 1. The VFD shall be rated at 460 Vac input. The VFDs shall provide a microprocessor-based adjustment of three-phase motors. The variable frequency and voltage output shall provide constant volts per hertz excitation for the motor up to 60 hertz. The controllers shall be rated as shown in the drawings. As a minimum the full load output current of the drive shall be equal to the equivalent motor horsepower as listed by National Electric Code Table 430-150. 2. AC Drive manufacturer shall supply an 18-pulse design using a multiple bridge rectifier with integral reactor and phase shifting transformer. The 18-pulse configuration shall result in a multiple pulse current waveform that approximates near sinusoidal input current waveform. The power section shall be insensitive to phase rotation of the AC line. 3. The VFDs shall utilize a Current Controlled Pulse Width Modulated (CCPWM) technique for producing Variable frequency speed control. The VFDs shall be current regulated. VFDs permitting instantaneous overcurrent trips other than an output short circuit are not acceptable. 4. All VFDs 100 HP and above shall utilize a vector torque control strategy to regulate motor flux to optimize motor torque without the need for encoders. VFDs requiring voltage, dwell and current adjustments to achieve improved torque control are not acceptable. 5. The VFDs shall have an efficiency that exceeds 97%at 100% speed and load. The efficiency shall exceed 80%at 50%speed and load. 6. The VFDs shall maintain the line side displacement power factor no less than 0.95 regardless of speed and load. Variable Frequency Drives 262923 - 3 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 8. The VFDs shall have a one (1) minute overload current rating of 110% for variable torque loads and 150%for constant torque loads. 9. Total voltage harmonic distortion shall be calculated under worst case conditions in accordance with the procedure outlined in IEEE standard 519- 1992. Copies of these calculations are to be made available on request. These calculations shall be done based on the kVA capacity and impedance of the transformer supplying the VFD(s). The contractor shall supply this information to the VFD supplier. 10. The VFDs shall comply with the 5% level of total harmonic distortion as defined in IEEE 519-1981. If the VFD cannot meet these harmonic levels with standard inductors or isolation transformers the VFD manufacturer shall supply a multiple rectifier AC to DC conversion section with phase shifting transformer. This multiple rectifier converter shall cause multiple pulse current wave forms that will more nearly approximate a true sine wave, reduce total voltage harmonic content on the power line, and effectively eliminate all harmonics below the eleventh harmonic of the fundamental. 11. The VFD manufacturer shall maintain, as part of a national network, engineering service facilities within 250 miles of project to provide start-up service, emergency service calls, repair work, service contracts, maintenance and training of customer personnel. 12. Standard operating conditions shall be: a. Incoming Power: Three-phase, 460V (+10% to -10%) and 60 hertz (+/-2 hertz) power to a fixed potential DC bus level. b. Humidity: 0 to 95%(noncondensing and noncorrosive). c. Altitude: 0 to 3,300 feet above sea level. d. Ambient Temperature: 0 to 40 degrees C. 13. The VFDs shall be capable of operating any NEMA B squirrel cage induction motor, regardless of manufacturer, with a load rating within the capacity of the VFDs. 14. The VFDs shall be able to start into a spinning motor. The VFDs shall be able to determine the motor speed in any direction and resume operation without tripping. If the motor is spinning in the reverse direction, the VFDs shall start into the motor in the reverse direction, bring the motor to a controlled stop, and then accelerate the motor in the preset method of starting. 15. Control Functions Variable Frequency Drives 262923 -4 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 a. All VFDs programmable parameters shall be Variable from a digital operator keypad located on the front door of the VFD. Parameters shall include: 1. Programmable maximum and minimum frequency limits. 2. Programmable acceleration and deacceleration times. 3. Programmable carrier frequencies, V/Hz, and critical frequency avoidance lockout. 4. Programmable electronic overload and torque limits. 5. Programmable multiple attempt restart. 6. Programmable jog,thread and preset speeds. 7. Programmable keypad lockout and factory default overrides. b. The VFDs shall be additionally equipped with a digital operator station mounted on the enclosure front door. Control operator devices and indication lights shall include: 1. Digital speed control. 1. Three position H-O-A switch which provides for manual (HAND) start or remote signal (AUTO) start from user supplied relay contacts. Switch shall have auxiliary contacts in (AUTO)for remote position indication. 2. LED status lights for HOA position. 3. Local - remote speed control selector switch. 5. LED status lights for local -remote switch position. 6. LED status lights for run, fault, alarm, up-to-speed, and drive-ready status. 16. The VFDs shall have the following system interfaces: a. Inputs 1. Two (2) isolated process control speed reference interfaces to receive and isolate 0-10 Vdc or 4-20 mAdc signals. 2. Dedicated terminal blocks for interface with remote start contact and remote safety trips. Variable Frequency Drives 262923 -5 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 3. 120 Vac control to allow VFDs to interface with remote contacts at a distance up to 500 feet and with three-wire control. b. Outputs 1. Four (4) analog output signals 0-10 Vdc for external metering. 2. Run relay with an isolated set of from C contacts. 3. Dry contact output to indicate protective function trip. 17. Monitoring and Displays a. The VFDs shall have a 40-character vacuum fluorescent display indicating monitored functions as described in the following paragraph. b. The following parameters shall be monitored: 1. Input current. (3 phases) 2. Input voltage. (3 phases) 3. Output current. (3 phases) 4. Output voltage. (3 phases) 5. Output frequency. 6. Kilowatts. 7. Drive temperature. 8. Time. 9. Date. 10. Elapsed time meter. 11. Motor rpm. 12. Ten (10) most recent trips. 18. Protection Functions a. The VFDs shall have the following protective features: 1. Speed compensated electronic motor overload current. 2. Undervoltage. Variable Frequency Drives 262923 - 6 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 3. Overfrequency. 4. Overtemperature. 5. Ground Fault. 6. DC bus protection. 7. Inrush current limit (Variable 50 to 150%). 8. Input and output phase loss. 9. Current limiting fuses shall be provided on the input side of the VFDs to protect against fault currents up to 200,000 A sym. 10. The output side of the VFDs shall be equipped with a current limiting reactor to reduce the amount of fault current to the VFDs. 19. Additional Features shall be provided as follows: a. The VFDs shall include serial communications. All VFD programming, monitoring and diagnostic functions shall be available via this serial link. MODBUS protocol shall be provided to allow direct communications with programmable logic controllers. The VFDs shall be addressable should more than one VFD occupy the same serial network. b. Programmable PID/set-point control via the digital keypad. Proportional, integral and derivative gains shall be tunable while the drive is running. An RS232-C, RS-422 or RS-485 port shall be available. c. The VFDs shall be equipped with an input circuit breaker. The breaker shall be interlocked with the enclosure doors to prevent access to the VFDs unless the breaker is in the open position. The circuit breaker shall have provisions for padlocking in the open position. d. Line reactors. e. Fused space heaters with thermostat to minimize condensation potential upon drive shutdown. f. Laminated plastic nameplate engraved with customer's identifying name or number for the drive. g. Auxiliary drive status relay with two Form C relay pairs, rated 2 amps resistive at 120-volt AC for indication of running condition. Variable Frequency Drives 262923 -7 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 h. Motor overcurrent relay option to provide motor overcurrent sensing of a given level of load current. i. Input isolation transformers, separate mount, with NEMA 1 enclosure. j. External manual mechanical bypass featuring a separate mounted no load break switch which will be used in conjunction with an existing starter. k. Low harmonic converter guaranteed to meet IEEE-519. 20. Enclosures a. VFDs from 100 to 600 HP shall be housed in a NEMA 1 MCC enclosure. 1. All enclosures shall be not less than 16-gauge steel with surfaces thoroughly cleaned and phosphatized prior to painting. They shall be primed with a corrosion-resisting coating. Cabinet finish paint to be ANSI 61 Gray. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FACTORYTESTING A. The following standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment provided under this section. All tests shall be in accordance with the latest version of UL and NEMA standards. 1. All printed circuit boards shall be tested under a temperature cycling (0 degrees C to +65 degrees C) 24-hour load test and then functionally tested via fault finder bench equipment prior to unit installation. 2. All final assemblies shall be tested at full load with application of line-to-line and line-to-ground bolted faults. The Variable Frequency Drive shall trip electronically without device failure. 3. After all tests have been performed, each VFD shall undergo a 12-hour burn- in test. The drive shall be burned in at 100% inductive or motor load for 12 hours without an unscheduled shutdown. 4. After the burn-in cycle is complete, each VFD shall be put through a 30- minute cycling motor load test before inspection and shipping. B. Factory tests as outlined above shall be witnessed by the owner's representative. 1. The manufacturer shall notify the owner two (2) weeks prior to the date the tests are to be performed. Variable Frequency Drives 262923 -8 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 2. The manufacturer shall include the cost of transportation and lodging for up to three (3) owner's representatives. The cost of meals and incidental expenses shall be the owner's responsibility. C. The manufacturer shall provide three (3) certified copies of factory test reports. a. INSTALLATION The Contractor shall verify that each motor starter has been provided with the proper sized overload relay heater element as recommended by the starter manufacturer based on motor nameplate amps. Set each MCP at 10 times motor full load amps. If nuisance tripping occurs, increase setting slightly, but do not exceed 13 times full load amps without written permission from Engineer. Record all pertinent information for each starter on the project as described on the motor starter data sheet at the end of these specifications. Furnish a copy of each completed data sheet to the Engineer upon completion of the project. 3.02 field quality control A. Provide the services of a qualified factory-trained manufacturer's representative to assist the Contractor in installation and start-up of the equipment specified under this section. The manufacturer's representative shall provide technical direction and assistance to the Contractor in general assembly of the equipment, connections and adjustments, and testing of the assembly and components contained herein. B. The following minimum work shall be performed by the Contractor under the technical direction of the manufacturer's service representative. 1. Inspection and final adjustments. 2. Operational and functional checks of VFDs and spare parts. C. The Contractor shall provide three (3) copies of the manufacturer's field start-up report before final payment is made. 3.03 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATION A. A qualified factory-trained manufacturer's representative shall certify in writing that the equipment has been installed, adjusted, and tested in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. The Contractor shall provide three (3) copies of the manufacturer's representative's certification before final payment is made. 3.04 TRAINING A. The Contractor shall provide a training session for up to (4) owner's representatives for (2) normal workdays at a jobsite location determined by the owner. B. The training session shall be conducted by a manufacturer's qualified representative. Variable Frequency Drives 262923 -9 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 C. The training program shall include the following: 1. Instructions on the proper maintenance and operation of the equipment. 2. General troubleshooting and repair. 3. Training manuals END OF SECTION Variable Frequency Drives 262923 - 10 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 26 32 13.13 DIESEL ENGINE DRIVEN GENERATOR SET This specification covers diesel-fueled generator sets that are rated up to 2000.OkW and operating at up to 15,000VAC. The codes and standards that are referenced are typical for North American applications. PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. This Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. The This Section includes packaged engine-generator sets suitable for use in mission critical applications with the features as specified and indicated. Engine generators will be used as the Standby power source for the system, but shall be capable of providing reliable power with no run-time limitations while the primary source of power is unavailable. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Emergency Standby Power (ESP): Per ISO 8528: The maximum power available during a variable electrical power sequence, under the stated operating conditions, for which a generating set is capable of delivering in the event of a utility power outage or under test conditions for up to 200 hours of operation per year with the maintenance intervals and procedures being carried out as prescribed by the manufacturers. The permissible average power output (Ppp) over 24 hours of operation shall not exceed 70 percent ofthe ESP unless otherwise agreed by the RIC engine manufacturer. B. Operational Bandwidth: The total variation from the lowest to highest value of a parameter over the range of conditions indicated, expressed as a percentage of the nominal value of the parameter. 1.4 ACTIONS SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of packaged engine generator indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. In addition, include the following: 1. Thermal damage curve for generator. 2. Time-current characteristic curves for generator protective device. 3. Sound test data, based on a free field requirement. B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Dimensioned outline plan and elevation drawings of engine-generator set and other components specified. 2. Wiring Diagrams: Control interconnection, Customer connections. C. Certifications: Diesel Engine Driven Generator Set 26 32 13.13- 1 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 1. Submit statement of compliance which states the proposed product(s) is certified to the emissions standards required by the location for EPA, stationary emergency application. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Source quality-control test reports. 1. Certified summary of prototype-unit test report. See requirements in Part 2 "Source Quality Control"Article Part A. Include statement indicating torsional compatibility of components. 2. Certified Test Report: Provide certified test report documenting factory test per the requirements of this specification, as well as certified factory test of generator set sensors per NFPA110 level 1. 3. List of factory tests to be performed on units to be shipped for this Project. 4. Report of exhaust emissions and compliance statement certifying compliance with applicable regulations. B. Warranty: 1. Submit manufacturer's warranty statement to be provided for this Project. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer. Maintain, within 50 of Project site, a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs. C. Source Limitations: Obtain packaged generator sets and auxiliary components through one source from a single manufacturer. D. Comply with NFPA 37 (Standard For the Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines). E. Comply with NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code. Equipment shall be suitable for use in systems in compliance to Article 700, 701, and 702). F. Complywith NFPA 110(Emergencyand Standby Power Systems) requirementsfor Level 1 emergency power supply system. G. Comply with UL 2200. H. Noise Emission: Comply with 70 for maximum noise level at 23 feet due to sound emitted by generator set including engine, engine exhaust, engine cooling-air intake and discharge, and other components of installation. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Engine-generator system shall withstand the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of performance capability: 1. Ambient Temperature: 0.0 deg C(32.0 deg F)to 40.0 deg C(104.0 deg F). 2. Relative Humidity: 50 to 100 percent. 3. Altitude: Sea level to 500.0 feet (152.4 m). 1.8 WARRANTY Diesel Engine Driven Generator Set 26 32 13.13-2 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 A. Base Warranty: Manufacturer shall provide base warranty coverage on the material and workmanship of the generator set for a minimum of twenty-four(24) months for Standby product and twelve (12) months for Prime/Continuous product from registered commissioning and start-up. B. Extended Warranty: Manufacturer shall offer extend coverage of 5 years from date of registered commissioning and start-up. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS Approved equals may be considered if equipment performance is shown to meet the requirements herein. Costs associated with redesign of project with use of another manufacturer shall be the financial responsibility of the installing contractor. 1. Cummins Inc. 2. Caterpillar 3. MTU 4. Kohler 2.2 ENGINE-GENERATOR SET A. Factory-assembled and -tested, engine-generator set. B. Mounting Frame: Maintain alignment of mounted components without depending on concrete foundation; and have lifting attachments. 1. Rigging Information: Indicate location of each lifting attachment,generator- set center of gravity, and total package weight in submittal drawings. C. Capacities and Characteristics: 1. Power Output Ratings: Electrical output power rating for Standby operation of not less than indicated on drawings, at 80 percent lagging power factor, 2400/4160, Wye,Three phase, 3 -wire, 60 hertz. 2. Unit size listed on drawings is an estimated size. Generator size shall be confirmed with unit supplied during construction and shall be capable of starting and operating generator load listed on drawings. 3. Alternator shall be capable of accepting maximum in a single step and be capable of recovering to a minimum of 90% of rated no load voltage. Following the application of the specified kVA load at near zero power factor applied to the generator set. 4. Nameplates: For each major system component to identify manufacturer's name and address,and model and serial number of component. The engine- generator nameplate shall include information of the power output rating of the equipment. D. Generator-Set Performance: 1. Steady-State Voltage Operational Bandwidth: 0.5 percent of rated output voltage from no load to full load. 2. Transient Voltage Performance: Not more than 19 percent variation for 50 percent step-load increase or decrease. Voltage shall recover and remain Diesel Engine Driven Generator Set 26 32 13.13-3 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 within the steady-state operating band within 7 seconds. On application of a 100% load step the generator set shall recover to stable voltage within 10 seconds. 3. Steady-State Frequency Operational Bandwidth: 0.25 percent of rated frequency from no load to full load. 4. Steady-State Frequency Stability: When system is operating at any constant load within the rated load,there shall be no random speed variations outside the steady-state operational band and no hunting or surging of speed. 5. Transient Frequency Performance: Not more than 9 percent variation for 50 percent step-load increase or decrease. Frequency shall recover and remain within the steady-state operating band within 7 seconds.On application of a 100% load step the generator set shall recover to stable frequency within 10 seconds. 6. Output Waveform: At full load, harmonic content measured line to line or line to neutral shall not exceed 5 percent total and 3 percent for any single harmonic. Telephone influence factor,determined according to NEMA MG 1, shall not exceed 50. 7. Sustained Short-Circuit Current: For a 3-phase, bolted short circuit at system output terminals,system shall supply a minimum of 300 percent of rated full- load current for not less than 8 seconds without damage to generator system components. For a 1-phase, bolted short circuit at system output terminals, system shall regulate both voltage and current to prevent over-voltage conditions on the non-faulted phases. 8. Start Time: Comply with NFPA 110, Level 1,Type 10, system requirements. 9. Ambient Condition Performance: Engine generator shall be designed to allow operation at full rated load in an ambient temperature under site conditions, based on highest ambient condition. Ambient temperature shall be as measured at the air inlet to the engine generator for enclosed units, and at the control of the engine generator for machines installed in equipment rooms. 2.3 ENGINE A. Fuel: ASTM D975 #2 Diesel Fuel B. Rated Engine Speed: 1800RPM. C. Lubrication System: The following items are mounted on engine or skid: 1. Lube oil pump: shall be positive displacement, mechanical, full pressure pump. 2. Filter and Strainer: Provided by the engine manufacturer of record to provide adequate filtration for the prime mover to be used. 3. Crankcase Drain: Arranged for complete gravity drainage to an easily removable container with no disassembly and without use of pumps,siphons, special tools, or appliances. D. Engine Fuel System: The engine fuel system shall be installed in strict compliance to the engine manufacturer's instructions E. Main Fuel Pump: Mounted on engine. Pump ensures adequate primary fuel flow under starting and load conditions. Pumps shall be sized to draw fuel from Diesel Engine Driven Generator Set 26 32 13.13-4 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 external fuel tank located adjacent to genset. Evaluate fuel system for day tank and provide as required. F. Governor: Adjustable isochronous, with speed sensing. The governing system dynamic capabilities shall be controlled as a function of engine coolant temperature to provide fast, stable operation at varying engine operating temperature conditions. The control system shall actively control the fuel rate as appropriate to the state of the engine generator. Fuel rate shall be regulated as a function of starting, accelerating to start disconnect speed, accelerating to rated speed, and operating in various isochronous states. G. Cooling System: Closed loop, liquid cooled 1. The generator set manufacturer shall provide prototype test data for the specific hardware proposed demonstrating that the machine will operate at rated standby load in an outdoor ambient condition of 40 deg C. 2. Coolant: Solution of 50 percent ethylene-glycol-based antifreeze and 50 percent water, with anticorrosion additives as recommended by engine manufacturer. 3. Size of Radiator overflow tank: Adequate to contain expansion of total system coolant from cold start to 110 percent load condition. 4. Expansion Tank: Constructed of welded steel plate and rated to withstand maximum closed-loop coolant system pressure for engine used. Equip with gage glass and petcock. 5. Temperature Control: Self-contained,thermostatic-control valve modulates coolant flow automatically to maintain optimum constant coolant temperature as recommended by engine manufacturer. 6. Duct Flange: Generator sets installed indoors shall be provided with a flexible radiator duct adapter flange. H. Muffler/Silencer: Selected with performance as required to meet sound requirements of the application, sized as recommended by engine manufacturer and selected with exhaust piping system to not exceed engine manufacturer's engine backpressure requirements. For generator sets with outdoor enclosures the silencer shall be inside the enclosure. I. Air-Intake Filter: Engine-mounted air cleaner with replaceable dry-filter element and restriction indicator. J. Starting System: 24V, as recommended bythe engine manufacturer;electric,with negative ground. 1. Components: Sized so they will not be damaged during a full engine-cranking cycle with ambient temperature at maximum specified in Part 1 "Project Conditions" Article. 2. Cranking Cycle: As required by NFPA 110 for level 1 systems. 3. Battery Cable: Size as recommended by engine manufacturer for cable length as required. Include required interconnecting conductors and connection accessories. 4. Battery Compartment: Factory fabricated of metal with acid-resistant finish. 5. Battery-Charging Alternator: Factory mounted on engine with solid-state voltage regulation. The battery charging alternator shall have sufficient capacityto recharge the batteries with all parasitic loads connected within 4 Diesel Engine Driven Generator Set 26 32 13.13-5 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 hours after a normal engine starting sequence. 6. Battery Chargers: Unit shall comply with UL 1236, provide fully regulated, constant voltage, current limited, battery charger for each battery bank. It will include the following features: a. Operation: Equalizing-charging rate based on generator set manufacturer's recommendations shall be initiated automatically after battery has lost charge until an adjustable equalizing voltage is achieved at battery terminals. Unit shall then be automatically switched to a lower float-charging mode and shall continue to operate in that mode until battery is discharged again. b. Automatic Temperature Compensation: Adjust float and equalize voltages for variations in ambient temperature from minus 20 deg C to plus 40 deg C to prevent overcharging at high temperatures and undercharging at low temperatures. C. Automatic Voltage Regulation: Maintain constant output voltage regardless of input voltage variations up to plus or minus 10 percent. d. Safety Functions: Sense abnormally low battery voltage and close contacts providing low battery voltage indication on control and monitoring panel. Sense high battery voltage and loss of ac input or do output of battery charger. Either condition shall close contacts that provide a battery-charger malfunction indication at system control and monitoring panel. e. Provide LED indication of general charger condition, including charging, faults, and modes. Provide a LCD display to indicate charge rate and battery voltage. Charger shall provide relay contacts for fault conditions as required by NFPA110. f. Enclosure and Mounting: NEMA,Type 1. 2.4 FUEL OIL STORAGE A. Comply with NFPA 30. B. Separate Fuel tank: Provide a double wall secondary containment type fuel storage tank as per Section 23 11 13 Diesel Fueling Systems. Contractor shall evaluate fuel storage system and determine requirement for local day tank and provide accordingly. 2.5 CONTROL AND MONITORING A. Engine generator control shall be microprocessor based and provide automatic starting, monitoring, protection and control functions for the unit. B. Automatic Starting System Sequence of Operation: When mode-selector switch on the control and monitoring panel is in the automatic position, remote-control contacts in one or more separate automatic transfer switches initiate starting and stopping of generator set. When mode-selector switch is switched to the on position,generator set starts.The off position of same switch initiates generator- set shutdown. (Switches with different configurations but equal functions are acceptable.) When generator set is running, specified system or equipment failures or derangements automatically shut down generator set and initiate alarms.Operation of the local(generatorset-mounted)and/or remote emergency- Diesel Engine Driven Generator Set 26 32 13.13-6 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 stop switch also shuts down generator set. C. Manual Starting System Sequence of Operation: Switching on-off switch on the generator control panel to the on position starts generator set. The off position of same switch initiates generator-set shutdown. When generator set is running, specified system or equipment failures or derangements automatically shutdown generator set and initiate alarms. Operation of the local (generatorset-mounted) and/or remote emergency-stop switch also shuts down generator set. D. Configuration: Operating and safety indications, protective devices, system controls, engine gages and associated equipment shall be grouped in a common control and monitoring panel. Mounting method shall isolate the control panel from generator-set vibration. AC output power circuit breakers and other output power equipment shall not be mounted in the control enclosure. E. Indicating and Protective Devices and Controls: As required by NFPA 110 for Level 1 system, and the following: 1. AC voltmeter(3-phase, line to line and line to neutral values). 2. AC ammeter(3-phases). 3. AC frequency meter. 4. AC kW output (total and for each phase). Display shall indicate power flow direction. 5. AC kVA output (total and for each phase). Display shall indicate power flow direction. 6. AC Power factor(total and for each phase). Display shall indicate leading or lagging condition. 7. Ammeter-voltmeter displays shall simultaneously display conditions for all three phases. 8. Emergency Stop Switch: Switch shall be a red "mushroom head" pushbutton device complete with lock-out/tag-out provisions. Depressing switch shall cause the generator set to immediately stop the generator set and prevent it from operating. 9. Fault Reset Switch: Supply a dedicated control switch to reset/clear fault conditions. 10. DC voltmeter(alternator battery charging). 11. Engine-coolant temperature gauge. 12. Engine lubricating-oil pressure gauge. 13. Running-time meter. 14. Generator-voltage and frequency digital raise/lower switches. Rheostatsfor these functions are not acceptable. The control shall adjustment of these parameters in a range of plus or minus 5% of the voltage and frequency operating set point(not nominal voltage and frequency values.) The voltage and frequency adjustment functions shall be disabled when the paralleling breaker is closed. 15. Fuel tank derangement alarm. 16. Fuel tank high-level shutdown of fuel supply alarm. 17. AC Protective Equipment: The control system shall include over/under voltage, reverse kVAR, reverse kW,over load (kW)short circuit,over current, loss of voltage reference, and over excitation shut down protection. There Diesel Engine Driven Generator Set 26 32 13.13-7 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 shall be a ground fault alarm for generator sets rated over 1000 amps, overload warning, and overcurrent warning alarm. 18. Status LED indicating lamps to indicate remote start signal present at the control, existing shutdown condition, existing alarm condition, not in auto, and generator set running. 19. A graphical display panel with appropriate navigation devices shall be provided to view all information noted above,as well as all engine status and alarm/shutdown conditions (including those from an integrated engine emission control system). The display shall also include integrated provisions for adjustment of the gain and stability settings for the governing and voltage regulation systems. 20. Panel lighting system to allowviewing and operation of the control when the generator room or enclosure is not lighted. 21. Data Logging: The control system shall log the latest 20 different alarm and shut down conditions,the total number oftimes each alarm orshutdown has occurred, and the date and time the latest of these shutdown and fault conditions occurred. 22. DC control Power Monitoring: The control system shall continuously monitor DC power supply to the control, and annunciate low or high voltage conditions. It shall also provide an alarm indicating imminent failure of the battery bank based on degraded voltage recover on loading(engine cranking). F. Remote Alarm Annunciator: Comply with NFPA 110. An LED labeled with proper alarm conditions shall identify each alarm event and a common audible signal shall sound for each alarm condition. 2.6 GENERATOR OVERCURRENT AND FAULT PROTECTION A. Generator Overcurrent Protection: The generator set shall be provided with a UL Listed/CSA Certified protective device that is coordinated with the alternator provided to prevent damage to the generator set on any possible overload or overcurrent condition external to the machine. The protective device shall be listed as a utility grade protective device under UL category NRGU. The control system shall be subject to UL follow-up service at the manufacturing location to verify that the protective system is fully operational as manufactured. Protector shall perform the following functions: 1. Initiates a generator kW overload alarm when generator has operated at an overload equivalent to 110 percent of full-rated load for 60 seconds. Indication for this alarm is integrated with other generator-set malfunction alarms. 2. Under single phase or multiple phase fault conditions, or on overload conditions, indicates an alarm conditions when the current flow is in excess of 110%of rated current for more than 10 seconds. 3. Under single phase or multiple phase fault conditions,operates to switch off alternator excitation at the appropriate time to prevent damage to the alternator. 4. The operator panel shall indicate the nature of the fault condition as either a short circuit or an overload. Diesel Engine Driven Generator Set 26 32 13.13-8 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 5. Senses clearing of a fault by other overcurrent devices and controls recovery of rated voltage to avoid overshoot greater than 120%of nominal voltage. 6. The protective system provided shall not include an instantaneous trip function. 2.7 GENERATOR, EXCITER,AND VOLTAGE REGULATOR A. Comply with NEMA MG 1. B. Drive: Generator shaft shall be directly connected to engine shaft. Exciter shall be rotated integrally with generator rotor. C. Electrical Insulation: Class H D. Temperature Rise: 105/Class F environment. E. Construction shall prevent mechanical, electrical, and thermal damage due to vibration,over speed up to 125 percent of rating,and heat during operation at 110 percent of rated capacity. F. Permanent Magnet Generator(PMG)shall provide excitation powerfor optimum motor starting and short circuit performance. G. Enclosure: Drip-proof. H. Voltage Regulator: Solid-state type,separate from exciter, providing performance as specified.The voltage regulation system shall be microprocessor-controlled,3- phase true RMS sensing,full wave rectified,and provide a pulse-width modulated signal to the exciter. No exceptions or deviations to these requirements will be permitted. I. The alternator shall be provided with anti-condensation heater(s) in all applications where the generator set is provided in an outdoor enclosure,or when the generator set is installed in a coastal or tropical environment. J. Windings: Two-thirds pitch stator winding and fully linked amortisseur winding. Alternators operating atvoltage higherthan 690VACshall be provided with form- wound stator coils. K. Subtransient Reactance: 15 percent maximum, based on the rating of the engine generator set. 2.8 OUTDOOR GENERATOR SET ENCLOSURE A. Description: Sound Attenuated Aluminum housing. Multiple panels shall be lockable and provide adequate access to components requiring maintenance. Instruments, control, and battery system shall be mounted within enclosure. B. Construction: 1. Louvers: Equipped with bird screen to permit air circulation when engine is not running while excluding birds and rodents. 2. Load Center: The enclosure shall be equipped with a load center as a single entry point for commercial power supply to support ancillary equipment.The panelboard shall have a minimum rating of 100 amperes, 240/120 volts, single phase, 3-wire with a main circuit breaker and branch circuit breakers as scheduled. All equipment is to be pre wired for the battery charger, jacket water heater(s), lighting and convenience receptacle. The MLO load center shall be mounted within the enclosure and allow for site installed conduit entry. The placement of this load center and panel schedule shall be shown Diesel Engine Driven Generator Set 26 32 13.13-9 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 on the submittal drawings. All internal wiring shall be type XHHW in EMT conduit in accordance with all governing codes pursuant to this application. 3. Hinged Doors: With padlocking provisions. Restraint/Hold back hardware to prevent door to keep door open at 180 degrees during maintenance. Rain lips overall doors. 4. Exhaust System: a. Muffler Location: Stainless steel within enclosure. 5. Hardware: All hardware and hinges shall be stainless steel. 6. Wind Rating: Wind rating shall be 150 mph 7. Mounting Base:Suitable for mounting on sub-base fuel tankor housekeeping pad. 8. A weather protective enclosure shall be provided which allows the generator set to operate at full rated load with a static pressure drop equal to or less than 0.5 inches of water. C. Engine Cooling Airflow through Enclosure: Housing shall provide ample airflow for engine generator operation at rated load in an ambient temperature of 40 deg C. 1. Louvers: Fixed-engine, cooling-air inlet and discharge. D. Sound Performance: Reduce the sound level of the engine generator while operating at full rated load to a maximum of 70 dBA measured at any location 23 ft from the engine generator in a free field environment. 2.9 VIBRATION ISOLATION DEVICES A. Vibration Isolation: Generators installed on grade shall be provided with elastomeric isolator pads integral to the generator, unless the engine manufacturer requires use of spring isolation. 2.10 FINISHES A. Indoor and Outdoor Enclosures and Components: Powder-coated and baked over corrosion-resistant pretreatment and compatible primer. Manufacturer's standard color or as directed on the drawings. 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Prototype Testing: Factory test engine-generator set using same engine model, constructed of identical or equivalent components and equipped with identical or equivalent accessories. 1. Tests: Comply with NFPA 110, Level 1 Energy Converters. In addition, the equipment engine, skid, cooling system, and alternator shall have been subjected to actual prototype tests to validate the capability of the design under the abnormal conditions noted in NFPA110. Calculations and testing on similar equipment which are allowed under NFPA110 are not sufficientto meet this requirement. B. Project-Specific Equipment Tests: Before shipment,factory test engine-generator set manufactured specifically for this Project. Perform tests at rated load and power factor. Include the following tests: 1. Test engine generator set manufactured for this Project to demonstrate compatibility and functionality. Diesel Engine Driven Generator Set 26 32 13.13- 10 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 2. Full load run. 3. Maximum power. 4. Voltage regulation. 5. Steady-state governing. 6. Single-step load pickup. 7. Simulated safety shutdowns. 8. Provide 14 days' advance notice of tests and opportunity for observation of tests by Owner's representative. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with packaged engine-generator manufacturers' written installation, application, and alignment instructions and with NFPA 110. B. Equipment shall be installed bythe contractor in accordance with final submittals and contract documents. Installation shall comply with applicable state and local codes as required by the authority having jurisdiction. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and instructions included in the listing or labeling of UL listed products. C. Installation of equipment shall include furnishing and installing all interconnecting wiring between all major equipment provided for the on-site power system. The contractor shall also perform interconnecting wiring between equipment sections (when required), under the supervision of the equipment supplier. D. Equipment shall be installed on concrete housekeeping pads. Equipment shall be permanently fastened to the pad in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and seismic requirements of the site. E. Equipment shall be initially started and operated by representatives of the manufacturer. All protective settings shall be adjusted as instructed by the consulting engineer. F. All equipment shall be physically inspected for damage. Scratches and other installation damage shall be repaired prior to final system testing. Equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove all dirt and construction debris prior to initial operation and final testing of the system. G. On completion of the installation by the electrical contractor, the generator set supplier shall conduct a site evaluation toverifythatthe equipment is installed per manufacturer's recommended practice. 3.2 ON SITE ACCEPTANCE TEST A. The complete installation shall be tested to verify compliance with the performance requirements of this specification following completion of all site work. Testing shall be conducted by representatives of the manufacturer, with required fuel supplied by Contractor. The Engineer shall be notified in advance and shall have the option to witness the tests. The generator set manufacturer shall provide a site test specification covering the entire system. Tests shall include: B. Prior to start of active testing, all field connections for wiring, power conductors, Diesel Engine Driven Generator Set 26 32 13.13- 11 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 and bus bar connections shall be checked for proper tightening torque. C. Installation acceptance tests to be conducted on site shall include a "cold start" test, a two hour full load (resistive) test, and a one-step rated load pickup test in accordance with NFPA 110. Provide a resistive load bank and make temporary connections for full load test, if necessary. D. Perform a power failure test on the entire installed system. This test shall be conducted by opening the power supply from the utility service, and observing proper operation of the system for at least 2 hours. Coordinate timing and obtain approval for start of test with site personnel. 3.3 TRAINING A. The equipment supplier shall provide training for the facility operating personnel covering operation and maintenance of the equipment provided. The training program shall be not less than 4 hours in duration and the class size shall be limited to 5 persons. Training date shall be coordinated with the facility owner. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. 3.5 SERVICE AND SUPPORT A. The generator set supplier shall maintain service parts inventory for the entire power system at a central location which is accessible to the service location 24 hours per day, 365 days per year. The inventory shall have a commercial value of $3 million or more. The manufacturer of the generator set shall maintain a central parts inventory to support the supplier, covering all the major components of the power system, including engines, alternators, control systems, paralleling electronics, and power transfer equipment. B. The generator set shall be serviced by a local service organization that is trained and factory certified in generator set service. The supplier shall maintain an inventory of critical power system replacement parts in the local service location. Service vehicles shall be stocked with critical replacement parts. The service organization shall be on call 24 hours per day, 365 days per year. The service organization shall be physically located within 150 of the site. C. The manufacturer shall maintain model and serial number records of each generator set provided for at least 20 years. END OF SECTION Diesel Engine Driven Generator Set 26 32 13.13- 12 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 26 64 19 MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes MCCs for use with ac circuits rated 600 V and less and having the following factory-installed components: 1. Incoming main lugs and OCPDs. 2. Full-voltage magnetic controllers. 3. Feeder-tap units. 4. TVSS. 5. Instrumentation. 6. Auxiliary devices. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. BAS: Building automation system. B. CE: Conformite European (European Compliance). C. CPT: Control power transformer. D. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. E. GFCI: Ground fault circuit interrupting. F. IGBT: Insulated-gate bipolar transistor. G. LAN: Local area network. H. LED: Light-emitting diode. I. MCC: Motor-control center. J. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker. K. MCP: Motor-circuit protector. Motor Control Center 260553 - 1 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 L. NC: Normally closed. M. NO: Normally open. N. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device. O. PCC: Point of common coupling. P. PID: Control action, proportional plus integral plus derivative. Q. PT: Potential transformer. R. PWM: Pulse-width modulated. S. RFI: Radio-frequency interference. T. SCR: Silicon-controlled rectifier. U. TDD: Total demand (harmonic current) distortion. V. THD(V): Total harmonic voltage demand. W. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of controller and each type of MCC. Include shipping and operating weights, features, performance, electrical ratings, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. B. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit EA 5: For continuous metering equipment for energy consumption. C. Shop Drawings: For each MCC, manufacturer's approval drawings as defined in UL 845. In addition to requirements specified in UL 845, include dimensioned plans, elevations, and sections; and conduit entry locations and sizes, mounting arrangements, and details, including required clearances and service space around equipment. 1. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following: a. Each installed unit's type and details. b. Factory-installed devices. C. Enclosure types and details. d. Nameplate legends. Motor Control Center 260553 -2 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 e. Short-circuit current (withstand) rating of complete MCC, and for bus structure and each unit. f. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of each installed controller and feeder device, and installed devices. g. Specified optional features and accessories. 2. Schematic and Connection Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring for each installed controller. 3. Nameplate legends. 4. Vertical and horizontal bus capacities. 5. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of each installed unit. D. Standard Drawings: For each MCC, as defined in UL 845. E. Production Drawings: For each MCC, as defined in UL 845. F. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, drawn to scale, showing dimensioned layout, required working clearances, and required area above and around MCCs where pipe and ducts are prohibited. Show MCC layout and relationships between electrical components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each support. Indicate field measurements. G. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency. H. Product Certificates: For each MCC,from manufacturer. I. Source quality-control reports. J. Field quality-control reports. K. Operation and Maintenance Data: For MCCs, all installed devices, and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Manufacturer's Record Drawings: As defined in UL 845. In addition to requirements specified in UL 845, include field modifications and field-assigned wiring identification incorporated during construction by manufacturer, Contractor, or both. 2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting circuit breaker and MCP trip settings. 3. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable overload relays. 4. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming reduced- voltage, solid-state controllers. 5. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming microprocessor control modules. 6. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable timers, controls, and status and alarm points. Motor Control Center 260553 -3 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 L. Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor nameplate full-load cu rrents. M. Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motors have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that switch settings for motor running overload protection suit actual motors to be protected. N. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing shall be as per NETA standards. B. Source Limitations: Obtain MCCs and controllers of a single type from single source from single manufacturer. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. D. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver MCCs in shipping splits of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery paths. B. Handle MCCs according to the following: 1. NEMA ICS 2.3, "Instructions for the Handling, Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Motor Control Centers Rated Not More Than 600 Volts." 2. NECA 402, "Recommended Practice for Installing and Maintaining Motor Control Centers." C. If stored in space that is not permanently enclosed and air conditioned, remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside MCCs; install temporary electric heating, with at least 250 W per vertical section. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: 1. Ambient Temperature: Less than 0 deg F (minus 18 deg C) or exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C), with an average value exceeding 95 deg F (35 deg C) over a 24-hour period. Motor Control Center 260553 -4 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 2. Ambient Storage Temperature: Not less than minus 4 deg F (minus 20 deg C) and not exceeding 140 deg F (60 deg C). 3. Humidity: Less than 95 percent (noncondensing). 4. Altitude: Exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m), or 3300 feet (1000 m) if MCC includes solid- state devices. B. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service or Distribution Systems: Do not interrupt electrical service to, or distribution systems within, a facility occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions, and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical service. 2. Indicate method of providing temporary electrical service. 3. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Owner's written permission. 4. Comply with NFPA 70E. C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for MCCs, including clearances between MCCs and adjacent surfaces and other items. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. B. Coordinate features of MCCs, installed units, and accessory devices with remote pilot devices and control circuits to which they connect. C. Coordinate features, accessories, and functions of each MCC, each controller, and each installed unit with ratings and characteristics of supply circuits, motors, required control sequences, and duty cycle of motors and loads. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace TVSS that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Motor Control Center 260553 -5 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 1. Control Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than two of each size and type. 2. Indicating Lights: Two of each type and color installed. 3. Auxiliary Contacts: Furnish one spare(s) for each size and type of magnetic controller installed. 4. Power Contacts: Furnish one spare for each size and type of magnetic contactor installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.. 2. Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley Brand. 3. Siemens Energy&Automation, Inc.; Power Distribution. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. General Requirements for MCCs: Comply with NEMA ICS 18 and UL 845. 2.2 FUNCTIONAL FEATURES A. Description: Modular arrangement of main units, controller units, control devices, feeder-tap units, instruments, metering, auxiliary devices, and other items mounted in vertical sections of MCC. B. Controller Units: Combination controller units. 1. Install units up to and including Size 3 on drawout mountings with connectors that automatically line up and connect with vertical-section buses while being racked into their normal, energized positions. 2. Equip units in Type B and Type C MCCs with pull-apart terminal strips for external control connections. C. Feeder-Tap Units: Through 225-A rating shall have drawout mountings with connectors that automatically line up and connect with vertical-section buses while being racked into their normal, energized positions. D. Future Units: Compartments fully bused and equipped with guide rails or equivalent, ready for insertion of drawout units. Motor Control Center 260553 -6 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 E. Spare Units: Installed in compartments indicated "spare." 2.3 INCOMING MAINS A. Incoming Mains Location: Bottom or as indicated on contract drawings. B. Main Lugs Only: Conductor connectors suitable for use with conductor material and sizes. 1. Material: copper. 2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type. C. MCCB: Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents. 1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. 2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front- mounted,field-adjustable trip setting. 3. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or field- replicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings: a. Instantaneous trip. b. Long-and short-time pickup levels. C. Long-and short-time time adjustments. d. Ground-fault pickup level,time delay, and 12 response. 4. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5. 5. Integrally Fused Circuit Breakers: Thermal-magnetic trip element with integral limiter- style fuse listed for use with circuit breaker; trip activation on fuse opening or on opening of fuse compartment door. 6. MCCB Features and Accessories: a. Standard frame sizes,trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material. C. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits. d. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator. e. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking ground-fault protection function. f. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without intentional time delay. Motor Control Center 260553 -7 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 g. Auxiliary Contacts: One SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic circuit-breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker contacts. h. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key shall be removable only when circuit breaker is in off position. D. Insulated-Case Circuit Breaker: 100 percent rated, sealed, insulated-case power circuit breaker with interrupting capacity rating to meet available fault current. 1. Drawout circuit-breaker mounting. 2. Two-step, stored-energy closing. 3. Standard-function, microprocessor-based trip units with interchangeable rating plug, trip indicators, and the following field-adjustable settings: a. Instantaneous trip. b. Long-and short-time time adjustments. C. Ground-fault pickup level,time delay, and 12 response. 4. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking ground- fault protection function. 5. Remote trip indication and control. 2.4 COMBINATION CONTROLLERS A. Full-Voltage Controllers: 1. General Requirements for Full-Voltage Enclosed Controllers: Comply with NEMA ICS 2, general purpose, Class A. 2. Magnetic Controllers: Full voltage, across the line, electrically held. a. Configuration: Nonreversing. B. Disconnecting Means and OCPDs: 1. MCP Disconnecting Means: a. UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents, instantaneous-only circuit breaker with front-mounted, field-adjustable, short-circuit trip coordinated with motor locked-rotor amperes. b. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position. C. Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with MCP handle. d. NC alarm contact that operates only when MCP has tripped. e. Current-limiting module to increase controller short-circuit current (withstand) rating to 100 kA. 2. MCCB Disconnecting Means: Motor Control Center 260553 -8 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 a. UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents; thermal-magnetic MCCB, with inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. b. Front-mounted, adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. C. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position. d. Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with MCCB handle. e. NC alarm contact that operates only when MCCB has tripped. 3. Molded-Case Switch Disconnecting Means: a. UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with in-line fuse block for Class J or L power fuses (depending on ampere rating), providing an interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents; MCCB with fixed, high-set instantaneous trip only. b. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position. C. Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with molded-case switch handle. d. NC alarm contact that operates only when molded-case switch has tripped. C. Overload Relays: 1. Bimetallic Overload Relays: a. Inverse-time-current characteristic. b. Class 20 tripping characteristic. C. Heaters in each phase matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected motor and with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle. d. Ambient compensated. e. Automatic resetting. D. Control Power: 1. Control Circuits: 120-V ac; obtained from integral CPT, with primary and secondary fuses, with CPT control power source of sufficient capacity to operate integral devices and remotely located pilot, indicating, and control devices. a. CPT Spare Capacity: 50 VA. 2.5 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION DEVICES A. Surge Protection Device Description: IEEE C62.41-compliant, integrally mounted, wired-in, solid-state, parallel-connected, modular (with field-replaceable modules) type, with sine-wave tracking suppression and filtering modules, UL 1449, second edition, short-circuit current Motor Control Center 260553 -9 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 rating matching or exceeding the MCC short-circuit rating, and with the following features and accessories: 1. Fuses, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity. 2. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring. 3. Integral disconnect switch. 4. Redundant suppression circuits. 5. Redundant replaceable modules. 6. Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and ground bus. 7. LED indicator lights for power and protection status. 8. Audible alarm, with silencing switch,to indicate when protection has failed. 9. Form-C contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, one NO and one NC, for remote monitoring of system operation. Contacts shall reverse position on failure of any surge diversion module or on opening of any current-limiting device. Coordinate with building power monitoring and control system. 10. Six-digit,transient-event counter set to totalize transient surges. B. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 160 kA per mode/320 kA per phase. Retain "Withstand Capabilities" Paragraph below for MCCs located at or near Category C locations. C. Withstand Capabilities: 12,000 IEEE C62.41, Category C3 (10 kA), 8-by-20-mic.sec. surges with less than 5 percent change in clamping voltage. D. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for grounded wye circuits with 480Y/277-V, three-phase, four-wire circuits shall be as follows: 1. Line to Neutral: 800 V for 480Y/277. 2. Line to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277. 3. Neutral to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277. 2.6 MCC CONTROL POWER A. Control Circuits: 120-V ac, supplied through secondary disconnecting devices from CPT. B. Control Circuits: 120-V ac, supplied from remote branch circuit. C. Electrically Interlocked Main and Tie Circuit Breakers: Two CPTs in separate compartments, with interlocking relays, connected to the primary side of each CPT at the line side of the associated main circuit breaker. 120-V secondaries connected through automatic transfer relays to ensure a fail-safe automatic transfer scheme. D. Control Power Fuses: Primary and secondary fuses for current-limiting and overload protection of transformer and fuses for protection of control circuits. E. Control Wiring: Factory installed, with bundling, lacing, and protection included. Provide flexible conductors for No. 8 AWG and smaller, for conductors across hinges, and for conductors for interconnections between shipping units. Motor Control Center 260553 -10 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 2.7 ENCLOSURES A. Indoor Enclosures: Freestanding steel cabinets unless otherwise indicated. NEMA 250, Type 1 unless otherwise indicated to comply with environmental conditions at installed location. B. Enclosure Finish for Indoor Units: Factory-applied finish in manufacturer's standard gray finish over a rust-inhibiting primer on treated metal surface. 1. Finish: Factory-applied finish in manufacturer's standard color; undersurfaces treated with corrosion-resistant undercoating. 2. Enclosure: Flat roof; bolt-on rear covers for each section, with provisions for padlocking. C. Compartments: Modular; individual lift-off doors with concealed hinges and quick-captive screw fasteners. Interlocks on units requiring disconnecting means in off position before door can be opened or closed, except by operating a permissive release device. D. Interchangeability: Compartments constructed to allow for removal of units without opening adjacent doors, disconnecting adjacent compartments, or disturbing operation of other units in MCC; same size compartments to permit interchangeability and ready rearrangement of units, such as replacing three single units with a unit requiring three spaces, without cutting or welding. E. Wiring Spaces: 1. Vertical wireways in each vertical section for vertical wiring to each unit compartment; supports to hold wiring in place. 2. Horizontal wireways in bottom and top of each vertical section for horizontal wiring between vertical sections; supports to hold wiring in place. 2.8 AUXILIARY DEVICES A. General Requirements for Control-Circuit and Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5; factory installed in controller enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated. 1. Push Buttons, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: Heavy-duty, oiltight type. a. Push Buttons: Recessed types; momentary contact unless otherwise indicated. b. Pilot Lights: LED types; RED RUN; GREEN STOPPED; push to test. C. Selector Switches: Rotary type. 2. Elapsed-Time Meters: Heavy duty with digital readout in hours; nonresettable. 3. Meters: Panel type, 2-1/2-inch (64-mm) minimum size with 90-or 120-degree scale and plus or minus 2 percent accuracy with selector switches having an off position. B. Reversible NC/NO contactor auxiliary contact(s). C. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable solid-state time-delay relays. Motor Control Center 260553 -11 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 D. Space heaters, with NC auxiliary contacts, to mitigate condensation in enclosures installed outdoors or in unconditioned interior spaces subject to humidity and temperature swings. E. Cover gaskets for Type 1 enclosures. 2.9 CHARACTERISTICS AND RATINGS A. Control and Load Wiring: Factory installed, with bundling, lacing, and protection included. Provide flexible conductors for No. 8 AWG and smaller, for conductors across hinges, and for conductors for interconnections between shipping units. B. Nominal System Voltage: 480Y/277 V,three phase,three wire. C. Short-Circuit Current Rating for Each Unit: Fully rated; 65 kA. D. Short-Circuit Current Rating of MCC: Fully rated with its main overcurrent device; 65 kA. E. Environmental Ratings: 1. Ambient Temperature Rating: Not less than 0 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F, with an average value not exceeding 95 deg F (35 deg C) over a 24-hour period. 2. Ambient Storage Temperature Rating: Not less than minus 4 deg F (minus 20 deg C) and not exceeding 140 deg F (60 deg C) 3. Humidity Rating: Less than 95 percent(noncondensing). F. Main-Bus Continuous Rating: as noted on drawings. G. Vertical-Bus Minimum Continuous Rating: 300 A. H. Horizontal and Vertical Bus Bracing (Short-Circuit Current Rating): Match MCC short-circuit current rating. I. Main Horizontal and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire length of MCC's main and vertical sections. Provide for future extensions. J. Vertical Phase and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire usable height of vertical sections, except for sections incorporating single units. K. Front-Connected, Front-Accessible MCCs: 1. Main Devices: Fixed mounted. 2. Controller Units: Drawout mounted. 3. Sections front and rear aligned. L. Bus Transition and Incoming Pull Sections: Matched and aligned with basic MCC. M. Pull Box on Top of an MCC: Motor Control Center 260553 -12 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 1. Adequate ventilation to maintain temperature in pull box within same limits as MCC. 2. Set back from front to clear circuit-breaker removal mechanism. 3. Removable covers forming top, front, and sides. Top covers at rear easily removable for drilling and cutting. 4. Insulated bottom of fire-resistive material with separate holes for cable drops into MCC. 5. Cable supports arranged to facilitate cabling and adequate to support cables, including those for future installation. 6. Isolation Barrier Access Provisions: Permit checking of bus-bolt tightness. N. Future Devices: Equip compartments with mounting brackets, supports, bus connections, and appurtenances at full rating of unit. O. Bus-Bar Insulation: Factory-applied, flame-retardant, tape wrapping of individual bus bars or flame-retardant, spray-applied insulation. Minimum insulation temperature rating of 105 deg C. P. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for OCPDs and other components including instruments and instrument transformers. 2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. MCC Testing: Inspect and test MCCs according to requirements in NEMA ICS 18. B. defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and surfaces to receive MCCs, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine enclosed controllers before installation. Reject enclosed controllers that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Motor Control Center 260553 -13 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of MCCs with other construction including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. B. Floor-Mounting Controllers: Install MCCs on 4-inch (100-mm) nominal thickness concrete base. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in- Place Concrete." 1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of concrete base. 2. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor. 3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components. D. Install fuses in each fusible switch. E. Install heaters in thermal-overload relays. Select heaters based on actual nameplate full-load amperes after motors have been installed. F. Install, connect, and fuse thermal-protector monitoring relays furnished with motor-driven equipment. G. Comply with NECA 1. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 05 53 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" for identification of MCC, MCC components, and control wiring. 1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs. 2. Label MCC and each cubicle with engraved nameplate. 3. Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device. 4. Mark up a set of manufacturer's connection wiring diagrams with field-assigned wiring identifications and return to manufacturer for inclusion in Record Drawings. Motor Control Center 260553 -14 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 B. Operating Instructions: Frame printed operating instructions for MCCs, including control sequences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished metal, and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of MCCs. 3.4 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION A. Bundle,train, and support wiring in enclosures. B. Connect selector switches and other automatic-control selection devices where applicable. 1. Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic-control devices that have no safety functions when switch is in manual-control position. 2. Connect selector switches within enclosed controller circuit in both manual and automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors. 3.5 CONNECTIONS A. Comply with requirements for installation of conduit in Division 26 05 33 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." Drawings indicate general arrangement of conduit, fittings, and specialties. B. Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. C. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. D. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit. E. Tests and Inspections: Motor Control Center 260553 -15 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 1. Test system in de-energized state as recommended by manufacturer. Inspect controllers, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. 2. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller element, component, connecting motor supply,feeder, and control circuits. 3. Test continuity of each circuit. 4. Verify that voltages at controller locations are within 10 percent of motor nameplate rated voltages. If outside this range for any motor, notify Owner before starting the motor(s). 5. Test each motor for proper phase rotation. 6. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 7. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 8. Perform the following infrared (thermographic) scan tests and inspections and prepare reports: a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each multipole enclosed controller. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each multipole enclosed controller 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. C. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. 9. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 10. Mark up a set of manufacturer's drawings with all field modifications incorporated during construction and return to manufacturer for inclusion in Record Drawings. F. Enclosed controllers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. G. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed controllers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. 3.7 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform Perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. Motor Control Center 260553 -16 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 3.8 ADJUSTING A. Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overload-relay pickup and trip ranges. B. Adjust overload relay heaters or settings if power factor correction capacitors are connected to the load side of the overload relays. C. Adjust the trip settings of MCPs and thermal-magnetic circuit breakers with adjustable, instantaneous trip elements. Initially adjust to six times the motor nameplate full-load amperes and attempt to start motors several times, allowing for motor cool-down between starts. If tripping occurs on motor inrush, adjust settings in increments until motors start without tripping. Do not exceed eight times the motor full-load amperes (or 11 times for NEMA Premium Efficient motors if required). Where these maximum settings do not allow starting of a motor, notify Engineer before increasing settings. 3.9 PROTECTION A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions until enclosed controllers are ready to be energized and placed into service. B. Replace controllers whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids prior to Substantial Completion. 3.10 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain enclosed controllers. END OF SECTION Motor Control Center 260553 -17 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 40 39 80 PUMP CONTROLS PART 1-GENERAL 1. 1 WORK INCLUDED A. This section Includes: 1. Pump controls B. Covers the furnishing and installation of controls, including all devices, accessories and appurtenances required for proper operation of the control equipment. This section is supplemented by Division 26 Electrical. Also supplementing this section are the drawings which indicate locations and arrangement of equipment. The drawings also provide one- lines and schematics regarding connection and interaction with other equipment. 1.2 COORDINATION Controls equipment supplied under this section shall be designed and coordinated for proper operation with related equipment and specifications. All equipment shall be applied in full conformity with the drawings, specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the device manufacturer and the related equipment manufacturer. Review of drawings submitted prior to the final determination of related equipment shall not relieve the Contractor from supplying systems in full compliance with the specific requirements of the related equipment. Related equipment and materials may include, but will not be limited to, instrument/control devices, conduit, cable, and piping as described in other specifications associated with this project. Installation drawings shall be prepared for interconnecting wiring between the related equipment and the equipment furnished under this section. 1.3 RESPONSIBILITY The pump controls shall be provided and installed by the Contractor or his appointed subcontractors. The services of the controlled equipment supplier's technical representative shall be provided as necessary to calibrate,test, and advise others of procedures for adjustment and operation. 1.4 SUBMITTAL DATA The following data shall be submitted for approved to the Engineer prior to fabrication or assembly of the pump controls. Partial submittals of drawings or data will not be acceptable. No part of the control system shall be fabricated, assembled or shipped to the jobsite until the submittal data has been approved by the Engineer. 1. Outline drawings showing equipment arrangement, dimensions and weight. 2. Descriptive bulletins and catalog information on all components sufficient for the Engineer to determine whether the proposed item is in compliance with the drawings and specifications. Pump Controls 403980- 1 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 3. Schematic diagrams showing all breakers, switches, relays, etc. The diagrams shall also show all equipment sizes and ratings and for each control circuit showing device and terminal block numbers and all wire numbers. 5. Wiring diagram showing the relative physical location of all items in the back panel and all interconnecting wiring between devices. The wiring diagrams shall also show the identification of all device terminals,terminal blocks and wires, 6. Interconnection diagrams shall be furnished by the supplier of the control panels. These drawings shall show the interconnection field wiring between the control panel and any remote equipment, panels, devices, etc. The interconnection drawings shall show the termination of this wiring both at the back panel and at the remote location. These drawings shall also show wire numbers, terminal block numbers, wire groupings in conduits and conduit numbers corresponding to those used on the plan drawings. 7. Material list - listing the quantity, manufacturer, rating, type, and manufacturer's catalog number of all components in the panel. PART 2.0 MATERIALS 2.01. CONTROL COMPONENTS 1. PLC as specified in section 40 94 43 Programmable Logic Controllers. 2. Control Devices: All required control devices shall be furnished and installed as specified herein. All selector switches, push buttons, pilot lights, etc., for non- hazardous service shall be heavy duty, corrosion-resistant, NEMA 4X, Square D Class 9001,type SK or equal. Push- buttons shall be extended guard type. Pilot lights shall be push-to-test, transformer type. All devices shall be mounted on an internal hinged subpanel door. 3. Circuit Breakers: Control and accessory circuits 240 volt and less shall be molded case circuit breakers for short circuit protection and switching. Breakers shall be U.L. listed for 120/240 volts with 10000 A.I.C. Switching or reset shall be accomplished without need to open the inner panel door. 4. Provide a separate D.C. power supply providing regulated D.C. power sources. Power supplies shall be sized to source all panel and field hardware burden plus fifty percent. Input of all power supplies shall be protected with DIN-rail mounted circuit breakers sized for 125% of Load. In no case shall any AC or DC power supply output exceed 10 Amperes. Power supplies/converters shall have an input to output efficiency rating exceeding 85%. Power supplies shall have an operating temperature range of -200 to 70° C. The drawings and specifications indicate the energy sources that will be provided. Any other devices or power supplies necessary to obtain proper operation of the supervisory control system or instrumentation from these energy sources shall be provided with the control panels. Pump Controls 403980-2 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 5. Control Relays: Relays for 120 and 24 volt circuits shall be industry standard plug-in type with tube type connectors. Contacts shall be rated 10 amps resistive, continuous. An internal light shall be provided to indicate relay energization. Relay sockets shall be the single-tier type. 6. Wiring: Controls shall be completely factory assembled and pre-wired. The supplier shall thoroughly test the control system and level control system for proper operating sequence under all conditions before shipment of the panel to the job site. Control wiring shall be stranded copper,#14 AWG minimum size. Power wiring shall be stranded copper, #12 AWG minimum. All wiring insulation shall be dual rated for Type THHN and THWN applications. All control wiring terminations shall be made using vinyl insulated, crimp type connectors, with spade type lugs. Each control wire shall be labeled at each end with a preprinted, tube type or heat-shrink type wire marker, or shall be color coded. Screw type terminal strips shall be provided and suitably identified for termination of field wire control circuits. Submittal drawings shall include wire identification and terminal numbers. Control terminal blocks shall be rated 300 volts minimum and shall provide four unidentified spare sets. Incoming power terminals shall be lug type rated 600 volts minimum. Separate bare copper ground lugs shall be provided for incoming and pump ground wire. All wiring shall be neatly tie-wrapped and secured. 7. Legends and Nameplates: Provide an appropriately engraved laminated plastic nameplate for each control device in panel. Legend plate indicating the operating function of pilot devices (START, STOP, RESET etc.) shall be aluminum with black background and white lettering. Nameplates indicating the controlled device shall be black laminated plastic 1/2 inch wide with 1/4 inch white engraved lettering. Nameplates identifying the control panel and mounted on the exterior door shall be black laminated plastic one inch wide with 3/8 inch white lettering. Legends shall be mechanically attached with the pilot device. 8. Float Switches: Wet well liquid High level shall be signaled by non-metallic float switch with a normally open contact that closes on liquid level rise. Switch shall be the non- floating type with internal weighting to keep the switch below water after tilting. Float switch shall consist of a polypropylene float housing, mercury switch and neoprene jacketed control cable. Float housing shall be leakproof, shock and corrosion resistant. Mercury switch shall be metal-encased, shock resistant, with 10 amp, 120 volt contact, N.O. or N.C. as indicated by the control schematics. Power cables shall be of adequate length to prevent splicing prior to terminal connection but not less than 20 feet. Floats shall be the product of Anchor Scientific, Inc. or Flygt or an approved equal. 9. Field Wiring: Panel shall include terminal strip for field wiring for the following: a. Panel Control Power b. Pump Controls C. Speed signals d. VFD HOAs e. Flygt MAS sensor wiring f. Level Sensor Pump Controls 403980-3 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 10. Operator Interface: Panel shall include 10" graphic Operator interface to show pump station status and adjustments. OIT shall be Allen Bradley Panelview series. 11. Pump controls shall be installed in a NEMA 4X S.S. enclosure sized as required. 12. Pump monitoring Thermal/Leak MAS units by Xylem Flygt shall be installed in pump control panel to monitor pumps and shall be interfaced with pump controls. 2.03 CONTROL SEQUENCE A. Lift Station Control Pumps 1. Coordinate with Owner prior to programming to review sequence of operation. The lift station pumps shall be controlled by a Hand-Off-Auto switch located in the VFD. In the "hand" position the motor shall run continuously, regardless of wet well level. In the "auto" position, each pump shall be controlled by the PLC and wet well level signal. Auxiliary contacts in the HOA switch "Auto" and "HAND" position shall be provided for PLC monitoring. Pumps shall start, latch in, and run until level fall below cut off level. Stop command shall be sent to stop pumps. Final wetwell levels shall be determined in field or as recommended by City. LEVEL FUNCTION (Preliminary) RISING LEVEL FALLING LEVEL EI. xx.xx High Level Alarm (Red) Start 3rd Lag High Level Alarm EI. xx.xx Pump Off(Reset) EI. xx.xx Start 2"d Lag Pump EI. xx.xx Start 1St Lag Pump EI. xx.xx Lag Main Pump Off Start Lead Main EI. xx.xx Pump Jockey Pump Off Lead Main Pump EI. xx.xx Off Jockey Pump On EI. xx.xx Start Jockey Pump EI. xx.xx Lag Sump Pump Off Pump Controls 403980-4 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 a. Jockey pump to always start first and minimum speed set on operator interface. As level rises Jockey pump speed shall increase to full speed. As level continues to rise, Jockey pump shall shut down and Lead pump shall start at speed set on operator interface. As level continues to rise, 1St Lag pump shall start and both Lead and 1st Lag pumps shall pump at same speeds. As level continues to rise, 2"d Lag pump shall start and both Lead and 1St Lag pumps shall pump at same speeds. As level continues to rise, Yd Lag pump shall start and all Lead and Lag pumps shall pump at same speeds. All Lead and Lag Pumps shall alternate after each pump down. 2. Speed of the pumps will be controlled by the 4-20mA signal from the PLC to the VFDs and vary from approx. 50% (minimum as determined by pump manufacturer) to 100% speed. 3. A wet well high level alarm shall be routed to the SCADA RTU from float switch. 4. Elapsed time meters shall be located in the VFD and shall be interlocked with motor starter to indicate accumulated run time. A red pilot light shall be located in the VFD to indicate motor run status. 5. The pump run status, position of pump starter HOA switch, pump MCP trip, and Motor Overload, pump run status shall be routed to SCADA RTU. 6. Each pump motor shall have an adjustable time delay, 1-10 seconds between the automatic start signal and actual motor starting. 7. MAS units shall trigger alarms for pump seal leak and thermal overload and shall trigger a pump shutdown. Pump shall be removed from sequence of rotation and alarm sent to SCADA panel. 8. System status and alarms shall be monitored as per 1/0 list. 9. Operator interface mounted on panel exterior door shall display Pump station status including wet well, level, pump run, pump speeds, and pump alarms. Operator interface shall operators to adjust pump speed limits and pump START/STOP level Setpoints. 10. Panel PLC shall communicate with Pump Station SCADA RTU Panel PLC and allow sharing of pump status and alarm information. 11. On generator power, signal shall be sent to notify PLC. Provide time delayed staggered restart on lift station power loss. System shall only allow 3 large pumps to operate maximum. PART 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: Pump Controls 403980-5 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 A. Pump controls and MAS controls shall be installed in a Pump Control panel as indicated on drawings and as specified in Pump Specification. Any deviation from such must be approved by the Engineer. 3.2 STARTUP AND FIELD TESTING: A. General: The equipment manufacturer shall furnish the services of a qualified factory field service engineer for one 8-hour working day at the site to inspect the installation and instruct the Owner's personnel on the operation and maintenance of equipment. The qualifications of the field service engineer are subject to the approval of the Engineer B. Installation Inspection: After the motors have been completely installed and wired the contractor shall: a. Megger stator and power cables b. Check for proper motor rotation C. Check power supply voltage d. Measure motor no load current e. Check control operation and sequence During this initial inspection, the manufacturer's service representative shall review recommended operation and maintenance procedures with the Owner's personnel. Any defects or improper operation shall be corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.3 CONTROL PANEL SECTION A. Labeling 1. Compartment: Labels shall be provided for control panel compartment as specified herein and on drawings. 2. Control devices: Limit switches, and similar pilot devices shall be labeled with stainless steel tags having 1/4" high indented lettering. The tags shall be permanently and securely attached with stainless steel tie wire. B. Wiring: All field control wiring shall be labeled with wire markers where entering control enclosures, terminal boxes, etc. Wire markers shall be tube type, heat-shrink type or write-on adhesive type. Single digit individual markers shall not be used. Wire numbers shall be in accordance with the approved schematic drawings. C. Voltage warning signs 1. Voltage warning signs shall be installed on all distribution enclosures or devices containing voltages over 120 volts to ground. Voltage warning signs on outdoor Pump Controls 403980-6 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 equipment shall be furnished and mounted by the supplier of the equipment. Signs shall read - "DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE" and shall indicate the circuit voltage present within the enclosure. 2. Multiple source signs: Multiple source signs shall be provided for any enclosure containing voltage sources from more than a single disconnecting means. Signs shall be yellow laminated plastic with 1/4" high engraved lettering. "CAUTION: Energized wiring from sources is contained in this unit. Provide label indicating circuit and panel name from each source. END OF SECTION Pump Controls 403980-7 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 40 69 80 LEVEL TRANSMITTER 1.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: 1.01 SCOPE This specification shall govern for all work necessary to furnish, install and place into operation all instruments required to complete the project. 1.02 SUPPLIERS All instruments shall be furnished and installed by the contractor as indicated on drawings and as specified herein for a complete and working system. 2.0 PRODUCTS/MATERIALS 2.01 LEVEL TRANSMITTER: The liquid level transmitter shall be a non-contact sensor suitable for water/waste water, and wet well depth measurement applications. Transmitter shall be as follows: a. Input 10-30Volt DC b. Output 4-20ma 2 wire C. Accuracy 0.5%of span d. Operating Temperature-40 deg F to 176 deg F e. Measuring Principal Radar f. Wetted parts PVDF and PBT g. Communication Hart, Bluetooth, Modbus Transmitter shall be Model FMR20 as manufactured by Endress Hauser. PART 3.0 INSTALLATION 3.01 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS: The manufacturer shall furnish to the Engineer 4 sets of complete installation, operation and maintenance instructions for the equipment furnished under this specification. The information furnished shall include erection drawings, "as-built" drawings of electrical equipment, assembly details, parts lists and flow tables corresponding to the staff gauge graduations. 3.02 SUITABILITY CERTIFICATION As part of the submittal data required above, the General Contractor shall submit a certification stating that the manufacturer's authorized representative for the equipment furnished under this section has studied the Contract Documents (drawings and specifications), questioned the Level Transmitter 406980- 1 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 General Contractor and/or the Engineer to determine the conditions affecting this equipment and hereby certifies that they should be suitable for use on this project and should require no more than normal maintenance if not damaged or abused. END OF SECTION Level Transmitter 406980-2 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 SECTION 40 94 30—SCADA PANEL PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. The Control System Integrator shall work directly for the General Contractor. The Control System Integrator will be responsible for purchasing all equipment required for a SCADA system panel for the purpose of monitoring systems as indicated on drawings. New unit shall interface with existing Master Sites. B. The Control System Integrator shall provide all required control equipment, level transmitters, float switches, SCADA panel enclosures, software, and all necessary appurtenances to provide a fully functional system. C. Electrical controls, switches, conduits, relays, starters, wiring, and related appurtenances required for operation of the equipment shall be of the highest quality with regard to materials and workmanship, and shall be furnished and installed under Division 26 of these specifications. D. SCADA Panel shall comply with SCADA Wastewater Lift Station PLC Standards included in appendix of this specification. E. Wiring shall be installed in compliance with all applicable codes and in accordance with the recommendations as set forth by the supplier of the equipment under this section. F. In order to insure compatibility between all instrumentation components and equipment, it shall be the responsibility of the control system integrator to coordinate all interface requirements with the existing hardware and to furnish and install all signal isolation devices as required. G. All digital signals shall be protected from surges of all field wiring with suitable surge suppression devices as recommended by the equipment manufacturer to protect his/her equipment. 1.02 CONTROL SYSTEM INTEGRATOR QUALIFICATIONS A. The integrator shall be engaged full time in the design and manufacturer of PLC based control systems. The integrator shall have documented experience in the municipal water and wastewater market during the past three years. B. The integrator shall maintain a local office within 100 driving miles of the project site for the past year. This office shall be equipped with programming equipment, and staffed with a minimum of four individuals capable of performing routine maintenance, trouble shooting, and field programming changes on the proposed SCADA system. SCADA System 409430- 1 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 C. The control system integrator shall have a panel shop located at their main facility and shall be able to obtain a UL listing for all control panels. 1.3 SUBMITTAL DATA The following data shall be submitted for approved to the Engineer prior to fabrication or assembly of the control panels. Partial submittals of drawings or data will not be acceptable. No part of the panels shall be fabricated, assembled or shipped to the jobsite until the submittal data has been approved by the Engineer. A. Outline drawings showing equipment arrangement, dimensions and weight. B. Descriptive bulletins and catalog information on all components sufficient for the Engineer to determine whether the proposed item is in compliance with the drawings and specifications. C. Manufactures data sheets on major components provided. D. Elementary (schematic) ladder diagrams for each control circuit showing device and terminal block numbers and all wire numbers. E. Wiring diagram showing the relative physical location of all items in the panel and all interconnecting wiring between devices. The wiring diagrams shall also show the identification of all device terminals,terminal blocks and wires, F. Interconnection diagrams shall be furnished by the supplier of the control panels. These drawings shall show the interconnection field wiring between the control panel and any remote equipment, panels, devices, operator interfaces etc. The interconnection drawings shall show the termination of this wiring both at the control panels and at the remote location. These drawings shall also show wire numbers, terminal block numbers, wire groupings in conduits and conduit numbers corresponding to those used on the plan drawings. G. Material list - listing the quantity, manufacturer, rating, type, and manufacturer's catalog number of all components in the panel. H. Sample graphic HMI Screens. 1.4 PROJECT STAFFING 1. Project Manager: a. The Project Manager shall oversee all aspects of the proposed system. b. The Project Manager shall be the primary contact for the Owner and Engineer. SCADA System 409430-2 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 C. In addition, the Project Manager shall be on site during the start-up and testing period for the proposed control system. d. The project manager shall be located in the integrators local office. e. Prior to power being applied to any control devices, the Project Manager shall send the Owner and Engineer a letter indicating that the Project Manager has reviewed the work and is satisfied that the installation is in accordance with the Shop Drawings, equipment manufactures recommendations, good industry practices, and the NEC. 2. Programmers: a. All Programmers shall have a minimum of 5 years experience in PLC and HMI programming. b. All Programmers shall documented experience with writing PLC code. C. All Programmers shall documented experience writing code for the subsystem that they are programming. Client references will be required along with examples of the code showing proper documentation and logical process flow. 3. Service Technicians: a. All Service Technicians shall have a minimum of a 2 year Associates Degree in some field related to computers or electrical maintenance. b. All Service Technicians shall have a minimum of five years of experience in PLC systems and HMIs. C. All Service Technicians shall be capable of programming the proposed PLCs. d. Service Technicians shall show proficiency in using the following equipment: volt meters, oscilloscopes, PLC programming software, HMI configuration tools. 1.5 RESPONSIBILITY AND COORDINATION A. It shall be the responsibility of the Integrator to furnish, install and place in successful operation a completely integrated SCADA system for monitoring of the facility's data points. All requirements for the system to be furnished shall be as defined in the plans and specifications shall be considered together and neither shall be considered complete without the other. The contractor shall be responsible for all details, which may be necessary to properly install, adjust and place in operation the complete installation. The contractor shall assume full responsibility for additional costs, which may result from any unauthorized deviation from the Contract Documents. B. As part of this responsibility, a single control system integrator shall be required to perform all work necessary in order to select, furnish, supervise installation and connection of, calibrate, test and place into successful operation all sensors, instruments, alarming equipment, all monitoring panels, and all components of the plant monitoring and control system required under this contract. 1.6 ADDITIONAL INTEGRATORS SERVICES SCADA System 409430-3 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 A. The Integrator shall include 40 hours of additional onsite configuration and screen development for use during the construction of the control system in their base bid. These hours shall be used as directed by the engineer or the owner to add additional screen comments and configuration as required. 1.7 CONTROL SYSTEM GUARANTEE The Contractor and Integrator shall guarantee that the materials and workmanship of the equipment furnished are free from defects for a period of one (1) year from date of substantial completion of the project. 1.8 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS A. Training 1. The Contractor shall require that the instrumentation and control system integrator plan, schedule and conduct a thorough and comprehensive training program designed to meet the general and specific needs of the Owner's operating and maintenance personnel. The training program shall include training on the completed system at the Owner's plant site. 2. Training, except that conducted during start-up and maintenance visits by service technicians, shall be conducted by professional training specialists employed by the instrumentation and control system integrator. 3. As a minimum the integrator shall provide one (1), four hour class for the plant operators for operational training. B. Integrator's Data and Drawings 1. The control system integrator shall submit a PDF sets of the following information for the Engineer's approval: a. Point-to - Point Wiring Drawings. b. 1/0 Loop Drawings C. Dimensional drawings, wiring and drawings for field mounted equipment d. Equipment specification sheets e. For all control panels: fabrication and nameplate legend drawings and internal wiring schematic drawings. f. Systems schematic drawings illustrating all components being supplied complete with electrical interconnections. g. Computer input/output lists and a written description of the control strategy to be applied to the various process areas as applicable. h. For process computer systems: system block diagram and control room layout drawings. 2. Although a complete submittal is preferable and desirable, it shall be SCADA System 409430-4 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 permissible for the integrator to submit only part of the above information first in the interest of accelerating the submittal process. A partial submittal shall only be furnished upon approval by the Engineer. A partial submittal shall include at least the following: a. Equipment data sheets. b. Panel fabrication drawings. 3. After approval,the integrator shall furnish PDF sets of the above information plus the following: a. Individual Operating and Maintenance Manuals. b. Bulletins for each piece of equipment furnished. C. Complete spare parts list for each piece of equipment. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Provide all components for a complete and operational system. Specifications and drawings call attention to certain features, but do not purport to cover all details entering into design of the Supervisory Control System. The completed system shall provide all functions and interfacing requirements as necessary. B. All equipment furnished shall be the manufacturer's latest and proven design. All control components and communication devices furnished shall have been in field service for at least one year and in production for at least two years. C. Each major component of equipment including, but not limited to, control devices, communication devices, and power supplies, shall have the manufacturer's name, address, and catalog number on a nameplate securely attached to the equipment in a conspicuous location. A. COMMUNICATION DEVICES 1. Licensed Radio Transceivers a. Licensed Remote Radio Transceivers: Units shall be GE MDS SD series IP/Ethernet network remote radio transceivers, GE Microwave Data Systems Corp., Rochester, New York. Radio transceivers shall be compatible with existing SCADA network. b. Transceiver shall be housed in a die-cast aluminum housing to eliminate interference with data/computer equipment and shall include manufacturer's standard mounting brackets. c. The following functions shall be indicated with LED indicators on the housing: 1) Power Status SCADA System 409430-5 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 2) Data Carrier Detect (DCD) 3) Receive data status (RX) 4) Transmit data status (TX) d. Provide five of the manufacturer's standard handheld terminals for monitoring the internal operation and diagnostic parameters. e. Provide one copy of the manufacturer's programming software on CD-ROM with the radio transceivers. f. Diagnostic information from all remote transceivers shall be sent over the radio frequency channel to the polling master. Diagnostic data transmitted over the radio network shall use encoding to eliminate the possibility of diagnostic information being misinterpreted at data being sent by the communication system. g. The licensed radio transceivers shall meet the following Transmitter requirements: Output power 5 watts (+37 dBm) maximum adjustable from (at the antenna port): 0.1watt (+20 dBm) Duty Cycle: Continuous at full range of power output up to 5 watts Data Turnaround Time: 10 ms 450 to 512 MHz, preset at 453.775, Transmit Frequency Range: Frequency stability: 0.00015%from -30°C to 60°C Automatic Frequency Correction: Built in, on/off Bandwidth Compatibility: 12.5 KHz channels Modulation Type: Binary Carrier Phase FSK Spurious/Harmonic Emissions: -65 dBc/-65dBc Output Impedance: 50 ohms Timeout Timer: Programmable from 0-255 seconds RTS-CTS Delay: Programmable from 10-255 seconds PTT Delay: Programmable from 0-31 ms SCADA System 409430-6 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 Squelch Tail Eliminator: Selectable On or Off Forward & Reflected Power Built-in Detector: h. Dual Conversion Superheterodyne Frequency stability: 0.00015%from -30°C to 60°C Automatic Frequency Correction: Built in, on/off Sensitivity/ Bit Error Rates: -108 dBM for 1 x 10-'BER, 9600bps Receive Frequency Range: 450 to 512 MHz, preset at 458.775 Bandwidth Compatibility: 12.5 KHz channels Spurious and Image Rejection: 85 dB, minimum IF Selectivity: 65 dB minimum at adjacent channel RF Input Impedance: 50 ohms Intermodulation: 75 dB minimum (per EIA) Desensitization: 65 dB minimum Received Signal Strength Built-in, Indication Range -120dBm to—60dBm i. The licensed radio transceivers shall meet the following General requirements: Voltage: 13.8 VDC TX< 2300mA @ 13.8VDC Power Use: RX<400mA @ 13.8 VDC Temperature range: Full performance-30°C to 60°C Humidity range: 0 to 95% RH, non condensing Antenna connection: Type N female SCADA System 409430-7 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 10 Base T with IP Support, RJ-45, DTE Ethernet Interface: D. 2.2 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER A. General: All PLC equipment for new SCADA Panel shall be as specified in Section 40 94 43 Programmable Logic Controllers. B. All manufacturers of all proposed control equipment for this project must maintain a stocking distributor within 100 miles of the project site, which will provide warranty and replacement for all equipment. The local stocking distributor shall maintain a factory trained sales engineer who is capable of providing training and trouble shooting on all supplied PLC equipment. Furthermore the local stocking distributor must be involved in the project startup in order to familiarize the owner with the warranty equipment replacement procedures. C. Environmental Conditions: All PLC equipment installed on this project shall be capable of operating at a relative humidity of up to 95% non-condensing and shall be capable of operating in a temperature ranging from 0 to 50 degrees Celsius. No special environmental enclosures shall be required to meet these environmental conditions. D. Surge Protection: All 1/0 modules shall have integral surge protection equipment capable of meeting or exceeding IEEE-472 and ANSI C37-90A, latest edition. All 1/0 points shall be provided with DIN rail mounted MOV surge protection. In addition all 4- 20 mA signals shall be provided with loop powered isolators and surge protection. E. Equipment Mounting: All PLC equipment installed on this project site shall be rack mounted. The rack shall provide a common communication buss between adjacent PLC modules as well as power. F. 1/0 Modules: Each 1/0 module shall contain a status light to indicate the modules current communication status with the CPU and current status of all 1/0 functions. All analog 1/0 modules shall provide an accuracy of 99.9%. G. Power Supplies: The PLC shall operate with an electrical service of 120 VAC single phase in the frequency range of 47 to 63 Hz. The power supply shall automatically shut down the PLC whenever its output current is detected as being excessive. H. Program Storage: The PLC shall store its program in double E-prom backup RAM type storage. The memory shall be capable of storing the program for 24 months under worst-case conditions. SCADA System 409430-8 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 I. Warranty: The PLC manufacturer shall provide a 3-year factory warranty covering full replacement of the proposed PLC equipment. J. All hardware shall be installed in free-standing or wall-mounted enclosure sized for the amount of equipment installed in them and appropriate for the environment they are installed in. All enclosures shall be equipped with a copper ground bus, mounted on the backplate. The ground bus shall be provided with a suitable connectors sized for #20 AWG through 2 AWG copper cable. All equipment in the enclosures shall be complete with all interconnecting wiring required, wired to terminals and connected to a UPS supplied 120-VAC and the communications equipment. Enclosure shall be provided with terminal strips, and wireway for both panel and field wiring terminations. Contractor shall provide a minimum of 20% spare terminal capacity for each 1/0 module, power and network communications. 2.3 UNITERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY(UPS): A. Uninterruptible power supply shall provide 30 minute standby 120-VAC power for all Contractor-provided SCADA equipment at each Station, including all HMI and station PLC equipment. 1. The uninterruptible power supply shall have the following features: a. Input— 120 VAC. b. Output- 120 VAC: Regulated to plus or minus 3 percent. Output shall consist or not less than three duplex receptacles (six receptacles). C. No-Break Power: The supply shall not allow any break in output power, regardless of what happens to the input power. Switching is not permitted. d. Lightning and Surge Protection: Passes ANSI-IEEE C62.41 Categories A& B. UL listed. e. Spike Attenuation: 2000:1. f. Voltage Regulation: Output voltage regulated to plus or minus 3 percent. g. Output Waveform: Computer-grade sine-wave, less than 5 percent THD. h. Noise (RF) Isolation: 120 dB common mode, 60 dB normal mode. i. Output Protection: Current-limiting ferroresonant transformer. j. Efficiency: 90 percent minimum, on line. k. Audible Noise: 57 dB maximum, on line. SCADA System 409430-9 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 1. Network interface. M. Self-diagnostics and notification capabilities. 2.4 TVSS PROTECTORS A. 120V power line TVSS protectors: Equipment connected to ac circuits shall be protected from power line surges. Protection devices shall have hybrid suppression circuitry and emi/rfi noise filtering. TVSS device shall be HBLITDR7515 as manufactured by Hubble. B. Communication Device Surge Arrestors: All communications equipment shall be protected against surges induced on any communications link. Surge protection shall meet IEEE 472- 1974 and C37.90-1978(rev. 1983). C. Panels components shall meet the following requirements: 1. Terminal strips shall be installed for wire terminations and shall be double level type as manufactured by Entrelec, Phoenix, or approved equal. All terminal blocks shall be labeled using the manufacturer's standard plastic machine-printed snap-in labels designed to fit the terminal block. Printed labels shall denote terminal strip numbers and shall match numbers shown on shop drawings, O&M manuals and wiring diagrams. Hand written labels will not be accepted. Install a minimum 25% spare terminal strips for each type terminal strip indicated on the drawings. 2. Provide a separate D.C. power supply providing regulated D.C. power sources. Power supplies shall be sized to source all panel and field hardware burden plus fifty percent. Input of all power supplies shall be protected with DIN-rail mounted circuit breakers sized for 125%of Load. In no case shall any AC or DC power supply output exceed 10 Amperes. Power supplies/converters shall have an input to output efficiency rating exceeding 85%. Power supplies shall have an operating temperature range of-200 to 70° C. The drawings and specifications indicate the energy sources that will be provided. Any other devices or power supplies necessary to obtain proper operation of the supervisory control system or instrumentation from these energy sources shall be provided with the control panels. 3. A print pocket shall be provided in the panel and shall contain a 11"x17" control schematic and a 11"x17" wiring diagram or diagrams. The wiring diagram shall contain all wire numbers, device names and terminal numbers. Drawings shall be laminated in clear plastic for preservation of the drawings. 4. Control relays shall be NEMA rated triple pole double throw, UL listed, with contacts rated 10A inductive, 240V, enclosed in a dust proof clear plastic enclosure. Provide an integral LED light indicator which is lit when coil is energized and is off when coil is not energized. Relay shall be blade based socket type, plug in to a DIN rail mounted fixed base with spring wire relay retainer, and be replaceable without need of tools or removing wire. Control relays shall be IDEC RH series relays or approved equal. SCADA System 409430- 10 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 5. Timing relays in the control panels shall be digital timer relays and shall be programmable for different timing ranges and timing modes. Timing range shall be 0.1 second to 60 minutes. Relays shall provide a mode that pulses on for a preset ON time and remains off for a preset OFF time, and repeats the cycle continuously. Timing relays shall be for 120 VAC operation and shall be Allen Bradley 700-HX86SA17 with screw terminal mounting socket and restraining strap. 6. Pushbuttons and rotary switches shall be Square D Class 9001 or approved equal. 7. All switches and panel inserts shall include gaskets to seal against entry of dust and moisture into the panel to preserve the rating of the enclosure. 2.5 WALL MOUNTED ENCLOSURES A. Enclosures shall be NEMA 4X rated fiberglass. B. Enclosure shall have external mounting tabs, and shall have a 316L S.S. hasp and staple for padlocking. Enclosures shall have a continuous hinge and quick release latches. C. Enclosures shall have a minimum depth of 12 inches as measured from the mounting tabs to the front face of the cabinet. D. Acceptable enclosure manufacturers are Hoffman, Rittal, or approved equal. E. Provide a padlock for each enclosure keyed to match master key provided by Owner. Padlocks shall have removable cylinders to allow padlock to be re-keyed, hardened alloy steel shackles, and hardened locking levers. Padlocks shall be Master brand. F. Provide a compression-type grounding lug on backpanel. PART 3—HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI) A. The existing Human-Machine Interface (HMI) software currently installed on Owner's SCADA system is based on National Instruments Lookout. Owner currently has(2) sites(One Master and one redundant) used to monitor all Wastewater Treatment plants and lift stations. This contract will modify existing screens. The Contractor shall visit existing Master Site to inspect existing system and discuss requirements with Owner. Contractor shall be responsible for providing all necessary programming and configuration as required to add 1/0 to the existing database and to provide the necessary HMI screens to monitor the 1/0 points in this project. The Control System Integrator shall be required to submit the proposed HMI screens to the Engineer and Owner for approval a minimum of four weeks prior to site testing. The graphics for the new HMI screens shall be dynamic and shall closely represent the existing Everhart lift station HMI screens. B. All available functions represented on the screens shall be easily identified. The Operator shall not be required to navigate multiple levels of menus to view a screen. SCADA System 409430- 11 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 C. All new alarms on the project shall be added to and displayed in the existing alarm summary page. The Integrator shall coordinate with the Owner when configuring the system alarms and subsequent actions (i.e. dialing out alarms to pagers and/or phones). PART 4—SCADA A. The owner's existing Office located on Holly Road and Greenwood Wastewater treatment plant site currently serve as the master and redundant polling site for the existing SCADA system. These sites are responsible for polling the SCADA site in this contract. B. This project shall include a new SCADA RTU 1044 to replace demolished Lift station SCADA Panel. C. The integrator shall be responsible for testing communications on existing RTU to master sites to ensure data transfer. PART 5 - EXECUTION 5.1 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY The Contractor shall coordinate the control system integrator during construction,testing, start- up, calibration and acceptance of the instrumentation and control system. The Contractor is responsible for a complete and fully operational instrumentation and control system. 5.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION A. The Instrumentation and control system, peripherals, and accessory equipment shall be installed in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's instructions and located as shown on the Contract Drawings or as approved by the Engineer. B. The Contractor and control system integrator shall investigate each space in the building through which equipment must pass to reach its final location. If necessary the control system integrator shall be required to ship the components in sections, sized to permit passage through such areas. The Contractor shall also investigate space and allocated access (front, rear, side). C. The Contractor shall coordinate the installation, placing and location of system components, their connections to the process components, panels, cabinets and devices, as required to complete the work subject to the Engineer's approval. The Contractor shall be responsible to insure that all field wiring for power and signal circuits between existing devices, the proposed control system are correctly done in accordance with best industry practice to insure a satisfactory functioning installation. D. All work shall be coordinated with the City Wastewater personnel. 5.3 TESTS AND ACCEPTANCE SCADA System 409430- 12 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 A. The Engineer and/or Owner shall witness Factory Acceptance Tests, On-site Operability Tests and System Acceptance Tests. Contactor shall notify all parties to schedule such witnessing of tests. B. The integrator shall stage SCADA Equipment, PLC control panels, and HMI hardware and software for a full factory acceptance test at the integrators facility. During the factory acceptance test,the owner and engineer shall be able to simulate any 1/0 and verify the operation of all loops. 5.4 INSTALLATION A. All equipment and devices for the instrumentation and control system shall be installed in the locations shown on the drawings, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and in compliance with the requirements of these specifications. B. The control system integrator shall provide assist in the installation, testing, calibration and start-up of the instrumentation and control equipment. The control system integrator shall provide the necessary time to ensure all systems are installed properly, tested and fully operational. C. During the work, the Contractor shall keep the treatment plant in operation and be fully functional at all times. The proposed instrumentation and control system shall be installed, tested and operating properly before the existing system is taken out of service. 5.5 FIELD ACCEPTANCE TESTS A. No power shall be activated to any part of the instrumentation and control system until the Engineer receives a written certified statement by the system supplier that the installation is complete and ready for energizing. The Contractor is responsible for proper coordination and scheduling, and any damage to the instrumentation and control system. B. After the installations are completed, the Contractor through the control system integrator, shall test each component of the instrumentation and control system. After all systems are operating properly, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer and demonstrate the full operation of the system. The Contractor shall make all necessary adjustments and correct or replace faulty equipment to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 5.6 FIELD CALIBRATION A. All instrumentation and controls shall be calibrated in the presence of the Engineer in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions to the accuracy specified. SCADA System 409430- 13 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 B. The Contractor shall provide field calibration as necessary until the project is considered Substantially Complete by the Engineer. PART 6—AS-BUILT DOCUMENTATION The control system integrator shall provide the Owner with a complete set of AutoCAD 2012 control drawings for the project. These drawing shall include panel layout, wiring diagrams and loop sheets. The drawings shall indicate all wiring numbers. In addition the contractor shall provide detailed documentation of all computer code developed for this project. This documentation shall include but not be limited to: written descriptions, comments in PLC code, and HMI scripting. In addition the contractor shall provide both paper and electronic copies of all software developed for this project including but not limited to: PLC code, HMI code, custom I/O driver, etc. END OF SECTION 13950 SCADA System 409430- 14 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 APPENDIX SCADA System 409430- 15 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 SC."AIDA Wa .stewater i t r !l. 1 ,'i ft St a tio n StandardsIII v,,,,lF v D e Ip a irtiime ii "t Revision 1 03/29/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 SCADA WW Lift Station PLC Standards Contents 1 Purpose and Scope.....................................................................................................................................2 1.1 Purpose...............................................................................................................................................2 1.2 Scope...................................................................................................................................................2 2 SCADA PLC Standards.................................................................................................................................3 2.1 PLC Hardware Standards.....................................................................................................................3 2.2 Network Connectivity.........................................................................................................................4 2.3 PLC Programming Standards...............................................................................................................4 2.4 Control Panel PLC Wiring....................................................................................................................5 2.5 Relays..................................................................................................................................................5 2.6 PLC HMI Standards..............................................................................................................................5 3 Special Considerations...............................................................................................................................6 3.1 WW Lift Stations .................................................................................................................................6 3.2 OSO WWTP SCADA Upgrade...............................................................................................................6 3.3 Additional WWTP Upgrades ...............................................................................................................6 4 Revision History .........................................................................................................................................7 Page 1 of 7 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 SCADA WW Lift Station PLC Standards 1 Purpose and Scope 1.1 Purpose The purpose of implementing the SCADA PLC Standard is to standardize the brand/model all SCADA equipment/devices which will improve system functionality, support, administration, and reliability. In addition, standardizing will assist with Security Firmware Patching, Incident Response and Disaster Recovery procedures thus helping with overall security and recovery. This document specifies the I.T. Department's standards for PLCs (Programmable Logic Controllers) used for the Wastewater(WW) Lift Stations used throughout the City of Corpus Christi.This document will include the specifications of the new standards to be used for any PLC upgrade, replacement, or new installation at a WW Lift Station Facility. All deviations must be approved by the I.T. Department prior to installation, and preferably at design time. 1.2 Scope The scope will include all PLCs at all WW Lift Stations.This includes local HMI screens installed at the lift station, if applicable. Any PLC upgrade, replacement, or new installation is required to meet the standards listed in this document. Page 2 of 7 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 SCADA WW Lift Station PLC Standards 2 SCADA PLC Standards The SCADA PLC Standards are the minimum system requirements for new PLCs.All deviations must be approved the I.T. Department prior to installation. All system firmware/software versions must be compatible with City's system at time of implementation. Versions must be verified prior or at design time to ensure compatibility. 2.1 PLC Hardware Standards The PLC used shall be in the CompactLogix family of PLCs manufactured by Rockwell Automation (Allen- Bradley) only. Details of the components of the CompactLogix PLC system are listed below: Controller Allen-Bradley-1769L33ER, CompactLogix 2MB ENet Controller or Compatible Allen-Bradley CompactLogix Controller that is supported in Studio 5000 LogixDesigner(Approval from the I.T. Department is required) 1/0 Modules Discrete Input Modules: Allen-Bradley CompactLogix 1769-IQ16 16-point Discrete Input Modules Discrete Output Modules: Allen-Bradley CompactLogix 1769-OB16 16-point Discrete Output Modules Analog Input Modules: Allen-Bradley CompactLogix 1769-IF16C 16-point Analog Input Modules Allen-Bradley CompactLogix 1769-IF8 8-point Analog Input Modules Analog Output Modules: Allen-Bradley CompactLogix 1769-OF8 8-Point Analog Output Modules Communication Module Not Required—If Modbus is required, Protocol Converter will be used. See section 6.2 Network Connectivity. Power Supplies CompactLogix PLC 24-volt DC power supplies manufactured by Rockwell Automation (Allen-Bradley)for CompactLogix PLC's. HMI Touch Screen (Optional) Allen-Bradley PANELVIEW PLUS 7 Touch Screen 2711P-T9W21D8S-B (Firmware Version must be compatible. Verify with I.T. Department at design time.) Please note that items listed above will be selected as needed and based on the requirements of the specific application and not all components will be used for each location. For example, not all Lift Stations will require a local HMI Touch Screen. Page 3 of 7 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 SCADA WW Lift Station PLC Standards 2.2 Network Connectivity The communications/networking devices selected for each location is dependent on the location and HMI Servers communicating with the PLC. Protocols allowed will be Modbus for PLCs connecting to Legacy HMI Server or Ethernet/IP for PLCs connecting to Rockwell HMI Servers.The following is the standard list of PLC components allowed for any system upgrade, replacement, or new installation. Protocol Converter (Required for PLCs using Modbus&connecting to Legacy SCADA HMI Servers) Red Lion Data Station Plus Part#: DSPSX000 SCADA Panel Switch Moxa Managed Industrial Ethernet Switch Model EDS-508A-MM-SC Cellular Network Devices (Only for Ethernet/IP Protocol) If Cellular communication is required for new installation,the I.T. Department will provide network connectivity via Cellular Device on case-by-case basis. Devices used will be determined on case-by-case basis. Fiber If Fiber Connectivity is available,the I.T. Department will provide network connectivity via Fiber on case-by-case basis. Devices used will be determined on case-by-case basis. Radio Communications (For new installations and only for Ethernet/IP Protocol) If Radio is required for new installation,the I.T. Department will provide network connectivity via Radio on case-by-case basis. Devices used will be determined on case-by- case basis. Radio Communications (For existing WW Lift Stations connecting to Lookout System located at Greenwood WWTP using Modbus Protocol) MDS Transit NR-100 Radio (Re-use existing Radio's currently installed at Lift Station) 2.3 PLC Programming Standards The SCADA PLC Programming Standards are as follows: PLC Programming Software Studio 5000 LogixDesigner(Firmware Versions must be compatible. Verify with I.T. Department at design time.) PLC Programming • Function Block Diagram Programming • Ladder Logic • PlantPAx for Process Objects (Firmware Versions must be compatible. Verify with I.T. Department at design time.) Page 4 of 7 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 SCADA WW Lift Station PLC Standards 2.4 Control Panel PLC Wiring All control panel PLC wiring shall be labeled and shall conform as follows: Wiring Color 24 VDC+ Blue 24 VDC- Brown 120 VAC(H or L1) Yellow 120 VAC(N or L2) White Ground Green Digital Input Purple Digital Output Red Analog Input White (Loop) Black(Signal) Analog Output Grey HART White (Loop) Orange (Signal) Digital Input (120 VAC) Pink 2.5 Relays The following are acceptable relays for DI/DO Modules: Weidmuller, Cross Connectors, 1391600000,TERMSERIES, Cross-connector Weidmuller, Relay,1123580000,TRS 24-230VUC 2CO 2-pole Weidmuller, Relay,1984610000,TRS 24-230VUC ICO C1D2 1-pole 2.6 PLC HMI Standards The local PLC HMI Screen Designs will use PlantPAx Graphics Library and follow standardized color schemes used by the PlantPAx. Page 5 of 7 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 SCADA WW Lift Station PLC Standards 3 Special Considerations 3.1 WW Lift Stations Currently, all Lift Station PLCs connect to one HMI Server located at Greenwood WWTP. All current Lift Station SCADA data is received by HMI Server at Greenwood via Radio communication using an isolated, dedicated network.This dedicated network is not connected to Corporate I.T. Network and will not be connected to Corporate I.T. Network. Please note that until all WW Lift Stations are upgraded, the current Lookout SCADA system running at Greenwood will continue to be used as required by the Utilities Treatment Department. The administrator of the Lookout SCADA System is Medardo Ayala, Instrument and Electrical Technician. If the PLC being replaced/upgraded corresponds to a WWTP HMI Server that has not been upgraded to Rockwell System,then the new PLC must be able to communicate to the existing HMI Server at Greenwood WWTP using Modbus Protocol. However,the new PLC is still required to meet the I.T. SCADA PLC Standards. If the PLC being replaced/upgraded corresponds to a WWTP HMI Server has been upgraded to Rockwell System,then the new PLC must be able to communicate to the new Rockwell SCADA system using Ethernet/IP Protocol via Corporate Network and meet the I.T. SCADA PLC Standards. Network Connectivity devices will be determined by the I.T. Department on a case-by-case basis. 3.2 OSO WWTP SCADA Upgrade Currently,the OSO WWTP SCADA System is in the process of being upgraded to Rockwell SCADA System. Once this new system is functional and in production mode, all corresponding PLCs at the Lift Stations that feed into the WWTP will be configured to connect to this HMI Server using Ethernet/IP Protocol and via Corporate I.T. Network. Network Connectivity devices will be determined by the I.T. Department on a case-by-case basis. 3.3 Additional WWTP Upgrades As other WWTP SCADA Systems are upgraded to Rockwell Solutions, corresponding PLCs at Lift Stations that feed into that WWTP will be configured to connect to the Rockwell HMI Server using Ethernet/IP Protocol and via Corporate I.T. Network. Page 6 of 7 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 SCADA WW Lift Station PLC Standards 4 Revision History Date Revised By Description of Changes 3/29/2021 Hector Leal, Document is created. IT SCADA Manager Page 7 of 7 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 SECTION 40 94 43 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. References: 1. NFPA 70 (NEC) 2. Programming Languages IEC 61131-3 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes Programmable logic controllers for control of process equipment, process oriented machinery, and process systems. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of PLC include dimensions, mounting arrangements, and weights. Also include, manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical ratings, characteristics, and terminal connections. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide for each PLC component literature detailing routine maintenance requirements (if any). 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer shall have, within 100 miles of Project site, a facility, distributor, system integrator, or panel shop capable of providing training, parts, and coordination of emergency maintenance and repairs. B. Source Limitations: 1. Provide all PLCs from a single manufacturer. If the PLC manufacturer has authorized third party vendors to provide modules that are compatible with their platforms, then products manufactured by these authorized third party vendors will be acceptable. 2. To insure reliability and compatibility with all aspects of the control system, all PLC equipment shall be from the same vendor as the SCADA software, Operator Interface Terminals, and Power Distribution Equipment. C. Comply with NFPA 70. Programmable Controllers 409443- 1 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver PLC components in packaging designed to prevent damage from static electricity, and physical damage. B. Store PLCs according to manufacturers' requirements. 1.6 SPARE 1/0 A. Each PLC will be sized to handle the required 1/0 plus a percentage of spares. When calculating spare 1/0 count, always round up. When configuring spare 1/0 counts, use the following criteria: 1. Analog Inputs (Al): Required for the PLC plus 15%. 2. Analog Ouputs (AO): Required for the PLC plus 15%. 3. Digital Inputs (DI): Required for the PLC plus 15%. 4. Digital Outputs (DO): Required for the PLC plus 15%. 1.7 SPARE PARTS A. Furnish spare parts as described below for each type of PLC. Material shall be packaged for long term storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. 1/0 Cards: Provide as a minimum a spare of each type of card identified. Provide an additional spare for every 10 cards of a specific type installed. 2. Processors: Provide as a minimum a spare for each type of CPU identified. 3. PLC oriented Power Supplies: Provide as a minimum a spare of each type of power supply identified. Provide an additional spare for every 10 power supplies of a specific type installed. 4. Memory Cards: Provide as a minimum a spare of each type of card identified. Provide an additional spare for every 10 cards of a specific type installed 5. Specialty Modules: Provide as a minimum a spare of each type of module identified. Provide an additional spare for every 10 modules of a specific type installed PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Qualified Manufacturers: 1. Allen Bradley. 2.2 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS A. GENERAL: Programmable Controllers 409443-2 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 1. Description: A module based PLC designed for up to 8192 points of 1/0. Each module shall have a limited amount of 1/0, an ability to accept communication or processor card, and an integrated power supply for that module and communication or processor card. The PLC shall not require a chassis or rack. 2. The PLC shall: a. Collect data, perform process control functions, communicate with other PLCs, and distribute process information along the local area network. b. Be able to have its program downloaded from a remote workstation over a network, or locally programmed from a portable laptop computer. C. Allow for the expansion of the system by addition and configuration of hardware. 3. Executive firmware shall be stored in Flash memory and can be updated in the field using standard programming tools. Executive firmware files shall be readily available via a public web site. 4. Each discrete point shall have a light emitting diode to indicate point status. An illuminated LED shall indicate that the point is logic level "1", also referred to as "on" or"high". 5. The PLC shall utilize Ethernet protocols that meet the following: a. Protocols that are assigned to port 502 of the TCP/IP stack by the IANA (Internet Assigned Numbers Authority). b. Devices must utilize embedded web pages, or a physical means such as DIP switches, to be recognized and properly addressed on the network. Ethernet protocols that require network management software, or utilize configuration files that must be downloaded to Ethernet devices, for proper network addressing, and recognition are not acceptable. C. Will not rely on third party vendors to meet the above criteria. 6. Processor Features: a. Each processor shall have a RS-232 Modbus port for programming. Processor performance shall be rated at least 1ms/K. Acceptable processors are detailed below: 1) 512Kb of internal user RAM. Processor shall have a RS-232 Modbus port and an Ethernet port. 2) 512Kb of internal user RAM. Processor shall have a 1/0 bus port and an Ethernet port. 3) Stand alone processor with 512Kb of internal user RAM. Processor shall have a RS-232 Modbus port and a 4 Ethernet port. b. The PLC shall utilize a battery to protect the memory in the case of power loss. C. The PLC shall have on board status lights to indicate the following various functions: 1) Program execution 2) Communication status 7. I/O: The PLC modules shall have embedded 1/0 capability. Modules will be available that supports the following: a. Analog Inputs: All Analog input cards will offer isolation between channels. 1) Four (4) +/-25mV, +/- 100mV, Pt100, Pt1000, Ni100, Ni1000, B, E,J, K, N, R, S,T differential input 2) Eight (8)+/- 10V or 0-20mA differential input. Programmable Controllers 409443-3 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 3) Sixteen (16) +/- 10V or 0-20mA single ended input. b. Analog Outputs: All analog output cards will offer isolation between channels, 1) Four (4) channel +/- 10V, 0-20mA output C. Discrete Inputs: 1) Sixteen (16) channel sink 24VDC input cards 2) Sixteen (16) channel 120VAC input card d. Discrete Outputs: 1) Sixteen (16) channel 24VDC(0.5A/channel) solids state switch output card 2) Eight (8) channel 120VAC(0.5A/channel) output card. 3) Sixteen (16) channel 120VAC(0.5A/channel) output card. 8. Specialized 1/0 Cards: The PLC shall have a series of application specific 1/0 cards. These will be as follows: a. High speed counter card: Six (6) channels rated 24VDC at 10 KHz single ended, or Three (3)channels SVDC at 200Khz differential. b. Combination Card with Six (6) 120 VAC inputs, and Three (3) solid state switch output. Card will include a Modbus port. 9. Communication Capabilities: Each base module will be capable of mounting a communication card. Cards will be available for the following protocols: a. Ethernet TCP/IP utilizing Modbus TCP protocol b. Modbus Plus C. Modbus d. Fipio e. Interbus-S f. Profibus g. DeviceNet 10. Option Adapters: The PLC shall have a series of option adapters to enhance the communication capabilities of the processors. The option adapters shall fit between the module and processor card. The adapter will fit in the same spot reserved for processor or communication cards. The option adapters will be available with the following configurations: a. Single Modbus Plus port b. Redundant Modbus Plus ports C. Single serial port with RS-232 or RS-285 configuration via software. 11. Power Supplies: Each module shall have an integral power supply. The modules shall be available in both 24 VDC and 115 VAC models. The power supply should be capable of powering the 1/0 and communication adapter; 1/0 and processor; or 1/0, processor, and will be from 16 to 36W. B. PLC PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS: a. The system shall utilize manufacturer's standard programming software. C. PLC ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS: 1. The PLCs must meet or exceed the following environmental requirements: a. Minimum temperature range: 1) Operating: 0-55°C(+32 to +131°F) Programmable Controllers 409443-4 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 2) Storage: -25 to +70°C(-13 to +158°F) b. Relative humidity: 30 to 95%non condensing. C. Altitude: 1) Operation 0-6,500 feet minimum 2) Storage 0-9,800 feet minimum d. Degree of protection: NEMA 1 (IP20) D. MANUFACTURER: 1. The basis of design is the Allen Bradley 17691-33 ER Compact Logix with Compact Logix 1769 I/O Modules. 2. PLC shall comply with SCADA Wastewater Lift Station PLC Standards included in appendix of specification Section 40 94 30 SCADA Panel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATIONS A. Select PLC based upon I/O, memory, communication, expansion, and system requirements. If multiple PLC panels from different vendors will be supplied, coordinate with other vendors to insure that PLCs are of similar brand and are equipped to utilize identical communication networks. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. PLC mounting shall be in accordance with manufacturers requirements. This includes anchorage within enclosures, spacing, wire sizing, and ventilation requirements. Before starting up, remove all temporary stickers used to cover ventilation holes. B. PLC lights, keys, communication ports, and memory card slots shall be accessible at all times. Lights shall be visible at all times when enclosure door is opened. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify PLC components, and wiring according to all applicable codes, standards and contract document sections. B. Each I/O point shall be identified on the door of PLC I/O cards. C. DEMONSTRATION 1. Control panel supplier shall provide a qualified service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain PLCs. Manufacturer's standard training will be sufficient unless specified elsewhere. Programmable Controllers 409443-5 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 END OF SECTION 40 94 43 APPENDIX Programmable Controllers 409443-6 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 Texas APPENDIX 1 AofTransportation Department TRAFFIC CONTROL DETAILS DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 BARRICADE AND CONSTRUCTION (BC) STANDARD SHEETS GENERAL NOTES: 1. The Barricade and Construction Standard Sheets (BC sheets) are intended to show typical examples for placement of temporary traffic control devices, construction co pavement markings, and typical work zone signs. The information contained in these sheets meet or exceed the requirements shown in the "Texas Manual on Uniform o4) Traffic Control Devices" (TMUTCD). +o . 2The development and design of the Traffic Control Plan (TCP) is the responsibility ° D U) . g y L N 7 o. � of the Engineer. 3 L 00 zwo 3. The Contractor may propose changes to the TCP that are signed and sealed by a licensed professional engineer for approval. The Engineer may develop, sign and -� seal Contractor proposed changes. QD•- -t X00 4. The Contractor is responsible for installing and maintaining the traffic control Sv` devices as shown in the plans. The Contractor may not move or change the approximate 0. 0 location of any device without the approval of the Engineer. a,c°o LN$ 5. Geometric design of Ione shifts and detours should, when possible, meet the applicable 4).,o design criteria contained in manuals such as the American Association of State Highway . Dow and Transportation Officials (AASHTO), "A Policy on Geometric Design of Highways and Wog Streets, " the TxDOT "Roadway Design Manual " or engineering judgment. No N �F� 6. When projects abut, the Engineer (s) may omit the END ROAD WORK, TRAFFIC FINES DOUBLE, .0 and other advance warning signs if the signing would be redundant and the work areas +ao appear continuous to the motorists. If the adjacent project is completed first, the TNC Contractor sholl erect the necessary warning signs as shown on these sheets, the TCP DL•L sheets or as directed by the Engineer. The BEGIN ROAD WORK NEXT X MILES sign shall dao be revised to show appropriate work zone distance. L UI 0n° 7. The Engineer may require duplicate warning signs on the median side of divided �aE highways where median width will permit and traffic volumes justify the signing. TL C, 8. All signs shall be constructed in accordance with the details found in the ooL "Standard Highway Sign Designs for Texas, " latest edition. Sign details not shown woo in this manual shall be shown in the plans or the Engineer shall provide a detail wco to the Contractor before the sign is manufactured. L� + 'O woo 9. The temporary traffic control devices shown in the illustrations of the BC sheets ..aao are examples. As necessary, the Engineer will determine the most appropriate traffic W�E0 control devices to be used. d N N QL•"- U Da 10. As shown on BC(2), the OBEY WARNING SIGNS STATE LAW sign, STAY ALERT TALK OR TEXT o Yo LATER (see Sign Detail G20-10T) and the WORK ZONE TRAFFIC FINES DOUBLE sign with plaque shall be erected in advance of the CSJ limits. However, the TRAFFIC FINES DOUBLE sign will not be required on projects consisting solely of mobile operation work, such as striping or milling edgeline rumble strips. The BEGIN ROAD WORK NEXT X MILES, CONTRACTOR and END ROAD WORK signs shall be erected at or near the CSJ limits. 11. Except for devices required by Note 10, traffic control devices should be in place only while work is actually in progress or a definite need exists. 12. The Engineer has the final decision on the location of all traffic control devices. 13. Inactive equipment and work vehicles, including workers' private vehicles must be parked away from travel lanes. They should be as close to the right-of-way line as possible, or located behind a barrier or guardrail, or as approved by the Engineer. WORKER SAFETY APPAREL NOTES: SHEET 1 OF 29 Traffic Operations 1. Workers on foot who are exposed to traffic or Ir Texas Department of Transportation Standard to construction equipment within the right- of-way shall wear high-visibility safety apparel meeting the requirements of I SEA BARRICADE AND CONSTRUCTION "American National Standard for High-Visibility Apparel, " or equivalent revisions, and labeled GENERAL NOTES as ANSI 107-2004 standard performance for Class 2 or 3 risk exposure. Class 3 garments should AND REQUIREMENTS be considered for high traffic volume work areas or night t i me work. BC � � ) _ 1 4 FILE: bcsm-14.(CCST L��L YN: 1,DOT cu:TxDOT SW: TxDOT ..K.TxDOT ©TXDOT November 2002 CONT SECT Ioe HIGHWAY REVISIONS w_J 4-03 5-10 B-14 [)IST COUNTY SHEET No. a 9-07 7-13 O LL DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 R=.44" _ n 4.9" 19.7" 6" 1 24.5" 4.9" R=.13" m COLORS: N N - FLUORESCENT >,c YELLOW �uuli 5 uuuuu uuuum m uuum o C o ^ BACKGROUND m BLACK O L R-1.1 BORDER AND muuuulA Y A ���111111111111111111111 uuuuuuuuuu n c R=•79" n LEGEND C a a 1.25 v L N D ORANGE -M o+N -R=.75" FLUORESCENT 3 L� BACKGROUND- 0 ACKGROUND O o BLACK Z'o WHITE LEGEND, - ro L BORDER N v N AND SYMBOL a- BLACK n QD•- - 1.25" �L ucD in \ +n(D 75"- 0 NNO v 75"010L L L aaWHITE Q III Lc O yyO C6 O N N D C luullu umiuuu uuuuuuu h uuu uuu uuu I"n) O o o} o. Q O O O 20" 20" 20" Ld L,)In v O O O 3.5" 12" 2.8 2.8" 1 .8" 14.6" 3.5" Oxa X dti L � 60„ O v C>L T Q O O O ro c 3.0" Radius, 1.25" Border, 0.75" Indent, Block on Yellow; D [STAY ALERT] Font: D O 4,s o 1 3.0" Radius, 1.25" Border, 0.75" Indent, Black on Orange; n L 1.66".67"1.68"I 67"1.68" - [TALK OR TEXT LATER] Font: C specified length; >oo �� 31.. 1.. 6.38" 1.. .31„ �oa0 E D c o B.38" L Ow O 9„ D L L C O N OwL t WO Nn O ..a SIGN DETAIL (G20- 10T ) wD O 0 C 41 W y o}O W 7 E 0 aL•"- V~D THE DOCUMENTS BELOW CAN BE FOUND ON-LINE AT n c Y o http://www.txdot.gov COMPLIANT WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES LIST (CWZTCD) DEPARTMENTAL MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS (DMS) MATERIAL PRODUCER LIST (MPL) ROADWAY DESIGN MANUAL - SEE "MANUALS (ONLINE MANUALS) " STANDARD HIGHWAY SIGN DESIGNS FOR TEXAS (SHSD) TEXAS MANUAL ON UNIFORM TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES (TMUTCD) TRAFFIC ENGINEERING STANDARD SHEETS SHEET 2 OF 29 Traffic Only pre-qualified products sho I I be used. Operations Division The "Com I i ant Work Zone Traffic Control Texas Department of Transportation Standard Devices List" (CWZTCD) describes pre-qualified products and their sources and may be found on- line at the web address given ven be I ow or by BARRICADE AND CONSTRUCTION contacting: GENERAL NOTES Texas Department of Transportation AND REQUIREMENTS Traffic Operations Division - TE Phone (512) 416-3118 BC0 ) - 14 FIFE: bcsm-14.dgn oN. 1,DOT CK TOOT ow: TxDOT CK:TOOT ©TXDOT November 2002 CONT SECT Ioe HIGHWAY REVISIONS w w 4-03 5-10 8-14 DIST couNTv suEET No. a 9-07 7-13 C LL DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 wMW_ O; N 0 0 ;N V O G K * X F lQ W o TC c o O_ r i V to l9 .W � 0 L W O N H w O t O 0 J o JIC ¢ w 5 `O )1c x W J v O O E C> OUN N ^ >- 4o o X O Y L LN7 0 41J? O ``O V L L N O 0.w N J oHc v 3 + F U L,_ N 0o .+ La w J mN�LLoo i�O x v w a �O = p i_ + yyyy �w. x WCG ?5 O ¢D} U a * o �o u� x d� N} O ;O U c 7 r +aa, S O O0 10 a)L F tJ K K N N N [ {¢,i L L N F x * * a• C - * D'C O Q W~ XX )IC Jk\X/* + 1A IA O O to.9 0 N * W=X ws ry x x C,O Z N \/ Ln J \/ * J IA oW 'CO O 0 a Y1 J 442 Dov L, Ld W07 W o v N F t.im p4 4 l 11 00 L ]L ¢3 Q z 3 cr Z5 �» W g L w L O 810 C WL 00 cr T0C LLO OZ¢ o aZDtC do Z O ca"o.-ZI.- 3:, u oL Ld) Z n •aaco+cot D o o t 7 O (DO*--O•-O O mm U 3- �j} N X N 0 D 0 t +� C N0+ L7 "nE LL W mYJ 0 U 0•- O U 0 0 T L O /��--I X; x U m 0'0 P N C E C'O DCO C-J X. * OOH CG CC 0 0 L 0 LO O w F V Y * K 00 O 7 W > O N T DLL a +Q: L O - 'Ow O N Z N Z n L L W 0 C` E } U 0+ Z C• O N —0 v O V O0 T30 X00 J v v W¢ C N co - O N 3L 0 C N G O __ O= U- Y L w +~'0 J C- Z mien - 0 O- w+ + YN p+ ¢cr •L n L O O 7 U wn0 zod 8 - Z I'm x OoN00 3T+ Ow 0dc Q ui% �g'`<<_� vi c ? a nU) c'D0cc a z� E+o 4,4) 0 co N ma% S•'� p 0 0 (� a C 0 0 a W •- L L w7E on Cn] Ty LJ O 0.0 O OJ O+ ¢L mN 4 E 7+ m 4 L•N px L C ID E V p L + U)w + 0 0U0 cL)n a+ o o J cc L w v w ^' N N 0 0 "� 0- C c L �- N 0 C', 3 7•L C U V P •E N ) 0 - p ++ O+ c L U 0: •N * * za UiU 0 O X N- O0'O O C'00 E L C .N L C N LL X Z. 0 + N- 0 N 0-- (1) m•N +O �o C� UNO O•E7 � C+ Oto L J+ _ U L CO Z L N -U l7 L 0 0 W O O DO 0 ZL CU U) x c c+ O Z L a 0.c: - O O U)'O•- 0 G F U y.- c V) 0.c N 0L 0L O+ 'C N W L 3- U) L 0 L n N N [J U) O Y 0--+-+- 0 •-++ a'- L O� +L 7 C 0 0100 Hoax uNi O M. N OD O'00L N �y LL •ecu +ID U0 X00 '00 U 0 X C L N U) L w•- ~ •�o� O F0zw � OU 00- Z7 ONN m U o L O + 0 0 a) + L v a w 3 0 F �� +-X U) C E C7 a) L+ 7 0 0 0 N C n W•- w I) O U) O Y J u }L LO O N ao W U (D C N m- 0 L v O w } _ F L Y N+ - c O c 3 vi Q 0 •- 000 •- X' mam J 'c' O LOO0:L OO LL•- oTw X100m o Z +3�+z � nNE- ? qua) W ow F C 0 J 00 tw O _ � >a (L ~ 3 0 u Q U SHEET 3 OF 29 N C - C N N N0 - Z Q a NH E v o Traffic O o o= c cm E u U o Operations 3¢ c•- E O- Division 0> c n Cl -0 ,Texas Department of Transportation Q o m 0 U) U C 0 vi Standard Oo} +y+ act J .0 '0o N C NOC N a N o '� a, o Q BARRICADE AND CONSTRUCTION F x O LLJ O •N U V)U O L PROTECT LIMIT J doE V m no PwO �U- N J w c F C CC)C 0 C C C U�U ZO¢ U V U U T ID > c P N O nM.n Q d (D D BC (2) - 14 W i c x 0 O FILE: bcsm-14.dgn EN:100T OK:TXDOT SW: ION GK:TxDOT " m aa)) Ic-) O X Q m Y¢ x 3 _ ©TxDOT November 2002 CONT SECT Job HIGHWAY 00,w X O O C REVISIONS w w 3 M do 0 9-07 8-14 F J L a,_L DIST COUNTY SHEET NO. ¢ ; �• 3 0 7-13 O LL DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 0 ID E L N d u C d CC O u1 U) N U1 - E L O L O N Qww •a, O C C•- C ,0- O 7 U N > d D d 0 2 w W O C P V) P O O O E O.L O d L Lo• U)- CO x + = n P N C•0 L L •- •C N O L L P •- d- _ \ O a C •U)-�L U) N + C•E ID U+L L U C O• w \\ Y•N- N N O O C 'O dC L > U)L 'OC b O O ~ •O L d O O N 03+ L d w; \ > 0: C - + C - ' L L T C O . 0.- O N O d O L O d N - O +O * L C)•3 0�- C 7 E E L vi•«•- C UOi n o > c U C O+ n Q L N= L C 7 L - C O+ O O } 0 C, U) O N 3 Y O O O •7 P O U) L N d L d 7 '^4 O O:L U O:3 E 0'� CT•- + U+ P+ C n C n + --O > C d w L O d U O O y O+N �JVf O Y L O 3 C= L O 4) L d U d U C + O�� X +_ O O O V) 3 d o L L L 'O Q cn O O U) T+ L V) + N + U\ O O 3x O z; ; d d W Q+ x-•- 0 0 d O'O•- •- L z'~E Z �`x u wo D+ x 0 U d) L E•- d n C C w d O (> Q w QO C+ O Q O: 7� C L L O O 'O L T w d L r Oz� P '0 C L O L n d L - d d 0 0.S 0. N O+ L O O:O n O. L L 3 d L -5- U) 7 w •- VZ • U) Z U) O U) d + L - + -0 L + P +-P O N O w C I C E U n U) d- 7•- O d C u•-C 0 N C d 3= O P 7 d n C L 0 O d 0 1C d w Q D} Q O O N- u N•- - n 0 0+ L d L 3 + U•C7 O C+Q X d d C 0 4) x U L7 Qc0- PN > CLO0C LC0 N 0C O U O- O•- P - •L + •-Om 00 N O ¢ U a C 3 \L D•-U D C L d n +n d N '-z C 3 O C X•- d•- O L + E O d O T O 10 dL (n nd O L P - nC1 C - d O- L U L C L D L L N O ydj- n•- 10= T L d - d•- - + + 3 n CL y M p H C O N C L•- +w O U d O n'O a d O O M= P 3•- - 0 3 dw L 7 L L O d O P L) Q a X •- •P O ul L 3 N C �C E _ 'OY d L V1 d'O C -N L + •-N O 0 N d U O W J C - C N d d O•E 4 Q 00 tD•- T C O w P- 0, C D d L L 3 M Ul C O O L d>•-•- - O•- L d d O r a Y N 7 3 > L Q U) 3 U) .N U E T O+ d L U)n d'0 L O +O: + L O d CNO Z O OQ N dv PO O d L d w d E C '0 'P O ul O 3 L O U •- L In O d 0 0+ O C + O U N,70+ L L C V)L U N ^ c a d + 0 WO7 N O d.- QO O C1 .0 d 0-0 00+ d O+ U U N O U) Q C v 0 Z d L Z L d O n u N P- d L C W U O+ L + J N m U C - > N O OX F L) O 0 o ' O= 7 d d ID•- 3 •- '0 C d•- d L 'O L d C E 'O d- d a - 3 'O d N F + O X x O.d CC W P^ d+ N O O d C C1 L \L V1 + C u O N^ O C N L �- + [ OQ•- L + W d L - C O (� Y L V1 T•- U w 7 d J L d O W 4)L J Y too C o d+ U)- o f x O d C + d L n U PN L•- '0 E L '0 Q d C 0 M C + d +y L0 V a pew 0 -AD V + ; O d d - L•- �0.- [ L d '00 � � 3:x� � c3 dY L + ddC wdC ; U7 C U + E O V) U U) d'O O 1 O L W O+ U)W C D o' d a wx ry O O 7 7 0 Z - T 0 dC - PcJ7 Ou1 d DLL 'ODOVCQ d WX+uld w )n L L- W aO •LN- dCao d [ C OO L P•- P O O O X D 0 U CCF + L • E .W 7 L d d L C E C_ C d•- + V) V)•- C ID O:+ L L U d 0 7 P L Y E= d L - O u1 N L O O C + u1 U L p p 0 o Q O O d - - d U 7 P F d C •x + C O 3= E O N O 3 O U^ C D O•- C U O - C O d+ O L Y N d C ._C) _ > U - C C 7 C C•U) O Q V) U C U L - d .n n E N O N D n^ •P'O O u1•P 301: O -.0- n O d + O•- (UD) O O d 0 T L � w d T C d 3 n- C •- L TV1 mo > d 3 O DCO O u u T d . 0 W+ 00•-W L '0 U)+•- C - ID L + E C - L O W v C1 O V1 N C - O N d C•- 7 0 d O d 7 C a n O C1 Ye �" d 3 d 7 p+ d N P-0 P C d + .0- d 0 DLL Q n'W L U L C C d L d O•- d w O L 0, 'O O L L C CO O L 0 O= * I IF 0 CC 1-D D CO U) O L 01 H +.- Q > 3 N•- + x N ti 0 N M Q U) \O O NxO _x+ +~'O w D O dID UO O 7 E a C D+ d L dNd O L 7 C J -L 4iffl� U d 7 0 OO x - U U)Q+C+ U 7 O 00 d +,Ow Y� - O 0r� N 70L + O Y O CC 00� a N n U d U + + C 3x d .-C +O O 0 0 0+ O D O V1 L P L U d V) L d w C L d)7 u o u O N O+ D N Z L OPCL N J . C + 7V O my u J+ +. SLI mN .21A P PUOL P N n 'O NLW n w TCC O.0 E Od J C ti _ UO O [ [ .[U. U O P LP 0=)0 O C+ U L)O L0 0 ti U N O O d d U L d) L•- O- O 0 0+ C O w 0 O V 4 I C [ O m d N I 0 X z C'- +M- N O O + PC v C O•- O d d N P ~ T C F O N L L \ W +i °D E R - PO d�- C d + 0 U C•TC C L Xx Ld 0 0 0 0 + D y O z _8 " �� E+ O C W^ SHEET 4 OF 29 z3% w Q00 Z m o v _ +u.0 o d Y u Traffic ~ m Qoz z a O d ° E 'o D(r v Vi Operations L o L o c 3 3 c Division F + o o O Poo O ,Texas Department of Transportation Standard V d L N Q L n I(1 m Ld C L d d O O 0 •E d a L -0 d ¢ O O +�_ + X W P00 C CO d o° -L + BARRICADE AND CONSTRUCTION o F )- - d O L•- [ N Z d W ID n d)N� L•_ 0: PROTECT LIMIT a O = L 4 N U a N O Y ~ - O C 2 U)J w otw YW U�- F 3 Y OQ--'O L L Z 0 2 d 5 w 0Z �'`im ww Q L U O + Gx w 3O �LLp N 44) 0) 3 700X0 q C C Lu-_� U MC ��� - 14 1 w xz w 2 a0 `o¢ F •PNL w-xU W P L f� w U O 3 O cr m z FILE: bcsm -14.dgr YN: TxDOT cu:TXDOT ow: TxDOT _H:TxDOT - 0 Z d Y C CONT SECT Job HIGHWAY V L•d N •�L) N O ©TXDOT November 2002 `-'3 0) REVISIONS W W N F J U N 9-07 8-14 DIST couNTv SHEET No. x— 7-13 O LL DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49DO-AD8D-B4029C332D38 TYPICAL CONSTRUCTION WARNING SIGN SIZE AND SPACING 1.1.6 �0 SPACING 0'0 SIZE o4) Z o Sign Posted Sign �o Conventional Expressway/ 0 Number Rood Freeway Speed Spacing LL or Series "X" O+N 3 L•t o 0^ prz CW2MPH (Apx.) L CW21 0 CW22 48" x 48" 48" x 48" 30 120 a a CW23 35 160 -t CW25 40 240 •-00 45 320 av CW1, CW29 50 400 0 0 CW7, CW8, 36" x 36" 48" x 48" C E CW99 CW119 55 5002 L�$ CW14 60 6002 c 0 o 65 7002 -&V) CW3, CW4, 2 W o CW59 CW69 48" x 48" 48" x 48" 70 800 ox d CW8-3, 75 9002 F CW109 CW1 2 80 10002 0 3 d4)L L>L +NO 00 n o For typical sign spacings On divided highways, expressways and freeways, see 3 o Port 6 of the "Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices" (TMUTCD) L O'er typical application diagrams or TCP Standard Sheets. >00 o nN o Minimum distance from work area to first Advance Warning sign nearest the y n o work area and/or distance between each additional sign. E D C O L Ow O D L L C O N OwL t WO Lo n0 .-x I +;L GENERAL NOTES o c 1. Special or larger size signs may be used as necessary. 41�W o. W a EW 2. Distance between signs should be increased as required t0 have 1500 feet d •-N'T advance warning. a L - J� L V D� '^ c 3. Distance between signs should be increased as required to have 1/2 mile o Y o or more advance warning. 4. 36" x 36" "ROAD WORK AHEAD" (CW20-1D)signs may be used on low volume crossroads at the discretion of the Engineer. See Note 2 under "Typical Location of Crossroad Signs". 5. Only diamond shaped warning sign sizes are indicated. 6. See sign size listing in "TMUTCD", Sign Appendix or the "Standard Highway Sign Designs for Texas" manual for complete list of available sign design sizes. SHEET 5 OF 29 Traffic OperatioDivision ns ,Texas Department of Transportation Standard BARRICADE AND CONSTRUCTION PROTECT LIMIT BC (2) - 14 FILE: bcsm-14.dgn EN: TOOT CK:TOOT ow: 70T TOOT © TOOT November 2002 CONT SECT Job HIGHWAY REVISIONS w w 9-07 8-14 F J [)IST rOLNTV SHEET N0. a 7-13 O LL DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 o O T D N O N� O 0 - C'0 N r + W-O U" Ws O } C D L Na O + U D O O L N N N Cc C 3 .%-0 N E O n O._ O O d O V C 30 Ln W N -° O L C O LN O O U c ° c ++O O L L O OV +EC n O N W N N N NO 7 a C V L O L L O 'co O O O > W P N Opo N T L 0D L n C O �• W•- C 7 3c W L.0 OE O + Dv wWE a D O 0C I Q c U °mN3 L} w L TL ^ O0L wO OO OO > O O .0 W" 3— ZwE C o c c Uo 7 no 00 NO U Cn No W-O n 0 2 0 O >tZ WUUOC I 3N Nom`},/ Nw N D -P O L DC W 70 W o .0 - c .4 o W oo NPO +-P PNm C P 7 N 7 Y•- ._ L 'O + nN X CL O.W W - L O U+ NJD O= N D }L� Q D•- - - N t _ N•- - •- c O 0) c •- U N W N .0 O D W N OW LZ n 7+ NN IIQOa �� O • -O LtN N t0 aNL ' WW W.0 W D- L >7 •- w--O OW Op a) 0 WO '}CN--a- Q. -+O 7+ W O 0 41 'PN CW L L O 'P L W L•- U N Uw 0.0 U) W u C V L P O L L U O}N '-= L +D > CD WO N CO O C C NL N PO0 N '00 N L NP N N PWC U CvL+- C C'LNC EWCyDO Ur •JE } I - Wp 'ON[1Q. ENCl+ +N �0 ;. _7 NN O N ON OEEO y W £ ' N0C N- O N N =+ 0 N C O 0 0+ L > U L -0 N W OO OO N L C OL W LN0 NQw O OL U O N L N N N C O nX '0 L7n y WC•- u On_ POW N N N CNLO } O ' ' O••JE-- wOPV +WV O N+ NN N o+ C 0 -c >N Da N0 70w _ C O_W 0 N O L •L • OO O -0 - 7 O P O D C C NC N O�N O X N C O 4) WNO N N W L C L LL L N 'O L � O O LOa wD CD NW Q. I L n L P u 3 N U N N N O N O L O N -D C + g O o o -o Vv no W+ c u U - N 'uc0 u _ Z 3c ;c 'WN wcC Na T CO LW LC Cn NO• - NdN w Y p o 0 00o c= - Pc o NNQQ ;)n n �0 W`p D Q a � T•- T O N L T N O w+ _ W L- 0 E O W W U +N O J t1 •' O L v I J O U O E O 0 n n O� O N .W N 7 N P 0 8'O N C N O'O OU �� L y Q O E N C E E oNl P•- O P+ N 0 L•-N _o} _oma D N _ou U •- C_ ; •- ;_o L 3 N WN o+L TWC NC O •� D C 7 W 7E N+ Qc M J� 'L OCD 'C d L JLL d JN NY EDN a+•- ° �•� L }r +^^ I W NO NC O.O )L NN OgO L+ F n0 )000 N30 W t } ` V - Z w u CCE Nn CCL O QmUO W N3 ON C I ¢ 0 N M V N 10 n aD pi c N, W s O W too 0- 0 - C O L 4u n�O 04 L / ws_ T W CID V '0 } Q f•�// V ph5wE[fi�• L(N^� }}}S •YaQ�) •pp'�. II 2Q N WN Li •N_+p O Jn•Y O•mN- aOO }CN•-ON3U} LCO °` � 'ViDWPN> tiW°oWW oO ` L ; J ' N ' ° +0..c 21 c L D mT E c a � c oo >3LwC a o+L W N LWUO c 'O 0.0O0 , U=) LF+ O W } O -ON O N N O O � L (A A DC L L 0O L N N > O O N e ° + ooa o a 4) NDC > +'O 0 O C O C CC N Z N W NC N ODO CO O U �} L 7EN 0 N+w0 DcQC c c 00 .0 N 0- Pov8 10 go a� OZ to 1WNaL 7+ 'O N Nw + O V } C O N C as Da3 ' C P O CY O O O C N O NW L O>3e 0 L D P W a 0- NN03 7N' >TN 7 N W L D O V a L pCcnV> N' WcEW >, L M O N O U�/dli0 O CO% N •O �' 4(V� WJ a O3 cw vN+Na O N aT+cN + Lp} W O W 0N} Q. oduu O OZ O E'_ O C N > N CO N Y O+ J L L F N L N N3. 3C °0CN2 4) OO p N L aY . LO O $o (f) W O O ) 00L WO LP LN 'O Q L NO LO C 0^, 7 L + i +�L° •-3 +aW L noo 0.C m N ° _O ° CO W N--- N �L+TL_ O L , L+ NWWLO- c NL0U LL L LLJ +- O + C WDOO D o C W ; O w P >L C O T 3 o 3 N L T W O Q E I w U N U`0 -pO8p II �-q( H VQ •- N•D- '+0P ••n---+O OLJ aa L W '0l L0+WN•N- •DP W O C N PC Z 0 aWTLL +n N O O o L > o Z P W N'O N W N - L TO J O L n O } Fa n LN L COLO Nw L +O VL L aO•- C D + C ZND•P \L >LO 7 N} L +- O N O W N N N L C W+N0. L O+ N N + O U poEN>- : L L } O C L O L N CCGO �• J N O J'O O+ c Q W N a•- N n•- N NIa SHEET 6 OF 29 Traffic Operations 8 , Division Texas Department of Transportation Standard I � N - 5 I BARRICADE AND CONSTRUCTION a WORK ZONE SPEED LIMIT � I — ' �> 7 BC (3) - 14 �8� tZ �_ FILE: bcsm-14.dgr EN: ow: mmCC.' yWj3O ©TXDOT November 2002 CONT SECT Job HIGHWAY •c o wt I 4 eEv)sIoNs N O F n V 9-07 8-14 Q 7-13 DIST COLN7Y SHEET NO. -- I D LL DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49DO-AD8D-B4029C332D38 TYPICAL MINIMUM CLEARANCES FOR LONG TERM AND INTERMEDIATE TERM SIGNS 12' min. ROAD ROAD ROAD minimus ROAD WORK o.o WORK WORK from WORK AHEAD w� AHEAD 06' AHEAD curb AHEAD oC ami d c0 O N 0 p ** M P X L N 7 — — L L _ 7.0' min. a > 0'-6' 9.0' max. i 6' or 7.0' min, 7.0' min. 0 0 0 9.0' sax. 6.0' min. Z' E greater 9.0' max. o .+w +_ av i i av iri ri an Pavedj//�-i�� ��j Paved shoulder shou I der and \ O 10 d L L L N -XWhen placing skid supports on unlevel ground, +ne leg post leng+ns must be adjusted so the sign appears straight and plumb. 0-0 0 Objects shall NOT be placed under skids as a means of leveling, a'c 0 my o ** When plaques ore placed on duol-leg supports, they should be attached to the upright nearest the travel Ione. N E°Supplemental plaques (advisory Or distance) should not cover the surface Of the parent sign. c 0777 O c Support ATTACHMENT FOR SIGN SUPPORTS w U.I.— shop not Attachment to wooden Supports w0 a n" protrude will be by bolts and nuts °i-d , I above sign or screws. Use TxDOT's or II manufacturer's recommended L L procedures for attaching sign 71 L>L { I substrates t0 Other types Of o u Support Sign supports a+ I I 5holl not ROAD / ° protrude / r 7// 'Di 3 o I I above sign r I NV1 I�f� r l Nails Shp I I NOT 44)n L I I I I UV©1111 W I I OR be o I I paled. >00 I I I Each sign ono I'I IAUOMEAM Shall be attached E Sign supports shall o t o extend more than LF77-7 directly to the s i gn o°` t/2 way up the7SUDDor t. MU I t i p l e owc back of the sign �� Signs Shall not be 0 t substrate. joined or spliced by we OFRONT ELEVATION any means. Wood •-x� Wood, metol or +tea Fiber Reinforced Plastic Supports Shall not be TL o c Splicing embedded perforated square metal tubing in order to extend post extended or repaired 4 0 oheight will only be allowed when the splice is mode using four boifs, two by Splicing or w 7 E a above and two below the spice point. Splice must be located entirely behind 4)N0 the sign substrate, not near the base of the support. Splice insert lengths SIDE ELEVATION other neons. �'-L should be at least 5 times nominal post size, centered on the splice and Wood N a� of at least the some gouge material. -w 0 Y O STOP/SLOW PADDLES 1. STOP/SLOW paddles ore the primary method to control traffic by floggers. The STOP/SLOW paddle size should be 24" x 24" -17 as detailed below. 2. When used at night, the STOP/SLOW paddle shall be 10" 10" ot. rTOP/SL f1epaddiZed. O 3. STOP/SLOW paddles may be attached si a Staff with a minimus �O length Of 6' t0 the bottom Of the Sign, 24'• 8"a 24"4. Any lights incorporated into the STOP or SLOW paddle faces0 shall only be aS specifically described in Section 6E.03Hand Signaling Devices in +he TMUTCD. ye.. CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR MAINTAINING PERMANENT SIGNS 24" k24' WITHIN THE PROJECT LIMITS Background - Red Background - Orange 1. Permanent signs are used to give notice of traffic laws or regulations, toll Legend & Border - White Legend & Border - Block attention to conditions that are potentially hazardous to traffic Operations, show route designations, destinations, directions, distances, services, points of interest, and other geographical, recreational, or cultural information, SHEET 7 OF 29 Drivers proceeding through a work zone need the some, if not better route guidance as normally installed on o roadway without construction. Traffic 2. When permanent regulatory or warning signs conflict with work zone conditions, Operations remove Or cover the permanent signs until the permanent sin message matches Texas Department of Transportation Division 9 9 g p p Standard the roadway condition. 3. When existing permanent Signs are moved and relocated due to construction purposes, they Shall be visible t0 motorists at 011 times. 4. If existing Signs are t0 be relocated On their Original Supports, they Shall be BARRICADE AND CONSTRUCTION installed On croShworthy bases as Shown On the SMD Standard Sheets. The signs Shall meet the required mounting heights shown on the BC Sheets or the SMD TEMPORARY SIGN NOTES Standards. This work should be paid for under the appropriate pay item for relocating existing signs. 5. If permanent Signs ore to be removed and relocated using temporary Supports, the Contractor Sha11 use croshworthy, Supports OS shown on the BC sheets or the �� _ CWZTCD. The Signs Shall meet the required mounting heights shown on the14 BC Sheets or the SMD Standards during construction. This work should be paid FILE: bcsm-I4.dgn EN: 1,DOT CK:TXDOT ow: TxDOT cK:TxDOT for under the appropriate pay item for relocating existing Signs. 6. Any Sign or traffic control device that is Struck or damaged by the Contractor ©TxDOT November 2002 CONT SECT Ioe HIGHWAY Or his/her construction equipment Shall be replaced as soon as possible by the uevIsIoNs J Contractor t0 ensure proper guidance for the motorists. This will be Subsidiary 9-07 B-14 DIST COLNTv SHEET No. M to Item 502. 7-13 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49DO-AD8D-B4029C332D38 GENERAL NOTES FOR WORK ZONE SIGNS 1. Contractor shall install and maintain signs in a straight and plumb condition and/or as directed by the Engineer. 2. Wooden sign posts shall be painted white. 3. Barricades shall NOT be used as sign supports. 4. All signs shall be installed in accordance with the plans or as directed by the Engineer. Signs shall be used to regulate, worn, and >c guide the traveling public safely through the work zone. o° 5. The Contractor may furnish either the sign design shown in the plans or in the "Standard Highway Sign Designs for Texas" (SHSD). The wL Engineer/Inspector may require the Contractor t0 furnish other work zone Signs that are Shown in the TMUTCD but may have been omitted °> from the plans. Any variation in the plans shall be documented by written agreement between the Engineer and the Contractor's +o Responsible Person. All changes must be documented in writing before being implemented. This con include documenting the changes in o a y the Inspector's TxDOT diary and having both the Inspector and Contractor initial and date the agreed upon changes. L.0 6. The Contractor Shall furnish Sign Supports listed in the "Compliant Work Zone Traffic Control Device List" (CWZTCD). The Contractor 3+ shall install the sign support in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. If there is o question regarding installation 0 0 procedures, the Contractor Shall furnish the Engineer a Copy of the manufacturer's installation recommendations so the Engineer con Z+0 verify the correct procedures Ore being followed. a 7. The Contractor is responsible for installing signs on approved supports and replacing signs with damaged or crocked Substrates and/or damaged or marred reflective sheeting as directed by the Engineer/Inspector. a n B. Identification markings may be shown only on the back of the sign substrate. The maximum height of letters and/or company logos used y'N for identification Shall be 1 inch. 2C 0 9. The Contractor shall replace damaged wood posts. New or damaged wood sign posts shall not be spliced. IQLL' DURATION OF WORK (as defined by the 'Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices" Port 6) ow L Lrn 1. The types of sign supports, sign mounting heighf,fhe size of signs, and the type of sign substrates con vary based on the type of 0,c o work being performed. The Engineer is responsible for Selecting the appropriate Size Sign for the type of work being performed. The C m o Contractor is responsible for ensuring the sign support, sign mounting height and substrate meets manufacturer's recommendations in LEy D regard to croshworthiness and duration Of work requirements. N 7 L 0. Long-term Stationary - work that occupies a location more than 3 days. c vi° b. Intermediate-term stationary - work that Occupies a location more than one daylight period up to 3 days, Or nighttime work lasting CA°t more than one hour. N. a c. Short-term stationary - daytime work that Occupies a location for more than 1 hour in 0 single daylight period. ox d d. Short duration - work that occupies a location up to 1 hour. d i-L e. Mobile - work that moves continuously or intermittently (stopping for up to approximately 15 minutes.) v SIGN MOUNTING HEIGHT COL . The bottom of Long-term/Infermmediafe-ferm signs shall be of least 7 feet, but not more than 9 feet, above the paved surface, except +00 as shown for supplemental plaques mounted below Other signs. ow C 2. The bottom of Short-term/Short Duration Signs shall be a minimum of 1 foot above the pavement Surface but no more than 2 feet above 0 o the ground. m s o 3. Long-term/Intermediate-term Signs may be used in lieu of Short-term/Short Duration signing. L a,, 4. Short-term/Short Duration Signs shall be used only during daylight and Shall be removed of the end of the workday or raised t0 >o o appropriate Long-term/Intermediate Sign height. 0>0 L a 5. Regulatory signs shall be mounted of least 7 feet, but not more than 9 feet, above the paved surface regardless of work duration. .�oa0 SIZE OF SIGNS Dc o 1. The Contractor shall furnish the sign sizes shown on BC (2) unless otherwise shown in the plans or as directed by the Engineer. L°` SIGN SUBSTRATES D LL 0 o a) 1. The Contractor Shall ensure the Sign substrate is installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for the type Of sign w F o Support that is being used. The CWZTCD lists each Substrate that con be used on the different types and models of Sign Supports. Loo 0 2. "Mesh" type materials Ore NOT on approved Sign substrate, regardless of the tightness of the weave. L F+ 3. All wooden individual sign panels fabricated from 2 or more pieces shall hove one or more plywood cleat, 1/2" thick by 6" wide, + D fastened to the bock Of the Sign and extending fully across the sign. The cleat Shall be attached t0 the back of the Sign using wood D o Screws that d0 not penetrate the face of the Sign panel. The Screws Shall be placed On both sides Of the splice and spaced of 6" 4, o centers. The Engineer may approve other methods Of splicing the sign face. rra0+ REFLECTIVE SHEETING W 7E0 4, N 1. All signs shall be refroreflecfive and constructed of sheeting meeting the color and retro-reflectivity requirements of DMS-8300 r for rigid signs or DMS-8310 for roll-up Signs. The web address for DMS Specifications is Shown on BC(1). N a+ 2. White sheeting, meeting the requirements of DMS-8300 Type A, shall be used for signs with a white background. o Y o 3. Orange sheeting, meeting the requirements of DMS-8300 Type BFL or Type CFL, Shall be used for rigid signs with orange backgrounds. SIGN LETTERS 1. All sign letters and numbers shall be clear, and open rounded type uppercase alphabet letters OS approved by the Federal Highway Administration (FHWA) and as published in the "Standard Highway Sign Design for Texas" manual. Signs, letters and numbers SholI be of first class workmanship in accordance with Deportment Standards and Specifications. REMOVING OR COVERING 1. When sign messages may be confusing or do not apply, the Signs Shall be removed or completely covered. 2. Long-term stationary or intermediate stationary signs installed on square metal tubing may be turned away from traffic 90 degrees when the Sign message is not applicable. This technique may not be used for Signs installed in the median of divided highways or near any intersections where the Sign may be Seen from approaching traffic. 3. Signs installed on wooden skids Shall not be turned of 90 degree angles to the roadway. These signs should be removed or completely covered when not required. 4. When signs are covered, the material used shall be opaque, Such as heavy mil black plastic, or Other materials which will cover the entire Sign face and maintain their opaque properties under automobile headlights at night, without damaging the Sign Sheeting. 5. Burlap shall NOT be used to cover signs. 6. Duct tope or other adhesive material shall NOT be affixed to o sign face. 7. Signs and anchor stubs shall be removed and holes backfilled upon completion of work. SIGN SUPPORT WEIGHTS 1. Where Sign Supports require the use of weights to keep from turning over, the use of Sandbags with dry, coheSionless Sand should be used. SHEET 8 OF 29 2. The Sandbags will be tied Shut to keep the Sand from Spilling and to maintain a constant weight. Traffic 3. Rock, concrete, iron, steel or other solid objects shall not be permitted Operations for use as sign support weights. Texas Department of Transportation Division 9 9 p p Standard 4. Sandbags Should weigh a minimum of 35 lbs and o maximum of 50 lbs. 5. Sandbags shall be made of a durable material that tears upon vehicular impact. Rubber (such as fire inner tubes) shall NOT be used. 6. Rubber ballasts designed for channelizing devices should not be used for BARRICADE AND CONSTRUCTION ballast on portable Sign Supports. Sign Supports designed and manufactured with rubber bases may be used when shown on the CWZTCD Iisf. TEMPORARY SIGN NOTES 7. Sandbags Sh011 only be placed along or laid over the base Supports of the traffic control device and shall not be suspended above ground level or hung with rope, wire, chains Or other fasteners. Sandbags Shall be placed along the length of the skids to weigh down the sign support. B. Sandbags shall NOT be placed under the skid and shall not be used to level BC (4) - 1 4 sign supports placed on slopes. FLAGS ON SIGNS FILE: bosm-14.dgn oN: TxDOT cu:TxDOT ow: TxDOT _K:TxDOT HIGHWAY 1. Flags may be used to draw attention to warning signs. When used the flog ©TxDOT November 2002 CONI sECF oe shall be 16 inches square or larger and shall be orange or fluorescent kEv's�oNs red-OrFlags on a in color. Fshall not be allowed to cover an 9-07 8-14 g g y portion Of o sF COLMY SHEEI o. ao LL the sign face. 7-13 0 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 9 sq. ff. or less- 10mm extruded ° fhinwoll plastic Welds to Start on sign only opposite sides o going in opposite o•- directions. Minimum N w L weld, do not rc back fill puddle. +O C a weld o N L.0 ° weld weld starts here O+N starts 0 L} 1 3/4" x 1 3/4" x 11 foot here weld zE 12 go post T° (DO NOT SPLICE) +w +-o °•-c a 1 3/4" galy. round y'N± with 5/16" holes o N or 1 3/4" x 1 3/4" 2.5' a L square tubing ow L L N a Orn Upright must C o C E telescope to 'L N a provide 7' height 48" W above pavement -2" x . C x L 48" 12 ga C N O -N .m°N upright C + W — 2.. NIn N O x N x ti L 5' 5' �a.� SINGLE LEG BASE +WO Side View TNC Din of angle D+ - needed to 1 match sideSlOpe m 3 0 36" L UI >O O ULL N n o 16 sq. ft. or less of any rigid sign '-TE substrate listed in section J.2.d of L 0 the CWZTCD, except 5/8" plywood. D L L 1/2" plywood is allowed. C O N OwL N o° /'Sign 0 3/8" x 3" gr. 5 bolt N o o 4" (2 Der Support) joining +i- .0 D panel and supports TL I D O O D N;C M NO+ W 7 E N _ N N N N 0 3/8 X 3" gr. J F•-r 5 bolt D+ — 1 3/4 x 1 3/4 x 129" Q Y O 1 3/4 " x t 3/4 " x 129" thole to hole) (hole t0 hole) 12 ga. Support N t2 ga. square \ telescopes into sleeve perforated - tubing upright 0 o ro 0000000 .... 3" 1 3/4 x 1 3/4 x 52" (hole to hole) 12 ga. square perforated tubing diagonal brace nCompletely welded 2" x 2" x 59" around tubing 77 (hole to hole) 12 ga. perforated 1 3/4 x 1 3/4 x 32" (hole tubing skid 2" x 2" x 8" to hole) 12 go. square perforated - v 1(hole to hole)gosquare 2 . tubing cross brace v perforofetl ....'........................... tubing sleeve O 3/8" X 4-1/2 gr. welded to skid _ _ 60" ;,O 5 BOLT ITYP.) �."i�0 N . .......................... - N �I� \ N \ ��� O- ___ - N N 3 SHEET 9 OF 29 ° Traffic Q}7/16" Divisions ,Texas Department of Transportation Standard BARRICADE AND CONSTRUCTION TYPICAL SIGN SUP'P'ORT 32' BC (5) - 14 1YISM-14.dgn YN: 1,DOT OK:TXDDT ow: TxDOT _K:TxDOT SKID MOUNTED PERFORATED SQUARE oTXDOT November 200, EON, SECT IOB HIGHWAY REVISIONS STEEL TUBING SIGN SUPPORTS 99-03 B-14 O LL DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49DO-AD8D-B4029C332D38 Maximus 24" 2x6 Maximum 4x4 12 Sq. ft, of Q 21 sq. ft, of wood �e, sign face A-`skid sign face L post II 2x6 2x6 °CC n n II 'w I I I I 2x�a 27I I OL> I I I I 4x4 +o wood 60" 4x4 C j post 4x4 bIOCk 3+ 72" block 0 0' o 4x4 Length of Skids may Z+o wod be increased for .+w See BC(4) Tod post additional stability. +-o for Sign 2x4 x 40" Too a 0-; 30" height 24^ See BCM -+ �c� requirement 2x6 for sign 24" x brace OQ 0T height C)w L requirement 3/8" bolts w/nuts !��or 3/8" x 3 1/2" aLo( min,) lag 0,C E screws ID 40' 36.. Front 4x4 block 4x4 block C N o Front side Side -N W - SKID MOUNTED WOOD SIGN SUPPORTS C S NN °�W LONG/INTERMEDIATE TERM STATIONARY - PORTABLE SKID MOUNTED SIGN SUPPORTS❑ - •U WL y dL 31, Sign Sign Sign Sign +0 o Post Post Post Post OU TNC o g e e oo { m n o y Jt{oc S J<{oc S-, e �a Jt oc >o o d OSA GAO G<°o °U a + q• 9.. 4.. ?99„ 4„ max. N o Max.-T E Max. desirable 'I desirable O L L 34" min, in Optional I; 0 C 0m qg^ strong Soils, reinforcing owc N`-o minimus 55" min, in sleeve l• Bose o I� 34" min, in N c o weak soils. (1/2" larger See the CWZTCD Post -x+ strong soils, ,C� than Sign for embedment, + .0 55" min, in post) x 18" I n o weak soils. o a41 C Anchor Stub �No+ (1/4" larger Anchor Stub w D E N than sign (1/4" IOrger d N N p05t) ; than Sign J C post) V C+ t!� C •-k o Y o OPT ON 1 OPTION 2 OPTION 3 (Direct Embedment) (Anchor Stub) (Anchor Stub and Reinforcing Sleeve)) WING CHANNEL PERFORATED SQUARE METAL TUBING Lop-spl ce/base bolted anchor GROUND MOUNTED SIGN SUPPORTS Refer to the CWZTCD and the manufacturer's installation procedure for each type sign support. The maximum sign square footage shall adhere to the manufacturer's recormlendotion. Two post installations con be used for larger signs. 1 1/2" Nominal Number Maximum Minimum Drilled Dia.(typ) Post of Sq. feet of Soil Hole(s) 4, 0 Size Posts Sign Face Embedment Required H k--7 4 x 4 1 12 36" NO 6" 1 g„ SHEET 10 OF 29 4 x 4 2 21 36" NO Traffic 4 x 6 1 21 36" YES 0 Operations 4 x 6 2 36 36" YES 4" ,Texas Department of Transportation Standard WOOD POST SYSTEM FOR GROUND Direction MOUNTED SIGN SUPPORTS of Traffic BARRICADE AND CONSTRUCTION TYPICAL SIGN SUP'P'ORT ❑ See BC(4) for definition of "Work Duration." pp C, w Wood sign posts MUST be one piece. Splicing will BC (5) — 1 `� NOT be allowed. Posts shall be painted white. FILE: bcsm-14.don °N. T,DOT CK:TOOT ow: TxDOT TOOT ©TxDOT November 2002 CONT SECT Ioe HIGHWAY ww Q See the CWZTCD for the type of sign substrateg 07 gu VISIONS a� that can be used for each approved sign support. 14 7-13 °1ST `°LNTv °. O LL DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 WEDGE ANCHORS >,C Both steel and plastic Wedge Anchor Systems as shown C° on the SMD Standard Sheets may be used as temporary 04) sign supports for signs up to 10 square feet of sign ,,> face. They may be set in concrete or in sturdy soils CU d if approved by the Engineer. (See web address for °L "Traffic Engineering Standard Sheets" on BC(1)). O+N 3L+ 00 Z• E TLO aD} OTHER DESIGNS UU C D Om oyL MORE DETAILS OF APPROVED LONG/INTERMEDIATE °" AND SHORT TERM SUPPORTS CAN BE FOUND ON THE L L N C E CWZTCD LIST. SEE BC(1 ) FOR WEBSITE LOCATION. —00 N Q D C N O •-N C O N C + W.- 0 0- O 7 GENERAL NOTES - •U 1. Nails may be used in the assembly of wooden sign +a o supports, but 3/8" bolts with nuts or 3/8" x 3 1/2" OU D lag screws must be used on every joint for final 0,s o connection. C o go 2. No more than 2 sign posts shall be placed within a N ao 7 ft. circle, except for specific materials noted on the -rE CWZTCD List. D C O LO Ow DLL 3. When project is completed, all sign supports and °tet foundations shall be removed from the project site. "o° we y This will be considered subsidiary to Item 502. o _X+ +~D D O w °41D �W o. W DEW d N N a L•-'- J� L V C+ 0C -k O Y O SHEET 11 OF 29 Traffic Operations Division ,Texas Department of Transportation Standard BARRICADE AND CONSTRUCTION TYPICAL SIGN SUP'P'ORT BC (5) - 14 FILE. bcsm-14.d9n EN: 100T OK:TXDOT SW: 100T _K:TOOT ©TxDOT November 2002 CONT SECT Loe TIGIWAv REVISIONS w w 9-07 B-14 F J DIST COUNTY SHEET N0. a 7-13 O LL DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 J Z m L O Q � Q z J H 3 p C m >w ~ a CC LL>j d N Z N W> N> w o T C ¢ U z x w N 3 ¢ J Q. L L -- C O m 7 z J >m a 7 Z d¢O LL J N W Z J 7 U N N N n 2 Z O J O m Z O m Q >W 2 m O Z L O•y m Q-dZ O LYm�QW2J La�m2 FF O -O.WQ W� LWO N �� C + a V M Z Z a w V N V 1 V)V 1 V 1`-'V N V 1 V N a 7>3 3 3 3`-'3 3 Q LL • 7 C m O N C _j Q �--� O o C > _ O LN7 2 O a N �. + (� } W Z Lo N ENE O+N d a N O '0 3 + N E qC y Q S C a N N 3 + d' L C C C N O N 7 > a E + W H O L L L._ O N 7 O L 7 C L L C N N O J C N d O P J O N N L O O O O CC U N J N a 7 > O 0 2 a N N `7 Z 2 E m - a c D V D N a L L O 3•- - 0 M - C N+ O O Z C O L.L } } L O O d' L N N L 0 0 Z C L•-- Q L L a N O O.O N 0- N a L O O N N O a E+ �C a L 7 > J Q++ N N a N L m w > N yy N V•C C L D a - �O N C C L L L L O L 0-'- 7 7 N L C- E 7 O O N E Q L L a•- N N+ - 2 W Z N } O� L • 'IM M S 0 Z Z Z 0- ¢¢N N N N a°N N N N----- L 7` 7>3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Vl rr O - _ U-C L Q N N EP U C 7 V 7 mLL=2 C •O a •-O N W Z C W LL W O _ N a +Q N Q W 2 "' 2 m > W W Q In U 0 CC N O 10 Lm Q W BOLL Y N N> m CC O C C C) L N W N > Z LL 2 J O: Z O W W H 0- or `N 0 + J r Q m m 2 J J J d N 3- 0, X r x 2 O P m U W N>m Z O C Z Z Z O W W a s X U 3 r-N N> r V f u L U O W O M. 0 O CO a uJ>w J¢Q� o -w0 L�MZXX XO¢3¢Q.40 3 ¢Z�ULL LLZ3Q D Z LL y u C E QQ QmmmUU U XmmW•-'W wwwwxLL LLLL LL x x x x x 7JJJ J� ,_NO E O Z D a N w L Q'O N C US W W - X 7 O t7 C._ a22 C00 w U L '0 N = O J�~ N O -N V) _ PON Q C N N C N U •L O C tl (J LL N + + C +_ a O >w C _O m m o C a- N J C w07 O. 0 0 +a O a J O+a m N N 7 O N 0 > C 0 uO O LL E N m N 7 L V U C 00 N 3 N 0 7 7 V C C O N O - Q Z LL 2 E N a O X N O O O 7 Z 7 C C U N N N N O O U N Q O O-J C - _ X ti L O N C N OC > N L L L+ O N N C N N LL L O O a a 0- O N E •- J V N T•O W LL L) Fm NL 7 N ON aN 70 D ONN Q 330E L U 3`- L N+ L+ OC ��aa - + N N C+-a C N O Vl 0 Z+ L L L L L X N N a O O.0•- C L O- U++ N N C 3 P 0' 7 7 > V O U+ N N 7•- C C C N O+ N N y Q Q X N N•- N N L 7 w C" C 3•- a._ a Cr d'W P N L N ; U- > N O L O N Of Q' N O O O E C X X X O L L L o O•- N•- O C+ 7 N N 0 0 0 O N W N C N NNL QQ Qmmm UU UQ UmmW WW WW WWXLLLLLLLL222>22-- JJJJ�L 0y ZDa- L 0 >, } L>L a s U LL Q + O N +O U 0 0 _ - TNC - - D+•- Z U Z a U oE .0L L 0 N 3 0 = J'--'0 `N n a C w N LU •DN + OQ L N+ fN V E •- L - `- NO CP a --Q YNL•LO- LLI (nWUa O m L NNO •UaNN N L a X- a >0 0 0 x C W Aa C } + • NU LN O N C- 3 0 CN O N C C' D N anQoQ O LO O N WE J > L + O } N C + } +7 N O N CLLJ aO ON CO O L Q OL L 0 O O N PVL L N N E O O CO C ON QD L OWNN O 7O L O N N L a P U QE 7 O L C L 0 OWL •E NT•U O D N C N O O O L O L NN O NCIV 3 C } VfL N La U N L N M N O Nti O a C N V0 C 3 V N N P w N o 0 0NL03 O N a o L 3 N O N 7 T Q C a+O O 0 N P Z > LN +O� .0 La O3'0 J C L NmO N NL LV C CM NW O LCLL._X+ 7 0Q ON N O C N N'O N P J L n - M_j-Jut FN.N_N tNWa{CQma(o/>•l) ----\LNOCP-•-NVDCNO-.•UaNEcNNN3-'a-++LO-=LL'•`OQNpN-++CN- +OX a-+JN•`+N7-�•-N-wONL LN3- CN7- C -•N•-LT-N wN Q+Y A+C7-aNNry•+-a- N aD+N- +3+NO•E- -N-D-N w-+ONEEN UONCQ++-O C`+-•N--N--+C3 QEN7 =LNNU•-N>-`-- LNNNQTT- •`+L-OO .O w D x NO N N N N C O C No 0 OO AD. + CNCNL N >+O O O N- O L N C Ory P L E - L L L P L NL 0 N �V�O LLIN P - a N C N•- N T- U L 3 C J CN T> O NC N \ O N O N --W m - uL ONa N E OOE NNQ N0 L N Oa - N O O C L E W x 7 C NO C N O O OO 7} 00 C• 3C N O O 000 LQ a+ OLLC LNa+ NOC C W O C OW 0 L O 7 E O O LC O U O L ON L O + O LC N O NCO O N N N C O N O0 Nd+NddC OdNO NP >' N0 LZ CO+ 0OOO y+ r- N O N -O L - NOU3 0 N +'O L C N O 2 OLOa + N L V a7 N P LNO- o N - oOC C E • - PD Q•PCONNNE7 O�o t P- ON EO OLOC O N Lm YO L CO O LL•- + + Q C + oNaNNC0CEPZNVAL tO41 0,0 N OO NO- O L L OQ 'O N LUQ+ D N N .0 0} U yP OOC G)O+- Z O= 0- Vc O C N L L N C L C N O N CN 7+ L C O 0 NLOO O NO Oaya0 N U•C N L O OO L > N C N aO O^ C C N3 C L L E N 4)-0L O O NV N WL NVa FNLN mCPO E } 7OL PCPOCNCO NCO•NOaaL0 LLJ 10 L•-N L N O NO LP- O NN O OLON NL C LO LC N T W wO• O OL O+ L PLC N L aO N N+ YC E C NZ LLW ON7O L J U NC - W E 7a UPN 0aN0PN NP 0)W._ L > C7n0N 7 7 L N L NN - E L N•NaW N N Q P U O - 0 0 7 D TL L Q -} NNDa NOLN D+ 0 WO - N NO - 7T M. }L TN N + CL NL w N O V N}aN U X m L C E OLL N T•N L EONN L UL NIL NN NNLCOa C N00 DUP 4)._.0 W } Lo QNNN L 7 o Q n a N - L L C C \ mZ N0- 0L7 }• } 700 - PPLC NE OL + N C - OoNNO L L X C 0 U`� � � o � ONPNaNx N a LCC0 N 3 0 N7 0 NP Naa N N3NN03a+ LONNL E +W + X(, •dO L + N- N N - L N % `a - L ED NOC NO & - W C N P P C Pw N L0 C-L .0 L O o U 0 > U .0P7- 0 o ON OQNi7J W P 0O L 0P E + Cw0+ a+ CO+d - - JDl + N N N X O C 7+ N Q C 7 C Q C C O C N N L CaoNN EE N E N CO N•P O N+ NO ID-•N O N .0 M 0 >+a V M L OC (V (D N w- UN OL OLNQF O OL O O C OL FL DuC L O C O NwOV O Um M 3 am N m m m O m0aOa7 0 w--C LNN a D CZ C 0 C N 7 d �i ri a vi 19; I- co m o �i �i a vi �G j 3 v 3- 3 C Q Li N M Q J. SHEET 12 OF 29 _ Traffic N Operations .4 w Division C-)u� ,Texas Department of Transportation Standard ¢m J W J c Q �CL w o U Q Qoz BARRICADE AND CONSTRUCTION PORTABLE CHANGEABLE W . W� W ,�MJ MESSAGE SIGN (PCMS) V)x¢ mw z CS ¢ z-m a --=z u �w=u� BC �6� - 14 O x W-LL Z�m N Q z M N x � FILE: bcsm-14.(JOY oN: TxDOT cu:TOOT ow: TxDOT _K:Tx DOT w O m� x�u-O ©TXDOT November 2002 CONT SECT .IOe HIG WAY 3 LL Q 3 eEVISIONS w w 9-07 B-14 F J DIST COUNTY SHEET N0. ¢- 7-13 C LL DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 N + W U r Q N r N X X zX ~ O y y O J W Qa X X X ZQO Z X X�Q XN Q0a X W x ~ w axe c�z car rax w x~ x w,u z x L � TC ~ } Q U HXX Q a m� mM LXX Z� x x Z Q OXX Q. o •y N * Z X U O N OZ 4) C 104) N TC U J O O C C L N C U N Q r .0 Q).0 + )n N 0 q} O U) CP = _ _ = Z } 0 W O 0 . O E L N 7 C C 0 D D D D 0 O W W - C C 41 L LL Y - + W"a �Wa TWO_ OWa =WH W� 1J �2 W n L U C .dN N Q.0 } + C .� w�� .-W� .-w� �w� �¢x N� .-LL .-�Q a L,_ L O_ X a Z O- 0- C, 4) O L O'~ UJ 4) E O O 0 O J N J X Q Ln X "N X 0 N X J W Q 0 Q 0 3 U w a X X X 0 X N y) •O O L•- 010 b Z+L 3 E ¢ 10 W, C C > O L N'O Q) L DK 4) O L O ) U U c -0 0 D LL D D C O c0 0+ U• a o . U Q D•- 4)w V'O C ^ V U x L 00.- ]•- L N•- U C 7 O + X O z H N N x H x x X X J N O O W O-c O E 00 Q N 2•- l V O•-L N + N H x O=N X W NX�- X O X XOX L v L10 L�N D V J Q� LL -i zX� dNw X~ X N~� N c__ O o�a ow 0.0 a N Z O LL m4 x x LL W O N n poEw+�cM._ c'o O 0 N J U � LL 0 c 0 7¢ C_ U V) 0 C O �� _ C N O 0 F J O O N c LL c NC) 7 F O O O O O Q Q )D �uE7�D a Z •O 0 V O O 4)w0 2 - �N O Q N C Z W ? z O y0y v s o L o c L (v O W H X�-- y 2 W X 2 N H N 01 W = M J x d+�L 02D .w O d W.- 1^ + �Z2 W X X X X� W X U�Y Ur Q a 00 W U�W Q ND ON U cU O 7 N U M z N X W W X F N X -0 U W< a 0 0 Z J N SOY -W L H O M O Q) C L N N O X�, a J -H L T•L 3_ Tx E U O Xon 0 X(D W N w LL J y O x W�0 D Q LL O: X w W N W 0 D Q LL a' (� 0 0 a o �w C•_ Q)F L U 1 4- N X X�O N Z �-0 H w 0 d 2 Z ;. O�c 3 D c m O+ + O 0 W 0 H V) O L O n Q 4).?g w o t--� O ° L Q1 U L J K Own x KQ)aQ O- ,00 C W O D+•_ cc O X Z o L U L W F M F X p X= V) = N N W O H N DLL w H Dom" X X Y X Y Ur U LL W } w C 3 O C U o x X N r X U N x F Q U W Q O w V)2~ Q Z Z .^ H W X D a J 0 X D '--'Q L d) Vcc, U O Wim- WZW D" QN0 1D QLL� XW wax D~O N J >O LO L C L + 0 X x NON N W 0 c N X O M O L fA L) W a n E a +O a + D C O J/=� C * O J O T O O 3+ L O w Ii N O IOD+ D LD C D OC O N (1) 4) Y J w L U N O > U T OWL N� N� r u W U Z N ,Q. + N O- O + x LL �i LL Q J ~ Z N LL 2 LL D x W N H c - NtiO N N 0" WO ?iLL� NLLLL WW U0 O~N x~ J WLL fn Q Z 1 Q 3 X i X'--' Q)O y V L O O C N V Lo N J c X Q�X " ZLL X W ZX 70X 0 W Xr Zr c O•- O 0+ •- L•- a X o X O Q O Q Q X O X Q x •-%+ E cr W X J¢X �iOfX U=x ZJX a'�X QZa' N W J N c ~ O N N'O + 4) T +T'O ~ L CO a'X Z X X H x D X X LL D X FOU O Z C O D •3 D+ a 4)UO + V y+ •1._ ��+N 4f 4)LL 0. o tt) o w 7 E N C d O_0 O Q Q O 0O N N Y N } O Y Z Y j O N TD ;-0 0 C L 4)N 41 1 (n U N N U U H H X H U H () L.r 0 Q)- 0 T O O QL•-•- O ~ W LL JELL z -'LL w J LL a'W a' X LL •+J ly d c 4)L 4) O•- M}- E+ O•- ; J L L • L O LL (� O '--'LL N W O J O H X a LL Q V U+ �+ 7 O �iN Z DN ON+ + TN LL 4)� 0 a) CL J 4) U X cr X U LL X O X X X LL X V N'O E 0- N N+ L L U L t!) C Q 0. L Q X Q X UQfX �¢X O�X W Qa cox Q U x a77N wD p p C OL UN TD V 0 Y O Z O + O X J X ¢X W= X J U X O X O 2 X c N X E O 7 p L C O C D U C•- O Q /C� Q 0 LL X Z X X X a. N X � X ^a �r L T N V N++ OT 0 y c ' O u) O W O N O a L O C L E - o•- N owe - w� voicu:-0 (D.- } L w W + U o 4)w 010 C U L W L • + y a z Z d) 4) L U C w c 4) (D C D �/� Z X W V) H X Z N J 4)L L N 4) 4)•- O L O 6-00, O C C} w '-O >,>Y Ln C J U O W0� J0� V) w W 7 0 X0W -iLuW0LL W Na0 QLD we N+ a' L) 4iYa C Q O W 0 W LL W LL F-W Z W Cr 0�W X W J COW Z W =r C 4J L V D •- 7 0'0 U L a •CP 0 N �Q N J N m N =Z W Z D V) -N N om- N Q N x a N O C•4x O C•- Y d C L ZOO DO 20X O- QN XO �O� x O O ✓�� O"' c O o 4Di d0 70 44)) O = U ¢ r o J v o._ ^ W D OD:J OJX UJX JO Q JO X w J �--J OF J J W N Ii 0 LL U V)UX U X 0 J X U XUX U XUD L 0 V Oa 7 O .0 c 0 3 C L •• O LL N a' U W a' J,3 O N O\ N U -N EO 4) 7 4) O U )k p ac L U O C aU 7 7 0 0++ W n < n Eo > L 0\ •-L O 00 L Qj E V 0 c > 0c} c0O} U) 0 x N } X T 4) O N O J CE-0 L T r O W O X X X 0 0 W N 0 O Q D X O J C L x L y w c o w o 0 Z 0 Q W J 0 w x 0¢X N W W W W ~w cr D N w H W J e w X 0 w d 0�' Q Q•- 0 0LL O V C W L W N Q N 2 Q OX 2 zN H 2 UZ D �ZN �-N J W V) X>N a v a 0 w O a'OJ N M J U J OJ w J OJ Z J O Q J OJ w OJ <>0 X m 0 Q N LL U X U r U LL x U U U U ] U U Q U X U 0 O Q W Of SHEET 13 OF 29 Traffic Operations Division ,Texas Department of Transportation Standard BARRICADE AND CONSTRUCTION PORTABLE CHANGEABLE MESSAGE SIGN (PCMS BC (6) - 14 FILE: bcsm-14.dgr YN: TxDOT CK TOOT ow: TxDOT CK:TOOT ©TxDOT November 2002 CONT SECT Job HIGHWAY REVISIONS 9-07 B-14 F J [)I5T rOLNTV SHEET N0. Q 7-13 0 LL DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 •r N.n E +° L N � � N L C ° O• n•- ul- o 0C Nc S o E¢7 'C O L aE C N °L oLN� J mn> C L U Z LLIZ} G a+V3)oN> `o 3 +LQE c yV o N YL d 0Oa LC U V L OOa L.0 ' L 31 c U LLLL C � o+N oo+ + .Wy n N y . WO 0M NN 0 LL N VN 00 V°0c ~ mZw xw +o o L � E 'M I.- WOV WjNoS+ n+ao W W 0n0 Ld LL 1.- 0 Y0 ° ixcc in± O OL 0 N mi yc LQZ Z ix - Co 10 L O V Z N u _EaNDN 0LC9X c Ld z V) Tc C E Z m3W c 00 L a C WZQW O 11 / N O L LL a c a�N N LO LD O J w ON ox ++ 'O O V) t+O.l t / d 0 W c + w�- ° 0 3 MoD d n O U a x N xtiL - J �1 + N O �••L •U N 4)L O�D W 0 LL L a T00 0O ID O N Q N 3:0 N L N w O4° c uJ wN-~T L UEO m •N_ N ' w w Ca O ° L V n DNNCC • DT VO! O '}aNN Uw U ° ID O L L O +° O NN L C0 L VO N OL OO V L a DOw - O VL O ° C 00 0 C L NL DO L N V O N- L N L N N LL 0N CE N c O N WO U . a Va- w L + O owNL wC+ NN LL UO a 0.c LwO L ¢ p Nti 0 N N'3 C OmNC N O O•-D O N 7 V w O Lm G+O ON O L L c N c 0 - N O C axNUOpO E L O + NVWOE a V` L N+ a L N C V C N ) CL LwO a N0L O} N L O L O L O L > C L N - 0 LON Dw+a wC O.O VO)aN m aO-aE a•-C U L -3 aC N 3 •N- L m-OV) -LnN C Na O s 7 � C N N LN 0 O N LC NOVa O. N L O N V V L L L Vmw 7 E VC+ 7 w 7 VU D as'O Ua O L+ N DO- 0) N 3 L N 0 - O N NTOL O- O .N.N ) OVN) ID W 0 0 L aN L L ON > NLN C } O N Oa ON3 0♦V y CM O O -•O N DL A 7 N+- •- O N O 0 ' C-O011) c TO w CI P OLU n C L 0'0 N D C N+ 7+ LD- U 0) L C N O•- O O O O C •laDO - } TVN N -- OX•+ U C O O + N- O V) 0) aaw s - U - C- d--OUNLN•MN- V)� OL Nu1 Uar w NCL+ LLa >a DN-0N'-L wOV) Nd-O+L L O NL D O+ CU C Q } VOOO O- Nw TC mN }U > Od: N N-..0 -O LL N V)- N -L wLL VNo yy L L - NNNO LLD L O F + O0 O.c OU 0wL n N•N 0 0) O Om •L C a V N L O n- O N - COO7 Vn O yC N 0 c n Lo OAL Oa+ a L EU LV EN00 O3} - N m N C 7 O+ O VNNO O > L N m mL w + - 0UU VU•- 7 N•- M U 0---- N-L N 0)+ O- O L a OLa, c NN D D W N a 7 a- N O N 0 NDNLL > O- O NOL NNmaNQO•LLO L C N L O O U a O L- V C 7 CND OL V C - O.a N D OE N }U 7 N•3 N- N N L DDO OO•3- UY a 1-4V O N w wCO L - + O E 0 }L N C ) LECOQ M m} O ° - y• m0 0WcOOOCO UP N'C W VOC Do- DcmNNUE Z c y P i: oUUO O N O U N LwwN O- L- O . 0 LCTNaCw L N- O o O m E N NN 7+' N NNL > OOUV � C O N NL O O N + L03 3 + ° Qm 0 N U U 3QL + E LLmsaNL�D O SHEET 14 OF 29 Traffic Operations Division ,Texas Department of Transportation Standard BARRICADE AND CONSTRUCTION ARROW PANEL, REFLECTORS, WARNING LIGHTS & ATTENUATOR BC ( 7) - 14 FILE: bcsm-14.dgn YN: 1,DOT CK:TXDOT ow: TxDOT _K:TxDOT ©TXDOT November 2002 CONT SECT 10B HIGHWAY REVISIONS w w 9-07 8-14 F J DIST rOL�NTV SHEET N0. a 7-13 O LL DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 o — � C O N N O - N•3 j C 0 C �• L N 0 w L o J� O 'NO+�N O'er O Ca L E C O> _ +Q O PO U - 0 J C O O Z 0, L + N C U N L C C U O j a•N - P L '�' L L L O N T•C•- w + C•-} •O•- N 7 Z P V N O L N 7 - L+ C O C O N P 7 O � C L O L L - 0 0 0 O E L N C Lyy C + _ Oaw } U cim C o •� E E C 3' 0 ° N T L •C - L - P C N D N L C ; Q N Z D E D d•d L + - 7 N O L+ O O Z C + L •> +O 8 N O 0 01 aQ ` O- 0 C tY 7 _ O C T 7 O O- O a •; U •U • 0 N- -D U N D Q- uJ m N N +-P L O C NSC O O N D C T N Q D•- L L m+ O+L L 7 N N N O N •-+ O N v1 3 + T > Q } N L L L y N- E= C N N n c 0 L O V[] J O Q O N D- - .0 c C L N Q N O N L 00 L W M Q C - N•--N L CC•O- O Ld w D N F D O N 10 L C P ND C N E+ L - NL N > N D L7LLOO+ OOC C L L L Q C Q O N N C O CL } CLN Q N Q Q NO O N N N wO U L L > O N Q U O L C O O C O N C 00 0 0 0 N O Q C c YL CE L O O+ + N Q O O O P L Q1D 0 N Q 0 N w }•- C C P V tOD+ N- W L N O O • N N N N D•- L C } N d Ot L C V V N O L D N O O M OO C cl C7 D C 7 0 NC N D N N - O L N L } O'OD - N N ON N•C- FOXON ti+X•+NVE- DEE7 NQ 0 N7 LN7 L+\N UP+NU P N 0L NC-NN 0L V L N C+N Fm D7 •D N- NN L wN NU •+-N•LU}CU 0 a`-'2PN�Jr ~�r-•NT QE- ON;>wO •QL CF+ C } D.0 N C D L E NO N D } .0 D N O N 0 CDN- O + Q DD YL+O; w N N O N N L PN C 7 O N P N L 0 C X N O O C a NM N D DC N O UO CP O 3 D • 00Q ~ CL > C U 0 O- N P+ E C- N LL N C wtO PN O Q O O Lij L CL C- C jo P OOP N U C O Z N c a, M Lw NLLNL C E L P N DL 0 L N 0 N N L C PL- U- N N OO N L D U O L O- N C P-n U_ ON N N N N •- -M N ` O•L C T C 0 C O+ O ON 0LL = OC N OL N CQ N N L L N O O C L O UO+N L C 0w 0 LNC L QL N -0 >.c O Z S N N 0 ; O N + O _ Q O00 N 0 N L CN OU C O C N O N L L ND ~ 0 OLL0 c 02 0Q) LN 0 9.0 0 DL ON O 0 0 7 } N O DO PD + U O N O wO N C O N O N•N N O N U VN C O3T Q NL L L C N L Q L L a CDN N 0 L O •V L N L L > L L } ;O D N•- N N 7 N P L > 0 L N O O N O O 7L L N �C 4 N+ +OQ- NC 7 L 0 N OL L NO (1) O UV �OC LN U U L CL N OP0O •- U OO O N L• N N•C O O N >0 0 E D L C Q-.0 L O - O - - O L - L} Q ; N O O0 U0N - PD - C - Q N 0 O N O UD+ Z L C N N N °+L UL 10} C C - C - C N P C C C L LN wN CO N N N L L L C C U N N O O O L QE 0+ L O O y E N C 7 L N LLI E N NO O w O O N Q O N ODO•+ LN CL 7 ND 0 0N 7 N•D N N L C DD LN cc L L O O EO N L O •- L WJVut wFL+NN7•titi-0.+O {F=/I NNN•NN- ++PNT•--ONN-•OOP- DQ O UC W+ '� L!1 L •-•ON- N w-P3 DF D+C-C --OT•`EN� +U� •+ONPCL0LP- •2>--UN M 7LN QO NL -N•'OONO DDO•N07D LLUN- N0NO N2] NN N0 OFN M 7 C TcOONo OCNNN3- •+DD+N L COOL C C UC C NL O C } ~ N D\N N 0 0 >- O O u CDJc - N TO DLL CU OLD L D OLwO+O+ c C V C- U V•7 NODO C 4) 0) DN DP 7•-L N D L O W D N 7•C O N 0NNNNNLNO 0..c N L L ON N D D C 0 O N - >N LN O+ L L+ } O C C U-+ CO O E D w- ; N.0 + N 7LQL NC NN 0'- OZCNU LOJLLNO DO LL - C L07 ODLQ0 O 0 U PC U + N N L •- 7+ O -Q OTNO }O N LCOO•- 7 + NO O L N O N•- N+ _ N- L 9 N d O + " OL -+ C+ O O O OJ1 T L O NN7 .0 r L CN ONCCO- 7 L L L OOO C N L L L Q 0 OL • Q Q OT 0-0 L E + O N N TL N OFC N N— OC PN - N OQ 70 1 > 0 } O U L C L•- N O O N CN L 0 L N N N� O D L •C L UNX D O•7C a) 0 N[ P - LO C O N C O N P N O OJ O+ L NO O C N 0 N LL O Z L C .0D •U }moN MN D PD N N L 0 E N L N Cm O N O L U 0 C N- P •- N L N O E 0 NNN C L U•- O- P n N- w } C7 w •-L } •-- •- 7 N- O ON OOL L L •PONL LIJ N (D ID LC DEL + 0•U7 - D+ OOO- PN N PO N O C > C > C C U V) N -N -0 N P C N D C C C Z N M N O N NC•LL D C C L O N p y 0 C N L 0 0 O L ] D CL WCN OO- N.L O C N N > L O DL L D L N L•- F - L-W•N 3 O2C > N P- 7- ZP0 � O N Q U O O N O L UO ; NOE NID CN 0 0 L L.0 L } L N DL L N O L L N N P N N E Z C P} Pc CP W - • - 0 O C O L O > O O C L L- NE 0 L w tQ 0 L L O- O O O O O N O O c N N ~ O L C V N L L U•C L L N N Q TO C L•- NNND 0O N ccp0TC O 7 w N N O N U ULN N - U L - V_J• LP-L-P- J;LLV=• L U +OD O C N N+ N 0 u N C 7 ; \ .0 ON > C OO+L +L N O L QNFNL N N LO ULQN D LNLN+ O N PPNNOTC •- C O •DDO C CNC-D+ O CP ° OV LO (70OO •- (, P P N P N > N U (7 N U+ N P X (,� •- L L L 0):?O N L X C C Q N U N C L'� 7 0 Q Q•- 7 U N Q C O C N O N O N L M 7 0 0 Z - - D U W - - Z L N L P - E Z L L ;} ;D L U N M ; E C C N O N•- C+ C •-• N N N N N C N C 0 U C O0 C Z 00 TL0 TNLL NLL Z C1 C1 TF NLO TL TOL Z ;�L CL OD+ L�LLL i i O C D V Q+ O V Q D O D:V I O O t- aa� a� N M Q LfI tD rr W 3 F N M Q LfI tD r✓ 3 � N M Q Ll) tD rr 00� N SHEET 15 OF 29 ° c JL CNC LN a` ° ° , Opn s ° ; o Division L Texas Department of Transportation Standard O T w > 0 O 0 d1 EO 0 > c E LL0 BARRICADE AND CONSTRUCTION P N 0O N L ° Q ARROW PANEL, REFLECTORS, 3n1 - - 1 WARNING LIGHTS & ATTENUATOR N D 0 IQ I c + ~ M � ) n LL ° BC � 7� - 14 E i i i ° C1D I _ _ _ _ i L FILE: bcsm-14.dgn EN:TxDOT CK:TXDOT ow: ION _K:TOOT ©TxDOT November 2002 CONT SECT Job HIGHWAY REVISIONS w w 9-07 8-14 F J DIST rOL�NTV SHEET N0. ao LL 7-13 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49DO-AD8D-B4029C332D38 FLASHING ARROW BOARDS �o o•_ Arrow Boards may be located behind channeliZing devices in place for O shoulder , 0 toper or merging taper, otherwise they shall be delineated with four (4) chonneliZing o> devices placed perpendicular t0 traffic on the upstream side of traffic. +O . C U d oL D 1. The Flashing Arrow Board should be used for oil Ione closures on multi-lane roadways, or slow 0.o moving maintenance or construction activities on the travel Innes. 3 L} 2. Flashing Arrow Boards should not be used on two-Ione, two-way roadways, detours, diversions Z°E or work on shoulders unless the "CAUTION" display (see detail below) is used. T L 3. The Engineer/inspector shall choose oil appropriate signs, barricades and/or other traffic •+" control devices that should be used in conjunction with the Flashing Arrow Board. — 4. The Flashing Arrow Board should be able to display the following symbols: QD•- do— UOo +O.d O10 d L L L N a0U • • C E • • • L Q D d L • • • Coo • • -N O O o C OR • Lo In 0• • O X d X L • • • • U • • d )L • • • +WO u ALTERNATING DIAMOND CAUTION •• •• >,o c 4 CORNER CAUTION 0 4,3 0 C « L d UL a O • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • O ID LL DOUBLE ARROW LEFT & RIGHT C°c CHEVRON ARROW w�o LEFT & RIGHT on O •-X+ +r L 5. The "CAUTION" display consists of four corner lamps flashing simultaneously, or the Alternating w a 0 Diomond Caution mode as shown. o d c 6. The straight line caution display is NOT ALLOWED. oto° 7. The Flashing Arrow Board shall be capable of minimum 50 percent dimming from rated lamp voltage. W a E o The flashing rate of the lamps shall not be less than 25 nor more than 40 flashes per minute. Q L w N B. Minimum lamp "on time" shall be approximately 50 percent for the flashing arrow and equal U D� intervals of 25 percent for each sequential phase of the flashing chevron. t2 c w 9. The sequentiol arrow display is NOT ALLOWED. o Y o 10. The flashing arrow display is the TxDOT standard; however, the sequential Chevron display may be used during daylight operations. 11. The Flashing Arrow Board shall be mounted on 0 vehicle, trailer or other suitable support. 12. A Flashing Arrow Board SHALL NOT BE USED to laterally shift traffic. 13. A full matrix PCMS may be used to simulate 0 Flashing Arrow Board provided it meets visibility, flash rote and dimming requirements on this sheet for the same size arrow. 14. Minimum mounting height of trailer mounted Arrow Boards should be 7 feet from roadway to bottom of panel. REQUIREMENTS MINIMUM MINIMUM NUMBER MINIMUM TYPE SIZE OF PANEL LAMPS VISIBILITY ATTENTION DISTANCE WHEN NOT IN USE, REMOVE Flashing Arrow Boards THE ARROW BOARD FROM THE B 30 x 60 13 3/4 mile shall be equipped with RIGHT-OF-WAY OR PLACE THE automatic dimming devices. ARROW BOARD BEHIND CONCRETE C 48 x 96 15 1 mile g TRAFFIC BARRIER OR GUARDRAIL. SHEET 16 OF 29 Traffic Operations Division ,Texas Department of Transportation Standard BARRICADE AND CONSTRUCTION ARROW PANEL, REFLECTORS, WARNING LIGHTS & ATTENUATOR BC ( 7) - 14 FILE: bcsm-14.dgr YN: TxDOT CK:TXDOT ow: TxDOT _K:TxDOT ©TxDOT November 2002 CONT SECT Loe HIGHWAY REVISIONS w w 9-07 8-14 F J [)IST rOLNTV SHEET N0. Qo LL 7-13 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49DO-AD8D-B4029C332D38 GENERAL NOTES 1. For long term stationary work zones on freeways, drums shall be used as the primary chonnelizing device. >1c 2. For intermediate term stationary work zones on freeways, drums Should be o 0 used as the primary chonnelizing device but may be replaced in tangent , 0 sections by vertical panels, or 42" two-piece cones. In tangent sections O i one-piece cones may be used with the approval of the Engineer but only C if personnel ore present on the project of oil times to maintain the c a a cones in proper position and location. 41 L.0 3• For short term stationary work zones on freeways, drums are the preferred ° 3 chonnelizing device but may be replaced in topers, transitions and tangent 0 sections by vertical panels, two-piece cones or one-piece cones as Z w o approved by the Engineer. 18" x 24" Sign 12" x 24" a 4. Drums and 011 related items shall comply with the requirements of the (Maximum Sign Dimension) Vertical Panel o current version of the "Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices" Chevron CW1-8, Opposing Traffic Lone mount with diagonals a n ITMUTCD) and the "Compliant Work Zone Traffic Control Devices List" Divider, Driveway sign D70a, Keep Right Sloping down towards d'm± (CWZTCD). R4 series or other signs as approved travel way a c by Engineer n 5. Drums, bases, and related materials shall exhibit good workmanship and o w L shall be free from objectionable marks or defects that would adversely L Lrn affect their appearance or serviceability. �c o 6. The Contractor Shall l hove 0 maximum of 24 hours to replace any plastic P I yWOOd, Aluminum or Metol sign c E drums identified for replacement by the Engineer/Inspector. The replace- -ma substrates sholl NOT be used on L�a mens device must be On approved device. W L plostic drums C N O Co} GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS W.- wo a Pre-quoIified plostic drums shall meet the following requirements: d�L 1. Plastic drums shall be a two-piece design; the "body" of the drum shall SIGNS, CHEVRONS, AND VERTICAL PANELS be the top portion and the "base" shall be the bottom. MOUNTED ON PLASTIC DRUMS L 2. The body and base shall lock together in such a monner that the body IC 00separates from the base when impacted by a vehicle traveling of a speed r w E of 20 MPH or greater but prevents occidental Separation due to normal n o- handling and/or air turbulence created by passing vehicles. m 3 0 3. Plastic drums shall be constructed of lightweight flexible, and 1. Signs used on plastic drums shall be manufactured using Cw deformoble materials. The Contractor shall NOT use metal drums or substrates listed on the CWZTCD. >0 0 single piece plastic drums as channelizotion devices or sign supports. 0n1A 4. Drums shall present a profile that is 0 minimum of 18 inches in width 2. Chevrons and Other work zone Signs with an orange background a n o of the 36 inch height when viewed from any direction. The height of shall be manufactured with Type BFB Or Type CrLOrOnge '-T E drum unit (body installed On base) shall be o minimum of 36 inches and sheeting meeting the color and retroreflectivity o E° a maximum of 42 inches. requirements of DMS-8300, "Sign Face Material," unless D L L 5. The top of the drum shall have a built-in handle for easy pickup and otherwise specified in the plans. o 0 c shall be designed to drain water and not collect debris. The handle N F}O shall have 0 minimum of two widely spaced 9/16 inch diameter holes t0 3. Vertical Panels shall be manufactured with Orange and white LOO o allow attachment of a warning light, warning reflector unit or approved sheeting meeting the requirements of DMS-8300 Type A .- compliant sign. Diagonal stripes on Vertical Panels shall slope down toward L 6. The exterior of the drum body shall hove a minimum of four alternating the intended traveled Ione. p D D orange and white refroreflecfive circumferential stripes not less than „4, p 4 inches nor greater than 8 inches in width. Any non-reflecforized 4. Other sign messages (text or symbolic) may be used as W 7 E a space between any two adjacent stripes shall not exceed 2 inches in approved by the Engineer. Sign dimensions Shall not exceed a)N N width. 18 inches in width Or 24 inches in height, except for the R9 7. Bases shall have 0 maximum width of 36 inches, a maximum height of 4 series signs discussed in note 8 below. "n e} inches, and o minimum of two footholds of sufficient size to allow base 0 Y o to be held down while Separating the drum body from the base. 5. Signs shall be installed using 0 1/2 inch bolt (nominal) 8. Plastic drums shall be constructed of ulfr0-violet stabilized, orange, and nut, two washers, and one locking washer for each high-density polyethylene (HDPE) or other approved material, connection. 9. Drum body shall hove o maximum unballosted weight of 11 lbs. IO.Drum and base shall be marked with manufacturer's name and model number. 6. Mounting bolts and nuts shall be fully engaged and adequately torqued. Bolts should not extend more than 1/2 RETROREFLECTIVE SHEETING inch beyond nuts. 7. Chevrons may be placed on drums on the outside of curves, 1. The stripes used On drums shall be constructed Of Sheeting meeting the on merging topers Or On Shifting topers. When used in these color and retroreflectivity requirements Of Departmental Materials locations they may be placed On every drum or spaced not Specification DMS-8300, "Sign Face Materials." Type A reflective more than on every third drum. A minimum of three (3) Sheeting shall be supplied unless otherwise specified in the plans. should be used at each location coiled for in the plans. 2. The Sheeting Shall be Suitable for use On and Shall adhere to the drum Surface Such that, upon vehicular impact, the Sheeting shall remain adhered in-ploce and exhibit no delominofing, crocking, or loss of 8. R9-9, R9-10, R9-11 and R9-110 Sidewalk Closed signs which retroreflectivity other than that loss due to abrasion of the sheeting Ore 24 inches wide may be mounted on plastic drums, with surface. approval of the Engineer. BALLAST 1. Unbollasted bases shall be large enough to hold up to 50 lbs. of sand. SHEET 17 OF 29 This base, when filled with the ballast material, should weigh between Traffic 35 lbs (minimum) and 50 lbs (maximum). The ballast may be sand in one Operations s separate from the base, sand in a sand-filled plastic Ir Texas Department of Transportation Division to three sandbags p p Standard base, or other ballasting devices as approved by the Engineer. Stocking Of sandbags will be allowed, however height of sandbags above pavement surface may not exceed 12 inches. 2. Bases with built-in ballast shall weigh between 40 lbs. and 50 lbs. BARRICADE AND CONSTRUCTION Built-in ballast can be constructed of an integral crumb rubber base or a solid rubber base. CHANNEL I Z I ND DEVICES 3. Recycled truck fire sidewolls may be used for ballast on Bruns approved for this type Of ballast On the CWZTCD list. 4. The ballast shall not be heavy Objects, water, Or any material that would become hazardous to motorists, pedestrians, or workers when the drum is Struck by 0 vehicle. I.I ,► 5. When used in regions susceptible to freezing, drums shall hove drainage C 8 V holes in the bottoms So that water will not collect and freeze becoming FILE: bcsm-14.dgn DN: 1,DOT CK TOOT SW: TxDOT -TOOT DOT a hazard when struck by a vehicle. ©TXDOT November 2002 CONT SECT Ioe 11GIWAI 6. Ballast shall not be placed on top Of drums. REVISIONS ww 7. Adhesives may be used to secure base of drums to pavement. 4-03 7-13 DIST COLNTv SHEET No. 1--J a 9-07 8-14 c LL DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 This de+ail is not intended for fabrication. See note 3 and the CWZTCD list for providers of approved CW1-6L L 24„ J Detectable Pedestrian Barricades Continuous smooth 36" rail for hand trailing 12" 36" 8" 45°xj;� Detectable Edge 4" Orange 4" White 2" Mox. DETECTABLE PEDESTRIAN BARRICADES 1. When existing pedestrian facilities are disrupted, closed, Or relocated in a TTC Zone, the temporary facilities Shall DIRECTION 1ND1CATOR BARRICADE be detectable and i nc I ude accessibility features consistent with the features present in the existing ped1. The Direction Indicator Barricade may be used in topers, where pedestrians facility. transitions, and Other areas where specific directional 2. Where psidetolk, With device that disabilities detectable aS normally use the guidance to drivers is necessary, closetl SideW0ldi o device +ht+ is tletec+thee by o person 2. If used, the Direction Indicator Barricade should be used With a visual disability traveling With the aid of l long Cane shell be DlaCetl aCr055 the full width Of the CIOSetl in Series f0 direct the driver through the transition and into sidewalk. the intended travel Ione. 3. De+eC+able pedestrian barricades similar to the one pictured 3. The Direction Indicator Barricade shall consist of One-Direction above, longitudinal channelizing devices, some concrete Large Arrow ICW1-6) sign in the Size shown with a black arrow barriers, and wood or Chain link fencing with a Continuous on a background of Type BFLor Type CFLOronge refroreflective detectable edging con satisfactorily delineate a pedestrian sheeting above a roil with Type A retroreflective sheeting in path. alternating 4" white and orange Stripes sloping downward at on 4• Tape, rope, Or plastic chain strung between devices are not angle Of 45 degrees in the direction rood users ore to Doss. detectable, do not Comply with the design standards in the Sheeting types shall be as per DMS 8300. "Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines 4. Double arrows on the Direction Indicator Barricade will not be for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)" and Should not be used allowed. as a control for pedestrian movements. 5. Approved manufacturers ore shown On the CWZTCD List. 5• Warning lights Shall not be attached t0 detectable pedestrian Ballast shall be as approved by the manufacturers insfruC+ions. barricades. 6. Detectable Pedestrian barricades may use 8" nominal barricade roils as shown on BC(10) Provided that the top rail provides a smooth continuous rail suitable for hand +roiling with no splinters, burrs, or sharp edges. Handle 18" min Top Should not 9/16" dio. (+yp) allow collection for mounting of water or signs and debris O warning lights 4" max 4" min B" max Each drum shall have (tYp) a minimum of 2 orange and 2 white stripes SHEET 18 OF 29 using Type A re+ro- Traffic reflective sheeting Operations 2" max with the top stripe Division p (typ.) being orange. ,Texas Department of Transportation Standard E E MQ BARRICADE AND CONSTRUCTION DHANNELIZIND DEVICES Toper to allow for stacking a pr minimum of 5 BC (8) — 1 4 drums FILE: bCsm-14.dgn EN: CKDW: GK: Bose (36" ©TXOOT November 2002 CONT SECT Loe ITIcuwnv dia. max) REVISIONS w w 4-03 7-13 F J [)IST rOLNTV SHEET N0. a 9-07 8-14 O LL DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 c 0 M N N OD N c C v 4)) O+ 4 to U ._ O, O a4) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O O O = - N O N cP•- N n C 0 L N a N N D - x'� C_ C P t0 r- 00 O� O ^ N rn v N t0 4 •c OW.> >L•U)w 0 0 0 C OtU NJ TC •U) �O•N 0) 00 O V TCo O•- ?D - au, 0 a,•- O5 z 0._ O }CIO 10 T n +T• N•w-P-•E-D E O 00.900 N w- N•_ N L LJC ^oL ZrRrQ!f.1 Q oi•_0a4)11 000N O0O O iO to O m + oNOO Uw C L 00L r) MV V In0) to 00 L N• dao 0DODNL 7 P v 0 1 DON O n'0•>+LaC Dam UL 00+C OO- N 0+N Q NONzrN 47 LLI W O NL OW O+ O •-ON - O U c a3L L OU 3 L N n O- 0rQmO++ ma' •Lc °OD 00W-00 c o 0 L 7 OC + >c CaO O 00 N O 0 CQ O 0 L.0 O•- V O + 00 WO+ N-C O - O-L O � M N 0 lD I� C OO n 0 OUC +O+ N + U L L E O N+ O•- 0 7-P D W C - n OO L L O C Zr ON7 o NC n0 >L 4* NttO 0 N O N- DV L•-O O M •- to N 0 0 N O to N 00 0> x ZO CNN 00� • oN0 C•_10 _L 00 O.O OEOL- UO NN O L L 03C ; -N P + c LO•w+N c 0-0 0 ~ O L T>O C 0 C •VUP••UCO-)+UT >>NU+L>V)0N07++DE.wL�-N3'»� NN3O17A>nN N`-'aNaN LC-a;- N�3N•P •- D+0D00NUo C •t- a ao N *o N O N L 4) O O W} I O 0 IO 7 O O I4 a•C VL.+ NN3L L+N0L O L=Jl iNn Lc) N ^ N N VLn Ln tO t0 ODCn + w UOL OUO V W 4) aOU = D DCO> NToY O d O0 0 N ONOyF0 � +VLnV) Z Q. U•D,o L L+ p -a 7NL+LO10 d O > NZ041 UP •X L 0 X N L U o > E 000 W aNCNDOa - D7 ) nTN PC O OdLON NN C O O NTC0OL D L ODJ_ OP CO NNUDCN= LD• LL dt P LOc\aN'D7� O.+ UU. CO OaN On N 0D L ON C N C E TL LC L O0O0, C+Nw D OO NN°LLOlO.2aoC•E N+OD7NL ODL NO - 7YNVU NLw NN-NLNCTN ,CN0 L Oa NL TPC LaN O` N3 L OCLOOC Oo0LLdNONNVU7LLOn0 Z C + w O cc c X Lc O c O L to N F w�i•E 3 0 N a In •V i c-0 N } N O T O C L > D O C CC ` 0 L O L 0 O } N n 0 0 0 0- L N O L 3 T L C E N U) C J U - N 0 L L>L N pp O O U L O N D•3 X C Y O d L +0)O D > 3 L V N N L N P N N 0 U -.0- w T OJ + OFD}•E D +0 OOD3�ac Ca+•C U OC U O � '- CC- 0W�VtO!•:t•�+UV7-))'YT_LD a0 1II m +N✓Nyi N �I z+an D to F ^ a To NNauO r OUaT+NN O J+-N•+LLTN- L+N NC VO C+ 8N O+._ 0a0 O L 4 - P 0 + NC E C O .- c J LD C L- L UN U)L m '0 + N N0 O N0O N 3 O >00 NC c U'0c > NON3C 4tn P > P N N O Ow O+ U 0 •+M m PLC 00 n N N- N CQ0rrrwJ 7 - yo C N n.- M a E 0 c > 0Cw M 0. C �y D > NO L - uO C O N O L O N U L+ N U 7 O D N D > NO U•UO 0 > LDN O N a•LN C07a C DL L Na N O- NO (n C ON OWL N O 7 c L - P;O WN7 ; O N 0 D O NOggV W WO C O > W •OCC •- O 0 y • NO O E NMa= > L- O -C N O M O L C 7 Xc 0 •-- JOPQ OO UU O•C F O NL 0 N La. LwN O N ' dN + 000LnNLL0 U!W ONC O N N O C 0 O'0 C Co'U O+ O � OUnw L a+ OL MCIUO 6:4 0. E I Z 49 OD wD a N J c O: 0 LLJNC O d O N w C Lo 0 0 NC LX D OQ O > L 0 O 0 LL w LL � Q 0 I o v E U N C C O N E L O a a o N I /.DM 18ADA BAOQD 80004S!0 -U!W ,.9£ o C! _ a N•E � vi N SHEET 19 OF 29 o I Traffic Operations Texas Department of Transportation Division oc a, c p p Standard n. L > D� W P BARRICADE AND CONSTRUCTION x d 8� - N 00 `` o CHANNE L I Z I NG DEVICES L N - 0 I BC (9) - 14 m D FILE: bcsm-14.dgn YN: 1,DOT CK:Tx DOT ow: TxDOT CK:Tx DOT J K� O> ©TxDOT November 2002 CONT SECT Job HIGHWAY m o _ L' REVISIONS N ww e > aDiQc 9-07 8-14 .x J XO DIST COLN7v SHEET N0. M.. LL;4 7-13 O LL DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 c v a 4) C C N M .c.?_ O._ c C N 4) O+ L y c L a U 0 0 U•- N E E N C C 4 c- C L O C Uc O n- C 7 +- 1 '0 n 0 v E 4) N N L C L N L N N O O O 4) N > 4) n 7 4) - > 0 C O C N U + L•- n 0 -+ N + o w+.0 }o c _oa oo N 4) U'� c N ; O 0 V.2 a - N } N 4) 0 7 0 L'O+ c 0 4, O 4) N 3 0•-0 .0}0 L 4)o d) c W o c Y L L L O.L E D C+ U c }0 D U L O N 4) N N C O N C O O a '~ L N L- O 0 U 3 0 D O w 3 O+ 7 T+ n C•- T .w o) . - T 0•- n C n•- L N O CID �/• Q V L L 3 L '0 3 3 0 0 4)- L 4) U N O O 0 v 0,0 N.- U N N+ > 0 n L L N O O.0 X'0 E N U O n N N O C L O N N 0 4) O L E C n 0 L+a V N 4) q • N O E C U 4) Ccs L a 0�•- N V 0 4) C C •L + 0 td' -� O E_N n d-__N w 0 •>O !�! O a 0 N L 0 4)'0 0 0 +0 O a O N - f • d 4) O O n C 4) n L 0+ L P+O W N NLa - L D w 4) C N a p T O O•N- O •.� >L •70 n O tZ D N E N S L•0 o u C N N R„� _ N L T(3 4) L O N 0 T V L n 0� - > L N V O+a 4) C O 4) 4) P O C N p >O] C L,00 0 E+L NO+ C oL N o v 4) 0c >1 L•- oo+ n Lo- O W L o L L C O 4) O O- } X 4) 4) N O N N '0 0 7 0+O M 0 c N a U L W O L - 0 0 0 0 N CFS- O L'0+ c O C O L 0 •- C N'O 0 0 C 0 0-.- (1) +.- � + d L O L N D L w a•-3 0 Q.. } + •- N - .... - •P- U N QL•? LN O 51 NN NQQ ZO L c O 4NN 0N0N'0 O 7aO L •- O C U O o N L•- N 4) C C C C LcJO C 4) O•- 4)+ > VL N 0 0 7 N N a• L N- an4) C N C •- - Oo E C+ L VU N 0 L 0W o} 0 0 0 0 O 0 u >+ L C >+ L L c IV C u- NJ •- o W J o,0O O N L C OU+a Cp 0 o cO VLL >+ ' - Z+ p I 'Oti4OO O n - v N - V 4) L 0 > C Co N O N , 0) _ N W a+ N•- 4) UL O•- m C L \ L 3 nN L } 7N Q W E v c a •_ - 0 L N E N - L 0 N 7 N =' cy O C U D+ t w 0 0 0 (/� N O•-•- N N L L y C- Q O N N L '0 V Q L M 4) T L L N a L i 4)•-" O•- 0 0- 10 C L•- - C O•- T•- C 7 O p C a yJ N O+ - n } 4) 41 O > Q •L a C'0 L- L•- N 0 J d - n- 4) LMOLCL ON L '0 W 0 2 L N o 0 o L 0 c N U+O Q C U-'0 L O 4) N V) a U U >a a 4) 0 10 O - O C O (� L •- C •- L n+ 43 Z O D n L N•- - Z Z •- C '030 nv 00) n0N O+ 0 70 c >- N } O 0 0 U n 3 W U `. In 0 0 0 E'o 0'o O-) N C O c c Aft L w U 4) - o L O M N•- N N-0 4) E E 0 N O L .0 U L O -0 L - - �yJ N L N O N C N C•-} u+ J Ot o++ 4) n•7 L F o n 0+ 0 0 0 0+ N+ J W - o c c v c O N 4)P {f1 N LO N O T U +O D.- 4) J Z F}._ O N qi t N L C } E n E N E N E N N N ] O Z N EN ,0 Q+ } n N U N U 4) N O L V N T N D C o '0 0 4)- 1P1 0 0•- 0•-+ 0+0 N C} �. z = L•- U O 4) C i U•- - T N T N T C S+ 4) 0+ O L N OLD D O L - ui N 0-'GO) N N N C N L 3_N n N V n O C- W - C O o w >,-8 J J F a 'o vv mvi rn-+ L 4)N C O a•- N L N C N L 4) - U N 0.0 4) 4)C 4) C N + 4)+•-+++ N O O Q O O a L a 4) N 4)L Q N n N N N N Q).0 w Z cLi 1- 3 v - 3 v 4)+ J o o•- o O o �i v 0 - T 7 - 0• J - U- N- - N () N C p o asTo- o o- 4) 0•c Q 000c ou0L.0- � L v L c L L� N c o a n a C.0 .0 o 0 F 0 V E N O N N- 7•- - m N O '~ O 3 L d V + O L L cc L•- L C- 4) N C 00,00 N M N N 0� 4) U 4) U 4) 0 0 C n cn COO on O 0 4)D � L+ d+.00 O N Z J U J J J J O J N J W0 O O L O n 0 L L L N 7 H 3 3 3 0 0 N 3 o N 3- 0 a J N M Q VI t0 E • o Od 0 0 0 a) 0 O O O O O O = X a C C t0 r- co T O N M Q i(1 to 1L F 00•-N OO O Vo•"- u p Z V•`-4)> 4 v Z W 0 0 C 0 O L ` o- z Q J P N V O O M Q Q Ln Ln to to I- CO 0 o Q W W SHEET 20 OF 29 + 3 o H a Traffic X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o Q c ^w ao V N V O to N M v 0 to L L > F Operations ^ N M N to to r n m rn c W Division n o ^o p W ,Texas Department of Transportation Standard E vm * r- Zn Il )) O �n O Ln O �nO 3._ V ,_a)* aQN ro NN Ln to L 00 0 a zN 0 Q 10 U L, Ln Ln c=_ BARRICADE AND CONSTRUCTION I u') ow �n O u'7 O In O Ln O a o ^ N N Q �n �n t� - p a W LLI 0 E �N O 3 CHANNE L I Z I NG DEVICES 0 4 to N W Q 0 V F = o0 J *O m O a0 N Z BC (9) - 14 NON M M Q Q N Ln t0 to I� W N a � TALE: bcsm-14.dgn oN: TxDOT cu:TOOT ow: TxDOT _H:TOOT ©TxbOT November 2002 CONT SECT Job HIGHWAY REVISIONS w w 9-07 8-14 F J DIST rOLNTV SHEET N0. 4 7-13 O LL DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 c o o•- wL O> +c L m 7 u O.0 N + O O O O N o f N N D + C 3 + - L L m m L•- 3 C a + C O m N Q 7 O O_ •3 N+ U C } 0 3 - O+ - O1-•-O N T- L C U O•- N L- EM E O no Z'~E m O'0 O m•- - C O L m- L 3 Q O OI + O O m O+C w N O •> C N O N- O LO L7 U +Lf L 41 7 N L O C O C 7 P - D.- C m ••+¢dLFL+VmVOlmT-yTJ_•'FtiaNNON--•+--+OCmNUC- U-NT••7~ P••-E-- ••wUm-- -NL •v3- mm-•O- TOL T>M }L Om +Q L •- a DUp wC c M NOm O tNLOLo> ••LN-- 0 0aONNO X E N m m m C 0 } O O L Q ' OPO T4) CCOID j �CD O) > + L O m O 0F : 0 - L> O O m'O mOL L C L m C D D m a O > C O41OOOaC OO L m NL O O U m'O Q O L m•> m m m m U m L a) I L >10 C m U m m L m L L Uc- U U C 7 c C c - N + O a L O N D - U QUm O• O +OO• 7 N V v+m N•7 7 + > _ V L m NO Lm eC 8+ CLa + +~ .0 Q. U c - ID Q Q LO I- O + LLc O N'O N L m O > OCC N NO C O L 0 7 U OL O+ �LN Q OL 3 LUL 7 C LQ L O L L N Om Q OL L L > O m O } L O L IQ. a) 0 0•N mM 7 O N CO T L O m- � C N E m N _ O O0 00 C C C OCE ID m 0 N O O L O N L O L U 0 c C 0 } C c7a C m CNO L E E - a m O P0N eC C O O O m U 741 - a C 3C > 7 m N L•C 0 O D 0 L O Q L C U + m 7 C N >L tD mm m O O a} •+ C OL L UaQ +cO0Lm.0 L N a mQN c N + cjQcNCm L O 0 U • } ` 0 C C 'O O 4 NO N NO O C V+ - N pp+ NOUN \ } + U 0 O O L E O a NN CECZ O O NOl N C L C m m Wa C N LL7 C- N -C = c N + OmNCN C V > N'O N 0 T E O O m O N C c O 7 U O N m •O C N O 'O N- L J m V C m O wL 00 _0_2Z m N CL N C L N (D} - N PwC O E U•O L O X OO c Pa C L M P X > E C O m C C P L O C m w+ C C - X L c C - Co 0 N C 7m - 0O O CC - -•V E '0 C m 4) V L + E O L N•- J N w U >- OO7 O LO + -CoL Om C • O L m + 00 7 41 N O O N > N L O- 7 C 3. O C O O O d•> m QO O LDOmQOQ 0'.? 1-) C C L C 0 Lm OL L Om 7 L NL m O V U m N} N L O 4)L L-- ID m m OLO0 L OC N W V UO >L ON L U >L Q U L L C1 O O L C C 0) 410 NN C N O L C m Uw m LE 7 C >+ N cl� u' OU 7 0 C 0 O•- L CN U 'ON C N OLUa O DLnU OQOEL77 N O O C oN O N C m 0+ C O} O-} m + -V> m O 11OLO m U U - m C•2 0 C O•EQ 'O O U L 0 3 0 m 0- LVO U OU x C O•C 0 7 L C 0 7 C N Z •> N._ > U•CS U L O NQ C� O + • Q. .0 L L m N0OC m N L 0 O 7 mEC c 7 O N-0 7 U O F >cm •- 0 ' O•- L 0 Q. d d 9 - �LWyL O • NOL X 0 C 0 C L C C C '0 ( L V CDEO• m- O > M.- 7 C O F O m N 41 0 C L V)Q 0 L U mU N - F > aO0 C ID O L L X^ •w-XOE Z ••-N- Qm wELwm> N L + NU•- 3•+- N N4)UO U L•O- c m Qm '0 N•O_ 0, Tm 41 11- O CU > C D '0- 0DCO NTO D•U L C m C C O L m m C L LN -Na O Q U O O•D-COL Ow > N O L0 to m- m c m 0 0 O- CC 0 a) mCO aDL L O N - Cw C W C U 7 00 O•- O L m E -wO WL CN P mO O L m 0) 0 0•0 0 QCO L O + U 3 C L O C UL CC m m C (D + O0NN 7 Q)-05 - - U O O QO O O NCO- O•N Nti 0 mU'O+ O L m C m Q. NO 0- 'O'ON -•-•N O+ U mU C L � CNNO C m mC = O L •C N m m N D LJ N- y C CN O+ QONm m Oy N QC O Q C m - U Ow U O 0) O•EO a QNN > NEE OOOOIy7l N LL U m+ LJJ O O000L OL UF L m 0 0 >0+c ODD •C L L OL L L OF '0 7 11 mD Z 3UaU OO3Qd N Q O C omNU7� LLI = L '0 41 M N O+ V N M Q N X aD C h w7E N m N N ¢L•-'- J� L V c t!� C -k O Y O 7 E o 0C O O O O O O O O O O O = x a c C P t0 N 00 M O N M Q Ln t0 L F 00•-N 00 O X 2 O N U r C Z .`-d> 4 0 Z W N8Eo oL Z a m Q o m O Ln 0 to O Ln O N O N O Om J DN rrw) 00 00 w VIc O N 00 a � W a moin000000000 0° N N w OD Q N V OW N OD Q O tP L L F L ^ N M N to t0 I� OD T 01 c V W ma Q 0; W E o J* N N N L('1 O in O N O N O SHEET 21 OF 29 O N O t0 ^ I� N OO m�' -'y L* o ^ N N v Ln to ID - - 00 00 o'_ X Z Q O= m m L Operations Q N Division O w U, o 10 Ln o o o Ln o o G J W ,Texas Department of Transportation Standard O ^ N N V Ln Ln to t0 r� 00 Lli La O N 0 F 4. 0 �'° 0.c _ BARRICADE AND CONSTRUCTION " — CHANNE L I Z I NG DEVICES * O Ln O Ln O Ln O to O N O m a (A _ 10 Q M M V Q Lo Ln t0 t4 r- ti F. N ! ON f BC (9) - 14 FILE. bosm-14.dgr YN: TxDOT OK:TXDOT ow: TxDOT _K:TxDOT ©TXDOT November 2002 CONT SECT Loe HIGHWAY REVISIONS w w 9-07 8-14 F J DIST COUNTY SHEET N0. ¢ 7-13 O LL DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49DO-AD8D-B4029C332D38 TYPE 3 BARRICADES 1. Refer to the Compliant Work Zone Traffic Control Devices List (CWZTCD) Barricades Shall NOT for details of the Type 3 Barricades and o list of all materials be used as a sign support. used in the construction of Type 3 Barricades. 2. Type 3 Barricades shall be used at each end of construction TTT Minimum projects Closed to 011 traffic. 8" Width of nominal Reflective 3. Barricades extending across 0 roadway Should have stripes that Slope45Q / Sheeting downward in the direction toward which traffic must turn in detouring. 'Y 7 inches. When both right and left turns Ore provided, the chevron striping may slope downward in both directions from the center Of the barricade. Where no turns are provided of 0 closed rood striping should slope downward in both directions toward the center of roadway. TYPICAL STRIPING DETAIL 4. Striping of rails, for the right side of the roadway, should slope FOR BARRICADE RA 1 L downward to the left. For the left side of the roadway, striping should slope downward to the right. 4' min., 8' max. 5. Identification markings may be Shown only on the back of the barricade rails. The maximum height Of letters and/Or company logos used for identification shall be 1". 6. Barricades Shall not be placed parallel to traffic unless on adequate N _ clear zone is provided. °D Q 7. Warning lights Sh011 NOT be installed on barricades. N 8. Where barricades require the use of weights t0 keep from turning Over, Stiffener the use of sandbags with dry, coheSionless Sand is recommended. The Fla+ roil sandbags will be tied shut to keep the sand from spilling and to maintain a Constant weight. Sand bogs shall not be Stacked in a manner Stiffener may be inside or outside of support, but no more than that covers any portion Of 0 barricade rails reflective sheeting. 2 stiffeners sholl be allowed on one barricade. Rock, concrete, iron, steel or other solid objects will NOT be permitted. Sandbags should weigh a minimum of 35 lbs and a maximus of 50 lbs. Sandbags shall be made of o durable material that tears upon TYPICAL PANEL DETAIL vehicular impact. Rubber (such as fire inner tubes) shall not be used FOR SKID OR POST TYPE BARRICADES for sandbags. Sandbags shall only be placed along or upon the base supports of the device and sholl not be suspended above ground level or hung with rope, wire, chains or other fasteners. 9. Sheeting for barricades shall be re+roreflec+ive Type A conforming to Departmental Material Specification DMS-8300 unless otherwise noted. 3"-4" CONES 4" min. orange 2" min T' 4" min.. white 3"-4" T 2" min. 4" min. orange 6.. min. 2" min. 3"-q" 2" mox. 2" min. 3" min. 14" M. 4" min. white 6" min. ' 42" 2" to 6" 2" min. 25.. min. � 4. min. I I 3" min. min. 28" 28" min. min. Two-Piece cones One-Piece cones Tubular Morker 28" Cones shall hove a minimum weight of 9 1/2 lbs. 42" 2-piece cones shall have a minimum weight of 30 lbs. including base. 1. Traffic cones and tubular markers shall be predominantly orange, and meet the height and weight requirements Shown above. 2. One-piece Cones have the body and base of the cone molded in One Consolidated SHEET 22 OF 29 unit. Two-piece cones have o cone shaped body and a separate rubber base, Traffic or ballast, that is added to keep the device upright and in place. Operations Division 3. Two-piece cones may have o handle or loop extending up to 8" above the minimus ,Texas Department of Transportation Standard height shown, in order to aid in retrieving the device. 4. Cones tubular morkers used night shall have white or white and orangeBARRICADE AND CONSTRUCTION reflective bonds as shown abovee.. The reflective bonds shall have 0 smoothth,, sealed outer surface and meet the requirements of Departmental Material Specification DMS-8300 Type A. CHANNEL I Z I NG DEVICES 5. 28" cones and tubular morkers are generally suitable for short duration and short-term stationary work as defined on BC(4). These Should not be used for intermediate-term or long-term stationary work unless personnel is on-site BC ( 10) � 0 _ to maintain them in their proper upright position. 6. 42" two-piece cones, vertical panels or drums ore suitable for o11 work zone T'L Ee bcsm-14.dgn EN: Tx DOT CK TxDOT ow: TXDOT K:TXDOT durations. ©TXDOT November 2002 CONT SECT Ioe ITIcuwnv REVISIONS w w 7. Cones or tubular morkers used on each project should be of the some size 9_07 8_14 DIST CDLNTv s11 No. ~J and shape. 7-13 D LL DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49DO-AD8D-B4029C332D38 Each roadway of o ROAD ADDRESS divided highway shall be R11-2 CLOSED STATE G20-6T barricaded in the some manner. M4-lOL p CONTRAC75F TC _ C.0 ? o- i L L / O> +O — i C UN _ �- ` L 0 7 S L.0 i J O+N _ ^ 3 + L•- 00 Zr 30 feet w � l U— \ PERSPECTIVE VIEW Detour 2CN Roadway +n d O 10 L L LJ LJ Q�W L w The three rails on Type 3 barricades LJ LI 0,C E shall be reflec+ OriZed orange and 10' -u10 L D reflective white stripes on one side Q W t7 L facing one-way traffic and both Sides c a° for two-way traffic. LU C 0} Barricade striping should slantUJ LU wo N downward in the direction of detour. oxa, XH L d 1. Signs should be mounted on independent supports of a 7 foo+ L d 8' max. length Type 3 Barricades Q)4)L mounting height in center of roadway. The signs should be a +>io WO minimum of 10 feet behind Type 3 Barricades. '00 2. Advance signing Shall be as specified elsewhere in the plans. PLAN VIEW 0 La) TYPE 3 BARRICADE (POST AND SKID) TYPICAL APPLICATION C , L U >O O °Una Alternate �_n o Alternate DC 0 Lo o w ID CC o aa) Approx. Drums, vertical panels or 42" cones Approx. OwL + T 50' of 50' maximum spacing 50' T NOO N'n O x+ L� + ° TL Min, 2 drums Min, 2 drums 0 D D or 1 Type 3 or 1 Type 3 N C barricade barricode a ` STOCKPILE / W 7 0. _,i L V c 0 t!� C� o Yo ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ On one-way roads Desirable downstream drums stockpile location ChanneliZing devices parallel to traffic or barricade may be is outside should be used when stockpile is omitted here clear Zone, within 30' from travel lane. TRAFFIC CONTROL FOR MATERIAL STOCKPILES to z„ THIS DEVICE SHALL NOT BE USED ON 4;: PROJECTS LET AFTER MARCH 2014, 4" 2" 42" EDGELINE CHANNELIZER SHEET 23 OF 29 Traffic Operations Division ,Texas Department of Transportation Standard 1, This device is intended only for use in place 0 vertical panel to BARRICADE AND CONSTRUCTION chOnneliZe traffic by indicating the edge of the he +ravel lane. 1+ is not intended to be used in transitions tapers. CHANNEL I Z I NG DEVICES 2. This device shall not be used t0 separate to IOnes Of traffic (Opposing or otherwise) or worn of objects. 3. This device is based on a 42 inch, two-piece cone with on alternate striping pattern: four 4 inch retroreflective bonds, with on approximate 2 inch gap between bonds. The color Of the bond should C1 L `r I O 4 A correspond to the color of the edgeline (yellow for left edgeline, G white for right edgeline) for which the device is substituted or for FILE: bcsm-14.dgn YN: 1,DOT CK TOOT ow: 1xD0T CK:TOOT which it supplements. The reflectoriZed bands shall be retroreflective ©TxDOT November 2002 CONT SECT SOB HIGHWAY Type A conforming to Departmental Material Specification DMS-8300, REVISIONS ww unless otherwise noted. 9-07 8-14 DIST COLN7Y SUEET No. Q.J 4, The base must weigh a minimum of 30 lbs. 7-13 c LL DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 1. Where positive redirectionol capability is provided, drums may be omitted. 2. Plastic Construction fencing may be used with drums for safety as required in the plans. \ 3. Vertical Panels on flexible support �c— may be Substituted strues when the \\ Typical shoulder Width is Ie5s than 4 feet. Plastic Drum 4. When the shoulder width is greater than 12 feet, Steady-burn lights PERSPECTIVE VIEW may be omitted if drums are used. These drums 5. Drums must extend the length are not required of the culvert widening. on one-way roadway LEGEND N X Plastic drum 0 o E w Yo Plastic drum with steady burn light j0 \ or yellow warning reflector t o+ o S B Steady burn warning light y E or yellow warning reflector N wO — O U O .o Increase number of plastic drums on the Eside of approaching traffic if the crown E width makes it necessary. (minimum of 2 a a o and maximum of 4 drums) PLAN VIEW CULVERT WIDENING OR OTHER ISOLATED WORK WITHIN THE PROJECT LIMITS SHEET 24 OF 29 Traffic Operations Division ,Texas Department of Transportation Standard BARRICADE AND CONSTRUCTION CHANNELIZING DEVICES BC ( 10) - 14 FILE: bcsm-14.ggr EN: 1,DOT CK:TXDOT ow: TxDOT .x.TxDOT ©TxDOT November 2002 CONT SECT Loe ITIcuwnv REVISIONS w w 9-07 8-14 F J [)IST rOLNTV SHEET N0. a 7-13 O LL DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49DO-AD8D-B4029C332D38 WORK ZONE PAVEMENT MARKINGS GENERAL 1. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining work zone and TC existing pavement markings, in accordance with the standard DEPARTMENTAL MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS C° specifications and special provisions, on all roadways open to traffic wwithin the CSJ limits unless otherwise stated in the plans. PAVEMENT MARKERS (REFLECTORIZED) DMS-4200 04 � 0 2. Color, patterns and dimensions shall be in conformance with the TRAFFIC BUTTONS DMS-4300 c a m "Texas Monuol on Uniform Traffic Control Devices" (TMUTCD). o d) EPDXY AND ADHESIVES DMS-6100 3 } 3. Additional supplemental pavement marking details may be found in the BITUMINOUS ADHESIVE FOR PAVEMENT MARKERS DMS-6130 _ plans or specifications. Zr r PERMANENT PREFABRICATED PAVEMENT MARKINGS DMS-8240 0 4. Pavement markings shall be installed in accordance with the TMUTCD +w and as shown on the plans. TEMPORARY REMOVABLE, PREFABRICATED DMS-8241 +_o PAVEMENT MARKINGS a.ES 5. When short term markings are required on the plans, short term y'N markings shall conform with the TMUTCD, the plans and details as TEMPORARY FLEXIBLE, REFLECTIVE DMS 8242 o 0 shown on the Standard Plan Sheet WZ(STPM). ROADWAY MARKER TABS C1(D o w 6. When standard pavement markings ore not in place and the roadway A list of prequolified reflective raised pavement aL o 0 is opened to traffic, DO NOT PASS signs shall be erected to mark markers, non-reflective traffic buttons, roadway U20 0 the beginning of the sections where passing is prohibited and marker tabs and other pavement markings can be -m0 PASS WITH CARE signs of the beginning of sections where passing found at the Material Producer List web address NQ D N L is permitted. shown on BC(1). C N O .Soo m p a 7. All work zone pavement markings shoII be instoIIed in accordance C o with Item 662, "Work Zone Pavement Markings." Lo In + RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS d 1. Raised pavement markers are to be placed according to the patterns L>� on BC(12). +do n00 2. All raised pavement markers used for work Zone markings shall meet D L L the requirements of Item 672, "RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS" and Departmental c a o Material Specification DMS-4200 or DMS-4300. L UI >O O �; } PREFABRICATED PAVEMENT MARKINGS anE „L 1. Removable prefabricated pavement markings shall meet the requirements .0 0 0 of DMS-8241. 0 IDL L C 2. Non-removable prefabricated pavement markings (foil back) shall meet ° t the requirements of DMS-8240. NOO L�° MAINTAINING WORK ZONE PAVEMENT MARKINGS + a 0 n o 1. The Contractor will be responsible for maintaining work zone pavement a,o markings within the work limits. WD E 0 2. Work zone pavement markings shall be inspected in accordance with d N 0 the frequency and reporting requirements of work zone traffic control J L � �+ device inspections as required by Form 599. n C o Y o 3. The markings should provide a visible reference for a minimum distance of 300 feet during normal daylight hours and 160 feet when illuminated by automobile low-beam headlights of night, unless sight distance is restricted by roadway geomefrics. 4. Markings failing to meet this criteria within the first 30 days after placement shall be replaced at the expense of the Contractor as per Specification Item 662. REMOVAL OF PAVEMENT MARKINGS 1. Pavement markings that are no longer applicable, could create confusion or direct a motorist toward or into the closed portion of the roadway shall be removed or obliterated before the roadway is opened to traffic. 2. The above shall not apply to detours in place for less than three days, where floggers and/or sufficient channelizing devices ore used in lieu of markings to outline the detour route. 3. Pavement markings shall be removed to the fullest extent possible, so as not to leave a discernable morking. This shall be by any method approved by TxDOT Specification Item 677 for "Eliminating Existing SHEET 25 OF 29 Pavement Markings and Markers". Traffic 4. The removal of pavement markings may require resurfacing or seal Operations coating portions of the roadway as descr i bed in Item 677. ,Texas Department of Transportation Division Standard 5. Subject to the approval of the Engineer, any method that proves to be successful on a particular type pavement may be used. 6. Blast cleaning may be used but will not be required unless specifically BARRICADE AND CONSTRUCTION shown in the plans. 7. Over-painting of the markings SHALL NOT BE permitted. PAVEMENT MARKINGS 8. Removal of raised pavement markers shall be as directed by the Engineer. 9. Removal of existing pavement markings and markers will be paid for BC ( 1 1 14 directly in accordance with Item 677, "ELIMINATING EXISTING PAVEMENT FILE: ecsm-14.dgn YN: TxDOT CK TxDOT ow: TxDOT K:TxDOT MARKINGS AND MARKERS," unless otherwise stated in the plans. ©TxDOT February 1958 CONT SECT Ioe HIGHWAY �,J IO.Black-out marking tape may be used to cover conflicting existing REVISIONS 1-- markings for periods less than two weeks when approved by the Engineer. 2-98 11-02 7-13 DIST COLNTv eHEET No. a 1-02 9-07 8-14 O LL DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49DO-AD8D-B4029C332D38 Temporary Flexible-Reflective Roadway Marker TabS Co a.- 04)•- ON > c TOP VIEW FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW +o cua O+N 3L+ 2 Z EO TL +— 4 �4 a n Adhesive pad y'N± Height of sheeting C1 d is usually more than 01 L 1/4" and less than 1". ow a L N acc0 N O WD STAPLES OR NAILS SHALL NOT BE USED TO SECURE hyo TEMPORARY FLEXIBLE-REFLECTIVE ROADWAY MARKER W — TABS TO THE PAVEMENT SURFACE C ' 07 Lo In N Ox N XH L 1. Temporary flexible-reflective roadway morker tabs used as guidemorks L>� shall meet the requirements of DMS-8242. +do >,w c 2. Tabs detailed on this sheet ore to be inspected and accepted by the D L L Engineer or designated representative. Sampling and testing is not C 3 o normally required, however at the option of the Engineer, either "A" Ln L or "B" below may be imposed to assure quality before placement on the >o o roadway. ULN 4 E 0 A. Select five (5) or more tabs at random from each lot or Shipment ID c o and submit to the Construction Division, Materials and Pavement L Oa Section to determine specification compliance. O o°c B. Select five (5) tabs and perform the following test. Affix five w�o (5) tabs of 24 inch intervals on an asphaltic pavement in a 0 o straight line. Using a medium size passenger vehicle or pickup, L F+ run over the markers with the front and rear tires of a speed + TL of 35 to 40 miles per hour, four (4) times in each direction. No p D D more than one (1) out of the five (5) reflective surfaces shall .,(Dv p be lost or displaced as a result of this test. �a0+ d N N 3. Small design variances may be noted between tab manufacturers. a L•-'- U v� 4. See Standard Sheet WZ(STPM) for fob placement on new pavements. See 0 c w Standard Sheet TCP(7-1) for fob placement on seal coat work. O Y O RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS USED AS GUIDEMARKS 1. Raised pavement markers used as guidemorks shall be from the opproved product list, and meet the requirements of DMS-4200. 2. All temporary construction raised pavement markers provided on a project shall be of the same manufacturer. 3. Adhesive for guidemorks shall be bituminous material hot applied or butyl rubber pad for all surfaces, or thermoplastic for concrete surfaces. Guidemorks shall be designated as: YELLOW - (two amber reflective Surfaces with yellow body). WHITE - (One Silver reflective surface with white body). SHEET 26 OF 29 DEPARTMENTAL MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS Traffic Operations Division PAVEMENT MARKERS (REFLECTORIZED) DMS-4200 ,Texas Department ofTransportation Standard TRAFFIC BUTTONS DMS-4300 EPDXY AND ADHESIVES DMS-6100 BITUMINOUS ADHESIVE FOR PAVEMENT MARKERS DMS-6130 BARRICADE AND CONSTRUCTION PERMANENT PREFABRICATED PAVEMENT MARKINGS DMS-8240 PAVEMENT MARKINGS TEMPORARY REMOVABLE, PREFABRICATED DMS 8241 PAVEMENT MARKINGS TEMPORARY FLEXIBLE, REFLECTIVE p}� ROADWAY MARKER TABS DMS-8242 BC 1 1 FILE: bcsm-14.dgn YN: TxDOT CK:TXDOT ow: TxDOT _K:TxDOT A I i st of prequalified reflective raised pavement markers, ©TXDOT February 1998 CONT SECT Ioe HIGHWAY non-reflective traffic buttons, roadway marker tabs and other REVISIONS w w pavement murk i ngs con be found of the Material Producer List 2-98 11-02 7-13 oIST COLNTv SUEET No. Q.J web address shown on BC(1). 1-02 9-07 8-14 C LL DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 Ico O ? 0 0 oJjj0�j 0 0 0 0 O O o V 0 V o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O O o o ¢ o o jx O Q 0 0 O U O O V 0 CO O O O _O •o � OO- O O O O -O w 0 0 L O O O LO O O OL O 0 0 ° > O O O O 0 0 U C Q C T O O O _ Q d O U 0 O O 0 U° d C O d F O + ,; n O 0 O O 0 O N L 0 7 0 0D d = O d o 0 0 0 O+N O cl N O O T O O O L -a1 > 0 VO OOO O 0 = O O OOZ�E O a Z s +LO F W 0 W O N O O N I✓ O 6H' O ° 0 O F } O O 0 0 0 C0 0 O W -� O < ° a Q o 0o o 0 O an} o a0 AmO ° a o o D 0 O 41 N— O U O� } OO O T O ° +0N 00 dr 3 O 0 O r O Z O Od YO O 0 0 L 00 0 O O 6FO 0 O O 10 00L OLLI 0. 00 ! OO O ILA O °E c _ 3} •-C_NN±O 0 W< O O 0 O O D C pO 00 Q° W ° ON O O ° UID J 0 4/W< O O >V) O pLLO On O wO OO N O D n NWO O O 0 0 7 W O N ~ O 0 O O 4) OLo D O C ��� H Q Q 0 0 'co a O 0 T 0 0 0 0� 0 y c (D H Q Q +° 0 0 0 0 0 O - L N 0 Q 0 0 + 4 0 P ` 0 > N E •7 W d0L Q � 0 � Q 0k L7 � O Q O O Q O 0 O Q Y >0 0. O O O O Q L 0 X 00 ° ° } W 0 0 0 0 a) 4- L D o V F T 0 0 0 N Z O n 0 O Q O �. 7 D L N 3 0 Z T 0 0 F y O F O O F O O N - + W aonui Q d r° 0 oW L N 0 o 0 o 0 E 0Q N -0 z OE cow DCO \'/ D P J N Y + �+ L Ow VVV V C m V VV E L N Q Dom a� �pp W > E_ � Ow.c Z Lo Eo W I I E Q Q+ N N ID NG 0 M = I Z +o uCi J N-c4) 7 L ti W LL' W •_d N > Off{ N > 0 E + 'O W F > O 0 o L + 7 > pp'n • D Ld n"Do ° Qo _ Ndc a W NMO° ^. W , D E N >- sA ALW T � In d N N 0I I= Z ELI 49 = N Q.c•-'- J .c --A Imo- Y m w a Y tV(1 c+ O Y 3 K C d 1 6' L w O ss L L L O Y O - 7 t L O_ L I F N F °O 0 Z > �=1yy a O 3 m o 3 L d 0ui w- d W 7 >} a n o+ Z a N C L' J I I N 7 W I N O N N N C D N T ` °o W 0 W E I V W E F N + W LLI J Ld LL 4 O 0 Z + L 4 P C o 3 L L IL 0 m +EI I E yl IS-}° N d W O V U I410 L 4 as L 0 a SHEET 27 OF 29 Traffic Operations Division ,Texas Department of Transportation Standard BARRICADE AND CONSTRUCTION PAVEMENT MARKING PATTERNS BC ( 12) - 14 FILE: bcsm-14.dgr EN.TxDOT CK:TXDDT ow: TxDOT CK:TOOT ©TxDOT February 1998 CONT SECT Ioe HIGHWAY REVISIONS W w 1-97 11-02 7-13 DIST COLN7v S 11 No. �J Q 2-98 9-07 8-14 O LL DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FFDj30333j-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C3322D00 j38�j V V °p°p V °V °° °O ° ° 00 O o TC00 0 0 C p 00 O O p'- O O w L 00 O O ow 00 TC O 00 O 0 00a 00 0 +p 0 O 0 Q 0 O 0 CO°VOJ• 0 00 0 0 00 00 ° U L 0700 U r 00 3++ N °° 0 0 4 0 0 o O• 0 O 00 n ° ° >+ ZP O T 00 OO /� N •++ O D 00 O� W 0 00 00 0 W +—a O 0 O 0 39 Qom} 0 0 00 0 C N 0° 00 0 LL' w\��y° 3 } ( O O U C 7 n 00 Q V +n0 00 W 3 ° ° �Zyy� 0 N L 0 0 a x O O 7 W W 00 .. T OC O d = 0 y(3 - 0 0 LL L'V)0D 0 00 00 W 0 ° W 00 G O O ]L ° OO ° V1 W ° VI Cul 0 < Q 0 CLa 0 O Pp} Q 00O 3' 0 + 0 0 Wim- Q o0 O j O O O Novi — 00 0 D 0 L L oxo -- p } 0 W o n+ F�L 00 Z 0 00 n 00 o Q c d E 0 n 00 0 0 0 0 T 0 ° T O + L N dw°L' ,v °� oo��o ° 0 0000 0 J N + LVi ,00 00 M 0 0 ''` Zo° z 0 O N n+•_ O° Q Lp C 00 y O O w L w3L0 •� O O F O O N N 0 O O 7 D L N 0000o°LC0 ` 01LyO10 °O 0 W Ld °° Y O L N E aa E DCO �� y O [� O W O°L N L N m o Z Lu I I I I > EN � I I Z o n o C O C F O.+ N N X. Ljg [ + TL 3 0 > N 0 ID E 0 " O n Q, r n •O O LO + v[ a/ -_ ) W o a 0:Np� li N N N 7 E 0 N L Z L aL w0 Z u NF C+ Z I I C I I I = N w D Y o ~� L Z + + O li Z 0 Q N Q 3 z d La } ~ IL o D J I I I I� s 7 Z I I N o W n N n W + W E 0 J E 3 W P W P Q d •- 4 L li I I I I I E I 1 O 0 p 2 ° L a y a a SHEET 28 OF 29 Traffic Operations Division ,Texas Department of Transportation Standard BARRICADE AND CONSTRUCTION PAVEMENT MARKING PATTERNS BC ( 12) - 14 FILE: bcsm-14.dgr EN: TxDOT CK:TOOT ow: TxDOT CK:TOOT ©TxDOT February 1998 CONT SECT 10e HIGHWAY REV SIGNS W W 1-97 11-02 7-13 DIST COLNTv suEET No. J ao LL 2-98 9-07 8-14 DocuSign Envelope ID:C7FD3033-E7B3-49D0-AD8D-B4029C332D38 STANDARD WORK ZONE PAVEMENT MARKINGS DETAILS 60" + 3" Type ]I-A-A Type Y buttons c o O• RASE _L❑ O O O ❑ O O ❑ O �,, ❑ OL DOUBLE PAVE4 t0 12" O M � 0 MARKERS —❑ O O O ❑ O O O ❑ O O O ❑ O CId NO-PASSING y 4" 0 y1 REFLECTORIZED L L D PAVEMENT 4 to 1 2" 0.W L I N E MARKINGS 0'- 0 Ye I I ow Z�E O a` Type I-C 1-A or I]-A-A Type W or Y buttons SOL I D EDGE L INE PRAISED ❑ O O O o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 QD•- 2oN LINES OR SINGLE MARKERS 60" 3" Sv` NO-PASSING LINE a`o W 4" White or Yellow CCE D Type I-C 60" 3" Type W buttons C O O WIDE RAISED �❑�O O O ❑ O O O ❑ O�O O ❑ O C 0} PAVEMENT 1-2' ❑ 0 0 0 ❑ 0 0 0 ❑ 0 0 0 ❑ 0 W - L INE MARKERS T- 00 Uzi r$" L 60R LEFT TURN CNANNELIZING LINE REFLECTORIZEDPAVEENT y OR CNANNELIZING LINE USED 10 MARKINGSd d d DISCOURAGE LANE CHANGING.) White +N0 00 n+ Type I-C or ]I-A-A 0 L L C E N T E R RAISED ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ 3 C PAVEMENT I O0 4O LINE MARKERS 10, 30' I� �1, � C7t �n0 OR • "E 40' • 1' 0 �I 00 LANE REFLECIORIZED ❑ ❑ — PAVEMENT COOL L 1 NE MARKINGS L— l0•�e 30• } f White or Yellow we o BROKEN Type I-C or II-A-A -x� (when required) ;a LINES wD O O0 RAISED ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ m o PAVEMENT I 3' I g' W 7 E 0 AUXILIARY MARKERS iE e �NNN Type I-C or II-C-R C OR V : Yo LANEDROP B" L I NE RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS 3' REMOVABLE MARKINGS s' - 6" WITH RAISED 13� PAVEMENT MARKERS IF 10' 11, 30' If raised pavement markers are used to supplement REMOVABLE markings, Raised Pavement Markers the markers Shall be applied to the top of the tape of the approximate mid length of tape used for broken lines or of 20 foot spacing for Solid lines. This 011OWS on easier 20' 1' removal of raised pavement markers Centerline only - not to be used on edge lines and tape. SHEET 29 OF 29 Traffic Operations Division ,Texas Department of Transportation Standard BARRICADE AND CONSTRUCTION Raised pavement markers used as Standard PAVEMENT MARKING PATTERNS pavement markings Shall be from the approved products list and meet the requirements of Item 672 "RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS." BCO2) - 14 FILE: bcsm-14.dgr DN: 1xD0T CK:TXDOT SW: TxDOT _H:TxDOT ©TxDOT February 1998 CONT SECT roe HIGHWAY REVISIONS W W 1-97 11-02 7-13 DIST COUNTY SHEET No. �J -x 0 LL 2 98 9-07 8-14 >DOcuSlgn Envelope ID'.C]FD3033-E]B3-49DO-AD8D-B4029C332D38 SHEET INDEX NL SHEET NO. DESCRIPTION f Palricio COun}y 1.TITLE SHEET ANO PLAN INDEX3 LOCATIION MAP ND DDANTITIE$ END S,TESTING SCHEDULE,A 4.'R"MNG SITE LAYDUT AND CONTROL OE ELOW 5.PROPOSED EMERGENCY PUMPING CONNECTION 6.PROPOSED SITE IMPROVEMENTS AND LEMIL T DID B.PROPDSED7.EXISTING M MECHANICAIA'L IMPROVEMENTS �hps NUECES B,4Y 9.PROPOSED MECHANICAL IMPROVEMENTS SECTIONS 2W 10.PROPOSED ODORDOOR CONT'CNTROL SITE IN AND LAYOUT Z a r SAM z 'qKp 1DI AILS 3.UPPERSLEVEL CRANEN DEMOLITION TER UYOUT AND DETAILS W R$.s 14.LOWER LEVEL CRANE DEMOLITION W Pd S cN,a 15.STRUCTURAL'EL STSTE H r 1I.HDIST SYSTEM ELEVATIDNSM _ I6.HOIST SYSTEM DETAILS AND CONCRETE PUMP BASE Z - 19.LOWER LEVEL HOIST SYSTEM W PERED MODIFICATIONS H RI.GENERATIOR FOUNDATION PIAN AND SECTION ¢"re CORPUS CHRISTI BAY 22.NEL BANK FOUNDATION PLAN AND SECTION €ee 5 s - 23.TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN(I) M m a u 24.TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN(2) 2 D, '� R6.PROPOSED ROOF DETAILS 21.BUILDING IMPROVEMENTS 268.BUILDING ROOF PIAN e-suTc � � IS_Oc' n�ElEcielcnLRLECEnoisxEEr - �. 4N° 2&ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION UPPER LEVEL 29.ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION LOWER LEVEL �� eN NMO 31.ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION ELEVATOHS 32 ELECTRICAL SITE PIAN Lt j °N SAN o ar 33.LIGHTING AND MECHANICAL PWR PLAN U Q N34.ENURGEU ELECTRICAL PUN } W N9Y5 a nu 35.GROUNDING PLANDD 36.LOWER LEVEL ELECTRICAL PIAN U a 31.ELECTRICAL ELENATIONS O o 1ECTRIGAL SECTION 39.DUE LINE DIAGRAM DEMOLITION U E A0.ONE LINE DIAGRAM NEN V al.SWITCHGEAR SCHEM91CS I OF 5 0 PROJECT SITE a k WTCHGEAR ScxAMI 2 DF s a ry 43.SWITCHGEAR SCHEMATICS 3 OF 5 IT WILLIAMS LIFT STATION A, db.SWITCHGEAR SCHEMABICS A OF 5 6602 WILLIAMS DRIVE 45.SWITCHGEAR SCHEMATICS 5 OF 5 P46 SWITORGEAR PLC LAYOUT ` 4J.SYSTEM BLD OK DIAGRAM as.scnDADerAILs V 69.ELECTRICAL DETAILS SHEET I OF 2 O ExLI s.ELECI-L DETAILS SNEET.PANEL AND DO SCHEDULESz DF ro 52.CONDUIT SCHEDULE Z 3,M CHANICAL PUN N UJ 54.MECHA NIIUL FUELS PIAN 2 Z N� Q PLANS FOR CITYWIDE LIFT STATION REPAIRS 2018-2019 0 0, z (WILLIAMS LIFT STATION) �...�,r�l �.�.�...�'.��.���..iVIN Si I � ;'M I. iBl.i� i i�:ml g October 2021 � PROJECT#21143 PREPARED BY W URBAN) ENGINEERING CALL BEFORE YOU DIG! coav qs cna sT TExas ,enFascu roe(� SKEET 1 r ,8, 354 reccereo Ow,wmc N. Pxamo.ne„es.=3,o� .,_.Is„eb.-eom ,�. wa concsrRucnoru ,�Br 12/3/21 W�e.m oe aus- �mu o.c Ovuror O(En9ineerin9 Services Oole STL-222 Rni. 1-BOD44-83]] zslrs.er.00 Y PreadEcl 14T s ra.op+�resomuaree��s\e�ao sore i.raio�,rzom-,ainoms ar,rn�sxE�rein wow e.g mom�.e er=w3 o�o,�ss eoz� X % ■2 = . «z«»>�2° � « © | ■§ / lig ■! 3 m_m S » zy° �.»J> > ■ , ° * /z�o e ` «mWILLIAMS L.S. __: mom, § LONGITUDE: (-)97.353820 ~/ WILL sLIFT s m� - s e WILLIAMS oIVE §§ § \m § �K ( §£ . k d 9 _2 � a .,z- !�TL_ 22 DOcuSign Envelope ID'.C7FD3033-E1B3-49D0.AD8DB4029C332D38 GFNFA/L xo mon nNoamesmrs ble FxfMC��ioc�inUM x�N m�u.n u�n�vErtM miNe mxmKrm 9xu RW w6Y � gg U 3ME l/!��qtx aPFx uxx�Nrgr� mps(Four Nkinaono JocNoyl - ramrcr mrm xn sx[n fq¢ .FA " lli bitizae ,`Aj}L etatloo ubmrorsm�Pun uh(py�eieoleU ama as aesaril'aain specmoauon iEzar � Is mrxun ret gree wunm smnnnsxm axNxnan All, ms Wlvrarxrormeimpmvemen¢muuaeamma > fxa.uuamrvum usne quxSmf asa exfmuf fmiciuuS acs ocomamo Mom oo o asm oa io 000tnor a Uom� 1 Ls A xi mpm m rtq¢as nun xo wvn avu q vu frxxm soar xs jai ac�ocomamo aM om oo,w tray sanoaioeoomortmi ml i � fg6r fu gfnxu nn:nugfg4 WGnaS xa nxlFlFro metro e. nxu ulunq x�N gdnwblro wR'F u.wf x¢fmmwurt xa xxf4 xor 9q z¢ €uS porary iratfic cnnnol 1 LE r nq�Y fwU9FnK��q x0��mn �f NnflKr. € Z loanon ion 9a xf ua r . wr 'W n�rocaw� � Ls ;i er. nq ro rcrL.m uoum xa irm x q�fnxc me clue nxmw � �8 oxx�m�xa�irz��wm°r°Xmia�ena®nreafs a�xr. a rFnNfE �Nqs:���,x"rro`ro���T:A2Ni°A ti'—M pVfif IE ft 0 U LEGEND rn rz fECIgN Qlr UflECIKKf N Mf E CUr SEC110N mr INUMArGR 2 Is rz R V ff N Z (nZ 9E£i N E CUr is oRAN Mo_seEts-E F ti Q mxulnc fl XflID a sEcnarf Ina sEcnonn u�rfml 5 w� �O fc oar.xqe rcrxE z:3s 2 s siq. f e SEC ION TITLE F rn 2 Q �-sEcm�scxE cif� �4i snEc�nafis oNifrf ?v j SCHEDULE OF MATERIAL TESTING: W Z W e.nNo an.xoxem ff rezn.xo samo�c m a�rznx a e. (W,D V CALL BEFORE YOU DIG! s o�mx��xxf�� � w xm�xr••m, atter w� 1-800-344-8377 , fq 's sx¢T 3 .r 54 6J aqunra u�xwr mxclu mw ar RFGORoBf4mumG xo ql mm�wa nlgswq rawrmn 5'�f L-222 UE.bB Nf M13.BJ.q] � rvn wwEcr..R arrfo �DocuSign Envelope IS C]FD3033-E]B3-49D0.AD8DB4029C332D38 .r rH rere°�reN, acre s�rvre reP a��rvePre�Ere ,�ry oXI �reEE° H�nery°N„E, E PenreMH,E�°H. '� IFITPR reoPw ,rvE acro auN z� mune xm IucJ F is"P11°—°u<°AEry;IIIST °FEIIE1SAII.,INEl,reag;f c�aa e nxzou°m xEu un oaw v e°uaa w or caneos or tow oaeenz aus. " \� rg�,XEi Ee p�g€ 0 x — _ vm,ere vrtLL NNHAH'.ST rvnv uuas zrvo aarvc. susu�°aeoe, }�6 SQl�nry a, z ,<,ory euro TI \ s w re M°reE°E'a�`E°"`°reMP'°" Y ,*t{�� W 4u � \cam Z `� E coos uc,ou anus ` �� 8` IT \� R+ e, Y 4 3 zl c,ouX� t f a —saN,aRr s 7 W o � NO,I. q ' e Mg GRLLF SO a, T v o-�s,�rvc xE SEE ll P�Pc � V t wry sExee �ffrvH,� 1 N � EXISTING COLLECTION ® v zL i SYSTEM AT LIFT STATION �PReP�ErvE �I �� ENII I E. 10, HINI ..` I E7- E�e� n IPISIl NOSE CINPOISDa / �m-- A /� c IEI Q) P-1,. EXISTING ON w rrna uury OVERHEAD -.0 T• z -CL PBGs a rvc sive / 1 EZECTecaz Cl k�r4 y E uoEe `�°� / �Eresrvc Pew<a Pee e i _ o (19 G29/ 6aw<e IPII I ih rve Prew,re G J,ra N EXITINUNCTION bOW P1.111, PLAN VIEW �6 q caul aN o p vC1 11III easNc. v. -q 11 P111 11 HIE INIE 11 EXISTING EXISTING STREET •, m ¢s IiE ER& sER P +eYutiae- 5 .Nrvry ezecTalc� wP reEXISTING SIDEWALK Ez, vEaHEno EeEc,e cu eNE A § =` ,. �3 Pec,E"'HE ccI"" s Y I xsu„ne rvew euereowc� e.o�w.meoPEe,z ErvE WILLIAMS LIFT STATIONree�°eEEXISTING SITE � PPE rvreE�arv�1—111- AND PROPOSED CONTROL OF FLOW ® ,.`: w p ,re,�Ezcz ereEz,erv,1stewArereew 1-20 x .a �: z 0 Ez TIN.Sl—PnvEUErv, Ezs,nc mrvcaE,E 0 CALL BEFORE YOU DIG! T reee —— P"IT.e CO HEST eE EEaw ,� x ._....r esHAREPPN aVµ "�' x sr+rcT 4 r 54 .e wne„aA -soo-saa ssn i.., w- I(11 11 I�R 3e IS e ze aT T H I;'JU I f:} � ccnrez crenwr,r no -.. To aeaPHcscuE EXISTING JUNCTION BOX o STL-222 -:uu.r.Boa�ro m,o e u,ea^E^9.F SECTION VIEW vvemrn S zn<.T >DOCUSign Envelope ID'.C]FD30334=]B3-49DO-AD8DB4029C332D38 i/a'F s ss.auaca soils o(nvxsI' ens nvIF 111TI-I 111111 vm o is [rsuc vRa[Rn coery 0O wFre vcre[nvf ( FovERvvosEtuTc , E — (Frvc rv�,n.ns crervrvre reoCcreou.ua [sc,ionNF. REnamucca R[ nn�E�OHI ElcroeoFry Fxov vrv�uTom01 111 FEI FER11-vu II0PPTEo IF,sRnExov[ ss,wreF anre uvooaluEUL UTIFEs emOKwoosys[ar e s[o�x(nr(inXrN,rnil) IEEEIII ass sv - s!S£K"a III REFIT ZIEIF�E vnKuw, „nrvRF snvv� z am "E' PIEPIPE W g EE re SF IF vre��revvF � tsT R o o����F 11 IIII-E 1111 RE 1 sR w IF IFAIIII IFETIE UI FEEL PROPEs,� II __� PROPOSED EMERGENCY PUMPING CONNECTION — FRONT VIEW I I I> -,FRONT EoreoounsTA,cx oaosm as nas.x vnuuai Jao Tc o. no wrenA,F vrenPFre„ a srvn«,a ,rvR Tn DIP PIPPERn °" �rvAFRE� a ry 0110 N,111 reFnnK sFFI. P101011D II F110— 'A E�T,� s UnFI) avoso U d wsrvv ccrvw�F wree�� T111 PIPEPEE,11 F rvcre�E O E wsrvv�a o vE u. rrna unu I CAUTION EXIST NG vrevvvsv %. aow N� Ell re; rvo ovERREAo '11 IF ITTE ElTalcaL g PPAP0 Pre�R %c IIIUNI nnre IF E ' rvn�,FE o o _ Eoocm mm IEDIIEI Rw m U EMERGENCY PUMPING CONNECTION PLAN VIEW III ow � R��sss N vT , r o' RFw TeL TeL z.. ,> 7e �— —� c v O[R s FRou�muL mm�wi� crem„c scxc ry Fcrr N Z vmT rw¢ [MSNO PRCPERTv INE W X I.I �� F— ,nom ve (l Eucn ( (l 1V )..� o w TEE cnurnoN.. sou xsSTREET ROW cmez a<s rerenv�n o� U FESlING G Z re W 11 PIPE FEE ELEcOV 1FFEAEF RICAL CAUTION:EXISTING I NOEROROUNO m�IIa F�/<NOennu¢re wu uL wvvsv Ul5 COMMUNICATION LINES CONTRACTOR swvom TO LOCATE PRIDR TO EXCAVATION :33 W WILLIAMS LIFT STATION —EXISTING SITE AND ® oP w 0 PROPOSED EMERGENCr=eo Y PUMPING CONNECTION E�ErvO p �....... � m U gym— cxsrvc Ov[rencAO CL[c,re cu Lrv[ � � aw1ROPERTIErvE OF IF PIPE OREC,ory `Eow Row CALL BEFORE YOU DIG! �� or 54 0 0 0 To p ,re,FFC o refs,:NIF aow Ireow are reams sr+rcT 5w,Nc no o EIPIUUNR AIP„ATT PA,ENENT a n are FIAP E o E"'N' N"ETE n + re STL-222 _ no A a� 81 CONCRETE FOUNDATION SECTION F Flaw 1-800 344 8377 __ FAl 21 t �D,,,Sign Envelope ID'.C]FD3033-E]B3-49D0.AD8DB4029C332D38 f L. y w qL q'E �pa�Ea;, are rv�s 1preDp�rer�rv� V i CEEIE i €oda a CALL BEFOIF RE YOU DIG! lElo' WA iiiiii 1-800 344 8377 z a �rwa/o �W NOTES LEGEND W sub \ Y �, vvw,o s,wnrvo 9,�uvwu<uw,s s _ opoxere Ell �Z ^„ Fl- EllEIll \�nprereurvc�m „L� T u~ao .. —__— EllEIll�srvc rorvcre�am.o.w.Lry W ado. u/� 0 rcrnv reo orvcreoe N. s v 2 ' slww uvunar k sys _ o c� N wnoN w peopsm.� ExISINc � re. cns LNE a=,rvDry umrve v d o J o !/n 'I nN o D c r ON . P �D,�Ere ! emoK ,rvD eels Nc D/a,rv1,rea — Neao z EI ecnL '; QDw r — m w MEEEE —— Rrv�/ ���� a z 111-1 p Win.+ N Q IIEEIII 6 r,�Dry p/� a ry fJ g kt — c,x� / ,��M preDp/D CI N11 AUTION. '�°ate 1 o vi eLecTelcaL 1 � s v tax creopsrv�xi FIILD Krera ou um I.EDITEa� �a,DreEurery �0EE asrvD�Dp re/uD��=,rvc � � . a' sero wNcr 54 recrore o WILLIAMS LIFT STATION — /o so ,o o zo <o PROPOSED SITE IMPROVEMENTS WILLIAMS LIFT STATION =eo —1- EXISTING SITE DEMOLITION vpreoern�zna3 DocuSign Envelope ID'.C7FD3033-E1B3-49DO-AD8DB4029C332D38 ID m cax 11 rm ARWOR EI fl mo sim mMPGMF]ER!—M Qi gprnE oinmc Fl.wcC x PVNE scow FlMxc ix xEr uELi(5 W!ilax5). "WA Q E.—E,ELELlRC.aTxoi 5xam. x IEIONn, OR OMx R9x2xx v Pxia(�5�iaGipx�g� 'V = g m rnrmxaEµ'iEN '-9'jig5� (5pUdw(wx5j iSPoSE aP Elsnxc oRrvE sxPli eRo oRrvE aPPo 4,_4 +� sxv I v=,ERM cm(5W nUZE)l �.Wxm�troR m O vx anR 5.A L "" W o suE Evmxc vtE PoR MEc QN R.—mo o6PosE Y—acll0x FlFlxc eln FlMxcS. Qi RENrn2 mo o6PosE W e orsWeACE APIM MD ATTI . Qe N mo o PME a E...NIP(5 W .) I MO OMMSE W W WE MCER ME NIP(5 LOG 0x51 EI Z au'S eR0 rETx RPE aPPoRrs urnFR rKVEE IS u'CIKx) i `- pPrE x10 OISPCg CF EISTxc Co E U W u p RWwE«I IIP a Ew=x "",P E 5¢5xa r1 'Z PNmFCi EwSnxc!�rvx' uxFR a uucn a Po559E( ) � yy "" ®,RW, x�I OMPNE W ElnW"w,PPE IT aRCE REIEF w.E(. m it ®RWo-.E i Q PIPE TE a RE WrPPo NI� . e Vv D 41 fv /wlmMxYcu �' 1 I _x N Z Q ' Ifl i �,.. 9 E a s 2 NX J r o.„ I aSG� —i :3� w MECHANICAL ELEVATION MECHANICAL PLAN VIEW € 2 rz U (� W s sx¢r 7 wi 54 .L. xrcnxo owvmc xo NO2'URIWIIY.R REPRFSEN!PPIGL LMIU!ANO Loi SGGIN ACIIML M2 f6YlRAClOR SHLLL YEli U51M RFAURLbpR � SIL-222 uRXli Mn w9e Uwvupxs SHTIV ARE Mi MU tiAYlm NwLE PERi0.9WK Nv,W w COxGN[O CEt SEE SPEC.IJC FOR MORE OEIAILEO MFORMR N a mei p ue.i K:�n U.E..bR N].MIJSRJ.oO )Docu5ign Envelope ID'.C]FD3033-E]B3-49DO-AD8D-B4029C332D38 f smu jig Qi xsrx� i x ,,xU,EY vx�ES xn Hm6 ro ff Px,x¢ Q nsrxi mt ix o<u'Mn(yx��nmw :mxroffEl O nff.,.,E,�.•m. mei 6n ep n �mxx,m - = onme mxa�a,n sanm sm,emff = ®xsrx� i. mo wu Z(7 31xsrwLL � �w�i � pmt o<aa��ffw € `i 2 w _ ®x mo wa,n wunm:t � '�28 n Prz(xm)G,rcwnms7 ®xsrwLL rK�ausu(.utcxmM, „ ®nffxa ff,�.•:mx mP,.x(.,aexxxx, c „ „- � ® ,axc xxm,s ro•mo wu(.,axnxs, x a s � ®xma,E,mmr mxfxsaE PWP a,e<,nv,s� a rn ,.• ®x=<x,ff.�•m.�xxx(�,(,roa,xm� !x,na.>s o,s>m� e o f, IoW 7 1 77 77 ®n ,am�n.,(.�„m,� ®�Mrx,xx,>s•�.•a�mxxm�, � ��� _ ® s>m T�o o ®nff.a,�,�•m.�,a®x(xn��(.,�xxm,� ®�Mrx,xx,z,•xx•a��a� � � (i-9 Emxxt7 ®xsrxx rt ® M`xi n ff ssx¢Mus ¢ink aPxxnr(.Uznmsl ® M xi n xrr vx ®nsrxi,n v m sau tlxxx)(,,rcwnm) '0' iMmx xn M ox.sPoox 6�s4 Q iMmi nn xi a,,¢(xn4 PmMe xm mes M nxs$rxr. ®iM xx xn so'asx xrxff � r Q Mme xFx,Y or puffy EMmc 9Ow �i� ® Mmi nn,Y ox Ov>z7 � ® �MxM�• i a< � PLAN VIEW — PUMP LEVEL o xP xo., POxP xo. POMP xo.22 POMP xO., Z i a c ax,EP,xE s sx¢r 8 of 54 ® xEcnxo xo _. PLAN VIEW — OVERHEAD DISCHARGE PIPING � STL—L-Z2Z PL U.E..bB NA M13.B).Oa cin wwEcr.R arra... s�a�okti.�rzmowa�zm�se�m sore u�aiati�soz—.imam.i.�mwws axo uEcx ivaxo,rtuw�se.,mamnm Pr=w3 a�o��sz soz� X )D0cu5ign Envelope ID'.C]FD3033-E]B3-49D0.AD8DB4029C332D38 IQ nsuslnu waxe nmM tl4 ® nslxi xnrrwsr evx Oln4 ®Mrxi nn le'w.nus xrt 0w4 ®iMrxs lEn n'w.u'Mx plm) ®nsusln it wrt vrss Oln4 xSTxl i a IB Mx UlN IEY 111 xn xWwl ffsnnl� ®nn!u I[n swi m vrs[ +. i§ sQ nsus In u w vu�plm) m mlxi xn aY sn¢mwM ®Mrxl x !nus[a[SIF¢xrc war ®iMrxs IEn le w.son Vlnl) Q xsrxl Is a.sMa UlN `+z g i3 nsuslnu auc vxn:piny ® Mlxi xnrr oi.snn plMl ®M—nn l6 w.stn[flm9 9I ®iMrxs len le sn¢rwaM ®nsusln iS wnxi�pl� �n Q x.III . snn awF� ® M.la a.ar nml vawE n alsexa mnu ®Ml,LL na..lw�cclaE axil alp yax! ®�Mrxl I .srool mnu `a- Alla ©xnxl n cinxsnac.Frx swwr ® Mrxl In sxa mfsnsc ®Mr«<nn l slFo.mw.w ®,Mm.M,u•om IM.c wslmm vwy pp nso,.xn u sml mxwM 49, xn nwvEa swar t+�rs) ®Mrxl xF.le'nr al xxlux alms ®iMrxl a vrmr ti.aao ray pe xsrlll . sMn awF� ® Mrla a.xnlmelse®a awu ®M—..le•ISM--Two xMMln e,a,c! O�MlaIE,.le w.eg en Mx tank pc nclaxnawk xbcsP exe taM) ® Mxlx .—nme rx� 6�MrxlIn le•aac Ixlla.m a.w xxFl wiu Z(7 O xs�.la vrmr vmc ni D Mrcl In le•al axe:xmlc w ®M xl x .r p xs,.11l a.xnnr aeaxsele x.w w.r ® Mlr<IE..t w Two ®Mrxl xF.a.Me nam r IFascw. ©�MI,,.IE,.arna•ol.xc� R w �fi(7 mei Ell Z `g w 's `In screw eomxa `In screw eomxa � � a � I Iuo ' viswo o iz � wsrvc cwuw�c cauury f jj ` :'�;.' Z lsa�w oeralJxs �r4 T�� lsa�w oerpl Jsrvscwuwe �.'. E-11 w`�,ml rRal I re j�rsnwf —111 � 1- El am �� �,'1-?l.� as,rvreslreelRreRw, a=,�rve=unPPrervPI 1.� rvcacPlR�,c� �� w o O 11.1E—1 rwxs as 110-.11 rwxs as-Ell- MECHANICAL Ell vMECHANICAL SECTION — JOCKEY PUMP MECHANICAL SECTION — MAIN PUMPS AND SURGE RELIEF PIPING 'a sna7 9 of 54 Jaz-1-o (;�ll�ll C711'Zlvll.l::) xrcoxomxnexra a STL-222 ur.aae xx ur�s.ezm � wn wwrcr../arra... s,P,o =�a�cW Ptamse,�sc�,atP�a•scm-.„ream,�,,mwous Prec rvErery srecsa.,moa���P. o. s�scm X �DDcuSign Envelope ID'.C]FD3033-E]B3-49D0.AD8DB4029C332D38 ^ csx n°�uwwu wu[vawrrvcsa�ui 4111 \ 0 a=,r°° n mu ree re\ oI a >U) ret re s`¢ 11-1 ,,„ sore�°os w U)DETAIL CONNECTION TO z � f=s� w LIFT STATION STRUCTURE I -i E;�eEa I IE DE-1 as xECEssw, Till 22.0' ,o _ n°�°r 1 �°�°,°° ° owrere� o”m�rerw°re FElI rerE a.,° o `� reo�r,oreaareu< rewn rer<n=,rere rerewrerereWre s�iremi<ere o°rvE„° . NoaEo.1�;oENlou ooreN�NEwwK E v FUEL-TANK, uxxorxc,ue,e 'O ,x ea°„ae°ure I xsui xew u°oun w° 00°o°scot c^ re°m I”, are°°� O s EM re�are aEre°„ NI O DoE°ou°�reo�too resw aaE�ooEo, reEGreu< s oN o ` ... H,� aosaosro,o� ,w,omoa. oN rn 0 GENERATOR r � r PR°°x°gsi NC PP[ _ irvrvE NO �¢ ogrez am—Ere, O I, mo ° O Z ,re<,rere rorer,re<,. ao" r,E�°a of EXISTING VENT STACK DETAIL F n Z ¢s nl,rs. I slm roe aowres r �re ao aeca cxrxoE E�e,re� are°aanre�re�nE ae°acsm If" r � o J 3 a r caurnE�E case 9 arerererere reEw rea � O �ooOR CONTROL mpreEre CALL BEFO�EYOLJ Eo� o L.: nreourvo rvEw e re °[ U DIG! 0 I o°o�,E,E o � I WILLIAMS LIFT STATION — """'wnA"• at r� °� wnrr no ®� o saa asn STL-222 ODOR CONTROL LAYOUT rn Asn<� DocUSign Envelope ID'.C]FD3033-E]B3-49DO-AD8D-B4029C332D38 9 ex& Fl£X l�iN�� CW LNC 9b ffA0 � t��4 \ PIC ptPN VKVES ro ff PUE PffS9Jff vanux \ unla euE vu�s eflENaA C7 I'PIC PPIE UNION Z a.1u vuV£ I'Ux Nall--N. I'M£INTO \• W E.NG \ R'PVC—M N/ WAA UIE µp OflENN CM(MP.) E Z ��� i PIt f R' W :X^ ENSPNG CAME 3,, (IS'NN.CNFR1 6"NN.ff11N ENSPXC PEIXNEIEA ffIL Y MIX.CORA 1000 P9 (��E51 CQIOEIE SNIO NPLI6ILL UX R R'PIC ro V'OflNN FliW 9� PXAEIflV ro 91ML (UP6PP:.W UNE O CUINOJrs1 6 9P PfN0 1'PVC V'PVC M£ PRNI a � O Vy Q _ a SEC 110N ; ? �a 0 U W W c O N m Lo J �Z O ¢Q �YW Z ? O Z 'u6Y Q O Q N auPx.naex :3 ur.Pxn f!i.V1o¢Exmn:a�N 91NL m H�xxYNxE'e.Ml� 6 � 0, ........................................... s sna7 11 0( 54 (;��I�II C71''Z1VI1.1:} xrcnxomxnesxo —. L.. STL-222 U.E..bN NA M13.N).OR � cln wwEcr../Rrr�... DocuSign Envelope ID'.C7FD3033-E1B3-49DO-AD8D-B4029C332D38 '9z as lig g � 75,_0„ --•_.. -,-Y-n"-sm—�. �am91.1 /fIC XIlPE - Z Z g3� 341 t10R4�Wrdb'4 � � �Z 4u� W Dam Iv nano rsiam Wesel � �C7 '�� 1 � o w' ixnm""sx wish unl"F°Elrm.xors) 'W 4e 5 A S� E8 P.E n mum Is m P.n .m nxsm Wia ms 9u.9uLtfN W6e0. x�i u nw �� d _ Nr Y MV- S a xa vrt /ss.w!m ruxP ' PLAN VIEW 1 �� een mx[lame ('• 9 roeolw��E Pmr - i IRRIGATION SPRINKLER DETAIL qEW N 15gI5 AFOJR➢ d 1fl51e i-I� aar r IN F•� 1W]P9 ttxl O mJ xaxmc r"nru` 001P "` rn O O ALL HARDWPRE$HPLC Yl vro"Iei a W n BE HDi OP Wl" ZE FE 5 H•a< xV-ISA V Z m. 9IX1 fn¢H fFNCE Pas!wo (Wo— f IIlI.•I5m K 9Hr� .xQ Q N Q Pasr DUA 5 CONCREQE CURB sd DRAIN TRAP DETAIL O �. ;ti _ lllVJ n xn"EL sv�ew.cai slewii OQ im:s"«u"nm>pFB.N'wwCQamm 2 WARNxH SIGN caa< I-Q POST DETAIL 10B"'�"""N1°E 1°61°'%ere fl1°10ZE c U x a ��Wm M 5W MY 12 of 54 G(JI�I I(JI 111......). � xrcoxo Wwvmc xo I I s STL-222 eses�w�.e.�w:�. ........................................... uE.aae xx ur�s.ezm � cln PAttHCi..R.atr�-.. )Docu5ign Envelope ID'.C]FD3033-E]B3-49DO-AD8D-B4029C332D38 C) 11—E1111�'�-11. , -1. Fl-.111.1111E.oI—E1om1 .�_ o Eoa��EOE���e P�,EE aE RE�=Ea R� w ��wow aRomoE�Ew,"ow n , 4i'4 Zz _ E ae mx Z 4a C+Nd v �s C5 m o" _. , i ¢F O a Amo- ----- awl UPPER LEVEL BRIDGE CRANE — PLAN VIEW UPPER LEVEL BRIDGE CRANE — LU MOTOR LEVEL TROLLY SYSTEM SIDEVIEWo W b � � PLAN AND SECTION FROM ORIGINAL 1977 PLANS,HAVE NOT BEEN FIELD VERIFIED AND MAY VERY FROM ACTUAL CONDITIONS .)... 9 sna713 of 54 Si I xrcaxo mxnrerz xo. 9 STL-222 U.E..bB NA M13.B).Oa � cin wwEcr../arra... s aa.oµarzmowaazm�se�m sore u�aians�soz—.imam.i.�mwws waw�wu exre¢owoe.g momnm er=re a�o�sz eozX )Docu5ign Envelope ID'.C]FD3033-E]B3-49DO-AD8D-B4029C332D38 jiw b;i•, Y W guy Ir . I I Z. a I ,I :—'7--T---+--,1_ Ma�Z W SECTION c LU J ------------ MOTOR LEVELz TROLLY SYSTEM PLAN AND SECTION FROM ORIGINAL 1977 c PLANS,HAVE NOT BEEN FIELD VERIFIED sr O AND MAY VERY FROM ACTUAL CONDITIONS c c� ry s sxm 14_a 54 u xEcoxo awvmc,n -. �Irii 1�Li L 9 STL-222 a mei p um.u,:e,n U.E..bB NA M13.B).O] s�a.oµ.�rzmowa�zm�s�e�m sore u�aiati�soz—.imam.i.�mwws�ow<w�KL rnus o�um.q maenm Pr rn on zz soz X si IAI 11 3LE-3 1-00HOOT'HE 5--1 5——IE —.1 ..... .... ..._,"L'T" 111—1—El -Ell 1.1--01 D-1— B —00 E�=,�T—,�E���DI-`IEFl.111H, 'LE EI�IEWHIMZPINAI LILI.D L I D I LE FEI IIIE,IHI01�EI�IE�OTHEI, """'L D"T' D IE,�OLIETI,1�111 IID FIIM EIIIIID FIIMEI IIIIIETE, ILII BE—El ILIE'IEI. I L DE FL—E I E �EILQ FIEMIZ�`�D 01 IOIFLIIII F DI.- �ILD H.1-11D—.-ID IFIEI F-1-1-1.I.—IM IE= D—1Dll"E��F� " ����d- I 70"T El F IEI`OWIT"I' M�aM 10—�F 11 11 IHII w �j "P. ... —.ID—E I—H 01 IL Fl——D5 1- 1, THI 1-1—1110110— F 3 F a Ej 111 11 IL 11——11 —1—1 4 .1 0 F DET'HE 8, E"'D 0,�o�,—... ZW 5—L�l SOLELY IIS-1— 1-1111TI-M-1.METH.D5, .......... ..._", ,_0_, —1-11 I—L I `RT.`MIDO US`�VITIL411S MILY10�1UNE301T IE ITI-111, F 1� 1- —D 0 0 1111 FlIM—K.III 1 0� F Brees q E E— —L IIIIEIIII IIE 0........ ... ..0... . ....D 11110-10, F .1m of IX M, ��E�I— )0 F—IE OF aE -5E OF'HE BE IEII—ILI FOI ILL—K F11111 II—DID By D D 5111 F HE DEI-1111-1,D-1—Fol IHOI D-1 0 �l I mrv,re,+arore is-Ery 10��Flol�ll, Fiory*o 'o IIIIEID IIIH'HE 1111, 2, --Il 11 1.11 1—F.1 TEIuvs.—0—5-11 111xurvsNFuoEcwnuFoaewc ns —01— .1 Ll LE—HI F.1 IILIIEI ——6— 6— MOII NS Z Na Ne Q W+S IlICT—L E=DOL` ern 15 rer 5 I'll II 1.110, 4i, 11-10,21111,11. 7 S2 f05 Z ��e o w ZW ee3 ♦ F-- r _ gee �a -------------------------------------------- I osine� �k I I W I I I Y S e Tory vorvsre Vi I o K FA T 0 w U o m II E s II � are 0 p w a �_ JFA FA � zJJ ore a�Lrervo � J I � ,MOTOR LEVEL TROLLEY FRAMING PLAN—8 TON UPPER LEVEL �� GRAPHICS® — orvs W+S EN NUL ern i 6 Rr 54 a= .„ Trea, oro wR Wil— STK-222 ry pkw ci.-q'11149- S3 azn &ArvE 71 o ucre Lu 1—F IF -P` E Pl� A T 11E M`1`47.21`'A' I'll Illool re-11- CE 'To"T. ki C) A ��Ol F%�Lll ILI—ION FOR rcwrc PL GRAPHIC SCALE IN FEET -1—n9lEll.N1. E-NEEII- . sear 17" 54 1.1411 11ARs,Ti�1 7-1 7 222 2 11-10,21111,11. S4 ---------- T, w �j FRONT NZw Pa �N ] Marc I 1'�N LU 2112 N to N�l SIDE FRONT lop ooE o 3,6Eocs S .1 IF11 ry 3/4- ----------------- FRONT F—FIE Tn z NN 2 1- 2' 3/1 F, c. cE 'QEN1% Dc1 3^ xo,Es "o2_- Tn "I' E21YN Z'HTF-E —ly /91DII I—E O c:F TOP NN1,ETE 91, LONG E 1E 112" N I TON PUMP CONCRETE BASE 4'�4 N1. 54 ENGNEEONG ....?.8- . . 'A_ 3,1 2 2 S5 FIFTE'OF II �nuES2P eao I IFI I IH w W T T 'loll I ErrrNrR (3t� E.1 INE na gee I-d T AE1 tj %/ TG A aJ A \E ----------- o o 810 T A T E`EE'�swnoN Ts —a, /I- Ell —01— COD—N 11-IFE—EL HL EH 5T NA PINAALIN 1.UON NEIE ILIE EMBED H'RE— ,repo.nGNorenr I E �E .LL po _%t` a, — °1P100. - NO 1111T IL/2 ILIE PLAN IN I—E /1' LOWER LEVEL HOIST SYSTEM 8 TON CRANE GRAPHIC SCALE IN FEET W+S ALL ITEEL 1.IF nFPEFL—�nE,LTH,N�/%LH�L� I AINI —LCTLNT ENG N�El, 5�EET 19 f 54 —1- -IN---G Nc FIELI 11IF—L 11MEN51-5 STK-222 21143 ............ NO,261758- 7 7 7 )Docu5ign Envelope ID'.C]FD3033-E]B3-49DO-AD8D-B4029C332D38 .a, Zz a Z guy msi max WU lox g- E.mm.rrxr.Y�a..x R.xE.x� J L _ smc R.mrmu.rm owRxm a,<xs'xoomv goo o-- rmmx ae:xx °°°` � msnm nusrm � A A 2 zc a.mrx� 9 S S N amrirw".i" -- - O O �m O oPrrv�rv��rvsraa - Y� _ E v i`' noxosa`rvr au, ar..ex se.�.axo e..e.... �usx.�.m.�rmrm N tl"9019t.xL � ,� III S 0`mnvl"M T.f e' � Vx--"i S4 ➢ w ann.ie ac MrmO" fem.i ac N Z Q O " a sn ory eu W y o= S mxE.x, onmc srxx F rn sxsmc.•a•zw na emmx me"comas rxus s"s"am x."¢w �. .. Z .r.xn r.w crx rumiwzswm se WILLIAMS LIFT STATION — SECTION 0 GENERAL Ips: Qi ,rm'san vm oom xo xtm[pxniml.m xYm semv mo xuu.msmm. W rxL i/.xT arx ixm pe0.0.1 Ar n"a xn oom aRRRw sx.mr di WILLIAMS LIFT STATION —ELECTRICAL ROOM �m�"a.�`,a,o"�mARm�s ix.n w OO x�a monrc ra.a.>-.•aow rm a.uErk arx. EXPANSION O r:A .`"m`�"m°'"mamRR-.sxmax. comma" s sno20 m 54 O.mE ErSMR"ml"Ca xYY tl4 mr(ii aNmmR Flum.m ROm mO..ie mR REf41A ORWNC Ib........ o coma m�xm xmrm a m e STL-222 p a.mLrmmxxam.mm„E.ma�axmm."xE.rmx. a pp aumr Exsmc wwrs xa mea x momc a wanmsl u�.ne xo.xi/serao � cm rxartcr..f.ztre�... s LP.oLe���PLa�s�rvry aPry�LP�otiL�rvm-wn��o��Lmws«ry rvrv��rv�rvry rvrvry�ry,rvrvrvrv.,�ory a»9 m���.a ew ea.o.rvn a�arvs� X )Docu5ign Envelope ID'.C]FD3033L]B3-49D0.AD8DB4029C332D38 3'-6" 36'-4" 3'-6' z 1 gm W gul IN Z PROPOSED GENERATOR 7 W ' gco EDGE OF GENERATOR -0 y FIXINDATION I II II II I I � I II II II I z m m L——————J L———————J L———————J L——————J n a � CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY DIMENSIONS OF _ 10'-m" 1,10" m'-m" m'-1o' PROPOSED GENERATOR AND LOCATIONS OF W THROUGH SLAB CONDUITS PRIOR TO FORMING AND PLACING CONCRETE. �' ~ o 43'-4" U E GENERATOR FOUNDATION - PLAN g6 REBAR 0 9"O.C. CONCRETE NOTES:SHALL BE 4,000 PSI o BOTH WAYS FOR TOP N V AND BOTTOM MAi 1. ALL CONCRETE 2. CORNERS OF SLAB SHALL HAVE 3/4"CHAMFERS. N 3. ALL ANCHOR BOLTS AND HARDWARE SHALL BE 316 S.S. N z 3/4"CHAMFER PROPOSED GENERATORa a 3/4"CHAMFER w y n Q 2 10 MIL POLY 2"COVER(TW.) 3 y3 STIRRUPS® (8)X6 " 24"O.C. c C GENERATOR FOUNDATION - SECTION r=s'-o• c 2K U s sn E 21 oT 54 (;�II�II C711'Zlvll.l:) xEmnnunwws�a — � a cm rxartcr..f zllu u�.ne xo.xlzsezao P X )D,,,S,gn Envelope ID'.C]FD3033-E]B3-49D0.AD8DB4029C332D38 CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY DIMENSIONS OF PROPOSED FUEL TANK PRIOR TO FORMING AND PLACING CONCRETE. ,„ s• CONCRETE NOTES: ' =lQ 1. ALL CONCRETE SHALL BE 4,000 PSI °.....+s 2. CORNERS OF SLAB SHALL HAVE 3/4"CHAMFERS. 3. ALL ANCHOR BOLTS AND HARDWARE SHALL BE 316 S.S. zC7 a Z Qs F �Z sub "' I I I I `•� — — — — — — — — — 'z a. I I I I W =gm ao. LPR.PD FUEL TANK I I I I I I I I c I I I I 4 I I I I a In u a - � E U d -3'-0° 23'-1° 3' FUEL TANK FOUNDATION — PLAN Oi N W N Z PROPOSED FUEL TANK a a 3/4"CHAMFER d zy a y5 REBAR®fi"O.C. j i= 2 BOTH WAYS FOR TOP AND BOTTOM OR F ¢� rn Q � (B)q6 BARS 10 NIL POLY 2°CLEARANCE W� 83 STIRRUPS®24°O.C. ~ 6 U FUEL TANK FOUNDATION — SECTION s vE22oi 54 (;�J ISI I C71'21v1 l f:} xrann unwws xo L�.., .... STL-222 u�.ne xo.xvsezao � cm rxartxr../zll�... X /D,,,Slgn Envelope ID'.C]FD3033-E]B3-49DO-AD8D-B4029C332D38 I r r'y */ ",,O, 7/,,,, �^r, �f� r r „ ,:� ,.,/ % ;f�o r� A r','" Qan 0 I,`€, '•,i " O ° '»wc'-/, "';'J ,:.°ill% 'O'/JJJJJH�«�1VIl'Irttrrffi l//%//;ffffffflJA!!Fk/fNA41ff0//G/%/%%o�:,i'°,,,A' g ', ;` ROPOSED CE-R., �wwH s °"�� s— RnPp3ER REEEE�nR3Ep pRnM RpPn3ER n En PROPoMC_oE�a nwouR,E e �I //%j�r ,,,, „�/�/i;/; �/1 ;�" %,' G/rJ r,✓ � i/, A lU a / ��/+H'IE //, /%%r„ r Ul. ^' i»�f %%%r ///r ";,;;r;, / ///,%�', ' .tr r /r�/ //fIj ,,,' r, /�'' ,fl,l' re�'�llirie, �� ✓//;;'i,ff � r, �n`�,lG r j% / A, Z e ¢ a z mQ Z - r.. LLF „IT q.. ';, rRc, + I,�%;a✓ �l r U r «, l '%/n»'�^ � ��, �.., /,/���%" "r/i: J/ i,/r 0�� /;� �, ,.�„.r��, =�� �/o '�'. ,:✓; r f R� G,r- rrc ✓a�:.' r T/�,. �` 1 �' woax o ,,,, ��f � ' 's„ /lli�iv,��//� // � EHo r, J)r „roi , „ r nr�..,"✓✓lo" ., �/ Jr,r' ,�.. ,,,,,«/%//iA ,Ji Oma, i .Hun Ooa xis i%i ,..� � / "r/r/ %�/f, '���/� � i m n% it l'✓ " r f rc,„"O,' „'« / J� l/ c au 1 l 'r f /j // ,�,�iri���� qwr„or ii,,; � % � R"R»,„», R,�so�9 rte, r �/��/ �„ ,��� '/i tic 'iP. d f,�✓ /rig 1 , ";�� / /f ;, �� r ///>/ / Ar��a r»,,,, �”, f� 111%r � /, ///'/ rj//l//a, r//l',', f� � r a a �% iNl/„ %���, �� :� r /i,,, �"G�l i'J �� ,�i"i� J�1 ��i°,.,•/11 ✓ r// /f" I l fr, lF,,�4.// �%/�f/, �� f1'i» /, In//w;",�/f «n.,� 11/ D/r';;",, rro,o,�7N /�J � ,/� �/li. �� � / A / / w f J / i i��➢,n+����;"" a'�/� //gin;:,. ®/, It p, /I � �/ � lfl� !I /��v, �l ,'/, :� Oi«j%//. ',/ `r. / a v J / v snrrf 23 or 54 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN CONTROL ® (.I rlal Irl lUl... 'a oRaw,r1 no OF FLOW OPERATIONS STL 222 #..114.3.. X )D,,,S,gn Envelope ID'.C]FD3033-E]B3-49DO-AD8D-B4029C332D38 (m-e1 uxnmury xOE (e0xle'I xrPw 6 qm-51 (&YVI vo Ew Icm ) \ PB aasm cusm (a•xa�l �F2.5;fi E]Ro cam-au i -Au �� � f.g�P caxay (�xlA•1 RYIRK ZONE „s wu .r sere xrw ®� .r aPrn mwNrxw nor wren\}\\.,II (•n'In•7 Rx-nl xns me it rx�w\�'rPorrPo 4 • Z_ ekeV'1 `1 W P W 3u� SNXv®rxE ! • • •y--r� � • �PKmaO TAE r a FZ -¢ 1J-/-/T�/• C5 , 7 Z no(n r,m���exrmEs I•I• W � I•I•I, j � � m�. I• R ro(»I,ff I NaxxN nAa.c,PoPo.mRry s (m-•u I (aYY1 — a • ENO O U W °cman NtlRK ZONE � U d _ mPo rPo��w-1—�rw (cy�y' ffi� unxlmMs«c«aw.uNRo �x..,•r.. r �'aFl o _ mm5xo r,.E a IxaEX m�M:r�a I FfFNQ ( :•I 0' � PROPOSED CONSIRUCTION AREA m-m . ProP090 flu ccmPozm Bwu (a'A6� ! ProPPOSm CIEVENON SAM WA LANE CLOSURE DETAIL Proro m wnsmu roN vxAxa as mmx6�11 ,x°fl msEa GENERAL NOTES: aaEX.r.EPa�acn •N Nwx1m FlXfS (E•Ya•1 C,_—= ox uxlmxa E"ME u0A o—plSLron a iRA14 (ml-m) cuPormr reux. rnxYlc caxrrmx oEWCEs mo ares unr xEsrsaxs. v (aka'1 E em uxxrxx e,t rnxsc caxrxw oe cEs..I.me mu—or me o m MEPR0PO4D fU91NG NdAV mNA/POfliIHE d xn"�6 xuE aa92 ¢xmrcncx Pvaaa. 'N OA ONNBxSIBMMROER55sxONPo11 K OUPoNa MN V InOmPolnnOx OVNCfewc NESSA(£9(x to O ] ¢xrRKIOR snuff sualrt.wv PnaPOan xENsxxS ro cm MFAa•4n muFlc[oMxOx Prws,m ME cm 1wiFK • • \ i} �J�. me "I BPP.wmmr 11 RIEN A N xuuN aP s rNArs 'm NPuaExrnnax are • • ., r- a Pvsllxc mflox Bowos sxlui a x Pure exe aPwa1:mR w..N aP gax cnm P—•i ME Ea -NE � P.7 Bro x.mux xPm,=L.a7S'arA S=6E Ix PrAxr ax.xa mux xxr�.aPonn amNs a.x.6E ffnlxo r� ..............................,,,,I,,,,,,,,,,,.......... o TABLE A,w =GIL A1I�Ix sEa.rE xr,A.Eaannws sXONx. ,„ TABLE C PflOxOSf➢-R(V)Poll£C0PoII0 J N TABLE Bmors ePNlw PflOP030—IN. PRaPosEn Pwa w�mer NXAN BONA (4) 3 } •w rrmm u�m¢ a. .r an a.. SPxa Spa pAIN9 IN FPMi W PROPOSE➢ 'z K me mu• rmn r r r m.m FUSHIXG NAOV BONA S 3 0150' 165` ISO' 30' 60'-]5' m •120' gl l5' }5 L•60 205'225.245• 35' 70-90' I80' 25 55' mrx VO 265'295'320' 40' 80'-100' 2V0' l0 65' 6 w nrxwp •res wm •ar wm •om , xavu '° ra aw x•s rm eum• am PO 45 450.495'540' 45' 90'-110' 320' b �A CHANGEABLE MESSAGE SIGN LOCATION n rn xue un 50 500'550.610' 50' 100'-125- 400' 1p �ppsio mE stems IIIA u m I 55 E WS 550.605.660' S5' IIO'-140' 500' b 280' e 1 ` 60 600'660'720' 60' 120'-150' •600' V15, a �xm E S sna724 0/ 54 r ` 1 en0 reExnnxa OxE(11 ^ ftGORO ORnN'mE x0........ 65 650']15' ]SO•85• 1}0•-165• ]00• da ]o ]oo•715 640• ]o• 14o•-ns• •600• za sss mNPM POR 1XAi PXASE. re umlx mxsrxmr.,lax Is $TL-222 ame n uremrr LLE JOB N2 M/)5.8).00 f PMLRi R 1111)... s:1--a�rzsoou•mwa�.m�,nemo zone L---ll-.1—LI—L-1 Awa�vrrne 1.1-"1-mine.r= --xi-1 X )D,,,S,g,Envelope ID'.C]FD3033-E]B3-49DO-AD8D-B4029C332D38 '9z as g Pvt vwv uervuluiens jig All, Zguy --M PPE -2- PLAN VIEW 2;PLANVIEWPROFILE VIEW - CONCRETE PUMP SUPPORT DETAIL—JOCKEY PUMP a e O U Q X U O U x I °p W wmrt a o u.. O f/1 CL N Z Q N O m " �uElx U. iiu rm rtnnv uvrr. rr a O Q N Lis STANDARD STAIRWAY DETAIL o U b /Al STAIR LAYOUT PLAN VIEW n.rs. (SISI 171'2111 I::')" acis-250, 54 xrcoxo mxnrelc xo. U.E..bB NA M13.B).O] � n wwEcr../arr,� s�aoµ.�rzmowa�zm�se�m sore u�aiati�soz—.imam.i.�mwws coxc wua e�e.g maeine er=ra o�on aP rzozX DocuSign Envelope ID'.C7FD3033-E1B3-49DO-AD8D-B4029C332D38 z1z, a Z Z ". W 's 6 v sys,Eu aaasEo coKaeorao` uguc TaPEeEo iuwu�iou aquas — z a iia'PiI'IDF oT s.uou uvs1 uc-11 so e ssso s'Slea o U uvu�ou V1 I,xj as�o Rom o-11 `1 IE PIPE PE�_DETAIL [TYP.) PROPOSED ROOF SECTION I ry1—L Fl—n<ry w aR 1.1a.°"°1-1- .. m 0 N W J N Z F z F p a <� o � o a ry s:126:541] Qy��o uea y;�A U£]B Ib.MI)SBJ.00 D,,,Sig,Envelope ID'.C7FD3033-E1B3-49DO-AD8D-B4029C332D38 MOV ND REPUCE BUILD NaVf ANo REPu REMOVE AND REPucE BUILOINs ROOF v � #® Ex Si NG WIN � � z El. PAOEs � PRE5s0RP Ell LNTRE � v ROR c �� w a REMOVE AND REPLACE BUILDING POST nNOR'I'11 PRESSURE WASH ENTIREFAu1' U= REPucE BUILDING EXTERIOR ... O E OE AND WNooWBCE REMOVE AIR REPucE % t wnr Ex Si NG WNDOW e5 Ali^;f I 411 r PRESSURE WASH ANO 1 mm o UEROR � � 4 r " gi .,.....n.: � 4,,L o �I P I s o yl 1 _ _ ca W a NOTES: �t9 'NG om(ryu�miw s U E Is,IRN. o s. 2626A or 54 (l 111 (l l�1�11:.:.:.::.:.):• ecroreo Nw,wmc No. STL 222 s..,.r L08 N0.26„5.8,0° v PR0L55,x 2„A, D,,,Sign Envelope ID'.C1FD3033-E1B3-49DO-AD8D-B4029C332D38 ca €i# EXISTING GUTTER TO BE REUSED,INSTALL NEW =�e LASHING EXISTING GUTTER i0 BE REUSED,INSTALL NEW FLASHING zC7z ear BW- T T PE IR 9 0 CTRS W TN o SO 3 OW L V2 IV2,;x 3/Is CR-1 --- EXISTING ROOF STRUCTURE Z p � Z S —F ado. Lt= IEEIA p U N NOTES inwc wmwc neouE me j ti - U d REMOVE AND REPLACE CLAY OR—8RIOGtlJG m} - tt COPING _ -ELs rw sorvxc.o winirvs V EXISTING ROOF VENT E (LOCATION NOT FIELD VERIFIED) N:alL AT IN6 CON 1191 rvnuln�ory,o umw m , OVER G LV.STEE OfCK� I rvEw unu IL-1 soul EE1e ss N REMOVE AND REPLACE EXISTING EXISTING ROOF VENT REMOVE AND REPLACE CLAY m ROOF WITH NEW OVER ENTIRE (LOCATION NOT FIELD VERIFIED) COPING N z BUILDING o J cc REMOVE AND RLPLACE CLAY rn coPlNc ROOF PLAN N ® s Z OFSCALE Ts J 3 J ca G U ........................................... o (;�LIFII C71'21VI1.1::} ... — 5 4 ff RG 4 D,,,S,gn Envelope ID'.C]FD3033-E]B3-49DO-AD8D-B4029C332D38 ONELINE SCHEMATIC PLAN GENERAL NOTES DRWILLIAMB 0 E1 11.1««OLDIE aN mNDIO,IINm DO N «MAN EDN,M DEMEmaN�D EAN NEw<<E"M<A waMM ASL e�I MILITONPE ,morn D1 PNN'A IM ,a�aT � � MAA, i � 6 mTNAIMEI NmO TIMNUD IP 'OmsE EN ME,EDEOP O ID " M 'soio Y L « FAI- a;.IN 11-1AIo 8111a �,EMDE ENEA. MA �'y IEOE III EIINIEo �maaFE l`A1II mE<AF1L sEXIDmo s,E. aP mFM I NILEIE NnAMA.EN"I IDNTMA"DM SMAEE NIDI 1111 NEus Al s MEAIMmANI/01TEmsIME THAT TME m.ME SEEM wDI�oTe ANI m Nm NE1111I,.1-1111 OEMPINmT AmEaINA ImmNID FDI< .e M�ME wMaM.as DM ,NE DI w�Na�E � = MF DF".am mmAE�. - MDME MMM EDMm�m >.:_. ",A mMMEM,M M EMMEM � � ANO PMamMF � DILI ON FN-1.11IN EM,�ME E �EMEDMD E-1.mMDDM ImI�IEMEmIII FIN muP",�DN oFAUE CIK E1,�,EN�MDDs�,IDEAS N AID"'IFF EM1�M_L"I Ill IIING �3 ,M Ns a „�E �POEAA�NE LEE, °" TAI DELI 11-�N,�M� N1I AN �ao�tio��a�,N� N E ATA�EENMEOTOM FIm�DM MEAEMED `" mO��.DED N 'copE MmMM EM 1�m E E EDM N ENE E EMEMEa. EEMMmEM A E � a MIFF w FI,F"SAF MF,A. -IN AETDM,D AMA<<e�MEMam FMEM ANE. N AND NOT Awe m TO-Nm A-E BILINE PNOPE-OF T FI1M�DN MEFIMED ,OAS ON ,ETm.ME 1U1 ON INEI�m.O -ENE- iol roNNNADE�,E"NE o DNEEEE mNE�EE ENnMEI%E EM,�N�ENF1E ELIE EE MEPA�DEE lm ENE ANE�NE a NNEM�mu E'EENE,E AM I'M,'EM _ENE_ L—INI-Mm11U111- oA"m w uREx/DwuEasA sansrAcuDu AiA UE cost TE TME W 9 Z 'HE INDNI 0I 11 EDIT eM�EM PEN aN TEM.ME D<<AA DNINELFY D�-mEm�u �EE T AAADF�A,m wNN mMP,mDN D,,m wDMA. AIIM�AA�DN D,I�D MEANS�N�EE w iou� EMDIND Mao IIIEPts st NE coupons. RaidA ucA-11 PF g~i NINNNI'ME ly 11g Al aAII 1EMINE DEIIE oN nccm Wu.ou oM Ac - __ —-- FIL ,oP AMUF M�mEw sDMMM,us DOP�Nc cDNA, .IN°AEuoe MANm.1,T�Nm LM PAI mceEAsmc naw POwm AA —TEE— INDEFIFIIND,aEPNONI mNDID AS N FIN I ANre EOM mI�PMmT PMw�Dm. M T T M 21n 1 AMPEaL.uvwLEIAIAue sure TM a --]3:D um°�M'm LIF DN NES LEE IA FINE �ND�m,m ohms;o Eewsx uDa ED. uF M wu swE ME Mex FID a sPEcreD EeE �NEMFAs�ND rmw " a PtiasE umoP sMaww Er r�MEM ALTE E L1 FImAFTUM�oED,MEA 6Ewi�ADm.EN °"mo- �m DMDIND mNN�m�DN L VAI ALL 1E.PATE MA MDEpiM�N -- -- IF �__ 1D sE"SEES MIIEss�To 11PaTaA�MITAm A FINE.E a m��PE PNmD�Em,M�E FILL ♦ EENPMIM EMDIND FIMMImDN S.SFM AMA<<MF mMN�AMm."1 mmM 11 x FD 10.1 L MEroM ANE MEM;EP.EM MA.Na o Ly DaN e '�� �ND�EEIFFP"m��"�`�ti,°EM - Pim PILE wIm DE MNw�wm FEM DM 1 IEE wMM MmI�MEMEm'I'M'`E SIIMM„�PMAAE oF,ME PMmEm. F a<mwED o NorewEE.aosm -----� �P ucm PEm Ars sNAu I�PPEPmFA sEAa1 a 1 msumA.EN 1D Al, III}d Q�, -E LED _ ” E uP MA�N,wN,M��N,FaD.11"1 saFM PmF,MA,m _ lui x v , AI=��"LItumor, �P°s'°°° NE E Al Mmmem INmE1 AA Eon.° svn,EM�ND�EA,ED S,IMDA sIPPDW FIM a<F PAWS Er MAeEwAA.RNs a<F NrmN DIFF meD�N m<<P,r MAawAAs. D�ADmm,F U o �IlI IN o vuowr.aNE rvn eA,wc ,NEMuu amMEow _ - =FD4 FEE W,mNm.1111IAAF oN FIE NEwAll E.T„�NI Am-,m�MMss ADD mo�PME o ND FLAIL O umo�coNTu oP.nux coNTUTs - � MEc Pm m�nM�w muum�ou - �Ns,MDM�"DmE� M _ u 11ETALLIA VP.1 awa0111 um E 1IAANI mcrosti<Es. ,�oNs�uP IA TN, NT-11�s,o FOMN�sN.11ANIPOM � T Q to�uAeee� moa '0" TMEeuoslm cEmeom AMD aEOF EAL mmPMEm v IM MEP�Ew Puns usI Foe nu mmPUEm NDo<Fore wE�Ns,IDMEN tD-oeNEI ° LIGHTING MD XTTINLnsm `°°PFNx mmMOEamm 0 FIFE Moomm UPINS 010 mIIMEMOME.EOMax uR w111Ns. P oD.D�. oma mmTm AT M 01 _ LLOTIN ALL II LINE'I � A io a�m"°a III. mmoM swD • MAF: mTm IN wEUE xrm uoEe ESM PFIP�E��IIcIAL iMsuLATOMI.111 All To IE w Arnim.MOEirr iDETAw.TioM Ee Peom �+wAallow IZ- n MumsMALLLIAE '' ,N�FINI—Oe ANUF PIOND1 mNTwxuwT-1 D�sPDs OF FIAT AND DENII DIe�ND 11—lpN AND OIN-Poe.pN F g aaDNEm1AMEA NEm mN,Mo�PANES § 0 _mFmo1 L P1.11 11-1Atw PO.1 AND L�DN,�NI DII�ND DEMOm�IN AND FIN-00TIoN PIP oM6" IME,aE IEI 1. ,�, Nm,m -owousn AND PEMUFE sE E - �s,aNawos. 0 0 AT LAIN.F-ml0 "OMA,E,N A D EN N EOORD,E,ME Em OF,NE DEuaOON re.RmIDm FDD,NE PDO, _ aM waM.EM MEs,E E EMMME Q Q ILD`NAIEl T, `"' ® mm 01DIamDMll 11 NATo<tA.DN ANws IOMPs.11H-11 mniON IF I I1 AND Em11 o N RECEPTACLE GENERAL SYMBOLS o Z Kq DO s oD s x uenmc - ou SNI I)l TDEF © owoeoE sIA,�EM-SlunmoP Ma.A �MSluw�ous LA wrnMMo�I Msw rnMSleun�oM �ND�mm DM NmFa MEMDa Mm ,E.AND EaEND E.�A,� E o Z EE 1,.01E>1 Fm eEmrum vmM Paha a FETAL f of°R PDm EEEmMINALL PILI om °"wo°M '�N W oEra�NnME EDa,�DNA wDN ENMmm Dm�EM aNE MeI M.w~aMEM�MD��m DM EMawIME1 EM MA MD�MALI MM w VE =<<°AME,t�IM� IT NIa °� �,��N o E o MEmMMEM o -AR TI P-DE o PNmO�Em,M�I IE,� EM .�1Am UE,"LINE SDE AEME DE,<�E ® mI�PM�N,NO,m E<.aN,a � � �EEP,FIEE EENEINI ME EENDOTA'AONII-PI"I,LEE,E EN AN E�MEIMA. �� Q mPE aim wN,�NA N 120�2TM D �i H ERE DEAR 0 mumuvn Nmm pRPWINGS ARE PRIMEp FROM PUIODAD as X17.TO PWM FULL U Tio/nrv.xDA swnlr oa trzs/rzsw.wA MFewAaE AAAANOIIFOAN EreE ® CouM[ClioM TD EOViPu[M Mmm N PDF VIEWER SE CIISIW SCALC TO 2D 9. U .� y FIE.NM�E o,MEFw,1� T� T ® �swm RD GENERAL ELECTRICAL D SCOPE OF WORK w Ft,M NNIS At,ISEIP A. gL, sMEwu EN DMnw�i mIEITIIN ITT � - 3 F�*,IMF,APE Aa F�*,IMF ArAmIFF E T T H _ AND oe u O,261-00 EME FETAL NON rusED .msm DM Naa o N.re e - G �s" MERE UETAL MD ET01 AND AFF 1PEE�E�EAT�INA.-F A PAN<<AND P10111.1 �" serrF 27 m 54 Aw�TrN AIIAeI�F,A: .m �NA,,.,A,�DN ENE Dm sw,eM 6 `� aMa ,NIEE wA.rm,EN EFEMEm o IAmaI srNEN a, x .p (�I IT11 I. FIM SMA<<MDMSEPamM MmaM .wo.me ,M � DIOINDND mNDIr,ON PFGP°`° c" 0 S7L m222 No_ SEI N,Nm mHMpoTTE" ,MIEOreIAO DME III'A P MEF D EMEDM D NmE�mA NOMI11 TO wM IM DmIE A m'IEam S I I .................�:......................... aN�i LIP-::N� DocuSign Envelope ID'.C]FD3033-E]B3-49DO-AD8D-B4029C332D38 OWIW T ua �A � S�+ E2 \ SCOPE OF WORKWIWAM ' ,00rea�ovlaF vzvRLUAIaEGDIS RRu oN SYSTEMS.AND REPLACEMENT ofCONTROLS& - I" E Alm Ncwoes NEW encuuP GENERATOR AND DOOR COMROL II IEM ANO NEW PUMP WMRDLS&SGNA S 0 0 0 o PANEL EIELTRGAL ROOM SliLLL BE ENLARGED TO ACCOMMODATE NEW Cj LS R LEAR NE ELECT' NG ND HA C SHA L ABED DUPING LETS MECHANICAL T ALL WORM to BE ERP LL DEMOLEli KEYED NOTES gaga iPUEm O COORDINATE WITH PER TO REMOVE H80V,3 PHASE ELECIRICAL 8� REM VE MER Lu I s 3TR"BEFLOWESADNDGMEEREO[NCDLOMSURERIDE BEEFREPDLACSEOR EO Z 0 OPMEPIICE 10 E REMGVC FEEDERS AND ABANDON CONDUIT UNDERGROUND _ „EE RENDVE AIL ELECIRIED swRCHCEAre.MolaR CONTROL CENSERS 0 uBHTmc NEL,CORDER,P Ac UNIT,As,PUMP rUwRals. w 4� srADA PANEL mNOun AND wIRINc. �xx olsnuuLn u A S) FROM eaTH uPPER AND LOWER LEv[Ls)LILT PUMP MOTORS. O REMNE SCvu ANTENNA AND COAX'CABLE, \ �© EN NEL I P I 3\© 0 sRAOIa Ta El OF SUX- BE msTUIBO w NEw sCPC MADA PANEL AL RTu PA TO FLOW F / 0 I UP BIT AND TOO POWER AND FLOW SINI FAST M � K FLOWMETER O BE REPLACED. SENSOR CONDUIT TO BE _ A RE-USED . INC U a v AS s AND INSTUL NEw PRavIOE N[w ss CvvER Ne PLIES. }} Vt c L d -______ ___________ ____________ - RE Illi x w L o i TrucE OUT CRANE HOIs 3 BAR PcwER IAL.CRANE s Bu _____ ___________ � OM.REMOVE CRANE AND POWER RwL AND PRcmDE N�EFCSIOONINO S1Vlf POWER GABLE roe NEW CkWHN015I 5E j" TRACE OUT AND TAG POWER TO LIGHTS LIGHTS TO REMAIN AND ), TO BE RE-FED FROM NEW LIGHTING PANEL'L'. TRACE OUT LIGHT ti swncues AND REMwE.INSTUL NEw BANF of SwncHEs FOR QEnSTINc uculs. V --------------- 2 TRY WF E / TRACE OUT AND TAG EXISTING WHEA WET LEVEL SENSOR FOR LIFT O STATION PUMP CONTROL AND REMOVE SENSOR.TRACE OUT AND AC EXT LING WET WELL HIGH LEVEL FLOAT. FLOAT TO REMAIN AND TO RECONNECTED TO NEW SCAM PANEL, W LT ITII "_ �/ ELECTRICAL ROOM WALL TO BC DEMOLISHCD l0 ALLOW FOR W --------------------- O ELECTRICAL ROOM EXPANSION, —I REMOVE CONDUR FA WIRING TO ELECTRIC LOUVER OPERATORS O Er W TRACE OUT SWITCHES FOR DRV WELL LIGHTS AND EXHAUST FAN. ti O Cl_ O REMOVE AND REPLACE LIGHT SWITCHES SEE SCHEMATIC11 11 ED Q Ncl O REMOVE IF AND CU UNIT. V1 z N O REMOVE FEEDERS AND ABANDON CONDUIT UNDERGROUND. ti O o _I N ti VF O ' �Q ~� U S' ii — w ® 54 WILLIAMS LIFT STATION U""E�CD ImILIII3IsIIIeI,Is GsNEEI coAo28 or 1, 1 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PLAN GRAPHIC SCALL vV L�. ArenWmo u Hexa e•_,-0 a STL-222 COX PRO,CTS DocuSign Envelope III C]FD3033-E]B3-49DO-AD8D-B4029C332D38 D WILDAMSMu E3 DEMOLITION KEYED NOTES apo+44^a, -y OEx IRS FATAA x ANo Srares TO BE re MO ED AN Sp'S'''.j.B�.✓y eEPIPCEA W LNEWLv WNFlOURED SETEOF STAIRS OO RECEPTACLES&AIRINCATOEBEAINSTALLED.E. EW OFi '�.,P '�v iaao ORACE OUT TAG(4)SUMP PUMPS POWER N CONTROLS AND T EMOVE. NEW PUMPS AND CONTROLS TO RE INSTALLED, roAee REauTAI wIT NEw FaIE�ouTWO A ROMMEE.F T F RE USED.SEE ALSO MEciuN cAL PUN. Lu �AB DDT AND Fxr RES TO RE A.(ANO MO eEN'N PER FED FROM NEw o w 9 e LIGHTING PANEL f /f MWVE FnIFE MOUNTED ABOVE-1— n1FES To �ec i Z TOP) � DE SALvncED To owNER.REMOVE CONDUIT, �� �•.,L +� %R N(�)LGNT FXIURES MOUNTED ABOVE HAIRS. gi REMOVE NoUP wOFF(B)LICIT FnureEs MOUNTED AL a ALL. REMOVE + a9 UT EoFre uNDERNEDROUTAiLmBOLD EA59croNDNs¢eoPTRoaLNRLATaNs OEaR NN ABSLaOPTEA AFTER l ° BEMovAL OF ALL MOTORS AND CONDMS oP P Plop P111 «, + O REMOVE PUMP LocvoNT SWITCHES AND aNDun. ' TRACE OUT HIGH LL swTCR.snncR To BE RE-ROUTED w U -�' o To NEW scADA PANEL So }}� AIFF' AN ����. 71s� 13 mow_ I �o 30 l¢J O 5 / V IT I . � W d L... ! z Ol -. M a,. I LNFL o w of -. Ilh ... � � _.... ._ '.( .... Q O N w .... F 3 r suur� F- N � o � r�� COF z p — 0 0 oct: wTITo m � _ ct: Q � w o ® WILLIAMS LIFT STATION YE.SEA uo.zsns.e 0 L� 1 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION LOWER LEVEL PLAN .ises �,re EnmB Ga R...:. :�,m�( V Lt r EEA N`anRAox xa.F a�9�" - A Preop cT DocuSign Envelope IS C7FD3033-E7B3-49DO-AD8DB4029C332D38 f All WIWAMS DE4 s, 011MIN �� TI w pp 1 % ✓; a ' P %l/I rry(i "aJ' I 've va FAV Lu / t, ri Z:LE011.G ii, ! 1 DEMO PHOTO K2 DEMO PHOTO 3 DEMO PHOTO 70 30 30 GENERAL NOTES r, LSEE sHEEI 8 AMID 29 FOP PHolo oNu2 % / r���il✓/� /( //f� LocAS ONss� DEMOLITION KEYED NOTES RE,= l AND WreNn E c> 0 PUMP ;ren sF ANE,CONAUT AN'10IS f MP CONTROLS,scAon PA corvou REMOVE ALL ASSOCATED CONDUIT AND SUPPORTS TO(s) oIII d Q �>'I ,,,F (1 O ALLVAGEREMOVE COR ARER CONDUCTORS. CL III p x c / 1MOTORS, DU &CO / f ALL TONS N FLOO CONDUIT REMOVPL. o �� PANEL GADO TO BE INSTALLED IN NEW SCAPA PANEL / � O SI NG MDS RPDIO FROM EXISTING SMDA MIT c �A l t 5 REMOVE ALL UN USED COMDUIIS TO DEVICES AND rfr( f, µr O sualPOliTs N DRY WELL LEVEL,REMOVE url—ItvED �_ t 2 y10 FLOAT TO REMAIN AND TO RECONNECTED TO NEWS a r. V v l¢J / f�. RACE OUT AND TAG EXISTING WEl WELL HIGH LEVEL FLOAT, DA PA EL, REMOVE E EXSING ST WELL LEVEL TRAM SBITTER, Q NEW TRANSMITTER TO BE INSIPLLED, REPLACE SUMP PUMP CONTROLS(9 TYR). DEMO PHOTO �51 DEMO PHOTO ��DEMO PHOTO 0 O 70 30 70 O REMOVE ALL ELECTRIC LOUVERS CONDUIT,AND ALL ASSOCIATED WIRING. z� EXISTING FLOWMETER TO BE REMOVED.(RACE 00 POWER O pT e AND FLOW SGN&CABLE, SIGNAL CABLE COMPUII TO BE I. r Y RE SED PROVIDED CONDUIT IS LARGE ENOUGH FOR NEW Q N z Og WALKWAY TO BE REMOVED, NEW STA RCASE ALONG WEST 0' ti WALL 10 BE INSTALLED, o � NEXISTING EXHAUST FAN DUCT TO BE MODIFIED TO ALLOW NEW STAIRCASE 10 BE IMSIALLED,NEW FAN TO BE m INSTALLED IN DRYWELL, W VF O RACE SIT POWER&COMTROLS TO EXHAUST FAM AMD 1 � "/ G) Y�j /ilry/ �F II REMOVE FAM DISCONNECT AMD CONDUIT MEW FAM AMD Q —I f ppr rA� � Powere/PUMreoLS TO BE INSTEALLED, GE: �i T I w OF '4�„ 1. ,Ir t ss� �t ,�/ vra!� /nl �� �N• TE.f a:,i l41 �((��J).. .aas'w:eise°s 0 sNEp AT 54 — �71 DEMO PHOTO DEMO PHOTO DEMO PHOTO f Hall.M e DRaw,m ua. C:;C7111 70 70 30 S7L-222 0 "'U",SNL re "AA Y PAD,rT DocuSign Envelope ID'.C]FD3033-E]B3-49DO-AD8DB4029C332D38 DEMOLITION KEYED NOTES RRWIWAMSN�E5 TCWE 10 AND TAO LOADS 10 REMAIN, REMOVE ELECIRI(?L GEAR.ONDU T,WIE,AND YT `A O FLOWMETER TOR BEDREPIACER�STRACEOM AND TAO SENSOR CABLE ANTENNA CONDOT FDR E SE `„ oAe�L�� v O 2 W W 9 Z @pp 7� X96 Z qy� W g�ij WILLIAMS LIFT STATION 1 NORTH WALL ELECTRICAL DEMO ELEVATION Q31]I /B-O.— BE,-O.-o' U — 77777/77 ��luioWw LL U �? o � � E ti U Q V Q z � O ti �� J Q N z �� O Np ti � ti WILLIAMS LIFT STATION �21 SOUTH WALL ELECTRICAL DEMO ELEVATION wV' w 31]I SpiE J/IB'-1'-0' g 9� O w �Q } 3 w 0 sNEp eaTu Tnmre�ae�n"rol������irysry�e�s GRAPHIC SCALE co 031 or 54 sxormormPrxwsv� �as,T--0.P,��w,��,as.,s,,,-_a al ll<�r Drenunmouo. 0 STL-222 / ro��,s,`iuv�s.oe���� = vPreosccT DocuSign Envelope ID'.C]FD3033-E]B3-49DO-AD8D-B4029C332D38 I( �_ n __ PEP PowER POLE oFWI LI SAM ua_ - WIWAMS E6 Ta 0 CONSTRUCTION KEYED NOTES DRED PN 'a 1 � GRMw (T�wi D PEP PowER POLE 0 �oDeEDwoer ws cEEEcTIOLTr LIN CAN ELECTS cOPowER(PEP), , CONDUIT 10 NEW TRANSFORMER LOCASON. CONTRACTOR SHALL PAS 1 ALL COSTS ASSOCIATED WILD PENDNG NEW SERNCE,0 S,E. .� 0 ISENSOR IN MPNDDEE uslNe EOIrnNc mNDDIL. PNsnIT,Ee TO :A 'T, 0 ODOR cDNTeDL PANEL. DR CONTROL DLoweR FEEDERS FROM NEW (7 E J - o CONNECT WATER SOLENOID�RE TO IRRIDATION CONTROL PANEL Z O PowERwNo o RoowR`NE:oT°DEF AF°D NRADR°°o W �8 SWDCDGEAR,ESTOP,AND ANNUNCIATOR PANEL MUSEE EATON FUELS _ W 9c Z LAN DRAwmc. Z 6 INSTALL NEMA 9X SS.DISCONNECT SWDCHES WDH AUX OCMACT Z Y"-- -- O WIRED TO�IN DDDR CONTROLAN PANEL.MOUNTDISCONNECTCONCRETE w t SWDGI S STEEL UNISTRUT SUPPORT ANCHORED TO CONCRETE ITHg saNL[ss sEEL uPRDwPRIS, E �.. b } O PROVIDE AND INSTALL NEW PADMOUM TRANSFORMER. ESTOP GONEW o� cY c U E S i c vT _ � i ExlMERc l �CIuII lK DLEE oU Exl TiNc Exsnxc ovERDERATING RCE Ma POWER LINES vuoF' CONDGO SO �_ – w`mo Q ORATING OVERIEAD ROWER LNEs '. w - m a O N EL TPN � N SO, I— vT Li O N VE DR I O� s i 9 I pili � i�7i o� w I � WILLIAMS LIFT STATION ....�..�.�...�......... �..... E 1 ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN ]232 1-- OB u¢35&5 I a _ N a 3GEp32 T 54 GONTERoI DS°rsEM _ 1LOW1 I GRAPHIC SCALEuMUS, -_ sa - ..I V Lt A— S7L 222 IxEEI+Ix� DocuSign Envelope ID'.C]FD3033-E]B3-49DO-AD8DB4029C332D38 CONSTRUCTION KEYED NOTES DRWILUAMSND E7 O EXST'LLHUASTNLAN SPROVIDE NEW ITAINEWNLESSWELLSTEEI PLATEAN SEER SCHEMATIC PPP''NATE, FOR DW WELL FAN Y EXISTING LGEN FXIURES IN CEILING TO REMAIN.INSTALL NEW LIGHT SWIreHES AT DOOR ENTRANCE AND REWIRE TO NEW PANEL L. CEIDND PROWDE NEWIN S,EsEL PaTEECINS. LIKING IN SDILDINO FALLE NEWO LET COORDINATE CON DUIT PMEP IINSTALECTON WITHD CONTROLS TO NFLAT EW HWORKD INSTALLATION.SOME AND 38 FDR PIAN AND SECTION NEW.SEE PLS]MECHANICAL SHEET 13. Z � 21 W W 9 Z ED OR @pp 7� X96 Z qy� W g�ix 9 ti E � V I A ow _________________________ luiw O O O O V I— � D OR EZ CL ti � V Q OR � A a p OOL O � NEY 3 o W V Q_W: �DC �Q Z ® 1 WILLIAMSLIGHTING PLAN ® 2 HVAO POWER PLAN WLIFT STATION =^" LIFT STATION � WILLIAMSIL �.....;I'.IJ��..L�..........�.. � -1 o W,261-00 UE Encore,as nro.ices o scOo33 ar 54 OEF, ..I V L�` DrenlNmo ua. 0 S7L-222 W, on is`�" �.�e���� = APreoLECT DocuSign Envelope ID'.C]FD3033-E]B3-49DO-AD8D-B4029C332D38 GENERAL NOTES oFmnNc s+ccl Na_ WILUAMS E8 A ,. core[DRu EXTERIOR 1au5 to FDUTE 11,1EI To EauIPMEN x I 5 AND DENCES. SEAL AND WEAIHERPRCOF PENETRA ON AFTER CONDUIT WALLS ARE DOUBLE WALL AND] C BE RE RNIR CAP AND 12 MNSDWALL, VE AllSEA E OREDFNUGOOD COENDTOONANDLLSUPPDRTEWAIY'A.x r✓m; h 2 aelA�`s`^ $ OFDELECSRICALUBUILDING,COORDINATEUWMUFHVACITTSINITALLAlIONF "^ ✓+✓a✓P '�� E_ AAP o 0 0 GDTIND IN RDDF, DE EFIFIRIEPA IT AND IIPALIEN�Do DID I -TRACTORCANDUATOND AND RM NAT ON,FROM METIER ENCLOSURE OEM'T ga uc Z 8 ALL L'LI [C i^ERMSNATIIONS.RACES-,AND F ALL C REMAININGWIRINGC L wFa W 9 (7 9 eANTMOIs, „„ I CONSTRUCTION KEYED NOTES 2 4" i [ COORC O NATE WITH ELECTRICUILITY ELECTRIC POW ER _ (AEP), DRIFTING ELECTRICAL SErevlce TO SIE. CONTRACTOR SHALL PAY ALL C09T9 P950CIATED WITH REWORKING 21 RmcE TO SITE �w A OCOORDINATE WITH AEP TO REROUTE AND INSIALL PRIMARY COUPOEMIN r. TOO,1) wen CONDUIT l0 NEW MCIER ENCLOSUREAFOR EACHRIS El AEP PRIM RPNSFORMER ARU! LETEl AERn �] u„ k ' O MANUFACI�URERSNREOUi"'OARSRCORE VEILLACMURE'WALL ANB = iO2 AFTEIIx a ROME CONDUITS FROM TRANSFOreMERs, 5 U I 0 o ANNIxc' E3 INSTALL NEW DR EACH PUMP NCTE—AL LEDID AN mu TPErea ors N FLDDRPre ore oINSTALLING NLw III}}a Q� m Plui x Kc SLA O INSTALL NEw P OMOWNT,R SFORMER o ED 777 c Os INSTALL NEW MOTOR CONTROL CENTER 0 p CONNECT NEw FLcwMETE NmR caLE IO DO ER. IEST >` E ARL„ IWStMP.,�� �<DW SMP IW SMP In bGuP _ ,e , Tz p`AopT. T5 „ M n - RomE NEw,zw clrecun To NEw aowMETER AND ER AND w ss IF A „ aT as N e sE t wn� PND CONFIRM OPERATION. D _ V NSTAL L JUNCTION BO G WITH POWER TERMINAL 2 OO BLOCKS FOR ON INEE WIRIN&GORE DR FLOOR AND o es PUMP BELOW.SUPPORT CABLES WITH CARTES l0 � KELLGGLSS.STRAIN RELIEF GRIPS JBOX'HALL HOUSC "7" MANUFACTURED BY PNLLET OF EUUPL. BE als n SB a r,wJw 1 INSTALL NEW uOHTmc,reANSFDRMER AND ucHTmc PANEL L. v Ir rs /� ,�° /_„ 0 6 INHALE NEW DISCONNECT SWITCH FOR NEW CRANE HDIs z � ,UB° Imo./ aowEe cAeuWcresnrEupFOR cRnNe EPowERRawDE NEW FFsiooN O MP J xlcx irva PMNd� O ROUTE WE WELL HIGH LEVEL FL04T TO SOMA PANEL, Q U aN Y' INSTALL NEW SCADA ANTENNA UN WALL WITH ALUMINUM BRACKET. CST \ Fad W 3 I O INSTALL NEW COAX CARTE AND TERMINATIONS GROUND COAX — o L_ wTH ANDREW COAX GROUNDING KW J O W N 13 CORES o DRILL CONCRETE AND INSTALL NEW LEVEL TRANSMITTER AND W O MANUFACTURER RCCOMMENDAlIONS10 N PUMP CINIROLEL. NSTAL AS PER (n wL w� w�—gym axe axe ��odL�:a�—gym w� axe om—SHL ons 14 O INSTALL NEW PUMP CONTROL PANEL. ED " I NSTILL NEW SCFE.PANEL Q o ® 1 ELECTR CAL ENLARGED PLAN , ..........,HJCFAwre°.",ASS;Fises w ]2]4 sGu[. /e OF IN NO r 3�oFO34 r 54 GRAPHIC SCALE `- �.I ll<�r 0 S7L- 222 "'"i,s`iu n- - CIS PRW CTS D,,,Sign Envelope ID'.C7FD3033-E1B3-49DO-AD8D-B4029C332D38 oFaVnNC SWEET ua_ GENERAL NOTES WILLIAM$ E9 _ 1 CORE DR LADD C1 EXIEROR WALLS TO ROUTE CONDUIT TO EQUIPMENT - ��m,,,...jjj'", AND_ S i WALL C'I' �' I,:zK VENEER NR GAP AND,z CMU INSIDE WALL SII 0 0 0 I --Z Z []:, CONSTRUCTION KEYED NOTES 2 �� ELI OEOCLALL U�PEE . R GROUND ON WCL AND GROUND o w 9 EELER w ------- - L 0 0 0 0 Z E:1 L� El ,a o UE. r r G EL lEl p° II13dQ�, s�5o'uuo eia U~ 0 o ViPP a�vro P 2 Z V l¢J — i AY /i \ N c- \ WELL/ ~ LRA N O Vn z w� w� w�—gym axe axe oxo ��odL�:a�—gym w� axe om-SHL U C) ED on ED LJ ® WILLIAMS LIFT STATION ...............�.::.�.. GRAPHIC SCALE pm w 3 1 ELECTRICAL GROUNDING PLAN v,e oe u.zensszoo o � re vas ma.yes V Lt r vsAWN No. 0 S7L-222 DocuSign Envelope ILL C]FD3033-E]B3-49DO-AD8D-B4029C332D38 ...ILUAM'sMGEio �e is ucu 9�� t1� 11 IF 9 R<< ❑ ❑ ❑ 1.0EFAELEE E � �s IF Fµ wags .. LE, .s) F Ho ❑- ' , - SP -- o, »uwsHE FAH `O is obi L__ _ FULFIL HL Imp IF III}}d Q m ® � ® ® sluioww a ❑ B U 4111 Taus ❑~ ❑~_ s - - _ �-1 �`1_ _ _�-1 1-1 V 4 sa `MarAUluz _ a ursi T ^ V b ARLES ; F11 z =RMSQ aN In o � p Jo w N w �11 LOWER LEVEL ELECTRICAL PLAN LOWER LEVEL LIGHTING PLAN w VEae ae sv.c 1�•-r-o• ae sv.e:T�•-r-o ct: CONSTRUCTION KEYED NOTES OT FEED NEW PUMPS FROM WAS,ROUTE PUMP GABLE 10 PUMP. MOUNT FL00DLGBTS ON CONCRnE rnwMIND wTu ALUM NUM are U E, m GALVAN ZED STEEL GOOSENECK BRACHET. RE l0 LGHT 5!NRCH ON ((llFll(J"j'..,r NEW UPPMECBAI SWITCH SUMP coNTROL.INSTALL NEW BALL UPPER wvEL ED Aa FTA,AT FOR oPt MUM rnvERAGE FOR „ O CONTROL PANEL DON ED RAI Ml LO NSTALL NEW SOUAREM1111 IN" POMPS AND PIPING AFTER INSTALLATION. (] R MODNT FLOODLIGUTS ON GONCREIE WALL WITH ALOMINOM OR 3 aaAT AT LOWER LE— 0 cuvANIZED STEEL aoosENECX BRACIIET. WIRE To uouT swncu oN p VID ENODGR SIACx IN POMP CABLE TO ALLOW PUMP MOTOR TO uPP R LEV[L AwusI ALL FlnuREs F OPTIMUM COVERAGE FOR eaiuJOn'cWE, asTrvaE.xses OBEOSETE ON FLOOR WTHOIP DISCONNECTION FROM JBOX ABOVE. POMPS PND PIPING PTIER INSTPLIAIION.OR E BOX PND w ArNDP LIFO AND ALLOW FOR RANS ON ROUG 0 REHIRE EMS N LOUTS 1EO sw ON UPPER LEVEL AND TO E11— �° a s O X36 Ur , �oll D54 e au"I WILD BSUPPLIER Ta P OmD 41 ovDPOMP CABLE raNICONTeol2s[E sGwEMATIc�cB GRAPHIC SCALE Orenwmo ua. INSTALL NEW NEMA 4X 316 AS STARTER FOR NEW EXHAUST FAN AND INSTALL NEW EMERGENU LIGHT. T--� vuNORM IreFaI=`reAIR„„a”-� B STL-222 0 wIBE To SWITCH AT sWBs.�F scBEMAZIc DIAGRAM UOAH�T&m��'°`&: - v PreoLccT DocUSign Envelope ID'.C7FD3033-E7B3-49DO-AD8D-B4029C332D38 ...iwnM's"AEii ELL Lu �8 rury CPANROLFIT M PANEL Z ANry ANry .ry EEEN rFR�, 'Rahn—IEL � P P �w ',h EEE EEOE DO - En A ELECTRICAL ELEVATION �°P� oo B ELECTRICAL ELEVATION ]4 ID ELr.T/a'q'-o' TELL E K P seke Va•-P-o' � (�j III}}d Q m � DEC GENERAL NOTES U L—o 1 INSTALL IONS GEAR AND VFU'S PER MANI 1TURER'S � I-RUCTIONS oNs DIRECTED ouNOAnoN sDUL eEAN,Eur AND E LEVEL O EC 0,062 T T IN NCD s m NAL of AT MINI p IEFI ON TO RIGHI,E FROM TO BACK AND EDIAp I ALL IS ION N1011,AT MINIMUM,LEE UNIA,ED V VTl' "TDE LENGTHPC ANDPITGEAR OF Ill Y W ER AN AEA DCEINE AND DEPTH OF THE SNITCHGEAR 111EMBLV, Q 2. CORE DRILL WALLS AND CEILING AND ROUTE CONDUITS AS 122 REOUIRE_ SEAL PENCIRATIONS AFTER CONDUIT INSTALLATION EU PI "RII11—LIIIIIII0'I III oSO, w p N w o xaAroEDE rvoA�, w DOLE A_ rz� w u7)N R ENE ern��"iI"y w PAR 0 �,D ENGre SAB .— o S E0 37 r 54 C ELECTRICAL ELEVATION GRAPHIC SCALE vVL�� AEGWm ua. 3 x n va._T._a. PER, I. S7L-222 DocUSign Envelope ID'.C]FD3033-E]B3-49DO-AD8D-B4029C332D38 ...iwnM's"DEiz CONSTRUCTION KEYED NOTES ���aa OINSTALL NEW JBOXES ONESUPPORT RACK FOR PUMP CABLES, Vy W,�'`�6�vA3j; '166 CABLESCAMLE, FILLE 10 PUMPS,SUPPORTCABLES FROM RUPPER VDECK U�TO mYv, PUMPS BELow. 7... .Q�"✓t'L�}\, DE DW WELL xlDx LEVEL ALARM FLGAT TO SCADA 0 cITT IT 6 LEVEL, AD USIIALL n%1URES FORTOPTINUM COVEMEVFORPIT PS AND ANCHOIT NIS FPN[/xals vuuv ❑ O NOTE,COORDNATEO WALa.PUAPNG PFTEP AUPPO ERR TO ROV DE64E 6OV W �a}L Dm) Z PUMP CARIE LONG ENOUGWMTOSREP VFp PND PLLO!N FOR !gs RPNS ON ROUG JR01 AND ALL BCNDi Z W gix mese seoxAFT AILL Roou 0 o e PARE ARIL- NSOR ti W ° ADNE GAOL1EIEEn ° E Wv.� SVVF,ET VRA v W Po �R,„w� P u- Po � awP4 ��IIII p X� I NIl cwAUE A "- o ti /w"m WELLMIT — o nAT. Q FR V O Lo o LOT 11I BEE, o� z QN ��o � o p �o �N Q o� w Pe w A ELECTRICAL SECTION VIEWYE W,251-700 L....L................ 61iH CA:Bft JOB Ab.3595 A sNEp 38 T 54 GRAPHIC SCm PsL v -b r _-x ��V<�� DBnwrm ua. a STL-222 D,,,Sign Envelope ID'.C7FD3033-E1B3-49DO-AD8D-B4029C332D38 p WILDAMSN4E13 } 1-,�?!Z v \ > LU a LLIF a - — l _ U o l7 N D I— " Q " r I 81 � z If l e � C� — W � � O o UE WILLIAMS LIFT STATION rnmR,as ma.Nes 1 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION ONE—LINE DIAGRAM w sc.uc:rss. v�° sNrn 39 ar 54 �� Ill>L�� pRp oRA�Np ua. Eng STL-222 ........................................... "'Ua;i"_ — C111 Preor cry DocuSign Envslops ID'.C]FD3033-F]B3-49DO-AD8D-B4029C332D38 p WIWAMS�KE14 n,oe ryv for nryV�Pr n ... w -t, rT- �,y son3P�..w �H-SWITCHGEAR 1 0 . , 343Wa - 2DA 25KAIC - 4 LU ro cro o Z ypp W ig� I ro �(}J cro Pte(}J P cro P•(,> II � i xx aoxEre ss�- (sz��sserz+ Ii r; ss�ssi ss�ssi 'ri re�nn �eoonn ___Joon_ _ � eus oi�r i � m 52 52 vice r✓ 3 � I I Ma raov svn,sw,soon cro wo no wo cro ��� p X V~o end— ani-- enn ann n ah T� FZ FZ V U Qao cro cro cro cro I � � s I ,z s ,r Z II I II I II I II I r�sov Sas Q N LUL N �pH N � Ii I Ii I Ii I Ii I „N raov svn.rw W_ �O Q I I I I I I I I rerwsr W W ry e5 O b i 12112111 sae.aw 0 25-BZOO mEF .j5e5 a s sNEEi 40 ci 54 cg cg s h�„�„. CJI II�EI21�11f1a D`L, area o. \ V ONE—LINE DIAGRAM WILLIAMS LIFT STATION _Isr - S7L-222 ........................................... "F'Ua;1ua=, – C111 areoE cry DocUSigU Envelope III C]FD3033-E]B3-49DO-AD8D-B4029C332D38 PIN aV I5A xUSE CONTACTOR WILUAM'L S E15 La ave EusE �Mk ILI a3 �11 * 24PR P INV AIIIPAC L2 �M�T 2L2 az S NEUT ___ Moron �oY�'Y✓•v~bG1 "'�, GFH L3 2LI 2L1 m x l �. __�__•__-I o- + �L �J>J as✓afire \a�� n � NEG LIGHTNING iu S AMC 2PULSE 41N PUT ereau A",'T `11 ISOLATION IND VA PC Lu �8 alb ° N5FVII21V �re�NN,lIINEL z 3'Vm uvIC � 21 1 A GUF- 1 EOEATEF a1ROL W. i�. SPK SPK SPK 6€ PRECHARGE POWER 2 E OT-AIEFEIENIE 01 I AMP CUT "OV 2AN II13 d Q ca-IFvno aN°o6NPIT ACT UROUNU Au- •PMRIIII p x vO GROUND AIe SPEC➢SETPO]NT K-20nA PHASE MONITOR w ° 11-20nAT ANALOG NPT ales AS �EREM cVPOI PANEL p DO NOT GROUND INPUT AT As CAR = D OlTl- FBI ti V FN,IOL vOLTA/O OIwAIF m _ Ae s AMP MAIN BLOWER v QXIIry IH ARM L RUN ENABLE FIN Ln In eLu MBI a PM O COMMONz ,IOL V T T T a ou ANOTE SET OL lO 3.0 AMPS ti N LO GIOKNF GN MLO 15A MS] N xa EK,ER FORCE REMOTE FIN rnAm COOLING oN " I— o CHL,VCN nlNa-IDNs COMMON IRA I, EIAMPLI NO RIVE I �� O o�A Q SPEC our — > o TIT INOCATIONra-2o1AT CONNECTION I— co-aonAc ANAI�O"ouNO Aor Is 5 �=INPUT U cONBuC O A I Y =REMOTE DEVICE W 1 =INTERNAL TERM.CLIPS) 'CONTROLLER O =TERM.ILK FOR U wASSTe. L.=TM TYPE LIGHT 0 eaw En"R Lae wa ues �° sern 41 Kr 54 .� .. L� Ircolo nrenw,mo ua. LIFT PUMP NO. 1 THRU 4 SCHEMATIC 1 OF 3 (TYP.) CJITII �) al ll p N� STL-222 ,��rere reTAlrewAre reA.E res9 = .......................................... ""Ure;i"- - C111 Paoli cT DocuSign Envelope ID'.C7FD3033-E7B3-49DO-AD8DB4029C332D38 XKKK ...iwnM's'KEis FEE.LEFT a � c AFX MAIN x -mow o� rzo un 21 uA cuF. c „T ME% W 0 AMP Z pp ��reTEre TON cll two Z �9 w ig _ MC% �;PaA�K a Tsw% L n zK a,P KK��, `reEa x ITI 11 L FIT 12 — IT AND U - roKL�MN EN - m}aQ � TPzK Tw"U, U o IT ME% e PMP �Lsw esov "MITMGM ss D c V V Mb MIAMI QO NOW MNK e AMP Me M9 o-ion Ln � LL O uvv[re reiLwT O N 0 Q N cn CST 03A p O o EXAMPLE f,DR VEE1/0 —I N -3p MVC E% O]A o _Q IH��CNANNECTION Q RLYP 03B RLY4 04B 4=INPUT U ITEMDEVICE A _ EMRP LKCS ) U ~ o � 3�=T%L' ueeT B I PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUTS U 3 cn 0 eaTa EnmR Lae wa ues sNrn 42 Kr 54 LIFT PUMP NO. 1 THRU 4 SCHEMATIC 2 OF 3 (TYP.) �" L� KmoKo Krenw,mo ua. 7 I �11f1"] vll A MRG re�a=,R.0 M�29 = S7L-222 ........................................... "'Ua;i"- - C111 PRW CT 21143 D—SM,Envelope ID'.C]FD3033-E]B3-49DO-AD8D-B4029C332D38 CONTROL POWERPOWER R WIWAMSMWEI7 CONTINUED FROMTHE nWTR ITT 1 2 JUMPER 9VmY°�'e3i`Sa'lV. F t' _ Sx NOT IU SED \ a . PlA ICA 1010 RL13 A 101 D $'�»>j as✓a�N VE /MODUIEER AFD 12 DFNE FAULT WI OFF, ioa 11 PLC STOP P N 12 C eTORT tF AMP TA PL W A PEE. P N + o W 9 5Nn- C N' 1I SA _ _ ___ IT Z 0 0 •+.24• } INDICATION G PSG COST A TD OF SNR- W g�i 4+4- - wRN 02A DRIVE werewNG U N U N pg9 WRN WARNING SNG JUMPER - suw WHEN LT 02B FLT DRIVE FAULT WT4�Eo AIL N 44 ELsmP 44n --------------- FAULT U MR GO PU LL NRUN31 Cc 'ICONTtV��V V 3A 12 M3 MAIN COMACTOR CLOSED p IS wn CSTA em sA 11 13 :um E Q OND MKMAIN OPEN PRE NHARME A, ME2BE OI M% 6 f C) 1 MA i 12 mw A, i .______________'T' O 'L MA]N COM ATOR-J MA% MA% z V NT 121 11 13 11 11 O O ~ OOQ N coNTINucDRIGHT CONTROLD OE UPWE PER A CIN � p O O o d d N VAc 14B ED z R DY E E DCS RUN INDICATION fAMACI OR STATUS INDICATORS RUN ENABLE STATUS W Q w R s RE FAMPLc fn,COL l4 R U � MereuPP uPCuregA]IB O1A ti I= F _ m —CONNE CTI ON U PLR -INPUT W YY=REMUIE DEVICE MCS 12B 1 =INTERNAL TERM.GLK(S) -TICRM.ILK FOR UE ORB v SOFTWA M6 Mo MT Di MAIN fAMAC10R STATUS O C OMER CO �UOB.35&5 3W T%TYPE LI6HI o s m 43 r 54 1AnuA,En e Ro �1 F E N N E G WrenWm ua. LIFT PUMP N0. 1 THRU 4 SCHEMATIC 3 OF 3 (TYP.) C.(. >fll„1�1I [} �.IS=,aPaSEA N � S7L-222 ,�Raw,ASaI=,AM�Wx xa.,aTP UaP” v PRWJ cT DOcuSign Envelope ID'.C]FD3033-E]B3-49D0.AD8DB4029C332D38 ...iwnM's"nEia ,0 re L— reca�.oreI — —————— W �nIEQQIIIi W 9 v Z_ (7 p Z tic x �o PO i a creourvo i .reaxsrorensre recc�r�crez �° - u�uoc ixaN cuxreEx, �xau,s�sxnc - _ xcs a�cma�N �o .reo�voL.p:E o�na - ��,loxw V Q � � srncx JOCKEY PUMP SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (NP.) ';:' -P PUMP z O1 ti o w Q N w �p ieovac –i ErvrannreE uss 03 0 O � u a Q 12o C�-3 u¢w�iiuc 3 ucx,s o ccwuoe Ww V� � a ro ELL macre a sous U mw � e au m �ioM°s Q s`a o"ecu neoc6OFFI 0......................................... W 2 y� U o DRYWELL LIGHTS SCHEMATIC �xrvP 2xre, re`x ena'r' W,261-00 SUMP PUMP SCHEMATIC o sHE�44 or 54 � ��`" sous (NP. 4 PANELS oeo nrenwrmo ua. VVLtr DRYWELL EXHAUST FAN/MEZZANINE LIGHTS SCHEMATIC �reu lrecainreuire�rva�� �PcS7L-222 "�Ure;i"�_ – v arena cry DocUS,gn Envelope ID'.C7FD3033-E1B3-49D0.AD8DB4029C332D38 ...iwnM'sN4Eis 120VAC FROM SWITCHGEAR `1, T. CB-1 24VDCs�PPLDC ®' Z — — foo w I I W gpi C6-2F I I x CB-3 cl P2 _ _ P 2 3A 0PLC PIWEI U 4 p 0 - "PPL o X� m Exxm m xxm mx 2 I I CB-4 p m 3 TB ry TBa TOP 6 c a 2A A SUPPLYMODULE Ta PLC S I N a I Q,�INPUr 0 PPLI TO T a TOP PLC I a m n"TPs uL')sA° T, B-6 0 TO PLC o +�T� INP N z LD 5A uTs Lacam ox swxc.xw owx x Q O = N N VTBI TOO TOO TOO 24VDC TO , M M rn P TRIPTOOo cn 0 5A cn o eacu . O Q ,s,ocas<xax s J N CB-8 � w 1n _ Q LA ETPEINET swITCP, L12 o _ a. �..� o 3 Q e PT � � � P8-24. 3A uMi ED •____----- 32w-,0 -, JOB No 26,-00 A �PPLI T°PLC R Lpa ,"85 � sern45 ar 54 Ps s4. ez ETPERNET swTCP z n Up °mo°o orenv"mo ua. �!EAIN� SWITCHGEAR POWER AND COMMUNICATION ..........„��.....:..L.................. xxu xEx�nxA�xx xx.,-x29 o S7L-222 DocuSign Envelope ID'.C]FD3033-E]B3-49DO-AD8D-B4029C332D38 ITEM OTY DESCRIPTION p WILLIAMSN4E20 0 0 o T a YA "jai�^ 0I , 11- r `! 00®000©0©©©© `° a—�`TK`�°``° °"` e® T.—NI 000000000 „ Z �8 O2 1 111 11111NIT n u LIJ W 9c z'x�mree ouc� 0 o aE�x,Poa.,oa.aa � z � voc�oEreE X20 0 k ,o ,e aAzawcTEa.N�aLo ............... .......... „ , ore—1-IN.I—zaa 1- xu ya p g~� 0 0ix 205 z x -1"1 eO3 T- -Epc/zaoc/,o Ps.KKAI, - 15'TOUCHSCREEN UNIT - , - u u a 1 -1) p '" Ts � ,oa uwc z POLE eaaNc Bala[ m :LD 0 111,zTT/aeo 2-111E ea a 11PINE1(11 2) ., T......�hmm zTT/aaO T-PoLE suPPLE P-1 xEp 11e-3,caz) 2 z x wvE oun 0 , zTT/aao T-PoLE suPPLE P-1 xEa(NAP) U 0 0 ='»/aeo T-Pazc suvvzEucv,orer erecoucre(ce-s,ce-s (/��;�"'33 a c 0 0 0 0 O 0 zn/aao,- T x a fce-a.ceio) ��11 Q)X Lc 0 TRT POLE cuvEaE xEa Bio PaaTrt P TE v, o Ta 0 0 a;cnTe°(zzi a c,n;e;czsi*BEc;$i aTi:1" o El o O O O O z x,wreTrerec, 0 V Q �ubc rouaor�w,s xnu eE Mournm ori swncxcrnre oaare © , „ „ 21 11 a %®3®yi S ^ Ti T - x'0 , T umn 2aw1—IN zco ~ m ®® ee O 11— } L—. z x T maE ouc, IED u 511KN ,N0 co T cT(PLPIM IPIET) V , PKEL OT Tu T T U BACK PLATE I— — - oEc(cLoIEo'OPEN) C/I ETNozP Po- Ea(au*anew P W(I W Gz,c2P PosmoNOSEE c,oa�'I*T ,sEa�E a O - cE(srouacEc,%srouacE z) o � E / [n'cR zae n'e..ues �.0/SII()I1 Nd � � � S s A X46 rer 54 E x ��� a Arenv"mo ua. - SWITCHGEAR PLC LAYOUT L..................... V V E A I x G o ..................... D,,,Sign Envelope ID'.C]FD3033-E]B3-49DO-AD8DB4029C332D38 ...IwAM's'KEzi RY'✓w e }� `w'S;! `Tv tee„ smnTcHCS CecEAR 480V MCC Z a� LuLu G1 W 9c JOCKEY PUMP PUMP PUMP PUMP !96 PUMP P-1 P-2 P-3 P-4 7 Z SEE) VFD RED VFD VFD W yY STATUS s � �� POWER POWER POWER POWER CONTROL STATUS CONTROL STATUS CONTROL STATUS CONTROL STATUS CONTROL STATUS -SCSI Ts'PEED a SPEED W 'PEED SPEED TOP TOP TO P TO P TO P THERM/LEA'N THERM/LEA'MA THERM/TEAK NAS TE THERM/LEA'RN M THERM/LEA'MAS U ANTENNA w o D ti CONO ROL OR F PUMP PUMP AsjpRA Ms PSCAADA V V CONTROL MASAL PANEL HMI HMI Q TC A PUMP CONTROL J 20 PANEL WITH PUMP MAS MONITORING SYSTEM —TTTz DRY WELLFLO O rT STP US ED METEEW ars �- O R WET -LL N O O WET Y SE sofa LL O U N O W cn m O� � R W w w cl cl E U EF, � N SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM 0 EnmR gas ma.yes .� ITd I(T .) ..I V L�r oRo Arenunmo ua. D S7L-222 ........................................... "�'Ua;i�" '� — P Preop cT DocuSign Envelope ID'.C]FD3033-F]B3-49DO-AD8DB4029C332D38 RRSN�E22 CONSTRUCTION NOTES WILUAM 0' MoIoR I/o As us[oN 11 111,ole AND 10111CLIE to YS4.NAT"�+ ALLM BIVDIEY PLC O COORDNATH WIRACLY ETO ACCESS EXISTING DSABASE AND HIE] PR Del SAMPLE LGRAPHCASCPEE"CG,Pr+nci°NDIe IO PICA BARR]ER BARRIER SAMPLES FOR APPROVAL PRIOR 10 1MPLEMEMAIION 10 SYSTEM, E "»vJraa✓°" 000000 000000] O INSTALL SALVAGED MDS RADIO FROM EXISTING SCADA RN. OL' d LO WILLIAM LIFT STATION SCADA PANEL I/O LIST Z Oc e oo GO o LU W 9 XI 1111F- A.— 111,11111111 11111 P�'11, "'Al� Nn5 RAnTo �W " GFUHII A o- FLA}; 4 ,o I,.nIS, I wT,sno� — u„ ulw 2 v P a Nu � E M... a ,u. ww, 0 III}}d Q m � ��luioWw " v �� s " E UPS --L w o OR V E V Q a SCADA RTU LAYOUT (TYP.) -- ........ 0 v J S, IC - A F - -_ FI— n S I— 1111 Ill 111I'AT 11 Q a 0 w LR ao O G11,1 11-1 1, SHUT 11HUA11C A',ICOP° LG° TOI:x U E10LLY ROAD OFFICE AMS LIFT STATION lu Encore Sae n'e..?ses .� SCADA BLOCK DIAGRAM � EE`SI oeo ore.mc ua. � rc S7L w222 I I ,�TAAEAnA.A A = ........................................... ��U";i�" - Y PreDc cls DocuSign Envelope ID'.C]FD3033-E]B3-49DO-AD8D-B4029C332D38 c WILUAMS�cE23 cry mc6 c,e�om`re mr s,..mrec1 `��- ILL sorvE ® mIET arvEaLOGP.1pry O orvea —01EI 111122-1E a �e.IF F 1ry � �„ E� I-FEI W 9 sscorvowm mrvoun creme E Z ' corvcca�w�,sEuvn - �-I`• �W 4� I ILI en aaiuur u[ttsslmry oa suiErewo wgEam e w rExuF Y� enrvmnE wcrseuervl remvr woo rpxcu�iore vesrs as P nom,ra (RFrvo/a rvs_r 1 IF 49 a[e+a ou 10 au _ e1 ma —Lll er _M, reorvroreorvc sw.c aE nslu 1111 crewE 11. cu cryo �� �� mrvv re1m1,s m mvvere oreourvo reo muwErE IIIII uE corvc E ro e[xr 1 IL E.aoo nI NY M 1,MIOIM IF El M011 orvrreu�ow)a ry aoo�lp pvc oon auc coueuuc SEC/ION soul', soE,..o ava E-o. a sxuE FE Ar rouows. _ muwE'E roua[o iu aucE. ,.mcac�..,�..c v<a�r.lao sEE waa PcwEa mol.... 2 KWH METER DETAIL 3 CONDUIT STUB—UP AT DIP POLE w = 8 �11 TRANSFORMER FOUNDATION x w M"�x.s "?% U x ti9 x.�.s. � III}}d Q m � caIF mEFAI �rvre eE m�E `°" ��lui o w w o ti Q � V V .m uoEacm,urvo xLc,aiGL Qrvcxln.x s.s. &twnLL C � 1cea - n lL O ,too oucre* pw�sPuc[,-a uirv�w� ® are 1.1 Ps am roFIIEIELo O ._ ® WALE e f�suaauas®rzr'o.c. N 0 oIF FILLI vu: 1/1'r1e:mrvoun Eryun roa srvolc""o" Q = Nx..oI vmx ss we'I w/....wore slvuriorv] Vl \ rnuoun 0ra.1 saueuaE NOTE OI o rewE NE"eaacvIF`n irvsluE ewrs esEox mrvoun. a[auiam w V LEII O w 1."`°"`"OR1 m u 7 DUCTBANK DETAIL wEsrecccreE x wa ~ U ME—FE 11F.rw. mw,ory o�reE..E„.eo.0..01 IONI-oxrs,Irvc ore m szo eiirvc —i 3 cEcw..cEs roe aeoem oaE1u11II aeoroaW 0 sato EnmR ice Iva ues x sNrn 49 ret 54 ��HAND RAIL MOUNT DETAIL (P FLOOD LIGHT MOUNTING DETAIL �61 LEVEL SENSOR MOUNT DETAIL (TYP.) mws a L:�: RrccRo oreaw,mc uc. ae s :x.s (P E x.,.:. ati 9 :xs. �1I �0 STL 222 .........................�..... p1,oo - III Paoc Cry D,,,Sign Envelope IED C7FD3033-E1B3-49D0.AD8DB4029C332D38 p WILUAMSN4E24 ss�Forv�Ey �� asoma �iS REO° �w.E,nrei arm cu.xuF °17 nuc xos FMICIIO "FE'. aNaF.11 1111ILL�L °�a of w z a a°ua mai mP] a'I,aI,,oma caourvo mrvrvEm°F w EBF s.mwoF -F Pao °M „F ss.aNm°Fa ate, ° EOry GLIFFEL ava FFn°rvF wFE zIEl"L � 0EO -ru°_I o �E,E�ry°° a,E F °rv° F�rva -III 0 3 UNDERGROUND TAP ON GROUND LOOP p1 Q 1 JOCKEY PUMP JBOX RACK 2 PUMP 1 — 4 JBOX RACK E1iiv ]]50 SfxE. PU H.i.S. lJ D V I.-,NSLuiEo SLF�0 ILL urvistreu Ss ways°ry ware ea,� V Q ry IIIEFF�nrycss 210 1111 N rNU FL 1111 O z N O O1 ti � aaIx1 IF.Io coaa[a aus N = N pVo uw cFouuo SFE SFE N s,rewu°m c°aaere IF IIII Om o o o 0 o o o o o o E U Vi wueuoF I°Poow - N J uortiwn°w'm 111F.11. P ,I ss�ory P s w VF V IIIW res,111EI°aPEreE HOLE IFMIIEssou wo O w ,Fiio IIFI IF IIEFF�II F.wo OFF F_ w Q EIF rle.-aso wean E0°N U W 3w wuE. ..roe uo,zens.ezoo o ]s mDETAIL see]as�.Eses 4 UN ROUNDAN UN L UNADETAILSUPPORT N UI m,�.„,�. se so CJ.�. ..I Flat— FN � sern or Lr RmoRo orenw�No ua. S7L-222 �..�... E°nF.° ...........................................� "�'Ua;i�" - v areos cry D—SR,Envelope ILL C7FD3033-E1B3-49DO-AD8D-B4029C332D38 WILLIAMS PUMP CONTROL PANEL 1/0 oreWIL eAlM Na S E25 WILU PANEL L 110 225AMAINS,200ACIRCUITOREAKE11,120I24OV,-1 PRASE,3WRE,IO KAIC,SURFACE MOUNT---- ---- - `v` TOTAL VOW TE SERVICE DESCRIPTION SIGNAL DEVICE POINT LOCATON Q "?- NEMA1 ENCLOSURE 1 Al WET WELL LEVEL LEVEL TRAN SM ITTE RIAR LOAEL N rI \ t0A03CRVFD I 81 IMP81 LAAO BCRVCD 2 AG JOCKEY PUMP SPEED A20MA OLME. ._._._._._._._._._._.__ — _ P,veraao SUMV+VMv 3 AO PUMP P I SPEED 420MA SIGNAL AO PUMPP-25PEED 4-20.A SIGNAL 11,11.11 ELLER I IV, PER I, I'M I AO PUMP P-3 SPEED A20MA SIGNAL (� 4 r� - E AO PUMP P-4 SPEED —MA SIGNAL Z g9aa M I DO JOCKEY PUMP START PLC CONTACT OUTPUT i LU 9p M a0A M a N ,IMP E DO PUMP P-1 START PLC CONTACTOUTPUT J M �� a P 6 a 4 PLA L L1 0 a 9 DO PUMP P2 START PLC CONTACT OUTPUT C�c ,1 a 1J 2nA I[ Illy WE11, W Lp AusT1AN 19 DO PUMP AM START PLC CONTAOTOUTPUT 4�E Ill IL IALTIE D111—LEL m PER a 21 1. ,pL aATLa 11 DO PUMP P-0START PLC CONTACT OUTPUT E€ // 12 DO JOCKEY PUMP STOP PLC CONTACT OUTPUT 13 DO PUMP P-1 STOP PLC CONTACT OUTPUT a LL PLAm a, PR PLA x(,Y B 1. Ul Is !On. ,? 90 CIA 14 DO PUMP P-2 STOP PLC CONTACT OUTPUTIIIIIIIIE �, 11 DG PUMPP-3 STOP PLC CONTACTOUTPUP (~jl � AGL LHYWLLL 2CA 1a Ji 2 2M > COR 43 13 DO 1UMPP4S., PLC CONTACT OUTPUT Z to DI JOCKEY PUMP RUN PLC CONTACT OUTPUT 5 SO _ V 1E DI PUMP P-I RUN VFD RUN CONTACT 19 DI PUMP P2 RUN VFD RUN CONTACT 11 w1 ,v Jo �A sUemTAI_AMPS _ i allIL AMPS 20 DI PUMP P-3 RUN VFD RUN CONTACT v p xxech'o LOAS -a- a 21 DI PUMP P4 RUN VFD RUN CONTACT IAMPSI n DI JocKEV PUMP VFD FAIL vFD AuxcoNTACT � E m 23 DI PUMP P-1 VFD FAIL VFD ALIXCONTACT ~ Q V VOF DI PUMP P-2 VFD FAIL VFD AUXCONTACT Q25 DI PUMPP-3VFD FAIL VFD AUXCorvTACT SA DI PUMP P-4 VFD FAIL VFD AUX- 27 DI JOCKEY PUMP TIERMALILEAK MAS UNITAUXCONTACT W 2E DI PUMP P 1 THERMALILEAK MAS UNITAUXCONTACT ILL 'I O G9 DI PUMP P-2 THE'RMALILE'AK MAS UNITAUXCONTAGI' O 30 DI PUMP P-3 THERMALILEAK MAS UNITAUXCONTACTTL Q N =U 31 DI PUMP P4 THERMALILEAK MAS UNITAUXCONTACT OU Vl 32 DI JOCKEY PUMP HOA INALYO VFDALIXCONTACID LL N \ DI PUMP P-1 HOA INAUTO VFDAUXCONTACT LIT(I -C, 3a DI PUMP P-2 HOA NAUTO VFDAUx CONTACTo � Un g Z 35 DI PUMP P-3ROA INAUro VFDAUx CONTACT Q 36 DI PUMPP-4 HOA IN AUTO VFD AU%CONTACT c': W 37 DI SYSTEM ON GENERATOR POWER SWITCHGEAR PLC AU%CONTAOT Q LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE NE11.1111, IMEELI Ill— ALL IRA 11 1A 11—NI, IIITIJ LIII�Kll 3T'LE SIM 0A I—IIRIIw1 nwr M.. 11 EMEMUNI - ,wno 1-11 1 v I + rM MA^ z LuaL n-1 az . ae wva xsas - �° I sHrn 51 Pr 54 xA GITII t/I 111 I � � a ..ID rercoreo Dreawwc Na.�,I I S7L 222 ,�,a^alae^Aaaaa.,a11 = D—SF,Envelope ID'.C]FD3033-E]B3-49D0.AD8DB4029C332D38 WILLIAMS LIFT STATION CABLeCONDUIT SCHEDULE WILLIAMS LIFT STATION CABLEICIN�UIT SCHEDULE Wuc succi oe—.—ON .. ... ... ... ... ... of Na oesrEUAnoN... WIWAMS E26 N ra TO —E -TL I .. T NEUT NO, .. s v .., 1 ;ra n d>eoro° ei�aU pc .,Jca F I w W 9c 25 9 iY9 n ro •, r% >• +a yr ,va w xx � ..x a _ , „ .� .. ..a.a.... ,a �- :e cc u•Fo a,rc� � o .. .. m rn, e. ,veru g c_ � z c urn=+, v vbo ra ma � ��luioww c p ev o Nva=, n Q _ o 0 s,.,us 0 N o - - e v..�w *m ,m. ,a roe'srx - I a•- m.vr vs.e CJ O� r� �� Z � ,9 0 .. ........ z�R�Ue wa ues R«oRo oRawN�Na 0 ,�,aGRrapRAo��aro a„ Sly 222 DocuSign Envelope ILL C]FD3033-E]B3-49DO-AD8DB4029C332D38 LEGEND CONSTRUCTION NOTES DRWILLIAMSNQ MI E ure P,11.1,11 1111 DO CONDENSING UNIT. PRONDEAALL NECESSARY CLEARANCES O N IN'ALL 11 DIRECt1111C Rs NST Lus ON NsreucnDNs LEILL LOT 0 0 0 ere : O FAN ZIDEA ID-11Coo KID E p . ELECTRICAL CONDUIT LAT ON ABOVE ELECTRICAL ROOM. MANIIACIIIE PIL ® reEemere Tuo unrexo ezE,urenHw O COINCN ALUMINUMTNT N ALLRLEONOURIIG�INSTISOLTHERMOSTAT LL HCRMoslAlB TooAVPBovEs/Ali FINISHED FLOOR. GENERAL NOTES O EACH wnv OPAT N CE NER CONCRETE EOUIPMENI PAD W/q4 REPAIR 12 HEreuaeAT/xuuioisAT I THESE MECHANICAL D AWNCS ARE DIAGRAMMAeC ANDLU DO NOT NECESSARILYSHOWEVERY COMPONENT ANI`? O PP o U-1 9 0 oueu NR PLmuu -' AD ElTIE,GO'REQUIRED mR A mMPLETE NSTAu e WALLL Z aa}} REQUIRED ONTiO ENSURE THATACTON VITALCTHEEENTIRE SYSTEM LET ITEMS LN !gs O HNH61 FUNCIIIN GIN COMPLIANCE WRH APPLICABLE CODES, U,"1'rnry uN uN[ ACCEPTED"INDUSTRY STANDARDS, AND MANU&TURER'S BL[WALL BRIG;VENEER.AR GAP ANO W y FEET NSIAIIATION REQUIREMENTS UPON COMPLETION OF THE 12 INSIDE MLL, SEA 0 2 FR OR PLONoEussNCTET U MO`R LIC NN 'oLss H G R"Roo. E€ 2, OF CONFLICTS ORA AS MENDER,SNAIL PREVENT "BROUG T TTO LTHIE" ❑T ❑T� ❑T PO CROCEED WITH PNV REIATEDCWORKAUMRIL PLL "m O ALUMINUM SUPPORT RCHANNLELA"PND SSG ON PIPEGRIE STH 6 INCH LONG MIN. R NDE 4 INCH LONG PpAAT SADDLE S Up' PORT PON INFFORMATONTEST'ON RIS IRSSUED TO THANDE CONTRACDEANTOR BY THE PIPE DIRECTION INCHES AND WITHIN T-0 OF ALL CHANGES _ ENGINEER. CO SHALL BEA 2 6 � EA 5 DoNER DDINAiSCIPL NE 50 EOILIPMENOD CONFLICTS WITH O5 INSULATE LINEPLO BE I WITH WITH PI/2 INCH PRIMARYPER CONDENSATE OCELL ELASiOMERICAIN EFOAM "' '--'—" U -T i TO l V UCT OFFSETS.AS ao/so - ------ ------ 7FTIZN� 5. Du�FDOMD[NSIO�SBONR DRAWNNCEONDRICDAIE D CIOIDFEE RROURNE OARR GRENUMEWIFIL R ACCESS, CONNECT GRACE MOUNT ®® I _ _® g IRPINSTALL THREE(5,SURFACE WN .LLE RH FILTER TALES TO O ---- RETURN AIR PL II d Q 5 __ AREA AND DOES NOT ACCOUM FOR INSULATIONFAN AND _ C 0 0 00 THICIME55. O TO EX MST FANINDRYWESLNE MODIFY FLOOR WORKINDRYWILL TO lE ALLOW INSIALLATION OF NEW STARCASE ON WEST WALL.SEE ALSO SHEERS 25.38.AND 54. y, I D LL d vaE rvoE /e=- re GRAPHIC SCALE AS E n n uuo ~ V uuL u TE V PPom IIYa.of A FRN ¢� F "° ® WILLIAMS LIFT STATION N 1 MECHANICAL PLAN EVIL" n sa seve TET'-r-o aonE 6,� 35izF SEWRE ILEAeARIE so/AE e j - z I= o Q AIR HANDING UNIT SCHEDULE PIP P`-q ¢N Li N LOTs u(AHA TEs. So u eta e�R cTR M u MODEL suPI YF�REu(Crul oa%we` oei`A%u uE"R tu?�ssl C(mI CMij LL o U 15.0/52.5 55.T/sss2111 1 211TI 1,11 N/A —L N 005 AFFACHED To Iy(n Q o w TeH AD eorvoAreNOUSETR IGver SPAIN 2 IIJ-111 1111-1—AND RATA ALL LED HMi'ARTS, 1,PIRAUIE HAT-AAA 1EHEAT REL. CONDENSING UNIT SCHEDULE WILLIAMS LIFT STATION U LEE, MECHANICAL SECTION MS.EL a'i MB TEs. ILL 3 cu ois cla.-so ss_ ss os "u Es DIFFUSER AND GRILLE SCHEDULE UE AG NEC 26175-0 N i. PROV DE McreoCNANNEL CONDENSER coL 5.PROVIDE RueDER muioas. MSlE nmR PRov DE HA L/vANDu PaoVIOE ARE+M,NUFACIua Nc Pao MODEL IEEMAre s 2 DOARD2. 11—H,WALL III" MARR s O X53 5r 54 T.PRDHDE MANDFWCTORER SPECFED S�An CORRDSDN PROLCUPEN Nsua,ON PaOTECTAN_ TROs S11F,KE MSDM ALU—Ells—E W,PPLY EFFDSEa. , DNROL NDRFN °` 0 i i 4 INSIDE Hm SYPH 11 E MSDM.E��A,E.FL,Ea Fa E.�DMNEM 0 — / ��7 'a u. Q MG I PTUA SAFF ETDRN AIR GRILLE.2 NRH MERH 5 FILER MmIA DAA rem�ereN�Ere reF re,Y o 222 E 11.11E LEA.R111UT lUO—55re5LL�MPaEs=ore _�eW�. aE„F > mY PRWECT �WUx,TH e21143 DocuSign Envelope ILL C7FD3033-E7B3-49DO-AD8D-B4029C332D38 B LEGEND WILUAMSMo M2 —i CONTROL POWER FROM GENERATOR —D— DIESEL FUEL FINE �u 11 LEVELJNDWOR F-1 1"DIESEL SUPPLY AA ATMOSPHERIC VENT n fi Oj V-• 1 DIESFL RETURN EV (2'ABOVE FINISHED GE) LD LEAI(DETECTOR EN EMERGENC'VEM o TONE ca FILL/SPILL CONTAINMENT BUCKET _ DOUBLE WALL CONCRETE L LEVEL ND CALOR Z ocscL fun - TANK Wn T cauDN GENERAL NGTES LOCKABLE FILL/SPILL W ENERATOR CONTAINMENT BUCKETS 1.uL oaa avrvv�o eE AnM Asf swEouW ao Iii aaE. GLVAI PPNo 5Nm uWWEo.PPM PPNG mIIIW Wnx pNM W rs sa[crm.REUL 11CCI.1 reRurery aarvv. E Z TANK TK 25UNA11 NIES 11 H 1 UNIFJA,A„51,5. 0 gds 'RETAIL 111L TTM A=IS SOL TOFRU L01E1 i g i 2 FUELwTwANK RISER 1 FUEL STORAGE TANK AREA PLAN KEYED NOTES SHALL IN LACK AS m.,r.3/e"=T—o O APPDA DE SEL PPING FALL WRHASTNEW N D�SBSIEELAUNARURETEPNOR Wn SPECFED ROUTE NEW PIPING ABOVE GRADE, a� VI TANK SCHEDULE 1/4^.�AsNNLEss STEEL Bo LI a❑ANcuoRsSMNMIM SIPPom U 4fff MARK MH(E LOCATION SERVICE CAPACITY WEIGIR REMARKS O DcamRncTDR TO ISTANCE OF 4 DaaRD NATE c NNECT ONs T TH cENERATDR PEre OR j �� )�� ' ruwurACTueees NSRucT ONs FELD eowE AND SIPPom PPNG WITHIN III d GENERATOR ENcrosuRE, o �II p X E� j j ! PROVIDE ALUMINUM STAR PLATFORM ACCESS FOP FUELING OF TANK U `o PROVIDE AM SPHONN/SIUTOFF HALVE NORMALLYCLOSED. PROVIDE MODEL X 710G100 IV AS By MOAD b OR APPROVED D pki, I 'S EOUAL.A PROVIDE CONTROL POWER TYPE AS REALIZE COORDINATE NATE WITH p � !GENE R OR INSTALLTION � r, �7 rt� F FTNGIwPTO BREMOVED,NEW CIRCULAR STARE TO BE K$ V INSTALLED WET WALL.SEE CGIL NEE mom o — BEMOAE AND REPINE EXISTING E AUST FAN LOCATED IN LOWER LEVEL.SEE USF 2]ASNB1 OOFEp1 NO. S TPN S All PROV DEEL 5000 CFM W 0.50 N. Itis WG C N EN TO ATR uw OLATOres AND'So TAT EPucE DUCTWOf SUPCMULDARLO AN BE A AS OUOREDC AS SUPPED FOR NEW FML PROVIDE NEW ACEL A Z 0 sUPPORs AN ANCROR2RV A WIT / % I STARTER SWITCH N A NEMA 4X STAINLESS SIECL ENCLOSURc PROV DCO �// WRH AwM NOM N�GUARD AND ALUM NOM OVER. Pre DE WITH ti o N / NDusWeu EPoxv com Nc Low cRAv,oN FAN AND AnACHED DvQ N W N nrE EGFSP CKNEREs TANTS CONSTRUCLION ML STMwnIPreovloE wnHssPAaus'a ocn So r ME MODIFY ExsTNO EXHAUST FAN DUCTWORK 10 ALLOW INSTALLATION OF NEW Q SSHuRMo ALONG DGO roE oTO a IEIN AATI CARRI.1 o LP LoAR[W DR � U 3 STARCASE SUPPORT MODFEDRDUCIWORK AS REFIRED. NEWHPIMP,CLIFTINGSYSTEM,AND W z /r. MODIFICATION,WSUBMITE 10 BE E R IORSHOP DRAWNOSFORPROPOSEDCREOROUTE Q = STAR CASE.DUCT SIZES,AND SUPPORT METHOD AROUND AND ABOVE NEW w U CA, AA Q ( \ IC J09 N0.26tZ5,BZ.00 61iH CA�Gft JOB ATl 35&5 ................:'.�„................... EPL—� �21 o sere 54 AT 54 f0 GRAPHIC SCALES oRB DRawrNc ua. 3 ';IENTILATION FAN S7L-222 e- = C111 PROJECT DocuSign Envelope ID'.C]FD3033-E]B3-29DO-AD8DB4029C332D38 CLAY COP- y FLASH B COUNTER FLASH BEE SECTION X'SHY,28 V F'S -"CANT STH[v WER GA,5tEf SGL h L. '� . ,•.._ ._ �'',� EL bEC r G I CA.Fl,00.0 P FACih Y E#0 WOLFING @AWS \\ "...EEC NLOCu z 17 �Zv Wm '�-. P•'*ze^rtilWtxxSl<x1[n`oarrr / ? sup " 4—dAfY J(PfiA'! W COHELWERC �Id"s x5"L.A0 CONI STODS 9'A'�d'OTkB 3" Z .gN Cc' MEMBRANE W 9 - mT re •xr l � B a � s P IIIIIIAI,Y SECTION FACING WEST `eo LAITE �'a U d U PARAPET WALL DETAIL x wl arye�Nxx+ eAAa {}�. s r. s'w.5�.4i G rn 1mwxF.R q - 9(Ak�EK��44 5 ar 9 6AMmtnfApd P N AVf tlEYA4 Na j, 1 [R} 41PLYR O 4� 6L Q Q Q "sNee°rLo.. Qz 94Mk efnf.N pWTWpp LONliY41W Q 3 u A. a, -r A Iv •• �N ' Iill A. p EXISTING ROOF SECTION A ROOFING DETAIL S-E I EXISTING ROOF SECTION B I—N,Ts, SiPL NTs. o SHEE,26Cpf 54 ((�I�II(57 .�)• roreoGrenwmcNo _. STL-222